Musicians Guide

(includes PC3, PC3X, PC361, and X-Pro)

KurzweilisaregisteredtrademarkofYoungChangCo.,Ltd.2011Allrightsreserved.YoungChang,Kurzweil,V.A.S.T.,PC3, KDFX,Pitcher,andLaserVerb,KSP8,K2661,K2600,K2500,andK2000aretrademarksofYoungChangCo.,Ltd.Allother productsandbrandnamesaretrademarksorregisteredtrademarksoftheirrespectivecompanies.Productfeaturesandspecificationsare subjecttochangewithoutnotice. Youmaylegallyprintuptotwo(2)copiesofthisdocumentforpersonaluse.Commercialuseofanycopiesofthisdocument isprohibited.YoungChangCo.retainsownershipofallintellectualpropertyrepresentedbythisdocument.

910511-002 V2 May 2011

CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL

The lightning flash with the arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.

IMPORTANT SAFETY & INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS
WARNING: When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following: 1. Read all of the Safety and Installation Instructions and Explanation of Graphic Symbols before using the product. 2. This product must be grounded. If it should malfunction or break down, grounding provides a path of least resistance for electric current to reduce the risk of electric shock. This product is equipped with a power supply cord having an equipment-grounding conductor and a grounding plug. The plug must be plugged into an appropriate outlet which is properly installed and grounded in accordance with all local codes and ordinances. DANGER: Improper connection of the equipment-grounding conductor can result in a risk of electric shock. Do not modify the plug provided with the product - if it will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician. Do not use an adaptor which defeats the function of the equipment-grounding conductor. If you are in doubt as to whether the product is properly grounded, check with a qualified serviceman or electrician. 3. WARNING: This product is equipped with an AC input voltage selector. The voltage selector has been factory set for the mains supply voltage in the country where this unit was sold. Changing the voltage selector may require the use of a different power supply cord or attachment plug, or both. To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, refer servicing to qualified maintenance personnel. 4. Do not use this product near water - for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, or the like. 5. This product should only be used with a stand or cart that is recommended by the manufacturer. 6. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and speakers or headphones, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. 7. 8. 9. 10. The product should be located so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation. The product should be located away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, or other products that produce heat. The product should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on the product. This product may be equipped with a polarized line plug (one blade wider than the other). This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact an electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the plug. The power supply cord of the product should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time. When unplugging the power supply cord, do not pull on the cord, but grasp it by the plug. Care should be taken so that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through openings. The product should be serviced by qualified service personnel when: A. The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the product; C. The product has been exposed to rain; D. The product does not appear to be operating normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; E. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged. Do not attempt to service the product beyond that described in the user maintenance instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. WARNING: Do not place objects on the products power supply cord, or place the product in a position where anyone could trip over, walk on, or roll anything over cords of any type. Do not allow the product to rest on or be installed over cords of any type. Improper installations of this type create the possibility of a fire hazard and/or personal injury.

11.

12. 13.

14.

15.

RADIO AND TELEVISION INTERFERENCE

WARNING: Changes or modifications to this instrument not expressly approved by Young Chang could void your authority to operate the instrument. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or other equipment use only high quality shielded cables. NOTE: This instrument has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This instrument generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this instrument does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the instrument off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the instrument and the receiver. Connect the instrument into an outlet on a circuit other than the one to which the receiver is connected. If necessary consult your dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. NOTICE This apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. AVIS Le present appareil numerique nemet pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de la class B prescrites dans le Reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des Communications du Canada.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

ii

Important Safety Instructions

Readtheseinstructions Keeptheseinstructions. Heedallwarnings. Followallinstructions. Donotusethisapparatusnearwater. Cleanonlywithdrycloth. Donotblockanyoftheventilationopenings.Installinaccordancewiththemanufacturers instructions. 8) Donotinstallnearanyheatsourcessuchasradiators,heatregisters,stoves,orotherappara tus(includingamplifiers)thatproduceheat. 9) Donotdefeatthesafetypurposeofthepolarizedorgroundingtypeplug.Apolarizedplug hastwobladeswithonewiderthantheother.Agroundingtypeplughastwobladesanda thirdgroundingprong.Thewidebladeorthethirdprongareprovidedforyoursafety.Ifthe providedplugdoesnotfitintoyouroutlet,consultanelectricianforreplacementoftheobso leteoutlet. 10) Protectthepowercordfrombeingwalkedonorpinched,particularlyatplugs,convenience receptacles,andthepointwheretheyexitfromtheapparatus. 11) Onlyuseattachments/accessoriesspecifiedbythemanufacturer. 12) Useonlywithacart,stand,tripod,bracket,ortablespecifiedbythemanu facturer,orsoldwiththeapparatus.Whenacartisused,usecautionwhen movingthecart/apparatuscombinationtoavoidinjuryfromtipover. 13) Unplugthisapparatusduringlightningstormsorwhenunusedforlong periodsoftime. 14) CAUTION:Dangerofexplosionifbatteryisincorrectlyreplaced.Replaceonlywiththesame orequivalenttype(CR2032). 15) Referallservicingtoqualifiedservicepersonnel.Servicingisrequiredwhentheapparatus hasbeendamagedinanyway,suchaspowersupplycordorplugisdamaged,liquidhas beenspilledorobjectshavefallenintotheapparatus,theapparatushasbeenexposedtorain ormoisture,doesnotoperatenormally,orhasbeendropped. WarningToreducetheriskoffireorelectricshock,donotexposethisapparatustorainormois ture.Donotexposethisequipmenttodrippingorsplashingandensurethatnoobjectsfilledwith liquids,suchasvases,areplacedontheequipment. TocompletelydisconnectthisequipmentfromtheACMains,disconnectthepowersupplycord plugfromtheACreceptacle. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7)

iii

Kurzweil International Contacts

ContacttheKurzweilofficelistedbelowtolocateyourlocalKurzweilrepresentative.

AmericanMusic&Sound 22020ClarendonSt,Suite305 WoodlandHills,CA91367 Phone:+1(800)4312609 Fax:+1(818)5970411 Email:info@americanmusicandsound.com

YoungChangCo.,Ltd. 9thFloor,Bldg102,IPark, JeongjaDong,BundangGu,SeongnamSi,GyeonggiDo 463811SouthKorea Phone:+82(31)7867986~7 Fax:+82(31)7852701

www.ycpiano.co.kr www.youngchang.com www.kurzweil.com

TECHNICALSUPPORT Email:support@kurzweil.com

iv

Table Of Contents
KurzweilInternationalContacts......................................................................................................................................iv

Chapter 1

Introduction

KeepingCurrent ..............................................................................................................................................................11 OverviewofthePC3 .......................................................................................................................................................12 HowthePC3Works ........................................................................................................................................................12 VASTSynthesis ................................................................................................................................................................13 KB3ToneWheelEmulation ...........................................................................................................................................13 VA1Programs .................................................................................................................................................................13 HowtoUseThisManual ................................................................................................................................................14 DoIHaveEverything?....................................................................................................................................................14 BootLoader.......................................................................................................................................................................14 Battery................................................................................................................................................................................14 Options ..............................................................................................................................................................................15 SoundROMExpansionCard..................................................................................................................................15 Pedals..........................................................................................................................................................................15 RibbonController .....................................................................................................................................................15 BreathController ......................................................................................................................................................15

Chapter 2

Startup

MakeConnections ...........................................................................................................................................................21 MakeMusic.......................................................................................................................................................................21 StartuptheDetails ........................................................................................................................................................22 BeforeYouStart... .....................................................................................................................................................22 ConnectingthePowerCable(LineCord) .............................................................................................................22 ConnectingAudioCables........................................................................................................................................22 ConnectingMIDI ......................................................................................................................................................23 Pedals..........................................................................................................................................................................24 Breath..........................................................................................................................................................................24 Ribbon ........................................................................................................................................................................25 SwitchingOnthePower ..........................................................................................................................................25 xDCards ....................................................................................................................................................................26 USBPort .....................................................................................................................................................................26 SettingtheClock .......................................................................................................................................................26 PC3Programs...................................................................................................................................................................27 SelectingPrograms ...................................................................................................................................................27 EasyAudition............................................................................................................................................................27 ProgramModeDisplay ...........................................................................................................................................27 VASTPrograms.........................................................................................................................................................28 KB3Programs............................................................................................................................................................28 Setups ................................................................................................................................................................................29 QuickAccess.....................................................................................................................................................................29 TheOtherModes ...........................................................................................................................................................210 SoftwareUpgrades ........................................................................................................................................................210

TOC-i

Chapter 3

User Interface Basics

ModeSelection .................................................................................................................................................................31 ModeButtons ...................................................................................................................................................................32 BankButtons.....................................................................................................................................................................32 Sliders ................................................................................................................................................................................33 ProgramandCategoryButtons .....................................................................................................................................34 Pickingfavorites .......................................................................................................................................................34 PitchWheelandModWheel .........................................................................................................................................35 Navigation ........................................................................................................................................................................36 TheDisplay................................................................................................................................................................36 Pages ...........................................................................................................................................................................36 TheTopLine..............................................................................................................................................................36 TheBottomLine........................................................................................................................................................36 TheSoftButtons........................................................................................................................................................37 TheCursorButtons ..................................................................................................................................................37 TheChan/LayerButtons..........................................................................................................................................37 TheEditButton .........................................................................................................................................................38 TheExitButton .........................................................................................................................................................38 DataEntry .........................................................................................................................................................................39 TheAlphaWheel ......................................................................................................................................................39 ThePlus/MinusButtons ..........................................................................................................................................39 TheAlphanumericPad ............................................................................................................................................39 DoubleButtonPresses ...........................................................................................................................................310 IntuitiveDataEntry.......................................................................................................................................................311 ChangingtheCurrentLayerinMultiLayerPrograms ....................................................................................311 Search...............................................................................................................................................................................312 QuickSongRecordingandPlayback..........................................................................................................................312

Chapter 4

The Operating Modes

WhattheModesAre .......................................................................................................................................................41 SelectingModes ...............................................................................................................................................................41 FindingSquareOne..................................................................................................................................................42 UsingtheModes ..............................................................................................................................................................42 ProgramMode ..........................................................................................................................................................42 SetupMode................................................................................................................................................................42 QuickAccessMode ..................................................................................................................................................43 EffectsMode ..............................................................................................................................................................43 MIDIMode ................................................................................................................................................................43 MasterMode .............................................................................................................................................................43 SongMode .................................................................................................................................................................43 StorageMode ............................................................................................................................................................43

Chapter 5

Editing Conventions

IntroductiontoEditing ...................................................................................................................................................51 WhatsanObject?......................................................................................................................................................51 ObjectTypeandID ..........................................................................................................................................................52 SavingandNaming.........................................................................................................................................................53 ROMObjects .............................................................................................................................................................54 MemoryObjects ........................................................................................................................................................54

TOC-ii

KeyboardNaming ....................................................................................................................................................55 DeletingObjects ...............................................................................................................................................................56 DependentObjects ...................................................................................................................................................56 SavingandLoadingFilesStorageMode...................................................................................................................56 SpecialButtonFunctions ................................................................................................................................................57

Chapter 6

Program Mode

TheProgramModePage ................................................................................................................................................61 SelectingPrograms ...................................................................................................................................................61 TheSoftButtonsinProgramMode .......................................................................................................................62 TheInfoBox...............................................................................................................................................................62 ControllersAssignmentsForFactoryROMPrograms .......................................................................................62 SavingControllerSettingsinProgramMode ......................................................................................................63 TheArpeggiatorInProgramMode .......................................................................................................................63 MIDIChannels ..........................................................................................................................................................63 VASTandKB3Programs................................................................................................................................................64 VASTProgramStructure ................................................................................................................................................64 KB3ProgramStructure ...................................................................................................................................................66 KB3Mode ..................................................................................................................................................................66 KB3EffectsAndRealtimeControls......................................................................................................................66 MIDIControlofKB3Programs..............................................................................................................................68 ControlSetup....................................................................................................................................................................69 ControlSetupOverview..........................................................................................................................................69 ControlSetupAdvancedFeatures .......................................................................................................................610 SelectingAndEditingTheControlSetup...........................................................................................................610 EditingVASTPrograms................................................................................................................................................612 TheSoftButtonsintheProgramEditor ..............................................................................................................612 TheMODEButtonsintheProgramEditor.........................................................................................................613 AssigningProgramParameterstoControlSources ..........................................................................................613 TheKEYMAPPage........................................................................................................................................................614 Keymap ....................................................................................................................................................................614 Transpose(Xpose)...................................................................................................................................................614 KeyTracking(KeyTrk) ...........................................................................................................................................614 VelocityTracking(VelTrk) .....................................................................................................................................615 Method(AltMethod) ..............................................................................................................................................615 Stereo ........................................................................................................................................................................615 TimbreShift .............................................................................................................................................................616 PlaybackMode........................................................................................................................................................616 AlternativeController(AltControl) .....................................................................................................................616 AlternativeSwitch(AltControlandAltMethod) ...............................................................................................616 TheLAYERPage ............................................................................................................................................................617 LowKey(LoKey)....................................................................................................................................................618 HighKey(HiKey)...................................................................................................................................................618 LowVelocity(LoVel)..............................................................................................................................................618 HighVelocity(HiVel).............................................................................................................................................618 PitchBendMode(Bend)........................................................................................................................................618 Trigger(Trig) ...........................................................................................................................................................618 DelayControl(DlyCtl)...........................................................................................................................................618 MinimumDelay(MinDly),MaximumDelay(MaxDly) ..................................................................................619 Enable .......................................................................................................................................................................619

TOC-iii

EnableSense(S) ......................................................................................................................................................619 Opaque .....................................................................................................................................................................620 SustainPedal(SusPdl) ...........................................................................................................................................620 SostenutoPedal(SosPdl) .......................................................................................................................................620 FreezePedal(FrzPdl) .............................................................................................................................................620 IgnoreRelease(IgnRel) ..........................................................................................................................................620 HoldThroughAttack(ThrAtt) .............................................................................................................................621 HoldUntilDecay(TilDec).....................................................................................................................................621 ThePITCHPage.............................................................................................................................................................621 TheAMPPage................................................................................................................................................................621 TheAlgorithm(ALG)Page ..........................................................................................................................................622 AlgorithmBasics.....................................................................................................................................................623 CommonDSPControlParameters ......................................................................................................................624 AltInputforAlgorithms(CascadeMode)..........................................................................................................627 DynamicVAST........................................................................................................................................................628 TheDSPControl(DSPCTL)Page ................................................................................................................................629 TheDSPModulation(DSPMOD)Page ......................................................................................................................630 TheOUTPUTPage ........................................................................................................................................................631 Pan ............................................................................................................................................................................632 PanMode .................................................................................................................................................................632 Output:Pan,Gain,andMode...............................................................................................................................633 PanTable ..................................................................................................................................................................633 CrossfadeandCrossfadeSense(XFadeSense) ...................................................................................................633 DrumRemap ...........................................................................................................................................................633 ExclusiveZoneMap ...............................................................................................................................................634 TheCOMMONPage .....................................................................................................................................................635 PitchBendRangeUpandDown..........................................................................................................................635 Monophonic ............................................................................................................................................................635 LegatoPlay ..............................................................................................................................................................636 Portamento ..............................................................................................................................................................636 PortamentoRate......................................................................................................................................................636 AttackPortamento..................................................................................................................................................636 MonoSampleXFade ..............................................................................................................................................637 Globals......................................................................................................................................................................637 Output:Gain,Pan,andPanMode .......................................................................................................................637 DemoSong...............................................................................................................................................................637 TheLFOPage .................................................................................................................................................................638 MinimumRate ........................................................................................................................................................639 MaximumRate........................................................................................................................................................639 RateControl.............................................................................................................................................................639 LFOShape................................................................................................................................................................639 LFOPhase ................................................................................................................................................................639 TheASRPage .................................................................................................................................................................640 Trigger ......................................................................................................................................................................640 Mode.........................................................................................................................................................................640 Delay.........................................................................................................................................................................641 Attack .......................................................................................................................................................................641 Release......................................................................................................................................................................641 TheFunction(FUN)Page .............................................................................................................................................641 TheAmplitudeEnvelope(AMPENV)Page...............................................................................................................642 AttackSegmentTimes ...........................................................................................................................................643

TOC-iv

AttackSegmentLevels...........................................................................................................................................643 DecaySegment........................................................................................................................................................643 ReleaseSegments....................................................................................................................................................643 LoopType ................................................................................................................................................................644 NumberofLoops....................................................................................................................................................644 TheEnvelope2(ENV2)andEnvelope3(ENV3)Pages ...........................................................................................644 TheEnvelopeControl(ENVCTL)Page ......................................................................................................................645 Adjust .......................................................................................................................................................................646 KeyTracking............................................................................................................................................................646 VelocityTracking ....................................................................................................................................................646 Source,Depth ..........................................................................................................................................................646 Impact.......................................................................................................................................................................647 TheProgramFX(PROGFX)Page ................................................................................................................................647 Insert .........................................................................................................................................................................647 Aux1,Aux2 ............................................................................................................................................................647 Output ......................................................................................................................................................................648 AuxiliarySendParameters....................................................................................................................................648 Aux1Mod,Aux2Mod ...........................................................................................................................................649 TheLayerFX(LYR_FX)Page .......................................................................................................................................649 TheControllers(CTLS)Page........................................................................................................................................650 INFO ................................................................................................................................................................................651 FunctionSoftButtons ....................................................................................................................................................651 SetControllers(SetCtl)...........................................................................................................................................652 NewLayer(NewLyr) .............................................................................................................................................652 DuplicateLayer(DupLyr) .....................................................................................................................................652 ImportLayer(ImpLyr)...........................................................................................................................................652 DeleteLayer(DelLyr).............................................................................................................................................652 Name,Save,Delete.................................................................................................................................................652 EditingVASTProgramsWithKVAOscillators.........................................................................................................653 BasicUseofKVAOscillators ................................................................................................................................653 SettingKVAOscillatorType .................................................................................................................................654 AdvancedUseOfKVAOscillators ......................................................................................................................655 EditingKB3Programs...................................................................................................................................................659 KB3Editor:TheToneWheels(TONEWL)Page........................................................................................................659 UpperToneWheelKeymap..................................................................................................................................659 UpperVolumeAdjust ............................................................................................................................................660 NumberofToneWheels ........................................................................................................................................660 OrganMap...............................................................................................................................................................660 WheelVolumeMap................................................................................................................................................660 Globals......................................................................................................................................................................660 LowerTranspose/UpperTranspose ...................................................................................................................660 KB3Editor:TheDrawbars(DRAWBR)Page.............................................................................................................661 Mode.........................................................................................................................................................................661 Steps..........................................................................................................................................................................661 Volume .....................................................................................................................................................................661 Tune ..........................................................................................................................................................................661 KB3Editor:TheSetDrawbars(SetDBR)SoftButton ...............................................................................................662 KB3Editor:ThePITCHPage .......................................................................................................................................662 KB3Editor:TheAMPPage ..........................................................................................................................................662 KB3Editor:ThePERC1Page .......................................................................................................................................663 Percussion ................................................................................................................................................................663

TOC-v

Volume .....................................................................................................................................................................663 Decay ........................................................................................................................................................................663 Harmonic .................................................................................................................................................................664 VelTrack....................................................................................................................................................................664 LowHarm.................................................................................................................................................................664 HighHarm................................................................................................................................................................664 StealBar.....................................................................................................................................................................664 KB3Editor:ThePERC2Page .......................................................................................................................................664 PercLevel,DecayTime,OrgLevel .........................................................................................................................665 KB3Editor:TheKEYCLKPage ...................................................................................................................................665 KeyClick...................................................................................................................................................................665 Volume .....................................................................................................................................................................665 Decay ........................................................................................................................................................................666 VelTrk .......................................................................................................................................................................666 Pitch ..........................................................................................................................................................................666 Random ....................................................................................................................................................................666 ReTrigThresh ...........................................................................................................................................................666 NoteAttack..............................................................................................................................................................666 NoteRelease ............................................................................................................................................................666 KB3Editor:TheMISCPage..........................................................................................................................................667 PreampResp.............................................................................................................................................................667 Leakage ....................................................................................................................................................................667 LeakMode ................................................................................................................................................................668 SpeedCtl ...................................................................................................................................................................668 VibChorCtl...............................................................................................................................................................668 VibChorSel...............................................................................................................................................................668 VolAdjust .................................................................................................................................................................668 BendRngUp,BendRngDn .....................................................................................................................................668 Sustain ......................................................................................................................................................................668 Sostenuto..................................................................................................................................................................668 LesliePedal ...............................................................................................................................................................668 KB3Editor:TheEQPage ..............................................................................................................................................669 KB3Editor:TheOUTPUTPage ...................................................................................................................................670 ExpPedal .................................................................................................................................................................670 KB3Editor:TheProgramFX(PROGFX)Page ..........................................................................................................670 KB3Editor:TheLFO,ASR,andFUNPages..............................................................................................................670 KB3ProgrammingTips ................................................................................................................................................671

Chapter 7

Setup Mode

ZonestatusLEDsinSetupMode...........................................................................................................................72 SoloingaZone...........................................................................................................................................................73 TheSetupEditor ..............................................................................................................................................................73 TheChannel/Program(CH/PROG)Page .....................................................................................................................74 Program......................................................................................................................................................................74 Destination.................................................................................................................................................................75 Channel ......................................................................................................................................................................75 MidiBank....................................................................................................................................................................75 MidiProg ....................................................................................................................................................................76 Status ..........................................................................................................................................................................76 Out ..............................................................................................................................................................................76

TOC-vi

InputChannel ...........................................................................................................................................................76 MIDIBankMode(BankMode) ...............................................................................................................................77 EntryProgramChange(EntryProgChg)...............................................................................................................78 Arpeggiator ...............................................................................................................................................................78 TheKey/Velocity(KEYVEL)Page ................................................................................................................................79 LowKey(LoKey),HighKey(HiKey) .................................................................................................................710 Transpose .................................................................................................................................................................710 NoteMap .................................................................................................................................................................710 VelocityScale(VelScale) ........................................................................................................................................711 VelocityOffset .........................................................................................................................................................712 VelocityCurve(VelCurve).....................................................................................................................................714 LowVelocity(LoVel),HighVelocity(HiVel).......................................................................................................716 ThePan/Volume(PAN/VOL)Page .............................................................................................................................717 EntryVolume,ExitVolume...................................................................................................................................717 EntryPan,ExitPan .................................................................................................................................................717 TheBENDPage..............................................................................................................................................................718 BendRange(Semitones)andBendRange(Cents):UpandDown .................................................................718 AuxBend1UpandAuxBend1Down ..............................................................................................................719 AuxBend2Range ..................................................................................................................................................719 Controllers ......................................................................................................................................................................719 ContinuousControllers .........................................................................................................................................720 SwitchControllers ..................................................................................................................................................721 TheControllerDestinationList ............................................................................................................................721 ShiftKeyNumber,ShiftKey(ShKeyNum,ShiftKey) .......................................................................................726 ContinuousControllerParameters ......................................................................................................................729 SwitchControllerParameters ...............................................................................................................................730 TheWHEELPage...........................................................................................................................................................732 TheSLIDERandSLID2Pages......................................................................................................................................733 TheContinuousControlPedal(CPEDAL)Page .......................................................................................................734 ThePressure(PRESS)Page...........................................................................................................................................735 TheFootswitchPages(FTSW1,FTSW2,FTSW3) ...................................................................................................736 TheArpeggiatorSwitch(ARPSW)Page ...................................................................................................................737 TheSWITCHPage .........................................................................................................................................................738 TheRIBBONPage..........................................................................................................................................................739 TheRibbonConfiguration(RIBCFG)Page ................................................................................................................740 RibbonConfiguration ............................................................................................................................................740 PositionMode(PosMode) .....................................................................................................................................741 Spring .......................................................................................................................................................................741 Center .......................................................................................................................................................................741 TheARPEGGIATOR&ARPEGGIATOR2(ARP1,ARP2)Pages ...........................................................................742 TheARPEGGIATORPage.....................................................................................................................................742 TheARPEGGIATOR2Page..................................................................................................................................749 RealtimeControlofArpeggiatorParameters ...................................................................................................753 Riffs ..................................................................................................................................................................................755 TheRIFF1Page .......................................................................................................................................................755 TheRIFF2Page .......................................................................................................................................................758 RealtimeControlofRiffParameters...................................................................................................................763 TheFXPages:FX,AUX1,AUX2,andMASTEREFFECTS......................................................................................764 TheProgrammableSwitchPages:SWPRG1toSWPRG8 ........................................................................................764 TheCOMMONPage .....................................................................................................................................................765 Tempo.......................................................................................................................................................................765

TOC-vii

ClockSource ............................................................................................................................................................765 AuxFXChannel......................................................................................................................................................765 KB3Channel............................................................................................................................................................766 Mutes ........................................................................................................................................................................766 ArpeggiatorGlobal(ArpGlobal) ..........................................................................................................................766 TRIGGERKEYS(KEYTRG)..........................................................................................................................................767 TheUtilitySoftButtons.................................................................................................................................................768 Name ........................................................................................................................................................................768 Save...........................................................................................................................................................................768 Delete........................................................................................................................................................................768 NewZone(NewZn) ...............................................................................................................................................768 DuplicateZone(DupZn) .......................................................................................................................................768 ImportZone(ImpZn).............................................................................................................................................768 DeleteZone(DelZn)...............................................................................................................................................768 RecordingASetupToSongMode ..............................................................................................................................769

Chapter 8

Quick Access Mode

SoftButtonsInQuickAccessMode.......................................................................................................................82 TheQAEditor ..................................................................................................................................................................82

Chapter 9

Effects and Effect Mode

EffectsOverview ..............................................................................................................................................................91 InsertEffects ..............................................................................................................................................................91 AuxEffects.................................................................................................................................................................91 MasterEffects ............................................................................................................................................................92 Chains.........................................................................................................................................................................92 SignalFlow ................................................................................................................................................................92 DSPUnitsManageandDistributeProcessorPowerforEffects......................................................................93 AuxOverride.............................................................................................................................................................93 EffectModeandtheEffectsPages.................................................................................................................................94 TheEffectsEnablePage ............................................................................................................................................94 TheAux1OverrideandAux2OverridePages ..................................................................................................95 TheMasterEffectsPage...........................................................................................................................................98 TheChainEditor..............................................................................................................................................................99 TheMAINPage ........................................................................................................................................................99 TheMODPages ......................................................................................................................................................910 FXLFO,FXASR,andFXFUNpages .....................................................................................................................911 INFO .........................................................................................................................................................................911 EffectsParameters..........................................................................................................................................................912 GeneralParameters ................................................................................................................................................912 Reverbs .....................................................................................................................................................................913 Delays .......................................................................................................................................................................914 Equalizers(EQ) .......................................................................................................................................................915 Compressors,Expanders,andGates ...................................................................................................................916 Chorus ......................................................................................................................................................................918 Flanger......................................................................................................................................................................919 Quantize...................................................................................................................................................................919 LaserVerb .................................................................................................................................................................919 Filters ........................................................................................................................................................................920

TOC-viii

Distortion .................................................................................................................................................................921 RotatingSpeakers ...................................................................................................................................................922 Vibrato/Chorus........................................................................................................................................................923 TremoloandAutoPan ............................................................................................................................................924 Pitcher.......................................................................................................................................................................925 RingModulation.....................................................................................................................................................925 StereoSimulation....................................................................................................................................................925

Chapter 10 MIDI Mode

TheTRANSMITPage ....................................................................................................................................................101 ControlSetup ..........................................................................................................................................................102 Destination...............................................................................................................................................................102 Channel ....................................................................................................................................................................102 Transpose .................................................................................................................................................................102 VelocityMap(Transmit) ........................................................................................................................................103 PressureMap(Transmit) .......................................................................................................................................104 ProgramChange(ProgChang) .............................................................................................................................104 ChangeSetups(ChgSetups)..................................................................................................................................105 TheRECEIVEPage ........................................................................................................................................................105 BasicChannel ..........................................................................................................................................................106 MIDIReceiveMode(MIDIMode) .......................................................................................................................106 AllNotesOff ...........................................................................................................................................................106 ProgramChangeMode(PrgChgMode) ..............................................................................................................106 VelocityMap(Receive) ..........................................................................................................................................107 PressureMap(Receive) .........................................................................................................................................108 SystemExclusiveID(SysExID) ............................................................................................................................108 BankSelect ...............................................................................................................................................................109 LocalKeyboardChannel(LocalKbdCh) .............................................................................................................109 TheChannelsPage.......................................................................................................................................................1013 Enable .....................................................................................................................................................................1013 Program..................................................................................................................................................................1013 Pan ..........................................................................................................................................................................1014 Volume ...................................................................................................................................................................1014 ProgramLock,PanLock,VolumeLock ............................................................................................................1014 ProgramChangeFormats...........................................................................................................................................1015 ExtendedProgramChanges ...............................................................................................................................1015 QAccess ..................................................................................................................................................................1016 TheSoftButtonsinMIDIMode.................................................................................................................................1018 ProgramChange(PrgChg)..................................................................................................................................1018 ResetChannels(RsetCh)......................................................................................................................................1018 Panic........................................................................................................................................................................1018

Chapter 11 Master Mode

MAIN...............................................................................................................................................................................111 Tune ..........................................................................................................................................................................112 Transpose .................................................................................................................................................................112 FXMode...................................................................................................................................................................112 DrumRemap ...........................................................................................................................................................112 IDEntry....................................................................................................................................................................112

TOC-ix

SetupControllers(SetupCtls) ...............................................................................................................................112 MasterTableLock(MasterLock) .........................................................................................................................113 DemoButton ...........................................................................................................................................................113 ButtonsMode(Buttons).........................................................................................................................................113 Display .....................................................................................................................................................................113 MAPS...............................................................................................................................................................................114 VelocityMap(Master)............................................................................................................................................114 PressureMap(Master)...........................................................................................................................................116 Intonation.................................................................................................................................................................117 KeyActionMap ......................................................................................................................................................118 IntonationKey(Int.Key)........................................................................................................................................118 DefaultSequence ....................................................................................................................................................119 OUTPUT..........................................................................................................................................................................119 OutputClock ...........................................................................................................................................................119 DigitalOutputVolume(Dig.outvolume)..........................................................................................................119 DigitalOutput(Dig.Out) ......................................................................................................................................119 AuxOutPairMode ................................................................................................................................................119 ClockSource ..........................................................................................................................................................1110 TEMPO ..........................................................................................................................................................................1110 GeneralMIDIMode(GMOn,GMOff)....................................................................................................................1111 OBJECT..........................................................................................................................................................................1112 Rename...................................................................................................................................................................1113 Delete......................................................................................................................................................................1113 UTILS(UTILITIES) ......................................................................................................................................................1115 CLOCK ..........................................................................................................................................................................1116 Reset...............................................................................................................................................................................1116 Loader............................................................................................................................................................................1117 About .............................................................................................................................................................................1117 Save ................................................................................................................................................................................1117 PreviewSample(PRVIEW) ........................................................................................................................................1117

Chapter 12 Song Mode and the Song Editor

GettingStartedwiththeSequencer ............................................................................................................................121 WhatisaSequencer?..............................................................................................................................................121 SongMode:TheMAINPage .......................................................................................................................................121 CurrentSong(CurSong) ........................................................................................................................................122 Tempo.......................................................................................................................................................................122 RecordingTrack(RecTrk) ......................................................................................................................................123 Program(Prog) .......................................................................................................................................................123 TrackNumber(Trk:#).............................................................................................................................................123 Volume(Vol)............................................................................................................................................................124 Pan ............................................................................................................................................................................125 Mode.........................................................................................................................................................................126 Location(Locat) ......................................................................................................................................................126 ModeIndicators(+andx): ....................................................................................................................................126 ActivityIndicators ..................................................................................................................................................126 TrackStatusIndicators...........................................................................................................................................127 TrackChannels........................................................................................................................................................127 SoftButtonsontheMAINPage ........................................................................................................................... 127 TheSaveChangesDialog ......................................................................................................................................129

TOC-x

SongMode:TheBIGPage ..........................................................................................................................................1210 TimeIn ...................................................................................................................................................................1211 TimeOut ................................................................................................................................................................1211 SongEnd ................................................................................................................................................................1211 Loop........................................................................................................................................................................1211 RecMode ................................................................................................................................................................1211 Metron ....................................................................................................................................................................1211 SongMode:TheFXPages ..........................................................................................................................................1212 SongMode:TheMIXERPage ....................................................................................................................................1212 Out ..........................................................................................................................................................................1212 TheRec,Play,andStopSoftButtons .................................................................................................................1213 TheKeepSoftButton ...........................................................................................................................................1213 TheDoneSoftButton ...........................................................................................................................................1213 SongMode:TheMETRONOMEPage......................................................................................................................1213 Metronome ............................................................................................................................................................1214 CountOff ................................................................................................................................................................1214 Program..................................................................................................................................................................1214 Channel ..................................................................................................................................................................1214 StrongNote............................................................................................................................................................1214 StrongVel...............................................................................................................................................................1214 SoftNote ................................................................................................................................................................1214 SoftVel ...................................................................................................................................................................1214 TheRec,Play,andStopSoftButtons .................................................................................................................1214 TheDoneSoftButton ...........................................................................................................................................1214 SongMode:TheFilterPages(RECFLTandPLYFLT).............................................................................................1215 Notes.......................................................................................................................................................................1215 LoKey .....................................................................................................................................................................1215 Hi.............................................................................................................................................................................1215 LoVel.......................................................................................................................................................................1216 Hi.............................................................................................................................................................................1216 Controllers .............................................................................................................................................................1216 Controller...............................................................................................................................................................1216 LoVal.......................................................................................................................................................................1216 Hi.............................................................................................................................................................................1216 PitchBend ...............................................................................................................................................................1216 ProgChange ...........................................................................................................................................................1216 MonoPress .............................................................................................................................................................1216 PolyPress ................................................................................................................................................................1216 TheRec,Play,andStopSoftButtons .................................................................................................................1216 TheDoneSoftButton ...........................................................................................................................................1217 SongMode:TheMISCPage .......................................................................................................................................1217 ControlChase........................................................................................................................................................1217 Quant ......................................................................................................................................................................1217 Grid.........................................................................................................................................................................1218 Swing ......................................................................................................................................................................1218 Release....................................................................................................................................................................1218 KeyWait.................................................................................................................................................................1218 SongMode:TheSTATSPage .....................................................................................................................................1218 TheSongEditor............................................................................................................................................................1219 SongEditor:TheCOMMONPage ............................................................................................................................1219 Tempo.....................................................................................................................................................................1220

TOC-xi

TimeSig...................................................................................................................................................................1220 FXTrack .................................................................................................................................................................1220 DrumTrack.............................................................................................................................................................1220 MidiDst ..................................................................................................................................................................1220 SoftButtonsontheCOMMONPage .................................................................................................................1221 SongEditor:TheTRACKPage ..................................................................................................................................1221 CommonParametersforEditSong:TrackFunctions .....................................................................................1222 Region/CriteriaBoxParameters .........................................................................................................................1222 SoftButtonsontheTRACKPage .......................................................................................................................1223 SongEditor:TrackFunctions .....................................................................................................................................1224 Erase .......................................................................................................................................................................1224 Copy .......................................................................................................................................................................1224 Bounce ....................................................................................................................................................................1225 Insert .......................................................................................................................................................................1226 Delete......................................................................................................................................................................1226 Quantize.................................................................................................................................................................1227 Shift.........................................................................................................................................................................1228 Transpose ...............................................................................................................................................................1228 Grab ........................................................................................................................................................................1229 Change ...................................................................................................................................................................1230 Remap.....................................................................................................................................................................1231 SongEditor:TheEVENTPage...................................................................................................................................1231 InitialProgram,Volume,Pan..............................................................................................................................1232 Location..................................................................................................................................................................1232 Bar,Beat,andTick ................................................................................................................................................1232 EventTypeandValue ..........................................................................................................................................1232 SoftButtonsontheEVENTPage .......................................................................................................................1233 TempoTrack ..........................................................................................................................................................1233

Chapter 13 Storage Mode

StorageModePage ........................................................................................................................................................131 UsingxDCards.......................................................................................................................................................132 UsingTheUSBDrive .............................................................................................................................................132 StorageModeCommonFeatures ................................................................................................................................133 Directories................................................................................................................................................................133 Path ...........................................................................................................................................................................133 CommonDialogues................................................................................................................................................133 TheSTOREPage ............................................................................................................................................................135 StoringOverview....................................................................................................................................................135 SelectObjectTypeToStore ...................................................................................................................................136 SelectObjectRangeToStore .................................................................................................................................136 TheStoreAdvancedPage......................................................................................................................................136 TheLOADPage .............................................................................................................................................................138 LoadingIndividualObjectsFromA.PC3OrCompatibleFileType ..............................................................139 LoadingMethods..................................................................................................................................................1310 TheUtilities(UTILS)Page ..........................................................................................................................................1312 SoftButtonsontheUtilitiesPage .......................................................................................................................1312 Export ............................................................................................................................................................................1313 Format ...........................................................................................................................................................................1313

TOC-xii

Chapter 14 Keymap and Sample Editing

TheKeymapEditor .......................................................................................................................................................141 KeymapEditorParameters ...................................................................................................................................143 TheSoftButtonsintheKeymapEditor...............................................................................................................145 SpecialDoubleButtonPressesintheKeymapEditor.......................................................................................146 BuildingaKeymap ........................................................................................................................................................147 EditingSamples .............................................................................................................................................................149 TheMiscellaneous(MISC)Page ........................................................................................................................... 149 TheTRIMPage......................................................................................................................................................1412

Chapter 15 Tutorial: Song Mode

Part1:AssignInstrumentsToTracks ..................................................................................................................152 Part2:SetTheTempo.............................................................................................................................................153 Part3:RecordYourFirstTrack,SaveTheSong .................................................................................................154 Part4:RecordAdditionalTracks..........................................................................................................................157 Part5:FixingMistakes ...........................................................................................................................................158 Part6:AdjustingTheVolumeOfEachInstrument .........................................................................................1510 Part7:LearningMoreAboutSongMode .........................................................................................................1515

Appendix A Specifications
MIDIImplementationChart .........................................................................................................................................A1 Specifications ...................................................................................................................................................................A2

Appendix B PC3 Bootloader

UsingtheBootloaderMenu ................................................................................................................................... B1 UpdatingPC3SoftwareandObjects .................................................................................................................... B2 PC3Diagnostics ....................................................................................................................................................... B3 SystemReset............................................................................................................................................................. B3 FileUtilities............................................................................................................................................................... B3 RestoringthePC3FileSystem ............................................................................................................................... B4

Appendix C Changing PC3 Voltage

Removingthefuseholder ...................................................................................................................................... C1

Appendix D PC3 Objects (V 2)

Programs ..........................................................................................................................................................................D1 Setups .............................................................................................................................................................................D13 EffectChains..................................................................................................................................................................D15 EffectPresetswithAlgorithms ...................................................................................................................................D21 HowtoUseTheseTables......................................................................................................................................D21 Reverbs ....................................................................................................................................................................D21 Delays ......................................................................................................................................................................D25 Chorus .....................................................................................................................................................................D27 Flange ......................................................................................................................................................................D27 Phaser ......................................................................................................................................................................D28 Trem/Panner/Spatial..........................................................................................................................................D29 Rotary ......................................................................................................................................................................D29

TOC-xiii

Distortion ................................................................................................................................................................D30 Dynamics ................................................................................................................................................................D31 EQ/Filters ..............................................................................................................................................................D31 Chorus/Combi......................................................................................................................................................D33 Flange/Combi .......................................................................................................................................................D34 Keymaps.........................................................................................................................................................................D36 Samples ..........................................................................................................................................................................D42 ArpeggiatorShiftPatterns ...........................................................................................................................................D49 ArpeggiatorVelocityPatterns.....................................................................................................................................D51

Appendix E PC3 Legacy File Conversion

ObjectTypesandConversionDetails .......................................................................................................................... E1 KeymapObjects ....................................................................................................................................................... E1 ProgramObjects....................................................................................................................................................... E1 SetupObjects ............................................................................................................................................................ E1

Index

TOC-xiv

Introduction Keeping Current

Chapter 1 Introduction
Greetings.Yournewinstrumentoffersamazingacoustic,electric,andsynthesizersounds, combinedwithadvancedprogrammingfeaturesthatwillletyoucreatealmostanysoundyou canimagine.ThismanualcoversthePC3inits88,76,and61noteconfigurations(PC3x,PC3, andPC361),aswellastheXPro,whichaddsabeautifulcabinetandpowerfulsoundsystemto thepackage.Forthemostpart,anywherewetalkaboutthePC3inthismanualwemeananyof theseinstruments. ThePC3comesloadedwith64MBofROMsounds,poweredbyKurzweilsnewestcustomchip setcuttingedgetechnologythatnobodyelsehas.Inadditiontothegreatsoundsand programmingfeatures,thePC3isfullyequippedwithperformancefeaturesyoulluseatevery gig.Forexample,therearenineconvenientlysituatedslidersforaccuratelyemulatingthe drawbarsonatonewheelorgansuchasaHammondB3.AndthePC3s24dedicatedsound selectbuttons,alongwithitsQuickAccessbankswillletyouinstantlychooseandchange soundswheneveryoulike. IfyouveusedotherKurzweilgear,youllhavenotroublegettingupandrunningquickly.Bear inmind,however,thatthePC3sbeautiesaremorethanskindeep;youllwanttoreadthis manual,aswellasthematerialsatthewww.kurzweil.comwebsitetotakefulladvantageofyour instrument.

Keeping Current
Checkfornewdocumentationandoperatingsystemupgradesbeforeyoustartusingyour instrument.WhennewsoftwareisavailableforthePC3,itwillbepostedatwww.kurzweil.com. YoullusethePC3sBootLoader(describedinthismanual)toupgradeyourinstrumenttouse thenewsoftware. Picturedbelowisthe88keyPC3x.

Arp

SW

1-1

Introduction Overview of the PC3

Overview of the PC3

ThePC3s800+programsincludetheOrchestralandContemporarysoundblocks,GeneralMIDI (GM),StereoTripleStrikePiano,ClassicKeysforrealisticvintageelectricpianosounds,and newStringSections.Multizoneperformancesetupsarealsoprovided;manyofthesesetupsuse notetriggerstoplayfactoryrecordedsongsthatprovidegroovesandarpeggiationthatmake greattemplatesforperformanceorrecording.Anonboardsequencerwithfrontpaneltransport buttonsletsyourecordyourideasanytimeinspirationstrikes.Thissequencer(Songmode)lets youplaybackMIDItype0or1sequences,recordandplaybackyourownsongs,andrecord multitimbralsequencesreceivedviaMIDI. BeforewegetintoexplainingVAST,hereareafewofthefeaturesthatbythemselvesmakethe PC3animpressivestageandstudiomachine.Ithas128voicepolyphonyandisfullymulti timbral,sothatdifferentprogramscanbeplayedoneachMIDIchannel.Theresanonboard digitaleffectsprocessorprovidingmultiplesimultaneouseffects,includingrealtimeeffects control,internallyorviaMIDI.Infact,thePC3offersmoreeffectsprocessingpowerthan KurzweilsmuchlaudedKSP8studioeffectsprocessor. Inadditiontothestandardstereoaudiooutputpair,therearetwoadditionalbalancedanalog outputs,aswellasadigitaloutput.Alloftheoutputsareavailabletoyousimultaneously.For backup,storage,andmovingfiles,theresanxDcardslotonthebackpanelofthePC3.The providedUSBportletsyouconnectthePC3toacomputerforfiletransferandMIDI.

How the PC3 Works

ThePC3integratesthreeMIDIdrivencomponents:aMIDIcontroller(thekeyboard,oran externalMIDIcontroller),asoundengine,andaneffectsprocessorthatemploysthesame effectsusedinKurzweilsKSP8.ThesoundenginerespondstotheMIDIeventsgeneratedby theMIDIcontroller,andturnsthemintosoundsthatareprocessedwithinthevariable architectureofthealgorithmsorbyoscillatorsforKB3programs.Theresultingsoundcanthen beroutedthroughthePC3seffectsandtotheaudiooutputs.

1-2

Introduction VAST Synthesis

VAST Synthesis
ThePC3sVariableArchitectureSynthesisTechnology(V.A.S.T.)letsyoubuildsoundsfrom realisticinstrumentalsamplesandsampledsynthwaveformsthenmodifythenatureofthose soundsthroughawidevarietyofdigitalsignalprocessing(DSP)functions.ThePC3also generatesitsownsynthwaveforms,whichcanbecombinedwiththesamplesorusedontheir own. WhilemanyothersynthesizersmayofferafixedsetofDSPtools(typicallyfiltering,pitch,and amplitudemodulation)thePC3sVariableArchitectureletsyouarrangeacombinationofDSP functionsfromalonglistofchoices.Thefunctionsyouchoosedefinethetypeofsynthesisyou use. EachlayerofeveryprogramhasitsownDSParchitecture,whichwecallanalgorithm.Within eachalgorithm,youcanselectfromavarietyofDSPfunctions.Eachfunctioncanbe independentlycontrolledbyavarietyofsourcesincludingLFOs,ASRs,envelopes,asetof uniqueprogrammablefunctions(FUNs),aswellasanyMIDIcontrolmessage.Themany differentDSPfunctionsandthewealthofindependentcontrolsourcesgiveyouanextremely flexible,trulyvastcollectionoftoolsforsoundcreationandmodification. NewwiththePC3arepowerfuleditingfeatureswecallDynamicV.A.S.T.andCascadeMode. DynamicV.A.S.T.allowsyoutowireyourownalgorithms,combiningdifferentDSP functionsinanyorderyoulike,includingparallelandserialconfigurations. CascadeModeletsyourouteanylayerofaprogramintotheDSPofanyotherlayer.Anyof the32layersofaprogramcangointoanyotherlayer.

Whenyourereadytojumpinandstartcreatingprograms,turntoChapter 6.

KB3 Tone Wheel Emulation

InadditiontoVASTsynthesis,thePC3offersmanyoscillatorbasedprogramsthatgiveyouthe classicsoundoftonewheelorgansliketheHammondB3.KB3mode,aswecallit,iscompletely independentofVAST,andhasitsownsetofeditingprocedures.Ninededicatedslidersonthe PC3sfrontpanelgiveyourealtimedrawbarcontrolovertheseorgansounds.Buttonsabove thesliderscontrolrotatingspeakerspeed,percussion,andotherorganfeatures. ThequickestwaytogettotheKB3programsisbypressingtheKB3button(abovethesliders,to theleftofthescreen).TheblueLEDintheKB3buttonwilllightwhenthecurrentprogramisa KB3program.

VA-1 Programs
TheVA1(VirtualAnalogSynthesizer)programsincludedwiththePC3offerrealistic emulationsofclassicanalogsynthesizers,builtfromKurzweilsuniqueantialiasedDSP generatedoscillators.ThePC3spowershapedoscillatorsletyoutransitionsmoothlyfromone waveformintoanotherinrealtime,withoutusingcrossfades. VA1programsarescatteredthroughoutthePC3.LookforthemintheSynthCategoryandthe ClassicKeysBank.YoullseeKVAOscillatorappearintheKeymapscreenonthelefthand sideofthedisplay.

1-3

Introduction How to Use This Manual

How to Use This Manual

ThismanualdescribeshowtoconnectandpowerupyourPC3,gettingaroundthefrontpanel, andabriefdescriptionoftheoperatingmodes.Forinformationoneditingandadvanced programmingfeatures,refertoadditionalmaterialprovidedontheKurzweilwebsite: www.kurzweil.com ThebestwaytoreadthismanualiswithyourPC3infrontofyou.Bytryingtheexampleswe givetoillustratevariousfunctions,youcangetaquickunderstandingofthebasics,thenmove ontothemoreadvancedfeatures.

Do I Have Everything?
YourPC3shippingcartonshouldincludethefollowinginadditiontoyourinstrument: Powercable Sustainpedal USBcable GettingStartedmanual(thisbook)

Ifyoudonthaveallofthesecomponents,pleasecallyourKurzweil/YoungChangdealer. YoumayalsowanttopurchaseanxDmemorycardforstorageandanxDcardinterfacefor yourcomputer,ifoneisnotbuiltin.ThePC3iscompatiblewithxDcardstypeS(upto512MB) ortypeM+(upto1GB)formattedFAT16.(ThePC3doesNOTsupporttypeMortypeHxD cards.)

Boot Loader
WhenyouneedtoupdatethePC3ssoftwareorrundiagnostictests,youllusetheBootLoader. TobringuptheBootLoader,holddowntheExitbutton(belowthecursorbuttons,totherightof thedisplay)whilepoweringonyourPC3.RefertoAppendix BfordetailsontheBootLoader.

Battery
ThePC3usesaCR2032batterytopoweritsclock.Thebatteryshouldlastfiveyears,anda messagewilltellyouwhenthebatteryneedsreplacing.Theaccesspanelonthebottomofthe PC3(whichyoucaneasilyremovewithascrewdriver)allowsyoutogetatthebatteryfor removalandreplacement. CAUTION:Dangerofexplosionifbatteryisincorrectlyreplaced.Replaceonlywiththesameor equivalenttype(CR2032).

1-4

Introduction Options

Options
AskyourKurzweildealeraboutthefollowingPC3options:

Sound ROM Expansion Card

ThePC3hasasocketfora64MBexpansioncardtoaddadditionalKurzweilROMsounds.This isuserinstallable(theexpansionkitcomeswithcompleteinstructions).

Pedals
ThePC3hasjacksforthreeswitchpedals(forfunctionslikesustainorprogram/setupchanges) andtwocontinuouspedals(forfunctionslikevolumecontrolandwah).YourKurzweildealer stocksthefollowingoptionalpedals: FS1 KFP1 KFP2M CC1 Standardboxshapedswitchpedal Singlepianostyleswitchpedal Doublepianostyleswitchpedalunit Continuouspedal

Ribbon Controller
Theresadedicatedmodularjack(likeatelephonejack)ontherearpanelofthePC3for connectingthis600mm(24inch)ribboncontroller.YoucanconfigurethePC3tousetheribbon asasinglelargecontroller,orathreesectioncontrollerwithindependentsettingsforeach section.

Breath Controller
YoucanplugaYamaha(orequivalent)breathcontrollerintothededicatedjackonthePC3srear panel.

1-5

Introduction Options

1-6

Startup Make Connections

Chapter 2 Startup
Ifhookingupnewgearisfamiliartoyou,andyoujustwanttogetgoing,heresaquick descriptionofwhatyouneedtogetstartedwithyourPC3.Ifyouneedmoreinformation, thoroughdescriptionsofeachstepfollow.

Make Connections
1. Setthekeyboardonahard,flat,levelsurface.Makesuretoleaveplentyofroomfor ventilation. 2. FouradhesivebackedrubberfeetareprovidedwithyourPC3.Ifyouwanttoattachthem tothebottomofthePC3(recommendedtopreventscratchingyourtabletop),carefully turnthekeyboardover,removethepaperbackingfromtherubberfeetandattachthem now,neareachcorner,allonthesamelevel. 3. Connectthepowercable. 4. Makesureyoursoundsystemisatasafevolumelevel.AlsomakesurethatthePC3s MASTERVOLUMEslider(onthefarleftsideofthefrontpanel)isallthewaydown. 5. Pluginapairofstereoheadphonesorrunstandard(1/4inch)audiocablesfromyour amplifierormixertotheMIXaudiooutputsonthePC3.(UsetheMainLeftoutformono.) Balanced(TRSorStereo)cablesarerecommended.

Make Music
1. PowerupyourPC3,raisetheleveloftheMASTERVOLUMEslider,andcheckoutsome oftheprogramsandsetups.ThePC3startsupinProgrammodebydefault.Pressoneof themodebuttonstotheleftofthedisplaytoswitchmodes. 2. Ifyouheardistortion,reducethegainonyourmixingboard,orusethepadifithasone. 3. ScrollthroughtheprogramlistwiththeAlphaWheel,orthededicatedCategoryand Programbuttons,andtrythePC3smanysounds.

2-1

Startup Startupthe Details

Startupthe Details
ThissectionwalksyouthroughthehookupofyourPC3.Welltakealookattherearpanel,then describethepower,audio,andothercableconnections.

Before You Start...

DontconnectanythinguntilyoumakesureyourPC3isproperlyandsafelysituated.Also,if yourPC3hasbeenoutinthecold,giveittimetowarmuptoroomtemperaturebeforestarting it,sincecondensationmayhaveformedinsidethePC3.Itisnormalfortherearpanelnearthe MIDIjackstobecomewarmafterawhile.

Connecting the Power Cable (Line Cord)

ThePC3runsonACpower:100,120,230,or240voltsat5060Hz.Yourdealerwillsetthe voltageswitchtomatchthevoltageinyourarea.Thevoltagelevelissetwithaselectoronthe rearpanelofthePC3.Unlessyouaresureitneedstobechanged,youshouldntadjustthis. WhenyouveconnectedthecableatthePC3end(asyoufacethebackofthePC3,thepower connectionisattheright),plugitintoagroundedoutlet.Ifyourpowersourcedoesnothavethe standardthreeholeoutlet,youshouldtakethetimetoinstallapropergroundingsystem.This willreducetheriskofashock.

Connecting Audio Cables

Analog Afteryouveturneddownthelevelonyoursoundsystem,connectthePC3sanalogaudio outputstoyoursoundsystemusingapairofstereoormonoaudiocables.Monocableswill alwayswork,butifyouregoingintobalancedinputs,usestereocablesforabettersignalto noiseratioandabitmorevolume.ThePC3sanalogoutputsarebalanced,andgeneratea hottersignalthansomepreviousKurzweilinstruments. Youllfindfour1/4inchbalancedaudiooutputjacksontherearpanel.Fornow,connectone endofeachaudiocabletoyourmixingboardorPAsysteminputs,andconnecttheotherendto thejacksmarkedMainLeftandRightontherearpanelofthePC3.Ifyouhaveonlyoneinput available,usethePC3sMainLeftoutputtogetthefullsignalinmono. InMastermodeyoucansettheAuxoutputstoduplicatetheMainOutsusefulformonitoring andotheroperations.Theyarealwaysinstereo,asistheheadphoneout.

2-2

Startup Startupthe Details

Digital FordigitalaudiooutputfromthePC3,connecta75OhmcoaxialcablefromthePC3sRCA DigitalOutjacktotheAESorS/PDIFinputofthereceivingdevice.YoumayneedanRCAto XLRadaptertoconnectwiththereceivingdevice.Ifthereceivingdevicereceivesonlyoptical signals,youllneedaconverteraswell.ThePC3sMasterPage(presstheMastermodebutton) letsyouselectarangeofusefulsampleratesforthedigitaloutput. TheRCAjacklabeledSyncInallowsyoutosynchronizethePC3sS/PDIFDigitalAudio outputsampleratetoanexternalS/PDIFsource.Althoughnoaudiosignalisreceivedbythe SyncInjack,itsclockisreceivedandmaybeusedtosettheoutputsamplerate.Fordetails,see theMasterModeOUTPUTpageparameterDigitalOutput(Dig.Out) on page 119.NOTE:Sync InisNOTaWordClockinput.OnlyavalidS/PDIFsignalisrecognized.

Connecting MIDI
ThesimplestMIDIconfigurationusesasingle5pinMIDIcable:eitherfromtheMIDIOutport ofyourPC3totheMIDIInportofanotherinstrument,orfromtheMIDIOutportofanother MIDIcontrollertotheMIDIInportofthePC3.Thereareallsortsofpossibleconfigurations, includingadditionalsynths,personalcomputers,MIDIeffectsprocessors,andMIDIpatchbays. Dependingonyoursystem,youmaywanttousethePC3sMIDIThruporttopassMIDI informationfromaMIDIcontrollertothePC3andontothenextdeviceinyoursystem.Youcan alsoconnectMIDIdevicestothePC3sMIDIOutport,whichcansendchannelizedMIDI informationfromthekeyboardorthroughthePC3fromyourMIDIcontroller. TheMIDIThruportcanbeconfiguredtoserveasanadditionalMIDIOutbyslidingthenearby switchtotheOutposition.

YoucanalsousethePC3sUSBporttosendandreceiveMIDI.BydefaultthePC3willshowup asaUSBMIDIdevice.IfyouchooseUSBTemporaryDrivefromStoragemode,thePC3will temporarily(whileonthatStoragemodepage)becomeavirtualstoragedeviceandUSB MIDIwillbedisabled.Differenthostprogramsonyourcomputermayindicatevariouserrorsas theUSBMIDIdeviceisnolongerpresent.LeavingStoragemodewillrestoreUSBMIDI functionality. USBMIDIand5pinMIDIcanbeusedatthesametime;theMIDIsignalswillbecombinedinto asingle16channelMIDIstream.

2-3

Startup Startupthe Details

Pedals
PlugyourswitchorcontinuouspedalsintothecorrespondingjacksonthePC3srearpanel.We recommendusingtheKurzweilpedalsdescribedonpage 15,butyoucanusealmostany switchorcontinuouspedal,aslongasitadherestothefollowingspecifications(asmostpedals do): Switchpedals Continuouspedals
1

/4inchtipsleeveplug

10kOhmlineartaperpotentiometer,1/4inchtipringsleeveplug withthewiperconnectedtothetip.

Ifyouuseathirdparty(nonKurzweil)switchpedal,makesureitsconnectedbeforeyouturn onyourPC3.Thisensuresthatthepedalwillworkproperly(itmightfunctionbackwardoff whenitsdownandonwhenitsupifyouturnonyourPC3beforeplugginginthepedal). Similarly,dontpressanyofyourswitchpedalswhilepoweringup,becausethePC3verifies eachpedalsorientationduringpowerup.Ifyourepressingapedal,youmightcauseittowork backward. Thepedalsareindependentlyprogrammablewithineachzoneofeverysetup.Herearethe defaultsettingsforthefivepedalsyoucanusewiththePC3: SwitchPedal1 SwitchPedal2 SwitchPedal3 ContinuousControlPedal1 ContinuousControlPedal2 Controller64(Sustain) Controller66(Sostenuto) Controller67(Soft) Controller11(Expression/Volume) Controller4(FootPedal)producesawaheffectinmanysetups

Breath
The3.5mmjacklabeledBreathacceptsastandardbreathcontroller,whichsendsstandardMIDI Breath(MIDI2)messages.ThePC3spresetprogramsandsetupsdontrespondtobreath,butif youhaveotherinstrumentsthatdorespondtoBreath,youcancontrolthemfromthePC3via MIDI. YoucanalsoprogramthePC3sothatthebreathcontrollersendsadifferentMIDImessage.This wouldenableyoutouseabreathcontrollertoaffectthePC3,butthenotherinstruments receivingMIDIfromthePC3wouldnolongerrespondtothePC3sbreathcontroller(unlessyou alsoprogrammedthemtoreceivethesameMIDIControllerthatthePC3sbreathcontrolleris sending).

2-4

Startup Startupthe Details

Ribbon
PlugtheoptionalKurzweilRibbonControllerintothemodularRibbonjackontherearpanel. Theribboncontrolleritselfshouldrestonaflatsurface;itfitsnicelybetweenthekeysandthe buttonsandslidersonthefrontpanel. Theribbonisacontinuouscontroller.YoucanprogramtheribboncontrollertosendMIDI Controllermessages1127,aswellasseveralspecializedmessages.Itgeneratesvaluesof0127 forwhateverMIDIControllersyouassignittosend.Justpressit,andslideyourfingeralongthe ribbontochangethevalueofthemessageitssending. Youcanconfiguretheribbontohaveonecontrolsectionthatrunsitsentirelength,ortohave threesectionsofequallength.Itsendsitshighestvalueswhenyoupressitattheendwherethe cableconnects.Whenyouconfigureittohavethreesections,eachsectionsendsitshighest valuesattheendclosesttothecable. Caution:ThemodularjackisdesignedforconnectiontotheKurzweilRibbonControlleroptiononly. DontpluganyothermodularplugsintotheRibbonjack.

Switching On the Power

ThePC3spowerswitchisontherearpanel,adjacenttothepowercableconnection. Whenyoupowerup,thedisplaybrieflyshowssomestartupinformation.TheProgrammode displaythenappears.Itlookslikethediagrambelow,thoughyourPC3maybedifferentfrom theexample.

Thefirsttimeyoupowerup(orafterareset),yourinstrumentwillbesettooperateonMIDI Channel1(asshownatthefarrightofthetoplineabove). Setthevolumeatacomfortablelevel.YoullgetthebestsignaltonoiseratioifyoukeepthePC3 atfullvolume,andadjustthelevelfromyourmixingboard.Youmayalsowanttoadjustthe displaycontrastandbrightness.TherearetwosmallknobsontherearpanelofthePC3forthis purpose.

2-5

Startup Startupthe Details

xD Cards
YoucanusexDmemorycardsforbackingup,archiving,sharingyourwork,andupdatingyour software.ThePC3iscompatiblewithxDcardstypeS(upto512MB)ortypeM+(upto1GB) formattedFAT16.(ThePC3doesNOTsupporttypeMortypeHxDcards.)ThexDcardslotis onthebackpanelofthePC3,butitiseasilyaccessiblefromthefrontoftheinstrument.Thegold contactsonthecardmustbefacingupwhenyouinsertit;thePC3cantreadacardwhenitis insertedupsidedown. Caution:DonotremoveanxDcardwhiletheblueStorageUnitBusyLED(abovethealphawheel)islit. RemovingacardwhilethisblueLEDislitcancausedatacorruption.

USB Port
NexttothecardslotonthebackpanelofthePC3isaUSBport.TheUSBportworksforMIDI (transmitandreceive)ortoconnectyourPC3toacomputerforfiletransfer.Bydefault,theUSB portissettoMIDImode.Youcannot,however,useaUSBflash(orthumb)drivewiththePC3s USBport. WerecommendthatyouusetheUSBcableprovidedwithyourPC3anddonotuseextension USBcables.ThePC3sTypeBUSBportisonlyintendedforconnectiontoaUSBTypeAport.

InUSBStoragemode,aKurzweilPC3virtualdrivewillappearonyourcomputerdesktop.One importantthingtoknowhereisthatthisisavirtualdrive.Youcansavetothisdrivefromthe PC3,butyoumustimmediatelytransferthatfiletoyourdesktop(orotherfolder).Youmust copydatafromthePC3virtualdrivetoyourcomputersdriveorelsethedatawillbelost. WhenyouleaveStorageMode,therewillbeaprompttellingyouthatthePC3isturningback intoaUSBMIDIdevicewhichyouhavetoacknowledge.Ifyouhaventcopiedthefile(s)to yourdesktop(orotherplaceonthecomputer)itwontbeonthevirtualdiskwhenyouleave storagemode. Dependingonyourcomputersoperatingsystem,youmaysometimesseeascarydevice removalwarningonyourdesktop(forexample,whenthePC3leavestheBootLoader).Youmay disregardsuchamessagewithoutworriesofdamagetoyourPC3orcomputer.

Setting the Clock

ThefirsttimeyoustartupyourPC3isprobablyagoodtimetosettheinstrumentsclocktoyour currentlocaltime.DothisfromtheMastermodeCLOCKpage.Theclockwilltimestampyour filesthathavebeenstoredtoxDcardsorviaUSB.

2-6

Startup PC3 Programs

PC3 Programs
ThePC3powersupinProgrammode,whereyoucanselectandplayprograms(calledpatches, presets,orvoicesonotherinstruments).Programsarepresetsoundscomposedofupto32 layersofsamplesorwaveforms.IfyouveleftProgrammode,justpresstheProgrammode buttonorExitbuttontoreturn.

Selecting Programs
WhenyouareinProgrammode,therearethreebasicwaystoselectaPC3program: PressoneoftheBankbuttons(abovetheslidersontheleftsideofthefrontpanel)toselecta bank,thenpressaCategorybuttonandaProgrambutton.TheCategoryandProgram buttonsareonthefrontpanel,betweenthescreenandthealphawheel.Note:Theinstrument namesabovetheCategorybuttonsarerelevantforBanks1and2(Base1andBase2).Forallother Banks,theCategorybuttonsselectagroupof8programstobeselectedbytheProgrambuttons,but thegroupofprogramsmaynotmatchtheinstrumentnameoftheselectedCategorybutton.(See ProgramandCategoryButtons on page 34formoredetails.) TypetheprogramsID(number)onthealphanumericbuttonpad,thenpressEnter.Ifyou makeamistake,pressClear,thenstartover. ScrollthroughtheprogramlistusingtheAlphaWheel,thePlusorMinusbuttonsunderthe AlphaWheel,orthecursorbuttons(thearrowbuttonstotherightofthedisplay).

ThePC3hasvarioussettingsforrespondingtoMIDIProgramChangecommandsfromexternal sources.TheseareexplainedinChapter 10.YoucanchangeprogramsbysendingProgram ChangecommandsfromanexternalMIDIcontroller.

Easy Audition
Anytimeyouwanttohearwhataprogramsoundslike,highlighttheprogramsname(whilein Programmode)thenpressthePlay/Pausebuttontoplayabriefsample.TheDemoButton parameterontheMasterModeMAINpagemustbeonforEasyAuditiontowork;the parameterisonbydefault.MastermodeisdescribedinChapter 11.

Program Mode Display

TakeaminutetofamiliarizeyourselfwiththeProgrammodedisplay.Itgivesyousomehelpful basicinformation,liketheMIDItransposition,whatMIDIchannelyoureon,andwhich programiscurrentlyselected.

Info Box Theresaboxattheleftsideofthedisplay.Theinfobox,asitscalled,displaysinformationabout thecurrentprogram(theresalsoaninfoboxforSetupmode).

2-7

Startup PC3 Programs

Soft buttons OnmostPC3screens,thebottomlineofthedisplayidentifiesthefunctionofeachofthebuttons beneaththedisplay.Wecallthesebuttonssoftbuttons,becausetheydodifferentthings dependingonwhatscurrentlyshowinginthedisplay. InProgramandQuickAccessmodes,youcanchangeoctaveswiththeOctavandOctav+ buttonsunderthedisplay.TheInfosoftbuttonshowsyourelevantdetailsaboutthecurrent item.TheXpose/Xpose+buttonsareashortcutforquicktranspositioninsemitone(halfstep) increments.YoucanusethemtotransposetheentirePC3asmuchasthreeoctavesupordown. Thetoplineofthedisplayshowsthecurrentamountoftransposition(Xpose).PressbothXpose buttonssimultaneouslytoreturntranspositiontozero. ThePanicbutton(oradoublepressofCancelandEnteratthebottomofthealphanumeric keypad)sendsanAllNotesOffmessageandanAllControllersOffmessagebothtothePC3 andoverall16MIDIchannels.Youwontneeditoften,butitsnicetohave.

VAST Programs
AnormalVASTprogramiswhatmostofthefactoryprogramsare.Theinfoboxcontains detailsaboutthedifferentlayersineachprogram,usuallyindicatingthekeymapusedineach layer.Thelineunderthekeymapnameindicatesthelayerskeyboardrange.Inthiscase,only thefirsttwodisplayedlayersextendacrosstheentirekeyboard(A 0toC 8).Thesymboltothe rightofeachlayershowsthatthekeymapisastereokeymap.

KB3 Programs
KB3(organ)programsdifferfromVASTprogramsinthattheydonthavelayers.Insteadthey relyonoscillatorsthatmimicthetonewheelsusedinmanypopularorgans.Consequently,the infoboxshowsonlythewaveformusedintheprogram.Becauseoftheirarchitecture,KB3 programsrequiredifferentprocessingwithinthePC3.KB3programsplayonlyonasingle channelatatime(VASTprogramswillworkfineonthatchannel,too). ThequickestwaytogettotheKB3programsisbypressingtheKB3buttonthatsabovethe sliders. Whenyourereadytostartdoingyourownprogramming,checkoutChapter 6.

2-8

Startup Setups

Setups
Setupsarepresetcombinationsofprograms.Setupscanhaveupto16zones,eachofwhichcan beassignedtoanyrangeofthekeyboard(overlappingorsplit).Eachzonecanhaveitsown program,MIDIchannel,andMIDIcontrolassignments,aswellasriffandarpeggiatorsettings. PresstheSetupmodebuttontotheleftofthedisplay.ItsLEDwilllight,tellingyouthatyoure inSetupmode.NoticethattheSetupmodedisplayissimilartotheProgrammodedisplay.Ifthe setuphasfourorfewerzones,theboxattheleftshowsyoutheprogramsassignedtoeachofthe setupsfourzones,andwhichMIDIchannelisusedforeachprogram.Ifthesetupiscomposed ofmorethanfourzones,thentheboxdisplaysthefirstfourzones;atthetopoftheboxwillbe textshowingthetotalnumberofzones.Seepage 71foramoredetaileddescription.

Manysetupsincludearpeggiationandnotetriggeredsongstocreatesomeprettyamazing groovesthatyoucanuseasis,orastemplatesforyourownmaterial.Asyouplaywiththese setups,experimentwiththeslidersandothercontrollersforawiderangeofeffects.Someof thesegrooveskeepplayingafteryouvereleasedthekeysthatgotthemgoing.Whenyouwant tostopthem,selectanothersetup,orpresstheSetupmodebutton(orStopforriffs).

Quick Access
AreallyconvenientwaytoselectprogramsandsetupsistouseQuickAccessmode,whereyou selectaQuickAccessbankfromalistoffactorypresetoruserprogrammedbanks.Eachbank containstenmemoryslots,orentries,whereyoucanstoreanycombinationofprogramsor setups.WhileyoureinQuickAccessmode,youcanselectanyprogramorsetupinthebank withbuttons0through9orthecursorkeys. ThePC3comeswithafewQuickAccessbanksalreadyprogrammedsoyoucangetanideaof howtheywork.YoullprobablycreateyourownQuickAccessbankstohelpyouselect programsandsetupswithaminimumofsearching.PresstheQuickAccessmodebuttontothe leftofthedisplay.ItsLEDlights,totellyouyoureinQuickAccessmode. ThetoplineofthedisplaytellsyouwhichQuickAccessbankisselected.UsetheChan/Layer buttons(totheleftofthedisplay)toscrollthroughthebanks.Thenamesofeachoftheten entriesinthebankarelistedinthecenterofthedisplay.Manyoftheirnameswillbe abbreviated.Thecurrentlyselectedentrysfullnameisshownnearthebottomofthedisplay. Theamountoftranspositionisdisplayedtotheleftoftheentryname.Ifthecurrententryisa program,youllseethecurrentkeyboard(MIDI)channeldisplayedtotherightoftheentrys name.Ifitsasetup,youllseethewordSetup. TheentriesontheQuickAccesspagearearrangedtocorrespondtothelayoutofthenumeric buttonsonthealphanumericpad. WhenyourereadytocreateyourownQuickAccessbanks,turntoChapter 8tolearnaboutthe QuickAccessEditor.

2-9

Startup The Other Modes

The Other Modes

Therearefiveothermodebuttonsonthefrontpanel.SeeChapters3and4formoredetailed descriptionsofthemodes. Effectsmode MIDImode Mastermode Songmode Storagemode Enable/disableeffectspresets,andsetAuxoverrides. ConfigurethePC3forsendingandreceivingMIDIinformation. Defineperformanceandcontrolsettings. Recordandeditsequences(songs);playType0andType1MIDI sequences. Loadandsaveprograms,setups,sequences,andotherobjectsviaUSBor xDcard.

Software Upgrades
PartofthebeautyofthePC3istheeasewithwhichyoucanupgradeitsoperatingsystemand objects(programs,setup,etc.)usingthebootloadertoinstallupgradesintoflashROM.Youcan performtheupgradethroughUSBorbytransferringfromanxDcard. AtKurzweilwehavealonghistoryofsupportforourinstruments;theK250,K1000,K2000, K2500,andK2600havebeenrepeatedlyenhanced,andtheseimprovementshavealwaysbeen madeavailabletoinstrumentownersintheformofsoftwareupgrades. UpgradingyourPC3ssoftwareissimple,painless,andgenerallyfree!Asupgraded softwarebecomesavailableyoucandownloadthenewfilesfromourwebsite: www.kurzweil.com Whenyouvedownloadedanupgrade,youcaninstallityourselfinamatterofminutes.Follow theinstructionsincludedwiththeupgradefiles.

2-10

User Interface Basics Mode Selection

Chapter 3 User Interface Basics

ThischapterwillshowyouhowtogetaroundthefrontpanelofyourPC3.Yourinteractionscan bedividedintothreeprimaryoperations:modeselection,navigation,anddataentry.Thereis alsoanassignablecontrolsection.

Arp

SW

Mode Selection
ThePC3isalwaysinoneofeightprimaryoperatingmodes.Selectamodebypressingoneofthe modebuttonstheyretotheleftofthedisplay.EachmodebuttonhasanLEDthatlightsto indicatethecurrentmode.Onlyonemodecanbeselectedatatime. Programmode Setupmode Selectandplayprograms,andmodifythemwiththeProgramEditor. Selectandplaysetups(16keyboardzoneswithindependentMIDI channel,programandcontrolassignments),andmodifythemwiththe SetupEditor.

QuickAccessmode Selectfromalistofpresetbanks,eachcontainingalistoftenprograms and/orsetupsthatcanbeviewedinthedisplayforeasyselection.Modify thepresetbanksandcreateyourownwiththeQuickAccessEditor. Effectmode MIDImode Enable/disableeffectsorsetAuxoverridesforProgramMode(ora programselectedfromQuickAccessmode.) DefinehowyourPC3sendsandreceivesMIDIinformation,and configureeachchanneltoreceiveindependentprogram,volume,and panmessagesthatoverridethenormalProgrammodesettings. DefineperformanceandcontrolcharacteristicsfortheentirePC3.

Mastermode

3-1

User Interface Basics Mode Buttons

Songmode

UsethePC3ssequencertorecordandplaybackyourkeyboard performance,playType0andType1MIDIsequences,andrecordmulti timbralsequencesreceivedviaMIDI. InterfacewiththePC3sxDcardreaderorUSBporttoloadandsave programs,setups,samples,andmore.

Storagemode

ThePC3stonewheelorganemulationiscalledKB3mode.Youautomaticallyenterthismode whenyouselectaKB3program.TheKB3Bankbuttontakesyoutheredirectly.

Mode Buttons

Whenyoupressamodebutton,itsLEDlightsuptoindicatethatthemodehasbeenselected.If pressingamodebuttondoesnotlightitsLED,presstheExitbuttononeormoretimes,thentry again. Additionallabelingforeachmodebuttonindicatesspecialfunctionsthatrelatetosomeofthe PC3seditors.

Bank Buttons
TheBankbuttons,situatedinthetopleftcornerofthePC3sfrontpanel,letyouchoosedifferent banksofprograms(e.g.,KB3programsorClassicKeysprograms).Withineachbank,youcan usetheProgramandCategorybuttons(totherightofthedisplay)toselectindividual programs.

TheBankbuttonshavespecialfunctionsinKB3mode,indicatedbylabelsbeneatheachbutton.

3-2

User Interface Basics Sliders

Sliders
InKB3mode,thePC3snineslidersemulateanorgansdrawbars.Forexample,sliderA emulatesanorgans16drawbar.Inothermodes,thesliderscanbeusedtosendvaluesfor differentMIDIcontrollers.Ineithercase,youmayhavetomovethesliderpastthecurrentvalue foritsselectedfunctionbeforeslidermovementwillhaveanyeffect.PresstheInfosoftbutton ontheProgrammodeorSetupmodemainpagetoseethesliderassignmentsofthecurrent programorsetup.

MostVASTprogramsusetheslidersforthesefunctions: A B C D E F G H I Data MIDI13 MIDI22 MIDI23 MIDI24 MIDI25 MIDI26 MIDI27 MIDI28 Filterfrequency,Brightness Filterresonance,Tremoloratecontrol Layervolume,Envelopecontrol,LoEQ Layervolume,Envelopecontrol,HiEQ Layervolumeforthumpsandrelease FXcontrol1 FXdistortiondrive FXdistortionwarmth Reverb/delaycontrol

3-3

User Interface Basics Program and Category Buttons

Program and Category Buttons

UsetheProgramandCategorybuttons,inconjunctionwiththeBankbuttons,toselectPC3 programsbyBanktypeandinstrumentcategory.EachBankcontains128programsdividedinto 16categories.Eachofthe16categoriescontains8programs. Toselectaprogram,firstpressoneoftheBankbuttons(abovetheslidersontheleftsideofthe frontpanel)toselectabank,thenpressaCategorybuttonandaProgrambutton.TheCategory andProgrambuttonsareonthefrontpanel,betweenthescreenandthealphawheel. Note:TheinstrumentnamesabovetheCategorybuttonsarerelevantforBanks1and2(Base1and Base2).ForallotherBanks,theCategorybuttonsselectagroupof8programstobeselectedbythe Programbuttons,butthegroupofprogramsmaynotmatchtheinstrumentnameoftheselectedCategory button.

Picking favorites
Whenyouselectaprogramwithinacategory,yourselectionwillberemembered.Forexample, chooseprogram3intheOrgancategory(pressCategory:Organ,thenProgram:3).Nowmove tothestringsbypressingtheCategory:Stringsbutton.IfyoupresstheCategory:Organbutton again,youwillbereturnedtoprogram3intheOrgancategory.Inthisway,eachcategorycan haveafavoriteprogram. Youcanmakeprogramselectionswithineachcategoryaheadoftime.Thisway,youllbeableto accesstheprogramyouwantinanycategorysimplybypressingappropriatecategorybutton. Importantthingstorememberaboutyourfavorites: YoumustsaveyourPC3sMasterTabletorememberyourselectionsacrosspowercycles. SeeChapter 11forinformationabouttheMasterTable. Yourselectionsarebankdependent.Inotherwords,youcansave16intheBase1bank,16 intheExp1bank,etc.

3-4

User Interface Basics Pitch Wheel and Mod Wheel

Pitch Wheel and Mod Wheel

Arp SW

Pitch

Mod

TotheleftofthePC3skeyboardarethePitchWheelandtheModWheel,aswellastheSWand Arpbuttons. PushthePitchWheelawayfromyoutoraisethepitchofthenote(s)youareplaying.Pullit towardsyoutolowerthepitch.Mostprogramsaresetsothatthepitchwheelwillraiseand lowerpitchbyawholestep,althoughsomeprogramsusethepitchwheeltolowerpitchbyas muchasanoctave.ThePitchWheelhasaspringsothatitwillsnapbacktoplace(i.e.,backto theoriginalpitch)whenyoureleaseit. TheModWheelperformsavarietyoffunctions.Differentprogramsmayuseitforfiltersweeps, tremolo/vibrato,wah,orlayervolume. TheArpbuttonturnsonandoffthePC3sArpeggiator. TheSWbutton(MIDI29)canbeprogrammedtodoavarietyofthings.Oftenitisusedforlayer enableoreffectenable.

3-5

User Interface Basics Navigation

Navigation
Thenavigationsectionofthefrontpanelconsistsofthedisplayandthebuttonssurroundingit. ThesenavigationbuttonswilltakeyoutoeveryoneofthePC3sprogrammingparameters.

The Display
YourprimaryinterfacewiththePC3isitsbacklitgraphicdisplay.Asyoupressvariousbuttons, thisfluorescentdisplayreflectsthecommandsyouenterandtheeditingchangesyoumake.The amplesizeofthedisplay(240by64pixels)enablesyoutoviewlotsofinformationatonetime.

Pages
Withineachmode,thefunctionsandparametersareorganizedintosmaller,relatedgroupsthat appeartogetherinthedisplay.Eachoneofthesegroupsofparametersiscalledapage.Each modehaswhatwecallanentrylevelpage;itsthepagethatappearswhenyouselectthatmode withoneofthemodebuttons.Withineachmodeanditseditor(s),thevariouspagesareselected withthenavigationbuttons.Therearemanypages,butthereareafewfeaturescommontoeach page. TheillustrationbelowshowstheentrylevelpageforProgrammode.

The Top Line

Onthetoplineofmostpages,theresareminderofwhichmodeyoureinandwhichpage youreon.Manypagesdisplayadditionalinformationinthetopline,aswell.The Programmodepageabove,forexample,showsyouthecurrentamountofMIDItransposition andthecurrentlyselectedMIDIchannel.Thetoplineisalmostalwaysreversedthatis,it hasawhitebackgroundwithbluecharacters.

The Bottom Line

Thebottomlineisdividedintosix(sometimesfewer)setsofreversedcharactersthatserveas labelsforthesixbuttonsdirectlybeneaththedisplay.Theselabelsandthefunctionsofthe buttonschangedependingonthecurrentlyselectedpage.Consequentlythebuttonsthat selectthesefunctionsarecalledsoftbuttons.

3-6

User Interface Basics Navigation

The Soft Buttons

Thesoftbuttonsarecalledsoftbecausetheirfunctionschangedependingonthecurrently selectedmodeandpage.Sometimestheyperformspecificfunctions,likechangingMIDI channelsinProgrammode.IntheProgramEditorandothereditors,theyrealsousedtomove todifferentpagesofprogrammingparameters.Ifasoftbuttonslabelisinallcapitalletters (KEYMAP,forexample),pressingthecorrespondingsoftbuttontakesyoutoapageof parameters.Ifthesoftbuttonislabeledinlowercaseormixedcaseletters(Save,forexample), thesoftbuttonperformssomekindoffunction.

The Cursor Buttons

Totherightofthedisplayarefourbuttonsarrangedinadiamondfashion.Thesearecalledthe cursorbuttons.Theymovethecursoraroundthecurrentlyselectedpage,inthedirection indicatedbytheirlabels.Thecursorisahighlighted(reversed)rectangle(sometimesitsan underscore).Itmarksthevalueofthecurrentlyselectedparameter.

ProgrammingthePC3involvesselectingvariousparametersandchangingtheirvalues.Select parametersbyhighlightingtheirvalueswiththecursor.Youcanchangethehighlightedvalue withanyofthedataentrymethodsdescribedinthedataentrysectionbelow.

The Chan/Layer Buttons

TotheleftofthedisplayaretwobuttonslabeledChan/Layer.Theirfunctiondependsonthe currentmode.InProgrammode,forexample,theyshiftthroughtheMIDIchannels,showing theprogramassignedtoeachchannel.ThischangestheMIDIchannelthePC3usesinternally,as wellasthechannelyoureusingtosendinformationtoothersynthsconnectedtothePC3s MIDIOutport(MIDIslaves).ChangingthecurrentMIDIchannelalsochangesthe correspondingsettingontheMIDImodeTRANSMITpage.WhenyoupressbothChan/Layer buttonsatthesametimeyouwillbereturnedtoChannel1,Checkoutthechartonpage 310for moreshortcutsyoucanmakewithdoublebuttonpresses. WhenyoureintheProgramEditor,theChan/Layerbuttonsletyouvieweachlayerinthe program.Youcanseethecorrespondingparametersineachlayerbyscrollingthroughthe layerswiththesebuttons.IntheSetupEditor,theChan/Layerbuttonsscrollthroughthezones inthecurrentsetup.InQuickAccessmode,theyscrollthroughtheQuickAccessbanks,andin Songmodetheyscrollthroughrecordingtracks. Wellletyouknow,whenapplicable,whattheChan/Layerbuttonsdo.

3-7

User Interface Basics Navigation

The Edit Button

TheEditbuttonactivateseachofthePC3seditors,andactsasashortcuttomanypageswithin theProgramEditor.PressingtheEditbuttontellsthePC3thatyouwanttochangesomeaspect oftheobjectmarkedbythecursor.Forexample,whenaprogramisselectedandyoupressEdit, youentertheProgramEditor.Ifasetupisselected,youentertheSetupEditor. Thereareeditorsaccessiblefromjustabouteveryoperatingmode.Toenteraneditor,choose oneofthemodes(modeselection),andpressEdit.Aneditingpageforthatmodewillappear. Youcanthenselectparameters(navigation)andchangetheirvalues(dataentry).Ifthevalueof theselectedparameterhasitsowneditingpage,pressingtheEditbuttonwilltakeyoutothat page.Forexample,intheProgramEditor,onthePITCHpage,youmightseeLFO1assignedas thevalueforPitchControlSource1.Ifyouselectthisparameter(thecursorwillhighlightits valueLFO1inthiscase),thenpresstheEditbutton,youlljumptothepagewhereyoucan edittheparametersofLFO1.Naturally,youcanfindeverypageinthecurrenteditorbyusing thesoftbuttons,butoftenitseasiertousetheEditbuttonshortcut.

The Exit Button

PressExittoleavethecurrenteditor.Ifyouvechangedthevalueofanyparameterwhileinthat editor,thePC3willaskyouwhetheryouwanttosaveyourchangesbeforeyoucanleavethe editor.SeeChapter5forinformationonsavingandnaming.TheExitbuttonalsotakesyouto Programmodeifyoureontheentrylevelpageofoneoftheothermodes.Ifatsomepointyou cantseemtogetwhereyouwanttogo,pressExitoneormoretimestoreturntoProgrammode, thentryagain.

3-8

User Interface Basics Data Entry

Data Entry
ThedataentrysectionofthefrontpanelincludestheAlphawheel,thePlus/Minusbuttons,and the14buttonalphanumericpad.

The Alpha Wheel

TheAlphaWheelisespeciallyusefulbecauseitcanquicklyenterlargeorsmallchangesin value.IfyouturntheAlphaWheeloneclicktotheright,youllincreasethevalueofthe currentlyselectedparameterbyoneincrement.Oneclicktotheleftdecreasesthevaluebyone increment.Ifyouturnitrapidly,youlljumpbyseveralincrements.YoucanalsousetheAlpha Wheeltoenternameswhenyouresavingobjects.

The Plus/Minus Buttons

ThesebuttonsarelocatedjustundertheAlphaWheel.ThePlusbuttonincreasesthevalueofthe currentlyselectedparameterbyone,andtheMinusbuttondecreasesitbyone.Thesebuttons aremostusefulwhenyourescrollingthroughashortlistofvalues,orwhenyouwanttobesure yourechangingthevaluebyoneincrementatatime.OnepressofthePlusorMinusbutton correspondstooneclicktotherightorleftwiththeAlphaWheel.Thesebuttonswillrepeatif pressedandheld. PressingthePlusandMinusbuttonssimultaneouslywillmoveyouthroughthecurrentlistof valuesinlargechunksinsteadofonebyone.Dontconfusethesebuttonswiththe+/buttonon thealphanumericpad.Thisbuttonisusedprimarilyforenteringnegativenumericvaluesand switchingfromuppercasetolowercaseletters(andviceversa).

The Alphanumeric Pad

Asitsnameimplies,thissetof14buttonsletsyouenternumericvalues,andtoenternamesone characteratatime.Dependingonwhereyouare,thePC3automaticallyenterslettersor numeralsasappropriate(youdonthavetoselectbetweenalphabeticornumericentry). Whenyoureenteringnumericvalues,pressthecorrespondingnumericbuttons,ignoring decimalplacesifany(toenter1.16,forexample,press1,1,6,Enter).Thedisplaywillreflect yourentries,butthevaluewontactuallychangeuntilyoupressEnter.BeforepressingEnter, youcanreturntotheoriginalvaluebypressingCancel.PressingClearisthesameaspressing0 withoutpressingEnter. Whenenteringnames,youcanusetheLeft/Rightcursorbuttonsorthe<<</>>>softbuttonsto movethecursortothecharacteryouwanttochange.Usethelabelsunderthealphanumeric buttonsasaguidetocharacterentry.Pressthecorrespondingbuttononeormoretimestoinsert thedesiredcharacterabovethecursor.TheCancelbuttonisequivalenttothe>>>softbutton, andEnteristhesameasOK.TheClearbuttonreplacesthecurrentlyselectedcharacterwitha space.The+/buttontogglesbetweenuppercaseandlowercaseletters. Theresalsoaconvenientfeaturecalledkeyboardnaming,whichletsyouusethekeyboardto entercharactersinnames.Seepage 55.

3-9

User Interface Basics Data Entry

Double Button Presses

Pressingtwoormorerelatedbuttonssimultaneouslyexecutesanumberofspecialfunctions dependingonthecurrentlyselectedmode.Makesuretopressthematexactlythesametime.

In this mode or editor

pressing these buttons simultaneously

ARP, SW Octav-, Octav+ Chan/Layer Plus/Minus Up/Down cursor buttons Left/Right cursor buttons Plus/Minus

does this:
Brings up quick arpeggiator configuration page. Reset MIDI transposition to 0 semitones. Double-press again to go to previous transposition. Set current MIDI channel to 1. Sets layer 1 in Program editor. Step to next Program bank (increments of 128). Starts playback of demo song for current Program. Stop with Stop transport button. Brings up the TEMPO page. Moves through list of Setups in increments of 128. Set zone 1. Brings up the TEMPO page. Toggle between Play and Stop. Select all tracks on any TRACK page in Song Editor. Brings up the TEMPO page. Select all items in a list. Move cursor to end of name in naming dialog. Clear all selections in a list. Move cursor to beginning of name in naming dialog. Select Layer 1. Scroll through the currently selected parameters list of values in regular or logical increments (varies with each parameter). Reset MIDI transposition to 0 semitones. Double-press again to go to previous transposition. Select Utilities menu. Reset MIDI transposition to 0 semitones. Double-press again to go to previous transposition. Display the TEMPO page. Toggle between Play and Stop of current song. Panic (sends all notes/controllers off message on all 16 channels). Toggle between next free ID and original ID. Moves cursor to the end of the name. Moves cursor to the end of the name.

Program mode

Setup mode

Chan/Layer Left/Right cursor buttons Up/Down cursor buttons

Song mode

Chan/Layer Left/Right cursor buttons Left/Right cursor buttons

Storage mode

up/down cursor buttons Chan/Layer Plus/Minus 2 leftmost soft buttons Center soft buttons 2 rightmost soft buttons Left/Right cursor buttons Up/Down cursor buttons Cancel/Enter

Program Editor

Any Editor

Save Dialog Rename Dialog

Plus/Minus buttons Plus/Minus buttons Left/Right cursor buttons

3-10

User Interface Basics Intuitive Data Entry

Intuitive Data Entry

Manyparametershavevaluesthatcorrespondtostandardphysicalcontrollers.Inmanycases, youcanselectthesevaluesintuitively,ratherthanhavingtoscrollthroughtheControlSource list.Dothisbyselectingthedesiredparameter,thenholdingtheENTERbuttonwhilemoving thedesiredphysicalcontrol. Forexample,ontheLAYERpageintheProgramEditor,youcansettherangeofthecurrently selectedlayerasfollows:usethecursorbuttonstomovethecursortothevaluefortheLoKey parameter,press(andhold)theEnterbutton,thenpressthenoteyouwishtobethelowestnote forthecurrentlydisplayedlayer.ThenoteyoutriggeredwillappearasthevaluefortheLoKey parameter.RepeattheprocessfortheHiKeyparameter. Anotherexample:selectProgram199whileinProgrammode.PressEdittoentertheProgram Editor.PressthePITCHsoftbuttontoselectthePITCHpage.MovethecursortotheSrc1 parameter.HoldtheEnterbutton,andmovethePitchWheel.PWheelwillbeselectedasthe valueforSrc1. Youcanalsousethekeyboardtochoosecontrolsources,sincemostkeynumberscorrespondto avalueonthecontrolsourcelist.Ifyouhaveacertaincontrolsourcethatyouuseoverandover (forexample,LFO1),thiscanbethequickestwaytoenteritsvalue.Todothis:highlighta parameterwhichusesavaluefromthecontrolsourcelist,holddownEnter,thenstrikethekey correspondingtothecontrolsourceyouwanttochoose.LFO1,forexample,isassignedtoB5. Also,foralmosteveryparameter,youcanholdtheEnterbuttonandmovetheDataSlider (SliderA)torunthroughtherangeofvaluesforthecurrentlyselectedparameter.Thisisnotas preciseastheAlphaWheel,butmuchfaster.

Changing the Current Layer in Multi-Layer Programs

Wheneditingamultilayerprogram,youcanquicklyswitchbetweenlayersbyholdingthe Enterbutton,thenstrikingakey.ThePC3willchangethecurrentlayertothatkeyslayer.Ifthe keyispartofmorethanonelayer,subsequentkeystrikeswillcyclethrougheachlayerthathas thatkeyinitsrange. Note:ThismethodforchangingthecurrentlayerinamultilayerprogramwillNOTworkifthe currentlyhighlightedparameterhasanotenumberorcontrolsourceforitsvalue.Inthiscase,thekeyyou strikewillfunctionasdescribedinIntuitiveDataEntry,above.

3-11

User Interface Basics Search

Search
Theresaconvenientwaytofindanystringofcharacterswithinthecurrentlyselectedlist,or rangeofvalues.HoldtheEnterbuttonandpressanyofthenumericbuttons.Adialogappears. Typeinthestringofcharactersyouwanttofind.Forexample,ifyourelookingattheprogram listandyouwanttofindallprogramscontainingthewordHorn,youwouldtypehorn. Thisfunctionisnotcasesensitive;itwillfindupperandlowercasecharactersregardlessof whatyoutype. Whenyouvetypedthestringofcharactersyouwanttofind,pressEnter.ThePC3searches throughthecurrentlistofobjectsorvalues,findsallitemsthatmatchthestringofcharacters youtyped,anddisplaysthefirstoneitfinds.HoldEnterandpressoneofthePlus/Minus buttonstosearchforthenexthigherorlowernumberedobjectthatcontainsthestringof characters. Thestringyouselectremainsinmemory.Youcanstoreandselectastringofcharacterswith eachofthenumericbuttons.HoldEnterandpressoneofthenumericbuttonsatanytimeto selectthatstringforasearch.Whenthestringappears,youcanchangeit,orjustpressEnterto findthatstring.

Quick Song Recording and Playback

TherearethreebuttonslabeledRecord,Play/Pause,andStopbelowthemodeselection buttons.Theycontroltherecordingandplaybackofsongsfromanymode;youdonthavetobe inSongmodetorecordorplayback.However,youllneedtomakesurethattheDemoButton parameteronMasterModePage2issettoOff.OtherwisethesebuttonsareusedforEasy Audition(seepage 27).MasterModeisdescribedinChapter 11.

Usingthesebuttonsaffectsthecurrenttrackofthecurrentsongthatis,thesongandtrackthat wereselectedthelasttimeyouwereinSongmode.Whenyourecord,therecordingtrackand recordingmodearedeterminedbythecurrentsettingsinSongmode;likewisefortheplayback modewhenyoureplayingasong. WhenthesequencerstatusisSTOPPED(neithertheRecordbuttonLEDnorthePlay/Pause buttonLEDislitorflashing),pressRecordtoputthesequencerinRECREADYstatus.The RecordbuttonLEDlights(red).ThenpressPlay/Pausetostartrecording.ThePlay/Pause buttonflashes(green)toindicatethetempo.AnycountoffisdeterminedbythecurrentSong modesettingfortheCountOffparameter.PressPlay/PauseorStoptoendrecordingandgoto theSavedialog,whereyoucansavethesong,ordiscardit. WhenthesequencerstatusisSTOPPED,pressPlay/Pausetobeginplayingthecurrentsong. PressPlay/Pauseagaintopauseplayback,andagaintoresume.PressStoptoendplayback. SeeChapter12formoreinformationonSongMode.

3-12

The Operating Modes What the Modes Are

Chapter 4 The Operating Modes

Inthischapterwelldiscussthetheorybehindthemodeconcept,andwelldescribethebasic operatingfeaturesofeachmode.

What the Modes Are

ThemodesexisttomakethePC3logicaltoworkwith.Withasmanyperformanceand programmingfeaturesasthePC3has,itshelpfultobreakthemintogroups.Thesegroupsare calledmodes.Thereareeightprimarymodes;theyredescribedbrieflyinthesectioncalled UsingtheModes on page 42,thentherestofthemanualisdedicatedtoexplainingeachprimary modeinturn. Eachmodeisnamedforthekindofoperationsyouperformwhileinthatmode,andeach modeseditor(ifany)containsalloftheparametersrelatedtoeditingthetypeofobjectfoundin thatmode.InSetupmode,forexample,youselectsetups(andonlysetups)forperformanceor editing.AllofthesetupeditingparametersaregroupedtogetherontheSetupEditorpage, whichisaccessiblethroughSetupmode.

Selecting Modes
WhenthePC3ison,itsalwaysoperatinginoneoftheeightprimarymodesrepresentedbythe LEDhighlightedbuttonstotheleftofthedisplayorinoneoftheeditorscorrespondingtothe currentoperatingmode.Pressingoneofthemodebuttonsselectsthecorrespondingmode.This isthemodesentrylevel.Attheentrylevel,theLEDoftheselectedmodeislit.Onlyonemode canbeselectedatatime. Fromanyprimarymode,youcangettoanyotherprimarymodesimplybypressingoneofthe modebuttons.Ifyoureinaneditor,however,youmustpressExittoreturntothemodesentry levelbeforeselectinganothermode. AllofthemodesexceptStoragemodegiveyouaccesstooneormoreeditorsforchangingthe valuesoftheparameterswithinthatmode.PresstheEditbuttontoentertheeditorofthe currentlyselectedmode.Whenyoudothis,themodeLEDgoesout. Itspossibletoenteranothermodeseditorwithoutleavingthecurrentlyselectedmode.For example,ifyoupressEditwhileinSetupmode,youllentertheSetupEditor.TheSetupEditor pagewillappear,andtheProgramparameterwillbehighlightedbythecursor.IfyoupressEdit again,youllentertheProgramEditor,whereyoucaneditthecurrentlyselectedprogram. Whileyoucaneditandsaveprogramsasyounormallywould,yourestillinSetupmode,and youcantselectanothermodeatthispoint.WhenyouexittheProgramEditor,youllreturnto theSetupEditorpage.PressExitagain,andyoullleavetheSetupEditor,returningtothe Setupmodepage.

4-1

The Operating Modes Using the Modes

Thefollowingtableliststheproceduresformovingbetweenmodesandeditors.Notethatthe Exitbuttonwontalwaystakeyouwherethetablesaysitwill;itoftendependsonhowyougot whereyouare.Thetableassumesthatyouveenteredagiveneditorviaitscorrespondingmode. YoullalwaysreturntoProgrammodeeventuallyifyoupressExitrepeatedly.

Current Mode/ Editor Status Any mode Program mode Program Editor Setup mode Setup Editor Quick Access mode Quick Access Editor Song mode Most editors Available Modes/ Editors All other modes Program Editor Program mode Effects Editor Setup Editor Setup mode Program Editor Quick Access Editor Quick Access mode Song Editor Program Editor Previous mode or editor How to Get There Press corresponding mode button Press Edit Press Exit On PROGFX page, select Insert, then press Edit Press Edit Press Exit On CH/PRG page: select LocalPrg parameter; press Edit Press Edit Press Exit Select CurSong parameter; press Edit Select Program parameter; press Edit Press Exit

Finding Square One

If,atanytime,youdontknowwhereyouare,andthemodeLEDsareallunlit,pressExitoneor moretimes.Thiswillreturnyoutotheentrylevelofwhatevermodeyouwerein,andifyou pressExitenoughtimes,youwillalwaysreturntoProgrammode,thestartupmode.Ifyouve madeanychanges,youllbeaskedwhetheryouwanttosavebeforeleavinganyeditor.Pressthe NosoftbuttonortheExitbuttonifyoudontwanttosave.Ifyouwanttosave,pressthe RenameorYessoftbutton,andyoullseetheSavedialog,whichisdescribedinSavingand Naming on page 53.

Using the Modes

YoucanplayyourPC3regardlessofthemodeyourein.ThePC3sMIDIresponseisalmost alwaysactive.Evensotherearethreemodesthataremoreperformanceorientedthanthe others.TheseareProgram,Setup,andQuickAccessmodes.Welldescribeeachoftheeight modesbrieflyinthissection.

Program Mode
ThePC3startsupinProgrammode,whereyoucanselect,play,andeditprograms.The Programmodeentrylevelpageshowsthecurrentlyselectedprogram,aswellasasmall segmentoftheprogramlist. TheProgramEditortakesyoutothecoreofthePC3ssoundeditingparameters.

Setup Mode
Setupmodeletsyouselect,play,andeditsetups.Setupsconsistofupto16separatezones,split oroverlapping,eachhavingitsownprogram,MIDIchannel,andcontrolparameters.Setupsare greatforperformancesituations,whetheryoureplayingmultiplePC3programsorcontrolling additionalsynthsconnectedtothePC3sMIDIOutport.Chapter7describesSetupmode.

4-2

The Operating Modes Using the Modes

IfyoureusingadifferentMIDIcontroller,youcanmakeuseofSetupmodeevenifyourMIDI controllercantransmitononlyoneMIDIchannelatatime.Todothis,gototheRECEIVEpage inMIDImode(bypressingtheRECVsoftbuttonwhileinMIDImode),andsettheLocal KeyboardChannelparametertoavaluethatmatchesthetransmitchannelofyourMIDI controller.WhenyouselectSetupmode,thePC3willinterpretincomingMIDIinformation accordingtothesettingsforthecurrentlyselectedsetup.SeethediscussionoftheLocal KeyboardChannelparameterinChapter10fordetails.

Quick Access Mode

Anotherfeatureforliveperformance,QuickAccessmodeenablesyoutocombineprograms andsetupsintobanksoftenentries.Eachoftheseprogramsorsetupscanbeselectedwitha singlealphanumericbutton.DifferentbanksareselectedwiththeChan/Layerbuttons.Theresa selectionoffactorypresetbanks,andyoucanusetheQuickAccessEditortocreateyourown banksandstoretheminthePC3smemory.TheresafulldescriptioninChapter8. YoucanalsouseQuickAccessbanksasawaytoremapincomingoroutgoingProgramChange commands.

Effects Mode
EffectsmodesetsthebehaviorofthePC3seffectsprocessor.TheEffectsmodepageletsyoutell thePC3howtoselecteffectsconfigurationscalledchains.Chapters9showsyouhow.

MIDI Mode
YoulluseMIDImodetoconfigurethePC3sinteractionwithotherMIDIinstruments,bysetting parametersfortransmittingandreceivingMIDI.YoullalsouseittoconfigureyourPC3for multitimbralsequencing.OntheCHANNELSpage,youcanassignaprogramtoeachchannel, andenableordisableeachchannelsresponsetothreetypesofMIDIcontrolmessages:Program Change,volumeandpan.SeeChapter10.

Master Mode
Mastermode,describedinChapter 11,containstheparametersthatcontroltheentirePC3. Globalsettingsfortuning,transposition,velocityandaftertouchsensitivity,andother preferencesareadjustedhere.YoucanalsogettoGMModefromhereandsetthesamplerate forthePC3sdigitaloutput.

Song Mode
Songmodeenablesyoutoplaysequences(songs)storedinthePC3smemory,andprovidesa fullyfeaturedsequencerthatyoucanusetorecordsongs.Youcanalsorecordmultitimbrally viaMIDI,orloadstandardMIDIfiles(Type0or1).TheSongEditoralsoenablesyoutomodify existingsequencesstoredinmemory.SeeChapter 12.

Storage Mode
StoragemodeletsyouloadandsaveprogramsandotherobjectsusinganxDcard.See Chapter 13.

4-3

The Operating Modes Using the Modes

4-4

Editing Conventions Introduction to Editing

Chapter 5 Editing Conventions

Introduction to Editing
Programming(editing)thePC3alwaysinvolvesthreebasicoperations:modeselection, navigation,anddataentry. First,selectthemodethatrelatestotheobjectyouwanttoeditaprogram,asetup,etc.Then selecttheobjectyouwanttoedit,andpresstheEditbuttontoentertheeditorwithinthatmode. Aneditorcontainsalltheparametersthatdefinetheobjectyoureprogramming. Next,younavigatearoundtheeditorspage(s)withthesoftbuttons,andselectparameterswith thecursor(arrow)buttons.Whenyouveselectedaparameter(itsvalueishighlightedbythe cursor),youcanchangeitsvaluewithoneofthedataentrymethods.Whenyouchangeavalue, youllnormallyhearitseffectontheobjectyoureediting.ThePC3doesntactuallywriteyour editingchangestomemoryuntilyousavetheobjectyoureworkingon.Itthenallowsyouto choosebetweenwritingovertheoriginalobject,orstoringthenewlyeditedversioninanew memorylocation.

Whats an Object?
Ifyouvebeenwonderingwhatwemeanbythetermobject,itsanexpressionweusefor anythingthatcanbenamed,saved,deleted,oredited.Heresalistofallthetypesofobjects: Programs FactorypresetoruserprogrammedsoundsstoredinROMorflash memory.A programisoneormorelayersofsound,withprogrammable DSPfunctionsappliedtothekeymapswithineachlayer. Factorypresetoruserprogrammedrouting(virtualwiring)forV.A.S.T. DSPFunctions. FactorypresetoruserprogrammedMIDIperformancepresetsconsisting ofupto16zones,eachwithitsownprogram,MIDIchannel,and controllerassignments,and(optionally)arpeggiationspecifications. Sequencefilesloadedintomemory,orMIDIdatarecordedinSongmode. FactorypresetoruserprogrammedconfigurationsofthePC3sonboard digitalaudioeffectsprocessor.

Algorithms Setups

Songs Chains

QuickAccessbanks Factorypresetoruserprogrammedbanksoftenentrieseach,thatstore programsandsetupsforsinglebuttonaccessinQuickAccessmode. Intonationmaps Factorypresetoruserprogrammedpitchoffsetsforeachnoteinall octaves.Setfrommastermode,intonationmapsareusedtochangethe PC3sintonationinallmodes. Factorypresetoruserprogrammedsequencesofnoteshiftinformation, usedbythearpeggiatorfordetailedarpeggiations,orbytheShiftKey Numbercontrollerdestination.

Shiftpatterns

5-1

Editing Conventions Object Type and ID

Velocitypatterns

Factorypresetoruserprogrammedsequencesofnotevelocityshift information,usedbythearpeggiatorfordetailedvelocitytriggeringin arpeggiation. ThevaluesthataresetfortheparametersinMastermode,aswellasthe settingsfortheparametersontheTransmit,Receive,andChannelspages inMIDImode,andtheprogramscurrentlyassignedtoeachMIDI channel.

Mastertables

Object Type and ID

ThePC3storesitsobjectsinmemoryusingasystemofIDnumbersthataregenerallyorganized intobanks.EachobjectisidentifiedbyitsobjecttypeandobjectID;thesemakeitunique.An objectstypeissimplythekindofobjectitis,whetheritsaprogram,setup,song,orwhatever. TheobjectIDisanumberfrom1tothemaximumthatdistinguisheseachobjectfromother objectsofthesametype.Forexample,withinabankyoucanhaveasetup,aprogram,andan effect,allwithID201;theirobjecttypesdistinguishthem.Youcant,however,havetwoprograms withID201. Object Type
Program Setup Velocity Map

Object ID
201 404 1

Object Name
Hot Keys Silicon Bebop Linear

ROM(factorypreset)objectshaveIDnumbersinanumberofbanks.Whenyousaveobjectsthat youveedited,thePC3willaskyoutoassignanID.IftheoriginalobjectwasaROMobject,the PC3willsuggestthefirstavailableIDintheUserBank(startingat1025).Iftheoriginalobject wasamemoryobject,youllhavetheoptionofsavingtoanunusedID,orreplacingtheoriginal object.Doublepresstheand+buttons(beneaththealphawheel)toselectthenextavailable userlocation. ObjectsofdifferenttypescanhavethesameID,butobjectsofthesametypemusthavedifferent IDstobekeptseparate.Whenyouresavinganobjectthatyouveedited,youcanassignthe sameIDtoanexistingobjectofthesametype,butifyoudo,thenewonewillbewrittenoverthe oldone.Forexample,ifyouassignanIDof1toaprogramyouveedited,thePC3willaskyouif youwanttoreplacetheROMprogramcurrentlystoredwiththatID. Manyparametershaveobjectsastheirvaluesforexample,theIntonationparameterinMaster mode.Inthiscase,theobjectsIDappearsinthevaluefieldalongwiththeobjectsname.You canenterobjectsasvaluesbyenteringtheirIDswiththealphanumericpad.Thisisespecially convenientforprograms,sincetheirIDnumbersareusuallythesameastheirMIDIprogram changenumbers. TheobjecttypeandIDenableyoutostorehundredsofobjectswithoutlosingtrackofthem,and alsotoloadfilesfromstoragewithouthavingtoreplacefilesyouvealreadyloaded.

5-2

Editing Conventions Saving and Naming

Saving and Naming

Whenyouveeditedanobjecttoyoursatisfaction,youllwanttostoreitinmemory.Theresa standardprocedureforsavingandnaming,whichappliestoallobjects.YoucanpresstheSave softbutton,ofcourse,butitseasiertopresstheExitbutton,whichmeansIwanttoleavethe currenteditor.Ifyouhaventactuallychangedanythingwhileintheeditor,youllsimplyexit tothemodeyoustartedfrom.Ifyouhavemadechanges,however,thePC3willaskyouifyou wanttosavethosechanges.ThisisthefirstSavedialog,theExitpage.PressCanceltoresume editing,Notoexittheeditor,orYestosaveyoureditsandmovetotheSavepage. TheRenamesoftbuttonontheSavepagetakesyouimmediatelytothenamingdialog,where youassignanametotheobjectyouresaving.Youhaventsavedyet,butyoullbeabletoafter youvenamedtheprogram. Thecursorunderlinesthecurrentlyselectedcharacter.Pressthe<<<or>>>softbuttonstomove thecursorwithoutchangingcharacters.Pressanalphanumericbuttononeormoretimesto enteracharacterabovethecursor.Thecharactersthatcorrespondtothealphanumericbuttons arelabeledundereachbutton.Ifthecharacterthatappearsisnottheoneyouwant,pressthe buttonagain.Pressthe+/buttononthealphanumericpadtoswitchbetweenupperandlower casecharacters. Press0oneormoretimestoenterthenumerals0through9.PressClear(onthealphanumeric pad)toerasetheselectedcharacterwithoutmovinganyothercharacters.PresstheDeletesoft buttontoerasetheselectedcharacter.Allcharacterstotherightofthecursorwillmoveone spaceleft.PresstheInsertsoftbuttontoinsertaspaceabovethecursor,movingallcharactersto therightofthecursoronespacetotheright. PresstheCancelsoftbuttonifyoudecidenottonametheobject.PressOKwhenthenameisset thewayyouwanttosaveit. Inadditiontothelettersandnumerals,therearethreesetsofpunctuationcharacters.Theeasiest waytogettothemistopressoneofthealphanumericbuttonstoselectacharacterclosetothe oneyouwant,thenscrolltoitwiththeAlphaWheel.Heresthewholelist: !#$%&()*+,./0123456789 :;<=>?@AthroughZ [\]^_`athroughz.(space). PressingthePlus/Minusbuttonssimultaneouslyisashortcuttothefollowingcharacters: 0,A,aand(space). Ifyourewonderinghowwecameupwiththissequenceofcharacters,itscomposedofASCII characters33through122. WhenyoupressOK,thefinalSavedialogappears,whereyouassignanIDtotheeditedobject. Ifyouchangeyourmindaboutthename,presstheRenamesoftbuttonforanothertry. Note:Foranadditionalnamingmethod,seeKeyboardNamingbelow.

5-3

Editing Conventions Saving and Naming

ROM Objects
IftheobjectyoustartedfromwasaROM(factorypreset)object,thePC3willautomatically suggestthenextavailable(unused)IDastheIDfortheeditedobject.IfthatstheIDyouwant, presstheSavesoftbutton,andtheobjectwillbestoredinmemorywiththatID.Otherwise,you canselectanyIDfrom1tothemaximum.Thispagealsogivesyoutheopportunitytoreturnto thenamingdialog(asdescribedintheprevioussection)or,bypressingtheObjectsoftbutton, toaccesstheObjectUtilities(describedinChapter 13). IfyouselectanIDthatsalreadyinuse,thePC3willtellyouthatyouregoingtoreplacethe ROMobjectthatsalreadybeenassignedthatID.Ifyoudontwanttodothat,youcanselecta differentID.OryoucanpressthePlus/MinusbuttonssimultaneouslytotogglebetweentheID thatthePC3suggestedandtheoriginalID.OrpresstheCancelsoftbuttontocancelthe operation. IfyoudecidenottocancelorchangetheID,andyoupresstheReplacesoftbutton,thePC3will writeyournewlyeditedobjectovertheexistingROMobject.Actually,itonlyappearsthatway, sinceyoucanttrulywritetoROM.TheROMobjectwillreappearifyoudeletethenewlyedited object(therearesoftbuttonsineacheditorfordeletingobjects).

Memory Objects
Iftheoriginalobjectwasamemoryobject,thePC3willassumeyouwanttoreplaceit,andwill suggestthesameIDastheoriginalobject.(InallmodesotherthanSongmode,adiamondicon precedinganitemsIDindicatesamemoryobject).AswithROMobjects,youcancancel, replace,orchangetheIDandsavetoanunusedID.Ifyoureplaceamemoryobject,however,its definitelygone!

5-4

Editing Conventions Saving and Naming

Keyboard Naming
Thekeyboardnamingfeature makesnamingobjects convenient,bylettingyouuse thekeyboard(oryourMIDI controller)toenterthenameof theobjectyouremodifying. WhenyoureinaRename dialog,useeitheroftheChan/ Layerbuttonstochange betweenthekeyboardnaming states:Off(disabled),On,and Adv(Advance). WhensettoOnorAdv,thekeys (MIDInotenumbers,actually) correspondtoallthecharacters shownonpage 53.Thereare alsoequivalentstothecursor movement,insertion,deletion, andOK(Enter)buttons. Onrequiresyoutomovethe cursortoentereachletter,justas youhavetodowhenusingthe normaldataentrymethodsfor naming.Advautomatically movesthecursoronespaceto therighteachtimeyoustrikea key,justlikeatypewriteror computerkeyboard.Thisisthe mostconvenientsetting.
A0 to C8 (Standard 88-note Keyboard)
A0

Move cursor to start of name Move cursor left one space Move cursor right one space (Shift) (Space) a A b B c C d D e E f F g G h H i I j J k K l L m M n N o O p P q Q r R s S t T u U v V w W x X y Y z Z (Space) (Shift) Move cursor left one space Move cursor right one space Move cursor to end of name

C2

Delete; move characters left one space Insert; move characters right one space 1 ! tch Wheel Absolute Value 2 @ 3 #

C3

4 $ 5 % 6 ^ 7 & 8 *

C4

9 ( 0 (zero) ) - (Hyphen) = (Equals) (Backspace) _ (Underscore) +

C5

; (Semicolon) ' (Apostrophe) , (Comma) . (Period) / (Slash) > ? <

: (Colon) '' (Quote)

C6

[ (Left bracket) ` (Back quote) ] (Right bracket) \ (Backslash) (OK, Enter) Delete; move characters left one space Insert; move characters right one space

C7

Use the (Shift) keys or Sustain pedal to enter upper-case and special characters

C8

5-5

Editing Conventions Deleting Objects

Deleting Objects
Withinmosteditors,therearesoftbuttonsfordeletingobjects.Whenyouwanttodeletean object,presstheDeletesoftbutton,andthePC3willaskyouifyouwanttodeletetheobject.(At thispointinthedialog,youcanselectanotherobjectwithanyofthedataentrymethods.)Press OKifyouwanttodeleteit,orpressCancelifyoudont.ThePC3wontletyoudeleteROM objects(alsoknownasfactoryobjects). Memoryobjects,ontheotherhand,aregonewhenyoudeletethem!IfyouvereplacedaROM objectbysavingamemoryobjectwiththesameID,theROMobjectisinvisible,butstillthere. DeletingthememoryobjectstoredatthesameIDwillrestoretheROMobject. Youlloftendeleteobjectstogainmemoryspace,ortoorganizethememorybanksbeforesaving objectstostorage.Todeletemultipleobjects,usetheDeleteObjectsutilityavailableinMaster mode.Itsdescribedonpage 1113.

Dependent Objects
Adependentobjectisanobjectthatslinkedinmemorywithatleastoneotherobject.For example,ifyoucreateasetupthatusesaprogramthatyoualsocreated,thatprogramisa dependentobjectofthesetup. Whenyoustarttodeleteanobjectthathasdependentobjects,theDeletedialoggivesyoua choice:Deletedependentobjects?IfyoupressYes,thePC3willdeletetheobjectandallits dependentobjectswhenyouexecutetheDeletefunction.Inourexample,ifyouweredeleting thesetupyoucreated,andyouchosetodeletedependentobjects,thedependentprogram wouldgetdeletedaswell.IfyoupressNoattheDeletedependentobjects?prompt,thePC3 deletesonlytheobject,butkeepsthedependentobjects.Inourexample,thesetupwouldget deleted,butthedependentprogramwouldremain. Whendeletingobjectsandtheirdependents,thePC3deletesonlythosedependentobjectsthat arentdependentonotherobjectsthatyourenotdeleting.Forexample,supposeyouhavetwo setupsthatcontainthesameprogram.Ifyoudeleteoneofthesetups,anddeletedependent objectswithit,thesetupgetsdeleted,buttheprogramthatscontainedintheothersetup remainsinmemory.

Saving and Loading FilesStorage Mode

Savingafilesimplyinvolvesselectingobjectsoracompletebankofobjectstobestoredasa singlefile.AllobjectswithIDswithinthatrangewillbesavedtothefile.Whenyouloadafile, thePC3asksyouwhichbankwillreceivethefile.Youcanloadafileintoanyofthesixteen banks,regardlessofthebankitwassavedfrom.ThePC3willautomaticallyreassigntheobject IDs. SeeChapter 13formoreinformationonloadingandsavingfiles.

5-6

Editing Conventions Special Button Functions

Special Button Functions

TheModebuttonsandtheChan/Layerbuttonshaveadditionalfunctions,dependingonthe modeoreditoryourein.Thetablebelowdescribessomeofthesespecialbuttonfunctions. Button
Program Mute 1 Setup Mute 3 Q Access Solo Effects FX Bypass

Special Function
Mutes Layer 1 of current program in Program Editor.

Mutes Layer 3 of current program in Program Editor.

Solos current layer in Program Editor.

In Program Editor, bypasses (mutes) current programs FX preset (plays program dry.) In Chain Editor, mutes/unmutes currently selected effects box, and the Effect Mode buttons LED will light when a muted effects box is selected, and unlight when an unmuted effects box is selected. Mutes Layer 2 of current program in Program Editor. Mutes Layer 4 of current program in Program Editor. Mutes active layer of current program in Program Editor. Negates effect of unsaved edits and plays last-saved (unedited) version of object being edited in Program Editor. In Program Editor, these two buttons scroll through layers of current program; in Setup Editor, scroll through zones of current setup; in Quick Access mode, scroll through entries in current Quick Access bank; In Song Mode, change recording track. Whenever cursor is highlighting an editable object or parameter, takes you to corresponding editor or programming page

MIDI Mute 2 Master Mute 4 Song Mute Active Storage Compare Chan / Layer

Edit

5-7

Editing Conventions Special Button Functions

5-8

Program Mode The Program Mode Page

Chapter 6 Program Mode

ProgramsarethePC3sperformancelevelsoundobjects.Theyrepresetsoundsequivalentto thepatches,presets,voices,ormultisthatyoufindonothersynths. ProgrammodeistheheartofthePC3,whereyouselectprogramsforperformanceandediting. ThePC3ispackedwithgreatsounds,butitsalsoasynthesizeroftrulyamazingdepthand flexibility.Whenyourereadytostarttweakingsounds,theProgramEditoristheplacetostart. ThePC3offerstwonewpowerfuleditingfeatures:CascadeModeandDynamicVAST. CascadeModeletsyourouteanylayerofaprogramintotheDSPofanyotherlayer.Anyof the32layersofaprogramcangointoanyotherlayer(seepage 627.) DynamicVASTletsyouwireyourownalgorithms.YoucancombinedifferentDSP functionsinanyorderyoulike,includingparallelandserialconfigurations(seepage 623.)

The Program Mode Page

ThetoplineoftheProgrammodeentrylevelpageshowsyourmodelocation,thecurrentMIDI transposition,theMIDIbanknameandMIDIprogramnumberofthehighlightedprogram,and thecurrentMIDIchannel.

Selecting Programs
WhenyouareinProgrammode,therearethreebasicwaystoselectaPC3program: PressoneoftheBankbuttons(abovetheslidersontheleftsideofthefrontpanel)toselecta bank,thenpressaCategorybuttonandaProgrambuttontochoosewithinthebank.The CategoryandProgrambuttonsareonthefrontpanel,betweenthescreenandthealpha wheel.(SeeProgramandCategoryButtons on page 34formoredetails.) TypetheprogramsID(number)onthealphanumericbuttonpad,thenpressEnter.Ifyou makeamistake,pressClear,thenstartover. ScrollthroughthelistusingtheAlphaWheel,thePlusorMinusbuttonundertheAlpha Wheel,orthecursorbuttons(thearrowbuttonstotherightofthedisplay).

6-1

Program Mode The Program Mode Page

The Soft Buttons in Program Mode

UsetheOctavandOctav+softbuttonstotransposeupordownbyafulloctave.Pressingboth Octavbuttonssimultaneouslyreturnsthetranspositiontoitsoriginalsetting. PressingthePanicsoftbuttonsendsanAllNotesOffmessageandanAllControllersOff messageonall16MIDIchannels. PresstheInfosoftbuttontoseeallofthecontrollerassignmentsofthecurrentprogram.Scroll downthepageusingtheAlphaWheelorthePlus/Minusbuttons. TheXpose/Xpose+buttonsareashortcutforquicktranspositioninsemitone(halfstep) increments.YoucanusethemtotransposetheentirePC3asmuchasthreeoctavesupordown. Thetoplineofthedisplayshowsthecurrentamountoftransposition(Xpose).Pressingboth Xposebuttonssimultaneouslyreturnsthetranspositiontozero.TheXposebuttonstranspose thePC3,aswellasanyMIDIdevicesconnectedtothePC3sMIDIOutport.Changingthe transpositionwiththesoftbuttonsalsochangesthecorrespondingsettingontheMIDImode TRANSMITpage.

The Info Box

TheinfoboxattheleftoftheProgrammodepagegivesyouinformationaboutthecurrent program.Generally,theinfoboxshowsthekeymapassignedtoeachlayer(forKB3programs,the infoboxshowsthekeymapusedfortheuppertonewheels.)Thelinebeneaththenameofthekeymap indicatesthekeyboardrangeofthatlayer.Inthediagramabove,forexample,theresonelayer thatextendsfromC0toC8thedefaultrange.Therepresentationoftheselayerrangesis approximate;theyreintendedtoletyouknowifyouhavealayeredkeyboard(lines overlapping)orasplitkeyboard(linesnotoverlapping).Stereokeymaplayersareindicatedin theinfoboxwithadoublecirclesymbol.Theinfoboxcandisplayuptofourlayersatatime.If thecurrentprogramhasmorethanfourlayers,youcanviewtheirkeymapsbypressingand holdingdowntheEnterbuttonandscrollingwiththeChan/Layerbuttons. Note:ForVASTlayersusingKVAoscillators,theinfoboxmayormaynotshowthenameoftheoscillator beingused.SeeAdvancedUseOfKVAOscillators on page 655formoredetails. TheinfoboxcanalsobesettoshowtheassignmentandcurrentMIDICCvalueforthelast movedcontroller,seeDisplay on page 113fordetails.

Controllers Assignments For Factory ROM Programs

ManyoftheprogramsincludedwiththePC3(factoryROMprograms)canbecontrolledby usingthePC3sphysicalcontrollers(sliders,wheels,switches,pedals,etc.)PresstheInfosoft buttontoseeallofthecontrollerassignmentsofthecurrentprogram.Hereisalistofcontrollers andtheircommonlyassignedprogramparameters: SliderI(MIDI28)SliderIusuallycontrolstheprogramssendleveltoanAuxeffect (usuallyreverbordelay.)Inthiscase,usesliderItocontrolthereverbordelaylevel. SWSwitchTheSWswitchoftenenablesalayer(likestringsforpianoprogram)oran effect. ModWheelTheModWheeloftenworkswiththeparameterassignedtotheSWswitch andcontrolsthelevelofalayerorthelevelorintensityofaneffectsuchastremolo,vibrato, orwah.

SlidersAHSlidersAandBoftencontrolfilterorEQparametersthatchangethe brightnessoftheprogram.SlidersCthroughHusuallycontrolparametersspecifictothe currentprogramsamplitudeenvelopes,layervolumes,andinserteffectparameters.Press theInfosoftbuttontoseeallofthecontrollerassignmentsofthecurrentprogram. SeeAssigningProgramParameterstoControlSources on page 613fordetailsonmakingyourown controllerassignments.

6-2

Program Mode The Program Mode Page

Saving Controller Settings in Program Mode

ManyprogramshaveparametersassignedtothePC3ssliders,modwheel,andtheSWbutton abovethemodwheel.Youcanchangethesettingsofthesecontrollerstochangethesoundofthe currentprogram.Ifyouswitchtoadifferentprogram,thealterationsthatyoumadetothe previousprogramwillbelostwithoutwarning. Tosaveaprogramwithitscurrentcontrollersettings,youmustsaveentryvaluesforthe controllers.Entryvaluesarevaluessentforeachcontrollersettingwhenaprogramisloaded.To captureentryvaluesforthecurrentprogram,presstheEdit buttontotheleftofthedisplayto entertheProgramEditor.Next,usethemoresoftbuttonstofindtheSetCtlsoftbutton,then presstheSetCtlsoftbutton.Lastly,presstheExit buttontotherightofthedisplayandfollow theprompttochooseanID#andsavetheprogram. Similarly,whenusingaKB3program,youcancapturetheentryvaluesforthedrawbars(the sliders)bypressingtheSetDBRsoftbuttonintheKB3programeditor.

The Arpeggiator In Program Mode

InProgramMode,youcanuseanarpeggiatorfortheProgramonthecurrentlyselectedMIDI channel.ThearpeggiatorcanbeturnedonandoffbypressingtheArp buttonabovethewheels (solongasthedefaultControlSetupisbeingused,seeControlSetupbelowfordetails.) Toaccessthearpeggiatorparameters,presstheArpandSWbuttons(abovethewheels) simultaneously.SeeTheARPEGGIATORPage on page 742fordetailsonthearpeggiator parameters.ThearpeggiatorplaysatthetemposetontheTEMPOpage.Presstheleftandright cursorbuttonssimultaneouslytoviewtheTEMPOpage(seeTEMPO on page 1110fordetails.) InProgramMode,youcanchangetheprogramonthecurrentMIDIchannel,orchangethe currentMIDIchannel,andthecurrentarpeggiatorsettingswillremainthesame.Ifyouenter SetupModeandthenreturntoProgramMode,thearpeggiatorinProgramModewillbe returnedtoitsdefaultsettings.ThedefaultsettingsforthearpeggiatorinProgramModeareset onZone1oftheControlSetup(seeControlSetupbelowfordetails.) Note:SettingsforthearpeggiatorinProgramModearenotsavedwitheachprogram.Settings forthearpeggiatorinProgramModecanonlybesavedbyeditingarpeggiatorsettingsforZone 1oftheControlSetup.Becausearpeggiatorsettingsarenotsavedwitheachprogram,Setup Modeshouldbeusedwhenyouwishtosaveaprogramwithspecificarpeggiatorsettings.A Setupcancontainupto16programs,eachwiththeirownarpeggiatorsettings(seeChapter 7, SetupModefordetails.)

MIDI Channels
ToselectaMIDIchanneltouseinProgrammode,usetheChan/Layerbuttonsattheleftofthe display.ThecurrentMIDIchannelisdisplayedinthetoprightcorneroftheProgrammode mainpage.NotesplayedonthePC3keyboardaresenttotheMIDIoutportonthecurrently selectedMIDIchannel.ForbasicuseofProgrammode(playingasingleProgram,)theMIDI channelcanusuallybeignored.FormultitimbraluseofProgrammode(playingmultiple differentprogramsatonce,)selecteachMIDIchannelthenselectaProgramforeach.In Programmode,whensendingMIDIdatatothePC3fromanexternalMIDIdevice,thePC3can playupto16differentprogramsatonce(oneoneachMIDIchannel.)SeeSave on page 1117for detailsonsavingtheProgramselectionforeachchannel.Formoreadvancedmultitimbral featuresandeasiersavingandrecallingofmultitimbralprogramselections,seeChapter 7,Setup Mode,andChapter 12,SongModeandtheSongEditor.

6-3

Program Mode VAST and KB3 Programs

VAST and KB3 Programs

ItisimportanttounderstandthedifferencebetweenVASTprogramsandKB3programs. VASTprogramscontainupto32layers,eachofwhichcontainsakeymaporKVAoscillator. Keymapsconsistsofanumberofsamplesassignedtoaparticularkeyboardrange.KVA oscillatorsusepowerfulDSPtogeneratearangeofsimpleandcomplexwaveforms(seeEditing VASTProgramsWithKVAOscillators on page 653formoredetails.)SeeVASTProgram Structure belowformoredetailsonVASTprograms. KB3programsuseamuchdifferentarchitecture.Therearenolayersoralgorithms,justasetof oscillators(designedtoemulatethetonewheelsinaHammondOrgan)thatstartrunningas soonasyouselectaKB3program.SeeKB3ProgramStructure on page 66formoredetailson KB3programs.

VAST Program Structure

Figure 61 on page 65depictsthehierarchyofaVASTprogram,fromindividualsamplesallthe wayuptosetups,whichcancontainupto16programs. EveryVASTprogramcontainsatleastonelayer,andcancontainupto32layers.Alayerconsists ofakeymapandanalgorithmforprocessingthesamplescontainedinthekeymap.Eachsample isaseparatedigitalrecordingofsomekindofsound:musicalinstruments,vocals,synthesizers, soundeffects,andmore.Individualsamplesareassignedtospecifickeyranges(fromA2toD3, forexample),andarealsoassignedtobetriggeredatspecificattackvelocities.These assignmentsconstitutethekeymap. Whenyoutriggeranote,thePC3lookstothekeymapofeachlayerofthecurrentlyactiveVAST program(s)todeterminewhichsamplestoplay.Thesoundenginethenfetchestherequested samplesandgeneratesadigitalsignalrepresentingthesoundofthesamples.Thissignalfirst passesthroughtheDSPfunctionsofanalgorithm(possiblymultiplealgorithmsifcascademodeis beingused,seepage 627fordetails.)Last,thesignalmayormaynotpassthroughthePC3seffects processorbeforegoingtooneormoreoftheaudiooutputs. ThelayeristheVASTprogramsbasicunitofpolyphony,thatis,eachlayerconstitutesoneofthe 128voicechannelsthePC3canactivateatanytime.Ifyouhaveaprogramthatconsistsoftwo layerscoveringthenoterangefromA0toC8,eachkeyyoustriketriggerstwovoicechannels. Note:OneexceptiontothisstructureiswhenusingaKVAoscillator,thesoundsourceforthatlayeris notderivedfromakeymap,butisgeneratedatthealgorithmstage(thoughkeymapinformationisstill usedtosetkeyrangeandmaximumamplitude.)Afterthis,thestructureisthesameasdescribedabove. SeeEditingVASTProgramsWithKVAOscillators on page 653formoredetails.

6-4

Program Mode VAST Program Structure

Zone 1

Zone 2

Zone 3

Zone 4

Zone 5

Zone 6

Zone 7

Zone 8

16 keyboard zones each with independent program, MIDI channel, and control assignments

Selected for performance and editing in Program mode; up to 32 layers per program

A keymap processed through an algorithm, modulated by control sources

Up to 128 sample roots, assigned to play at programmable key and velocity ranges

Individual digital sound recordings stored in ROM; stereo samples use two voices of polyphony

Figure 6-1

VAST Program Structure

6-5

Program Mode KB3 Program Structure

KB3 Program Structure

TheresnothingquitelikethesoundoftheclassicHammondB3tonewheelorgan,especially whenplayedthroughaLeslierotatingspeakersystem.Wevedoneextensivetestingand analysiswithseveraltonewheelorgans,andcreatedourownmodelstoemulatetheunique tonewheelsound.Weeventookintoaccountthewaythatolderorgansstarttosounddifferent (andarguablybetter)astheircapacitorsbegintoleakandweincludedaparameterthatlets youvarytheamountofgrunge(leakage)inyoursound. KB3programsuseoscillatorstoemulatethetonewheelsound.Eachoscillatoroperates independently,andhasitsownpitchandamplitudecontrol.Youcancontrolhowmany oscillatorsareusedforaKB3program.Therearetwooscillatorspervoice,foratotalof256.You canuseupto91oftheminaKB3program(the92ndisreservedtoproducekeyclick).Because theoscillatorsstartrunningassoonasyouselectaKB3program,therearealwaysvoices availableunlikeVASTprograms,whichstartstealingnoteswhenyoureachthepolyphony limit. Theoscillatorswellcallthemtonewheelsfromhereonaredividedintoanupperandlower group.TheuppertonewheelsusethesamplesinthePC3skeymapstogeneratesound,while thelowertonewheelsusesinewaves.YoucanchangethekeymapofaKB3programsupper tonewheelstoproducealargearrayofsounds.Bychangingthekeymapfromsinetoasaw waveitispossibletoemulatethesoundofclassiccomboorgansliketheVoxandFarfisa models. KB3programsarealsoroutedthroughvibrato,rotaryspeaker,preampanddistortioneffects, seebelowfordetails.

KB3 Mode
KB3programsaredifferentenoughfromVASTprogramsthatweusethetermKB3modeto describewhatsgoingonwhenyouplayaKB3program.WheneveryouplayaKB3program, youareinKB3mode.TheblueLEDintheKB3buttonwilllightwhenthecurrentprogramisa KB3program.YoucanplayKB3programsonlyonasinglechannelatatime. IfyouwanttocreateyourownKB3program,startbyeditinganexistingKB3program.

KB3 Effects And Real-time Controls

YouhaverealtimecontrolovermanycomponentsofKB3programsdirectlyfromthefront panel.Theslidersemulatethedrawbarsthataresoessentialtothetonewheelsound,whilethe buttonsabovethem(theBankButtons)cancontroltheKB3effects:Leslie,vibrato,chorus,and percussion.WhenusingaKB3programinSetupMode,youmustsettheMutesparameterto KB3ControlinordertousetheBankbuttonsforcontrollingKB3effects(seeMutes on page 766 fordetails.) Drawbars Oneofthestandardperformancefeaturesofmanytonewheelorgansisthesetofdrawbarsfor emulatingthestopsonapipeorgan.Movingthedrawbarscontrolstheamplitudeofeitherthe fundamentalsortheharmonicsofthenotes.ThePC3sslidersserveastheninedrawbarsfound onmosttonewheelorgans.Pushingtheslidersupistheequivalentofpushingthedrawbarsin (removingfundamentalsorharmonics).
Subharmonics 16' Slider A 5 /3' Slider B
1

Fundamental 8' Slider C

Harmonics 4' Slider D 2 2/3' Slider E 2' Slider F 1 3/5' Slider G 1 1/3' Slider H 1' Slider I

Table 6-1

Standard Drawbar Settings for the Hammond B3

6-6

Program Mode KB3 Program Structure

KB3 Mode Effects Buttons (Bank Buttons) WhenusingaKB3program,theBankbuttons(abovethesliders)controlKB3effects,insteadof choosingprogrambanksastheyusuallydoinprogrammode.TheKB3functionislabeled beloweachbutton,theirLEDsindicatethestatusofthevariouseffectsforthecurrentKB3 program.Thisstatusissavedaspartofeachprogram.Youcanchangetheeffectsinrealtimeby pressingthebuttons. TheKB3effectsreturntotheirprogrammedsettingsthenexttimeyouselecttheprogram.If, however,youreintheProgramEditorwhenyouchangetheeffects,youreactuallyeditingthe program.(EacheffectalsohasacorrespondingparameterintheProgramEditor,seethetablebelow.)If youlikethechanges,youcansavetheprogramwiththenewKB3effectssettings.Ifyoudont likethechanges,youcanexitwithoutsaving,andtheprogramwillreverttoitsprevious settings. InKB3modetheBankbuttonsalsorespondtoandsendMIDIControllermessages.SeeTable 6 3onpage 68fordetails.

Effect Category Rotary Vibrato

Button Name

LED Color (relative to button name/ state) red/green red/off red/green green/orange/red red/off red/green red/green red/green

Corresponding Page and Parameter MISC: SpeedCtl MISC: VibChorCtl MISC: VibChorSel MISC: VibChorSel PERC: Percussion PERC: Volume PERC: Decay PERC: Harmonic

Comments

Fast / Slow On / Off Chorus / Vibrato Depth 1 / 2 / 3 On / Off Volume Loud / Soft Decay Fast / Slow Pitch High / Low

Disabled if Button 2 is off Disabled if Button 2 is off Disabled if Button 5 is off Disabled if Button 5 is off Disabled if Button 5 is off

Percussion

Table 6-2

KB3 Mode Effects Buttons and Corresponding Parameters

Additional Controller Assignments In KB3 Mode OtherdefaultassignmentsforfactoryKB3programsinclude: CCPedal1(volume)controlspreampvolume,whichemulatesthevolumecontrolofanorgan preamp.ThePreampRespparametermustbesettoOnforthistowork(thedefaultsetting.)See PreampResp on page 667fordetails. TheModWheelcontrolsDistortionDrive. SwitchPedal1(sustain)controlstheSpeedCtlparameter,whichtogglestheRotaryspeed betweensloworfast.SeeSpeedCtl on page 668fordetails.Thishasthesameeffectasusing BankButton1(labeledRotaryFast/Slow.)

6-7

Program Mode KB3 Program Structure

MIDI Control of KB3 Programs

Controller Numbers Table 63liststheMIDIControllernumbersthatcontrolKB3features.Sendthelistedcontroller numberandappropriatecontrollervaluetocontroleachKB3featureviaMIDI.ThePC3also sendstheseControllernumberstoitsMIDIOutportwhenusingeachoftheseKB3features. MIDI Controller Number
1

KB3 Program Feature

Distortion Drive (Mod Wheel)

Values
0 = Minimum Distortion Drive. 127 = Maximum Distortion Drive. Values between 0 and 127 scale between minimum and maximum Distortion Drive. 0 = Minimum Preamp volume. 127 = Maximum Preamp volume. Values between 0 and 127 scale between minimum and maximum volume. With Steps parameter set to (0-8) (See Steps on page 6-61 for details) 0-13 = volume 8 14-27 = volume 7 28-41 = volume 6 42-55 = volume 5 56-70 = volume 4 71-84 = volume 3 85-98 = volume 2 99-112 = volume 1 113-127 = volume 0 With Steps parameter set to (0-127) (See Steps on page 6-61 for details) 127 = minimum volume. 0 = maximum volume. Values between 127 and 0 scale between minimum and maximum volume. 64-127 = On, 0-63 = Off 54-71 72-89 90-127 0-17 18-35 36-53 = select chorus with depth 1 = select chorus with depth 2 = select chorus with depth 3 = select vibrato with depth 1 = select vibrato with depth 2 = select vibrato with depth 3 64-127 = On, 0-63 = Off 64-127 = Loud, 0-63 = Soft 64-127 = Fast, 0-63 = Slow 64-127 = High, 0-63 = Low 0 = -96 dB. 127 = Maximum Key Click Level set in Editor. Values between 0 and 127 scale between -96 dB and maximum Key Click Level. 0 = -96 dB. 127 = 0 dB. Values between 0 and 127 scale between -96 dB and 0 dB.

Preamp Volume (Volume/Expression Pedal)

11

Drawbar1 Drawbar2 Drawbar3 Drawbar4 Drawbar5 Drawbar6 Drawbar7 Drawbar8 Drawbar9

6 13 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

Rotating Speaker Fast/Slow Chorus/Vibrato On/Off Chorus/Vibrato Selector and Chorus/Vibrato Depth

68 95 93

64-127 = Fast, 0-63 = Slow

Percussion On/Off Percussion Loud/Soft Percussion Decay Fast/Slow Percussion Pitch High/Low Key Click Level

73 71 70 72 89

Leakage Level

90

Table 6-3

KB3 MIDI Controller Assignments

6-8

Program Mode Control Setup

Control Setup
Control Setup Overview
TheControlSetupisaSetupobjecteditedandstoredinSetupModebutusedbyProgram Mode.TheControlSetupdefinestheCCdestinationsforthePC3sphysicalcontrollers(wheels, sliders,pedals,etc.)inProgrammode.TheseassignmentsaretheMIDICCnumbersthatthePC3s physicalcontrollerssendwhileinProgrammode.ParametersintheProgramEditorcanthenbe assignedtorespondtotheseCCnumbers.SeetheFigure 62belowforavisualdepictionofthe ControlSetupsrolewhileinProgramMode.Seethesectionsonpage 611fordetailson physicalcontrollerdestinationsandprogramparametersources. TheprogramsinthePC3factoryROMhaveparametersassignedtorespondtothecontroller destinationsofthedefaultControlSetup(126 Internal Voices).Thereforeyoullwanttouse 126 Internal VoicesastheControlSetupinmostcases. Note:IfyoudontusethedefaultControlSetup,assignedparametersinthePC3sfactory ROMprogramswillprobablynotrespondtothePC3sphysicalcontrollers.Donteditthe ControlSetupunlessyouareanadvancedMIDIuserandknowwhatyouredoing. AdvancedusersmaywishtouseadifferentcontrolsetupiftheyneedtosendspecificMIDI controllernumberstotheMIDIoutportwheninProgrammode.Youcanalsoprogramseveral differentcontrolsetupsandswitchamongthemfordifferentapplications. Table 64belowshowswhichpagesandparametersintheSetupEditoroftheControlSetup haveaneffectonProgramsinProgrammode.AsidefromassigningMIDICCdestinationsfor thePC3sphysicalcontrollers,theControlSetupallowsyoutosetotheravailableparametersfor eachphysicalcontroller,suchasScale,Curve,Add,andSwitchType(seeContinuousController Parameters on page 729fordetailsontheseparameters.) Default Control Setup: PC3s Physical Controllers Setup Mode Setup ID#: 126: Internal Voices Setup Editor Controller Destinations: Slider A (Data) Switch Pedal 1 (sustain) (Continues for all controllers.) SlidA sends Dest: Data (MIDI CC 6) FOOT SWITCH 1 sends OnControl/OffControl: Sustain (MIDI CC 64) Program Mode Program Program Editor Parameter Control Sources: Source: Data (CC 6) (parameter is controlled by the physical controller that is sending MIDI CC 6) Source: Sustain (CC 64) (parameter is controlled by the physical controller that is sending MIDI CC 64)

Figure 6-2

Examples Of How The Control Setup Defines The PC3s Physical Controller Assignments While In Program Mode

6-9

Program Mode Control Setup

Control Setup Advanced Features

Thecontrolsetupcanalsobeusedtosetotherparameterswhichaffectprogrammode.See Chapter 7,SetupModefordetailsoneachoftheseparameters: VelocityscalingcanbesetintheSetupEditorwithparametersontheKEYVELpage. ThoughamastervelocitymapcanbesetwiththeVelocityMapparameterontheMaster ModeMAPSpage(seepage 114,)settingvelocityscalingintheControlSetupprovides moreoptions. ProgrammableswitchdestinationscanbesetontheSetupEditorPRGSWITCHpages.In Programmode,theProgrammableSwitchesactasProgramSelectbuttonsifnoneofthem areassignedtoadestinationinthecontrolsetup.IfatleastoneProgrammableSwitchis assignedinthecontrolsetup,thentheassignedProgrammableSwitchbuttonsactas assigned,butnoneofthebuttonsfunctionasprogramselectbuttons. RibbonsettingscanbesetontheSetupEditorRIBBONandRIBBONCONFIGURpages. MIDIaftertouchcanbeturnedoffontheSetupEditorPRESSUREpagebysettingtheDest fieldtoOFF. OntheCH/PROGpageyoucansettheBankModewhichdeterminesthetypeofMIDIbank messagesthatProgramModewillsendtotheUSBandMIDIoutportswhenchanging programs.SeeProgramChange(ProgChang) on page 104todisablethePC3fromsending programchangemessages. TheDestinationparameterontheCH/PROGpagedetermineswhereMIDImessagesare sent.UsuallythisshouldbekeptatitsdefaultsettingUSB_MIDI+MIDI+LOCAL,andthe MIDImessagedestinationforProgrammodeshouldbesetwiththeDestinationparameter ontheMIDIModeTransmitpage(seepage 102fordetails.)TheDestinationparameteron theCH/PROGpageworksincombinationwiththeDestinationparameterontheMIDI ModeTransmitpage.ForexampleiftheDestinationparameterontheCH/PROGpageisset toMIDI+LOCAL,thenMIDImessageswillnotbesenttotheUSBport,evenif USB_MIDI+MIDI+LOCALisselectedfortheDestinationparameterontheMIDIMode Transmitpage.

Selecting And Editing The Control Setup

ThecurrentcontrolsetupcanbeselectedontheMIDIModeTransmitpageusingthe ControlSetupparameter. Toeditthecurrentcontrolsetup,selecttheControlSetupparameterontheMIDIModeTransmit page,thenpresstheEditbuttontotheleftofthedisplay.YoucanalsoselectthesetupinSetup ModeandthenpresstheEditbuttontotheleftofthedisplay.Ifyoueditoroverwritethedefault ControlSetup(126 Internal Voices),youcanalwaysrecalltheoriginalcontrolsetupbydeleting thesetupstoredatID#126.Thiswillreturnthesetuptoitsdefaultsettings.Youcandeletea setupbyusingtheDeletesoftbuttonintheSetupEditor. WhenselectingoreditingtheControlSetup,onlyZone1ofthesetuphasaneffectonprogram mode.(Zones216arenotrelevantinProgramMode,becausethePC3sphysicalcontrollerscanonly controloneMIDIchannelatatimeinProgramMode.)SeeTable 64belowforwhichpagesand parametersintheSetupEditoroftheControlSetuphaveanaffectonProgramsinProgram Mode. Note:TheControlSetupdoesntaffectthesoundofaprogram,onlytheassignmentsofcertain physicalcontrollers.Thesamplesandkeymapsassignedtoaprogramareunaffectedbythe ControlSetup.WhileyoureinProgrammode,thePC3ignorestheprogramsassignedtothe setupthatyouchoseastheControlSetup.

6-10

Program Mode Control Setup

Control SetupSetup Editor Page (Zone 1)

CH/PROG KEY-VEL PAN-VOL BEND COMMON ARPEGGIATOR RIBBON CONFIGUR Continuous Controller assignment pages (SLIDER, SLID2, CONT.PEDALS, RIBBON, WHEEL, PRESS) Switch Controller assignment pages (FOOT SWITCH 1-3, SWITCH ARP, SWITCH SW, PRG SWITCH 1-8)

Parameters Affecting Program Mode

Arpeggiator, Destination, BankMode All ExitVolume, ExitPan AuxBend1Up, AuxBend1Dwn, AuxBend2Rng Tempo, ArpSync All All Dest, Scale, Add, Curv Type, OnControl, OnValue, OffControl, OffValue, EntryState

Table 6-4

Control Setup Parameters Affecting Program Mode

About PC3 Physical Controller Destinations PC3physicalcontrollerstransmitcontrollermessagesconsistingofadestinationandavalue. Thedestinationallowsthephysicalcontrollertobeidentified,whilethevaluerepresentsthe currentstateofthephysicalcontroller(buttonon/off,slidersetting,etc.)Eachdestinationcanbe identifiedasanumber(thoughsomedestinationsaredisplayedinthePC3asthenameoftheirdefault use.)DestinationscanbeMIDIcontinuouscontrollernumbers(0127)orPC3internal destinations(128andabove.)Forsimplicity,wewillrefertobothofthesetypesofdestinations asCCnumbers,orCCs(continuouscontrollernumbers.) Bydefault,physicalcontrollerdestinations0127aretransmittedinternallytoprogram parameters,andtotheUSBandMIDIOutportsasMIDIcontinuouscontrollernumbers(see Destination on page 102tochangethisbehavior.) Physicalcontrollerdestinations128andaboveareonlytransmittedinternallytoprogram parameters.Destinationsabove127cannotbeassignedasaprogramparametercontrolsource. Somedestinationsabove127willstillaffectProgramModeeventhoughtheycannotbe assignedasaprogramparametercontrolsource.Forexample,destination133Tempoalways controlsthesystemtempo.Inthecontrolsetup,settingaslidertodestination133Tempowould makethatslideralwayscontrolsystemtempowhileinProgrammode.Thismightbeusefulto changethetempowhenusingthearpeggiatorinProgrammode,thoughthesliderwouldntbe abletocontrolanythingelseinProgrammode.SeeTheControllerDestinationList on page 721 fordetailsoneachcontrollerdestination. About Program Parameter Sources Inprogrammode,whenyouwanttocontrolaparameterwithaphysicalcontroller,yousetthe parameterssourcefieldtothedestination thatthephysicalcontrollerissendingto.Forexample, bydefaultthedestinationfortheModWheelisCC1.IfyouselectasourcefieldintheProgram Editor,thenpress1followedbytheEnter button,thatparameterwillbecontrolledbytheMod Wheel.Inthiscase,theparametercouldalsobecontrolledbyCC1beingsentfromanexternal MIDIdevice. Youcanassignadestinationtoasourcefieldbyselectingthesourcefield,holdingtheEnter button,thenmovingthephysicalcontrollerthatyouwanttouse.FormostofthePC3sphysical controllers,theirdestinationnameinthesourcefieldisdisplayedwiththenameofthe controlleronthePC3sfrontpanel.

6-11

Program Mode Editing VAST Programs

Editing VAST Programs

TheProgramEditoriswhereyoubegintomodifythePC3sresidentsounds,andtobuildyour ownsoundsaroundsamplekeymapsorKVAoscillators(seeEditingVASTProgramsWithKVA Oscillators on page 653forsomedifferences.)Theresvirtuallynolimittothesoundsyoucan createusingthetoolsintheProgramEditor. Note:ThissectiondescribestheProgramEditorasitappliestoVASTprograms.SeeEditingKB3 Programs on page 659forinformationabouteditingKB3programs. ToentertheProgramEditor,startinProgrammodeandpressEdit.TheProgrammodeLED willgoout,andtheKEYMAP(Keymap)pagewillappear.

Thetoplineofthedisplaygivesyoutheusualreminderofyourlocation.Italsotellsyouwhich layeryoureviewing,andhowmanylayersthereareintheprogram.Youcanusethe Chan/Layerbuttonstoscrollthroughthelayers,iftheprogramhasmorethanone. Heresamethodforjumpingquicklytoaspecificlayerinaprogramitsespeciallyusefulin multilayereddrumprograms.HoldtheEnterbuttonandstrikeakey.Thedisplaywillshowthe layer(s)assignedtothatkey.Ifmorethanonelayerisassignedtothesamekey,repeatedly strikingthekey(whilecontinuingtoholdtheEnterbutton)willcyclethroughalllayers assignedtothatkey.ThismethodwillworkinmostplaceswithintheProgramEditor,butthere isanexception:iftheparameteryouhavehighlightedhasanotenumberorcontrolsourceasits value,thenholdingEnterandstrikinganotewillcallupthatnoteorcontrolsource.Forall otherparameters,however,thismethodwillswitchbetweenlayers.

The Soft Buttons in the Program Editor

TheProgramEditorssoftbuttonsarelabeledbythewordsthatappearinthebottomlineofthe display.ThesebuttonshavetwoimportantjobsintheProgramEditor:selectingpages,and selectingspecificfunctions.Ifasoftbuttonislabeledinalluppercaseletters,pressingitwilltake youtothepageitdescribes.Ifthebuttonislabeledinmixeduppercaseandlowercaseletters, pressingitwillexecutethesoftwarefunctiondescribedbythelabel.PressingtheLAYERsoft button,forexample,willtakeyoutotheLayerpage,whilepressingtheSavesoftbuttonwill initiatetheprocessforsavingthecurrentlyselectedprogram. TherearemorepagesandfunctionsintheProgramEditorthantherearesoftbuttons.Therefore, twoofthesoftbuttonsarededicatedtoscrollingthroughthelistofpagesandfunctions.Ifyou dontseethebuttonforthepageorfunctionyouwanttoselect,pressoneofthesoftbuttons labeledmore,andthelabelswillchange.Thisdoesntchangethecurrentlyselectedpage,it merelychangestheselectionofavailablesoftbuttons.

6-12

Program Mode Editing VAST Programs

TwoofthesoftbuttonsintheProgramEditorarespecialcases.Theyrethesoftbuttonsthat selecttheeditingpagesforthefirstandlastDSPfunctions(PitchandLevel,respectively)ofthe currentprogramsalgorithm.OneofthesesoftbuttonsislabeledPITCH,andpressingitwill takeyoutotheDSPCTL(DSPControl)pagewiththePitchparameterhighlighted.Theother oneofthesesoftbuttonsislabeledAMP,andpressingitwilltakeyoutotheDSPCTLpagewith theLevelparameterhighlighted.Additionally,pressingtheDSPCTLsoftbuttonwilltakeyou totheDSPCTLpage.

The MODE Buttons in the Program Editor

WhenintheProgrameditor,eachoftheMODEselectbuttonhasadifferentfunction.Beside eachbuttonisthenameofitsfunctionintheProgrameditor.Whenactivated,thebuttonsLED willlightup. Mute 1, 2, 3, and 4 EachofthetopfourMODEselectbuttonsservetomuteoneofthecurrentprogramsfirstfour layers.PressingtheProgrambuttonmuteslayer1,pressingtheMIDIbuttonmuteslayer2, pressingtheSetupbuttonmuteslayer3,andpressingtheMasterbuttonmuteslayer4. Solo PressingtheQAccessbuttonsolosthecurrentlayer. Mute Active PressingtheSongbuttonmutesthecurrentlayer. FX Bypass PressingtheEffectbuttonbypassesalleffects.Note,however,thatifeitheroftheAuxOverrides inEffectsmodeareactive,thenthoseeffectsarestillapplied. Compare PressingtheStoragebuttoncallsuptheCompareEditor,whichrecallstheprogrampreedit settings,allowingyoutocompareyoureditedprogramwiththeoriginalprogram.Pressingthe StoragebuttonagainreturnsyoutotheProgrameditor.UsingtheCompareEditormakesno changestothecurrentprogram.

Assigning Program Parameters to Control Sources

ManyPC3programparameterscanbeassignedtobecontrolledbythePC3sphysical controllersorbyMIDICCsfromanexternalMIDIdevice.Fordetailsoncontrollableparameters ofVASTprograms,seethefollowingsections:TheDSPModulation(DSPMOD) Page on page 630,TheLFOPage on page 638,TheASRPage on page 640,TheFunction(FUN) Page on page 641,TheEnvelopeControl(ENVCTL)Page on page 645,TheMOD Pages on page 910,andFXLFO,FXASR,andFXFUNpages on page 911.ForKB3programs,see thefollowingsections:ThePITCHPage on page 621,TheAMPPage on page 621,KB3Editor:The LFO,ASR,andFUNPages on page 670,TheMODPages on page 910,andFXLFO,FXASR,and FXFUNpages on page 911. Foreachprogram,theProgramEditorcanbeusedtoassignthePC3sphysicalcontrollersor externalMIDIcontrollerCCnumberstocontrolparameters.Controllableparameterseachhave asourcefield.Makeassignmentstothesourcefieldforthedesiredparameter.Sourcefieldsare nameddifferentlydependingontheirpage:Src1,Src2,RateCt,Trigger,Inputa,Inputb,and Source.ToassignaPC3physicalcontroller,selectthesourcefieldfortheparameter,holdthe Enterbuttonandmovethecontroller.ToassignaCCnumbertoasourcefield,enterthenumber withthealphanumericpad,thenpressEnter.ACCnumberforanexternalcontrollercanalsobe setbyselectingthesourcefieldfortheparameter,holdingtheEnterbutton,andsendingaCC valuefromtheexternalMIDIcontroller.WhenassigningaCCnumbertoasourcefield,the numbermaybedisplayedinthesourcefieldasthenameofthatCCsdefaultuse.

6-13

Program Mode The KEYMAP Page

The KEYMAP Page

PresstheKEYMAPsoftbuttontocalluptheKEYMAPpage.Theparametersonthispageaffect samplerootselection,i.e.,whichsamplesareplayedonwhichkeys.

Parameter Keymap Transpose Key Tracking Velocity Tracking Alt Method Stereo Timbre Shift Playback Mode Alt Control

Range of Values Keymap List -128 to 127 semitones 2400 cents per key 7200 cents Switched, Continuous Off, On 60 semitones Norm, Rvrs, Bidirectional, Noise Control Source List

Default 1 Piano f Left 0 100 0 Switched Off 0 Normal Off

Keymap
AssignakeymapfromROMtothecurrentlayer.Keymapsarecollectionsofsamplesassigned tonoteandvelocityranges.

Transpose (Xpose)
Transposethecurrentkeymapupasmuchas127semitones(tenoctavesandaperfectfifth)or downasmuchas128semitones(tenoctavesandaminorsixth).

Key Tracking (KeyTrk)

ThisisoneofthesixcommonDSPcontrolparameters.OntheKEYMAPpage,keytracking affectstheintervalbetweennotes.Thedefaultvalueof100cents(acentisahundredthofa semitone)givesyouthenormalsemitoneintervalbetweeneachnote.Highervaluesincreasethe interval;lowervaluesdecreaseit.Negativevalueswillcausethepitchtodecreaseasyouplay highernotes. Whenyoumakechangestothisparameter,youllneedtokeepinmindthatKeyTrkonthe KEYMAPpageworksinconjunctionwithKeyTrkonthePITCHpage.Therefore,youllneedto checktheKeyTrkvalueonbothpagestoseehowkeytrackingworkswithinaprogram.Unless yourelookingfornonstandardnoteintervals,thevaluesoftheKeyTrkparametersonthe PITCHandKEYMAPpagesshouldaddupto100cents.

6-14

Program Mode The KEYMAP Page

Velocity Tracking (VelTrk)

ThisisanothercommonDSPcontrolparameter.AswiththeotherparametersontheKEYMAP page,thisshiftsthepositionofthekeymap.Differentattackvelocitieswillplaydifferentpitch shiftsofthesamplerootassignedtothatnoterange.Iftheshiftisgreatenough,thenexthigher orlowersamplerootwillbeplayed,whichinsomecases(manydrumprograms,forexample) willplayanentirelydifferentsound.Positivevalueswillplayhigherpitchesofthesampleroot whenyouusehardattackvelocities(theyshiftthekeymapdownward),whilenegativevalues willplaylowerpitches.

Method (AltMethod)
SeeAlternativeSwitch(AltControlandAltMethod)below.

Stereo
Youllusethisparameterwhenyoureworkingwithstereosamples. WhenyousetthisparametertoOn,theKEYMAPpagechangesslightly:

AnadditionalKeymapparameterappears.Thetwokeymapparametersaredistinguishedas Keymap1andKeymap2.TheKEYMAPpageparameterswillaffectbothkeymaps.Whenthe StereoparameterissettoOn,theOUTPUTpageforthecurrentlayerwillshowanadditional pairofPanparameters. ThePC3containsbothstereoandmonosamples.Keymapsdesignedforstereousearelabeled withnamesbeginningwithStereoorendinginLeft,Right,L,orR.Forstereo keymapplayback,setStereoOnandassigncorrespondingLeftandRightkeymapsto Keymap1andKeymap2respectively.ForkeymapsbeginningwithStereo,assignthesame keymaptobothKeymap1andKeymap2.IfyouselectthesamekeymapforKeymap1and Keymap2,thePC3automaticallyusestheleftsideforKeymap1andtherightsideforKeymap2. Onceyouhavethekeymapsassigned,gototheOUTPUTpageandsetthepanningforeach sampleasdesired.Keepinmindthatusingstereokeymapsreducesthepolyphonyofthe program.Forexample,ifyouhadatwolayerprogramwithstereokeymapsineachlayer,each noteyouplaywoulduse4ofyour128voices,allowingatotalof32notesbeforeallthevoices havebeenused. Ifyourenotusingstereosamples,youshouldsetthisparametersvaluetoOff.

6-15

Program Mode The KEYMAP Page

Timbre Shift
Thisparameterworksonlyonmultisamplekeymaps,andchangestherootselectionforeach keyyouplay.Withthisparameteryoucanradicallyalterthecurrentlayerstimbre(basicsound characteristics).Thenatureofthechangedependsonthetimbreitself,sothisparametercallsfor experimentation.Basically,timbreshiftingchangesanotestimbrebyimposingdifferent harmonicqualitiesontothenote.Atimbreshiftednoteretainsitsoriginalpitch,butits harmonicsarethoseofthesametimbreatahigherorlowerpitch.Positivevaluesforthis parametertendtobrightenasound,whilenegativevaluesdarken. Heresanexample.Ifyoushiftthetimbreup4semitones,thenplayingC4willresultinthepitch C4,butwillactuallyplaythesamplenormallyassignedtoG#3,andshiftitspitchupfour semitones.Thiswillincreasetheplaybackrateofthesample,soalthoughthepitchremains normal,thetimbreisbrighter.YoudgetthesameeffectbysettingtheXposeparameteronthe KEYMAPpageto4semitones,thensettingtheAdjustonthePITCHpageto+4semitones.For multisamplelayerswithnarrowkeyranges,largeamountsoftimbreshiftingwillcause differentsamplerootstobeplayedback.

Playback Mode
Thisgivesyounumerousoptionsformanipulatingthesamplesinthecurrentlayerasyou triggerthem.Normalleavesthesamplesunaffected,whileReverseplaystheminreverse.Ata valueofReverse,thesampleswillcontinuetoloopaslongasnotesaresustained.Toplaythem justonceinreverse,youwouldadjustthelengthofthelayersamplitudeenvelope(explained laterinthischapter).BiDirect(bidirectional)causesthesamplestoloopinfinitely,alternating betweennormalandreversedplayback.Noisereplacesthesampleswithawhitenoise generator.

Alternative Controller (AltControl)

SeeAlternativeSwitch(AltControlandAltMethod)below.

Alternative Switch (AltControl and AltMethod)

Many,butnotall,PC3samplerootshavebeenpreassignedacarefullychosenalternatesample startpointthatcanbeselectedusingtheAlternateSwitchfeature(AltControlandAltMethod parameters).Thisfeatureallowsyoutocontrolthesampleplaybackstart/endtimetriggeredby anycontrolsource.(Thealternatesamplestartpointcanbeadjustedbyeditingasample,see EditingSamples on page 149andTheTRIMPage on page 1412fordetails.) UsetheAltControlparametertospecifyacontrolsourcethatwillcausethesampletobeginor endattheAltpoint.ThenusetheAltMethodparametertochoosebetweenswitchedand continuouscalculationoftheAltpoint.IfthevalueofAltMethodisSwitched,thePC3willuse theAltpointwhentherelevantcontrolsourceisatavaluegreaterthan64atNoteStart.If AltMethodisContinuous,theAltpointwillvarydependingonthevalueoftherelevantcontrol sourceatNoteStart. Asanexample,supposeyoureworkingwithaflutekeymapandwishtocontroltheamountof chiffheardatthebeginningofthesound.OntheKEYMAPpageintheProgramEditor,set AltControltoMWheel.NowtheModWheelcontrolshowmuchoftheinitialsampleattackis used.IfyousetAltMethodtoSwitchedandmovetheModWheelatleasthalfwayup,atNote Startthesamplewillbeginatthepresetalternatestartpoint(inthiscase,slightlypasttheinitial chiff).IfyousettheAltMethodtoContinuous,thePC3willinterpolatethesamplesstarting pointbasedonthepositionoftheModWheel.IftheModWheelis75%ofthewayupatNote Start.thesamplewillbegin75%ofthewaybetweennormalandalternatestartpoints.

6-16

Program Mode The LAYER Page

Emulating Legato Play IfyouplacetheAltpointaftertheinitialattacktransientsofthesample,thenyoucanusetheAlt Switchtoemulatelegatoplayinginanacousticinstrument.Asanexample,setKeymapto 14 Flute.NowsettheAltControlparametertoChanSt(ChannelState).Nowifyouplaynotes separately,theinitialbreathychiffwillbeheard.Butifyouplaythenoteslegato(connecting themsmoothly),theAltpointisusedandyoudonothearthechiff.ThisisbecausetheChanSt isturnedonaslongasanynoteisbeingheld.MostofthePC3sROMsampleshavetheirAlt pointssetforpurposesoflegatoplay.Inmostcasesthedifferenceinattacksissubtle,butfor somesounds,likedrums,thedifferencecanbemorenoticeable.

The LAYER Page

PresstheLAYERsoftbuttontocalluptheLAYERpage.Hereyoullsetanumberofparameters thataffectthecurrentlayerskeyboardrange,attackandreleasecharacteristics,andresponseto variouscontrols.

Parameter Low Key High Key Low Velocity High Velocity Bend Trig Delay Control Minimum Delay Maximum Delay Layer Enable Enable Sense Enable Min Enable Max Opaque Layer Sustain Pedal Sostenuto Pedal Freeze Pedal Ignore Release Hold Through Attack Hold Until Sustain

Range of Values C -1 to G 9 C -1 to G 9 ppp to fff ppp to fff Off, Key, All Normal, Reversed Control Source list 0 to 25 seconds 0 to 25 seconds Control Source list Normal, Reversed 127 127 Off, On Off, On, On2 Off, On Off, On Off, On Off, On Off, On

Default C0 C8 ppp fff All Normal Off 0 0 On Normal 64 127 Off On On On Off Off Off

6-17

Program Mode The LAYER Page

Low Key (LoKey)

Thissetsthelowestactivenoteforthecurrentlayer.Thisparametersvaluecannotbesethigher thanthevalueforHiKey.ThestandardMIDIkeyrangeisC1G9(0127).MiddleCisC4.

High Key (HiKey)

Hereyousetthehighestactivenoteforthecurrentlayer.Thisparametersvaluecannotbeset lowerthanthevalueforLoKey.

Low Velocity (LoVel)

Withthisparameteryoudefinethelowestattackvelocityatwhichthelayerwillbeenabled (generateasound).Thevaluesforthisparameterandthenextareexpressedinthestandard musicaldynamicsmarkings,similartothevaluesavailableforthevelocitymaps.Attack velocitiesthatarebelowthisthresholdwillnottriggernotes.Ifyousetthisparametersvalue higherthantheHiVelvalue,thelayerwillnotplayatall.

High Velocity (HiVel)

Similarly,thiswillsetthehighestattackvelocityatwhichthelayerwillbeenabled.Attack velocitiesabovethisthresholdwillnottriggernotesinthislayer. UsingLoVelandHiVel,youcansetupvelocityswitchingbetweenuptoeightlayers.Ifyou needevenmore,youcandoitusingtheEnableandEnableSense(S)parameters(page 619).

Pitch Bend Mode (Bend)

ThisdetermineshowPitchbendcontrolmessageswillaffectthecurrentlayer.AvalueofAll bendsallnotesthatareonwhenthePitchbendmessageisgenerated.AvalueofKeybends onlythosenoteswhosetriggersarephysicallyonwhenthePitchbendmessageisgenerated (notesheldwiththesustainpedal,forexample,wontbend).Thisisgreatforplayingguitar solosontopofchordsplayachord,holditwiththeSustainpedal,thenplayyourlicksand bendthemallyouwant;thechordwontbendwithit.AvalueofOffdisablesPitchbendforthe currentlayer.ToapplythesamePitchBendModesettingtotheentireprogram,makesuretoset thesamesettingforeachlayer.

Trigger (Trig)
SetTrigtoRvrstohavenotesofthecurrentlayertriggeredonkeyup.Theinitialvelocitiesof notestriggeredthiswayaredeterminedbythereleasevelocitiesofthekeysthattriggerthem. ThedefaultsettingisNorm.

Delay Control (DlyCtl)

Hereyouselect,fromtheControlSourcelist,acontrolsourcethatwilldelaythestartofallnotes inthecurrentlayer.ThelengthofthedelayisdeterminedbyMinDlyandMaxDly(described below).YoullassignacontinuouscontrollikeMWheelfortheDlyCtlparameterwhenyou wanttovarythedelaytime,andaswitchcontrolifyouwantthedelaytoeitherbeitsminimum value(switchoff),oritsmaximum(switchon).Thedelaycontrolwillaffectonlythosenotes triggeredafterthedelaycontrolsourceismoved;thedelaytimeiscalculatedateachnotestart, basedonthestatusofthedelaycontrolsourceatthattime.

6-18

Program Mode The LAYER Page

Minimum Delay (MinDly), Maximum Delay (MaxDly)

Thelengthofthedelayisdeterminedbythesetwoparameters.Whenthecontrolsource assignedtoDlyCtlisatitsminimum,thedelaywillbeequaltothevalueofMinDly.Thedelay willbeequaltothevalueofMaxDlywhenthecontrolsourceisatitsmaximum.IfDlyCtlisset toOFF,yougettheminimumdelay.IfitssettoON,yougetthemaximumdelay.Thisdoesnt changethenotesattacktime,justthetimeintervalbetweentheNoteOnmessageandthestart oftheattack.Thedelayismeasuredinseconds.

Enable
Thisassignsacontrolsourcetoactivateordeactivatethelayer.Whenthevalueoftheassigned controlsourceisbetweentheminimumandmaximumthresholdssetbytheSense(S) parameter,thelayerisactive.Whenthevalueoftheassignedcontrolsourceisbelowthe minimumorabovethemaximum,thelayerisinactive.Bydefault,manylayershavetheEnable parametersettoON,sotheminimumandmaximumthresholdsdontmatter.Theyrerelevant onlywhenEnableissettoaspecificcontrolsource(likeMWheel). Somelocalcontrolsources(KeyNumandAttVel,forexample)arenotvalidfortheEnable parameter.Inthesecases,youshouldusetheglobalequivalent(GKeyNumandGAttVelinthis example).

Enable Sense (S)

Thisparameterdetermineshowandwhenalayerisenabledbythecontrolsourceassignedfor theEnableparameter.EnableSensehasthreevalues:orientation,minimum,andmaximum. Supposeforamomentthatyoureeditingaprogram,andinthecurrentlayeryouvesetthe valueofEnabletoMWheel,whichcausestheModWheeltocontrolwhetherthelayerisactive. ThedefaultvaluesforEnableSenseareasfollows:orientationisNorm;minimumis64,and maximumis127.ThismeansthatwhentheModWheelislessthanhalfwayup,thelayeris disabled.ThelayerplaysonlywhentheModWheelismorethanhalfwayup. ChangetheorientationtoRvrs,andthelayerplaysonlywhentheModWheelislessthan halfwayup.ChangetheorientationbacktoNorm,andchangetheminimumto127.Nowthe layerplaysonlywhentheModWheelisallthewayup. YoucouldusethisparametertosetupatwolayerprogramthatwouldletyouuseaMIDI controltoswitchbetweenlayers,sayaguitarsoundandadistortedguitar.Bothlayerswould havetheirEnableparameterssettothesamecontrolsource,sayMWheel.Onelayerwouldhave itsEnableSenseorientationsettoNorm,andtheotherwouldhaveitsettoRvrs.Bothlayers wouldhavetheirEnableSenseminimumssetto64,andtheirmaximumsto127.Thefirstlayer wouldplaywhenyourModWheelwasaboveitsmidpoint,andthesecondlayerwouldplay whentheModWheelwasbelowitsmidpoint.(Youcouldachievethesameeffectbyhavingthe EnableSenseorientationinbothlayerssettoNorm,andtheminimumandmaximumvaluesset asfollows:minimum0andmaximum63foronelayer;minimum64andmaximum127forthe other.) UsingthisparameterinconjunctionwiththeEnableparameter,youcaneasilycreatevelocity switchingforasmanylayersasyouhaveinyourprogram.Thisisusefulfordrumprograms, sinceyoucandefineadifferentvelocitytriggerlevelforeachofthe32layersavailableindrum programs. First,settheEnableparameterfortheLayer1toavalueofGAttVel(globalattackvelocity).This causesthelayertoplaybasedontheattackvelocityofyourkeystrokes.ThensettheEnable Sense(S)parametertoavalueofNorm,andadjustitsminimumandmaximumvalues(thetwo numeralstotherightofNorm)toanarrowrange.Dontusenegativevalues,sincetheydont applywhenyoureusingGAttVelasthelayerenabler.

6-19

Program Mode The LAYER Page

Repeatthisforeachlayerintheprogram.Bearinmindthatifyouwanttosetup32different velocitylevelsforaprogram,withequalintervalsbetweeneachlayer,thenyouhavearangeof 4foreachlevel(Layer1is03,Layer2is47,andsoon).Itwontbeeasytoplayprecisely enoughtotriggerthelayeryouwant.Ontheotherhand,ifyoureusingSongmodeoran externalsequencer,youcaneditattackvelocitylevels,andgetexactlytheresultsyouwant.

Opaque
Anopaquelayerblocksallhighernumberedlayersinitsrange,allowingonlytheopaquelayer toplay.Thisisaneasywaytochangeasmallrangeofnotesinaprogram,leavingtheoriginal soundplayingaboveandbelowthenewsound. Startwithaonelayerprogram,andcreateanewlayer(Layer2)withtheNewLyrsoftbutton. OntheKEYMAPpageforLayer2,selectthekeymapyouwanttouse,thenontheLAYERpage, setLayer2srange(say,C3toD3),andsetitsOpaqueparametertoOn.ThengotoLayer 1,and duplicateit(withtheDupLyrsoftbutton);theduplicatelayerbecomesLayer 3.Younowhavea threelayerprogram.DeleteLayer1(theoriginallayer);Layer2(thenewlayeryoucreated) becomesLayer1,andLayer 3becomesLayer 2.NowLayer 2blocksoutLayer 3(theduplicate oftheoriginallayer)atthenotesC 3D 3.

Sustain Pedal (SusPdl)

Whenthisparameterison,thelayerwillrespondtoallsustainmessages(Controllerdestination 64,Sustain).Whenoff,thecurrentlayerwillignoresustainmessages.On2meansthatthe sustainpedalwillnotcatchthereleaseofanotethatisstillsoundingwhenthesustainmessage isreceived;thiscanbeveryusefulinaprogramthatusesamplitudeenvelopeswithalong releasetime.

Sostenuto Pedal (SosPdl)

WhenSostenutoison,thelayerwillrespondtoallsostenutomessages(Controllerdestination 66,Sostenuto).Whenoff,thelayerignoressostenutomessages.Sostenuto,asyoumayknow,isa featurefoundonpianosthathavethreepedals.PressingtheSostenutopedalonapiano(usually themiddlepedal)sustainsthenoteswhosekeysyouwereholdingdownwhenyoupressedthe pedal.Notesplayedafterthepedalisalreadydowndonotgetsustained.

Freeze Pedal (FrzPdl)

ThisparameteractivatesordeactivatesthelayersresponsetoFreezepedalmessages (Controllerdestination69,Freeze).TheFreezepedalcontrolcausesallnotesthatareonto sustainwithoutdecayuntiltheFreezepedalcontrolgoesoff.Ifanoteisalreadydecaying,itwill freezeatthatlevel.

Ignore Release (IgnRel)

WhenIgnRelisoff,thelayerrespondsnormallytoNoteOffmessages.Whenon,thelayerwill ignoreallNoteOffmessagesthatitreceives.Thisshouldbeusedonlywithsoundsthatdecayto silencewhenanoteisheld,otherwisethesoundswillsustainforever(presstheCanceland Enterbuttonssimultaneouslytostopsustainednotes.)Thisparametercancomeinhandywhen yourPC3isslavedtoadrummachineorsequencer,whichsometimesgeneratesNoteOnsand NoteOffssoclosetogetherthattheenvelopedoesnthavetimetoplaybeforethenoteis released.IfusedincombinationwithThrAttorTilDec(seebelow,)IgnRelallowsyouplay staccato,yetstillheartheentirelengthoftheattackanddecaysectionsoftheamplitude envelope.

6-20

Program Mode The PITCH Page

Hold Through Attack (ThrAtt)

Whenon,thisparametercausesallnotesinthelayertosustainthroughtheentirefirstattack segmentoftheiramplitudeenvelopes,evenifthenoteshavebeenreleased.Ifyouhaveasound withaslowattack,oranattackthatsdelayedwiththedelaycontrol,settingthisparameterto Onwillmakesureyournotesreachfullamplitudeevenifyoureplayingfast.WhensettoOff, noteswillreleaseassoonasyoureleasethenote(generateaNoteOff).Ifthefirstattacksegment ofthelayersamplitudeenvelopeisveryshort,youprobablywontnoticeadifferencebetween valuesofOnandOff.

Hold Until Decay (TilDec)

Whenon,thisparametercausesallnotesinthelayertosustainthroughallthreeattack segmentsintheiramplitudeenvelopesevenifthenoteshavebeenreleased.Loopedamplitude envelopeswillnotloop,however,ifthenotesarereleasedbeforereachingtheendofthefinal attacksegment.Noteswillgointotheirnormalreleasesiftheyarereleasedaftertheenvelope haslooped.WhensettoOff,noteswillreleaseassoonasaNoteOffmessageisgenerated.

The PITCH Page

PressingthePITCHsoftbuttontakesyoutotheDSPCTLpagewiththePitchfunction highlighted.SeeTheDSPControl(DSPCTL)Page on page 629formoreinformationonthePitch function.

The AMP Page

PressingtheAMPsoftbuttontakesyoutotheDSPCTLpagewiththeAmpfunction(labeledas Level)highlighted.SeeTheDSPControl(DSPCTL)Page on page 629formoreinformationon theAmpfunction.

6-21

Program Mode The Algorithm (ALG) Page

The Algorithm (ALG) Page

PresstheALGsoftbuttontocalluptheAlgorithm(ALG)page.Thetoplineofthedisplaygives youtheusualmodereminder,andtellsyouwhichlayeryourelookingat,aswellashowmany layersareinthecurrentprogram.YoucanviewtheALGpagesofanyotherlayersinthe programbyusingtheChan/Layerbuttons.

Thebasicdefinition:analgorithmisthewiring(signalpath)ofasampletotheaudiooutputs, throughaseriesofdigitalsignalprocessing(DSP)functionsthatyouselect.ThePC3s algorithmsarethecoreofVariableArchitectureSynthesisTechnology.TheDSPfunctionsare synthesistools(filters,oscillators,etc.)thatyouassigntothevariousstagesofthealgorithm.The DSPfunctionsyouchoosedeterminethetypeofsynthesisyouuse. Thecentralportionofthepageshowsthealgorithmforthecurrentlyselectedlayer.Youseethe numberofthealgorithm(from1to28,101to131,andtheIDsforanyuserdefinedalgorithms) andagraphicrepresentationofthesignalpath,aswellasthecurrentlyselectedDSPfunctions withinthesignalpath. Touseadifferentalgorithm,selecttheAlgorithmparameteranduseanydataentrymethodto selectadifferentone.TochangetheDSPfunctionwithinanalgorithm,movethecursortothe blockyouwanttochange,thenusetheAlphaWheelorPlus/Minusbuttons.Theresa staggeringnumberofcombinationsofalgorithmsandDSPfunctionsalone,nottomentionthe numerouscontrolsthatcanbeusedtomodifytheDSPfunctions. Note:Changingalayersalgorithmcanaffectthelayerssounddrastically.Itsagoodideatobringdown thevolumeofyourPC3oryoursoundsystembeforechangingalgorithms. SeeAlgorithmBasicsbelowforinformationoneditingalgorithms.

6-22

Program Mode The Algorithm (ALG) Page

Algorithm Basics
Eachofthe59availablealgorithmsrepresentsapresetsignalpath.WithournewDynamic VASTfeature,youcaneditanypresetsignalpathandmakeyourown,uniquealgorithms,but thatwillbeexplainedfurtheroninthissection.TakealookatAlgorithm1inthediagrambelow. Itsoneofthesimplestalgorithms.

TheDSPfunctionsarerepresentedbytherectangularblocks.Thelinesconnectingtheblocks togetherindicatestheflowofthedigitalsignalfromlefttoright;theyrepresentwhatwecallthe wireofthealgorithm:theactualphysicalpaththatthesignalfollowsthroughthealgorithm. SelectingdifferentalgorithmscanbecomparedtoconnectingdifferentDSPfunctionswith differentwiringdiagrams. Thinkoftheleftsideofeachblockasitsinput,andtherightsideasitsoutput.Dependingonthe algorithm,thesignalmaysplitintotwowires,enablingpartofthesignaltobypasscertain portionsofthealgorithm.Splitwiresmayrejoinwithinthealgorithm,ortheymaypassallthe waythroughassplitsignals.Ifthelastblockhastwowiresatitsoutput,wecallitadouble outputalgorithm.Ifithasonewire,itsasingleoutputalgorithm,eveniftherearetwowiresin earlierportionsofthealgorithm. Eachblockofthealgorithmrepresentsacertainfunctioninthesignalpath.Ineverynon cascadedalgorithm(seeAltInputforAlgorithms(CascadeMode)below),thesignalflowsfirst throughaonestageDSPfunctionthatcontrolsthepitchofthesamplesinthekeymap(this functionisrepresentedasablocklabeledPITCHintheupperrighthandcornerofthedisplay). Infact,thefirstDSPfunctionineachalgorithmalwayscontrolspitch,eventhoughitdoesnt applyineveryinstanceand,aswillbeexplainedlaterinthissection,itisbypassedincascaded algorithms.Similarly,thelastDSPfunctionalwayscontrolsthefinalamplitudeofthesignal (thisfunctionisrepresentedasablocklabeledAMPintheupperrighthandcornerofthe display). ThenumberoffunctionparametersaDSPfunctioncanhavedependsontherelativesizeofits functionblockontheAlgorithmpage(fourslotsisthelargestblocksize.)Forinstance,a functionblockthatisthreeslotslongcanhaveuptothreefunctionparameters,whereasa functionblockthatistwoslotslongcanhaveuptotwofunctionparameters.Foreachfunction parameter,theresacorrespondingsubpageonboththeDSPCTLandDSPMODpages.Onthe DSPCTLsubpages,therearefineadjustandhardwiredparameterswithwhichyoucanmakefixed adjustmentstothefunctionparameter.OntheDSPMODsubpages,thereareprogrammable parametersthatyoucanassigntoanycontrolsourceintheControllerListtomodulatethe functionparameter.TheaboveitalicizedparametertypesaredescribedinCommonDSPControl Parameters on page 624.MoreinformationonthesubpagescanbefoundinTheDSPControl (DSPCTL)Page on page 629andTheDSPModulation(DSPMOD)Page on page 630. HighlightinganyofthefunctionblocksontheALGpageandpressingtheEditbuttontakesyou totheDSPCTLpage.

6-23

Program Mode The Algorithm (ALG) Page

Common DSP Control Parameters

ThetypeofDSPfunctionavailableforanyfunctionblockdependsonthealgorithm.Someofthe specializedfunctionslikethePANNERarealwayslocatedjustbeforethefinalAMPfunction. Others,likethetwoinputfunctions,appearonlyinalgorithmsthatarestructuredfortwoinput functions. YoucanchangethenatureofeachlayerofaprogramsimplybyassigningdifferentDSP functionstothelayersalgorithm.Yourlevelofcontrolgoesmuchdeeperthanthat,however. EachDSPfunctionhasoneormoreparameterstowhichyoucanpatchavarietyofcontrol sourcestomodifythebehavioroftheDSPfunctionsthemselves. Theparametersonthevariouscontrolinputpagesareverysimilar;infact,therearesix parametersthatappearonalmosteverypage.Consequentlywerefertothemasthecommon DSPcontrolparameters.Althoughtheparametersonthecontrolinputpagesdifferslightly fromfunctiontofunction,youcanexpecttoseesomeorallofthecommonDSPcontrol parameterswheneveryouselectthecontrolinputpageforanyoftheDSPfunctions.

YoullrecognizethecommonDSPcontrolparameters,alongwithseveralotherparameters. KeepinmindthattheresasetofcommoncontrolparametersforeachoftheDSPfunctions;in thiscaseweredescribingthemonlyastheyapplytothepitchcontrolfunction. Function-parameter UnliketheotherfivecommonDSPparameters,thefunctionparametersareaccessibleonboth theDSPCTLpageandtheDSPMODpage.Theyarelistedalongthelefthandsideofeachpage; anychangesmadetothemononepagearereflectedintheother.Thelabelofeachfunction parameterdependsonitsfunctioninthecurrentprogramsalgorithm.Forexample,thePitch functionsfunctionparameterislabeledPitch;whereasthetwoblockLopassfunctions functionparametersarelabeledLPFrqandLPRes. Byadjustingthefunctionparameter,youcanaddafixedamountofadjustmenttoanyDSP function.ForthePitchfunction,adjustingthefunctionparameterwillchangethepitchin semitoneincrements.Usethisasastartingpointtosetthepitchwhereyouwantittobe normally.Thiswillshiftthepitchofthecurrentlyselectedlayer,andwillaffecttheplaybackrateof sampledsounds.Sampledsoundshaveanupperlimitonpitchadjustment.Itsnormalforthe pitchesofsampledsoundstopin(stopgettinghigher)whenyouadjustthepitchupwardin largeamounts.Theoscillatorwaveformscanbepitchedhigher.Anysoundcanbepitched downwardwithoutlimit.

6-24

Program Mode The Algorithm (ALG) Page

Theprimaryuseofadjustingthefunctionparameterorfineadjustparameter(whichwillbe explainedunderthenextheading)istooffsetthecumulativeeffectsoftheotherDSPfunction parameters.Forexample,youmightsetahighvalueforkeytracking(definedbelow)fora dramaticchangeineffectacrossthekeyboard.Theeffectmightbetoomuchatoneendofthe keyboard,however,soyoucoulduseoneoftheadjustparameterstoreducetheinitialamount ofthateffect. ThePC3alwaysusesrealvaluesofmeasurement,ratherthanjustarbitrarynumbers,for adjustableparameters.Thismeansthatyouspecifypitchinsemitones(ST)andcents(ct),and amplitudeindecibels(dB). Rememberthattheparametersonthecontrolinputpagesarecumulativetheycanaddtoor subtractfromtheeffectsoftheotherparametersonthepage,dependingontheirvalues.For example,evenifyouveadjustedthepitchofasamplesohighthatitpins,theeffectsoftheother parametersmaybringthepitchbackdowntoaworkablerange. Fine Adjust Parameter Youcanaddslightdetuningtothepitchwiththefineadjustparameters.Noticethatthereare actuallytwofineadjustparametersforthePitchfunction:onethatchangesthepitchincents (100thsofasemitone),andonethatchangesitaccordingtoitsfrequency(inincrementsof Hertzcyclespersecond).Sincewerediscussingtheuniversalcontrolsourceshere,andnot specificallypitch,wellmoveonfornow,astheHzparameterappliesonlytopitchrelated functions.SeeThePITCHPage on page 621foramorethoroughdescriptionofHz. Hard-wired Parameters
Key Tracking

ThisisaquickwaytogetadditionalcontrolbasedontheMIDInotenumberofeachnoteyou trigger.Keytrackingappliesadifferentcontrolsignalvalueforeachnotenumber.Inthecaseof pitch,keytrackingenablesyoutochangethetuningofeachnoterelativetoitsnormalpitch. MiddleCisthezeropoint.Regardlessofthekeytrackingvalue,thereisnoeffectonMiddleC.If yousetanonzerovalueforkeytracking,theeffectincreasesforeachnoteaboveorbelow MiddleC.Inthecaseofpitch,forexample,sayyouassignavalueof5centsperkeyforthekey trackingparameter.TriggeringMiddleC(C4onthePC3)willplayanormalC4.TriggeringC# 4willplayanote5centshigherthanC#4.TriggeringD4willplayanote10centshigherthanD 4,andsoon.NotesbelowMiddleCwillbetunedlowerthantheirnormalpitches.Ifyouseta negativevalueforkeytracking,notesaboveMiddleCwillbetunedlowerthantheirnormal pitches. KeepinmindthatkeytrackingonthePITCHpageworksinconjunctionwiththekeytracking parameterontheKEYMAPpage.ThisiswhyyoucansettheKeyTrkparameteronthePITCH pageto0ct/key,andnotesstillincreaseinpitchby100cents/keyasyougoupthekeyboard.Its becausetheKeyTrkparameterontheKEYMAPpageisalreadysetat100centsperkey.
Velocity Tracking

Apositivevalueforvelocitytrackingwillraisethepitchasyoutriggernoteswithhigherattack velocities.Thisisgreatforgettingatraceofdetuningbasedonyourattackvelocity,especiallyin drumprograms,whereyoucanmakethepitchofthedrumsamplesriseslightlywithhigher velocityNoteOns,justasdrumsdowhenyoustrikethemharder.Negativevalueswilllower thepitchasyouincreasetheattackvelocity.

6-25

Program Mode The Algorithm (ALG) Page

Programmable Parameters
Source 1 (Src1)

ThisparametertakesitsvaluefromalonglistofcontrolsourcesincludingeveryMIDIcontrol number,ahostofLFOs,ASRs,envelopesandotherprogrammablesources. Src1worksintandemwiththeparameterbeneathitonthepage:Depth.Chooseacontrolsource fromthelistforSrc1,thensetavalueforDepth.WhenthecontrolsourceassignedtoSrc1isat itsmaximum,thepitchwillbealteredtothefulldepthyouset.Forexample,ifyousetSrc1to MWheel,andsetDepthto1200ct,thepitchwillriseasyoupushtheModWheeluponyour PC3orMIDIcontroller,reachingamaximumof1200ct(12semitones,oroneoctave).

Source 2 (Src2)

Thisonesevenmoreprogrammable.LikeSrc1,youchooseacontrolsourcefromthelist.But insteadofsettingafixeddepth,youcansetaminimumandmaximumdepth,thenassign anothercontrolsourcetodeterminehowmuchdepthyouget.Trythisexample.(MakesureSrc1 issettoOFFfirst,sothetwosourcesdontinteract.)StartwithProgram199,andpressEdit. PressthePITCHsoftbuttontoselectthePITCHpage.SettheSrc2parametertoavalueofLFO1, thensettheMinimumDepthparameterto100ct,andMaximumDepthto1200ct.Thensetthe DepthControlparametertoMWheel.ThisletsyouusetheModWheeltovarythedepthofthe oscillationinpitchgeneratedbytheLFO. Now,whentheModWheelisdown,thepitchwilloscillatebetweenasemitone(100ct)upanda semitonedown(thedefaultwaveformforLFO1isasinewave,whichgoespositiveand negative).WiththeModWheelup,thepitchwilloscillatebetweenanoctaveupandanoctave down. SincetheModWheelisacontinuouscontrol,youcanachieveanyamountofdepthcontrol betweentheminimumandmaximum.IfyouhadsettheDepthControltoSustain,forexample, thenyoudgetonlytwolevelsofdepthcontrol:themaximum(1200cents)withyourMIDI controllerssustainpedaldown,ortheminimum(100cents)withthesustainpedalup.

6-26

Program Mode The Algorithm (ALG) Page

Alt Input for Algorithms (Cascade Mode)

CascademodeisaparticularlypowerfulfeatureofthePC3thatallowsyoutocreateunique algorithmsofpreviouslyunattainablelevelsofcomplexity.Thefollowingthreefiguresshowthe signalpathofaprogramconfiguredusingthePC3snewCascademode:

OntheALG(Algorithm)pageofeverylayer,theAltInputparameterletsyouselectanyother layertogothroughthecurrentlayersDSP.Youcansetitupsothatlayer1goesintolayer2into 3(asshownabove).Ifyouturndownthevolumeonlayers1and2,thenyouarehearingtrue cascadingitslikeabigchainwitheachalgorithmfeedingintothenext,andwhatyouhearis layer3soutput.Youcanalsohavethevolumesofallthreelayersturnedup,whichwillmixthe signalofallthreelayers.Youcould,inthesameprogram,alsodecidetorunlayer4into5into6 into13into25ifyouwanted.Anyofthe32layerscangointoanyotherlayer.

6-27

Program Mode The Algorithm (ALG) Page

TheCascademodealgorithms(verymuchliketriplemodeonaK2600)startatID101.Notein theabovefigureshowalgorithm101looksverysimilartoalgorithm1.EachCascademode algorithmcorrespondstoitsnoncascadeequivalent,whichhasthesameIDnumberminus100. Forexample,algorithm105isacascademodeversionofalgorithm5.OntheAlgpage,select whichlayeryouwanttohaverunningthroughyourcascadelayerwiththeAltInputparameter. MakesuretoturndowntheAmpvolumeonyoursourcelayersifyouonlywanttohearwhats comingoutofthefinalcascadelayer.

Dynamic VAST
TheDynamicVASTeditorisyetanotherparticularlypowerfulfeatureofthePC3thatallows youtoeditthewiringofanalgorithm.WithDynamicVAST,literallythousandsofwiring schemesarepossible.UsingCascademodeinconjunctionwithDynamicVASTgivesyoualmost infinitecontroloveryourprogramssoundandbehaviorbyenablingyoutocreateyourown unique,complexalgorithms. ToentertheDynamicVASTeditor,selecttheALG(Algorithm)pagebypressingtheALGsoft button.HighlighttheAlgorithmparameter,selectanalgorithm,andpresstheeditbutton.This actioncallsuptheEditAlgorithm(EditAlg)pageinwhichyoucaneditthewiringofthe selectedalgorithm.

Parameter Inputs Outputs Number of Blocks Output Mode

Range of Values 1, 2 1, 2 1 to 4 Normal, Sep. L/R

Default 1 1 2 Normal

Inadditiontohavingaselectablefunction,eachfunctionblockhasthreeeditableparameters: numberofinputs,numberofoutputs,andblocksize(theOutputModeparameterisaneditable parameterofthealgorithmasawhole).WhenyoufirstentertheEditAlgpage,therewillbea cursorintheparameterfield,andthefirstblockofthealgorithmwillbehighlighted.Toselecta blockforediting,movethecursordownthedisplayuntilnoparameterfieldishighlighted; then,usingthe<and>buttons,highlighttheblockyouwishtoedit.Pressthe^buttontomove thecursorbackintotheparameterfields,andthenselecttheparameteryouwishtoedit. TheOutputModeparameterdeterminesthenumberofoutputsfromthealgorithm.With OutputModesettoNormal,thealgorithmhasoneoutput.WithOutputModesettoSep.L/R, thealgorithmhastwooutputs,eachofwhichissenttoaseparatestereochannel. Toeditthesignalpath,selecteitheraninputofablockoranoutputoftheentirealgorithm.By scrollingwithAlphaWheelortheand+buttons,youcanseeeverypossibleconfigurationfor thatselectedsignalpath.

6-28

Program Mode The DSP Control (DSPCTL) Page

The DSP Control (DSPCTL) Page

Beforereadingfurther,besuretoreadAlgorithmBasics on page 623andCommonDSPControl Parameters on page 624. PresstheDSPCTLsoftbuttontocalluptheDSPControl(DSPCTL)page,whichisdisplayed below:

Function

Parameter Pitch Fine Adjust

Range of Values -128 to 127 semitones 100 cents 10.00 Hertz 2400 cents/key 7200 cents (Depends on Function) (Depends on Function) (Depends on Function) (Depends on Function) -96 to 24 decibels 2.00 decibels/key 96 decibels

Default 0 0 0 0 0 (Depends on Function) (Depends on Function) (Depends on Function) (Depends on Function) -6 0 35

Pitch

Hertz Adjust Key Tracking Velocity Tracking

(Function) (Function) (Function) (Function) Level

(Function-Parameter) (Function-Parameter) (Function-Parameter) (Function-Parameter) Level Key Tracking Velocity Tracking

Eachfieldinthelefthandcolumnofthepageisafunctionparameterofthecurrentlayers algorithm.Youcancoarselyadjustthefunctionparameterintheselefthandfieldsasnotedin CommonDSPControlParameters,anyadjustmentsmadetothefunctionparametersonthe DSPCTLpagearereflectedinthecorrespondingfunctionparametersontheDSPMODpage. TherighthandsideoftheDSPCTLpageisthesubpageofthehighlightedfunctionparameter onthesubpagearethefineadjustparametersandhardwiredparameters.Toaccessthe parametersonthesubpage,highlightthefunctionparameteryouwishtoedit,andthenpress the>buttontomovethecursorintothesubpage.

6-29

Program Mode The DSP Modulation (DSPMOD) Page

Thelabelofafunctionparameterdependsonitscorrespondingfunctionblockinthecurrent layersalgorithm.TheaboveDSPCTLpagecorrespondstothefollowingalgorithm:

The DSP Modulation (DSPMOD) Page

Beforereadingfurther,besuretoreadAlgorithmBasics on page 623andCommonDSPControl Parameters on page 624. PresstheDSPMODsoftbuttontocalluptheDSPModulation(DSPMOD)page,whichis displayedbelow:

Parameter Source 1 Depth Source 2 Depth Control Minimum Depth Maximum Depth

Range of Values Control Source List (Depends on Function) Control Source List Control Source List (Depends on Function) (Depends on Function)

Default Off 0 Off Off 0 0

Eachfieldinthelefthandcolumnofthepageisafunctionparameterofthecurrentlayers algorithm.Youcancoarselyadjustthefunctionparameterintheselefthandfieldsasnotedin CommonDSPControlParameters,anyadjustmentsmadetothefunctionparametersonthe DSPMODpagearereflectedinthecorrespondingfunctionparametersontheDSPCTLpage. TherighthandsideoftheDSPCTLpageisthesubpageofthehighlightedfunctionparameter onthesubpagearetheprogrammableparameters.Toaccesstheparametersonthesubpage, highlightthefunctionparameteryouwishtoedit,andthenpressthe>buttontomovethe cursorintothesubpage.

6-30

Program Mode The OUTPUT Page

Eachfunctionparameterssubpagecontainstheprogrammableparametersofthehighlighted functionparameter.Byassigningcontrolsourcestomodulateafunctionparameter,youcan enablerealtimecontrolofyourprogramssoundandbehavior.YoucanassignSrc1toany controlsource,andcanspecifyitsmaximumvaluewiththeDepthparameter.Src2isdifferent youcanassignittoanycontrolsource,butcanalsoassignacontrolsourcetoitsmaximum valuewiththeDptCtlparameter.YoucanthenspecifytherangeofSrc2sdepthwiththe MinDepthandMaxDepthparameters. Note:ThePC3featuresaneasyshortcutforquicklyassigninganyofthePC3srealtimecontrollers (sliders,wheels,buttons,etc.)toacurrentlyselectedparameter(suchastheSrc1andSrc2parameters above.)SimplyholdtheEnterbuttonandmovethedesiredcontroller. Thelabelofafunctionparameterdependsonitscorrespondingfunctionblockinthecurrent layersalgorithm.TheaboveDSPMODpagecorrespondstothefollowingalgorithm:

The OUTPUT Page

PresstheOUTPUTsoftbuttontogettotheOUTPUTpage,whereyousetthelayerspreand postFXpanning.ThereareactuallyfourdifferentconfigurationsoftheOUTPUTpage;which oneyouseedependsonwhetherthecurrentlayerusesastereokeymap,andwhetherituses programFXorlayerspecificeffects(moreonthisinTheProgramFX(PROGFX) Page on page 647andTheLayerFX(LYR_FX)Page on page 649). Regardlessofthepagesconfiguration,thereareparametersforadjustingthepanposition,the panmode,thepantable(ifany),thecrossfadecontrol,andthecrossfadesense.Layersthatuse stereokeymaps,orthatuselayerspecificFX,haveadditionalparametersontheirOUTPUT pages.ThefollowingpageisforamonokeymapprogramthatusesprogramFX:

6-31

Program Mode The OUTPUT Page

Parameter Pan (or Pan 1) (Pan 2) Pan Mode (Output Pan) (Output Gain) (Output Pan Mode) Pan Table Crossfade Control Crossfade Sense Drum Remap Exclusive Zone Map

Range of Values 64 64 Fixed, +MIDI, Auto, Reverse 64 -96 to 48 decibels Fixed, +MIDI Pan Table List Control Source List Normal, Reversed Off, Kurz1, Kurz2 Zone Map List

Default 0 63 +MIDI 0 0 +MIDI 0 None Off Norm Off 0 None

Pan
UsethisparametertopositionthecurrentlayerspreFXsignal.Negativevaluespanthesignal totheleftchannel,positivevaluespantotheright,andavalueofzeropanstothecenter.To adjustthepostFX,finalstagegainandpanningofthecurrentprogram,gototheCOMMON pageandadjusttheOutputparameters(seeTheCOMMONPage on page 635);ortoadjusta layerspostFXaudiosignalindividually,gototheLYR_FXpageandsettheLayerFXMode parametertoLayerSpecificFX(seeTheLayerFX(LYR_FX)Page on page 649),andthenreturn totheOUTPUTpageandadjusttheoutputparameters. Anadditionalpanparameter(Pan2)appearsifyouhavetheStereoparameterontheKEYMAP pagesettoavalueofOn.

Pan Mode
WhenthemodeisFixedthepanpositionremainsasdefinedwiththePanparameter,ignoring MIDIpanmessages.Whenthemodeis+MIDI,MIDIpanmessages(MIDI10)willshiftthe soundtotheleftorrightofthePanparametersetting.Messagevaluesbelow64shiftitleft, whilethoseabove64shiftitright.AsettingofAutoassignsthepansettingofeachnotebased onitsMIDInotenumber.Inthiscase,MiddleC(MIDInotenumber60)isequivalenttothePan parameterssetting.Lowernotesshiftincreasinglyleft,whilehighernotesshiftincreasingly right.AsettingofReverseshiftslownotesright,andhighnotesleft.MIDIpanmessageswill alsoaffectthepanpositionwhenvaluesofAutoandReverseareselected.

6-32

Program Mode The OUTPUT Page

Output: Pan, Gain, and Mode

WhentheLayerFXModeparameterissettoLayerSpecificFXontheLYR_FXpage,three additionalparametersappearontheOUTPUTpage:OutPan,OutGain,andOutPanMode.

TheseparametersareanalogoustotheoutputparametersontheCOMMONpage,butarelayer specifictheCOMMONoutputparametersapplytoalllayers.Youcanusetheoutput parametersontheOUTPUTpagetoadjustthepanningandgainofthepostFXsignalofthe currentlayer.

Pan Table
Thefactorypresetpantablesarekeyspecificpanningschemesbywhichthenotethateachkey producesisuniquelypanned.Thesetablesareparticularlyusefulforproducingthestereo imageofadrumsetwhencreatingpercussionprograms,orforproducingthestereoimageofa pianowhencreatingpianoprograms.

Crossfade and Crossfade Sense (XFadeSense)

TheCrossfadeparameterletsyouselectacontrolsourcetofadethecurrentlayersamplitude fromzerotomaximum.WhenXFadeSenseisNormal,thelayerisatfullamplitudewhenthe Crossfadecontrolisatminimum.WithXFadeSensesettoReverse,thelayerisatzeroamplitude whentheCrossfadecontrolisatminimum. ThisparameterissimilartotheSrc1andDepthparametersfortheAmpfunctiononthe DSPCTLandDSPMODpages,buttheattenuationcurvefortheCrossfadeparameteris optimizedspecificallyforcrossfades. Tocrossfadetwolayersinthesameprogram,assignthesamecontrolsourcefortheCrossFade parametersinbothlayers,thensetoneoftheirXFadeSenseparameterstoavalueofNorm,and theotherstoRvrs.

Drum Remap
TheDrumRemapparametershouldgenerallynotbechanged.ThisparameterletsthePC3 knowhowdrumprogramsaremappedsothatdrumsoundscanbeproperlyremappedwhen usingtheGeneralMIDI(GM)drummap(seebelow.)Kurz1designatesthatthecurrentdrum programwasoriginallyaPC2program,andthatitusesthePC2drummap(programs113119 usethismap.)Kurz2designatesthatthecurrentdrumkitusesthenewPC3drummap(allother factorydrumprogramsusethismap:120,241248,369376.)Thenewdrummapissimilarto thatofthePC2,excepttomtomsoundshavebeenmovedintooctaveC3C4,sotheyaremore easilyplayablewiththemainkickandsnaredrumsoundsinthatoctave.Wheneditingakit,

6-33

Program Mode The OUTPUT Page

makesuretofollowthelayoutofthedrummapbeingusedifyouwanttobeabletoproperly remapthekittotheGMdrummap.ProgramsthathavetheDrumRemapparametersettoOff willnotbeviewedbythePC3asdrumprogramsandwillnotbeaffectedwhenremappingto theGMdrummap. Inmostkeyboardsandsynthesizers,drumprogramsaremappedasdictatedbytheGeneral MIDI(GM)industrystandard.TheGMdrummapisntoptimallyintuitiveintermsof playability,sowedevelopedourownuniquekeymapthatismoreintuitiveandlendsbetterto performance.However,theGMdrummapissocommonplacethatmanyplayersfeelmost comfortableplayingdrumprogramswiththeGMdrummap.So,wedesignedthePC3such thatyoucanremapdrumprogramstotheGMdrummap.Youcansetdrumprogramstoremap totheGMdrummapinMasterMode.OntheMasterModeMAINpagesetthedrumremap parametertoGM.Toreturndrumprogramstotheiroriginalmaps,setthisparametertoNone. SeeDrumRemap on page 112intheMasterModechapterformoreinformation.

Exclusive Zone Map

TheExclusiveZoneMapisanotherparameterthatappliesprincipallytodrumprograms.When usingadrumprogram,youmaywanttheclosedhihatsoundstocutoffopenhihatsounds. Sinceyoucanremapthekeymapsofdrumprograms,thisparameterremapscutoffkeys accordingly. LikeDrumRemap,youcanusethisparameteronanyprogram,butyouprobablywontwantto dothis.

6-34

Program Mode The COMMON Page

The COMMON Page

TheCOMMONpageisreachedbypressingtheCOMMONsoftbuttonintheProgramEditor. Hereswhereyoufind12frequentlyusedparametersthataffecttheentirecurrentprogram,not justthecurrentlayer.

NoticethatwhentheMonophonicparameterissettoitsdefaultvalueofOff,thefive monophonicparametersdonotappearonthepage.
Parameter Pitch Bend Range Up Pitch Bend Range Down Monophonic (Legato Play) (Portamento) (Portamento Rate) (Attack Portamento) (Mono Sample XFade) Globals Output Gain Output Pan Output Pan Mode Demo Song Range of Values 7200 cents 7200 cents Off, On Off, On Off, On 1 to 3000 keys per second Off, On Off, On Off, On -96 to 24 decibels 64 Fixed, +MIDI Demo Song List Default 200 -200 Off Off Off 70 On Off Off 0 0 +MIDI 0 None

Pitch Bend Range Up and Down

UsetheseparameterstodefinehowmuchthepitchwillchangewhenyoumoveyourPitch Wheel.ForbothPitchBendRangeparameters,positivevalueswillcausethepitchtobendup, whilenegativevalueswillcausethepitchtobenddown.Largepositivevaluescancause samplestobendtotheirmaximumupwardpitchshiftbeforethePitchWheelisfullyup(or down).Thiswillnothappenwhenbendingpitchdown.

Monophonic
Whenoff,theprogramispolyphonicitcanplayupto128notesatatime.Noticethatwhenthe Monophonicparameterisoff,theLegatoPlayparameterandthethreePortamentoparameters donotappearontheCOMMONpage.Thisisbecauseonlymonophonicprogramscanuse portamento.

6-35

Program Mode The COMMON Page

WhenOn,theprogramwillplayonlyonenoteatatime.Thismakesitpossibletouseandto determinethebehavioroftheportamentofeature.DonotsetIgnoreReleaseOn(page 620) whenyouareusingMonophonicprograms,sincethelackofNoteOffmessageswillprevent youfromswitchingprogramsproperly.

Legato Play
WhenLegatoPlayison,anotewillplayitsattackonlywhenallothernoteshavebeenreleased. Thisisusefulforrealisticinstrumentalsounds.

Portamento
Thisparameteriseitheronoroff.ThedefaultvalueofOffmeansthatportamentoisdisabled forthecurrentprogram. Portamentoisaglidebetweenpitches.Onactualacousticinstrumentslikeviolinandbass,its achievedbyslidingafingeralongavibratingstring.Onmostkeyboardsthatofferportamento, itsachievedbyholdingdownakeythattriggersthestartingnote,thenstrikingandreleasing otherkeys.Thepitchglidestowardthemostrecentlytriggerednote,andremainsatthatpitchas longasthenoteremainson.ThePC3givesyoutwowaystogetportamento.SeetheAttack Portamentoparameterbelow. Whenapplyingportamentotomultisampledsounds(AcousticGuitar,forexample),thePC3 willplaymorethanonesamplerootasthepitchglidesfromthestartingpitchtotheending pitch.Thismaycauseasmallclickateachsampleroottransition.Youcaneliminateclicksby usingtheMonoSampleXFadeparameter(seebelow.)

Portamento Rate
ThesettingforPortamentoratedetermineshowfastthecurrentnoteglidesfromstartingpitch toendingpitch.Thevalueofthisparametertellsyouhowmanysecondsthenotetakestoglide onesemitonetowardtheendingpitch.Atasettingof12keys/second,forexample,thepitch wouldglideanoctaveeverysecond.Thelistofvaluesisnonlinear;thatis,theincrementsget largerasyouscrolltohighervalues.

Attack Portamento
Thisparametertogglesbetweentwotypesofportamento.WhensettoOn,thePC3remembers thestartingpitchsoyoudonthavetoholdanoteontoachieveportamento.Thepitchalways glidestoeachnewnotefromthepreviouslytriggerednote.WhensettoOff,thepitchwillglide tothemostrecentlytriggerednoteonlywhenthepreviousnoteisstillon(inotherwords,you mustuselegatofingering).

6-36

Program Mode The COMMON Page

Mono Sample XFade

Whenapplyingportamentotomultisampledsounds(AcousticGuitar,forexample),thePC3 willplaymorethanonesamplerootasthepitchglidesfromthestartingpitchtotheending pitch.Thismaycauseasmallclickateachsampleroottransition.Youcaneliminateclicksby settingtheMonoSampleXFadeparametertoOn.WhentheMonoSampleXFadeparameteris settoOn,thePC3performsacrossfadeateachsampleroottransitiontoeliminateclicks.

Globals
Thisisanothertoggle,whichaffectsLFO2,ASR2,FUNs2and4.Whenoff,thesethreecontrol sourcesarelocal;theyaffecteachindividualnoteinthelayersthatusethemasacontrolsource. Theybeginoperatingeachtimeanoteinthatlayeristriggered. WhentheGlobalsparameterissettoOn,thesecontrolsourcesbecomeglobal,thatistheyaffect everynoteineverylayerofthecurrentprogram,theyrenotspecifictoanyonelayer.When thesecontrolsourcesareglobal,theybeginoperatingassoonastheprogramisselected.When Globalsareon,LFO2,ASR2,andFUNs2and4willappearontheirrespectivepagespreceded bytheletterGtoindicatethattheyreglobal. Youlluseglobalcontrolsourceswhenyouwanttoaffectallnotesinaprogramuniformly,and localcontrolsourceswhenyouwanttoaffecteachnoteindependently.Forexample,youdusea globalLFOcontrollingpitchtocreateaLeslieeffectonanorgansound,sinceyouwanttheeffect appliedtoallthenotesyouplay.YoudusealocalLFOcontrollingpitchtocreateavibratofora soloviolin,sinceyouwanttobeabletovarytherateanddepthofthevibratoforeachnote.

Output: Gain, Pan, and Pan Mode

TheOutputparametersontheCOMMONpageallowyoutoadjustthefinalstagegainand panningofthepostFXsignal.UsetheOutGainparametertocutorboostthesignal.Usethe OutPanparametertopanthesignal;negativevaluespantheaudiosignaltotheleftchannel, positivevaluestotheright,andavalueofzeropanstothecenter. WhentheOPanModeissettoFixedthepanpositionremainsasdefinedwiththeOutPan parameter,ignoringMIDIpanmessages.WhentheOPanModeissetto+MIDI,MIDIpan messages(MIDI10)willshiftthesoundtotheleftorrightofthePanparametersetting.Message valuesbelow64shiftitleft,whilethoseabove64shiftitright.

Demo Song
TheDemoSongparameterallowsyoutochoosethedemosongforthecurrentprogram.The demosongisashort,preprogrammedsongthatgivesyouademonstrationoftheprogramina musicalcontext.YoucanplayaprogramsdemosonginanypageintheProgrammodeby pressingthePlay/Pausebutton,andstopthesongbypressingtheStopbutton(bothbuttonsare locatedundertheMODEbuttonsonthefrontpanel). WhenintheProgrammodeentrylevelpage,youcanhearademosonginwhateverprogram youwantbypressingthePlay/Pausebuttonwithoneprogramselected,andthenselecting anotherprogram.NoneoftheKB3programshavedemosongs,butbythismethod,youcould, forexample,hearthedemosongforprogram83BigOldJupiterplayedwiththeKB3program 53Testify. Note:Youcanalsotriggerandstopdemosongswithasimultaneousdoublebuttonpressoftheupand downcursorbuttons.

6-37

Program Mode The LFO Page

The LFO Page

LFOsarelowfrequencyoscillators.LFOsareusedtoautomatethemodulationofaparameter basedontheshapeandfrequencyofanaudiowaveform.YoullusetheLFOpagetodefinethe behaviorofthetwoLFOsavailabletoeachlayer.LFOsareperiodic(repeating)controlsources. Thebasicelementsaretherate,whichdefineshowfrequentlytheLFOrepeats,andshape, whichdefinesthewaveformofthemodulationsignalitgenerates. WiththePC3,youcansetupperandlowerlimitsoneachLFOsrate,andassignacontrolsource tochangetheLFOsrateinrealtime,ifyouwish. Becauseofitsperiodicnature,theLFOisperfectforcreatingeffectslikevibrato(cyclicvariation inpitch)andtremolo(cyclicvariationinamplitude).WhenyoureeditingLFOs,oranycontrol source,rememberthatitmustbeassignedtocontrolsomeparameterbeforeyoullhearthe effectsofyouredits. LFO1isalwayslocal,meaningthatitstriggeredwitheachNoteOnevent,andruns independentlyforeachnoteinthelayer.LFO2islocalbydefault,butcanbemadeglobal.Thisis doneontheCOMMONpage,bysettingtheGlobalsparametertoOn,whichcausesLFO2, ASR2,FUN2andFUN4alltobecomeglobal.Globalcontrolsuniformlyaffecteverynoteineach layer.

Parameter Group (Available for each of LFO1 and LFO2) Minimum Rate Maximum Rate Rate Control LFO Shape LFO Start Phase

Range of Values 1/4 note, 1/8 note, 1/8 triplet, 1/16 note, 0 to 24 Hz 0 to 24 Hz Control Source List LFO Shape List (Ref. Guide) 0, 90, 180, 270 Degrees

Default 0.00 0.00 Off Sine 0

6-38

Program Mode The LFO Page

Minimum Rate
ThisistheslowestrateatwhichtheLFOruns.WhenitsRateControlissettoOFF,orwhenthe controlsourceassignedtoitisatitsminimum,theLFOrunsatitsminimumrate.Aspreviously mentioned,thevalues1/4note,1/8note,1/8triplet,and1/16notesynctheMinimumRatewith thePC3ssystemtempo.Ofcourse,ifyouchoosetotemposyncyourLFO,thentheLFOrateis fixed,andyoucanspecifyneitherMaximumRatenorRateControl.Thedisplaychangesthusly:

Maximum Rate
ThisisthefastestpossibleratefortheLFO.WhenitsRateControlissettoON,orwhenthe controlsourceassignedtoitisatitsmaximum,theLFOrunsatitsmaximumrate.

Rate Control
AssignanycontrolsourceinthelisttomodulatetheLFOsratebetweenitsminimumand maximum.AcontinuouscontrolliketheModWheelisanaturalchoice,enablingyoutogetjust aboutanyratebetweenminimumandmaximum.Butyoucanuseaswitchcontroltoo,toget justtheminimumormaximumwithnothinginbetween.AssigningMPress(aftertouch)asthe ratecontrolforanLFOvibratogivesyouaneasywaytoincreasethevibratorateinrealtime,as youcanonmanyacousticinstruments.

LFO Shape
TheshapeoftheLFOwaveformdeterminesthenatureofitseffectonthesignalitsmodulating. AneasywaytochecktheeffectsofthedifferentLFOshapesistosetLFO1asthevalueforthe Src1parameteronthePITCHpage,andsettheDepthforSrc1to400centsorso.Thengotothe LFOpage,settheMinandMaxratesforLFO1at0.00 Hzand4.00 Hzorso,andsettheRate controltoMWheel.NowplayyourMIDIcontrollerandyoullheartheLFOsratechangewhen youmoveitsModWheel.SelectdifferentLFOShapesandcheckouttheeffectonthepitch.

LFO Phase
UsethisparametertodeterminethestartingpointoftheLFOscycle.Onecompletecycleofthe LFOis360degrees.0degreesphasecorrespondstoacontrolsignalvalueof0,becoming positive.Each90degreeincrementinthephaserepresentsaquartercycleoftheLFO. WhenanLFOislocal,thephaseparametergivesyoucontroloverthestartingpointoftheLFO foreachnote(forexample,youcouldmakesureeveryvibratostartedbelowthepitchyou playedinsteadofatthepitchyouplayed).TheLFOsphasealsoaffectsglobalLFOs,although itsoftenindistinguishable,sinceglobalLFOsstartrunningassoonastheprogramcontaining themisselected,evenifyoudontplayanynotes.

6-39

Program Mode The ASR Page

The ASR Page

ASRsarethreesectionunipolarenvelopesattack,sustain,andrelease.ThePC3sASRscanbe triggeredbyaprogrammablecontrolsource,andcanbedelayed.ASR1isalwaysalocalcontrol. ASR2islocalbydefault,butbecomesglobaliftheGlobalsparameterontheCOMMONpageis settoOn.ASRsarefrequentlyusedtorampthedepthofpitchoramplitudeinavibratoor tremolo,enablingdelaysinthoseeffects.TheASRpageconsistsoftworowsoffiveparameters, onerowforeachoftheASRs.

Parameter Trigger Mode Delay Attack Release

Range of Values Control Source List Normal, Hold, Repeat 0 to 30 seconds 0 to 30 seconds 0 to 30 seconds

Default Off Normal 0 seconds 0 seconds 0 seconds

Trigger
ThisdefinesthecontrolsourcethatstartsthecurrentlayersASRs.TheASRstartswhenthe triggerswitchesfromofftoon.IftheTriggerparameterissettoON,aglobalASRstartsrunning immediatelywhenyouselectaprogramthatcontainsit.AlocalASRstartsrunningassoonas youtriggeranoteinthelayerthatcontainsit.SwitchcontrolsarebettersuitedforASRtriggers becauseoftheirbinary(on/off)nature.AcontinuouscontrolwilltriggertheASRswhenits signalvalueisaboveitsmidpoint.

Mode
ThisparametersetsthesustainsectionoftheASR.TheASRsmodedetermineswhattheASR doeswhenitfinishesitsattacksection.IftheModeparameterissettoNormal,theASRwillrun directlyfromitsattacksectiontoitsreleasesection(nosustain).AtasettingofRepeat,theASR willcyclethroughtheattackandreleasesections,thenloopforwardandcyclethroughagain untiltheASRstriggerswitchesoff.IfthemodeissettoHold,theASRmaintainsitspositionat theendoftheattacksectionuntiltheASRstriggerswitchesoff.TheASRthengoesintoits releasesection.IftheASRstriggerswitchesoffbeforetheattacksectioniscomplete,theASR goesdirectlytoitsreleasesection.

6-40

Program Mode The Function (FUN) Page

Delay
WhentheASRstriggerswitcheson,theASRwillstartimmediatelyifthisparameterissetto zero.NonzerovalueswillcauseacorrespondingdelaybetweentheASRtriggerandthestartof theASR.

Attack
ThisdefineshowlongtheASRtakestorampupfromminimumtomaximumeffecton whateveritspatchedto.

Release
ThisdefineshowlongtheASRtakestofadetominimumfromitsmaximum.IftheASRstrigger switchesoffbeforetheASRhasreachedmaximum,theASRreleasesfromthatlevel.

The Function (FUN) Page

FUNisshortforfunction.ThePC3sfourFUNsgreatlyextendtheflexibilityofthecontrol sources.EachFUNacceptsinputfromanytwocontrolsources,performsaselectablefunction onthetwoinputsignals,andsendstheresultasitsoutput,whichcanbeassignedlikeanyother controlsource.UsingtheFUNsinvolvesdefiningthemontheFUNpage,thenassigningoneor moreofthemascontrolsources.TheFUNpagelookslikethis:

TherearethreeparametersforeachFUN.Inputsaandbcanbeanycontrolsourcefromthe ControlSourcelist.Thecontrolsourcesyouwanttocombinearetheonesyoullassignasthe valuesfortheseparameters. TheFunctionparameterdetermineswhatmathematicalfunctionisappliedtothetwoinputs. WhenaFUNhasbeenassignedasacontrolsource,thePC3readsthevaluesofthetwocontrol sourcesdefinedasInputsaandb.Itthenprocessesthemaccordingtothesettingforthe Functionparameter,andtheresultingvalueistheFUNsoutput.

6-41

Program Mode The Amplitude Envelope (AMPENV) Page

The Amplitude Envelope (AMPENV) Page

Amplitudeenvelopeshavethreesections:attack,decay,andrelease.Theattacksection determineshowlongeachnotetakestoreachitsassignedamplitudelevelafteryoutriggera NoteOnevent.Thedecaysectiondetermineshowquicklyandhowmuchasustainedsound fadesbeforeaNoteOffistriggered.Thereleasesectiondetermineshowquicklyasoundfades tosilenceafteraNoteOffistriggered. PresstheAMPENVsoftbuttontoreachtheAmplitudeEnvelopepage.Formanyprograms,it willlooklikethediagrambelow,whichtellsyouthattheamplitudeenvelopeforthecurrent layeristhesamplesdefaultnaturalenvelope.ManyfactoryROMprogramsusethenatural envelope,whichiscustomdesignedforeachsampleandwaveformduringitsoriginal developmentprocess.Anaturalenvelopeusuallycontainsmoredetailthanauserenvelope, andmaymakesamplesofacousticinstrumentssoundmorerealistic.

Ifyouwanttobuildyourownamplitudeenvelope,justturntheAlphaWheelaclick.Thevalue NaturalwillchangetoUser,andasetofAMPENVparameterswillappear.Thesoundwill changewhenyoudothis,becausethedefaultsettingsfortheUserenvelope,asshowninthe diagrambelow,takeeffectassoonasyouleaveNaturalmode.ReturningtoNaturalmode appliestheoriginalamplitudeenvelopeonceagain.

YoulltweaktheparametersontheAMPENVpagewhenyouwanttoshapetheamplitude characteristicsofyoursounds.Agraphicviewoftheamplitudeenvelopewillappearonthe displaytogiveyouavisualsenseoftheenvelopescharacteristics.Thedotsalongtheenvelope graphicindicatethebreakpointsbetweentheenvelopesvarioussegments. TheAMPENVpagestoplinegivesyoutheusuallocationreminder,pointsoutthecurrently selectedlayer,andtellsyoutherelativescaleoftheenvelopesgraphicview.Theenvelope graphicshrinksinscaleasthesegmenttimesgetlonger.Thisautozoomfeaturemaximizesthe availabledisplayspace.Trylengtheningoneofthesegmenttimes.Theenvelopegraphicwill stretchtofillthedisplayfromlefttoright.Whenitfillsthedisplay,itwillshrinktohalfitssize, andthetoplinewillindicatethatthescalehaschanged(from[1/1]to[1/2],forexample).

6-42

Program Mode The Amplitude Envelope (AMPENV) Page

Eachparameteronthispagehastwovalues,aslistedbelow.Fortheenvelopesegments,thefirst (upper)valueisthedurationofthesegment,andthesecondistheamplitudelevelatthe completionofthesegment.FortheLoopparameter,thevaluesdefinehowtheenvelopeloops, andhowmanytimestheloopcycles.

Parameter Group Attack Segment 1, 2, 3 Decay Segment Parameter Time Level Time Level Time Release Segment 1, 2, 3 Level Type # of loops Range of Values 0 to 60 seconds 0 to 100% 0 to 60 seconds 0 to 100% 0 to 60 seconds 0 to 150% (Release Segment 3 is always set to 0%) Off, Forward, Bidirectional Infinite, 1 to 31 times

Loop

Attack Segment Times

Theseindicatehowlongittakesforthecurrentlayersamplitudetoreachitsfinallevelfromits startinglevel.

Attack Segment Levels

Thesearethefinallevelsthateachsegmentachievesatcompletion.Thelevelsareexpressedas percentagesofthemaximumpossibleamplitudeforthecurrentlayer.Attacksegment1always startsatzeroamplitude,andmovestoitsassignedlevelinthetimespecifiedbyitstimevalue. Sothedefaultsettingsof0secondsand100%meanthatthefirstsegmentoftheattacksection movesinstantlyfromzeroamplitudeto100%amplitude.IncreasethetimeofAttacksegment1 ifyouwantthesoundtorampupmoreslowly. Attacksegments2and3affectthesoundonlywhenyousetanonzerovaluefortime.Theywill thenmovetotheirassignedlevelsinthetimespecified.Theirstartinglevelsareequaltothe finallevelsoftheprecedingsegment.

Decay Segment
Thedecaysectionhasonlyonesegment.Ithasvaluesfortimeandlevel,justasfortheattack section.Thedecaysectionbeginsassoonastheattacksectionhasbeencompleted.Itstartsatthe sameamplitudelevelastheattacksegmentprecedingit,andmovestoitsassignedlevelinthe timespecified.Youllhearanotesdecaysectiononlywhentheattacksectioniscompleted beforeaNoteOffmessageisgeneratedforthatnote. Tocreateasustainingenvelope,simplysettheDecaysegmentsleveltoanonzerovalue.

Release Segments
Liketheattackanddecaysections,eachofthethreesegmentsinthereleasesectionhasvalues fortimeandlevel.Eachsegmentreachesitsassignedlevelinthetimespecifiedforthatsegment. Releasesegment1startsattheNoteOffeventforeachnote,atthecurrentamplitudelevelof thatnotewhetheritsintheattacksectionorthedecaysection.Itthenmovestoitsassigned levelinthetimespecified.Releasesegments2and3startatthefinallevelsofthesegments

6-43

Program Mode The Envelope 2 (ENV2) and Envelope 3 (ENV3) Pages

beforethem.Releasesegments1and2canbesettoanylevelfrom0to150%.Releasesegment3 alwayshasalevelof0%,soyoucantadjustitslevel.InplaceofitsLevelparameteryouseea parameterthatletsyoutogglebetweenUserenvelopesandthesoundspreprogrammednatural envelope.

Loop Type
TherearesevendifferentvaluesforLooptype. AvalueofOffdisablesloopingforthecurrentlayersamplitudeenvelope. Valuesofseg1F,seg2F,andseg3Fareforwardloops.Ineachcase,theamplitudeenvelopeplays throughtheattackanddecaysections,thenloopsbacktothebeginningofthefirst,second,or thirdattacksegments,respectively. Valuesofseg1B,seg2B,andseg3B,arebidirectionalloops.Theamplitudeenvelopeplays throughtheattackanddecaysections,thenreversesandplaysbackwardtothebeginningofthe first,second,orthirdattacksegment,respectively.Whenitreachesthebeginningoftheassigned attacksegment,itreversesagain,playingforwardtotheendofthedecaysection,andsoon.

Number of Loops
AvalueofInfmakestheamplitudeenvelopeloopuntilaNoteOffisgenerated.Valuesof1 through31indicatehowmanytimestheloopwillrepeataftertheamplitudeenvelopehas playedoncethroughitsnormalcycle. Regardlessofthelooptypeandthenumberofloops,eachnotegoesintoitsreleasesectionas soonasitsNoteStategoesoff(thatis,whenaNoteOffisgenerated).Theenvelopewill continuetoloopaslongasNoteStateremainson,whetheritsheldonbyapedal,bytheIgnRel parameter(describedinthesectionentitledTheLAYERPage on page 617),oranythingelse.

The Envelope 2 (ENV2) and Envelope 3 (ENV3) Pages

ThePC3offerstwoenvelopesinadditiontoAMPENV.LikeAMPENV,ENV2andENV3canbe assignedlikeanyothercontrolsource.UnlikeAMPENV,however,ENV2andENV3canbe bipolar.Thismeansthatyoucansetnegativevaluesforthem.(Obviously,youcanthavean amplitudelessthanzero,soAMPENVisunipolarthevaluesrangefromeither0to 100%or0 to150%.)Abipolarenvelopecontrollingpitch,forexample,couldmodulatethepitchboth aboveandbelowitsoriginallevel. AnotherdifferenceisthatAMPENValwayscontrolstheamplitudeofthelayer,soevenifyou useitasacontrolsourceforotherfunctions,itwillstillaffectthelayersamplitude.ENV2and ENV3affectonlythoselayersthathavethemassignedasacontrolsource.Also,AMPENVuses anexponentialattack(theamplituderisesmuchfasterattheendoftheattacksegmentthanit doesatthebeginning),whileENV2andENV3uselinearattacks(theattacksegmentincreasesat thesameratefromstarttofinish).

6-44

Program Mode The Envelope Control (ENVCTL) Page

ThepagesforEnvelopes2and3arereachedwiththesoftbuttonsENV2andENV3.Whenyou selectthesepages,youllfindadisplaythatlooksverymuchliketheAMPENVpage.Theonly differencesarethatyoucanprogramanamountforRel3;theRel1andRel2limits,whichare 100%;andintheenvelopegraphic,whichhasadottedlinerunninghorizontallyacrossthe display.Thisisthezerolevelline;negativelevelvaluesforthevariousenvelopesegmentswill causetheenvelopegraphictodipbelowthisline.

The Envelope Control (ENVCTL) Page

TheEnvelopeControlpagegivesyourealtimecontrolovertheratesofeachsectionofthe amplitudeenvelopeforbothnaturalanduserenvelopes(seeTheAmplitudeEnvelope(AMPENV) Page on page 642.)PresstheENVCTLsoftbuttontoreachtheENVCTLpage.

Thedisplaystoplineremindsyouofthecurrentlayer.Thecolumnontheleftliststhethree sectiontypesoftheamplitudeenvelope,andeachcorrespondinglineliststhevaluesforthefive DSPcontrolparametersthatareavailableforeachsectiontype.TheDSPcontrolparametersare: Adjust,Keytracking,Velocitytracking,andSource/Depth,whicharelistedatthetopofeach correspondingcolumn.WhenAMPENVissettoUsermode,theAttackandReleasesectionson thispageapplytotheattackandreleasesectionsontheAMPENVpage.Itsimportanttokeepin mindthatthevaluesforthevariousparametersarecumulative,meaningthatifforexampleyou setattacktobecontrolledbyKeytrkandVelTrk,theresultingchangeonAttackwouldbe affectedbythecombinationofthevaluesproducedbyKeyTrkandVelTrk.Alsonotethatunlike previousKurzweilmodels,ENVCTLdoesaffecttheattacksectionsofnaturalenvelopes. Additionally,thebottomlineofthispageletsyoumakeuseoftheImpactfeature,whichletsyou boostorcuttheamplitudeofthefirst20millisecondsofanotesattack. Theparametersandvaluesinthefollowingparameterslist(seebelow)applytoeachofthethree envelopesectionsattack,decay,andrelease.Welldescribethemonlyonce,sincetheir functionsarelargelythesameforeachenvelopesection.Theonlydifferenceiswithvelocity tracking,whichisonlyavailableasaparametertocontrolattacksectionsoftheamplitude envelope(however,youcanassignattackvelocityasthevaluefortheSourceparameterineach ofthesections). Thevaluesofeachoftheseparametersmultiplytheratesoftheenvelopesectionstheycontrol. Valuesgreaterthan1.000xmaketheenvelopesectionsrunfaster(theyincreasetherate),while valueslessthan1.000xmaketheenvelopesectionsrunslower.Sayforexamplethatonthe currentlayersAMPENVpageyouhadsettheDecaysectionstimeat2.00seconds,anditslevel at0%.Thissetsthelayersamplitudetofadetosilencetwosecondsafterthecompletionofthe lastattacksegment.Thedecaytimeistwoseconds;thedecayrateis50%persecond.Nowifyou selecttheENVCTLpageandsettheDecayAdjustparametertoavalueof2.000x,youve increasedthedecayratebyafactoroftwo,makingittwiceasfast.Therateincreasesto100%per second,andthedecaytimeisnowonesecondinsteadoftwo.

6-45

Program Mode The Envelope Control (ENVCTL) Page

Note:Since0multipliedbyanynumberequals0,theenvelopeparametersonthispagewillhavenoeffect onanyAMPENVsectionssetto0seconds.AwayaroundthisistochangeanyAMPENVsectionssetto 0to0.02seconds.

Parameter Group (Available for each of Att, Dec, Rel, Imp) Adjust Key Tracking Velocity Tracking Source Depth

Range of Values 0.018 to 50.000x (-24.0 to 24.0 dB for Imp) 0.018 to 50.000x (-2.00 to 2.00 dB for Imp) 0.018 to 50.000x (Not available for Dec or Rel; -24.0 to 24.0 dB for Imp) Control Source List 0.018 to 50.000x (-24.0 to 24.0 dB for Imp)

Adjust
ThisisthefamiliarCoarseadjustfoundonmanyotherpages.Useitheretochangetherateof oneoftheenvelopesectionswithoutreprogrammingtheenvelopeitself.Thisparameterdoesnt giveyourealtimecontrolovertheenvelope.Itis,however,agoodwaytoadjustthenatural envelopeswithoutswitchingtoaUserenvelopeandtryingtoapproximatetheNatural envelope.

Key Tracking
ThisusestheMIDInotenumberofeachkeyasthecontrolinputforthecurrentlayers correspondingenvelopesection.Whenthevalueofthisparameterisgreaterthan1.000x,notes aboveC4willmaketheenvelopesectionrunfaster,whilenotesbelowC4willmakeitrun slower.Whenthevalueofthisparameterislessthan1.000x,notesaboveC4willmakethe envelopesectionrunslower,andnotesbelowC4willmakeitrunfaster.Thisgivesyourealtime envelopecontrolrightfromyourMIDIcontroller.Youmightuseit,forexample,tocausean acousticguitarsoundtodecayquickeratthehighendofthekeyboard(setthekeytrackingtoa positivevalue).

Velocity Tracking
Useyourattackvelocityasthecontrolinputforthecurrentlayersattacksection(thisparameter doesntapplytodecayorrelease).Whenthevalueofthisparameterisgreaterthan1.000x, attackvelocitiesgreaterthan64maketheattacksectionrunfaster,andattackvelocitiesbelow64 makeitrunslower.Thisgivesyourealtimeattackcontrolovertheenvelope.

Source, Depth
ThesetwoparametersworktogethertoletyouassignacontrolliketheModWheeltoaffectthe currentlayersamplitudeenvelopeinrealtime.ThevalueoftheSourceparameterdefineswhich controlaffectstheenvelopesection,andthevalueoftheDepthparameterdefineshowmuchthe rateismultipliedwhenthecontrolisatitsmaximumvalue,127.Noeffectishadwhenthe controlisatitsminimumvalue,0,andDepthvaluesarescaledforcontrollervaluesinbetween. Note:Foreachnotetriggered,youcanonlysetthecontrollervaluethatwillscaletheDepthparameterof anenvelopesectionbeforethatsectionoftheenvelopeistriggered.ForcontrollersassignedforAttack,the controllervalueusedwillbethelastreceivedbeforethenoteistriggered.Forcontrollersassignedfor Decay,thecontrollervalueusedwillbethelastreceivedbeforethefinalsectionoftheattackenvelope reachesitsmaximumamplitude.ForcontrollersassignedforRelease,thecontrollervalueusedwillbethe lastreceivedbeforethenoteisreleased.Toputitanotherway,foreachenvelopesection,youcannot changetherateofanotesenvelopeoncethatsectionoftheenvelopehasbeentriggered.

6-46

Program Mode The Program FX (PROGFX) Page

Impact
Impactcanboostorcutnotevolumebyupto24dBduringthefirst20millisecondsoftheattack ofanenvelope.Thisfeatureisaneasywaytogetmorethumpfromyourbassanddrum sounds.

The Program FX (PROGFX) Page

PressthePROGFXsoftbuttontocalluptheProgramFX(PROGFX)page.Thisisthepagethat youwillusetoapplyeffectstoaprogram,andtoconfiguretheroutingofthevariouspreand postFXaudiosignals.Effectschosenonthispageaffecteverylayerofthecurrentprogram.The sectionTheLayerFX(LYR_FX)Page on page 649containsinformationonusinglayerspecific effects.

Parameter Insert Aux 1, Aux 2 Output Aux Send (dB) Auxiliary Send Parameters Aux Send (%) Aux Pre/Post Insert Type Aux Modulation

Range of Values Chain List Chain List Main, Sec. off, -95 to 24 decibels 0 to 100% Post, Pre dB, % Control Source List

Default 0 None 0 None Main 0 0 Post dB On

OnthePC3,aprogramcanhaveupto11inserteffectsand2auxeffectsusingupto16DSP units.Aninsertisessentiallyjustaneffectthatyouapplytoaprogramorlayer,whileaux effectsreceivesignalfromallactiveprogramsauxsends.Notethe0/0Unitsinthemiddleofthe toplineofthepage.Thisfigureindicateshowmanyofthetotalunitsarebeingusedbythe highlightedinsert;thelefthandnumberisthesizeoftheinsert,andtherighthandnumberis thetotalnumberofunitsbeingusedbytheprogram. IfyouexceedthemaximumnumberofDSPunits,thePC3willnotifyyouthatyouhavedoneso, andnoeffectswillbeappliedtotheprogram.

Insert
TheInserteffectistheeffectschainthatisappliedtothemainaudiobus.

Aux 1, Aux 2
TheAuxeffectistheeffectschainthatisappliedtotheselectedauxiliaryaudiobus.

6-47

Program Mode The Program FX (PROGFX) Page

Output
TheOutputspecifiestheanalogoutputtowhichtheselectedbusisrouted.SettingtheOutputto Mainroutesthesignaloftheselectedbustothemainoutputs.SettingtheOutputtoSec.routes thesignaloftheselectedbustotheauxiliaryoutputs.

Auxiliary Send Parameters

TheAuxiliarySendparametersdeterminestheleveloftheprogramsignalsenttotheauxiliary effectschain. Aux Send TheAuxSendparameterdeterminestheleveloftheprogramsignalsenttotheauxiliaryeffects chain. Pre/Post Insert ThePre/PostInsertparameterdeterminesthepointatwhichtheauxiliaryeffectisappliedtothe signal.WhenthisparameterissettoPost,thePC3appliestheauxiliaryeffecttothesignalpost insert,i.e.,aftertheinserteffecthasbeenapplied.WhenthisparameterissettoPre,thePC3 appliestheauxiliaryeffecttothesignalpreinsert. Tohearaprogramputthroughtwoeffectsinseries(i.e.,throughtwocascadedeffects),choose yourdesiredeffectsfortheInsertandeitherAux(forwhateverAuxyouchoose,theother shouldbesetto0None),seteachbusOutputtoMain,andsettheAuxSendparameterto either0dBor100%.Then,setthePre/PostInsertparametertoPost. Tohearaprogramputthroughtwoeffectsinparallel(i.e.,throughtwodistincteffects),choose yourdesiredeffectsfortheInsertandeitherAux(again,forwhateverAuxyouchoose,theother shouldbesetto0None),seteachbusOutputtoMain,andsettheAuxSendparameterto either0dBor50%.Then,setthePre/PostInsertparametertoPre. Withrespecttoeachother,theAuxesarealwaysinparallel,thatis,theycannotbecascaded. Type TheTypeparameterdetermineshowtheselectedwetauxsignal(i.e.,witheffectsapplied)is mixedintothefinalsignal.Additionally,itdeterminestheunitsinwhichtheAuxSend parametervaluesare. WhenTypeissettodB,theAuxSendparametervaluesareinunitsofdecibels(dB).Thevalue specifiedintheAuxSendparameteristheamountofprogramsignalsenttotheauxeffects chain.Tohearequalpartswetsignalanddrysignal(thesignalwithnoeffectsapplied)onthe mainaudiooutput,setthemainInserteffectto0NoneandtheInsertOutputtoMain,andset theAux1effecttoyourdesiredeffectandtheAux1OutputtoMain.Then,settheAux1Sendto 0dB.Ifyouwantonlywetsignalonthemainaudiooutput,setthemainInsertOutputtoSec. keepinmindthatbythismethod,thedrysignalissenttotheauxiliaryaudiooutputs. WhenTypeissetto%,theAuxSendparametervaluesareinunitsofpercent(%).Thevalue specifiedintheAuxSendparameteristhepercentageofwhichthewetauxiliarysignal comprisesthefinalsignaltheinsertsignalcomprisestherestofthefinalsignal.Tohearequal partswetsignalanddrysignalonthemainaudiooutput,setthemainInserteffectto0None andtheInsertOutputtoMain,andsettheAux1effecttoyourdesiredeffectandtheAux1 OutputtoMain.Then,settheAux1Sendto50%.Ifyouwanttohearonlythewetsignal,setthe Aux1Sendto100%.

6-48

Program Mode The Layer FX (LYR_FX) Page

Aux1 Mod, Aux2 Mod

TheAuxModparametergivesyourealtimecontrolovertheamountofprogramsignalsentto theauxeffectschain.YoucansettheAuxModparametertoanyPC3controlsource.The amountthatyouspecifyfortheAuxSendparameteristhemaximumvaluethattheAuxMod controlsourcecansendtheminimumvalueis0.

The Layer FX (LYR_FX) Page

PresstheLYR_FXsoftbuttontocalluptheLayerFX(LYR_FX)page.Onthispage,youcan applylayerspecificeffects.TherearethreeLayerFXModes:UseProgramFX,LayerSpecific FX,andUseAnotherLayersFX. Use Program FX Mode WithUseProgramFXModeselected,thecurrentlayerwillusetheeffectsconfiguredonthe ProgramFX(PROGFX)page.SeeTheProgramFX(PROGFX)Page on page 647formore informationonprogramFX. Layer-Specific FX Mode WithLayerSpecificFXselected,youcanconfiguretheeffectsforthecurrentlayer.Thismodes parametersaresimilartothoseofthePROGFXpage.Thismodeisshowninthefollowing display:

AlloftheLayerSpecificFXmodeparametershavethesamefunctionsandrangesofvaluesas theircorrespondingparametersonthePROGFXpage.SeeTheProgramFX(PROGFX) Page on page 647formoreinformationontheseparameters. Use Another Layers FX Mode WithUseAnotherLayersFXselected,youcanputthecurrentlayerthroughtheeffectsof anotherlayer.Youcanspecifythelayerthroughwhoseeffectsyouwishtoputthecurrentlayer.

6-49

Program Mode The Controllers (CTLS) Page

The Controllers (CTLS) Page

PresstheCTLSsoftbuttontocalluptheCONTROLLERSpage.TheCONTROLLERSpage showsalistofthePC3scontrollers(sliders,Modwheel,switch,etc.,)whichcanbeusedto controlprogramparameters.Usethispagetosetvaluesforeachcontrollerthatwillbesaved withtheprogram(entryvalues.)Whenaprogramisloaded,theentryvaluesonthispageare senttoanyprogramparametersthathavebeenassignedtothesecontrollers. Forexample,theelectricpianoprogram25WoodstockClunkerhasTremoloDepthassignedto becontrolledbytheModWheel.TurninguptheModWheelincreasestheTremoloDepthand allowsyoutohearmoreoftheTremoloeffect.IfyoulookattheCONTROLLERSpagefor 25WoodstockClunker,Modwheel(1)issetto37.ThismeanstheModWheelsendsavalueof 37tosetTremoloDepthwhentheprogramisselected,allowingyoutoheartheTremoloeffect. IfyoudonotwanttoheartheTremoloeffectwhentheprogramisselected,edittheprogram andusetheCONTROLLERSpagetosetModwheel(1)to0,thensavetheprogram. ForcontrollersthathaveanentryvaluesettoNone,novalueissentforthatcontrollerwhena programisloaded.WhenandentryvalueofNoneisused,thevaluelastusedforthatcontroller (inthepreviousprogramorsetup)isused.TosetavalueofNone,usethealphawheelor/+ buttonstoscrollbelow0,orusethealphanumericpadtoenter1,thenpresstheEnterbutton.

Controller Slider A (6)...Breath (2) Switch 2 (29)

Range of Values None, 0-127 None, 0, 127

Default Value 0 0

YoucanautomaticallysetthevaluesontheCONTROLLERSpagetothephysicalcontrollers currentvaluesbyusingtheSetCtlsoftbutton(locatedtotherightoftheCTLSsoftbutton.)The SetCtlsoftbuttoncapturesthepositionsofthecontrollerslistedonthepage. Note:Ifyouchangeprograms,andthenpresstheSetCtlsoftbuttonbeforemovinganyofthe controllers,theparametersontheCONTROLLERSpagewillremainattheirpreviouslyset values. ThenumberinparenthesesthatappearsnexttoeachcontrollernameistheMIDIcontroller numberthateachcontrollertransmitsbydefault,i.e.,withtheControlSetupsetto126Internal VoicesontheMIDImodeTransmitpage.SeeControlSetup on page 69fordetails.

6-50

Program Mode INFO

INFO
PresstheINFOsoftbuttontogototheINFOpagewhereyoucaneditthecontrollerassignment infoforthecurrentprogram.Eachinfoentryisadescriptionofaprogramparameterthatyou haveassignedtobecontrolledbyaphysicalcontrollerorMIDICCnumber.Infocanbeviewed fromtheProgrammodeorSetupmodemainpagebypressingtheInfosoftbutton.Ifthe DisplayparameterissettoCtlsontheMasterModeMAINpage,controllerswithinfotextwill showtheinfoontheleftsideoftheProgrammodeorSetupModemainpagewhenmoved(see Display on page 113fordetails.) OntheINFOpage,usetheChan/Layerbuttonstoscrollthroughthecurrentprogramslistof controllerassignmentinfo.EachassignmentinfoentryhasaMIDIcontrollernumberandaText parametertodescribewhattheassignmentcontrols.OneinfoentrycanbemadeforeachMIDI CCnumber. Toeditthetextofacontrollerassignment,presstheTextsoftbutton.Tocreateanewcontroller assignmentinfoentry,presstheNewsoftbutton(youwillbepromptedforaMIDIcontroller number.)Tocreateanewcontrollerassignmentinfoentrywiththesametextasthecurrentinfo entry,presstheDupsoftbutton(youwillbepromptedforanewMIDIcontrollernumber,only oneinfoentrycanbemadeforeachMIDICCnumber.)Todeletethecurrentcontroller assignmentinfoentry,presstheDeletesoftbutton(youwillbepromptedtoconfirmorcancel.) ToreturntotheprogrameditorpresstheDonesoftbuttonortheExitbutton.See Export on page 1313fordetailsonexportingprograminfo. Automatic Info Creation Note:Thefollowingdoesnotapplytocontrollerassignmentsmadeforeffectswithinthe Chainseditor.InfotextforChainsmustbemanuallycreatedusingtheINFOpageinthe ChainsEditor. WhenassigningacontrollertoaparameteronanyoftheProgramEditorpages,anInfotext entryisautomaticallycreated.AniappearsonthetoplineofthepagetoindicatethatInfotext hasbeencreated.IfyoureturnthecontrollerassignmenttoOFF,theidisappears,indicating thattheInfotexthasbeenremoved(unlessyouhavegonetotheINFOpage,seenotebelow.) TheautomaticallycreatedinfowillusetheparameternamefortheInfotext.TorenametheInfo text,presstheEditbuttonwhilethecontrollerassignmentfieldisstillselected.Thiswillbring youtotheInfoEditorpage(seeabove)andtheInfoentryfortheassignedcontroller.Fromthe InfoEditorpage,presstheExitbuttontoreturntothepagewhereyoumadethecontroller assignment. Note:Afterassigningacontrollertoparameter,ifyougototheINFOpage,theInfotext entriesforeachcontrollerassignmentwillremainsetunlessyouremovethemwiththe DeletesoftbuttonontheINFOpage.Ifyouchangethecontrollerassignmentforaparameter aftergoingtotheINFOpage,theparameterslastInfotextentrywillremaininadditionto thenewerInfotextentryautomaticallymadeforthecontrollerassignment.Thisisdoneato ensurethatuserrenamedInfotextdoesnotgetdeletedifacontrollerassignmentwas accidentallychangedwhileeditingtheprogram.ToremoveanunusedInfotextentry,locate theentryontheINFOpageandusetheDeletesoftbutton.

Function Soft Buttons

Thissectiondescribesthesoftbuttonsthatperformspecificfunctions,asopposedtoselecting programmingpages.Thedescriptionsbelowarearrangedintheorderinwhichyouwouldsee thesoftbuttonsifyoupressedthemore>buttonrepeatedly.Youcanalwaysgettothesebuttons, regardlessofwhichpageiscurrentlyselected.

6-51

Program Mode Function Soft Buttons

Set Controllers (SetCtl)

AsexplainedinTheControllers(CTLS)Page,theSetCtlsoftbuttoncapturesthevaluesofthenine sliders,modwheel,breathcontroller,andswitch.

New Layer (NewLyr)

Createanewlayer,numberedoneabovethehighestexistinglayer.Thenewlayersparameters arethoseofthesinglelayerinProgram999,calledDefaultProgram.Whenyoupressthis button,thePC3willtellyouthatitiscreatinganewlayer,thenwillreturntothepageyouwere on.Thenewlayerbecomesthecurrentlayer,andisthehighestnumberedlayerintheprogram. Ifthecurrentprogramalreadyhasitsmaximumnumberoflayers,thePC3willtellyouthatyou cantaddanymore. Program999makesagoodtemplateforprogramsthatyoubuildfromthealgorithmup.You mightwanttoeditProgram999toadjustoneormoreparameterstovaluesyouwanttousein yourtemplateprogram.Ifyoulikethesettingsofthedefaultlayerastheyare,however, remembernottomakeanypermanentchangestoProgram999.

Duplicate Layer (DupLyr)

Createacopyofthecurrentlayer,duplicatingthesettingsofallitsparameters.Thecopy becomesthecurrentlayer,andisthehighestnumberedlayerintheprogram.

Import Layer (ImpLyr)

Copyaspecificlayerfromanotherprogramintothecurrentprogram.Thisbuttonbringsupa dialogthatpromptsyoutoselectalayernumberandaprogramnumber.Thedialogtellsyou thecurrentlyselectedlayer,andthetotalnumberoflayersintheprogram.UsetheLayeror Layer+softbuttons(orthealphawheel)tochangethelayernumber.Ifthecurrentprogramhas onlyonelayer,pressingthesebuttonswillhavenoeffect.UseProgorProg+softbuttons(orthe alphawheel)tochangetheprogramnumber. Whileyouareinthisdialog,youcanlistentothelayeryouareselectingtoimport,alongwithall otherlayersinthecurrentprogram.Ifyouwanttohearthelayertobeimportedbyitself,you mustmutetheotherlayers. Whenyouhaveselectedthedesiredlayerfromthedesiredprogram,presstheImportsoft button,andtheselectedlayerwillbecopiedfromtheselectedprogram,becomingthecurrent layer.Importinglayersisaconvenientalternativetocreatinglayersfromscratch.Ifyouhavea favoritestringsound,forexample,andyouwanttouseitinotherprograms,justimportits layer(s)intotheprogramyourebuilding.Thiswillpreservetheenvelopesandallthecontrol settingssoyoudonthavetoreprogramthem.

Delete Layer (DelLyr)

Deletethecurrentlayer.Whenyoupressthisbutton,thePC3asksyouifyouwanttodeletethe layer;presstheYessoftbuttontostartthedeletionprocess,ortheNosoftbuttontocancelit. Thispromptpreventsyoufromaccidentallydeletingalayer.

Name, Save, Delete

Namecallsupthepagethatenablesyoutochangethenameofthecurrentprogram.Savestarts theprocessofsavingthecurrentprogram.Deletedeletesthecurrentprogramfrommemory. Youcanalsodeleteanyotherprogramfrommemorybyscrollingthroughthelistthatappears whenyoupresstheDeletesoftbutton,thenpressingDeleteagainwhenthedesiredprogramis selected.IfyouattempttodeleteaROMprogram,thePC3willsayitsdeletingtheprogram,but itdoesntactuallydoit.

6-52

Program Mode Editing VAST Programs With KVA Oscillators

Editing VAST Programs With KVA Oscillators

ThePC3usesKVAoscillatorsasanotherwaytogeneratesoundsinVASTprograms.Unlike keymaps,whichplaysamplesstoredinROM,KVAoscillatorscreateDSPgeneratedwaveforms everytimetheyaretriggered.TheKVAoscillatorscancreatearangeofwaveforms,fromhigh qualitysimplewaveformsfamiliartousersofclassicanalogsynths,tocomplexwaveforms whichtakeadvantageofthePC3sinternalprocessingpowerandcomplexsignalrouting capabilities.ThoughthePC3doeshavekeymapscontainingsamplesofbasicsynthwaveforms, theuseofKVAoscillatorsprovidesuserswithbetterportamento,moremodulationoptions, highersoundquality,andotheradvantageswhichwillbeexplainedinthissection.Learningto useKVAoscillatorsinsteadofkeymaps(whereappropriate)issimpleandwillincreasethe versatilityofyourVASTeditingcapabilities.VASTprogramsusinglayerswithKVAoscillators canalsobecombinedwithotherlayersusingkeymaps.

Basic Use of KVA Oscillators

TounderstandthebasicminimalsetupofaKVAbasedprogram,selecttheprogram1019 VA1NakedPWMPoly,andpresstheEditbutton.IfyouarefamiliarwitheditingVAST programs,thefirstthingyoumaynoticeisthatontheKEYMAPpage,Keymapissetto999 Silence(MoreonthisinAdvancedUseOfKVAOscillators on page 655.)Next,lookatthe AMPENVpage.TheAMPENVmodeissettoUser,whichgivesyoucontrolovertheamplitude envelope(moreonusingNaturalmodelater.)Finally,lookattheALGpage.Inthecurrent algorithmthe3blockKVAoscillatorPWMhasbeenselected,whichgeneratesthesoundforthis layeroftheprogram. Minimal Settings for Basic Use of KVA Oscillators: ThepatchdescribedabovecontainstheminimalsettingsthataKVAlayerneedsinorderto functioninthestyleofaclassicanalogsynth.Theseminimalsettingsare: 1.EditProg:KEYMAPPage:SettheKeymapparameterto999Silence. 2.EditProg:AMPENVPage:SettheEnvelopemodetoUser,andadjusttheamplitudeenvelope toyourliking(seeTheAmplitudeEnvelope(AMPENV)Page on page 642.). 3.EditProg:ALGPage:PickanAlgorithmandsetanOscillator(seeSettingKVAOscillatorType below.)

FurtherbasicVASTsettingsthatyouwilllikelywanttoadjustare: MonophonicOn/Off(seeTheCOMMONPage on page 635.) LevelVelocityTracking(seeTheDSPControl(DSPCTL)Page on page 629.)

ReadtheSettingKVAOscillatorTypesectionbelowtolearnabouthowseteachtypeofoscillator. Afterdoingthis,youcanexperimentwithmakingKVAprogramsbyfollowingtheabove settings,andthensettingandlisteningtoeachtypeofoscillator.Onceyouunderstandhowto dothis,readontotheAdvancedUseOfKVAOscillators section on page 655(seebelow)tolearn howtomakeyourKVApatchesmoreexpressivethroughtheuseofDSPmodulation. Pitch Settings for KVA Oscillators Eachoscillator(exceptfornoisefunctions)hasitsownpitchparameters,andisunaffectedby pitchsettingsthatwouldnormallyaffectkeymaps(suchasthoseontheKeymappage.)Ona programlayer,thecoarsepitchparameterfortheoscillatorinusecanbefoundonboththe DSPCTLandDSPMODpages,intheparameterslistbelowthestandardPitchparameterfor

6-53

Program Mode Editing VAST Programs With KVA Oscillators

keymaps.Foreachoscillator,itscoarsepitchparameterisnamedbyanabbreviationofthe oscillatornamefollowedbyPch.Forexample,thecoarsepitchparameterforasawwave oscillatorwillbecalledSawPch.OntheDSPCTLsubpageforanyoscillatorPch.parameter, youcanadjustfinepitchbycentsandHertz,aswellasKeyTrkandVelTrksettingsforpitch. Note:Besuretodifferentiatebetweenthedifferentpitchparameters,eachusedeitheronlyforkeymapsor onlyforKVAoscillators.ThePitchparameteronthetopleftoftheDSPCTLandDSPMODpagesalways appearsinVASTprogramsbutonlyaffectsthepitchofkeymaps.IfaKVAoscillatorisbeingused,this Pitchparameterwillhavenoaffectonthelayerspitch,inwhichcasetheoscillatorPch.parameter describedabovemustbeusedtocontrolthepitchoftheoscillator.

Setting KVA Oscillator Type

ThePC3comeswith22DifferentKVAoscillators.Thereare11highqualityantialiased oscillators(freeofdigitalartifacts,)and11oscillatorsthatexhibitsomealiasing(digitalartifacts) inthehigheroctaves.TheantialiasedoscillatorsuseupmoreDSPresourcesthantheoneswith aliasing,buttheimprovementinsoundqualityisquitenoticeable.Westronglyrecommend usingtheantialiasedoscillatorsformostapplications. ThetablesbelowlistKVAoscillatorsbytypeandfunctionblocksize.Beforesettinganoscillator, youmustchooseanalgorithmwhichincludesablockthatmatchestheblocksizeforthe oscillatorthatyouwishtouse.SeeTheAlgorithm(ALG)Page on page 622andAlgorithm Basics on page 623formoreonselectingalgorithms.Onceyouhavepickedanalgorithmwith thedesiredblocksize,highlighttheblockandusethealphawheeltoscrollthroughthe availablefunctionsuntilyoufindthedesiredoscillator. TheSYNCSQUAREoscillatorisan8blockoscillatorthatrequirestheuseoftwolayers(4 blockseach)andtheAltInputfeatureofcascademode.Seebelowfordetailsonsettingupthe SyncSquareoscillator. Note:Ifyouputmorethanoneoscillatorinanalgorithm,youwillonlyheartheoutputofthelast oscillatorinthealgorithm,unlessanalgorithmisusedtoroutetheearlieroscillatoraroundthelast oscillatorandintoaMIXfunctionblock,orifthelastoscillatorprocessesitsaudioinput. Anti-Aliased Oscillators Size
1 Block 2 Blocks SINE SINE+ SAW RES NOISE (noise + low pass filter with resonance) SQUARE 3 Blocks 4 Blocks PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) SYNC SAW SUPER SAW TRIPLE SAW 8 Blocks SYNC SQUARE (master) >>, >>SYNC SQUARE (slave) (4 blocks each) 2 Blocks

Aliased Oscillators Size

1 Block SINE SAW TRI SQUARE NOISE SINE+ SAW+ NOISE+ SW+SHP (Sawtooth + Shaper) SHAPED SAW PWM (Pulse Width Modulation)

Name/Type
LPNOIZ (noise + low pass filter)

Name/Type

6-54

Program Mode Editing VAST Programs With KVA Oscillators

Setting Up The Sync Square Oscillator: TheSyncSquareoscillatorisactuallycomprisedoftwooscillators,amasterandaslave,setup toemulatethewaysyncsquareoscillatorsworkedonclassicanalogsynthesizers.Tocreatea programusingSyncSquare,selectDefaultProgram,#999.Selectnoneonthekeymappage. SelectuserontheAmpenvpageforanampenvelope.OntheALGpage,selectAlgorithm5at thetopofthepage.Usethecursorbuttonstoselectthefunctionblockandusethealphawheel toselecttheSYNCSQUARE(master)>>function.Next,pressthe<<softbuttontochangesoft buttonpagesuntilyouseeDupLyr.PressDupLyrtoduplicatethelayer,creatinglayer2.In layer2,ontheALGpage,changethefunctionblockto>>SYNCSQUARE(slave),andsetthe AltInputparametertoLayer1.ThefinalstepistogotoLayer1sDSPCTLpageandturnthe Levelparameterallthewaydown,to96dB(thisensuresthatyouwillonlyheartheoutputof theslaveoscillatoronlayer2,whichistheintendedfunctionofSyncSquare.) NowtheSyncSquareoscillatorshouldbeworking.TheSyncoffparameter,SyncOffset,isthe mainparameterforshapingthetoneofthissound.Syncoffsetsthesyncoffsetbetweenthe masterandslavesquarewavesineachcorrespondingoscillator,whichchangestheshapeofthe waveformoutputbytheslaveoscillator.TheSyncSquareoscillatorismostexpressivewhenthe Syncoffparametermodulatedduringperformance.UsetheDSPMODpagetoassignan envelopeorcontinuouscontrollerliketheModWheelforthisparametertoheartheeffect(see TheDSPModulation(DSPMOD)Page on page 630,aswellasTheDSPControl(DSPCTL) Page on page 629andCommonDSPControlParametersinAlgorithmBasics on page 623,for detailsonsettingupmodulationandotherwaystocontrolparameters,andseeTheEnvelope2 (ENV2)andEnvelope3(ENV3)Pages on page 644fordetailsonusingenvelopesasmodulation sources.)SeeAdvancedUseOfKVAOscillatorsbelowforsomesimilarexamplesofhowtosetand controlmodulationforoscillatorspecificfunctionsandotherparameters. ToaddaDSPfunctiontotheSyncSquareoscillator,youllneedtousecascademode.For example,toaddafilter,duplicateoneofthelayerstocreatelayer3.Onlayer3,selecttheALG pageandchooseoneofthecascademodealgorithms,algorithms101131.Forthisexample,lets usealg105withthefilter4PoleMogueLPselectedforthefunctionblock.FortheAltInput parameter,selectLayer2.ThisroutesapreLevelparametercopyofLayer2soutputintoLayer 3.Gotolayer2sDSPCTLpageandturnitsleveldownto96dB(otherwisetheunfiltered soundfromlayer2willbeaudibleaswellasthefilteredsoundinlayer3.)Nowyoucanhearthe SyncSquarefromlayers1and2runningthroughthefilterinlayer3.SeeAdvancedUseOfKVA Oscillatorsbelowforexamplesofhowtosetandcontrolmodulationoffilterparameters.

Advanced Use Of KVA Oscillators

ReadtheKVAsectionsabovebeforemovingontothissection. IfyouhavetriedtheprogramdescribedaboveinBasicUseofKVAOscillators,youmayhave noticedthatthereisnovariationinthenotesplayedasidefrompitch.Layersandprograms createdwithKVAoscillatorscanbecomemuchmoreexpressivebyintroducingvariationwith DSPmodulation.ForaKVAoscillatorlayer,youcanuseDSPmodulationjustasyouwouldfor keymaplayers(seeCommonDSPControlParametersinAlgorithmBasics on page 623,TheDSP Control(DSPCTL)Page on page 629,andTheDSPModulation(DSPMOD)Page on page 630.) SeveralKVAoscillatorsalsohavetheirownmodulationparametersthatmustbeaccessedto controltheoscillatorsintendedfunction.Asidefromthesemethods,KVAlayerscanalsobe alteredbyusingkeymapswithnaturalamplitudeenvelopes.Seebelowfordetailsoneach method. Examples of Simple DSP Control and Modulation: Selecttheprogram1019VA1NakedPWMPoly,andpresstheEditbutton.PresstheALGsoft buttontoviewthealgorithmandfunctionblocksinuse.The3blockPWMoscillatorthatyou seeisgeneratingthesoundinthisprogram.Selecttheemptyfunctionblocktotherightofthe PWMblock,andusethealphawheeltoscrolltotheLOPASSfunction.Youshouldimmediately

6-55

Program Mode Editing VAST Programs With KVA Oscillators

hearadifferenceinthesoundoftheprogram,becausetheLOPASSfunctionissetbydefaultto cutsomeofthehighfrequenciesfromanysignalthatpassesthroughit,inthiscasethePWM signalispassingthrough.WiththeLOPASSfunctionstillselected,presstheEditbutton.This bringsyoutothemainparameterfortheLOPASSobjectontheDSPCTLpage,whichisLPFrq (youcanalsoreachthispageusingtheDSPCTLsoftbutton.)Hereyoucanadjusttheinitial valueofthefunction,inthiscaseitiscutofffrequencyforthelowpassfilter.Forthisexample, leavethisinitialvaluesettoitsdefault.WiththeLPFrqparameterselected,pressrightonthe cursorbuttontogettothisfunctionssubpage(therighthalfofthedisplay.)SelecttheVeltrk parameterandusethealphawheeloralphanumericpadtoturnitallthewayupto10800ct. NowkeyboardvelocitieswillaffecttheLPFrqparameter.Avelocityof127willcausethefilters cutofffrequencytomoveup10800centsfromitsinitialvalue,avelocityof0willhavenoeffect onthecutofffrequency,andvaluesinbetweenwillincreasethecutofffrequencybyascaling between0and10800cents.Overall,thiswillcausehigherplayedvelocitiestoincreasethecutoff frequency,makingtheoscillatorsoundbrighter,andlowervelocitiestolowerthecutoff frequency,makingtheoscillatorsoundduller.ThismethodcanbeusedtocontrolanyDSP functionthatisloadedintoanalgorithm.SeeCommonDSPControlParametersinAlgorithm Basics on page 623forothercontrolparametersavailableontheDSPCTLpage. Alternatively,youcouldassigncutofffrequencytobecontrolledbyanycontinuouscontroller, suchastheModWheel.Startagainwiththeuneditedpatch1019VA1NakedPWMPoly.Follow thesamestepsasabove,butinsteadofchanginganyparametersontheDSPCTLpage,pressthe DSPMODsoftbuttontoreachtheDSPModulationpage.Ontheleftsideofthescreen,choose theparameterforLPFrq,andthenpresstherightcursorbuttontoreachtheLPFrqsubpage. Onthissubpage,youcanassignanycontinuouscontrollertocontrolthecutofffrequencyof theLOPASSfunction(orthemainparameterforanyfunctionloadedinthecurrentalgorithm.) SelecttheSrc1parameter,holdtheEnterbuttonandmovetheModWheeltoquicklyselect MWheel(theModWheel)asyourcontrolsource.Next,pressthecursordownbuttontoselect theDepthparameter,thenusethealphawheeloralphanumericpadtoturnitallthewayupto 10800ct.NowtheModWheelwillaffecttheLPFrqparameter.MovingtheModWheelallthe wayup(avalueof127)willcausethefilterscutofffrequencytomoveup10800centsfromits initialvalue,movingtheModWheelallthewaydown(avalueof0)willhavenoeffectonthe cutofffrequency,andvaluesinbetweenwillincreasethecutofffrequencybyascalingbetween 0and10800cents.Nowyouhavethesamecontrolovercutofffrequencyasyoudidinthe previousexample,butnowitiscontrolledbytheModWheel.Overall,movingtheModWheel upwillincreasethecutofffrequency,makingtheoscillatorsoundbrighter,andmovingthe ModWheeldownwilllowerthecutofffrequency,makingtheoscillatorsoundduller.Thisis usefultocontrolaclassicfiltersweepsound.Theabovemethodcanbeusedtocontrolany DSPfunctionthatisloadedintoanalgorithm,andyoucanchooseanycontinuouscontrolleras acontrolsource. Note:WhenaddingprogramswithcontrollerassignmentstoasetupinSetupmode,yoursetupmust haveitscontrollersassignedtothesamedestinationsthatyouassignedascontrolsourcesinyour program.AneasywaytodothisisbyusingtheControlSetupthatyouusedwhenmakingyourprogram asatemplateforyournewsetup(seeControlSetup on page 69.)Thesetup126InternalVoices isthe defaultControlSetupwhichshouldbeusedasatemplateinmostcases.Becarefulnottosaveoversetup ID126.

6-56

Program Mode Editing VAST Programs With KVA Oscillators

Oscillator Specific Control And Modulation Parameters: SeveralKVAoscillatorsalsohavetheirownmodulationparametersthatmustbeaccessedto controltheoscillatorsintendedfunction.Belowisalistoftheseoscillatorsandtheirdistinctive parameters,groupedbyblocksize.Thoughthefollowingparameterscouldbeleftatone setting,utilizingoneoftheDSPCTLorDSPMODtechniquesdescribedintheaboveexamples willexposeawiderrangeofexpressionfromeachoscillator. 1 Block: LPNOIZ Anoisegeneratorcombinedwithalowpassfilter.UsetheNoizFrqparametertocontrolthecut offfrequencyofthefilter. NOISE Asimplenoisegenerator.UsetheNoiseparametertocontrolthenoiseinitialamplitude. SW+SHP(Sawtooth+Shaper) ThisoscillatoriscapableofbasicFMSynthesis.ItsdistinctiveparameterisPchCoar.This oscillatormustcomeafterthesoundsourceinanalgorithm(eitherkeymaporoscillator)in ordertoheartheeffectofPchCoar,whichcanradicallychangewhatevertheoscillatorreceives asaninput.WorkswellplacedafteraSinesource. SINE+[Aliased(notrecommended)] Sameas2blockversion,butwithouttheSine+Amparameter. SAW+[Aliased(notrecommended)] Asawoscillatorthatcanaddaninputsignaltoitsoutput. NOISE+[Aliased(notrecommended)] Anoiseoscillatorthatcanaddaninputsignaltoitsoutput. 2 Block: SINE+ Asineoscillatorthatcanaddaninputsignaltoitsoutput. TheSin+PchandSine+Am parametersaffectthepitchandamplitudeofthesinewaveformwithoutaffectingthepitchof theinputsource. RESNOISE Anoisegeneratorcombinedwithalowpassfilterwithresonancecontrol.UsetheNoizFrq parametertocontrolthecutofffrequencyofthefilter.UsetheNoizQparametertocontrolthe amplitudeoftheresonance(aboostorcutatthecutofffrequency.)Onetechniqueforuseofthis functionistosetahighvalueforNoizQ(sothatyouhearatheresonancecreateatone,)and thenontheDSPCTLpagesetC4asaninitialfrequencyforNoizFrq,andsetKeytrkto100ct/key ontheNoizFrqsubpage.Doingthiscausesthenoiseresonancefrequencytomatchthenoteof thekeyplayed. SHAPEDSAW TheShapedSawoscillatorisasawtoothoscillatorwiththeabilitytomorphitsoutputshape betweensawtoothandsinewave(withoutcrossfading.)Thisoscillatorsdistinctiveparameteris Shape,whichcontrolsthemorphing.WithShapesetto0,theoscillatorproducesapure sawtoothwave.WithShapesetto127,theoscillatorproducesapuresinewave.Valuesin betweenmorphbetweenthetwowaveshapes. PWM(PulseWidthModulation)[Aliased(notrecommended)] ThisoscillatorsdistinctiveparameterisPWMWid,whichadjustspulsewidthfromvaluesof1 99.WithPWMWidsettoavalueof50,PWMproducesasquarewave.ThefurtherthePWM Widparameterissetfrom50,thenarrowerthepulsewidthbecomes,changingtheshapeofthe outputwaveformandthusalteringtheoscillatorstonalquality.

6-57

Program Mode Editing VAST Programs With KVA Oscillators

3 Block: PWM(PulseWidthModulation)[AntiAliased(recommended)] Sameas2BlockPWM,Seeabove. 4 Block: SYNCSAW SyncSawconsistsoftwosawwaves,onethatyouhear(theslave)andonethatcontrolstheslave (themaster.)ThisoscillatorsdistinctiveparameterisSyncOff,whichcontrolstheoffsetofthe slaveandmasterwaves.WithSyncOffsetto0,themasterhasnoeffectontheslave.Whenan offsetisset,theslaverestartsitswavecycleeverytimethemasterwavecompletesacycle. Offsetscausetheslavetorestartitscycleinthemiddleofnormalsawtoothcycles,whichcauses theslaveswaveformshapeandsoundtobealtered. SUPERSAW TheSuperSawoscillatorconsistsoftwosawwaves.Thisoscillatorsdistinctiveparameteris Detune,whichhassettingsfrom050cents,allowingyoutodetunebothofthesawwavesbyup to50centsawayfromtherootpitchofthekeyplayed.Detuneaffectsbothsawwaves,oneis detunedabovetheoriginalrootpitch,andtheotherisdetunedbelowtheoriginalrootpitch. TRIPLESAW TheTripleSawoscillatorconsistsofthreesawwaves.Thisoscillatorsdistinctiveparameteris Detune,whichhassettingsfrom050cents,allowingyoutodetunetwoofthesawwavesbyup to50centsawayfromtherootpitchofthekeyplayed.Detuneaffectstwoofthesawwaves,one isdetunedabovetheoriginalrootpitch,andtheotherisdetunedbelowtheoriginalrootpitch. ThethirdsawwavealwaysplaystherootpitchandisnotaffectedbyDetune. 8 Block: SYNCSQUARE(master)>>,>>SYNCSQUARE(slave) Seeabove,SettingUpTheSyncSquareOscillator: on page 655. Use Of Keymaps and Natural Amplitude Envelopes With KVA Oscillators: KeymapsareimportantinlayersusingKVAoscillators,eventhoughtheirsamplesarenot usuallyheardintheselayers(seethenotebelowforexceptions.)Keymapselectionisimportant becausethemaximumamplitudesetforeachkeyinthekeymapisappliedtotheoscillator.For mostusesofKVAoscillators,userswillwanttousethe999Silencekeymapbecauseeachkeyin thekeymapissettothesamemaximumamplitude,unlikemanyinstrumentkeymaps.The999 Silencekeymapensuresuniformamplitudebehaviorofanoscillator,andwiththeamplitude envelopesettousermode,userscaneasilyshapeallaspectsofanoscillatorsamplitude.The PC3alsohastheabilitytoapplynaturalamplitudeenvelopestooscillators.Withanamplitude envelopesettonaturalmode,eachoscillatornotetakesontheamplitudequalitiesofeach sampleinakeymap(witheachnoterelativetosamplekeyplacement.)Eachsampleina keymaphasanaturalenvelopethatwascreatedduringitsoriginaldevelopmentprocess. Naturalenvelopeshavemuchmoredetailthanwhatispossibletocreatewiththeuser amplitudeenvelope,andtheyareusefulwhentryingtomimicspecificinstrumentamplitude envelopes.Whenusingthistechnique,rememberthatthemaximumamplitudeofeachkeyis setbythecurrentkeymap.Youcanstillcontroltheoverallparametersofanaturalenvelopeby usingtheENVCTLpage.Seetheprograms213Perc>Morph>Bass&315ElectroPercSynthfor examplesofKVAlayersthatusethistechnique.Eachprogramusespercussionkeymapswith naturalenvelopestoproduceafast,percussiveattack.AlsonotethatwhenusingaKVA oscillatorandakeymapotherthan999Silence,thelayerwillusethenameofthekeymapinthe infoboxonthemainProgrampage,eventhoughitisnotthetruesoundsourceofthelayer. Note:Thesamplesfromakeymaparenotheardwhenusinganoscillator,unlessanalgorithmisusedto routethekeymapsignalaroundtheoscillatorandintoaMIXfunctionblock,orunlessitisanoscillator thatprocessesitsaudioinput.

6-58

Program Mode Editing KB3 Programs

Editing KB3 Programs

YoucaneditawideassortmentofanyKB3programsparameters.Youcanalsocreateyourown KB3programs,thoughyoumuststartwithanexistingKB3programtodothis.AregularPC3 programcannotbeturnedintoaKB3program.Ifyourenotsurewhetherthecurrentprogram isaKB3program,checktheKB3button(locatedabovetherightmostslider).IftheblueLEDis on,thenthecurrentprogramisaKB3program. EntertheKB3programeditorbypressingtheEditbuttonwhileaKB3programisselectedin programmode.YoullquicklyseethattheKB3editordiffersfromthestandardVASTprogram editor.

KB3 Editor: The Tone Wheels (TONEWL) Page

KB3ModeusesDSPgeneratedwaveformsforthelowerhalfofitstonewheelsandsamplesfor theupperhalfofitstonewheels.UsingtheparametersontheTONEWLpage,youcanspecify whichsampleyouwishtouse,thenumberoftonewheels(whichwillaffecthowmanyother voicesareavailabletoyou),andotherrelatedsettings.

Parameter Upper Tone Wheel Keymap Upper Volume Adjust Number of Tone Wheels Organ Map Wheel Volume Map Globals Lower Transposition Upper Transposition

Range of Values Sample List -96 to 96 dB 24 to 91 Equal, Pecks, Bobs, Erics Equal, Bright, Mellow, Junky On, Off -120 to 127 semitones -168 to 87 semitones

Upper Tone Wheel Keymap

Usethisparametertoindicatethekeymap(andtherebythesamples)tousefortheuppertone wheels.YoucanuseanykeymapfromROM,thoughyoumustspecifyakeymapthatuses loopedsamplesforKB3Modetoworkcorrectly.WheninProgrammode,thekeymapassigned totheprogramappearsintheinfobox.

6-59

Program Mode KB3 Editor: The Tone Wheels (TONEWL) Page

Upper Volume Adjust

Sincesamplevolumescanvary,whilethevolumeofDSPgeneratedwaveformswillremain consistent,youmayfinditnecessarytoadjustthelevelofthesamplebasedtonewheels.This parameterletsyouadjusttheamplitudeoftheupper(samplebased)tonewheelsrelativeto amplitudeofthewaveformgeneratedtonewheels.

Number of Tone Wheels

ThisparameterletsyouspecifythenumberoftonewheelsusedbyaKB3program.Theclassic tonewheelorgansused91tonewheels,thoughthelowest12wereforthepedalsonly. Therefore,youmayfind79agoodnumberoftonewheelstospecifyforrealisticorgan emulations.Thiswouldleaveyou88voicesforotherprograms.Youcanspecifyupto91tone wheels.ThenumberofPC3voicesusedbyaKB3programis(numberoftonewheels+1)/2, roundedtothenexthighestwholenumberiftheresultisafraction.So,forexample,with79 tonewheelsspecifiedyouwoulduse40voices.Keepinmindthatthesevoicesarepermanently allocatedandrunningwhiletheKB3programisselected,andcannotbestolen.Theadditional voiceusedbyKB3programsisforkeyclick.

Organ Map
Theorganmapcontrolstherelativeamplitudeofeachkey,perdrawbar.Likethewheelvolume maps,thesemapsarebasedonmeasurementswevemadeonactualorgans.Equalusesthe samevolumeforeachkeyanddrawbar,andisnotbasedonarealB3.Pecksisagoodnormal map,fromaB3ingoodcondition.Ericsisabitmoreidealized;itssmoothedout,butless realistic.Bobsismoreuneven,basedonanoldB3.

Wheel Volume Map

Thewheelvolumemapdeterminesthevolumelevelforeachtonewheel.Weveprovided severaltonewheelvolumemapshere,basedonmeasurementswevetakenondifferentorgans. Equalisamapwithalltonewheelsatthesamevolume.ItsnotbasedonarealB3.Brightisa goodnormalmap,basedonaB3ingoodcondition.JunkyisbasedonaB3withanuneven, rolledoffresponse.MellowissomewherebetweenBrightandJunky. YoucanalsoapplyEQtocontrolwheelvolumesbasedonthefrequenciesofeachtonewheel. SeeKB3Editor:TheEQPage on page 669.

Globals
Thisisanothertoggle,whichaffectsLFO2,ASR2,FUNs2and4.Whenoff,thesethreecontrol sourcesarelocal;theyaffecteachindividualnoteinthelayersthatusethemasacontrolsource. Theybeginoperatingeachtimeanoteinthatlayeristriggered. WhentheGlobalsparameterissettoOn,thesecontrolsourcesbecomeglobal,thatistheyaffect everynoteineverylayerofthecurrentprogram,notjusttheonetowhichtheyreapplied.When thesecontrolsourcesareglobal,theybeginoperatingassoonastheprogramisselected.When Globalsareon,LFO2,ASR2,andFUNs2and4willappearontheirrespectivepagespreceded bytheletterGtoindicatethattheyreglobal.Youlluseglobalcontrolsourceswhenyouwantto affecteachnoteinagivenlayeruniformly,andlocalcontrolsourceswhenyouwanttoaffect eachlayersnoteindependently.

Lower Transpose / Upper Transpose

Thesetwoparametersletyoutransposetheupperand/orlowertonewheelsinsemitonesteps awayfromtheirdefaulttunings.

6-60

Program Mode KB3 Editor: The Drawbars (DRAWBR) Page

KB3 Editor: The Drawbars (DRAWBR) Page

PresstheDrawbrsoftbuttontoviewtheDRAWBRPage.ThispageletsyoueditKB3s drawbars.

Mode
WhenyousetModetoPreset,thepresetdrawbarsettingsonthispagewillbeinstalledat programselection.Thedrawbarvalueswillimmediatelychange,however,assoonasyoumove thecorrespondingdrawbar.SetModetoLiveifyouwantthedrawbarvolumesettingsat programselectiontobedeterminedbythepositionsofthedrawbarcontrollers(sliders).With eithersetting,anyengagementsofthedrawbarcontrollerssubsequenttoprogramselectionwill affectdrawbarvolumes.

Steps
Thisparameterletsyouspecifytheincrementsbywhichdrawbarvolumeswillchange.Choose either08,toapproximatethedrawbarsettingsonactualorgans,orchoose0127forafiner degreeofresolution.

Volume
ThisparameterappearsonlyifyouvesetMode(seeabove)toPreset.UsetheVolume parametertosetthepresetvolumeofeachoftheninedrawbars.Theavailablevalueswillbe 08or0127,dependingonthesettingoftheStepsparameter.SeeTable 63 on page 68for detailsontheMIDICCnumbersandvaluesthateachdrawbarsendsandreceives.

Tune
Thisparameterletsyoutuneeachoftheninedrawbarsupordowninsemitonesteps.The valuesfortheTuneparameterontheDRAWBRpageshownaboverepresentstandarddrawbar settingsonarealB3,asshowninthetablebelow.
Subharmonics 16' Slider A 5 /3' Slider B
1

Fundamental 8' Slider C

Harmonics 4' Slider D 2 2/3' Slider E 2' Slider F 1 3/5' Slider G 1 1/3' Slider H 1' Slider I

Figure 6-3

Standard Drawbar Settings for the Hammond B3

6-61

Program Mode KB3 Editor: The Set Drawbars (SetDBR) Soft Button

KB3 Editor: The Set Drawbars (SetDBR) Soft Button

PresstheSetDBRsoftbuttontocapturethecurrentpositionofthedrawbars,andusethose positionsasthepresetdrawbarpositionsontheDRAWBRpage.

KB3 Editor: The PITCH Page

ThePITCHpageparametersforKB3programsismuchlikethePITCHpageparametersfor VASTprograms.TheonlydifferenceisthatforKB3programs,therearenoHz,KeyTrk,or VelTrkparameters.ForafulldescriptionofthePITCHpageparameters,seeCommonDSP ControlParameters on page 624,TheDSPControl(DSPCTL)Page on page 629,andTheDSP Modulation(DSPMOD)Page on page 630.

KB3 Editor: The AMP Page

TheAMPpageparametersforKB3programsismuchliketheAMPpageparametersforVAST programs.TheonlydifferenceisthatforKB3programs,therearenoKeyTrkorVelTrk parameters.ForafulldescriptionoftheAMPpageparameters,seeCommonDSPControl Parameters on page 624,TheDSPControl(DSPCTL)Page on page 629,andTheDSPModulation (DSPMOD)Page on page 630.

6-62

Program Mode KB3 Editor: The PERC1 Page

KB3 Editor: The PERC1 Page

Percussionisacharacteristicfeatureoftonewheelorgans.Itsespeciallyusefulwhilesoloing, sincepercussionaddsanextraplink(actuallyanextratoneatadefinedharmonic)tothe attack.YoucanreachthepercussionparametersbypressingthePerc1andPerc2softbuttons.

Parameter Percussion Volume Decay Harmonic Velocity Tracking Low Harmonic High Harmonic Steal Bar

Range of Values Off, On Soft, Loud Slow, Fast Low, High 0 to 100% Drawbar 1 to 9 Drawbar 1 to 9 Drawbar 1 to 9

Percussion
Thisiswhereyouturnthepercussioneffectonoroff.Percussioniscreatedbyadecaying envelopeappliedtooneoftheninedrawbars.Thepercussioneffectissingletriggered,which meansthatonceitstriggered,itwonttriggeragainuntilallkeys(orwhateveryoureusingto triggernotes)goup.Soifnokeysaredown,andyouplayachord,percussiongetsappliedtoall notesinthechord(andinfact,toallnotesthataretriggeredduringtheshortdurationofthe percussionenvelope).Oncetheenveloperunsitscourse,anynotesyouplaywhileatleastone keyishelddowngetnopercussion.YoucanturnpercussiononoroffbypressingBankbutton5 (labeledPercussionOn/Off.)Bankbutton5alsosendsandrespondstoMIDICC73;values64 127=On,values063=Off.

Volume
Thisparameterswitchesbetweenloudandsoftpercussionsettings.Theactualamplitudeisset onthePERC2page.YoucantogglebetweenloudandsoftbypressingbankButton6(labeled PercussionLoud/Soft.)Bankbutton6alsosendsandrespondstoMIDICC71;values64127= Loud,values063=Soft.

Decay
Thisparameterswitchesbetweenfastandslowpercussionsettings.Theactualdecayrateisset onthePERC2page.YoucantogglebetweenslowandfastdecaybypressingBankbutton7 (labeledPercussionDecayF/S.)Bankbutton7alsosendsandrespondstoMIDICC70;values 64127=Fast,values063=Slow.

6-63

Program Mode KB3 Editor: The PERC2 Page

Harmonic
Thisparameterswitchesbetweenhighandlowharmonicpercussionsettings.Theactualpitchis controlledbytheLowHarmandHighHarmparameters.Youcantogglebetweenlowandhigh harmonicsbypressingBankButton8(labeledPercussionPitchH/L.)Bankbutton8alsosends andrespondstoMIDICC72;values64127=High,values063=Low.

VelTrack
Hereiswhereyouspecifythedegreetowhichkeyvelocitycontrolspercussionvolume.Avalue ofzerocorrespondstonovelocitytracking,whichislikearealtonewheelorgan.Othervalues addvelocitytracking,sothatincreasedvelocityresultsinlouderpercussion.

LowHarm
ControlswhichdrawbarisusedasthebasisforthepercussionwhenHarmonicissettoLow.On anactualtonewheelorgan,thisisDrawbar4(2ndharmonic).Theactualpitchobtained dependsonthedrawbartuning.

HighHarm
ControlswhichdrawbarisusedasthebasisforthepercussionwhenHarmonicissettoHigh. Onanactualtonewheelorgan,thisisDrawbar5(3rdharmonic).Theactualpitchobtained dependsonthedrawbartuning.

StealBar
Controlswhichdrawbarisdisabledwhenthepercussioneffectisturnedon.Onanunmodified tonewheelorgan,theninthdrawbaristheonedisabled.Anydrawbarcanbeselected.

KB3 Editor: The PERC2 Page

Parameter Group (Available for each combination of the Volume and Decay parameters on the PERC1 page) Percussion Level Decay Time Organ Volume Level

Range of Values 0 to 24.0 dB 0.01 to 5.10 seconds, in 0.02-second increments -12.0 to 12.0 dB

6-64

Program Mode KB3 Editor: The KEYCLK Page

PercLevel, DecayTime, OrgLevel

Withtheseparametersyoucancontroltheamplitudeanddecaytimeofthepercussioneffectfor allcombinationsoftheVolumeandDecayparameters(onthePERC1page).Youcanalsoadjust theleveloftheorganrelativetothepercussion,foraccurateemulationofclassicorgans.

KB3 Editor: The KEYCLK Page

TheKeyClickfeatureaddsadecayingburstofpitchednoisetotheattackofnotes.Unlikethe percussion,thekeyclickismultitriggered,whichmeansthateverynewnotewilltriggerit. Theparametersonthispageprimarilycontrolthedecay,volume,andpitchofthekeyclick.

Parameter Key Click Volume Decay VelTrk Pitch Random Retrig Thresh Note Attack Note Release

Range of Values Off, On -96.0 to 0.0 dB, in 0.5-dB increments 0.005 to 1.280 seconds, in 0.005-second increments 0 to 100% 1 to 120 0 to 100% -96.0 to 0.0 dB, in 0.5-dB increments Normal, Hard, PercHard Normal, Hard

KeyClick
ThisiswhereyouturnKeyClickonoroff.WithKeyClicksettoOff,youmaystillhearaclick dependingonyourNoteAttackandNoteReleasesettings(seebelow.)

Volume
Thisparametersetsthelevelofthekeyclick;thenoisedecaysfromthelevelyousethere.This levelisscaledbythedrawbarlevels,aswellastheexpressionpedallevel.Keyclickvolumecan alsobescaledbyMIDICC89;value0=96dB,value127=thelevelsetforthe Volume parameter.Valuesbetween0and127scalebetween96dBandthelevelsetforthe Volume parameter.WhenusingCC89,thevaluedisplayedfortheVolume parameterwillnot change.

6-65

Program Mode KB3 Editor: The KEYCLK Page

Decay
Setsthebasicdecaytimeofthenoiseenvelope.Smallervaluesproduceashorterburst.

VelTrk
Controlsthedegreetowhichkeyvelocityaffectsthekeyclickvolume.Avalueofzeromeans thatthekeyvelocityhasnoeffectonthekeyclickvolume(whichislikearealtonewheelorgan). Othervaluesaddvolumeasthevelocityincreases.

Pitch
Setsthebasicpitchofthekeyclicknoise,relativetothehighesttonewheelspitch.Thepitchis controlledbyasteeplowpassfilterappliedtowhitenoise.Thefilterscutofffrequencyis controlledrelativetokeynumber,higherkeysmovethecutofffrequencyup,lowerkeysmove thecutofffrequencydown.

Random
Controlsthedegreetowhicharandomamountofamplitudevariationisaddedtothekeyclick.

ReTrigThresh
Thisparameterletsyousetthevolumelevelbelowwhichkeyclickmustdecaybeforeitwillbe retriggered.

Note Attack
Controlstheattackcharacteristicofnotes.Normalprovidesasmoothedattack,whileasetting ofHardhasaninstantattackandwillproduceanaudibleclick,inadditiontoanyamountof keyclickspecifiedwiththeotherparametersonthispage(youmightprefernottospecifyany additionalkeyclickwhenyouusethissetting).PercHardsetsahardattacklevelforpercussion only;noteswithoutpercussionuseanormalattack.

Note Release
Controlsthereleasecharacteristicofnotes.AsettingofNormalhasasmoothedrelease,whilea settingofHardhasaninstantrelease.Hardwillproduceanaudibleclick.

6-66

Program Mode KB3 Editor: The MISC Page

KB3 Editor: The MISC Page

TheMISCpagecontainsanassortmentofcontrolparameters,includingLesliespeedcontrol andvibrato/chorusselection.

Parameter Preamp/Expression Response Leakage Leak Mode Speed Control Vibrato/Chorus Control Vibrato/Chorus Type Selection Volume Adjust Bend Range Up Bend Range Down Sustain Sostenuto Leslie Pedal

Range of Values Off, On -96.0 to 0.0 dB, in 0.5-dB increments None, Type A, Type X, Type Y, Type Z, Type R Slow, Fast Off, On Vib1, Vib2, Vib3, Chor1, Chor2, Chor3 -96 to 96 dB 7200 cents 7200 cents Off, On Off, On None, Sustain, Sost, Soft

PreampResp
SetthisparameterOnorOfftoenableordisablethepreamp+expressionpedalpartoftheKB3 model.TurningthisOn(thedefault)makesKB3programsfunctionlikestockorgans.The expressionpedalinthiscaseismorethanavolumepedal;itactuallyfunctionslikealoudness control,varyingthefrequencyresponsetocompensatefortheearssensitivityatdifferent volumes.Inaddition,thepreampprovidesadeemphasiscurvetocompensateforthebuiltin tonewheelvolumepreemphasis.TurningpreampresponseOffemulatesorgansthathave beenmodifiedtohaveadirectout(beforethepreampandexpressionpedal).

Leakage
Controlsthelevelofthesimulatedcrosstalkandsignalbleedofadjacenttonewheelsinthe model.Thisisprovidedtohelpdirtyupthesoundtomakeitabitmorerealistic.Asettingof 96dBgivesthepuresttones;othervaluesaddmoresimulatedleakage.Thislevelisscaledby thedrawbarlevels,aswellastheexpressionpedallevel.Theleakagelevelcanalsobecontrolled byMIDICC90;value0=96dB,value127=0dB,valuesbetween0and127scalebetween96 dBand0dB.WhenusingCC90,thevaluedisplayedfortheLeakage parameterwillnotchange.

6-67

Program Mode KB3 Editor: The MISC Page

LeakMode
Selectsbetweendifferentleakagemodels,determiningwhichleakageharmonicsare emphasized.TypeAprovidesanoveralltonewheelleakage,withalltonewheelsleakingasmall amount.TypeX,TypeY,TypeZ,andTypeR,emulatedifferentdegreesofdrawbarleakage, wheretheleakagecomponentscorrespondtotheninedrawbars,insteadofallthetonewheels.

SpeedCtl
SelecteitherFastorSlowtochoosethespeedoftherotaryspeakeremulation.Youcantoggle betweenfastandslowspeedusingBankbutton1(labeledRotaryFast/Slow.)Bankbutton1also sendsandrespondstoMIDICC68;avalueof64127=Fast,and063=Slow.

VibChorCtl
ChooseOnorOfftoturnonoroffeithervibratoorchorus(asselectedwiththeVibChorSel parameter).YoucantogglebetweenonandoffusingBankbutton2(labeledVibratoOn/Off.) Bankbutton2alsosendsandrespondstoMIDICC95;avalueof64127=On,and063=Off.

VibChorSel
Choosethevibratoorchorusdepth(therearethreeofeach)youwishtousewiththisKB3 program.NotethatyoumustsetVibChorCtl(alsoontheMISCpage)toOntoheartheeffect. YoucanselectthevibratoorchorusyouwantusingBankbuttons3and4(labeledVibratoChor/ VibandVibratoDepth.) Bankbuttons3and4alsosendandrespondtoMIDICC93;values5471=choruswithdepth1, values7289=choruswithdepth2,values90127=choruswithdepth3,values017=vibrato withdepth1,values1835=vibratowithdepth2,values3653=vibratowithdepth3.

VolAdjust
ProvidesanoverallvolumeadjustfortheKB3model.UsethisparametertonormalizeKB3 programswithotherprograms.

BendRngUp, BendRngDn
RespectivelycontroltheupwardanddownwardpitchbendrangesoftheKB3program.

Sustain
SetOnorOfftoenableordisableresponsetoMIDIsustain(MIDI64).BydefaultMIDIsustain (MIDI64)issentbySwitchPedal1.

Sostenuto
SetOnorOfftoenableordisableresponsetoMIDIsostenuto(MIDI66).BydefaultMIDI sostenuto(MIDI66)issentbySwitchPedal2.

LesliePedal
Setthepedalsource(Sustain=SwitchPedal1,CC64bydefault,Sost=SwitchPedal1,CC66by default,Soft=SwitchPedal3,CC67bydefault)totogglebetweenFastandSlowfortheLeslie speakerrotationspeed.

6-68

Program Mode KB3 Editor: The EQ Page

KB3 Editor: The EQ Page

Thefourcolumnheadersonthispagerepresenttwoshelvingbandsofequalizationandtwo parametricbands.TheKB3EQofferedhere,though,isnotimplementedasatrueEQsection; instead,itadjuststhevolumeofthetonewheelsbasedonfrequency.Ifthetonewheelsare basedonsinewaves,thenthisactssimilarlytoarealEQ.

Parameter Group (Available for each EQ band) Gain Frequency Width

Range of Values -24.0 to 24.0 dB, in 0.2-dB increments 16 to 25088 Hz, in varying increments -128 to 128 Semitones, in 2-semitone increments

EachEQsectionhasGain(G),Frequency(F),andWidth(W)controls.Frequencycontrolsthe centerfrequencyoftheband.Widthcontrolsthebandwidth.Gaincontrolstheamountofboost orcut.

6-69

Program Mode KB3 Editor: The OUTPUT Page

KB3 Editor: The OUTPUT Page

UsethispagetoroutethecurrentprogramspostFXsignals.ThetwoPanparameters correspondtothoseoftheVASTProgrameditorOUTPUTpage(Seepage 631).TheOutGain andDemoSongparameterscorrespondstothoseoftheVASTProgramEditorCOMMONpage (Seepage 635).

Exp Pedal
UsethisparametertosetwhichrearpanelCCPedalinputwillcontrolvolumeforthecurrent KB3program.WithasettingofExpression/Foot,volumecanbecontrolledbyaCCpedal pluggedintoeithertherearpanelinputlabeledCCPedal1(volume),ortherearpanelinput labeledCCPedal2(wah).WithasettingofExpression,volumecanbecontrolledbyaCCpedal pluggedintotherearpanelinputlabeledCCPedal1(volume).WithasettingofFoot,volumecan becontrolledbyaCCpedalpluggedintotherearpanelinputlabeledCCPedal2(wah).Witha settingofNone,volumecontrolfrombothCCpedalinputsisdisabled.

KB3 Editor: The Program FX (PROGFX) Page

ThispageisthesameastheVASTProgrameditorPROGFXpage(seepage 647)exceptforone importantdifference:thereisnoPre/Postinsertparameterfortheauxiliarysends.

KB3 Editor: The LFO, ASR, and FUN Pages

TherestofthepagesLFO,ASR,andFUNarethesameforKB3programsastheyarefor VASTprograms,sowewontdescribethemagainhere.Beginonpage 638tofinddescriptions ofthesepages.

6-70

Program Mode KB3 Programming Tips

KB3 Programming Tips

ThissectionprovidessomestartingpointsforcreatingyourownKB3programs.Rememberthat youllhavetostartwithoneoftheexistingKB3programs. Asdescribedbelow,themostprominentdifferencebetweenorganvintagesisthenumberof tonewheelsused.Keepinmind,however,thatthesoundofanactualtonewheelorganwill dependnotonlyonitsage,butalsoonhowwellithasbeenmaintained. Octavefolding,whereanoctave(orpartofanoctave)isrepeatedatthetoporbottomofthe keyboard,ishandledautomaticallybyKB3Mode,emulatingthefoldingdoneonactualtone wheelorgans. EarlyToneWheelOrgans.Instrumentsofthisperiodhad91tonewheels.Togetthissound,go totheTONEWLpage,select91tonewheels,andsetlowestpitchtoC1.StartwiththeJunky WheelVolumeMapandBobsOrganMap.YoumayalsowanttoincreasetheKeyClicklevel, sincethistendstobecomelouderonolderorgans. MiddlePeriodOrgans.Tomodeloneoftheseinstruments,set82tonewheelsandalownoteof A1.UsetheMellowWheelVolumeMapandEricsOrganMap.SetKeyClicktoamoderate level. TheClassicB3.Forthissound,choose79tonewheelsandsetthelownotetobeC2.Thebest settingsherearetheBrightWheelVolumeMapandPecksOrganMap.Youmayalsowantto reducetheKeyClicklevel.

6-71

Program Mode KB3 Programming Tips

6-72

Setup Mode

Chapter 7 Setup Mode

InSetupmode,thePC3cantakeontheidentityof16distinctinstrumentsand16distinctMIDI transmitters,eachofwhichcanusethesetupsphysicalcontrollerassignments(oranysubsetof thosecontrollerassignments).Forexample,youcancreateasetupthatissplitinto16different keyboardregions(calledzones).Eachzonecanplayitsownprogram,whilealsotransmitting onitsownMIDIchannel.Eachzonecanalsohaveanindependentarpeggiatorandoneriff.You canalsorecordtheoutputofasetuptoSongmode. SelectingsetupsinSetupmodeismuchlikeselectingprogramsinProgrammodejustuseone ofthenormaldataentrymethodstoscrollthroughthelistofsetups.Thereare,however,some importantdifferencesbetweenaprogramandasetup.Aprogramplaysonasinglekeyboard zoneandonasingleMIDIchannel.Asetupenablesyoutouseupto16keyboard(orMIDI controller)zones,eachofwhichcanhaveitsownprogram,MIDIchannel,andcontrol assignments.Theparametersyoudefineforeachsetupaffectprogramsonlywhileyouarein Setupmode.Anexceptiontothisisthecontrolsetup,whichisdiscussedonpage 69. PresstheSetupmodebuttontoenterSetupmode.Youllseealistofsetups,whichyoucan selectwithanydataentrymethod.

TheinfoboxonthelefthandsideofthemainSetupmodepagedisplaysthezonesand correspondingprogramsusedinthecurrentsetup.Belowtheprogramnameforeachzoneisa linerepresentingthezoneskeyrange.Forexample,inthesetupabove,AcousticSplit,the zonefortheprogramNYCKitshasakeyrangethatcoverstheentirekeyboard,from approximatelyC1toG9.ThezonesfortheprogramsStudioCStringsandNYCJazzGrand havekeyrangesthatapproximatelycovertheuppertwothirdsofthekeyboard,andUpright Growlercoverspartofthelowerkeyboard.Youcanalsoseewhichzoneshaveariff,indicated byriFFtotherightoftheprogramname.Forexample,inthesetupabove,thezoneforthe programNYCKitshasariff.Iftherearemorethanfourzonesinthecurrentsetup,youcan viewtheotherzonesbyholdingdowntheEnterbuttonandusingtheChan/Layerbuttonsto scrollthroughthecurrentsetupszones. YoucantransposetheentiresetupupordownbyoctaveswiththetwoOctavsoftbuttons. Whenyoutransposeasetup,thesplitpointsbetweenzonesremaininplace;eachprogramis transposedwithinitsrespectivezone. ThePanicsoftbuttonsendsAllNotesOffandResetAllControllersmessagestoallzones,and stopsallarpeggiatorsandriffs.

7-1

Setup Mode

PresstheInfosoftbuttontoseealistofallofthecontrollerassignmentsforallzonesofthe currentsetup.OntheInfopage,usetheAlphaWheel,cursorbuttons,or/+buttonstoscroll throughthelist. WhenyouselectasetupinSetupmode,thePC3internallysendsanumberofMIDImessages, oneachoftheMIDIchannelsusedbythesetup.Someoftheseinclude:ProgramChange commands,MIDIBankSelectmessages,PanandVolumemessages,andentryvaluesfor physicalcontrollers(entryvaluesarethevaluesthattakeeffectassoonasyouselectthesetup; therearealsocontrollerexitvalues,whicharethevaluesofthecontrollerswhenyouleavethe setupeitherbyselectinganothersetuporbyexitingSetupmode).Thevaluesofallthese messagesdependontheparametersyoudefineintheSetupEditor.

Zone-status LEDs in Setup Mode

Takeaminutetoscrollthroughsomeofthefactorysetups.Asyouchangesetups,youllnotice thattheLEDsintheeightBankbuttonsabovetheprogrammableslidersgoonandoffand changecolor.TheseLEDsindicatethestatusofzones18inthesetup. WhileyoureinSetupmode,eachoftheeightzonestatusLEDswillalwaysbeinoneoffour states: Off Emptyzonethatis,azonethathasnoprogramorMIDIchannelassociatedwithit. Forexample,ifyouselectasetupandonlyfourstatusLEDslightup(regardlessof theircolor),thesetupcontainsjustfourzones.WheneveryoureinSetupmode,the numberoflinesintheinfoboxmatchesthenumberofzonestatusLEDsthatarelit. Activezone.Aslongasnootherzoneissoloed,anactivezoneplaysnotesand generatescontrollerinformation,programchanges,andentry/exitcontrollervalues.If anotherzoneissoloed,anactivezoneisbackgroundeditsstatusLEDremains green,butitdoesntplaynotesorgeneratecontrollerinformation. Mutedzone.Mutedzonesdontplaynotesorgeneratecontrollerinformation,but theydogenerateprogramchangesandentry/exitcontrollervalues. Solozone.Asyoumighthaveguessed,onlyonezonecanbesoloedatatime.Whena zoneissoloed,onlythatzoneplaysnotesandgeneratescontrollerinformation.Other zones,iftheyrenotturnedoff,stillgenerateprogramchangesand entry/exitcontrollervalues.Ifazoneismutedandthensubsequentlysoloed,allother zonesarebackgroundedbutthesoloedzoneremainsmuted.

Green

Orange Red

Inperformancesituations,theBankbuttonsprovideaconvenientwaytotemporarilychange thestatusofoneormorezones.Thiscanbeveryeffectiveforbringingvoicesand/orcontroller configurationsintoandoutofyourperformance.Thebestwaytogetfamiliarwiththis techniqueistoplaywiththebuttons,asthenextfewparagraphsdescribe. Selectasetup(lookforonewithlotsofactivezonesthatcoverthewholekeyboard),andplaya fewbars.Youllhearsoundscorrespondingtoeachoftheactivezones(greenLEDs).Ifyousee anymutedzones(orangeLEDS),presstheircorrespondingBankbuttons,andtheyllbecome active;conversely,ifyoupresstheBankbuttonofanactivezone,itwillbecomemuted.Play aroundabit.Trymutingallthezones,thenbringingthembackonebyoneuntilallthezonesin thesetupareactive.

7-2

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Table 71givesyouaquickvisualreminderofhowzonesbehavedependingontheirstatus.

LED Color

Zone Status
Solo, Solo+Muted Active Backgrounded Muted Empty

Data Generated by Zone

Notes Controllers Program Number Entry and Exit Values

Red Green (no others are red) Green (another is red) Orange (Off)

Yes Yes
No No No

Yes Yes
No No No

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No

Table 7-1

Zone Status in Setup Mode

RememberthatanychangesyoumaketozonestatusinSetupmodearetemporary;assoonas youselectanothersetup,thatsetupsprogrammedzonestatustakesover.Tochangeasetups zonestatuspermanently,usetheSetupEditor(seeStatus on page 76).

Soloing a Zone
Tosoloazone,settheStatusparameterontheSetupEditorCH/PROGpage(seeTheSetupEditor andTheChannel/Program(CH/PROG)Pagebelow)toSolo.TheChan/Layerbuttonsinaddition toscrollingthroughthezonesofthecurrentsetupnowselectthesoloedlayer.Ifyouscroll throughzones18,youwillseetheredsoloLEDmovingacrossthebankbuttonsabovethe sliders.Afteronezoneissoloed,youcansolozones18bypressingonthecorrespondingBank buttonabovethesliders;thisactionunsolosthepreviouslysoloedzone. Additionally,youcanconfigureasetupsuchthatyoucansolozonesinrealtime(fromoutside oftheeditor)byassigningacontrolleronthedesiredzonetodestination162SoloZn.See Controllers on page 719formoreinformationoncontrollerdestinationassignmentsinSetup mode.

The Setup Editor

FromSetupmode,presstheEditbuttontoentertheSetupEditor,whereyoucanmakechanges tothecurrentlyselectedsetup.UsethesoftbuttonstoselectthevariousSetupEditorpages.The upperlineofeachpagedisplaystheusualmodereminder,aswellasthecurrentSetupEditor page,andthecurrentzone.UsetheChan/Layerbuttonstoselectoneofuptosixteendifferent zones,eachhavingitsownsetofSetupEditorpages. TheparametersontheSetupEditorpagesdefinewhateachofasetupszonessendsbothto internalprogramsandtotheMIDIOutport.TheyalsodeterminehowthePC3respondsto MIDIsignalsreceivedfromaMIDIcontrollerconnectedtothePC3sMIDIInport(whenthe LocalKeyboardChannelmatchesthetransmitchannelofyourMIDIcontroller). Compare PressingtheStoragebuttoncallsuptheCompareEditor,whichrecallsthesetuppreedit settings,allowingyoutocompareyoureditedsetupwiththeoriginalsetup.Pressingthe StoragebuttonagainreturnsyoutotheSetupeditor.UsingtheCompareEditormakesno changestothecurrentsetup.

7-3

Setup Mode The Channel/Program (CH/PROG) Page

The Channel/Program (CH/PROG) Page

ThisisthefirstpageyouseewhenyouentertheSetupEditor.Here,youcanselectprograms, MIDIchannels,andMIDIBanknumbersforeachofthesetups16zones.Youcanalsosoloor muteeachzone.

Parameter Program Destination Channel MIDI Bank MIDI Program (MidiProg) Status Out InputChannel MIDI Bank Mode (BankMode) Entry Program Change (EntryProgChg) Arpeggiator

Range of Values Program List Destination List 1 to 16 0 to 127 (Depends on MIDI Bank Mode) Muted, Active, Solo, Solo+Muted Auto, Pri., Sec. None, 1-16 MIDI Bank Mode List On, Off On, Off

Default 1 Standard Grand USB_MIDI+MIDI+Local 1 0 1 Active Auto None Ctl 0/32 On On

Program
Thisselectsaninternalprogramtoplayoneachzone.AsyouchangethevalueofProgram, noticethatMIDIProgramandMIDIBankmatchthelocalprogramandbanknumbers (programs1127fallintoMIDIBank0,128255fallintoMIDIBank1,andsoonbothMIDI BanksandPC3bankscanhold128programs).Ifyouwanttotransmitdifferentprogramand banknumbersoverMIDI,highlighteitherMIDIProgramorMIDIBankandselectanewvalue. NotethatchangingtheProgramparameteragainwillresetboththeMIDIProgramandMIDI Bankparameterstomatchthelocalprogramandbanknumbers. NOTE:MIDIBanksandPC3banksarenotthesame,noristhereadirectonetoonecorrespondence betweenthetwo.Asmentionedpreviously,programs1127fallintoMIDIBank0,programs128255 fallintoMIDIBank1,andsoon;programIDs1128fallintoPC3bankBase1,programs128255fall intoBase2,andsoon(recallthatthePC3banknamesaredisplayedinlefttorightorderabovetheir correspondingBankbuttonsabovethesliders.)Forexample,program127MagicCelesteisinPC3bank Base1anditisProgram127inMIDIBank0;andprogram128DrumsnBellsisinPC3bankBase1, anditisProgram0inMIDIBank1.

7-4

Setup Mode The Channel/Program (CH/PROG) Page

Destination
ThisparameterdetermineswhetherthecurrentlyselectedzonetransmitsonlytothePC3 (Local),transmitsonlytotheMIDIport(MIDI),transmitsonlytotheUSBport(USB_MIDI), transmitstoapairofdestinations(MIDI+Local,USB_MIDI+Local,orUSB_MIDI+MIDI),or transmitstoalldestinations(USB_MIDI+MIDI+Local).

Channel
TheChannelparameterdefinestheMIDItransmitchannelforthecurrentlyselectedzone.You cansetittoanyofthe16MIDIchannels.Normally,youwillwanteachzoneonaseparateMIDI channel.Thisisnecessaryifyouwanttocombinedifferentprogramsinthesetup. IftwozoneshavethesameMIDIchannel(anddestination),buttheyhavedifferentprogram settings,therewillbeconflicts:noMIDIdevice,includingthePC3,canrespondcorrectlytotwo differentsimultaneousProgramChangecommandsononechannel.Theresultwillbethatonly oneProgramChangewillberecognized,andeverynoteplayedwillsounddouble(ifNote Mapsareon).Thiscancreateoddandunpredictabletimingeffects,andwillreduceyour polyphonyby50%. Nevertheless,therewillbeoccasionswhenstackingzonesonthesameMIDIchannelmight comeinhandy.SupposeyouwantaphysicalcontrolleronthePC3tosenddatafortwodifferent numberedMIDIControllersonthesamechannel.Inthiscase,youmustcreatetwozones assignedtothesamechannel,butwithdifferentcontrollerassignments. Heresoneexample:ifareceivingsynthisusingController1formodulationdepthand Controller#13formodulationspeed,youcanincreaseboththedepthandthespeedwith Slider A.StartbyassigningSlider AinZone1toMWheelandinZone2toMIDI13;thenassign bothzonestothesameMIDIchannel.(Youmaywanttomakesureyouarentsendingdoubled notes.UsetheNoteMapparameterontheKEY/VELpagetosetonezonesNoteMaptoLinear andtheotherzonesNoteMaptoOff.) Anotherexample:createtwoormorezonesthatareidenticalexceptfortheirtransposition settings.Nowyoucanplayparallelintervals(orchords)withsinglekeystrikes.

MidiBank
BeforereadingthissectiononMIDIBanks,besuretoreadthenoteinthesection Program on page 74. ThePC3sprogramsaredividedinto17MIDIBanks,numbered016.Program46inMIDIBank 3,(whichisPC3bankOrchestra),forexample,is430LeadOboe.TheMIDIBankparameter displayswhichbankthecurrentprogramisassignedto,andautomaticallychangestomatchthe Programvalueyouset. YoucansendBankSelectmessagestoexternalMIDIdevicesaswell,bysettingtheDestination parametertoadestinationincludingMIDIofUSB_MIDI,thenchangingMidiBank.Some instrumentsmayhavemorebanksthanthePC3.BankswitchingviaMIDImakesiteasyforthe PC3usertoselectsoundsonexternalinstruments,nomatterhowmanybankstheymighthave. WhenyouchangethevalueoftheProgramparameter,thevalueofMidiBankautomatically changescorrespondingly.IfyouwanttotransmitaMIDIBanknumberdifferentfromtheone correspondingtothelocalprogram,selectthelocalprogramfirst,thenchangetheMIDIbank. Ifyouselectanemptybank(likeBank53),thezonewillstillproducesoundonthePC3, providedthatDestinationissettoadestinationincludingLocal.TheProgramparameterwill displaywhateverinternalprogramyouset,butthebanknumbertransmittedovertheMIDIOut portwillbedifferentfromtheinternalprogramsbanknumber.

7-5

Setup Mode The Channel/Program (CH/PROG) Page

MidiProg
MidiProgdefineswhichprogramnumberistransmittedouttheMIDIOutportonthecurrent zonesMIDIchannel. WhenyouchangethevalueoftheProgramparameter,thevalueofMIDIProgautomatically changescorrespondingly.IfyouwanttotransmitaMIDIprogramchangenumberdifferent fromtheonecorrespondingtothelocalprogram,selectthelocalprogramfirst,thenchangethe MIDIprogram. DifferentprogramsareaccessibledependingonthevalueoftheBankModeparameter:

Value of BankMode
Ctl 0 or Ctl 32 Ctl 0/32 K2600 None

Available Programs
0 to 127 0 to 127 0 to 99 None

Status
ThisparameterdetermineswhatthecurrentzonedoeswhenyouselectthesetupinSetup mode.Mutedmeansthatthezonesendsandreceivesprogramchangesandentry/exitcontroller values,butdoesntplaynotes.IfthevalueisActive,thezonesendsandreceivesnormallyvia MIDI.Solocausesonlythecurrentzonetoplay,backgroundingallotherzones (backgroundedzonessendandreceiveprogramchangesandentry/exitcontrollervalues,but dontplaynotes).WithavalueofSolo+Muted,thecurrentzoneisbothsoloedandmuted;when thezoneisntsoloed,itwontproducesound). SeethesectionaboutzonestatusLEDs(page 72)formoreinformationaboutmutingand soloingzones.

Out
UsetheOutparametertosettherearpanelaudiooutputsusedforeachzoneofthecurrent Setup.Thisparameterdeterminestheoutputsettingsforthemainprogramsignalandinsert effectsofeachzone(forAuxeffectsoutputsettings,usetheOutputparameterontheSetup ModeAUX1orAUX2pages.) AsettingofAutowillmakethatzoneoutputaudiobasedonthesettingsfortheprogramused bythatzone.ProgramoutputsettingsaresetintheProgramEditorusingtheOutputparameter onthetoplineofPROGFXpage(seeOutput on page 648fordetails)ortheOutputparameter ontheLAYERFXpage(seepage 649fordetails.)AsettingofPri.(primary)willoutputtrack audiototheMAINBalancedAnalogOutputs.AsettingofSec.(secondary)willoutputtrack audiototheAUXBalancedAnalogOutputs.

Input Channel
InSetupmode,anexternalMIDIdevice(suchasakeyboardorsequencer)willplaynotesofa singleprogrambydefault(iftheLocalKeyboardChannelparameterissettooff,seepage 109 fordetails.)TheplayedprogramwillbeonaZonethathasaChannelparameter(ontheCH/ PROGpage)whichmatchesthechannelonwhichtheexternalMIDIdeviceistransmitting.(If noZonesChannelparametermatches,theexternaldevicewillplaynotesofthelastprogramthatwas usingthatchannelinProgramModeorfromapreviouslyloadedSongorSetup.)

7-6

Setup Mode The Channel/Program (CH/PROG) Page

WhentheProgramofaSetupZoneisplayedfromanexternalMIDIdevice,SetupMIDI parameters(mostnoticeablykeyrangeandtransposition)willnotbeapplied.Ifyouwantthese parametersapplied,settheInputChannelparametertomatchthechannelonwhichthe externalMIDIdeviceistransmitting.SeetheInputChannelSettingssectionbelowfordetailson settinganInputChannel.(ToplaytheentireSetupfromanexternalMIDIdevice,seeLocalKeyboard Channel(LocalKbdCh) on page 109.)WhenLocalKeyboardChannelissettosomethingother thanOff,theInputChannelparameterhasnoeffectandwillappearinparentheses. InputChannelbasicallyhasthesameeffectasLocalKeyboardChannel,exceptyoucanchoose toplayonlyoneorsomeSetupZonesfromanexternaldevice,insteadofallZones.Toplay morethanoneZonefromanexternaldevice,seteachdesiredZonesInputChannelparameter tomatchthechannelonwhichtheexternalMIDIdeviceistransmitting.Itisalsopossibletouse theInputChannelparametertousemultipleexternaldeviceswhicheachplayaspecificZone orZones.FordetailsoncontrollingassignmentsmadetothePC3sphysicalcontrollers(sliders, switches,modwheel,etc.)fromanexternalMIDIdevicewhenusinganInputChannel,see ContinuousControllerMessagesFromExternalMIDIDevices on page 1010. Input Channel Settings WhensettingaMIDIchannelnumberfortheInputChannelparameter,channel1forexample, youcanchoose1L+Mor1M(scrollpast16L+Mtoseeallthechoices.)Achannelnumberwith asettingofL+MindicatesthatthezonewillbeplayablefromthePC3keyboard(LforLocal) andfromtheexternalMIDIcontroller(MforMIDI.)AchannelnumberwithasettingofM indicatesthatthezonewillbeplayableonlyfromtheexternalMIDIcontroller,andnotfromthe PC3keyboard.YoucanalsochooseAnyL+MorAnyMfortheInputChannelsetting.AnyL+M andAnyMwillmakethezonereceiveMIDIonanychannelthatanexternaldeviceis transmitting.ThisisusefulifyouareusingasingleexternalMIDIcontrollerandarenotsure whichchannelitistransmittingon.

MIDI Bank Mode (BankMode)

TheBankModeyouchoosedetermineshowbanknumberswillbesentoverMIDIwhenthe setupisselected,andinwhatformat.ItalsoaffectshowmanyMIDIbanksandprogramsyou canchoose. Nonemeansnobanknumberissent,justtheprogramnumber.Ctl0meansthatthebank numberissentasaMIDIController#0message.Ctl32meansitissentasMIDIController #32. Ctl0/32meansitissentasadualcontroller(twobyte)message,withthemostsignificantbyte (MSB)ofthebanknumbersentasController0andtheleastsignificantbyte(LSB)asController 32.BankSelectmessagesallowyoutospecifybanksnumbered0127. TheMIDISpecificationisalittleambiguouswhenitcomestoBankSelectmessages,asto whethertheyshouldbeonlyController0,onlyController32,orbothControllerssentasapair. Differentmanufacturersdesigntheirinstrumentstorespondtodifferentschemes,andifyou sendBankSelectinaformaninstrumentdoesntlike,itmayignoreitorinterpretitincorrectly. TheBankModeparameterisdesignedtoallowthegreatestflexibilityinaddressingotherMIDI instruments.UsuallyyoucanlookontheMIDIImplementationchartintheusersmanualofan instrumenttodeterminehowitsdesignedtoreceiveBankSelectmessages,andthenset BankModeforeachzonetosuittheinstrumentthatisreceivingdatafromit.Thedefaultsetting, whichworkswiththelargestnumberofotherinstruments,isCtl0/32. ABankModevalueofK2600isintendedforusewiththeK2000,K2500,orK2600.TheBank SelectmessageissentasController32,withavaluebetween0and127.TheK2000,K2500,and K2600supportonly10banks,with99programsperbank,soProgramChanges100orhigherare sentasBankSelect1,followedbythelasttwodigitsasaProgramChange.Forexample,if Program124isassignedtothezone,thiswillbesentouttheMIDIOutportasBankSelect (Controller32)1,andthenProgramChange24.

7-7

Setup Mode The Channel/Program (CH/PROG) Page

Entry Program Change (EntryProgChg)

Thisparameterenablesordisablesbankandprogramchangecommandssenttointernal programsortotheMIDIOutjackwhenyouselectsetups.IfitssettoOn,theprogramnumbers fortheprogramsinthe16zoneswillbesentviaMIDIwhenasetupisselected.Bysettingthis parametertoOff,youcanselectasetuponthePC3withoutchangingtheinternalprogramsor thoseonMIDIdevicesreceivingfromthePC3.Thisisusefulifyouwanttosendonlycontroller datatothePC3ortoMIDIdevices,withoutchangingprogramassignments.

Arpeggiator
TheArpeggiatorparameterdeterminesifthecurrentZonecanbeplayedbyanarpeggiator. Normally,theArpeggiatorparametershouldbesettoOn,andthearpeggiatorforeachZone shouldbeturnedonoroffwiththeActiveparameterontheARPEGGIATORpageforeachZone (seeTheARPEGGIATORPage on page 742fordetails.)IftheArpeggiatorparameterissettoOff, thezonewillnotbearpeggiatedeveniftheActiveparameterontheARPEGGIATORpageisset toOn. Whenaglobalarpeggiatorisbeingused,theArpeggiatorparametercanbesettoOfftoexclude aZonefrombeingplayedbytheglobalarpeggiator.SeeArpeggiatorGlobal (ArpGlobal) on page 766fordetailsonsettingaglobalarpeggiator.

7-8

Setup Mode The Key/Velocity (KEY-VEL) Page

The Key/Velocity (KEY-VEL) Page

TheKey/Velocitypageallowsyoutosetkeyrange,velocityrange,transposition,andNote Mapsforeachzone. Note:MIDIvelocityofnotesplayedonthePC3keyboardarefirstaffectedbyanyVelocityScale,Offset, andCurvesettingsmadeoneachzonesKEYVELpage.TheresultingvelocityisthenaffectedbyanyVel MapsettingsmadeontheMasterModeMAPSpage(seepage 114.)Also,MIDIvelocitiessenttothe USBorMIDIoutportarefirstaffectedasexplainedabove,andthenaffectedbysettingsontheMIDI modeTransmitpage(seepage 101.)Oneachofthepagesmentionedabove,lookattheMIDIsignalflow charttoseewhichvelocitymapscanaffectyourvelocitiesdependingonwhichMIDISources,MIDI Destinationsandoperatingmodethatyouareusing.

Parameter Low Key High Key Transpose Note Map Low Velocity High Velocity Velocity Scale Velocity Offset Velocity Curve

Range of Values C -1 to G9 C -1 to G9 -128 to +127 Semitones Note Map List 1 to 127 1 to 127 300% -128 to +127 Velocity Curve List (seeVelocity Curve (VelCurve) on page 7-14)

Default C -1 G9 0Linear 1 127 100% 0 Linear

7-9

Setup Mode The Key/Velocity (KEY-VEL) Page

Low Key (LoKey), High Key (HiKey)

TheLoKeyandHiKeyparametersdefinethenoterangeofthecurrentlyselectedzone.The easiestwaytochangethesevaluesistopressandholdtheEnterbuttonandpressthekeyofthe noteyouwishtoenter.Youcansetthesevalueswithnormaldataentrymethodsaswell. Youcancreatenegativerangesaswell.Todothis,selecttheHiKeyparameterandsetitslimit lowerthantheLoKeylimit.Thisresultsinthezonebeingactiveatthetopandbottomofthe keyboard,butbeingsilentintherangebetweenthetwolimits.Thisletsyoucreatealayerwitha holeinthemiddle,whichyoucanthenfillwithadifferentsoundonanotherzone. ThelimitsofMIDIareC1toG9.Theuntransposed88keyrangeisA0toC8.Theuntransposed 76keyrangeisE1toG7.

Transpose
Thischangesthepitchofthezone,withoutchangingitspositiononthekeyboard.Itchangesthe MIDInotenumbersgeneratedbythekeysinthezone,withoutphysicallyshiftingthezone.The rangeis128to127semitones.Sincethereare12semitones(orhalfsteps)toanoctave,youcan transposeupordownovertenoctaves.Ifyoutransposeoutoftherangeoftheactivevoice, however,nonoteswillsound;MIDInotenumberswilltransmit,butnoteswillnot.

Note Map
NoteMapletsyouchangethewaynotesaresentfromthePC3.ThedefaultsettingisLinear:all notesgooutasplayed.PressingtheMinusbuttontakesyoutoOff;nonotesaresent,but controllersandothernonnotedataare. SettingNoteMaptoInverseeffectivelyturnsthekeyboardupsidedown,withthehighestkey beingA0andthelowestC9.IfyousetNoteMaptoConstant,allofthekeysonthekeyboard willplaythesamenote.ThenotedefaultstoC4,butyoucanchangethiswiththeTranspose parameter.Thisworkswellwhenyouwantthesoundfromaparticularkeytoplaywithevery noteofanotherzoneforexample,playingaridecymbalwitheverynoteinabassline. Nextarethealternatingnotemaps,whichletyoudividethekeyboardinsomeuniqueways.If youareusingtwoormoreMIDIdevices(includingthePC3),youcanexpandpolyphonyby assigningeachzonetoadifferentalternatingnotemap.Forexample,ifyouhavetwoPC3s,you canassigntwozonestoeachplaythesameprogramonadifferentPC3,therebydoubling polyphony. Tosplitazoneintooneoftwoalternatingnotemaps,setNoteMapto1of2;nowthezoneplays oneverysecondkey,startingonC,butwontplayonanyotherkeys.Setanotherzoneto2of2, andthiszonewillplayoneverysecondkey,startingonC#,thuscoveringtheremainingkeys. Threeandfourzonealternatingnotemapsworkthesameway,butcauseeachzonetoplayonly oneverythirdandeveryfourthkey,respectively. Notemapsarealsousedtocreatedrumpatternswiththearpeggiator.SeveraloftheROM setupsusethisfeature.

7-10

Setup Mode The Key/Velocity (KEY-VEL) Page

Velocity Scale (VelScale)

Thisletsyouamplifyordiminishvelocityresponse.Normalresponseis100%.Highervalues makethekeyboardmoresensitive(youdontneedtoplayashardtogethigherMIDIvelocities) whilelowervaluesmakeitlesssensitive(playingharderdoesntchangeMIDIvelocityas much).Youcanalsosetthescaletoanegativenumber,inwhichcasethevelocityresponseis turnedupsidedown:playingharderproducesasoftersoundandviceversa.Thisisusefulfor creatingvelocitybasedcrossfadesbetweenzones.SeethefollowingsectiononVelocityOffset forideasaboutnegativescaling. ThefollowingillustrationshowswhathappenswhenyouchangeVelocityScale.Notethat VelocityScaleistheonlyparameterchangedinthisexample;theotherparametersaresetto theirdefaults(offset=0,curve=linear,min=1,max=127). 127

Velocity Scale: 100%

as you strike the keys harder (increase the velocity) MIDI velocity increases proportionally

MIDI Velocity

Velocity Scale: 200%

MIDI velocity reaches maximum on medium strike velocity

64

Velocity Scale: 50%

MIDI velocity never reaches maximum, even on maximum strike velocity

64 Strike Velocity

127

7-11

Setup Mode The Key/Velocity (KEY-VEL) Page

Velocity Offset
VelOffsetalsochangestheresponse,butinamoredirectway,byaddingorsubtractinga constanttothekeyvelocity.Forexample,ifthisissetto25(assumingascaleof100%),then25is addedtothevelocityofeverykeystroke,usuallymakingthesoundthatmuchlouder.The softestpossiblekeystrokewillhaveavalueof25,whileakeystrokewithvelocityof102will producethesamesoundasanotewithvelocity127(102+25=127).Negativevaluesdiminishthe response:asettingof25meanstheloudestvelocityavailablewillbe102,whileanykeystroke 25orbelowwillproduceavelocityof1(avelocityvalueofzerohasaspecialmeaninginMIDI andcannotbeusedforNoteOns). YoucanthinkofScaleasbeingaproportionalchangetothevelocity,whileOffsetisalinear change.ThemaximumvaluesforOffsetare127.Thefollowingillustrationshowstheeffectsof VelocityOffset.NotethatVelocityOffsetistheonlyparameterchangedinthisexample;the otherparametersaresettotheirdefaults(scale=100%,curve=linear,min=1,max=127). 127

MIDI Velocity

Velocity Offset: +64

low velocity keystrikes produce medium MIDI velocity and greater

64

Velocity Offset: -64

low velocity keystrikes result in MIDI velocity of 1; maximum MIDI velocity reduced

64 Strike Velocity

127

7-12

Setup Mode The Key/Velocity (KEY-VEL) Page

OffsetandScaleworktogether.Ifscalingtakesthevelocityoutoftheballparkforexample, youwanttosetitto300%butthatputsallofyournotesatmaximumvelocityusinga negativeoffset,sayaround60,canmakeitpossibletostillplayatdifferentvolumes,although yourcurvewillstillbealotsteeperthannormal.Ifyouuseanegativescaling,thenyoumust useanoffset:otherwiseallofyourvelocitieswillendupaszeroes(well,onesactually,sincea MIDInoteonwithvelocityzeroissomethingelse).Sotogettrueinversescaling(thatis,minus 100%),youmustsetanoffsetof127togetthefullrangeofvelocities.Settingtheoffsetto127 andthescaleto100%producesaslopelikethis(whichisthesameasthereverselinearcurve): 127

MIDI Velocity

64

64 Strike Velocity

127

NotethatOffsetandScaleaffectonlyMIDIvelocities;thatis,theseparametersdontchange VelocityTrackingintheprogramsthemselves.Therefore,someprograms(suchasorgan sounds,whichoftenhavelowVelTrkvalues)mayrespondonlysubtlytoOffsetandScale,or notatall.

7-13

Setup Mode The Key/Velocity (KEY-VEL) Page

Velocity Curve (VelCurve)

VelCurveletsyoutaperthevelocityresponse.ThedefaultsettingisLinear,whichmeansthat theoutputvelocitychangesdirectlyproportionallytotheplayedvelocity. Expandproducesacurvethatislesssteepthanthelinearcurveatkeystrikevelocitiesbelow64, andsteeperthanthelinearcurveatkeystrikevelocitiesabove64.Inotherwords,whenyoure playingsoftly,youllnoticevelocitydifferenceslessthanwithalinearcurve,whilewhenyoure playinghard,youllnoticevelocitydifferencesmore. Compressproducesavelocitycurvethatistheoppositeoftheexpandedcurvethatis,youll noticevelocitydifferencesmorewhenyoureplayingsoftlythanwhenyoureplayinghard.

127

Velocity Curve: Linear

as you hit the keys harder (increase the velocity) MIDI velocity increases proportionally

MIDI Velocity

Velocity Curve: Compress

MIDI velocity is greater at medium strike velocity than with Linear curve

64

Velocity Curve: Expand

MIDI velocity is less at medium strike velocity than with Linear curve

64 Strike Velocity

127

7-14

Setup Mode The Key/Velocity (KEY-VEL) Page

CrossfadeisdesignedtobeusedintandemwiththeReverseCrossfadecurve,enablingyouto performsmoothcrossfadesbetweendifferentprograms. Bumptapersvelocityresponsetoresembleabellcurve,sothatnotesareloudestwhenyour keystrikevelocityis64.Notesgetsofterasthekeystrikevelocityapproaches0or127. 127

Velocity Curve: Linear

as you hit the keys harder (increase the velocity) MIDI velocity increases proportionally

MIDI Velocity

Velocity Curve: Bump

MIDI velocity is greatest at medium strike velocity

64

Velocity Curve: Crossfade

Below medium strike velocity, MIDI velocity is less than with Linear curve; above medium strike velocity, MIDI velocity is greater than with Linear curve

64 Strike Velocity

127

ThenextfourvelocitycurvesareReverseLinear(RvrsLinear),ReverseExpand(RvrsExpand), ReverseCompress(RvrsCompress),andReverseCrossfade(RvrsCrossfade).Thesetaper velocityinreverseofthefivecurveswejustcovered.Forexample,ReverseLinearsresponseis suchthatstrikingakeyharderwillproducealowervolume,strikingitsofterwillproducea highervolume,andsoon.Thisprovidesaconvenientwaytoachievenegativescaling,byletting yousetoneparameterinsteadoftwo.

127

Velocity Curve: Reverse Linear

as you hit the keys harder (increase the velocity) MIDI velocity decreases proportionally

MIDI Velocity

Velocity Curve: Reverse Compress

MIDI velocity is more at medium strike velocity than Reverse Linear curve

64

Velocity Curve: Reverse Expand

MIDI velocity is less at medium strike velocity than Reverse Linear curve

Velocity Curve: Reverse Crossfade

Below medium strike velocity, MIDI velocity is greater than with Reverse Linear curve; above medium strike velocity, MIDI velocity is less than with Reverse Linear curve

64 Strike Velocity

127

7-15

Setup Mode The Key/Velocity (KEY-VEL) Page

Low Velocity (LoVel), HighVelocity (HiVel)

LoVelandHiVelsettheminimumandmaximumvelocitylimitsthatthecurrentzonetransmits. Akeystrokeinthecurrentzonewhosevelocityafterithasbeenscaledandoffsetisbelow theminimumdoesnotgenerateaNoteOn.Neitherdoesakeystrokewhosevelocityafter processingisabovethemaximum.Theseparametersareusefulforvelocityswitching havingakeyplaydifferentsoundsdependingonhowhardyoustrikeit. Thevaluescanbeanywherefrom1to127.Aswithotherparameters,zonescanoverlaporbe totallydiscrete,orbeidentical.Usually,LoVelwillhaveasmallervaluethanHiVel,butaswith LoKeyandHiKey,youmayalsocreateagapinvelocityresponse,bysettingnegativerangesfor velocity. 127

MIDI Velocity

Velocity Min: 1, Max: 64

No MIDI Note Ons are transmitted when you strike keys with medium velocity or greater

64

64 Strike Velocity

127

127

MIDI Velocity

Velocity Min: 64, Max: 127

No MIDI Note Ons are transmitted unless you strike keys with velocity of medium or greater

64

64 Strike Velocity

127

7-16

Setup Mode The Pan/Volume (PAN/VOL) Page

The Pan/Volume (PAN/VOL) Page

Bychangingtheparametersonthispage,youcandefinehoweachzonesendsMIDIvolume andpanmessages.

Parameter Entry Volume Exit Volume Entry Pan Exit Pan

Range of Values None, 0-127 None, 0-127 None, 0-127 None, 0-127

Default None None None None

Entry Volume, Exit Volume

EntryVolumeenablesyoutocontroltheinitialMIDIvolumesettingforeachzoneofthecurrent setup.WhenyouselectasetupinSetupmode,thePC3sendsMIDIvolumecontrol(MIDI Controller07)messagesoneachofthesetupsMIDIchannels,accordingtothevalueofthe EntryVolumeparameter.Thissetsthestartingvolumelevelforeachzone,foranyvalueother thanNone.SubsequentMIDIvolumecontrolsignalssenttothesetupsMIDIchannelsaffectthe volumenormally. Whenyouexitthecurrentsetup,ExitVolumesendsanotherMIDIController07message. ThesettingoftheVolumeLockparameterontheMIDImodeCHANNELSpage(see Chapter 10)determineswhetherthisparameterhasanyeffect.

Entry Pan, Exit Pan

YoucansetentryandexitvaluesforPanaswell.Whenyouselectasetup,thePC3sendsaMIDI pancontrol(MIDIController10)messageoneachMIDIChannelineachzone;anotherMIDI pancontrolmessageissentwhenyouexitthesetup.TheEntryandExitvaluesforPanarethe sameasthoseforVolume.ThereisalsoaPanLockparameterontheMIDImodeCHANNELS page,whichoverridestheSetupEditorsPansettings. IfyouaretryingtosetthePanandtheprogramdoesntseemtoberesponding,youshould checktheModeparameterontheOUTPUTpageintheProgramEditor.IfitissettoFixed,then thePC3isignoringtheMIDIPanmessage;settingModeto+MIDIallowsyoutocontrolthe programspanningfromtheSetupEditor. Mostprogramsrespondtopanmessagesonthenextkeystrike.Thismeansthatifyouholda noteandchangethepan,thecurrentnotewillstayatitscurrentpositionuntilyoustrikeit again.However,aPC3programthatusesthePANNERalgorithmwillrespondtorealtimepan adjustmentsaswell.

7-17

Setup Mode The BEND Page

The BEND Page

TheparametersontheBENDpagedefinethebendrangesforeachofthethreetypesofpitch bendmessagesthePC3canrespondto.

Parameter Bend Range Up (semitones) Bend Range Up (cents) Bend Range Down (semitones) Bend Range Down (cents) Aux Bend 1 Up Aux Bend 1 Down Aux Bend 2 Range

Range of Values Prog, 0 to 127 semitones Prog, 100 cents Prog, 0 to 127 semitones Prog, 100 cents 0 to 60 semitones 0 to 60 semitones 0 to 60 semitones

Default 2 0 2 0 12 12 2

Bend Range (Semitones) and Bend Range (Cents): Up and Down

BendRangeUp(ST)andBendRangeDown(ST)sendsabendrangemessagetoaninternal programoraMIDIdevice,tellingithowtodefinesubsequentpitchbendmessages.Some programsmaybehavestrangelywhenyouchangetheBendRangevalue,becausetheyuse FUNsorDSPFunctionstoaffectthepitchwheel.Inthatcase,youshouldeithersetthevalueof BendRangetoProg,oredittheprogramitself. NOTE:ThesettingsforBendRangeUpandDownareonlyreflectedinSetupmode.Evenifyouspecify BendRangeUpandDownvaluesforthecontrolsetup(setupassignmentswhicharespecifiedinSetup modeandusedinProgrammode,seepage 69)bendrangevalueswillnotbereflectedinanymodeexcept Setupmode,andpitchbendmessagesinthecurrentprogram(inProgrammode)willresultinbehavioras specifiedforthePitchBendRangeparametersontheCOMMONpageintheProgramEditor. BendRangeUp(ct)andBendRangeDown(ct)letsyoufinetunethevalueforBendRange (semitones).100centsequalsonesemitone,oronehalfstep;youcansetthisparameter anywherebetween0and100cents. BendRangeUp,inbothsemitonesandcents,affectsallcontrollersthataresettoPitchUp(inthe defaultcontrolsetup,thePWUpparameterontheWHEELpageisassignedtoPitchUp). BendRangeDown,inbothsemitonesandcents,affectsallcontrollersthataresettoPitchDwn (inthedefaultcontrolsetup,thePWDnparameterontheWHEELpageisassignedto PitchDwn).AnyphysicalcontrollerthatusestheControlDestinationlistcanbeassignedto PitchUporPitchDwn.Tokeepthingssimplethough,youwillnormallywanttousePitchUp

7-18

Setup Mode Controllers

andPitchDwn(controllerdestinations130and131)asaPitchWheeldestinations(seePWUp andPWDnonTheWHEELPage on page 732,)anduseMIDI21andMIDI15(controller destinations21and15)forothercontrollers,suchastheSlidersandRibbon(seeAuxBend1Up/ DownandAuxBend2Rangebelow.) KeepinmindthatnotallMIDIdevicesrespondtoBendRangemessages.Withmanyolder MIDIinstruments,youmustsetbendrangesonthedevicesthemselves. ChangingprogramssendsaBendRangemessagewiththecurrentprogramsvalues.Sodoes pressingPanic,whichisaquickwaytoresetyourPC3orMIDIslavesifyouveusedacontroller tomodulatethebendrange.

Aux Bend 1 Up and Aux Bend 1 Down

LikeBendRangeUp/Down,AuxBend1definestherangeforPitchBendmessages,butdoesso forthosephysicalcontrollersassignedtocontrollerdestination21,MIDI21.Therearetwo parametersrelatedtoAuxBend1:anupwardvalue(AuxBend1Up)andadownwardvalue (AuxBend1Dwn).Usetheseparameterstosetvaluesforupwardanddownwardpitchshifting. Inmostfactorysetups,AuxBend1issetasthedestinationfortheoptionalRibboncontroller (seeTheRIBBONPage on page 739).

Aux Bend 2 Range

ThePC3allowsyoutospecifyathirdpitchbendrange;thisiscalledAuxBend2,anditdefines therangeforcontrollerssettocontrollerdestination15,MIDI15.ForAuxBend2,youcanset onlyonerangeforbothupwardanddownwardpitchbending. ANoteAboutContinuousControllersandTheBENDPage: UnlikethePitchWheelandRibboncontroller,othercontinuouscontrollers,suchasaslider,will notautomaticallyreturntotheoriginalcenterpitch.Thiscanmakeithardtoaccuratelyreturn thecontrollertoitscenterpositionbyhand.Inthesecases,itisusefultouseaseparate controllerforbendingonlyupordown.Forexample,tohaveaslideronlybendup,useaslider withanAddvalueof64andaScalevalueof50%,andCurvsettoLinear.Thebottomofthe sliderwillnowbethecenterpitch,andthetopofthesliderwillbethetopofyourbendrange. Tohaveaslideronlybenddown,useasliderwithanAddvalueof127andaScalevalueof 150%,andCurvsettoLinear.Thetopofthesliderwillnowbethecenterpitch,andthebottom ofthesliderwillbethebottomofyourbendrange.Seepage 729formoreonsettingcontinuous controllerparameters.

Controllers
ControllereditingisoneofthestrongestaspectsofthePC3susefulnessasthemaincontroller forasophisticatedMIDIstudio.Inthissection,welltalkabouttwodifferenttypesof controllersastheyapplytothePC3.Oneisthephysicalcontrollers:thewheels,buttons, pedals,etc.thatyoumovewithyourfingersorfeet.TheotherisMIDIControllers,whichare MIDIcommandssentbythePC3.Forourpurposes,MIDIControllersincludesthecomplete setofControllersdefinedbytheMIDISpecification,aswellaspitchbend,aftertouch,andafew otherusefulMIDIcommands.Tofendoffconfusion,wellrefertothePC3sphysicalcontrollers withalowercasec,andMIDIControllerswithanuppercaseC. AnyMIDIControllercanbeusedastheassignmentforanyphysicalcontroller(andformultiple physicalcontrollers,aswell).Orinotherwords,anyphysicalcontrollerliketheModWheelcan beprogrammedtosendanyMIDIcontrolsignal.Inaddition,eachcontrollerineachsetupzone canbetweakedjustlikekeyboardvelocity(oranyotherSetupmodeparameter).Although controllereditingonthePC3canbesomewhatcomplex,itcanalsobeveryrewarding. TogetanideaoftheexpressivecapabilitiesofSetupmode,explorethefactorysetupsthatcome withthePC3.

7-19

Setup Mode Controllers

ThePC3sphysicalcontrollersincludethefollowing: Theninesliders(A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I)intheAssignableControllerssection ThetwoContinuousControlPedaljacks(CCPedal1andCCPedal2) TheoptionalRibbonController,whichyoucandefineasaoneorthreesectioncontroller ThePitchWheel TheModulationWheel(ModWheel) Keyboardaftertouch,orMonoPressure(MPress) TheoptionalBreathController(whichisconnectedtoContinuousControllerPedal2) ThetwoPanelSwitchesabovethePitchandModWheelsandProgramButtons18 ThethreeFootswitchpedaljacks(1,2,and3)

Thefollowingtablesprovideanoverviewofthephysicalcontrollersandtheirparameters.

Continuous Controllers
SeeContinuousControllerParameters on page 729forinformationoneachparameter.

Physical Controller

Setup Editor Page

Parameter:Values
Destination: Control Destination List Scale: -300% to 300% Add: -128 to 127 Curve: Linear, Compress. Expand Entry Value: None, 0 to 127 Exit Value: None, 0 to 127

Sliders A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I

SLID, SLID2

CPedals 1 & 2 / Breath Ribbon Pitch Wheel and Mod Wheel MPressure

CPEDAL RIBBON WHEEL PRESS

(same as Sliders) (same as Sliders) (same as Sliders) (same as Sliders)

Table 7-2

Continuous Controllers

7-20

Setup Mode Controllers

Switch Controllers
SeeSwitchControllerParameters on page 730forinformationoneachparameter.

Physical Controller

Setup Editor Page

Parameter:Values
SwType: Toggle, Momentary, Note Toggle, Note Momentary

Footswitches 1, 2, and 3

FT SW1, FT SW2, FT SW3

Destination: Control Destination List On Value: None, 0 to 127 Off Value: None, 0 to 127 Entry Value: None, Off, On Exit Value: None, Off, On

Arp and SW switches

ARP SW, SWITCH SWPRG1, SWPRG2, SWPRG3, SWPRG4, SWPRG5, SWPRG6, SWPRG7, SWPRG8

(same as Footswitches) (same as Footswitches)

Programmable switches 1 to 8

Table 7-3

Switch Controllers

The Controller Destination List

ThetablebelowcontainstheavailablevaluesfortheDestinationparameterforeachcontroller, inscrollingorder.NotethatthePC3hasdestinationswithControllerNumbersgreaterthan 127thereare128MIDIControllers,asdictatedbytheMIDIspec.Anydatasenttodestinations withaControllernumberoutsideoftheMIDIrange(i.e.,morethan127)aresentasaPC3 specificprotocol,andarethusnotsentasMIDIdata,andnotsentthroughMIDIOut.

Controller Number
0

Corresponding Destination Name

OFF/Bank

Description
By default, when you enter 0 or Clear for the Destination parameter, the destination will be assigned to OFF. To select Bank as the destination, use the Alpha Wheel or -/+ buttons. Default assignment for Mod Wheel Default assignment for Breath Controller Default assignment for CC Pedal 2 Monophonic PC3 programs respond to this Controller if portamento is turned on

1 2 3 4 5

MWheel Breath MIDI 03 Foot PortTim

Table 7-4

Controller Destination List

7-21

Setup Mode Controllers

Controller Number
6 7 8 9 10

Corresponding Destination Name

Data Volume Balance MIDI 09 Pan

Description
Almost all PC3 programs have this Controller assigned to filter frequency or brightness MIDI Volume MIDI Balance MIDI Panprograms which use the PANNER algorithm will respond to real-time pan adjustments; all other programs will respond on the next note start MIDI ExpressionDefault assignment for CC Pedal 1. An attenuator for fading in and out. It scales between minimum (0) and the current value of Volume Default assignment for Slider B Controls pitchbend for AuxBend2. (see The BEND Page on page 7-18)

11

Express

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2228 29 30, 31 32 3363 64 65 66

MIDI 12 MIDI 13 MIDI 14 MIDI 15 Ctl A Ctl B Ctl C Ctl D MIDI 20 MIDI 21 MIDI 2228 MIDI 29 MIDI 30, 31 Bank 3363 Sustain MIDI 65 Sostenut Default destination for Footswitch 2holds notes that are currently down, but not notes played subsequently (see Sostenuto Pedal (SosPdl) on page 6-20) Default destination for Footswitch 3 lowers the volume by a preset amount and may soften the timbre as well (see The Footswitch Pages (FT SW1, FT SW2, FT SW3) on page 7-36) Forces mono playback Envelopes freeze at current state MIDI Controllers 7083 MIDI Controllers 3363 Default destination for Footswitch 1 Default destination for Ribbon, controls pitchbend for AuxBend1. (see The BEND Page on page 7-18) Default destinations for Sliders C to I Default destination for SW button MIDI Controllers 30, 31

67

Soft

68 69 7083

Legato Freeze MIDI 7083

Table 7-4

Controller Destination List (Continued)

7-22

Setup Mode Controllers

Controller Number
84 8590 91 92 93 94-95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102-108 109 110-119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138

Corresponding Destination Name

Portamen MIDI 8590 GM Reverb MIDI 92 GM Chorus MIDI 94-95 Data Inc Data Dec NRegParL NRegParM RegParL RegParM MIDI 102-108 MIDI 109 MIDI 110-119 Sound Off RstCtls Local Notes Off Poly Omni Mono On Mono Off Pitch PitchRev PitchUp PitchDwn Pressure Tempo KeyNum KeyVel ProgInc ProgDec ProgGoto

Description
Portamento control, best with mono voices, value is relative to key range, makes pitch momentarily slide to a note MIDI Controllers 8590 With PC3 in General MIDI mode, controls Reverb send level With PC3 in General MIDI mode, controls Chorus send level MIDI Controllers 9495 Equivalent to pressing the plus button Equivalent to pressing the minus button Non-Registered Parameter Least Significant Byte Non-Registered Parameter Most Significant Byte Registered Parameter Least Significant Byte Registered Parameter Most Significant Byte MIDI Controllers 102108 Sets arpeggiator velocity when ARPEGGIATOR velocity is set to MIDI 109 mode MIDI Controllers 110119 Stops all sound in the corresponding channel Reset Controllers to defaults in the corresponding channel Sends Note Off Message to all playing notes in the corresponding channel

Pitchvalues above and below 64 bend the pitch up and down, respectively Pitchvalues above and below 64 bend the pitch down and up, respectively Pitchvalues above 0 bend the pitch up Pitchvalues above 0 bend the pitch down Pressure Tempo Triggers playback of notes by Key Numbere.g., C4 is 60 Key Velocity Program Incrementincrements current program number Program Decrementdecrements current program number Go to Programselects program

Table 7-4

Controller Destination List (Continued)

7-23

Setup Mode Controllers

Controller Number
139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150

Corresponding Destination Name

SetupInc SetupDec SetpGoto Start Stop Continue TransUp TransDown ArpOn ArpOff MuteZn ArpOrder

Description
Setup Incrementincrements current setup number Setup Decrementincrements current setup number Go to Setupselects setup Sequencer function Sequencer function Sequencer function Transpose Up (ST) Transpose Down (ST) Any value turns Arpeggiator On. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-42) Any Value turns Arpeggiator Off. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-42) Mute Zone values above 64 will mute the zone, values below or equal to 64 will unmute the zone. Arpeggiator Order, each range of values selects one of nine options in order on parameters list: 0-14, 15-28, 29-42, 43-56, 57-70, 71-84, 85-98, 99-112, 113-127. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-42) Arpeggiator Beats, each range of values selects one of seven options in order on parameters list: 0-18, 19-36, 37-54, 55-72, 73-90, 91-108, 109-127. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-42) The 88 Arpeggiator Shift steps are scaled over the 128 MIDI controller values, so that 0 = 0 steps and 127 = 88 steps. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-42) The 60 Arpeggiator Shift Limit steps are scaled over the 128 MIDI controller values, so that 0 = 0 steps and 127 = 60 steps. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-42) Arpeggiator Shift Limit Option, each range of values selects one of seven options in order on parameters list: 0-18, 19-36, 37-54, 55-72, 73-90, 91-108, 109-127. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-42) Arpeggiator Velocity, each range of values selects one of twenty-three options in order on parameters list: 0-5, 6-10, 11-15...101-105, 106-110, 111-127. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-42) The Arpeggiator Duration % values are scaled over the 128 MIDI controller values, so that 0 = 1% and 127 = 100%. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-42) For Arpeggiator Latch Pedals mode, 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR 2 Page on page 7-49) For Arpeggiator Latch Pedals mode, 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR 2 Page on page 7-49)

151

ArpBeats

152

ArpShift

153

ArpLimit

154

ArpLmtOp

155

ArpVel

156

ArpDur

157 158

Latch Latch2

Table 7-4

Controller Destination List (Continued)

7-24

Setup Mode Controllers

Controller Number
159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169

Corresponding Destination Name

ArpGliss SusLatch Panic SoloZn RiffOn RiffOff RiffDur RiffVel RiffDly TapTempo KB3Mutes

Description
Arpeggiator Gliss, 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR 2 Page on page 7-49) For Arpeggiator Latch Pedals mode, 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR 2 Page on page 7-49) Panic Solo Zone Riff On (See Riffs on page 7-55) Riff Off (See Riffs on page 7-55) Riff Duration (See Riffs on page 7-55) Riff Velocity (See Riffs on page 7-55) Riff Delay (See Riffs on page 7-55) Tap Tempo (See TEMPO on page 11-10) KB3 Mutesin Setup Mode, values of 63 and below disable the Bank buttons for controlling KB3 programs in that setup, and a values above 64 enable them Sets ARPEGGIATOR values for Shift to negative. 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-42) Selects one of the 128 patterns in the current ARPEGGIATOR ShiftPatt Bank. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-42) A controller value selects the corresponding ShiftPatt Bank for the ARPEGGIATOR page of a controllers zone. For example, controller value 2 selects ShiftPatt bank 2, controller value 7 selects ShiftPatt bank 7. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-42) Selects one of the 128 patterns in the current ARPEGGIATOR VelPatt Bank. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-42) A controller value selects the corresponding VelPatt Bank for the ARPEGGIATOR page of a controllers zone. For example, controller value 2 selects VelPatt bank 2, controller value 7 selects VelPatt bank 7. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-42) Sets arpeggiator velocity when ARPEGGIATOR velocity is set to Fixed. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-42) Shift Key Number (see below) Shift Key (see below) Same as 176 ShKeyNum, but the Shift Patterns velocity will be modified by the current velocity pattern of the zone.

170 171

-Arp Shift ShiftPatt

172

ShiftPBank

173

VelPatt

174

VelPBank

175 176 177 178

VelFixed ShKeyNum ShiftKey ShKeyNuV

Table 7-4

Controller Destination List (Continued)

7-25

Setup Mode Controllers

Shift Key Number, Shift Key (ShKeyNum, ShiftKey)

Thesecontrollerdestinationsallowyoutoplaymusicalscalesandsinglenotepatternsonany programmablecontinuouscontrollerinasetup,withouttheneedofplayingthephysicalkeysof thekeyboard.Thesefeaturesareespeciallyusefulforplayingfastarpeggiations.These destinationsonlyworkwhencombinedwithotherdestinationsandfeatures,sobesuretoread thiswholesectiontogainacompleteunderstanding. UsingaKurzweilRibbonasacontrollergivesyouthemostoptions,butthesedestinationscan alsobecontrolledbyanyslider,pedal,keypressure,etc.UsingtheKurzweilRibbonprovides moreaccuratecontrolsinceithasalongerphysicalrangethanothercontrollers.Also,ifyouset itinAbsolutemode,youcanjumpfromonenotetoanyothernoteinthepatterninanyoctave. Withaslideryouhavetogothroughalltheintermediatenotesofthepattern.Awayofpartially doingthiswithslidersistoassigntheShiftKeyNumbercontrollertoseveralsliderswith differentranges.(SeeTheRibbonConfiguration(RIBCFG)Page on page 740fordetailsonRibbon options,andScaleandAdd on page 729fordetailsonchangingcontrollerranges.) ShiftKeyNumber(ShKeyNum,controllerdestination176)worksinasimilarwaytoKey Number(KeyNum,controllerdestination134).Bothcontrollersbasicallygeneratea monophonicstreamofnotes.ThedifferenceisthatKeyNumberplaysthroughallnotes chromatically,whileShiftKeyNumberonlyplaysnotesrelativetoaShiftPattern. Forexample,whencontrollingShiftKeyNumberfromaslider,notesaretriggeredfromaShift Patterninforwardsorderasyoumovethesliderup,andbackwardsorderasyoumovethe sliderdown.IfinourzonewehaveselectedtheShiftPattern2:minor,thenotesbeingplayedby thesliderwillbeonlytheroot,theminorthirdandfifthinthechosenkey,triggeringnotesin anyoctaveupanddownthekeyboard.(SeeShiftKeybelowfordetailsonselectingtherootnoteand octave.) SelectingTheDesiredNotes: YoumustselectaShiftPatternforthedesiredzoneinorderforShiftKeyNumbertohavean effect.ToselectaShiftPatternforthecurrentzoneinasetup,enterthesetupeditorandgotothe ARPEGGIATORpage.SelectaShiftPatternfromtheShiftPattfield.Ifusingmultiplezones,a differentpatterncanbeselectedforeach.TheShiftPattfieldisusuallyusedwiththe arpeggiator,butcanalsobeusedincombinationwiththecontrollerdestinationsShiftKeyNote, ShiftKey,andKeyVelocity.ThesedestinationscanuseazonesShiftPatternwhetherthe arpeggiatorisonoroffwithoutconflict.FormoreinformationonShiftPatternssuchasediting andsaving,seeShiftPattern(ShiftPatt) on page 747.(NotethattheShiftPattUporDownoptions,as wellasanyofthearpeggiatorparametersotherthanShiftPattdonothaveaneffectonShiftKeyNumber.) Youcanalsosetcontrollerstodestination171(ShiftPatt)toselectapatternfromthecurrent bankof128shiftpatterns,anddestination172(ShiftPBank)toselectabankfrombanksof128 shiftpatternseach. SelectingTheDesiredVelocity: InordertohaveanotesoundwhenusingShiftKeyNumber,youfirstneedtosendaKey Velocitymessage(KeyVel,controllerdestination135)withanonzerovelocity.Youmustseta controllertothisdestination,itsusefultosetasliderorothercontinuouscontrollerinorderto controlvelocitywhileplaying.ThenextnotestobetriggeredbyShiftKeyNumberwillbe playedwiththelastreceivedKeyVelvelocity.Onenotetriggeredbythesecontrollerssounds untilanothernoteistriggeredoruntilaKeyVelmessagewithvelocity0issent.

7-26

Setup Mode Controllers

SelectingTheDesiredKey(RootNote): ShiftKey(ShiftKey,controllerdestination177)allowstheusertoselectthekey(rootnote)of theShiftPatterntriggeredbyShiftKeyNumber.AShiftPatternisarelativepatternbasedona rootnote.AllnotestriggeredbyaShiftPatternareshiftedfromtherootnotebythevalueof eachpatternstep(inhalfsteps.) Shift Key Settings Value

0-9 10-19 20-29 30-39 40-49 50-59 60-68 69-78 79-88 89-98 99-108 109-118 119-127 C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B Last Note Played

Key (root note)

WhenusingaShiftPatternwithShiftKeyNumberyoucanselectthekeywithoneormore controllerssettotheShiftKeydestination.Youcanuseacontinuouscontrollersuchasaslider tocyclethroughkeys,orswitchessettopredeterminedkeys.Forexample,ifyouareplayinga songthatmovesbetween2or3keys,acoupleofswitchescouldbeprogrammedinorderto sendtheappropriateShiftKeymessageforeachkeychange.Thatwayallthenotesyouare triggeringwithaShiftKeyNumbercontrollerwillbeintheappropriatescale.Youcouldalso createasetupforasongwithmultiplezones,eachwithitsownpresetkeyandappropriate shiftpattern.Thatway,foreachchordchangeyoucouldmoveadifferentcontrollerthatwould createthecorrectharmony. AnotherwaytochooseakeyistosetShiftKeytoLastNotePlayedmode,inwhichthelastnote playedinthezonewillsetthekey.Forexample,youcouldsetthezonebeingusedforShiftKey NumbertohaveaKeyRangethatcoversonlyafewofthekeyboardslowestoctaves.This wouldallowyoutoplayrootnotebasslinesthatchangethekeythatShiftKeyNumberplaysin, leavingtheupperoctavesofthekeyboardopenforusebyotherzones. IfShiftKeyissettoLastNotePlayedandnonoteisplayed,thedefaultkeyisC.Eachzonecan haveadifferentShiftKey,soyoucanhavezonespreprogrammedwiththekeysyouwantto use,orhavethemallinthesamekey,orjustchangethekeyinrealtimewhileyouareplaying.

7-27

Setup Mode Controllers

ANoteAboutOctaveRange: WhenusingShiftKeyNumber,shiftpatternswithmorethan12stepsbegintriggeringnotesin higheroctaves.Thisisdonebecauselongershiftpatternsuseupmoreofacontrollersrange, andlimitthenumberofoctavesthatasinglecontrollercantrigger.Sincethelowestoctaveofa programisoftentoolowtobemusicallyuseful,thePC3willautomaticallystarttriggeringnotes fromlongershiftpatternsinhigheroctaves.Thissavesroominthecontrollersrangeofvalues fortriggeringmoreusefuloctaves.SeethetablebelowforShiftPatternsteprangesandtheir correspondingstartingoctave. Default Octave Shifting Total # of Shift Pattern Steps
1-12 13-24 25-36 37-48

Starting Octave
C0-C1 C1-C2 C2-C3 C3-C4

SelectingTheDesiredOctaveRange: Youadjustthestartingoctavemanually,usingtheAddparameteronthecorresponding controllerssetuppage.IntheAddfield,theadditionorsubtractionofthenumberofstepsin yourcurrentshiftpatternwillraiseorlowerthestartingoctaveinrelationshiptothedefault startingoctave.Forexample,inashiftpatternwith3steps,anAddvalueof9wouldcausea controllervalueof0tomakeShiftKeyNumbertriggernotesinoctaveC3C4,3octavesabove thedefaultC0C1.Addvaluesthatarenotmultiplesofthenumberofcurrentshiftpatternsteps willchangewhichstepthepatternbeginsonatcontrollervalue0,thusoffsettingthe relationshipbetweenallofthecontrollersvaluesandcurrentshiftpatternssteps. AdjustingControllerRange: WhenusingShiftKeyNumber,thenumberofstepsintheShiftPatternalsoaffectstherangeof valuesthatwillcauseacontrollertotriggerashiftpatternstep,andinturnaffecttheuseful rangeofthephysicalcontroller.Withashiftpatternof12notes,the128differentnotesthatthe PC3cantriggerareevenlyspacedovertherangeofthecontroller.Patternswithlessthan12 stepswilltriggernotesineveryoctaveoverashorterrangeofthecontroller.Forexample,ina shiftpatternwith3steps,bydefaultthecontrollervalues0to2willtriggernotesstartinginthe lowestpossibleoctave,andcontrollervalues27to30willtriggernotesinthehighestpossible fulloctave.Usingasliderforthiscontroller,onlyabout1/4thofthelengthofthesliderwouldbe triggeringnotes.Thisdecreasedusefulrangemakesthecontrollerhardertouseaccurately.To remedythis,youcanadjustacontrollersbehaviorbyusingtheScaleparameteronthe correspondingcontrollerssetuppage(seeScalebelow.)AdjusttheScalevaluetostretchthe usefulvaluesofthecontrolleracrossitswholephysicalrange.Ascalevalueoflessthan100% willbehelpfulforpatternswithfewerthan12steps.Experimentbyadjustingthescalevalue untilthehighestdesirednoteistriggeredatthetopofthecontrollersphysicalrange.SeeScale intheContinuousControllerParameterssectionofthischapterformoredetailsontheScale parameter.Forshiftpatternswithmorethan12steps,youwillrunoutofcontrollervalues beforeyourshiftpatterntriggersineveryoctave.Ifyouwanttobeabletoaccessallofthe availableoctaves,youcanachievethisbysettingmultiplecontrollerstoShiftKeyNumber. Next,usetheScaleandAddparametersforeachcontroller,adjustingeachtotriggerthedesired rangeofoctaves(seeAddbelow.)

7-28

Setup Mode Controllers

Continuous Controller Parameters

Thecontinuous(physical)controllersarethosethathavearangeofvalues:thetwowheels,the optionalribboncontroller,theninesliders,thetwoContinuousControlpedals,theoptional breathcontroller(thejackofwhichisconnectedtoCCpedal2),andmonopressure(aftertouch). Asthetableonpage 720shows,allofthemusethesameparameters.Eachparametersfunction isdescribedbelow. Dest UsethisparametertoselectadestinationfromtheMIDIControllerDestinationlist(see page 721). Scale Afteryouveselectedacontinuousphysicalcontroller,youcanmodifythecontrollersresponse similarlytothewaysyoucanmodifyvelocityresponse.Refertothegraphsbeginningon page 711forillustrationsofthevelocityscalingparameters. Scaleletsyouamplifyordiminishtheactionofthecontroller.Fullscaleis100%.Highervalues willmakethecontrollermoresensitive,andlowervalueswillmakeitlessso.Settingthescaleto anegativenumbermakesthecontrolleractionworkinreverse.Aswithvelocity,youcanusea controllertocrossfadebetweentwozonesbysettingthescalingforonezonepositiveandthe othernegative.Maximumscalevaluesare+300%and300%. Add Thisaddsorsubtractsaconstanttothecontroller,andatthesametimesetsminimumor maximumvalues(theresnoneedforseparateMaxandMinparameters).IfAddis25,the minimumvalueofthecontrollerwillbe25.Ifitis25(andscaleis100%)thefirstonefifthofthe controllersmovement(25/1271/5)willsendvalueof0,andthemaximumvalueofthe controllerwillbe102(=12725).Aswithvelocity,Scaleisaproportionalchangetothecontroller, whileOffsetisalinearchange.ThevaluesforOffsetrangefrom128to127. Curv Thisletsyoutaperthecontrollerresponse.ThedefaultsettingisLinear,whichmeansthatthe responsefollowsastraightlineasyoumovethecontroller. SettingCurvtoExpandproducesacurvethatislesssteepthanthelinearcurveatkeystrike velocitiesbelow64,andsteeperthanthelinearcurveatkeystrikevelocitiesabove64.Inother words,whenyoureplayingsoftly,youllnoticevelocitydifferenceslessthanwithalinear curve,whilewhenyoureplayinghard,youllnoticevelocitydifferencesmore. SettingCurvtoCompressproducesavelocitycurvethatistheoppositeoftheexpanded curvethatis,youllnoticevelocitydifferencesmorewhenyoureplayingsoftlythanwhen youreplayinghard. Youcanalsocreatereverseversionsofthethreedescribedcurves.First,selectyourdesired curve.ThensettheScaleparameterto100%,andsettheAddparameterto127.Thismakesthe selectedcontrollersendavalueof127whenallthewaydownandavalueof0whenalltheway up. Togetanideaofhowthesecurvesaffectcontrollerresponse,refertotheVelocityCurvecharts, whichbeginonpage 711.

7-29

Setup Mode Controllers

Entry (Ent) and Exit Values EntryvalueallowsyoutospecifyaninitialvalueforacontrollerinaSetupthatwillbesent wheneveryouselectthatSetup.Forexample,ifyouwanttomakesurethatallofthe modulationforthePrograminaZoneisturnedoffwhenyouselectaSetup,usetheSetup EditortoassignaphysicalcontrollertoadestinationofMIDI01(MWheel)andsetEntryValue to0.(TheModWheelisusuallyassignedtodestinationMIDI01MWheel,whichisusedto controlamodulationparameterformostPrograms.) Entryvaluesignorethecurrentpositionofthephysicalcontrollerwhenthesetupisselected.By default,oncetheSetupisloadedandtheentryvalueshavebeensent,movingacontrollerwill instantlysendnewcontrollervalues.Thiscancauseajumpinvaluesifthecontrollerhappensto besettoavaluefarfromitsentryvalue.Toavoidthesejumps,changetheSetupCtlsparameter inMasterModetoPassEntry(seeSetupControllers(SetupCtls) on page 112fordetails.)With SetupCtlssettoPassEntry,movingthecontrollerwillhavenoeffectuntilitmovespastitsentry value.Inthiscase,continuingthemodulationexampleabove,movingtheassignedcontroller wontturnonanymodulationuntilitspushedallthewaydown(passingentryvalue0,)and thenupagain. AnentryvalueofNoneisquitedifferentfromavalueof0.Nonemeansthattherewillbeno initialcontrollercommandwhenthesetupisselected,andanysubsequentmovementofthe physicalcontrollerwillbeeffective. ExitValuetellsthePC3tosendavalueforthatcontrollerwheneveryouleavethesetup,either byselectinganothersetuporbyselectingadifferentmodealtogether.Itcanbeveryusefulwhen acontrollerisdoingsomethingtothesound,andyoudontwantthateffecttocontinueafteryou leavethesetup.Forexample,ifyouwanttomakesureazonespitchreturnstonormal wheneveryouleaveasetup,youwouldsetExitValueto64foranycontrollerwhoseDestination parameterissettoPitchUp.Again,Nonemeansnocommandissent. Note:Programscanalsobesavedwithcontrollerentryvalues(ontheProgramEditor CONTROLLERSpage.)WhenaSetupisloaded,entryvaluesfortheProgramsintheSetupare sentfirst,followedbytheentryvaluesfortheSetup.Becauseofthis,ifaSetupandaProgram usedbyaSetuphaveentryvaluessetforthesamecontroller,theentryvaluefortheSetupwill beused.IfaProgramusedbyaSetuphasanentryvaluesetforacontroller,buttheSetuphasan entryvalueofNone forthesamecontroller,theentryvaluefromtheProgramisused.

Switch Controller Parameters

Switch(physical)controllershaveonlytwostates:onandoff.ThePC3switchcontrollersare: PanelSwitchesArpandSW FootswitchPedals1,2,and3 ProgrammableSwitches18(ProgramSelectbuttons18)

KeepinmindthefollowingtwothingswhenworkingwiththePC3sswitches.First,inSetup ModetheBankbuttonsabovetheslidersarededicatedtozonestatusandmuting,andarenot assignablecontrollers.(IfthesetupcontainsaKB3Program,theBankbuttonscanbeusedtocontrol KB3functions,seeMutes on page 766fordetails.)Second,inProgrammode,theProgrammable SwitchbuttonsfunctionasProgramSelectbuttonsifnoneofthemareassignedtoadestination inthecontrolsetup(seeControlSetup on page 69fordetails.)IfatleastoneProgrammableSwitch isassignedinthecontrolsetup,thentheassignedProgrammableSwitchbuttonsactasassigned, butnoneofthebuttonsfunctionasProgramSelectbuttons.

7-30

Setup Mode Controllers

Switch Type (Type) Theparametersforswitchcontrollersareslightlydifferentfromthoseforcontinuous controllers.ThefirstparameterisType.ThechoicesavailableareMomentaryinwhicha switchsactionlastsonlyaslongasyouarepushingit,andToggle,inwhichtheswitchsaction lastsuntilyoupressitagain. Momentarymodeisusedforfunctionslikesustainorportamento,whileTogglemodeisused forfunctionssuchasarpeggiatoron/off.Thebuttonsshowwhichmodetheyareinbythe behavioroftheirlights:ifabuttonisinMomentarymode,itslightglowsonlyaslongasyouare holdingit,whileifitisinTogglemode,thelightstaysonuntilyoupressitagain.Bearinmind thatbuttonassignmentsareindependentperzone,andsincetheresjustasinglelightper button,thelightshowsthestateofthebuttononlyforthecurrentzone.Whenyoupressthe button,however,itexecutesitsassignmentsforallzonesthatusethatbutton. On Control (OnControl) OnControldetermineswhatMIDIControllerorothermessagewillbesentwhentheswitchis onthatis,eitherpressedandheldortoggledfromtheoffposition.Thelistofavailable controllersonpage 721isthesameasforthecontinuouscontrollers,andcanbeaccessedthe sameway. Off Control (OffControl) OffControldetermineswhatMIDIControllerorothermessagewillbesentwhentheswitchis offthatis,eitherunpressedortoggledfromtheonposition.Thelistofavailablecontrollerson page 721isthesameasforthecontinuouscontrollers,andcanbeaccessedthesameway. OnValue OnValuesetsthevalueoftheControllerwhentheswitchison.Inthecaseofconventionally switchedfunctions,suchassustain,theOnValuewillbe127.(Forexample,thedefaultfor Footswitch1isController64SustainwithanOnValueof127.)However,youmightwant touseabuttonorpedalasasoftswitch,inwhichcaseyoumightsetOnControlto7(Volume) andOnValueto50,andOffControlto7andOffValueto127.OnControlandOffControlcanalso bothbesettoOff,sothatturningontheswitchhasnoeffectatallinthiszone.Thiscanbe usefulwhenyouareusingoneswitchformultiplefunctionsindifferentzones. OffValue OffValueisthevalueoftheControllerwhentheswitchisoff.Thedefaultvalueis0.Youmight wanttochangethis,asinthesoftswitchexampleabove:inordertobringthezoneuptofull volumewhenyoureleasethepedal,setOffValueto127. Entry (Ent) and Exit States EntryStatedetermineswhetheraninitialsettingfortheswitchwillbesentwhenthesetupis selected.Therearethreechoices:None(nochange),Off(theOffvalue),andOn(theOnvalue). WithaPanelSwitchbutton,iftheEntryStateisOn,thebuttonwilllightassoonasyouselect thesetup. ExitStatesimilarlydetermineswhetherasettingfortheswitchwillbesentwhenyouleavethe setup,eitherforanothersetuporforProgrammode.Thesamethreechoices(On,Off,and None)areavailable.Thisisveryusefulforturningoffsustainswhenchangingsetups.

7-31

Setup Mode The WHEEL Page

The WHEEL Page

Thetwowheelsaretypicalofwhatisfoundonmanykeyboards.Theleftoneisnormallyused forpitchbendandspringsbacktocenter,whiletherightwheelisnormallyusedasastandard ModWheel.OntheWheelpageintheSetupeditor,thepitchwheelhastwoparametersone forpushingthepitchwheelupandoneforpushingitdownwhereasthemodwheelhasone. TheWHEELpageparametersaredescribedinContinuousControllerParameters on page 729.

Parameter Destination (PWUp) Destination (PWDn) Destination (MWhl) Scale Add Curve Entry Value Exit Value

Range of Values Control Destination List Control Destination List Control Destination List 300% -128 to 127 Linear, Compress, Expand None, 0 to 127 None, 0 to 127

Default PitchUp PitchDwn MWheel 100% 0 Linear None None

7-32

Setup Mode The SLIDER and SLID2 Pages

The SLIDER and SLID2 Pages

YoucanassigneachofthePC3snineprogrammablesliderstoadestinationoneachofthe16 zones.Or,youcanassignanycombinationofsliderstothesamezone,allowingyou tremendousflexibility.Forexample,youcanassignSlidersAandBtomodulatepitchand volumeonZone1,thenassignSliderCtocontrolpanningonZones2,3,and10. TheSLIDERsoftbuttongivesyouaccesstoSlidersAE.PresstheSLID2softbuttontoprogram Sliders FI.TheSLIDERpageparametersaredescribedinContinuousController Parameters on page 729.

Parameter Destination (Slider A) Destination (Slider B) Destination (Slider C) Destination (Slider D) Destination (Slider E) Destination (Slider F) Destination (Slider G) Destination (Slider H) Destination (Slider I) Scale Add Curve Entry Value Exit Value

Range of Values Control Destination List Control Destination List Control Destination List Control Destination List Control Destination List Control Destination List Control Destination List Control Destination List Control Destination List 300% -128 to +127 Linear, Compress, Expand None, 0 to 127 None, 0 to 127

Default Data MIDI 13 MIDI 22 MIDI 23 MIDI 24 MIDI 25 MIDI 26 MIDI 27 MIDI 28 100% 0 Linear None None

7-33

Setup Mode The Continuous Control Pedal (CPEDAL) Page

The Continuous Control Pedal (CPEDAL) Page

Ifyoulookatthebackoftheinstrument,youwillseethattherearetwojacksforpluggingin twoCC(ContinuousControl)pedalsandajacklabeledBreathController.Likethenine programmablesliders,youcanassignthesecontrollersoneachofthe16zones,oryoucan assignanycombinationofthesecontrollerstothesamezone. TheCPEDALpageparametersaredescribedinContinuousControllerParameters on page 729.

Parameter Destination (CPed1) Destination (CPed2) Destination (Breath) Scale Add Curve Entry Value Exit Value

Range of Values Control Destination List Control Destination List Control Destination List 300% -128 to +127 Linear, Compress, Expand None, 0 to 127 None, 0 to 127

Default Express Foot Breath 100% 0 Linear None None

7-34

Setup Mode The Pressure (PRESS) Page

The Pressure (PRESS) Page

ThePC3featuresmonopressure,commonlycalledaftertouchonotherkeyboards. Awordaboutpressure:KeyRangeinazonedoesnotdefinewhichnoteswillgeneratepressure inthatzone.Ifpressureisenabledinazone,playingwithaftertouchanywhereonthekeyboard willproducedata.Forexample,ifZone1sKeyRangeisC3C5andyouplayC2andpush downonthenote,pressuremessageswillbesentfromZone1.Aswithanyotherphysical controller,however,youcandisablepressureinanyzone,orscaleitoroffsetitdifferentlyinthe variouszones.Itmighthelptothinkofpressureasanextrawheelwheelsoperateinazone regardlessofKeyRange,andsodoespressure. ThePRESSpageparametersaredescribedinContinuousControllerParameters on page 729. Note:MIDIpressuregeneratedonthePC3keyboardisfirstaffectedbyanyPressureScale,Offset,and CurvesettingsmadeoneachzonesPRESSUREpage.Theresultingpressurevaluesarethenaffectedby anyPressMapsettingsmadeontheMasterModeMAPSpage(seepage 116.)Also,MIDIpressure messagessenttotheUSBorMIDIoutportarefirstaffectedasexplainedabove,andthenaffectedby settingsontheMIDImodeTransmitpage(seepage 101.)Oneachofthepagesmentionedabove,lookat theMIDIsignalflowcharttoseewhichpressuremapscanaffectyourvelocitiesdependingonwhich MIDISources,MIDIDestinationsandoperatingmodethatyouareusing.

Parameter Destination Scale Add Curve Entry Value Exit Value

Range of Values Control Destination List 300% -128 to +127 Linear, Compress, Expand None, 0 to 127 None, 0 to 127

Default MPress 100% 0 Linear None None

7-35

Setup Mode The Footswitch Pages (FT SW1, FT SW2, FT SW3)

The Footswitch Pages (FT SW1, FT SW2, FT SW3)

Onthebackoftheinstrument,therearethreejacksforFootswitchpedals. TherearethreeFootswitchpages,oneforeachFootswitch.Therangeofvaluesfortheir respectiveDestinationparametersistheControlDestinationlist. TheFTSWpageparametersaredescribedinSwitchControllerParameters on page 730.

Parameter Type On Control On Value Off Control Off Value Entry State Exit State

Range of Values Momentary, Toggle Control Destination List None, 0 to 127 Control Destination List None, 0 to 127 None, Off, On None, Off, On

Default Momentary Ft Sw1: Sustain Ft Sw2: Sostenut Ft Sw3: Soft 127 Ft Sw1: Sustain Ft Sw2: Sostenut Ft Sw3: Soft 0 None None

7-36

Setup Mode The Arpeggiator Switch (ARP SW) Page

The Arpeggiator Switch (ARP SW) Page

ThePC3keyboardofferstwoPanelswitches,locatedabovethepitchandmodwheels.Theleft switchistheArp(shortforarpeggiator)button.Bydefault,theArpswitchfunctionsasthe arpeggiatorswitch,andtogglesonandoffthePC3arpeggiator,butyoucanassignthisswitchto anyController. SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 742forinformationonhowtoconfigurethePC3s arpeggiator. TheARPSWpageparametersaredescribedinSwitchControllerParameters on page 730.

Parameter Type On Control On Value Off Control Off Value Entry Value Exit Value

Range of Values Momentary, Toggled Control Destination List None, 0 to 127 Control Destination List None, 0 to 127 None, Off, On None, Off, On

Default Toggled ArpOn 127 ArpOff 0 None None

7-37

Setup Mode The SWITCH Page

The SWITCH Page

TherightPanelswitchistheSWbutton,locatedabovetheModwheel.Bydefault,thisswitchis assignedtoMIDI29,butyoucanassignthisswitchtoanyMIDIController. TheSWITCHpageparametersaredescribedinSwitchControllerParameters on page 730.

Parameter Type On Control On Value Off Control Off Value Entry Value Exit Value

Range of Values Momentary, Toggled Control Destination List None, 0 to 127 Control Destination List None, 0 to 127 None, Off, On None, Off, On

Default Toggled MIDI29 127 MIDI29 0 None None

7-38

Setup Mode The RIBBON Page

The RIBBON Page

Parameter Destination Scale Add Curve Entry Value Exit Value

Range of Values Control Destination List 300% -128 to +127 Linear, Compress, Expand None, 0 to 127 None, 0 to 127

Default MIDI21 100% 0 Linear None None

TheRIBBONpageletsyoudefinethecontrollerassignmentforthePC3soptionalribbon controller.Theribboncontrollersensesmovementwhenyoupressonitandmoveyourfinger leftorright;thiscreatesnumerouspossibilitiesforcontrollingpitch,volume,panning, crossfadesbetweenzones,oranyotherusesyoumightimagine. InProgrammodetheribboncontrolsanoctaveofpitchbendbydefault.Thisisbecausewhen usingthedefaultControlSetup126InternalVoices,theribbonissettothedestinationMIDI21, whichcontrolsAuxBend1(seeAuxBend1UpandAuxBend1Down on page 719fordetails.) Seepage 69formoreabouttheControlSetup. TheoptionalRibboncontrollercanbeusedasasinglelongcontroller,oritcanbedividedinto threeseparatesections,eachwithitsowncontrollerassignments(thisisdoneontheRIBCFG page,seebelow).Thetwosmallarrowsabovethestripindicatetheboundariesofthethree sections.Thelargearrowabovetheribbonpointstothecenteroftheribbon,forwhentheribbon isconfiguredinonesection. NotethattherearethreeassignableparametergroupsontheRIBBONpage.WhentheRibbonis settoactasasinglesectioncontroller,theonlyparametersthataffectitsbehaviorarethoseof Section1(Sect1).WhentheRibbonissettoactasathreesectioncontroller,eachparameter groupaffectsonlyitsrespectiveRibbonsection. Tomodifyotherribbonparameters,gototheTheRibbonConfiguration(RIBCFG)Page(seeThe RibbonConfiguration(RIBCFG)Pagebelowfordetails.) TheRIBBONpageparametersaredescribedinContinuousControllerParameters on page 729. Note:Whenusedasaonesectioncontroller,theribbonsendstwoMIDICCnumbers(MSBandLSBin theMIDIspec,)givingtheribbonaresolutionof768steps,insteadofthe128stepsthatoneMIDICC provides.Thisallowstheribbontohavefinercontrolofaparametercomparedtoothercontinuous controllers.Totakeadvantageofthis,assignthedestinationforSect1toaCCnumberbetween0and31, andtheribbonwilladditionallysendtoadestination32higherthanthesetdestination.Forexample, MIDI22wouldalsosendtothedestinationMIDI54.Inthiscase,ifyousetaProgramparametersource fieldtoMIDI22,theparameterwillautomaticallyalsouseMIDI54asasource,enablingthe768step

7-39

Setup Mode The Ribbon Configuration (RIBCFG) Page

resolutionwhenusingtheonesectionribbon.Theadditionalsourcethatisautomaticallyusedwillnotbe seenintheProgramEditor(thishappensbehindthescenes,)butbothCCnumberswillbesenttothe MIDIOutandUSBport.(Alsonote,MIDI32throughMIDI63arenotavailableintheProgram parametersourcefields,astheyarereservedforusingCCnumbers031asdescribedabove.)Whenthe ribbonisusedasaonesectioncontroller,ifaMIDICCabove63isusedasthedestinationforSect1,only oneCCnumberwillbesentandtheribbonwillhavearesolutionof128steps.Whentheribbonisusedas athreesectioncontroller,eachsectionwillonlysendoneCCnumberandeachsectionwillhavea resolutionof128steps.

The Ribbon Configuration (RIBCFG) Page

OnceyouveselectedadestinationfortheoptionalRibboncontroller,youcanusethe parametersontheRIBCFGpagetodefinehowtheribbonsrespondtofingerpositionand pressure.

Parameter Ribbon Configuration Position Mode Spring Center

Range of Values One Section, Three Sections Relative, Absolute On, Off 0 to 127

Default One Section Relative On 64

Ribbon Configuration
YoucanusetheRibbonasonecontroller,ordivideitupintothreesmallersections,eachwithits owncontrollerassignments.ChooseavalueofOneSectionorThreeSectionsfortheRibbon Configurationparameter.WithThreeSectionschosen,thepagechangessuchthatyoucan adjusttheparametersofeachsection:

7-40

Setup Mode The Ribbon Configuration (RIBCFG) Page

Position Mode (PosMode)

WhenyoutouchtheRibbon,thePC3respondsinoneoftwoways,dependingonthesettingof thePosModeparameter.RelativemeansthatwhereveryoutouchtheRibbonbecomesthezero pointforwhatevertheRibboniscontrolling;youwontnoticeanychangeinthesounduntil youslideyourfinger.Relativemodetendstobethemostnaturalforperformancejustwiggle yourfingeranywhereontheRibbontogetvibratoinmanyfactoryprogramsandsetups.You getthesameeffectnomatterwhereyoudothewiggling. AbsolutemeansthatthezeropointfortheRibbonisalwaysatexactlythesamephysical locationontheribbon.BydefaultthisisthecenteroftheRibbon,althoughyoucanusethe Centerparametertoputthezeropointelsewhere.InAbsolutemode,justtouchingtheRibbon affectsthesound(unlessyoutouchitatexactlythezeropoint).Everymovementyoumake alongtheRibbonsendscontrolvaluesbasedonhowfaryouarefromthezeropoint.

Spring
WhenSpringisOn,theControllertowhichyouveassignedtheRibbonspringsbacktoits zeropointautomaticallywhenyouliftyourfingerofftheribbon.Thisisgenerallythebehavior youwant. WhenSpringisOff,theControllertowhichyouveassignedtheRibbonsticksatitscurrent valuewhenyouliftyourfingerofftheRibbon.Whilethiscanbeuseful,youshouldbecareful withit.WhenSpringisOff,iftheRibbonisdoingsomethingwhenyouexitthesetup,itll continuedoingthatwhenyoureturntothesetup.Thiscanbegoodorbad.Ifyouwanttoset SpringtoOffinasetup,butwanttobesureoftheinitialsoundofthesetup,gototheRIBBON pageinthesetup,andforeachRibbonforwhichyouvesetSpringtoOff,settheentryvalue (Ent)parametertoavalueof0(orwhateveryoulike).

Center
ThisdefinesthezeropointfortheRibbon(orforeachsectionontheRibbon)thepointat whichtheControllertowhichtheRibbonisassignedhasnoeffectonthesound.Youcanchoose anypointbetween0and127.Avalueof64putsthezeropointinthephysicalcenterofthe Ribbon.Valuesof0and127placethezeropointatthesectionsextremeleftandextremeright. NotethatsettingtheSpringparametertoOffdisablestheCenterparameterforthatribbon. Thevalueyouchooseforthisparametercanhaveconsiderableeffect.Inmanyfactorysetups, forexample,theRibbonaffectspitch.Inthesesetups,changingthevalueoftheCenter parameterwouldtransposethesetup.

7-41

Setup Mode The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

EachzoneinasetuphasitsownArpeggiator.Whenactivated,eachArpeggiatortakesMIDI noteinputfromthePC3keyboard(orviaMIDI)andoutputsarhythmicpatternofMIDInotes. Youcancontrolthespeedandnatureofthepatterninrealtime.EachArpeggiatorcanaffect boththePC3andexternalMIDIinstruments.ThenotesproducedbytheArpeggiatorinagiven zonegotoallofthatzonesdestinations:local,MIDI,orboth.Youcanalsosetonezones arpeggiatortooverridearpeggiatorsonotherzonesusingtheArpeggiatorGlobal(ArpGlobal) parameteronSetupModesCOMMONpage. TheconceptbehindthePC3sArpeggiatorsisfairlysimple,althoughtheoptionsareextensive. YoumightthinkofeachArpeggiatorasanoteprocessor,generatingcomplexoutputfrom relativelymodestinput.Youcanselectanynumberofnotesfortheinput,andtellthe Arpeggiatortorecognizeandrememberthem.Thisiscalledlatchingthenotes.The Arpeggiatorthenprocessesthembyplayingthemrepeatedly,and/ortransposingthemupand downthekeyboard.Youhavecontroloverseveralprocessingparameters:velocity,order, duration,transposition,orchestration,whetherthenotesareplayedsimultaneously,and whethertheintervalsbetweennotesarefilledchromatically.YoucanalsotelltheArpeggiator howtodealwithnewinformationcomingfromthekeyboardwhentheArpeggiatorisalready processingnotes. Thearpeggiatoralsoincludesstepsequencersfornoteandvelocityshifting,allowingyouto morepreciselycontrolhowyourMIDInoteinputisprocessed.Setthearpeggiatorparameters ontheARPEGGIATORandARPEGGIATOR2pages:

The ARPEGGIATOR Page

Note:InProgramMode,simultaneouslypresstheArpandSWbuttons(abovetheWheels)toviewthe ArpeggiatorpagefortheContolSetup,whichcontrolsarpeggiatorsettingsinProgramMode(seeControl Setup on page 69fordetails.)

Parameter Active Beats Play Order

Range of Values On/Off 1/1 (Whole Notes) to 1/384 (96 notes per beat) Played, Upwards, Downwards, UpDown, UpDown Repeat, Random, Shuffle, Walking, Simultaneous 1% to 100%

Default Off 1/16 (16th Notes) Played

Duration

100%

7-42

Setup Mode The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

Parameter Velocity

Range of Values First, Played, Last, Aftertouch, MIDI 109, Fixed, Pattern (1-74 factory patterns, user created patterns,) Human1-4, Chimp1-4, MissNotes1-9 88 Semitones 0-60 Stop, Reset, Unipolar, Bipolar, Float Res, Float Uni, Float Bip Off, (1-69 factory patterns, user created patterns)

Default Played

ShiftAmount ShiftLimit Limit Option ShftPattrn (Shift Pattern)

0 24 Unipolar Off

Active ThefirstparameterontheArpeggiatormenuisActive,whichspecifieswhetherornotthe Arpeggiatorisonforthecurrentzone.Thisparametercanbeswitchedfromthe ARPEGGIATORpage,orforrealtimecontrol,itcanbeswitchedonusingControllernumber 147(ArpOn)andswitchedoffusingControllernumber148(ArpOff);theseControllerscan,of course,beassignedasthedestinationofaPC3physicalcontroller. TurningActiveonaffectszoneswhoseZoneArpegvaluesarealsosettoOn.Bysettingthe ZoneArpegparameter(ontheCH/PRGpage)toOfforOnintheindividualzonesofasetup, youcanchoosewhichzoneswillbecontrolledbytheArpeggiatorwhenitison. Beats TheBeatsparametersetsthenumberofnotesperbeat.Thetempoisbasedonquarternotes. Therefore,ifyousetitto1/4,youwillgetonenoteperbeatoftheclock.At1/16,youwillget 4 notesperbeat,andsoforth.Youcangoallthewayto96notesperbeat(1/384),butatmost tempos,divisionssmallerthan1/64willsoundprettymuchthesame.TofindaBeatsvalue, multiplythenotesyouwantperbeatby4.Forexample,4notesperbeat(16thnotes)wouldbe 4*4=16,aBeatsvalueof1/16.Threenotesperbeat(8thnotetriplets)wouldbe3*4=12,aBeats valueof1/12.Sixnotesperbeat(16thnotetriplets)wouldbe6*4=24,aBeatsvalueof1/24.Note thatwhenrecordingarpeggiationstoaPC3MIDItrack,youmustturnonrealtimequantization andsetittothesameGridvalueinorderfortheselectedBeatsvaluetosyncproperlywiththe tempogrid(seeQuantandGrid on page 1218.) Play Order ThisparameterdeterminestheorderinwhichthePC3playsarpeggiatednotes.Playedcauses themtoplaybackinthechronologicalorderinwhichyouplayedandlatchedthem.Upwards meansthatnotesplayinascendingpitchorder,regardlessoftheirchronologicalorder. Downwardsmeansdescendingpitchorder.UpDowncausesnotestoplayfromlowestpitchto highest,thenfromhighestpitchtolowest,repeatingthecycleuntilyoustopthearpeggiation. Thenotesattheverytopandverybottomonlyplayonce.UpDownRepeatissimilarto UpDown,exceptthatthenotesatthetopandbottomplaytwice(repeat)whentheArpeggiator reversesdirection. Randomplaysthecurrentlylatchednotesincompletelyrandomorder.Shuffleplaysthemat random,butkeepstrackofthenotessothatnonoterepeatsuntilalloftheothershaveplayed. Walkisarandomwalkorder:eachsuccessivenoteiseitherthenextorpreviousnote(in chronologicalorder).Forexample,supposeyouvelatchedfournotesG 4,B 4,D 5,andF 5 inthatorder.ThefirstnotetheArpeggiatorplaysistheG 4.ThesecondnotewillbeeitherB 4 (thenextnotechronologically),orF 5(thepreviousnotechronologicallythatis,thelast latchednote).IfthesecondnoteisB 4,thethirdnotewillbeeitherD 5orG 4.Ifthesecondnote isF 5,thethirdnotewillbeeitherG 4orD 5.

7-43

Setup Mode The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

SimultaneousmakestheArpeggiatorlatcheachnoteyouplayandrepeatitintimewiththe Tempovalue,sortoflikeadigitaldelaywithnodecay.IfyouplayaCandholditwhileyouplay anEandaG,theArpeggiatorwillplayallthreenotesatthesametimeandatthesametempo. SimultaneousalsoworkswellwithShiftandLimit,allowingyoutoshiftmultiplenotes simultaneously. Duration Durationdetermineshowlongeacharpeggiatednoteplays.100%meansthatanotesustains untilthenextonesoundsverylegato.50%meansthatthenotefillshalfthespacebetween itselfandthenextnote.Thelowestvalueis1%stacattissimo.Thisparameterhasnoeffecton percussionsoundsorothersoundswhosedurationisfixed. Velocity Velocitysetstheattackvelocityoftheplayednotes.WithVelocitysettoFirst,allnotesplayat thevelocityofthefirstplayednote.WithVelocitysettoPlayed,eachnoterepeatswiththesame velocityyouplayeditat.WithVelocitysettoLast,allnotesplayatthevelocityofthemost recentlyplayednote.WithVelocitysettoAftertouch,thevelocitiesarecontrolledbykeyboard pressure:asyouholdandpushdownonanykey,thevelocitiesgethigher,andasyoueaseup theygetlower. WithVelocitysettoMIDI109,MIDIcontroller109continuallysetsthearpeggiatorvelocity.This workswellwhenMIDIcontroller109issettoaknoborexpressionpedal. WithVelocitysettoFixed,allnotesplaywiththesamevelocity.ThedefaultFixedvelocityis 100.LikeMIDI109,Youcancontrolthisvelocityamountinrealtimebyassigningacontroller toVelFixed,controllerdestinationnumberis175.Inputfromanyphysicalcontrollerassignedto sendVelFixed(oranyentryvalueforacontrollerassignedtosendVelFixed)overridesthe programmedvalueoftheVelocityparameter,disablingituntilyouselectadifferentsetup(orin Programmode,untilyouselectadifferentcontrolsetupontheMIDImodeTRANSMITpage). Patternengagesastepsequencerforarpeggiatorvelocitypatterns,whichshiftsthevelocityof eacharpeggiatednoteaccordingtoasequencedpattern.Thereare74preprogramedvelocity patternsthatyoucanchoosefromtheVelPattfield,someofwhichcreaterhythmsbyusing velocityvaluesof127ornonetoleaverestsinthearpeggiation.Thesequencerusesthe velocityreceivedfromthefirstnoteplayedasthecenterpositiontoshiftvelocitiesupordown from.Ifnootherkeysareplaying,patternswillstartovereachtimeakeyispressed(thereare someexceptionstothiswhenusingARPEGGIATORLatchparametersotherthanKeys,thougha newlytriggeredpatternwillalwaysstartatstep1.)Whentriggeringvelocitypatternsfrommore thanonekeyatatime,eachconsecutivestepofthepatternshiftsthevelocityfromadifferent inputtedkey,theorderofwhichisdecidedbytheorderparameterontheARPEGGIATORpage. Note:Forpatternswithnegativevelocityvalues,ifthevelocityofthefirstplayednoteislowenoughthat apatternstepcouldresultinavelocityofzero,somenotesmayhaveavelocityofzeroandtherefore producenosound. YoucanedittheincludedpatternsbypressingEditwithapatternhighlightedintheVelPatt field(seeeditscreenbelow.)ThetoplineoftheEditVelocityPattpagedisplaysthepatterns nameandtotalnumberofsteps.Thispagealsoshowsthefullnameforapatternwhosename doesnotfitontheARPEGGIATORpage.Eachpatterncanhaveupto48steps,andeachstep canshiftvelocitiesby127steps.Youcaninsertastepwithavalueofnonebyentering127 andthenshiftingdownonemorestep.Astepwiththevaluenonecausesthearpeggiatorto playnothingforthatstep,allowingyoutocreaterhythmicpatternsbyusingnonetoleave spaces.PressingStepremovesthelaststepinthelist,pressingStep+insertsanewvelocitystep attheendofthelist(thepatterneditorremembersthevaluesofremovedstepsuntilyousaveor exit.)Usethecursortomovebetweenpatternsteps,usethealphawheel,alphanumericpad,or plus/minusbuttonstoenterthevelocityshiftamountforeachstep.PressMoretoseeasecond pageforpatternswithmorethan24steps.

7-44

Setup Mode The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

PressDeletetodeletethepatternfrommemory.PressRenametorenamethepatternandsave. PressingSavegivesyoutheoptiontosavethepatternorrenameandsave.Tocreateanew VelPatt,editanexistingpatternandchooseRenamewhensaving.PressExittoreturntothe ARPEGGIATORpage.Whenexitingtheeditor,itwillautomaticallygiveyoutheoptiontosave thepatternifchangeshavebeenmade.Formoredetailedinstructionsonthesefunctions,see SavingandNaming on page 53.

TheHuman1throughHuman4settingsrandomlychangeplayednotevelocitywithinarangein ordertomakearpeggiationsoundmorehumanlike,witheachnotevaryingslightlyinvelocity. TheHumansettingsusethevelocityreceivedfromthefirstnoteplayedasthecenterofthe randomizationrange.Eachnoteofthearpeggiatorwillrandomlychooseavelocitywithinthe givenrange.(Seethetablebelowforvelocityranges.) TheChimp1throughChimp4settingsfunctioninasimilarfashiontotheHumansettings(see above.)LiketheHumansettings,theChimpsettingsrandomlychangeplayednotevelocity withinarange,buttheChimpsettingshavelargerrandomizationranges.TheChimpsettings usethevelocityreceivedfromthefirstnoteplayedasthecenteroftherandomizationrange. Eachnoteofthearpeggiatorwillrandomlychooseavelocitywithinthegivenrange.(Seethe tablebelowforvelocityranges.) Note:ForHumanandChimpmodes,ifthevelocityofthefirstplayednoteislowenoughthattheselected randomizationrangecouldresultinavelocityofzero,somenotesmayhaveavelocityofzeroandtherefore producenosound. Velocity Setting
Human1 Human2 Human3 Human4 Chimp1 Chimp2 Chimp3 Chimp4

Velocity Randomization Range

3 6 10 15 25 35 50 64

MissNotes1throughMissNotes9makesthePC3randomlymissplayingapercentageof inputtednotes.Seethetablebelowforpercentagesandtheirequivalentsettings.Eachofthese settingsalsorandomlychangessomeoftheinputtedvelocitiesinarangeof5,withthe purposeofsimulatingamorehumanplayedsound.

7-45

Setup Mode The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

Note:MissedNotesareactuallyoutputasnoteswithavelocityofzero. Velocity Setting

MissNotes1 MissNotes2 MissNotes3 MissNotes4 MissNotes5 MissNotes6 MissNotes7 MissNotes8 MissNotes9

Approximate % of Notes Missed

% 10 % 20 % 30 % 40 % 50 % 60 % 70 % 80 % 90

Shift Amount YoucantelltheArpeggiatortotransposeallofthecurrentlylatchednoteseachtimeitplays throughthem.ShiftAmountdetermineshowmuchtranspositionwilloccurforeachcycleof notes.Forexample,ifyouhavelatchedC4andF4,andyouassignaShiftAmountof2,the ArpeggiatorwillplayC4,F4,D4,G4,E4,A4,andsoonuntilitreachestheLimitvalue.TheShift Amountvaluescanrangefrom88to88,with0(thedefault)beingnotransposition. Shift Limit LimitdetermineshowfarupordowntheArpeggiatorshiftsfromtheoriginalnote.The minimumvalueis0,andthemaximumis60.WhentheArpeggiatorreachesthelimit,the ArpeggiatorrespondsaccordingtothesettingfortheLimitOptionparameter. Limit Option ThisparameterdetermineswhattheArpeggiatordoeswhenithasshiftedthecurrentlylatched notesup(ordown)totheshiftlimit.StopcausestheArpeggiatortostopwhenitreachesthe shiftlimit.ResetcausestheArpeggiatortoreturntoitsoriginalpitchandrepeatthelatched cycleofnotes,transposingeachcycleaccordingtothesettingsforShiftAmountandShiftLimit. IfthelimitallowsthenotestogooutofMIDIrange(forexample,ifyousetShiftto12,setthe limitto60,andplayC6),thenthoseghostnotesdontsound,buttheytakeuprhythmicspace: theArpeggiatorwaitsforthecycletoplayitselfoutbeforestartingover. Unipolarmeansthatafterplayinguptotheshiftlimit,theArpeggiatorbeginsshiftingnotesin theoppositedirection,untilitreachestheoriginalpitch,whereitreversesagain.Todetermine thenextnotewhenitreachestheshiftlimit,theArpeggiatorcalculatestheintervalbetweenthe shiftlimitandwhatthenextnotewouldbeiftheshiftlimitwerentthere.Itthenplaysthenote thatisthecalculatedintervallowerthanthelastnotebeforetheshiftlimit.Thesamething happensinreversewhenthearpeggiatednotesgetbackdowntotheoriginalpitch.The followingtablemakesthiseasiertovisualizebyshowingtheresultofarpeggiatingonenote (C4)inUnipolarmode,withShiftAmountsetto3STandvariousvaluesforShiftLimit.

Resulting Arpeggiation (When LimitOption is Unipolar) Shift Limit Up 6 ST (F#4) C4, D#4, F#4, Down D#4, C4 Up D#4, Same notes play in both directions when Shift Limit is a multiple of Shift Amount Comment

7-46

Setup Mode The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

Resulting Arpeggiation (When LimitOption is Unipolar) Shift Limit Up Down Up Last upward note before shift limit is F#4, next upward note would be A4, which is 2 ST from shift limit (G4); therefore first downward note is E4 (2 ST below last upward note) A4 is 1 ST from shift limit, therefore first downward note is F4 (1 ST lower than last upward note) All symmetrical again; now A4 is within shift limit Next upward note would be C5, which is 2 ST from shift limit C5 is 1 ST from shift limit Symmetrical again, including C5 Comment

7 ST (G4)

C4, D#4, F#4,

E4, C#4,

D#4,

8 ST (G#4) 9 ST (A4) 10 ST (A#4) 11 ST (B4) 12 ST (C5)

C4, D#4, F#4, C4, D#4, F#4, A4 C4, D#4, F#4, A4, C4, D#4, F#4, A4, C4, D 4, F 4, A4, C5,
# #

F4, D4, F#4, D#4, C4, G4, E4, C#4, G#4, F4, D4, A4, F 4, D 4, C4,
# #

D#4, D#4, D#4, D#4, D#4,

BipolarstartsoutthesamewayasUnipolar,butduringdownwardnoteshifting,itcontinues pasttheoriginalpitchuntilithitstheshiftlimitintheoppositedirection,whereitreversesagain. FloatResaddsabitofapparentrandomnesstotheprocess.Floatmeansthatwhenthe Arpeggiatorreachestheshiftlimit,itresetsbutnottoitsoriginalpitchaswithplainReset. LikeUnipolarandBipolar,itlooksatthefirstnotethatwouldexceedtheshiftlimit,and calculatestheintervalbetweenthatnoteandtheshiftlimit.Itthenrestartsthecycleoflatched notes,transposingtheentirecyclebytheintervalitjustcalculated,thenshiftingeach subsequentcyclebythevalueofShiftAmount,untilitreachestheshiftlimitagain. Heresaverysimpleexample.SupposethattheonlynoteintheArpeggiatorcycleis C4,Shift Amountis 4(athird),andShiftLimitis 7(sonoteswontgetshiftedaboveG4).TheArpeggiator playsC4,thenE4.ThenextnoteshouldbeG#4,butthatsabovetheshiftlimitsothePC3 calculatesthedifferencebetweenthatG#4andtheshiftlimit(G4):onesemitone.Itaddsthat differencetotheoriginalstartingnote(C4)andplaysthatnotenextC#4.Thenextnote(F4)is withintheshiftlimit,butthenextnote(A4)isnt,soitgetstranslatedintoD4andsoon. FloatUniusesthesameconceptandappliesittoUnipolarmode:whentheArpeggiatorreaches theshiftlimit,itcalculatesthedifferencebetweenthenextnoteandthelimit,andtransposesthe nextcycleofnotesdownbythatinterval,thenshiftseachsubsequentcycledownuntilitreaches theoriginalpitch.FloatBipissimilartoFloatUni,butthedownwardshiftlimitisntthe originalpitch,itsthenegativeoftheShiftLimitvalue. TheArpeggiatorcanbealotoffun,evenifyoudontalwaysunderstandexactlywhatitsdoing. Keepinmindthatthestrangerthealgorithmyousetup,themoreunlikelythenoteswillstay closetoonekey,soifyouwanttocreatesomethingthatsgoingtosoundatalldiatonic,keepit simple. Shift Pattern (ShiftPatt) ShiftPattengagesastepsequencerforarpeggiatornotepatterns.Theinputtednotenumberof eachplayedkeyisshiftedaccordingtoasequencedpattern,thusShiftPattern.ThePC3has preprogramedshiftpatternsincludingmanyusefulchords,intervals,andrhythms.Youcan alsocreateyourowncustomshiftpatterns(seebelowfordetails.)Eachpatterncanhaveupto48

7-47

Setup Mode The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

steps,andeachstepcanshiftnotesby127halfstepsorplaynothing.Stepsareplayedbackat theratesetforBeatsontheARPEGGIATORpage.KeepinmindthatShiftPatternsareeffected byeveryparameterontheARPEGGIATORpage,whichcanbethecauseofunexpected variation,orawaytoaddinterestingvariationtoapattern. ShiftPatternsaremosteasilyusedandunderstoodwhentriggeredbyonlyonekeyatatime. OnewaytopreventtriggeringfrommultiplekeysistouseoneoftheLatchtypes1NoteAuto, 1NoteAutoLow,or1NoteAutoHiwhenusingashiftpattern(seeLatch on page 749,below.) Triggeringshiftpatternsfromonekeyallowsthepreprogramedpatternstosoundlikewhat youwouldexpectfromtheirnames.Ifnootherkeysareplaying,patternswillstartovereach timeakeyispressed(therearesomeexceptionstothiswhenusingARPEGGIATORLatchparameters otherthanKeys,thoughanewlytriggeredpatternwillalwaysstartatstep1.)WhentriggeringShift Patternsfrommorethanonekeyatatime,eachconsecutivestepofthepatternshiftsthenote fromadifferentinputtedkey,theorderofwhichisdecidedbytheorderparameteronthe ARPEGGIATORpage.Thismeansthateachkeywillnotbeshiftedbyeverystepofthepattern, causingyoutoonlyhearpartofthepatternfromeachkey,oftenmakingthepattern unrecognizable.ThoughtriggeringaShiftpatternfrommultiplekeyscanbeusedcreatively,it canalsomakeithardtopredictwhattheoutputwillbe. YoucanedittheincludedpatternsbypressingEditwithapatternhighlightedintheShiftPatt field(seeeditscreenbelow.)ThetoplineoftheEditShiftPattpageshowsthefullnamefora patternwhosenamedoesnotfitontheARPEGGIATORpage.Thispagealsodisplaysthe patternstotalnumberofsteps,aswellaspatterndirection.PressingStepremovesthelaststep inthelist,pressingStep+insertsanewnotestepattheendofthelist(thepatterneditor remembersthevaluesofremovedstepsuntilyousaveorexit.)Usethecursortomovebetween patternsteps,usethealphawheel,alphanumericpad,orplus/minusbuttonstoenterthenote shiftamountforeachstep.PressMoretoseeasecondpageforpatternswithmorethan24steps. Youcaninsertastepwithavalueofnonebyentering127andthenshiftingdownonemore step.Astepwiththevaluenonecausesthearpeggiatortoplaynothingforthatstep,allowing youtocreaterhythmicpatternsbyusingnonetoleavespaces.Whenthearpeggiator determinestherangeofpatternnotesplayedwiththeLimitparameter(seebelow,)stepswitha valueofnonewillbecalculatedasastepvalueof0. Usethechanup/downbuttonstochangethedirectioninwhichpatternstepsareplayed (indicatedbyUp,Down,orFlatontherightofthetopline.)WithpatterndirectionsettoUp, thepatternplaysasexpected,startingatsteponeandmovingupthrougheachsteptowards step48.WithpatterndirectionsettoDown,thepatternstartsatstepone,butthenmovestothe laststepandcontinuestomovebackwardsthroughthestepsdowntowardsstep1. Additionally,patternssettoDownbaseallnotesaftersteponeintheoctavebelowthefirstnote played.Thesesettingsaremostusefulforarpeggiatingchordpatternsupwardsordownwards fromtherootnote.PatternssettoFlatwillnotrepeatinotheroctaveslikethosesettoUpor Down(dependingontheLimitparameter.)PatternssettoFlatplaywithouttransposition,the Limitparameterwillnottransposethepatternbutitcanstillrestrictnoterange.

7-48

Setup Mode The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

PressDeletetodeletethepatternfrommemory.PressRenametorenamethepatternandsave. PressingSavegivesyoutheoptiontosavethepatternorrenameandsave.Tocreateanew ShiftPatt,editanexistingpatternandchooseRenamewhensaving.PressExittoreturntothe ARPEGGIATORpage.Whenexitingtheeditor,itwillautomaticallygiveyoutheoptiontosave thepatternifchangeshavebeenmade.Formoredetailedinstructionsonthesefunctions,see SavingandNaming on page 53.

The ARPEGGIATOR 2 Page

Parameter Latch Low Key High Key Glissando SyncTo SyncType Num Beats

Range of Values Keys, Overplay, Arpeg, Add, Auto, Pedals, Autohold, 1NoteAuto C -1 to G9 C -1 to G9 Off, On First Avail., Riff1-16, Main Seq., Arp1-16, FirstRiff.Av., FirstArp.Av., None, DownBeat, AnyBeat, DownBeatWait, AnyBeatWait 1-32

Default Keys C -1 G9 Off First Avail. None 4

Latch LatchdetermineshowtheArpeggiatorrespondstonoteswhentheyaretriggered. KeysmeansthattheArpeggiatorplaysonlywhileyouareholdingoneormorekeysdown(or notetriggerson).Asyouplaydifferentnotes,theygetaddedtotheArpeggiator,andasyou releasenotes,theygettakenout.IfyouplaynotesfasterthantheArpeggiatorscurrenttempo, eachsubsequentnotewillbeaddedtothearpeggiationatthenextdivisionofabeat.Thiscan causealagbetweenthetimeyouplaythenoteandthetimeyouhearitinthearpeggiation. Inthenextthreemodes,theArpeggiatorlatchesnotesonlywhenMIDIController157(Latch) sendsavalueofOn(64orhigher).Aneasywaytoexperimentwiththesemodesistoassignthe ModWheeltosendMIDI157. InOverplaymode,theArpeggiatorlatchesanynotesthatarebeingheldwhenLatchturnson, andcontinuesplayingthem,evenafteryouletthemgo,untilLatchturnsoff.Anynotesthatyou playafterLatchisalreadyondonotgetarpeggiated,eveniftheyreinthearpeggiationrange.

7-49

Setup Mode The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

Arpegissimilar:anynotesheldwhenLatchgoesonarelatchedandarpeggiated,andkeep goinguntilLatchgoesoff.Anynotesyouplayoutsidethearpeggiationrangeplaynormally. Notesthatyouplayinsidethearpeggiationrangedonotplaynormally;rather,ifyouholdthem on,theybecomepartofthearpeggiation.Theydropoutofthearpeggiationassoonasyou releasethem. LikeOverplayandArpeggiation,AddmeansthatallnotesbeingheldwhenLatchgoesonget latched,andkeepplayinguntilLatchgoesoff(evenifyouvereleasedthenotes).Anynotesyou playafterLatchisalreadyonalsogetlatched. AutoisindependentofLatch;everynoteyouplayisautomaticallylatched,andtheArpeggiator runsaslongasyouholdatleastonearpeggiatednote.Aslongasyoukeepholdingonatleast onenote(itdoesnthavetobethesamenotethewholetime),everynoteyouplayinthe arpeggiationrangegetslatched. PedalsissortofacombinationofKeys,Add,andOverplaymodes.ItreliesonbothLatch(MIDI 157)andLatch2(MIDI158).Ifneitherlatchcontrollerison,noteswillarpeggiateonlywhileyou areholdingdownkeys(similartoKeysmode).IfyouactivateController158,thekeyscurrently helddownwilllatch,andanyadditionalkeysplayedwhileController158isonwillalsolatch (similartoAddmode).WhenController158isoff,anykeysthatarenotcurrentlyhelddown willberemovedfromthearpeggiation.IfyouactivateController157,keyscurrentlyhelddown willlatch,andanyadditionalkeysplayedwhileController157isonwillplaynormally(similar toOverplaymode).ThismodeiscalledPedalsmodebecauseyoumightwanttoassign Footswitch1toLatch(Controller157)andFootswitch2toLatch2(Controller158)tomakethe pedalsfunctionsimilarlytosustainandsostenutopedals.Additionally,youcouldassignone FootswitchtoSusLatch(Controller160)doingthismakestheFootswitchactasasustainpedal whenArpisoff,andasaLatchpedalwhenArpison. AutoholdissimilartoAuto.Holdingatleastonearpeggiatednoteonandplayingothernotes latchesthosenotes.UnlikeinAutomode,ifyoustopholdingatleastonearpeggiatednoteon, thearpeggiationcontinuesplaying(althoughyoucantlatchanymorenotes).Inthiscase,ifyou strikeanotherkeywithinthesetupsarpeggiationrange,youstartanewarpeggiationsequence. Autoholdisusefulforarpeggiatingchords:whenyouplayachord,itgetslatched,and continuesarpeggiatingafteryoureleasethechord.Whenyouplayanotherchord,theprevious chordgetsunlatched,andthenewonegetslatched.YoucanusethePanicsoftbuttontostop arpeggiationatanytime. 1NoteAutoissimilartoAutohold,exceptonlythelastnoteplayedislatched(evenifpreviously playednotesarestillbeingheld.)1NoteAutoisspecificallydesignedforusewithShiftPatterns (seeabove,)becauseShiftPatternsaredesignedtobeplayedfromonenoteatatime(though youcanuse1NoteAutowithoutaShiftPatternaswell.)Using1NoteAutoforzonesthatusea ShiftPatternensuresthatShiftPatternswillsoundcorrectbyonlyallowingonenoteatatimeto triggerthepattern.YoucanusethePanicsoftbuttontostoparpeggiationatanytime. 1NoteAutoLowand1NoteAutoHiarealsodesignedforusewithShiftPatterns.Theywork similarlyto1NoteAuto,except1NoteAutoLowalwayslatchesthelowestnotewhenholding multiplenotes,and1NoteAutoHialwayslatchesthehighestnotewhenholdingmultiplenotes. YoucanalsousetheselatchtypeswithoutaShiftPatternifdesired. Low Key (LoKey) and High Key (HiKey) TheArpeggiatorprocessesnoteswithintherangeoftheseparameters.Notesoutsidethe specifiedrangeplaynormally,anddonotbecomepartofthearpeggiationsequence.Setthe LoKeyandHiKeyparametersusingthedataentrywheelorbuttons. Glissando WhentheGlissandoparameterisOn,theArpeggiatorchromaticallyfillsbetweenlatchednotes. WhenGlissandoison,theArpeggiatorignorestheShiftAmount,ShiftLimit,andLimitOption parameters.

7-50

Setup Mode The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

Youmustlatchatleasttwonotestogetaresult.WhenGlissandoison,allnotesplayedinthe arpeggiationrangegetlatched,althoughyouwontnecessarilygetmeaningfulresultsfromall latchednotes.Ingeneral,trytogeteachsubsequentnoteyoulatchtobeachangeindirection. Forexample,trylatchingthefollowingsequenceofnotes:C4,C5,G4,G5,C5,C6,G4,G5.The glissandochangesdirectionaroundeachchangeindirectionofthelatchednotes. SyncTo TheSyncToparameterdetermineswhatanarpeggiatorwillsyncto.Anarpeggiatorcansyncto anotherarpeggiator,ariff,orasongplayingfromSongmode.Youcanchooseaspecific arpeggiatororrifftosynctobysettingSyncTotoArp116orRiff116,andthecurrent arpeggiatorwillalwayssynctothatarpeggiatororriff.Forexample,ifyouhaveanarpeggiator onabasssoundinzone1andanarpeggiatoronaleadsoundinzone2,youmayalwayswant theleadarpeggiationinzone2tosynctothebassarpeggiationinzone1.Inthiscaseyouwould settheSyncToparameterinzone2toArp1. Youmaywanttohavealittlemorefreedomandnotbetiedtothebassarpeggiationinzone1as themaintimekeeper.Maybeyouwanttostartwiththeleadarpeggiationinzone2andhave thebassarpeggiationinzone1startlater.InthiscaseyouwouldsettheSyncToparameterfor zone2toFirstArp.Av.Withthissetting,thearpeggiatorwilllookforthefirstavailable arpeggiatortosyncto.Soifboththebassarpeggiationandtheleadarpeggiationhavethis parametersettoFirstArp.Av.,thearpeggiationthatisstartedfirstwillbethemain timekeeper.Iftheleadarpeggiatorstartsfirst,thebassarpeggiatorwillseethatasthefirst availablearpeggiatortosynctoandwilldoso.Ifthebassarpeggiatorisstartedfirst,thelead arpeggiatorwillseethatasthefirstavailablearpeggiatortosynctoandwilldoso.Thiscanbe veryhandyifyouareusingmultiplearpeggiatorsandwanttodosomeliveimprovisation;you canstartandstopdifferentarpeggiatorsandaslongisthereisonearpeggiatorplaying,any arpeggiatorwithSyncTosettoFirstArp.Av.willsyncbackupwhentriggeredagain. YoucanalsochooseFirstRiff.Av.,whichbehavesthesamewayasFirstArp.Av.,butmakesyour arpeggiatorlookforthefirstavailablerifftosyncto.AsettingofMainSeq.willsyncthe arpeggiatortothesongcurrentlyloadedinSongmode.YoucanselectasonginSongmode, thenplayitfromsetupmodewiththefrontpanelPlay/Pausebutton.(Doingthistemporarily replacestheprogramsinyoursetupszoneswiththeprogramusedforeachchannelinthesong,soits besttomakeasetupthatusesthesameprogramsasyoursongonthesameMIDIchannels.Ifyouplanon syncingriffswithasong,itmaybeeasiertostartbycreatingasetup,thenrecordingthesetupintoa song.SeeRecordingASetupToSongMode on page 769fordetails.)AsettingofFirstAvail.will syncthearpeggiatortothefirstavailablearpeggiator,riff,orsongfromSongmode. Note:IfyouhavemultiplearpeggiatorsorriffsalreadyplayingwhenusingFirstArp.Av.,FirstRiff.Av., orFirstAvail.forthecurrentarpeggiator,thecurrentarpeggiatorwillsynctothearpeggiatororriffof thelowestnumberedzonethathasanarpeggiatororriffplaying. SyncType TheSyncTypeparameterallowsyoutochoosehowyourarpeggiatorwillsynctoother arpeggiators,riffs,orasongplayingfromSongmode. WithSyncTypesettoNone,yourarpeggiatorwillstartplayingassoonasitistriggered.Itwill notsynctoanything.WithSyncTypesettoDownBeat,ifthereisalreadysomethingplayingto syncto,thecurrentarpeggiatorwillwaitforthedownbeatofthenextmeasurebeforestarting; so,youcantriggerthearpeggiatortostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncatthe downbeatofthenextmeasure.IfSyncingtoanarpeggiator,seeNumBeats on page 753fordetails onchangingwhenanarpeggiatorsdownbeatwilloccur.WithSyncTypesettoAnyBeat,ifthereis alreadysomethingplayingtosyncto,thearpeggiatorwillwaitonlyuntilthenextbeat. Dependingonwhenyoutriggerthearpeggiator,itwillsyncup,butitmaybeonanupbeatora downbeat.

7-51

Setup Mode The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

WithSyncTypesettoDownBeatWait,ifthereissomethingplayingtosyncto,thearpeggiator willwaitforthedownbeatofthenextmeasuretostart.ThedifferencefromDownBeatisthatif thereisnothingtosyncto,thearpeggiatorwillnotstart.Thiscanbeusefulifyouwanttostart multiplearpeggiatorssyncedtosomethingelse.Forexample,youcouldhaveabassarpeggiator settoDownBeatWait,forinstance,andtriggerthearpeggiatorwhilenootherarpeggiatorsare running.Assoonasyoustartsomethingelsetosyncto,thebassarpeggiatorwillstartplayingas well(providedthatitissettosynctosomethingelseorthefirstavailable.)Ifsomethingtosync toisalreadyrunning,DownBeatWaitbehavesjustlikeDownBeat. WithSyncTypesettoAnyBeatWait,ifthereissomethingplayingtosyncto,thearpeggiatorwill waitforthenextbeattostart.ThedifferencefromAnyBeatisthatifthereisnothingtosyncto, thisarpeggiatorwillnotstart.Thiscanbeusefulifyouwanttostartmultiplearpeggiators syncedtosomethingelse.YoucouldhaveabassarpeggiatorsettoAnyBeatWait,forinstance, andtriggerthearpeggiatorwhilenootherarpeggiatorsarerunning.Assoonasyoustart somethingtosyncto,thebassarpeggiatorwillstartplayingaswell(providedthatitissetto synctosomethingelseorthefirstavailable).Ifanotherarpeggiatorisalreadyrunning, AnyBeatWaitbehavesjustlikeAnyBeat. WithSyncTypesettoLoop,ifthereisalreadyarifforsongplayingtosyncto,thecurrent arpeggiatorwillwaitfortheplayingrifforsongtorestartitsloop(ifitislooped)beforestarting (seeLoop on page 759forloopingriffs,andLoop on page 1211forloopingsongs.)Thiswayyou cantriggerthearpeggiatortostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncatthestartofthe playingrifforsongsloop(providedthatitissettosynctoariff,song,orthefirstavailable). WithSyncTypesettoStop,ifthereisalreadysomethingplayingtosyncto,thecurrent arpeggiatorwillwaitforwhatisplayingtostopbeforestarting.Thiswayyoucantriggerthe arpeggiatortostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncattherelease(stopping)oftheriff, arpeggiator,orsongthatyouaresyncingto. WithSyncTypesettoStartWait,ifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto,thecurrentarpeggiator willwaitforsomethingitcansynctotobeginplayingfirstbeforestarting.Thisissimilarto DownBeatWait,butitwillonlytriggerthearpeggiatorthefirsttimethatwhateveritissyncing tostarts.Thiswayyoucantriggerthearpeggiatortostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsync atthestartoftheriff,arpeggiator,orsongthatyouaresyncingto.Ifyoustopthearpeggiator andtrytostartitagainwhilethethingyouaresyncingtoisalreadyplaying,StartWaitwillnot startthearpeggiator. WithSyncTypesettoLoopWait,ifthereisalreadyarifforsongplayingtosyncto,thecurrent arpeggiatorwillwaitfortheplayingrifforsongtorestartitsloop(ifitislooped)beforestarting (seeLoop on page 759forloopingriffs,andLoop on page 1211forloopingsongs.)Thiswayyou cantriggerthearpeggiatortostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncatthestartofthe playingrifforsongsloop.ThedifferencefromLoopisthatifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto, thearpeggiatorwillnotstart.Iftherifforsongthatyouaresyncingtoisalreadyrunning, LoopWaitbehavesjustlikeLoop. WithSyncTypesettoStopWait,ifthereisalreadysomethingplayingtosyncto,thecurrent arpeggiatorwillwaitforwhatisplayingtostopbeforestarting.Thiswayyoucantriggerthe arpeggiatortostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncattherelease(stopping)oftheriff, arpeggiator,orsongthatyouaresyncingto.ThedifferencefromStopisthatifthereisnothing playingtosyncto,thearpeggiatorwillnotstart.Thiscanbeusefulifyouwanttogetyour arpeggiatorreadytosyncbeforeyoustartwhateveryouaresyncingitto.Iftherifforsongthat youaresyncingtoisalreadyrunning,StopWaitbehavesjustlikeStop.

7-52

Setup Mode The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

Num Beats Thisaffectsthesyncingofotherarpeggiatororriffzonestothecurrentzone,onlyifthoseother zoneshaveaSyncTypesettingofDownbeatorDownbeatWait.Forzonesbeingsyncedtothe currentzonesarpeggiator,thisdetermineshowmanynotesmustbeplayedbythecurrent zonesarpeggiatorbeforeadownbeatoccurs.BydecreasingorincreasingthevalueoftheNum Beatsparameter,youcanmakezoneswithaSyncTypesettingofDownbeatorDownbeatWait behaveasifdownbeatsareoccurringlessormorefrequently.

Real-time Control of Arpeggiator Parameters

Youcanhaverealtimecontroloverseveralarpeggiatorparameters,byassigningphysical controllerstospecialarpeggiatorControllerDestinations.Anyinput(orentryvalue)froma physicalcontrollerassignedtoanarpeggiatorControllerDestinationoverridestheprogrammed valuesfortheparametersofthearpeggiatoronthatcontrollerszone.Theoverrideremainsin effectuntilyouselectadifferentsetup(oradifferentprograminProgrammode.)Remember, eachofthefollowingControllerDestinationsaffectsonlythearpeggiatorforthezonewhich yourcontrollerisassignedto.

Controller Number
147 148 150

Corresponding ARPEGGIATOR Parameter

ArpOn ArpOff ArpOrder

Operation
Any controller value turns the Arpeggiator On. Any controller value turns the Arpeggiator Off. Arpeggiator Order, each range of values selects one of nine options in order of the parameters list: 0-14 (Played,) 15-28 (Upwards, etc.,) 29-42, 43-56, 57-70, 71-84, 85-98, 99-112, 113-127 (Simultaneous.) Arpeggiator Beats, each range of values selects one of seven options in order of the parameters list: 0-18 (Quarter notes,) 19-36 (8th notes, etc.,) 37-54, 55-72, 73-90, 91-108, 109-127(32nd triplets.) The 88 Arpeggiator Shift steps are scaled over the 128 MIDI controller values, so that 0 = 0 steps and 127 = 88 steps. The 60 Arpeggiator Shift Limit steps are scaled over the 128 MIDI controller values, so that 0 = 0 steps and 127 = 60 steps. Arpeggiator Shift Limit Option, each range of values selects one of seven options in order on parameters list: 0-18 (Stop,) 19-36 (Reset, etc.,) 37-54, 55-72, 73-90, 91-108, 109-127 (FloatBip.) Arpeggiator Velocity, each range of values selects one of twenty-three options in order on parameters list: 0-5 First,) 6-10 (Played, etc.,) 11-15...101-105, 106-110, 111-127 (MissNotes9.) The Arpeggiator Duration % values are scaled over the 128 MIDI controller values, so that 0 = 1% and 127 = 100%. For Arpeggiator Latch Pedals mode, 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on.

151

ArpBeats

152

ArpShift

153

ArpLimit

154

ArpLmtOp

155

ArpVel

156

ArpDur

157

Latch

7-53

Setup Mode The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

Controller Number
158 159 160 170 171 172

Corresponding ARPEGGIATOR Parameter

Latch2 ArpGliss SusLatch -Arp Shift ShiftPatt ShiftPBank

Operation
For Arpeggiator Latch Pedals mode, 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on. Arpeggiator Gliss, 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on. For Arpeggiator Latch Pedals mode, 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on. Sets ARPEGGIATOR values for Shift to negative. 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on. Selects one of the 128 patterns in the ShiftPatt Bank for the ARPEGGIATOR page of a controllers zone. A controller value selects the corresponding ShiftPatt Bank for the ARPEGGIATOR page of a controllers zone. For example, controller value 2 selects bank 2, controller value 7 selects bank 7. Selects one of the 128 patterns in the VelPatt Bank for the ARPEGGIATOR page of a controllers zone. A controller value selects the corresponding VelPatt Bank for the ARPEGGIATOR page of a controllers zone. For example, controller value 2 selects bank 2, controller value 7 selects bank 7. Sets arpeggiator velocity when velocity is set to Fixed for the ARPEGGIATOR page of a controllers zone.

173 174

VelPatt VelPBank

175

VelFixed

7-54

Setup Mode Riffs

Riffs
RiffsarefullsongsorindividualtracksofasongcreatedinthePC3sSongmodethatyoucan triggerinsetupmode.StandardMIDIfilesmayalsobeimportedtoSongmodeandthenused asriffsinsetups.Everyzoneinasetupcanhaveitsownriffacompletelyindependent sequence.Youcanuseasetupwithmanyriffstotriggerandstoploopedsequencesofdifferent instrumentparts.Alternatively,asingleriffcanplaymultipleinstrumentparts.Eachriffcould beusedasadifferentsongsectionofabackingtrack. Touseariff,firstgotoSongmodeandnotetheID#ofthesong,sectionofsongandtrackthat youwilluseforyourriff.NextgotoSetupmodeandcreateasetup.OntheCH/PRGpageofthe SetupEditor,choosetheprogramthatyouwanttousefortheriffonthecurrentzone.Program changesthatarerecordedinsongmodewillbeignoredwhenusingthesongasariffinasetup. YoucanalsosetuptheplaybackeventfilterinSongmodetoignoreothertypesofeventsas well.Onceyouhaveselectedyourprogram,pressthemoresoftbuttonuntilyougettothe RIFF1andRIFF2pages.Thefollowingsectionsdescribethecontentsofthesepages. Note:Bydefault,settingazonetotriggerariffwilldisabletheabilitytoplaynotesofthatzones programfromthekeyboard.Toreenablethisability,seeLocal on page 759.

The RIFF1 Page

ThefirstRiffpageappearsasshownbelow,andhasthefollowingparameters:

Parameter Riff Song (Bar) Start (Beat) (Tick) (Bar) Stop Transpose Root Note SrcTrack (Source Track) Re Channel (Beat) (Tick)

Range of Values Off, On Song List (dependent on sequence) 1 to (dependent on time signature) 0 to 959 (dependent on sequence) 1 to (dependent on time signature) 0 to 959 Off, On C -1 to G9 ALL, 1 to 128 Off, On

Default Off 0 None 1 1 0 2 1 0 Off C4 ALL Off

7-55

Setup Mode Riffs

Riff SettingtheRiffparametertoOnwillenabletherifffeatureforthecurrentzoneinsetupmode. SettingthisparametertoOffwilldisabletheriffforthiszone. Song SelectthesongyouwishtouseintheSongparameterbyusingtheAlphaWheel,/+buttons,or thealphanumericpad. Start UsetheStartparametertospecifytheriffstartpoint.ThetimeformatisBar:Beat:Tick.Barcan besettoanybarinthesequence,andBeatcanbesettoanybeatinthatbar(beatrangeis dependentontimesignature.)Tickcanbesetfrom0to959.Sincethereare960possiblestart pointswithinabeat,youcanspecifyyourrifftostartonanycommonbeatsubdivisionmoments (andafewuncommonones).ThefollowingTickvaluescorrespondtothefollowingbeat subdivisionmoments: Beat Subdivision
Quarter note 8th note

Beat Subdivision Moment

1st 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 1st 2nd 0 0 480 0 320 640 0 240 480 720 0 192 384 576 768 0 160 320 480 640 800

Tick Value

8th note triplet

16th note

16th note quintuplet

3rd 4th 5th 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th

16th note triplet (sextuplets)

Table 7-5

Subdivision Values

7-56

Setup Mode Riffs

Stop UsetheStopparametertospecifytheriffstoppoint.LiketheStartparameter,thetimeformat forStopisBar:Beat:Tick.Barcanbesettoanybarinthesequence,andBeatcanbesettoany beatinthatbar(beatrangeisdependentontimesignature.)Tickcanbesetfrom0to959.Refer toTable 75forTickvalues. ThePC3restrictstheselectablevaluesfortheStopparametersuchthatthecurrentriffisatleast onebeatlong. Transpose/Root Note WiththeTransposeparametersettoOn,theriffwilltransposetothevaluesetintheRootNote parameter.So,ifyouhaveariffwhoserootnoteisC4,youcansetanewrootnoteinthesetup sothattheriffwillplayinthecorrectrange.Inthisscenario,ifyouwanttotriggeryourrifffrom C1butitwasrecordedatC4,youwouldsetTransposetoOnandRootNotetoC1.Yourriffwill nowplayinthedesiredrangewhentriggeredfromtheC1key,whichnowcorrespondstothe noteC4. SrcTrack (Source Track) TheSrcTrackparameterdeterminesthesourcetrackoftheriff(fromtheriffsoriginalsequence inSongmode.)AlongwiththeStartandStopparameters,SrcTrackallowsyoutouseasingle sequenceasariffformanyzones,andtoselectadifferentsourcetrackandStart/Stopparameter settingforeachzonetoavoidhavingtocreateaspecialsequenceforeachriff. Tocreateasetupwithmultipleriffseachplayingasingleinstrumentpart,setasingletrackfor theSrcTrackparameter,andthattrackofthesequencewillplaywiththeprogramonthecurrent zone.Repeattheprocessonotherzonesusingthesamesongfortheriff,butusingadifferent SrcTrackforeachzone. Tocreateasetupwithasingleriffthatplaysmultipleinstrumentparts,setSrcTracktoALL. EachtrackofthesequencewillplayitstrackthroughthezoneswhichhavecorrespondingMIDI channels(MIDIchannelsaresetforeachzoneonTheChannel/Program(CH/PROG)Pageofthe SetupEditor,seepage 74.) Re Channel UsetheReChannelparameterwhenthecurrentzonesMIDIchannelandthechannelthatthe riffwasrecordedonarenotthesame.WhenReChannelissettoOn,thetrackselectedforthe SrcTrackparameterwillplaythroughtheMIDIchannelofthecurrentzone.Forexample,ifyou wanttouseariffonzone2/MIDIchannel2andtheriffwasrecordedontrack4/MIDIchannel4, youwillneedtoturnReChannelon.IfyouweretodothisandkeepReChannelsettoOff,the riffwouldplayusingtheprogramfromzone4insteadofzone2. WhenReChannelissettoOnandALLisselectedforSrcTrack,allofthetracksofthesequence willplaythroughtheMIDIchannelofthecurrentzone. Note:TracknumbersdonthavetomatchMIDIchannelnumbersinSongmode(thoughtheydo bydefault.)AsongthatusesnondefaultMIDIchannelsforitstrackscancausesomeconfusion whenusingitasariff.Forexample,usingariffonzone1,youcouldsettheriffsSrcTrack parameterto1,andexpecttherifftoplayonzone1(ifitissettoMIDIchannel1.)ButinSong mode,ifthesongyouareusingfortheriffhastrack1settoaMIDIchannelotherthan1,theriff willplayonthezonethathasthattracksmatchingMIDIchannel.Inthiscase,setReChannelto Oninorderfortherifftoplaythroughtheprogramoftheriffszone.

7-57

Setup Mode Riffs

The RIFF2 Page

ThesecondRiffpageappearsasshownbelow,andhasthefollowingparameters:

Parameter Trigger Release CondRel Local Loop BPM Sync Zone Sync Type Release Sync Zone (RelSynZn) Release Sync Type (RelSynTyp) Duration Velocity Offset (HiKey) (LoKey) (HiKey) (LoKey)

Range of Values C -1 to G9 C -1 to G9 C -1 to G9 C -1 to G9 Off, On Off, On Once, Forever Sequence, Setup, External, 20 to 400 First Avail., Riff 1-16, Main Seq, Arp 1-16, FirstRiff.Av., First Arp.Av None, DownBeat, AnyBeat, DownBeatWait, AnyBeatWait, Loop, Stop, StartWait, LoopWait, StopWait First Avail., Riff 1-16, Main Seq, Arp 1-16, FirstRiff.Av., First Arp.Av None, DownBeat, AnyBeat, DownBeatWait, AnyBeatWait, Loop, Stop, StartWait, LoopWait, StopWait 1 to 1000% 0 to 255% -32768 to 32767

Default C -1 G9 C -1 G9 Off Off Forever Sequence First Avail. None First Avail. None 100% 100% 0

Trigger Thereareafewwaystotriggerriffsinsetupmode.OntheRiff2pageyoucanusetheTrigger fieldtosetakeyboardkeytotriggertheRiff.Also,anyphysicalcontrollercanbeassignedto controllerdestination163RiffOn. Tosetthekeyrangetotriggeryourriff,usethecursorbuttonstoselecttheleftvalueinthe Triggerfield(thiswillbethelowendofthetriggerkeyrange.)Nowyoucanselectthekey numberbyscrollingtheAlphaWheel,oryoucanuseintuitiveentrybypressingandholdingthe Enterbuttononthealphanumericpadandpressingthedesiredkeyonyourkeyboard.Youwill seethisvaluechangeasyoupressakey.

7-58

Setup Mode Riffs

Next,moveyourcursortotherighttohighlightthesecondvalueoftheTriggerfield(thiswillbe thehighendofthetriggerkeyrange.)Useoneofthemethodsdescribedabovetoselectakey valueforthistriggerfield.Ifyouwanttohaveonlyonekeystartariff,settheTriggerkeyrange fromA#0toA#0forexample,andyourriffwillbetriggeredtostartonlybypressingtheA#0 key.Ifyouwantyourtriggerkeyrangetobelarger,setyourTriggerkeyrangetobe,for instance,A#0toA#1.Nowanykeythatispressedwithinthisrangewilltriggeryourrifftostart. Note:theLoKeyandHiKeyvaluesontheKEYVELpagedoaffecttheriff.Ifyourriffstriggerandrelease notesarenotwithintheLoKeyandHiKeyrangeontheKEYVELpage,yourriffwillnotbeabletobe triggeredfromthekeyboard. Release Thewayyoureleaseriffsisanalogoustothewayyoutriggerthem.Youcanassignaphysical controllertodestination164RiffOff,oryoucanselectakeyorkeyrangewiththeRelease parameter.Yousetthisthesamewaythatyousetthetriggerrange.Moveyourcursorsothatthe leftfieldoftheReleaseparameterishighlighted(thiswillbethelowendofthetriggerkey range.)NowselectakeyvaluebyusingtheAlphaWheel,/+buttonsorintuitiveentry.Move yourcursortotherightfieldandrepeattheprocess(thiswillbethehighendofthetriggerkey range.)IfyousetbothoftheReleasevaluestoA0,theRiffwillstopwhenyoureleaseA0. So,ifyouusethesettingsdescribedaboveandintheTriggersectionabove,yoursetupsriffwill startwhenyoupressA#0,anditwillstopwhenyoupressandreleaseA0. Note:theLoKeyandHiKeyvaluesontheKEYVELpagedoaffecttheriff.Ifyourriffstriggerandrelease notesarenotwithintheLoKeyandHiKeyrangeontheKEYVELpage,yourriffwillnotbeabletobe triggeredfromthekeyboard. Conditional Release (CondRel) TheCondRelparameterallowsyoutohaveariffplayonlywhileakeyispressedandheld,and nothingwillstoporrestartthatriffuntilthekeyisreleased.Touseconditionalrelease,setthe samerangefortheTriggerandReleaserangesontheRIFF2page.Anykeythatispressedand heldwithinthisrangewillplaytheselectedriff.Releasethekeyandtheriffwillstop.Playing anyotherkeyinthiszonewhiletriggeringariffwithCondReleveniftheyarewithinthe TriggerandReleaserangeswillnotretriggerorstopthezonesriff. Local Ifyouwanttotriggeryourriffwithoutplayingthecurrentzonesprogram,setLocaltoOff. LocalissettoOffbydefaultsincemostuserswontwanttoplaytheprograminthezonethey areusingforariff,butonlywishhearthatzonesprogramasabackingtrack.WithLocalsetto On,youwillplaythecurrentzonesprogramanytimeakeyispressed.Thiscouldcreate undesiredgracenotesifyoutriggerariffthathasadownbeatatthesametimeyouare playinganote. Loop Ifyouwantyourrifftoloopindefinitely,setthisparametertoForever.Ifyouwanttohaveit playonceandthenstopuntilyouretriggerit,setthisparametertoOnce. BPM Therearefourchoicesherethatwilldeterminewhatcontrolsthetempoofyourriff.WithBPM settoSequence,theoriginaltempoinwhichtheriffwasrecordedwillbeused.WithBPMsetto Setup,thetemposetontheCOMMONorTEMPOpageswillbeused.Whensyncingmultiple riffsitisconvenienttoseteachriffsBPMparametertoSetup.Doingthis,youcanchangethe tempoofallriffsatonceontheTEMPOpage(seeTEMPO on page 1110.)AvalueofSetupis alsousefulforsyncingriffstoazonesarpeggiator.WithTempoBPMsettoExternal,theriffwill

7-59

Setup Mode Riffs

synctoexternalMIDIclock.Youcanalsomanuallychooseatempobyselectingavaluefrom20 to400forBPM.UsetheAlphaWheelor/+buttonstochoosebetweentheoptionsorseta tempo.YoucanalsousethealphanumericpadfollowedbypressingtheEnterbuttontoentera tempo. SyncZone TheSyncZoneparameterdetermineswhichzoneariffwillsyncto.Youcanchoosetosynctoa rifforarpeggioinaspecificzonebysettingSyncZonetoRiff116orArp116,andthecurrent riffwillalwayssynctotherifforarpeggiointhesetzone.Forexample,ifyouhaveadrumriff inzone1andabassriffinzone2,youmayalwayswantthebassriffinzone2tosynctothe drumriffinzone1.InthiscaseyouwouldsetthebassriffSyncZonetoRiff1. Youmaywanttohavealittlemorefreedomandnotbetiedtothedrumriffasthemain timekeeper.Maybeyouwanttostartwiththebassriffandhavethedrumriffstartlater.In thiscaseyouwouldsetSyncZonetoFirstRiff.Av.Withthissetting,theriffwilllookforthefirst availablerifftosyncto.Soifboththedrumriffandthebassriffhavethisparametersetto FirstRiff.Av.,theriffthatisstartedfirstwillbethemaster.Ifthebassriffstartsfirst,thedrum riffwillseethatasthefirstavailablerifftosynctoandwilldoso.Ifthedrumriffisstartedfirst, thebassriffwillseethatasthefirstavailablerifftosynctoandwilldoso.Thiscanbevery handyifyouhavemultipleriffsandwanttodosomeliveremixing;youcouldhavethedrums dropout,andaslongisthereisariffplayingtheywillsyncbackupwhentriggeredagain. YoucanalsochooseFirstArp.Av.,whichbehavesthesamewayasFirstRiff.Av.,butmakesyour rifflookforthefirstavailablearpeggiatortosyncto.AsettingofMainSeq.willsynctheriffto thesongcurrentlyloadedinSongmode.YoucanselectasonginSongmode,thenplayitfrom setupmodewiththefrontpanelPlay/Pausebutton.(Doingthistemporarilyreplacestheprograms inyoursetupszoneswiththeprogramusedforeachchannelinthesong,soitsbesttomakeasetupthat usesthesameprogramsasyoursongonthesameMIDIchannels.Ifyouplanonsyncingriffswitha song,itmaybeeasiertostartbycreatingasetup,thenrecordingthesetupintoasong.SeeRecordingA SetupToSongMode on page 769fordetails.)AsettingofFirstAvail.willsynctherifftothefirst availableriff,arpeggiator,orsongfromSongmode. Note:IfyouhavemultipleriffsorarpeggiatorsalreadyplayingwhenusingFirstRiff.Av.,FirstArp.Av., orFirstAvail.forthecurrentriff,thecurrentriffwillsynctotherifforarpeggiatorofthelowest numberedzonethathasarifforarpeggiatorplaying. SyncType TheSyncTypeparameterallowsyoutochoosehowyourriffwillsynctootherriffs, arpeggiators,andSongs(dependingonyoursettingsmadefortheSyncZoneparameter.)With SyncTypesettoNone,yourriffwillstartplayingassoonasitistriggered.Itwillnotsyncto anything.WithSyncTypesettoDownBeat,ifthereisalreadysomethingplayingtosyncto,the currentriffwillwaitforthedownbeatofthenextmeasurebeforestarting;so,youcantriggerthe rifftostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncatthedownbeatofthenextmeasure.If Syncingtoanarpeggiator,seeNumBeats on page 753fordetailsonchangingwhenanarpeggiators downbeatwilloccur.WithSyncTypesettoAnyBeat,ifthereisalreadyasomethingplayingto syncto,theriffwillwaitonlyuntilthenextbeat.Dependingonwhenyoutriggertheriff,itwill syncup,butitmaybeonanupbeatoradownbeat. WithSyncTypesettoDownBeatWait,theriffwillwaitforthedownbeatofthenextmeasureto start.ThedifferencefromDownBeatisthatifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto,theriffwillnot start.Thiscanbeusefulifyouwanttostartmultipleriffssyncedtooneriff.Youcouldhavea bassriffsettoDownBeatWait,forinstance,andtriggertheriffwhilenootherriffsarerunning. Assoonasyoustartanotherriff,thebassriffwillstartplayingaswell(providedthatitissetto synctoanotherriffortothefirstavailableriff.)Ifanotherriffisalreadyrunning, DownBeatWaitbehavesjustlikeDownBeat.

7-60

Setup Mode Riffs

WithSyncTypesettoAnyBeatWait,theriffwillwaitforthenextbeattostart.Thedifference fromAnyBeatisthatifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto,thisriffwillnotstart.Thiscanbe usefulifyouwanttostartmultipleriffssyncedtooneriff.Youcouldhaveabassriffsetto AnyBeatWait,forinstance,andtriggertheriffwhilenootherriffsarerunning.Assoonasyou startanotherriff,thebassriffwillstartplayingaswell(providedthatitissettosynctoanother rifforthefirstavailable).Ifsomethingisalreadyplayingtosyncto,AnyBeatWaitbehavesjust likeAnyBeat. WithSyncTypesettoLoop,ifthereisalreadyarifforsongplayingtosyncto,thecurrentriff willwaitfortheplayingrifforsongtorestartitsloop(ifitislooped)beforestarting(see Loop on page 759forloopingriffs,andLoop on page 1211forloopingsongs.)Thiswayyoucan triggertherifftostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncatthestartoftheplayingriffor songsloop. WithSyncTypesettoStop,ifthereisalreadysomethingplayingtosyncto,thecurrentriffwill waitforwhatisplayingtostopbeforestarting.Thiswayyoucantriggertherifftostartaheadof time,andhaveitstartinsyncattherelease(stopping)oftheriff,arpeggiator,orsongthatyou aresyncingto. WithSyncTypesettoStartWait,ifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto,thecurrentriffwillwait forsomethingitcansynctotobeginplayingfirstbeforestarting.Thisissimilarto DownBeatWait,butitwillonlytriggertheriffthefirsttimethatwhateveritissyncingtostarts. Thiswayyoucantriggertherifftostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncatthestartofthe riff,arpeggiator,orsongthatyouaresyncingto.Ifyoustoptheriffandtrytostartitagainwhile thethingyouaresyncingtoisalreadyplaying,StartWaitwillnotstarttheriff. WithSyncTypesettoLoopWait,ifthereisalreadyarifforsongplayingtosyncto,thecurrent riffwillwaitfortheplayingrifforsongtorestartitsloop(ifitislooped)beforestarting(see Loop on page 759forloopingriffs,andLoop on page 1211forloopingsongs.)Thiswayyoucan triggertherifftostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncatthestartoftheplayingriffor songsloop.ThedifferencefromLoopisthatifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto,theriffwill notstart.Iftherifforsongthatyouaresyncingtoisalreadyrunning,LoopWaitbehavesjust likeLoop. WithSyncTypesettoStopWait,ifthereisalreadysomethingplayingtosyncto,thecurrentriff willwaitforwhatisplayingtostopbeforestarting.Thiswayyoucantriggertherifftostart aheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncattherelease(stopping)oftheriff,arpeggiator,orsong thatyouaresyncingto.ThedifferencefromStopisthatifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto,the riffwillnotstart.Thiscanbeusefulifyouwanttogetyourriffreadytosyncbeforeyoustart whateveryouaresyncingitto.Iftherifforsongthatyouaresyncingtoisalreadyrunning, StopWaitbehavesjustlikeStop. RelSynZn (Release Sync Zone) RelSynZnhasthesamesettingsavailableasSyncZone(seeSyncZone,above,)butRelSynZn determineswhatthereleasing(stopping)ofthecurrentriffwillbesyncedtowhenaparameter otherthanNoneisselectedforRelSynTyp(seebelow.) RelSynTyp (Release Sync Type) RelSynTyphasthesamesettingsavailableasSyncType(seeSyncType,above,)butRelSynTyp determineshowthereleasing(stopping)ofthecurrentriffwillbesyncedtootherriffs, arpeggiators,andSongs(dependingonyoursettingsmadefortheRelSynZnparameter.)With RelSynTypsettoNone,yourriffwillstopplayingassoonasitisreleased.Itwillnotsyncto anything.WithRelSynTypsettoDownBeat,ifthereisalreadysomethingplayingtosyncto,the currentriffwillwaitforthedownbeatofthenextmeasurebeforestoppingwhenreleased;so, youcantriggertherifftostopaheadoftime,andhaveitstopinsyncatthedownbeatofthenext measure.IfSyncingtoanarpeggiator,seeNumBeats on page 753fordetailsonchangingwhenan

7-61

Setup Mode Riffs

arpeggiatorsdownbeatwilloccur.WithRelSynTypsettoAnyBeat,ifthereisalreadyasomething playingtosyncto,theriffwillwaitonlyuntilthenextbeatbeforestoppingwhenreleased. Dependingonwhenyoureleasetheriffitwillstopinsyncwithabeat,butitmaybeonan upbeatoradownbeat. WithRelSynTypsettoDownBeatWait,theriffwillwaitforthedownbeatofthenextmeasureto stopwhenreleased.ThedifferencefromDownBeatisthatifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto, theriffwontstopwhenreleased.Ifanotherriffisalreadyrunning,DownBeatWaitbehavesjust likeDownBeat. WithRelSynTypsettoAnyBeatWait,ifthereisalreadyasomethingplayingtosyncto,theriff willwaitforthenextbeatbeforereleasing.ThedifferencefromAnyBeatisthatifthereis nothingplayingtosyncto,thisriffwillnotstopwhenreleased.Thiscanbeusefulifyouwantto stopariffinsynconlywhenanotherriffisplaying.Ifsomethingisalreadyplayingtosyncto, AnyBeatWaitbehavesjustlikeAnyBeat. WithRelSynTypsettoLoop,ifthereisalreadyarifforsongplayingtosyncto,thecurrentriff willwaitfortheplayingrifforsongtorestartitsloop(ifitislooped)beforestoppingwhen released(seeLoop on page 759forloopingriffs,andLoop on page 1211forloopingsongs.)This wayyoucanreleasetherifftostopaheadoftime,andhaveitstopinsyncatthestartofthe playingrifforsongsloop. WithRelSynTypsettoStop,ifthereisalreadysomethingplayingtosyncto,thecurrentriffwill waitforwhatisplayingtostopbeforereleasing.Thiswayyoucantriggerthecurrentriffto releaseaheadoftime,andhaveitstopinsyncattherelease(stopping)oftheriff,arpeggiator,or songthatyouaresyncingto. WithRelSynTypsettoStartWait,ifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto,thecurrentriffwillwait forsomethingitcansynctotobeginplayingfirstbeforereleasing.Thisissimilarto DownBeatWait,butitwillonlyreleasetheriffthefirsttimethatwhateveritissyncingtostarts. Thiswayyoucantriggertherifftostopaheadoftime,andhaveitstopinsyncatthestartofthe riff,arpeggiator,orsongthatyouaresyncingto.Ifyourestarttheriffandtrytoreleaseitagain whilethethingyouaresyncingtoisalreadyplaying,StartWaitwillnotstoptheriff. WithRelSynTypsettoLoopWait,ifthereisalreadyarifforsongplayingtosyncto,thecurrent riffwillwaitfortheplayingrifforsongtorestartitsloop(ifitislooped)beforestopping(see Loop on page 759forloopingriffs,andLoop on page 1211forloopingsongs.)Thiswayyoucan triggertherifftostopaheadoftime,andhaveitstopinsyncatthestartoftheplayingriffor songsloop.ThedifferencefromLoopisthatifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto,theriffwill notstopwhenreleased.Iftherifforsongthatyouaresyncingtoisalreadyrunning,LoopWait behavesjustlikeLoop. WithRelSynTypsettoStopWait,ifthereisalreadysomethingplayingtosyncto,thecurrentriff willwaitforwhatisplayingtostopbeforereleasing.Thiswayyoucantriggertherifftostop aheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncattherelease(stopping)oftheriff,arpeggiator,orsong thatyouaresyncingto.ThedifferencefromStopisthatifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto,the riffwillnotstopwhenreleased.Iftherifforsongthatyouaresyncingtoisalreadyrunning, StopWaitbehavesjustlikeStop. Note:ForallRelSynTypsettingsexceptStop,StartWaitandStopWait,ariffcansyncitsrelease withitsself.Forexample,youcoulduseriff1andsyncittoitsselfbysettingRiff1forthe RelSynZnparameter.Then,ifyousetDownBeatfortheRelSynTypparameter,whenreleased theriffwouldalwayswaituntilitsnextdownbeattostop.

7-62

Setup Mode Riffs

Duration (Dur) DurationchangesthedurationofeachMIDInote.Theoriginaldurationsofthenotesinthe sequencearemultipliedbytheselectedpercentage.100%willcausenochange,valuessmaller than100%willresultinshorterdurations,valueslargerthan100%willresultinlonger durations. Velocity VelocitychangesthevelocityofeachMIDInote.Theoriginalvelocitiesofthenotesinthe sequencearemultipliedbytheselectedpercentage.100%willcausenochange,valuessmaller than100%willresultinlowervelocities,valueslargerthan100%willresultinhighervelocities. Offset YoucanfinetunethestarttimeofyourriffinticksbyusingtheOffsetparameter.Apositive valuewilldelaythestarttime,whileanegativevaluewillspeedupthestarttime.

Real-time Control of Riff Parameters

YoucanhaverealtimecontroloverseveralRiffparameters,byassigningphysicalcontrollersto specialRiffControllerDestinations.Anyinput(orentryvalue)fromaphysicalcontroller assignedtoaRiffControllerDestinationoverridestheprogrammedvaluesfortheparametersof theriffonthatcontrollerszone.Theoverrideremainsineffectuntilyouselectadifferentsetup. Remember,eachofthefollowingControllerDestinationsaffectsonlytheriffforthezonewhich yourcontrollerisassignedto. Controller Number
163 164 165

Corresponding Riff Parameter

RiffOn RiffOff RiffDur

Operation
Riff On. Any value triggers the zones Riff if Riff is set to On on RIFF1 page. Riff Off. Any value stops playback of zones Riff. Riff Duration, sets the Duration parameter (see above.) The Duration value is calculated by multiplying the received controller value by 1000, and dividing the answer by 128 (any decimal points are taken off the final value.) Here are some example values: 7 = 54%, 13 = 101%,19 = 148%, 32 = 250%, 64 = 500%, 127 = 992% Riff Velocity, sets the Velocity parameter (see above.) The Velocity value is calculated by multiplying the received controller value by 2. For Example, 25 = 50%, 50 = 100%, 100 = 200%, 127 = 254%. Riff Delay, Controls Offset parameter (see above.) Controller value 64 = 0 offset ticks. Each value away from 64 = 512 offset ticks. For example, 63 = -512 offset ticks, 65 = +512 offset ticks, 0 = -32768 offset ticks, 127 = +32256 offset ticks.

166

RiffVel

167

RiffDly

7-63

Setup Mode The FX Pages: FX, AUX1, AUX2, and MASTER EFFECTS

The FX Pages: FX, AUX1, AUX2, and MASTER EFFECTS

ThefourSetupmodeFXpagesFX,AUX1,AUX2,andMASTEREFFECTSworkthesame wayastheEffectmodepagesEffectsEnable,Aux1Override,Aux2Override,andMaster Effects.SeeEffectModeandtheEffectsPages on page 94forinformationoneditingthesepages. YoucanusetheEffect(FXBypass)Modebuttontobypasseffectswhileediting.

The Programmable Switch Pages: SWPRG1 to SWPRG8

ThePC3seightProgrammableSwitchesaretheeightProgramSelectbuttonslocatedabovethe programCategorybuttons.EachbuttonhasitsownSWPRGpage,buteachpageisessentially identical. TheSWPRGpageparametersaredescribedinSwitchControllerParameters on page 730

Parameter Type On Control On Value Off Control Off Value Entry Value Exit Value

Range of Values Momentary, Toggled Control Destination List None, 0 to 127 Control Destination List None, 0 to 127 None, Off, On None, Off, On

Default Toggled OFF None OFF None None None

7-64

Setup Mode The COMMON Page

The COMMON Page

TheCOMMONpagecontainsparametersthataffecteveryzoneinthecurrentsetup.

Parameter Tempo Clock Source Aux FX Channel KB3 Channel Mutes Arpeggiator Global

Range of Values 20 to 300 Internal, External 1 to 16 1 to 16 Zone Mutes, KB3 Control Off, Arp 1 to 16

Default 120 Internal 1 1 Zone Mutes Off

Tempo
WhenClockSourceissettoInternal,theTempoparametersetsthePC3systemstempo.The TempoparametervaluesareinunitsofBPM(beatsperminute).Youcanalsosetthetempo usingthetaptempofunction.Presstheleftandrightcursorbuttonssimultaneouslytoaccess theTEMPOpage(seeTEMPO on page 1110.)

Clock Source
WiththeClockSourceparameter,youcansetthePC3withinthecurrentsetuptogenerateits owntempobysettingClockSourcetoInternal,oryoucansetthePC3tosyncupwiththe tempofromanotherdeviceassumingthedeviceissendingMIDIclockdatatothePC3via MIDIorUSBbysettingClockSourcetoExternal.WhenClockSourceissettoExternal,the Tempoparameterdisappearsfromthedisplay.

Aux FX Channel
TheAuxFXChanneldeterminestheFXchannelthroughwhichallofthezonesinthecurrent setuparesent.Forexample,ifazone2inasetuphasaprogramwith25BasicDelay1/8asan AuxFX,andisassignedtochannel5,thensettingtheAuxFXChannelto5sendstheprograms ofallofthezonesinthesetupthroughzone2sProgramsAuxFX(i.e.,through25BasicDelay 1/8).

7-65

Setup Mode The COMMON Page

KB3 Channel
Withthisparameter,youcanspecifytheKB3channelinthecurrentsetup.Notethatifyou assignaKB3programtoazonenotassignedtotheKB3channel,thePC3willnotifyyouonthe CH/PROGpage,andtheKB3programwillnotload.BeforeselectingaKB3programforaZone, settheKB3channeltomatchthechannelsetforthatZoneonitsCH/PROGpage.

Mutes
TheMutesparametergivesyoucontroloverthebehavioroftheBankbuttons(thebuttons abovethesliders).Bydefault,inSetupModethePC3usestheBankbuttonstocontrolthe mutingandunmutingofzones(seepage 72fordetails.)WhenusingaKB3PrograminaSetup, youmustchangetheMutesparametertoKB3ControltousetheBankbuttonstocontrolKB3 effects.SettheMutesparametertoZoneMutestomaketheBankbuttonscontroltheirdefault functionsofmutingandunmutingofzones. Note:ForsetupswithaKB3program,youcanprogramaswitchtotogglebackandforth betweenhavingtheBankbuttonscontrolKB3effects,andhavingtheBankbuttonsMuteZones. PickaswitchsaySW,whichisrightnexttotheArpbutton.Chooseazoneandgotothe SWITCHpage(orcorrespondingeditorpageforwhateverswitchyouchoose).Settheswitch TypetoToggled,OnControltoKB3Mutes(enter169,orscrolltotheendoftheControllerList,) OnValueto127,OffControltoKB3Mutes,andOffValueto0.TheSWswitchwillnowtoggle theBankbuttonfunctionsfortheSetup.

Arpeggiator Global (ArpGlobal)

WiththeArpGlobalparameter,youcansettheArpeggiatorofasingleZonetoplaynotesonall ZonesintheSetup.Forexample,ifArpGlobalissettoArp3,allzoneswillbeplayedbythe arpeggiatorininZone3(ifthearpeggiatorinZone3isactive.)InadditiontoOFF,thereareas manyArpGlobalsettingsasthereareZonesinthecurrentsetup.Forexample,inasevenzone setup,youcanselectavalueofOFF,orArp17forArpGlobal. ToexcludeaZonefrombeingplayedbytheglobalarpeggiator,settheArpeggiatorparameterto OffontheCH/PROGpageforthatZone(seeArpeggiator on page 78fordetails.) FordetailsonthearpeggiatorforeachZone,seeTheARPEGGIATOR&ARPEGGIATOR2 (ARP1,ARP2)Pages on page 742.

7-66

Setup Mode TRIGGER KEYS (KEYTRG)

TRIGGER KEYS (KEYTRG)

TheTRIGGERKEYSpage(seebelow)allowsyoutosetacontrollerdestinationtobetriggered byplayingaspecifickey.

InadditiontogeneratingastandardMIDInoteonmessage,eachkeyofthePC3canbesetto triggeracontrollerdestination.TRIGGERKEYScanbesetindependentlyperZone.Byusing Zoneswithoverlappingkeyranges,asinglekeycantriggermultiplecontrollerdestinations.On theTRIGGERKEYSpage,selecttheKeyfieldandchooseanotebyholdingtheEnterbuttonand playingthedesiredkey(youcanalsousetheAlphaWheel,/+buttonsoralphanumericpadto chooseanote.)Withthedesirednoteselected,usetheDestfieldtoselectacontrollerdestination (seeTheControllerDestinationListfordetails.)Setavaluetosendtothecontrollerdestination withtheValuefield.Onceadestinationandvalueareset,theplayingthekeywillsendthevalue tothecontrollerdestinationontheZonesMIDIChannel(seeChannel on page 75fordetailson settingeachZonesMIDIchannel.)Thismayalsosendacontinuouscontrollermessagetothe MIDIorUSBoutports,dependingontheZonesDestinationparameter(see Destination on page 75fordetails.)

7-67

Setup Mode The Utility Soft Buttons

The Utility Soft Buttons

InadditiontotheSetupEditorspages,therearebasiclibraryandeditingsoftbuttons.Their functionsaredescribedbelow.

Name
Thisenablesyoutorenamethecurrentsetup.Useanydataentrymethodtodothis,including thelettersonthealphanumericbuttonpad.

Save
PressingSavecallsupthestandardSaveDialog.SimultaneouslypressingthePlusandMinus dataentrybuttonstogglesbetweensavingthesetuptothefirstavailableemptylocation,or replacingacurrentlyexistingsetup.Formoredetailedinstructionsonsaving,seeSavingand Naming on page 53.

Delete
Thiserasesasetupfrommemory,freeingupspacetostoresetupsinotherlocations.(Youcan checkthefreememoryinthePC3atanytime,onthetoplineofthepagesinMastermode.) PressDelete,andyouwillbegivenachoicetoDeleteorCancel.PressDeleteagain,andanAre YouSure?messagewillappear.PressYestodeletethesetup,orCanceltocancel. FactoryROMsetupscannotbedeleted.

New Zone (NewZn)

PressNewZntocreateanewzonewithdefaultparameters.ThePC3importsthiszonefrom Zone1of128DefaultSetup.Ifthereareparametersorentirepagesyouuseoften,youcan createyourownDefaultSetupandsaveittolocation128;pressingNewZnwillthenimport zonesfromyourcustomDefaultSetup.

Duplicate Zone (DupZn)

Thisaddsanewzonewiththesameparametersasthecurrentzone.

Import Zone (ImpZn)

Youcanimport,orbringin,anyzonefromanysetupinmemory.PressImpZn,anduseany dataentrymethodtochooseasetuptoimportfrom.ThenusetheChan/Layerbuttonstoselect oneofthatsetupszones.NowpressImport,andthezoneyouselectedwillbeaddedtothe currentsetup. Note:Ifyouareusingall16zonesinasetupandyoutrytoadd,duplicate,orimportazone,a NoMoreZonesmessageappears.Youmustdeleteanexistingzonebeforeyoucanadd, duplicate,orimportanynewones.

Delete Zone (DelZn)

Thisdeletesthecurrentzonefromthesetup.UseDelZntofreeupzonessoyoucanaddor importnewones.

7-68

Setup Mode Recording A Setup To Song Mode

Recording A Setup To Song Mode

TheMIDIoutputofasetupcanberecordedtoasonginSongmode.EachMIDIchannelthatis outputfromasetupisrecordedintoeachtrackofasong(ifthetrackshavecorrespondingMIDI channels.)ProgramsfromeachzoneofyoursetupareautomaticallyassignedtotracksinSong mode.Followthesestepsforproperrecordingofanewsongfromasetup: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. EnterSongmodebypressingtheSongModebutton. OntheSongmodeMAINpage,select0*NewSong*intheCurSngfieldbyentering0on thealphanumericpadandpressingtheEnterbutton.Thisloadsadefaultemptysongfile. OntheSongmodeMAINpage,selectMultintheRecTrkfield. PresstheSetupModebuttontoenterSetupModeandchoosethedesiredsetup. PresstheleftandrightcursorbuttonssimultaneouslytoreachtheTEMPOPage.Entera tempobytappingtheTapsoftbuttonorenteratempointheTempofield.Whenyouare finished,presstheDonesoftbuttontoreturntotheSetupmodemainpage. PresstheRecordbuttonandthenthePlay/Pausebuttontobeginrecording.The metronomewillcountoff1barandthenrecordingwillbegin(youcansetmetronomeand otherrecordingsettingsinSongmode.) PresstheStopbuttontostoprecording.YouwillseetheusualSongmodesavechanges dialogwhereyoucanreview,retry,orsaveyoursong(seeTheSaveChanges Dialog on page 129.) Aftersavingyoursong,youwillbereturnedtotheSongmodeMAINpage,whereyour savedsongwillbeloaded.YoucancontinuetorecordoreditthesonginSongmodejust asyouwouldwithanyothersong(seeSongModeandtheSongEditor on page 121.)Each programfromeachzoneinyoursetupisautomaticallyassignedtoatrack(changethe RecTrkparameterinordertorecordtoasingletrack.)Youcanalsocontinuetorecord fromSetupmodebygoingbacktostep3,above.Remembertosetthetempo(step5 above)beforerecording,asthesongtempowillchangeifyoursetupissavedwitha differenttempo.

6.

7.

8.

Notes About Recording A Setup To Song Mode Tempo:ThetempoofasetupissetontheSetupMode:COMMONpage(seeTheCOMMON Page on page 765.)Ifyouplantorecordasongfromthesamesetupseveraltimes,itis convenienttosetyourdesiredtempoontheSetupMode:COMMONpageandsaveitwithyour setup.Bydoingthis,youwillnotneedtoresetyoursetuptempotothedesiredsongtempo everytimeyouloadyoursetup(asinstep5,above.) Riffs:IfyouareusingRiffsinyoursetup,dothefollowingtomakeeachRiffplayatyoursetups tempo(whichalsobecomesyoursongstempo.)Foreachzonethathasariff,gotothe SetupMode:RIFF2page(seeTheRIFF2Page on page 758)andsettheBPMparametertoSetup. RemembertosavechangestoyoursetupwhenexitingtheSetupEditor. Effects:WhenrecordingasetupintoSongmode,thesongwillnotretaintheAuxorMaster effectssettingsofyoursetup.Ifyouwouldlikeyoursongtousethesameeffectsasyoursetup, copythesettingsofyoursetupsFX,AUX1,AUX2,andMASTEREFFECTSpagestotheFX, AUX1,AUX2,andMasterEffectspagesinyoursong.Alternatively,playingyoursongfrom setupmodewillallowyoutoheartheeffects.Todothis,loadyoursong,presstheSetupMode buttontoenterSetupmodeandchooseyoursetup,thenpressthePlay/Pausebutton.Thiswill playyoursongfromSetupmode,andtheeffectswillbeintact.

7-69

Setup Mode Recording A Setup To Song Mode

MonoPressure:WhenrecordingasetuptoSongmodewithMultselectedforRecTrkinSong mode,youmaynoticethateverytrackhasrecordedMonoPressuremessages,evenifthereis nothingelserecordedonatrack.Ifthisbothersyou,youcansettheMonoPressparameterto OffontheSong:EventFilterRecordingpage(seeSongMode:TheFilterPages(RECFLTand PLYFLT) on page 1215.)ThiswillpreventMonoPressuremessagesfrombeingrecordedtoany track.Alternatively,youcaneraseMonoPressuremessagesfromspecifictracksafterrecording. Todothis,gototheEditSong:Trackpage(seeSongEditor:TheTRACKPage on page 1221.)On theEditSong:Trackpage,usetheChan/Layerbuttonstochoosethetracktoedit(visibleinthe Trackfieldatthetoprightcornerofthedisplay.)SettheFunctionparametertoEraseandthe EventsparametertoMonoPress.UsetheFromandTofieldstoselecttheentirelengthofyour song,andpresstheGosoftbuttontoeraseMonoPressuremessagesfromtheselectedtrack. Repeatthisforeachdesiredtrack.YoucanalsochooseALLfortheTrackparametertoerase MonoPressuremessagesfromalltracks. ControllerMessages:WhenrecordingasetuptoSongmodewithMultselectedforRecTrkin Songmode,youmayoftenberecordingmorecontrollermessagesthanyourealize.Thiscan happenbecausemultiplesetupzonesoftenrespondtothesamephysicalcontrollers.Thisis likelytobethecasewhenyouuseasetupcreatedbyduplicatingzonesanddonotchangethe controllerdestinationassignmentsforeachnewzone.Oftenthisisthedesiredbehavior,suchas whenusingzonestocreatelayers.Forexample,ifzoneonesendspitchbendmessagesfromthe pitchwheel,andyouduplicatethiszonetocreatealayeredzonetwo,youwilllikelywantthe zonetwotosendthesamemessagesfromthepitchwheel.Thiswaythepitchoftheselayered zoneswillbendsimultaneouslywhenusingthepitchwheel.Butsayforexamplethatyoualso haveazonethreewithadifferentkeyrangethanzonesoneandtwo,butwhichsendsthesame messagesfromthepitchwheel.Whileplayingandrecordingyoursetup,thefunctionofthe pitchwheelwillbeobvious,butsomeconfusioncanarisewhenyouhaverecordedyoursetup andyouproceedtorecordmoretracksinSongmode.BecauseyouhaverecordedwithMult selectedforRecTrk,thetrackforzonethreewillhavepitchbendmessagesrecordedwherever zonesoneandtwohavebendmessages,evenifzonethreewasnotplayinganynotesatthat time.Forexample,letssayzonesoneandtwowerebendingduringbar1.Ifyouwantto separatelyrecordzonethreeduringbars1and2,youwillprobablywanttodeletetheexisting bendmessagesfromzonethreestrack.YoucandothisfromtheEditSong:Trackpage(seeSong Editor:TheTRACKPage on page 1221,andanexampleofitsuseintheMonoPressuresection,above.) Alternatively,ifthereisnothingtopreserveonthetrackforzonethree,youcanrecorditwith thesongModeparametersettoErase,whichwilleraseanyexistingeventsonthetrackduring thetimethatyourecord.JustremembertochangetheRecTrkparameterinordertorecordtoa singletrack.

7-70

Quick Access Mode

Chapter 8 Quick Access Mode

InQuickAccessmode,youcanselectprogramsorsetupswithasinglepressofanalphanumeric button(orwithotherdataentrymethods).ThePC3offersanumberofwaystoquicklymake selectionswhileperforming,butonlyQuickAccessmodeletsyoustoreprogramsandsetups togetherforinstantaccess.OnthePC3,weincludedseveralfactorypresetQAbanksthatare organizedintousefulgroupingsofsoundsthatwethinkyoullfindconvenient.BelowistheQA page:

ThetoplineofthepagedisplaysthecurrentmodeandthecurrentQAbank. UsingQuickAccessmodeinvolvesselectingQuickAccess(QA)banksfromthelistoffactory presetoruserprogrammedbanks.UsetheChan/LayerbuttonstoscrollthroughtheQAbanks. Youcanalsousethebankselectionshortcut:pressthe+/orClearbuttononthealphanumeric pad,andyoullbepromptedtoenterabanknumber.Typethedesirednumberonthe alphanumericpad,thenpressEnter.Thebankisselected,andyoureturntotheQuickAccess modepage. Eachbankcontainstenmemoryslots,orentries,whereyoucanstoreprogramsorsetupsinany combination.Anyprogramorsetupinthecurrentlyselectedbankcanbeselectedwiththe numericbuttons0through9. Ifthehighlightedentrycontainsaprogram,thebottomrighthandfieldofthepagedisplaysthe channelonwhichtheprogramentriesaretransmitted(thischannelisthecurrentchannelin Programmode).Ifthehighlightedentrycontainsasetup,thebottomrighthandfieldofthepage displaysthewordSetup. TheMIDIProgramChangecommandsthatthePC3receiveswheninQuickAccessmodecan differfromthoseinProgramorSetupmode.Thisdependsonthesettingyouhaveforthe PrgChgModeparameterontheMIDIMode:ReceivepageinMIDImode.IfPrgChgModeissetto ExtendedorK2600,thePC3respondstoProgramChangecommandsasitwouldinProgramor Setupmode.IfPrgChgModeissettoQAccess,thePC3respondstoProgramChange commandsbycallingupthecorrespondingentryinthecurrentQAbank,nottheactual programnumberoftheentry.

8-1

Quick Access Mode The QA Editor

Soft Buttons In Quick Access Mode

UsetheOctavandOctav+softbuttonstotransposeupordownbyafulloctave.Pressingboth Octavbuttonssimultaneouslyreturnsthetranspositiontoitsoriginalsetting. PresstheInfosoftbuttontoseeallofthecontrollerassignmentsofthecurrentprogram.Scroll downthepageusingtheAlphaWheel,cursororthe/+buttons. TheXpose/Xpose+buttonsareashortcutforquicktranspositioninsemitone(halfstep) increments.YoucanusethemtotransposetheentirePC3asmuchasthreeoctavesupordown. Thebottomlineofthedisplayshowsthecurrentamountoftransposition(Xpose).Pressingboth Xposebuttonssimultaneouslyreturnsthetranspositiontozero.TheXposebuttonstranspose thePC3,aswellasanyMIDIdevicesconnectedtothePC3sMIDIOutport.Changingthe transpositionwiththesoftbuttonsalsochangestheTransposesettingonthe MIDIMode:TransmitpageinMIDImode.

The QA Editor
UsetheQAEditortocustomizeexistingQAbanks.EntertheQAeditorfromQAmodeby pressingtheEditbutton.

Thetoplinegivesyoutheusualmodereminder,thecurrentQAbank,andthecurrententry (correspondingnumericbuttonforthehighlightedobject.)Thecursorhighlightstheobject (programorsetup)thatsstoredinthecurrententry. Selecting A Quick Access Entry To Edit PressingtheChan/Layerbuttonsscrollsthroughthetenentriesthenumberofthecurrent entryisdisplayedinthetoprightcorner.Astheentrynumberchanges,thehighlightedobjects atthecenterofthepagechangeaswell,showingyouwhatsstoredineachentry.Onthepage above,forexample,entry0isthecurrententry. Selecting A Program For A Quick Access Entry Above,theTypefieldtellsyouthattheobjectstoredatentry0isaprogram.Thecursor highlightstheprogramsIDandname.UsetheAlphaWheelor/+buttonstoscrollthroughthe listofprograms.

8-2

Quick Access Mode The QA Editor

Selecting A Setup For A Quick Access Entry Ifyouwanttostoreasetupinthecurrententryinsteadofaprogram,presstheTypesoft buttonwhenyoudothis,noticethattheTypefieldchangefromProgramtoSetup(alsonotice thatthechannelindicatordisappears,sincesetupscantransmitoverseveralchannels).Thelist ofobjectschangesfromtheprogramlisttothesetuplist.Justaswithprograms,thecursor highlightsthesetupsIDandname.UsetheAlphaWheelor/+buttonstoscrollthroughthe setups.YoucanalsousethealphanumericpadfollowedbytheEnterbuttontochooseaSetup byID#. KeepinmindthatyoucanhavebothsetupsandprogramsinthesameQAbank. Naming And Saving A Quick Access Bank Whenyouvefilledeachentrywiththeobjectyouwant,presstheNamesoftbuttonifyouwant torenamethebank,orpresstheSavesoftbuttontobeginthesaveprocedure.Or,presstheExit buttontoexittheQAeditor,andtheSaveChanges?dialogcomesup.

8-3

Quick Access Mode The QA Editor

8-4

Effects and Effect Mode Effects Overview

Chapter 9 Effects and Effect Mode

ThePC3boastsapowerfuleffectsprocessorthatputsthepowerofanentirestudioatyour fingertips.ThischaptercontainseverythingyoullneedtoknowtousethePC3seffectsand ChainEditortotheirfullestpotentials. ReadtheEffectsOverviewsectionbelowforadescriptionofthedifferencesbetweenInsert, Aux,andMastereffects.ThissectionalsoexplainstheconceptsofeffectsChains,signal flow,andDSPunits. ReadtheEffectModeandtheEffectsPagessection(seepage 94)fordetailsonquickly changingAuxeffectssettingsinProgrammode.Thissectioncanalsobeusedareferencefor theeffectspagesinSetupmodeandSongmode.Fordetailsoneffectsparametersinthe ProgramEditorseeTheProgramFX(PROGFX)Page on page 647,andTheLayerFX (LYR_FX)Page on page 649. ReadtheTheChainEditorsection(seepage 99)forinstructionsonhowtoeditandcreate yourowneffectsChains(presets.) Lastly,theEffectsParameterssection(seepage 912)containsdetailsontheparametersfor eachtypeofeffectavailableintheChainEditor.

Effects Overview
ThissectiongivesanoverviewofthebasiceffectstypesavailableinthePC3,PC3effectsChains (presets,)effectsroutinginthePC3,effectsprocessorpowermanagement,andoverridingthe AuxChainsstoredwitheachProgram.ReadtheInsertEffectsandAuxEffectssectionstolearn aboutthetwotypesofeffectsthatcanbeappliedduringdifferentstagesofaprogramssignal path.

Insert Effects
InsertEffectsareplaceddirectlyinthesignalpathattheoutputofasingleprogram.These InsertEffectscanapplytoeitherthewholeprogramoronlytoselectedlayerswithinthe program.Eachprogramlayerandprogramonazone/trackcanhaveitsownInsertEffectchain (upto11insertchainscanbeloaded,dependingonavailableprocessingpower,seeDSPUnits ManageandDistributeProcessorPowerforEffects on page 93fordetails.)

Aux Effects
AuxEffects,unlikeInsertFX,arenotappliedtothewholeoutputofaprogram,butareblended inwiththeoriginalunprocessedprogramsound.EachProgram,SetuporSonghastwostereo AuxSendsthatgototheAux1andAux2Effects.TheAuxEffectsareglobal(availabletoall channels/zones/tracksatthesametime,)andtherecanbeonlyonesetofAuxeffects(Aux1and Aux2)loadedatatime.EachAuxeffectcanbesettobeappliedeitherpreorpostInsertEffect (seeSignalFlowbelowfordetails.) InProgrammode,theAuxEffectscomefromtheprogramloadedonthecurrentlyselected MIDIchannel.InSongandSetupmodes,thereisaparametertoselectthetrackorzonewhose programspecifiestheAuxEffects.Alternatively,theAuxEffectsstoredwitheachprogramcan betemporarilyoverriddenbyusingtheEffectbuttoninProgrammode,orsetdirectlyonthe AUX1andAUX2pagesinSongorSetupmode(seeAuxOverride on page 93fordetails.)

9-1

Effects and Effect Mode Effects Overview

Master Effects
AfterthesignalgoesthroughtheInsertandAuxeffects,themasterEQ/compressoreffectsare appliedgloballytothesignalatthemainoutputs.NeithertheEQnortheCompressoruseup anyDSPunits,soyouneedntaccountforthemwhenmanagingDSPunitsforeffectsprocessing power.SeeTheMasterEffectsPage on page 98fordetails.

Chains
TheobjectusedforInsertandAuxEffectsisreferredtoasaChain.AChaincontainsasingle effectboxorisaseriesofconnectedeffectboxes.EachprogramcanhaveonemainInsertChain, orindividuallayerswithinaprogramcanhavetheirownInsertChainthatwillbeusedinstead oftheprogramsmainInsertChain.Programs,SetupsandSongscaneachhavetwoAuxChains. YoucanselectfromthesamesetofChainstouseforbothAuxandInsertEffects.(Up11Insert ChainsandtwoAuxChainscanbeactiveatatime,dependingonDSPunitusage,seeDSPUnits ManageandDistributeProcessorPowerforEffects on page 93fordetails.)

Signal Flow
Whenusingeffects,itisimportanttounderstandhowyoursignalisbeingprocessed.Foreach Program,zone,ortrack,yoursignalcanbesenttotheAuxeffectsbeforeorafterbeing processedbytheProgramsInserteffects.Thediagrambelowisforaprogramthatdoesnotuse layerspecificeffects,showingthepossibleroutesthatthesignalofaprogramcanflow throughtoreachthedifferenttypesofeffects.Followtheappropriateroutetohelpvisualizethe stagesinwhichthesignalisbeingprocessed.Acirclewithanarrowthroughitshowsapoint wherethesignallevelcanbeadjusted.Dashedlinesindicatedifferentroutesthatthesignalcan flow(basedontheAuxpre/postsettingsandMasterFXOrdersettings.Acircledsigma() showswheresignalsaremixedtogether.
Comp EQ Output Comp

Program
Pre Send Levels

Insert Chain
Post

Master FX Order

EQ

AUX 1 Chain AUX 2 Chain Whenusingeffects,thefirstdecisiontomakeiswhetheryouwanttouseanInsertorAuxeffect (seetheInsertEffectsandAuxEffectssectionsabove.)Ifyouareusingbothtypesofeffectsfora program,zone,ortrackinSongMode,youcanchoosetohaveyoursignalsenttotheAux effectsbeforeorafterbeingprocessedbytheInserteffects.(SeeSendLevelsandPre/Post Ins. on page 97fordetails.)WhenyoursignalissenttotheAuxEffectsafterbeingprocessedby theProgramsInsertEffects,thisiscalledapplyingtheAuxEffectpostInsert.Whenyoursignal issenttotheAuxEffectsbeforebeingprocessedbytheProgramsInsertEffects,thisiscalled applyingtheAuxEffectpreInsert. WhenanAuxEffectisappliedpostInsert,thewet(processed)Auxsignalhasaseriesofeffects appliedtoiti.e.,cascadedeffects.Thismeansthatthesignalthatisblendedbackinfromthe resultoftheAuxEffectwillalsocontaintheresultoftheInsertEffect. WhenanAuxEffectisappliedpreInsert,thewetAuxsignalhasnoInserteffectappliedtoit, andthefinaloutputhasparalleleffectsi.e.,distincteffects.Thismeansthatthesignalthatis blendedbackinfromtheresultoftheAuxEffectwillnotcontaintheresultoftheInsertEffect.

9-2

Effects and Effect Mode Effects Overview

Thediagrambelowshowsthesignalpathsforamultitimbralsetuporsong.Thefirsttwozones (ortracksinSongMode)arediagramedasanexample(representedbydarklines.)The14 additionalavailablezones(ortracksinSongmode)arerepresentedbygraylines(labeledas Etc.)NoticethateachProgramhasitsownInsertChain,butallProgramssharethesametwo AuxChains: Program

ZONE/TRACK 1 Pre Send Levels

Insert Chain
Post

Comp

EQ Output Comp

Program
ZONE/TRACK 2 Pre Send Levels

Insert Chain
Post

Master FX Order

EQ

Etc.

AUX 1 Chain AUX 2 Chain

DSP Units - Manage and Distribute Processor Power for Effects

EachEffectChainiscomposedofaneffectboxoraseriesofeffectboxes.Eacheffectboxusesa certainamountofthePC3seffectsprocessingpower,representedasanumberofDSPunits. ThenumberofDSPunitsusedbyaneffectboxorChainreflectshowcomplextheeffects algorithmismorecomplexeffectsrequiremoreprocessingpower.Youcanuseupto16DSP unitsatatimesharedbetweenalleffects(exceptMastereffects,whichdontuseanyDSPunits.) SeeTheEffectsEnablePage on page 94fordetailsonhowthePC3automaticallymanagesthe usageofDSPunits(thedefaultbehavior,)andhowyoucanoverridethisbehaviorandmanually manageusageofDSPunits.

Aux Override
Normally,inProgrammodetheAuxEffectsChainsarespecifiedbytheprogramonthecurrent channelor,inSetupmodeandSongmode,bytheprogramonthespecifiedAuxEffects channel.AuxoverrideallowsyoutoauditionandselectanewAuxchainwithouteditinga program.InEffectsmode,theSetupEditor,orSongmode,presstheAUXFX1orAUXFX2soft buttonstosetoverridesforAuxChainselectionandotherAuxEffectsparameters.TheChain specifiedfortheAuxoverrideisusedinsteadofthechainofthecurrentchannel(orinsteadof thespecifiedAuxEffectschannelinSetupandSongmode.)Also,sendlevelsandother parametersnormallyspecifiedwithinindividualprogramscanbesettofixedvaluesontheAux Overridepages.SeeTheAux1OverrideandAux2OverridePages on page 95fordetails.

9-3

Effects and Effect Mode Effect Mode and the Effects Pages

Effect Mode and the Effects Pages

InProgrammode(orwithaprogramselectedinQuickAccessmode)presstheEffectmodebuttonto enterEffectmode.Effectmodeallowsyoutoquicklychangeprogrameffectsettingswithout enteringtheProgramEditor,andsetMastereffects.YoucansetDSPunitusageforprogramson eachMIDIchannel.YoucanoverridethecurrentAuxChains(setbytheprogramonthe currentlyselectedMIDIchannel)byselectingnewAuxeffectChains.Youcanalsooverride otherAuxsettingsthatareusuallysetbytheprogramonthecurrentlyselectedMIDIchannel, suchasphysicalaudiooutputsettings,controllerassignmentsforAuxsendlevels,andAux sendlevelsandpre/postinsertsettingsforprogramsoneachMIDIchannel. MostofthesettingsinEffectmodeapplyonlytoProgrammodeandprogramsselectedfrom QuickAccessmode(seeTheMasterEffectsPagesectionbelowforanexception.)Setupmodeand SongmodehavetheirownEffectspageswhichareverysimilartothepagesinEffectsmode. Thefollowingsectionscanbeusedasareferenceforthosepages,anydifferenceswillbenoted. Note:ThesettingsmadeinEffectmodecanbesavedbysavingthemastertable.Bydefault,the mastertableissavedwhenexitingMasterMode(seeSave on page 1117andMasterTableLock (MasterLock) on page 113fordetails.)Ifyoudontsavethemastertable,theEffectmode settingswillreturntotheirdefaultsthenexttimethePC3isturnedon.Becareful,donot accidentallysavetheEffectmodesettingsifyoudonotwishto.Thesettingsontheeffects pagesforSetupmodeandSongmodearesavedwitheachSetupandSong.

The EffectsEnable Page

NOTE:InSetupmodeandSongmode,thispagecorrespondsinappearanceandfunctiontotheFXpage, thoughtheFXpageworksonapersetup/songbasis.

PressingtheCHANFXsoftbuttoncallsuptheEffectsEnablepage.Thispageisusedtomanage anddistributeeffectsprocessingpower(DSPunits)amongtheprogramsoneachMIDIchannel. BydefaultthePC3automaticallymanagestheusageofDSPunits,seeDefaultDSPUnitUsage belowfordetails.YoucanalsooverridethedefaultDSPunitusagebyusingtheEffectsEnable page,seeManualManagementofDSPUnitUsagebelowfordetails. About DSP Units EachEffectChainiscomposedofaneffectboxoraseriesofeffectboxes.Eacheffectboxusesa certainamountofthePC3seffectsprocessingpower,representedasanumberofDSPunits. ThenumberofDSPunitsusedbyaneffectboxorChainreflectshowcomplextheeffects algorithmismorecomplexeffectsrequiremoreprocessingpower.Youcanuseupto16DSP unitsatatimesharedbetweenalleffects(exceptMastereffects,whichdontuseanyDSPunits.) Default DSP Unit Usage InProgramMode,theprogramonthecurrentlyselectedMIDIchannelwillhavepriorityfor usingDSPunits,followedbyprogramsonthelowesttohighestMIDIchannel.ThePC3loads

9-4

Effects and Effect Mode Effect Mode and the Effects Pages

effectsforprogramsoneachofthe16MIDIchannelsuntilallofthe16DSPunitsareusedup.In SetupandSongMode,theMIDIchannelofthelowestusedzone/trackwillhavepriorityfor usingDSPunits.Thiszone/trackwilluseasmanyDSPunitsasitneedforitseffects,thenthe MIDIchannelofthenexthighestusedzone/trackwilluseDSPunitstoloaditseffects,andthis continuesuntilalloftheDSPunitsareusedup. Manual Management of DSP Unit Usage YoucanoverridethedefaultDSPunitusageandmanuallycontrolwhichchannelscanuseDSP unitsandwhichcannot.UsetheEffectsEnablepagetoturnonoroffDSPunitusageforthe programoneachMIDIchannel. OntheEffectsEnablepage,eachchannelcanbesettoYtouseDSPunitsforthatchannel,ortoN tonotuseDSPunitsforthatchannel.SomechannelssettoYmaybedisplayedas(Y).This meansthattherearenotenoughDSPunitsavailableforthatchannel,andthatchannelseffects arenotloaded.Usethecursorbuttonstoselecteachchannel,thenusetheAlphaWheelor/+ buttonstosettheselectedchanneltoY orN. Asthecursorismovedfromlefttorightonthesepages,theInsertandAuxEffectsChainsfor eachchannelaredisplayedonthebottomofthepage.(AuxChainsareonlydisplayedifthechannel isthecurrentchannelinProgramModeorthespecifiedAuxEffectschannelinSetuporSongmode.)The numberofDSPunitsrequiredtoloadeffectsforthecursorhighlightedchannelisshownatthe topofthepage. Note:WhenachannelisntallocatingDSPunitsbecauseitssettoNor(Y)(becauseresources areexhausted,)thechannelstillsendsitssignaltotheAuxsends.IfthechannelsettoNor(Y) hasitsAuxsendsturnedup,andtheAuxeffectisonachannelsettoY,thechannelsettoNor (Y)willstillbeprocessedbytheAuxeffectsonthechannelsettoY.(OntheEffectsEnablepage,the channelwithaboxarounditschannelnumbercontainstheAuxChainscurrentlybeingused.Thisisthe currentlyselectedchannelinProgrammode,orthespecifiedAuxEffectchannelinSetupandSong mode.)

The Aux 1 Override and Aux 2 Override Pages

NOTE:InSetupmodeandSongmode,thesepagescorrespondinappearanceandfunctiontotheAUX1 andAUX2pages,thoughtheyworkonapersetup/songbasis. PressingtheAUXFX1softbuttonortheAUXFX2softbuttoncallsup,respectively,theAux1 OverridepageortheAux2Overridepage.UsethesepagestochangeAuxeffectsettings withoutenteringtheProgramEditor. EachPrograminthePC3canbesavedwithtwoAuxeffectschains.InProgramMode,the programonthecurrentMIDIchanneldeterminestheAuxeffectchainsusedforprogramsonall channels.(InSetupandSongmodeAuxchainsaredeterminedbytheprogramonthespecifiedAux Effectschannel.)TochangeAuxeffectsettingswithoutenteringtheProgramEditor,enterEffects ModeandgototheAux1orAux2Overridepage.(GototheAUX1andAUX2pagesinSongmode ortheSetupEditor.)YoucanselectadifferentAuxeffectchain,setAuxsendlevelsforprograms oneachchannel,andsetotherbasicAuxeffectparameters.InProgramMode,theseparameters remainattheiroverridevaluesuntilthePC3isrestarted,oruntilyouresettheminEffectmode tothedefaultvalueslistedinthetablebelow.(InSetupandSongmodethesesettingsaresavedwith eachSetuporSong.)

9-5

Effects and Effect Mode Effect Mode and the Effects Pages

Parameter Override Chain Output Mod Override Send Level Pre-/Post- Insert

Range of Values No, Yes Chain List auto, Pri., Sec. Control Source List [p], -96 to 24 dB [p], pst, pre

Default No 0 None auto None [p] [p]

Override ThisparameterswitchesonorofftheAuxoverride.SetOverridetoYestoselectanoverride AuxChainonthispage(theChainparameterappears,seebelow.)SetOverridetoNotousethe auxchainsoftheprogramonthecurrentchannel(ortheprogramonthespecifiedAuxEffects channelinSetuporSongmode.)IfOverrideissettoNo,thetoplineofthepagedisplaystheAux Chainthatisloadedforthecurrentprogram,aswellasthecurrentchannel.Inthecaseofthe pageshownabove,theAux1Chainofthecurrentprogramis906MediumHall2,andthe currentchannelis6. NoticethatinProgrammode,ifanAuxeffectisoverriddeninEffectmode,thetoplineofthe PROGFX(orLYR_FX)page(intheProgramEditor)indicatesthatcorrespondingChaindoesnot useupanyDSPunits.SincetheChainspecifiedfortheprogramisnotapplied,thePC3doesnot allocateresourcesforit.

Chain

WhenOverrideissettoYes,youcanselectanoverrideAuxChainforthepagescorresponding Auxbus.ThisparameterisnotvisiblewhenOverrideissettoNo.

9-6

Effects and Effect Mode Effect Mode and the Effects Pages

Output ThisparameterspecifiesthephysicalaudiooutputpairforthepagescorrespondingAux Chainsoutput.ThesettingsPri.andSec.refer,respectively,totheprimaryandsecondary physicalaudiooutputsofthePC3(labeledMAINandAUXonthebackpanel.)Setting Outputtoautousestheoutputpairspecifiedintheprogramonthecurrentchannel(orthe programonthespecifiedAuxEffectschannelinSetuporSongmode). Mod Override ThisparametercanbeusedtooverridetheModControlsourceoftheprogramonthecurrent channel(ortheprogramonthespecifiedAuxEffectschannelinSetuporSongmode.)Setaphysical controllerorotherModControlsourcetoscaletheAuxsendlevelbetween96dBandthevalue setfortheauxsendlevel.AsettingofNoneyieldsnooverrideinModControlsource,anduses theModControlsourcespecifiedintheprogramonthecurrentchannel(ortheprogramonthe specifiedAuxEffectschannelinSetuporSongmode.) Send Levels and Pre/Post Ins. Onthebottomhalfofthepage,therearetwoparametersforeachofthe16MIDIchannels:Send Level(toprow)andPre/PostInsert(bottomrow). ThesettingforeachSendLevelparameterdeterminesifeachchannelsAuxSendLevelis overridden,andifso,bywhatvalue.Avalueof[p]meansnooverride(i.e.,usethevalues specifiedintheprogram).Avalueof[p]canbesetbyentering99withthealphanumericpad andthenpressingtheEnterbutton,orbyusingtheAlphawheelor/+buttonstoscrollbelow 96db. Note:InmostfactoryROMprograms,thesendlevelforAux1iscontrolledbyanAuxmodset toMIDI28(sliderI.)Ifasendleveloverrideisset,itwillusuallybescaledbytheentryvaluefor sliderIeachtimeaprogramisselected.Todefeatthisbehavior,settheModOverrideparameter toON,thensettheSendLeveloverridevalue. ThesettingforeachPre/PostInsertparameterdeterminesiftheAuxroutingforeachchannelis overridden,andifso,bywhatrouting.PremeansthattheAuxSendtakesplacebeforeany InsertEffectisapplied,whereasasettingofPstmeansthattheAuxSendtakesplacepostInsert Effect.(Ofcourse,iftheprogramonthechannelhasnoInsertEffectsloaded,thenthis parameterwillmakenodifference.)Avalueof[p]meansnooverride(i.e.,usethevalues specifiedintheprogram).

9-7

Effects and Effect Mode Effect Mode and the Effects Pages

The Master Effects Page

NOTE:InSetupmodeandSongmode,thispagecorrespondsinappearanceandfunctiontothe MASTEREFFECTSpage,whichworksonapersetup/songbasis. PressingtheMASTERsoftbuttoncallsuptheMasterEffectspage.TheMasterEffectspage containsthesettingsforthemasterEQandCompressor.Whenenabled,themastereffectsare appliedtoallprogramsinProgramMode.(InSetupandSongmode,eachsetupandsongcanhaveits ownmastereffectssettingsorusethemastereffectssettingsfromEffectmode,seeModebelowfordetails.) Thepageappearsasshownbelow:

Parameter Mode Order Master FX

Range of Values Master, Setup Compressor => EQ, EQ => Compressor Master FX Enabled, Master FX Bypassed

Default Master Compressor => EQ Master FX Enabled

ThetwoboxesinthechainontheMasterEffectspagearethemasterCompressorandEQ Effects.PresstheEditbuttonwhileeitheroftheseboxesisselectedtoedittheparametersforthe boxseffect.SeeEqualizers(EQ) on page 915andCompressors,Expanders,andGates on page 916 fordescriptionontheEQandCompressorparameters. Mode ThesettingfortheMasterEffectscanbesetdirectlyonthispage,oroptionallyinthecontrol setup.InProgrammode,tosetuptheMasterEffectsfromEffectmode,settheModeparameter toMaster.Tousethesettingsinthecurrentcontrolsetup,selectSetup.ControllingtheMaster Effectsfromthecontrolsetupallowsforconvenientswitchingbetweendifferentconfigurations. SeeControlSetup on page 69details.(InSetupandSongmodes,asettingofMasterusesthemaster effectsettingssetinEffectMode,whileasettingofSetupusesthemastereffectssettingsforthecurrent SetuporSong.) Order UsetheOrderparametertodeterminetheorderofthetwoeffects.SettingOrdertoCompressor =>EQroutessignalthroughtheCompressorfirst,andthenthroughtheEQ.SettingOrdertoEQ =>CompressorroutessignalthroughtheEQfirst,andthenthroughtheCompressor. Master FX TheMasterFXparameterdetermineswhethertheMasterEffectsareenabledorbypassed. SettingMasterFXtoMasterFXEnabledenablestheMasterEffects.SettingMasterFXtoMaster FXBypassedbypassestheMasterEffects,andeffectivelyremovesthemfromthesignalpath.

9-8

Effects and Effect Mode The Chain Editor

The Chain Editor

PressingtheEditbuttonwhileaChain(otherthan0None)ishighlightedonanyofthe variouseffectspageswillcalluptheChaineditor.FromtheProgrameditor,theprograms InsertandAuxChainscanbeeditedfromthePROGFXandLYRFXpages.InEffectmode ChainsselectedforAuxoverridescanbeeditedfromtheAux1OverrideandAux2Override pages.InSetupandSongmodeChainsselectedforAuxoverridescanbeeditedfromtheAUX1 andAUX2pages. AChainismadeupofoneormoreeffectboxes,witheachboxcontainingasingleeffect.You canhaveupto16effectboxesinaChain.Thesettingsforalloftheparametersofeacheffectbox arealsostoredwithintheChain.Thereare15ModControlsthatallowforrealtimecontrolover anyparameterfromanyeffectboxintheChain.PerChainControlsourcesarealsoprovidedto beusedasinputstotheeffectMods(twoFXLFOs,twoFXASRs,andfourFXFUNs.)Thesework similarlytotheLFOs,ASRsandFUNsinProgrammode,butareonlyavailableforusewiththe effectMods.

The MAIN Page

IntheChainEditor,pressingtheMAINsoftbuttoncallsuptheMAINpage.TheMAINpageis whereyouconfigurethelengthofaChainandselecttheindividualeffectsthatmakeupthe Chain.TheChaineditorMAINpageoftheChain269PnoEnhancRvb3appearsasshown below:

AtthetoprightofthedisplayisthenumberofDSPunitsusedbythecurrentlyselectedeffect box,andbytheChainasawhole.2/5Unitsindicatesthatthecurrenteffectboxisusingtwo DSPunitsandtheChainisusingatotaloffiveDSPunitsforallofitseffectsboxes.Therearea totalof16unitsavailableforalloftheChainsthatarecurrentlyloadedbyprogramsandany activeAuxoverridesfromSetup/Song/Effectsmode. NOTE:Insomeconfigurations,notall16unitsareavailableforusewithmultiuniteffectsbecauseofthe waytheDSPisallocatedinternally. LikeallotherrepresentationsofsignalpathsinthePC3display,theprogramsignalmovesfrom lefttorightthroughtheChain.Usethecursorbuttonstoselectaneffectboxoremptyspotinthe Chain.Theeffectloadedintotheselectedeffectboxcanbechangedbynumericentry,withthe AlphaWheel,orwiththe+/buttons;andcanbechangedwitheithertheeffectboxortheEffect fieldatthebottomofthepagehighlighted.The+/doublebuttonpresswilljumptothenext effectcategory. PressingtheInsertsoftbuttonaddsaneweffectboxtotheChaininthecurrentlyselected blockslot,andpushesthecurrentlyselectedeffectboxdowntheChaintotheright.(Ifyouhave runoutofDSPunits,youwillnotbeabletocreateadditionaleffectsboxes.)PressingtheRemovesoft buttontakesthecurrentlyselectedeffectoutoftheChain.

9-9

Effects and Effect Mode The Chain Editor

Editing Effect-boxes Toedittheparametersofaneffect,selectitseffectboxontheMAINpageandpresstheEdit button.Foreacheffect,thereareoneormorepagesofparametersthatarespecifictothateffect. SeeEffectsParameters on page 912fordetailsonparametersforeachtypeofeffect.Any parametercontrolledbyaneffectModwilldisplayavalueofFxModandcannotbeedited.To returntotheMAINpageofthechaineditor,presstheExitbutton.

The MOD Pages

Therearethreepagesforconfiguringeffectsmods:MOD1,MOD2,andMOD3.Allthreepages areessentiallyidenticalinappearanceandfunction.SeebelowforanexampleMODpage:

Box TheBoxparameterspecifieswhicheffectboxintheChaintowhichtheModwillbeapplied. Param TheParamparameterselectswhichparameterofthespecifiedboxseffectwillbemodulated. Adjust TheAdjustparametersetsafixedvalueforthespecifiedparameter(Param)thatisapplied beforeanymodulation. Source TheSourceparameterdeterminestheControlsourcethatwillmodulatetheparameter(Param) inrealtime.ThiscanbeanyofthenormalchannelControlsources(sliders,modwheel,pedals, etc.)oroneoftheChainspecificControlsources(FXLFOs,FXASRs,andFXFUNs). Depth TheDepthparameterdeterminestherangeofmodulationthattheControllerwillapply.When theControlsourcehasavalueof0,theparameters(Params)valuewillbetheAdjustvalue. Whenthecontrolsourceisallthewayup,theparameters(Params)valuewillbetheAdjust valueplustheDepthvalue.

9-10

Effects and Effect Mode The Chain Editor

FXLFO, FXASR, and FXFUN pages

TheFXLFO,FXASR,andFXFUNpagesarethepagesfromwhichyouedittheEffectsonly Controlsources.TheseareControlsourcesthatcanbeusedbytheeffectsModsinthecurrent Chain.TheparametersonthesepagesworkexactlylikethoseofthecorrespondingControl sourcesinprogrammode(seeTheLFOPage on page 638,TheASRPage on page 640,andThe Function(FUN)Page on page 641inChapter 6,ProgramMode).

INFO
PresstheINFOsoftbuttontogototheINFOpagewhereyoucaneditthecontrollerassignment infoforthecurrentChain.InfoallowsyoutoaddadescriptionforeachFXModyouhave assigned.WhenaProgramorSetupusesaChainthathasbeenstoredwithinfo,youcanview theinfobypressingtheInfosoftbuttonontheProgrammodeorSetupmodemainpages.This allowsyoutoeasilyviewwhichChainparametersarecontrolledbywhichassignedphysical controllersorMIDICCnumbers. OntheINFOpage,usetheChan/LayerbuttonstoscrollthroughthecurrentChainslistof controllerassignmentinfo.EachassignmentinfoentryhasaMIDIcontrollernumberandaText parametertodescribewhattheassignmentcontrols.OneinfoentrycanbemadeforeachMIDI CCnumber. Toeditthetextofacontrollerassignment,presstheTextsoftbutton.Tocreateanewcontroller assignmentinfoentry,presstheNewsoftbutton(youwillbepromptedforaMIDIcontroller number.)Tocreateanewcontrollerassignmentinfoentrywiththesametextasthecurrentinfo entry,presstheDupsoftbutton(youwillbepromptedforanewMIDIcontrollernumber,only oneinfoentrycanbemadeforeachMIDICCnumber.)Todeletethecurrentcontroller assignmentinfoentry,presstheDeletesoftbutton(youwillbepromptedtoconfirmorcancel.) ToreturntotheChaineditorpresstheDonesoftbuttonortheExitbutton.See Export on page 1313fordetailsonexportingChaininfo.

9-11

Effects and Effect Mode Effects Parameters

Effects Parameters
ThissectioncontainsdescriptionsofthePC3smanyeffectsparameters,andinstructionsonhow tousethem.Readthroughthissectiontogetagoodgeneralunderstandingoftheparameters. Thedescriptionsheredonotincludealloftheparametersassociatedwitheveryeffect,and someeffectsmaynothavesomeoftheparametersdescribedherefortheircategory.Amore completereference,witheveryeffectandthemeaningandrangeofeveryparameter,arranged intheordertheyappearonthescreen,canbefoundintheKSP8AlgorithmReferenceGuideonthe Kurzweilwebsite,www.kurzweil.com.

General Parameters
Thereareanumberofparametersthatarecommontoalloralmostalleffects,andwelldeal withthosefirst. Wet/Drybalancesthelevelsoftheprocessedandunprocessedsignalsoutputfromtheeffect. Wetrepresentstheprocessedsignal,whiledryrepresentstheunprocessedsignal.Therangeis 0%wet(thesignalisunprocessed)through100%wet(nodrysignalispresent).Valuesbetween 0%and100%blendthetwosignals,forexample,at20%theoutputsignalis20%wet (processed)and80%dry(unprocessed.)Asettingof50%wetmeansthedryandprocessed signalsareroughlyequalinlevel.Insomeeffects,separateWet/Dryparametersareprovidedfor theLeftandRightinputchannels.Insomecases,thisparameterscanhavenegativevalues, whichindicatethattheWetsignalispolarityinverted. WhenaneffectwiththeWet/DryparameterisusedinChainthathasbeenselectedasanAux effect,Wet/Dryisautomaticallysetto100%wetandcannotbeadjusted.Thisisbecausewhen usinganAuxeffect,thedrysignalisalreadyeffectivelyat100%onthemainaudiobus(not routedthroughtheAuxeffect.)Inthiscase,turninguptheAuxsendlevelwillblendthe100% wetsignal(fromtheAuxbus)withthedrysignalonthemainaudiobus. OutGainsetsthegainattheoutputofaneffect. In/Outenablesordisablestheeffect.YoucanthinkofitasaWet/Dryparameterwithonlytwo positions:100%(In)and0%(Out). HFDamping(highfrequencydamping)isthecutoff(3dB)frequencyofa6dB/octavelowpass filterthatsinsertedbeforetheprocessor.Highfrequenciesabovethesetcutofffrequencywillbe filteredout.Inthecaseofprocessorswheremultipleiterationsofthesignalareheard,suchasin adelay,eachiterationofthesignalwillpassthroughthefilter,andwillthereforebeduller. XCouple(CrossCouple).Instereoeffects,thiscontrolshowmuchofanysignalbeingfedback isgoingtothechanneloppositetotheonewhereitfirstappeared.At100%,allfeedbackfrom signalsattheleftinputgoestotherightchannelandviceversa,causingaspreadingorinthe caseofdelaylines,apingpongeffect.At0%,fedbacksignalsstaywiththechannelthey cameinon. A>Bcfg(configuration).Incombinationeffectsthatcontaintwo(ormore)components,the orderinwhichthesignalpassesthroughthetwocomponentscanbechangedwiththis parameter.Combinationeffectsareusuallynamedwitha>,asin484Flange>Shaper.For example,484Flange>Shapercanbeconfiguredsothesignalpassesthroughtheflangerfirst andthentheshaper,orthroughtheshaperfirstandthentheflanger.Thecfgparameter determinestheconfiguration,anditsvalueiscontextsensitiveinthisexample,thechoices wouldbeFl>ShpandShp>Fl. A/Dry>Bisalsofoundinmanycombinationeffects,andcontrolstheamountofsignalthatwill passdry(unprocessed)throughthefirstcomponentintothesecondcomponent.Different combinationeffectsusedifferentvariationsonthisparameter,dependingonthecontext.The rangeis0to100%.

9-12

Effects and Effect Mode Effects Parameters

Reverbs
RoomTypechangestheconfigurationoftheeffecttosimulateawidearrayofroomtypesand sizesincludingbooths,smallrooms,chambers,hallsandlargespaces.Becausethisparameter changesthestructureofthereverbeffect,youneedtobecarefulwhenassigningitaMOD changingitinrealtimewhilesignalispassingthroughitislikelytocauseaudibleartifacts. Roomtypesindifferenteffectswithsimilarnamesdonotnecessarilysoundthesame. RvrbTimeistheRT60thetimeittakesforthereverbtodecayto60dBbelowitsinitiallevel inseconds.Itisaccurateassumingthatseveralotherparameters(HFDamping,DiffScale,Size Scale,andDensity)areattheirnominallevels.ItisadjustableuptoInf,whichcreatesan infinitelysustainingreverb. LateRvbTimadjuststhebasicdecaytimeofthelateportionofthereverbafterdiffusion. LPreDlyandRPreDly(PreDelay)isthetimebetweenthestartofasoundandtheoutputof thefirstreverbreflectionsfromthatsound.Longerpredelayscanhelpmakelargerspaces soundmorerealistic.Longertimescanalsohelpimprovetheclarityofamixbyseparatingthe reverbsignalfromthedrysignal,sothedrysignalisnotobscured.Youcansetaseparatetime fortheleftandrightreverbsignalsusingLPreDlyandRPreDly. EarRefLvladjuststhemixleveloftheearlyreflectionportionofeffectswhichofferearly reflections. LateLvladjuststhemixlevelofthelatereverbportionofeffectswhichofferearlyreflections. DiffScalescalesthediffusionoftheearlyreflections,thatis,howspreadouttheyareasa groupovertime.Atverylowsettings,theearlyreflectionsstarttosoundquitediscrete,andat highersettingstheearlyreflectionsareseamless.Itisadjustablefrom0.00to2.00,with1.00 beingnominalforthegivenRoomType. Densitycontrolshowtightlytheearlyreflectionsarepackedintime.LowDensitysettings grouptheearlyreflectionsclosetogether,whilehighervaluesspreadthereflectionsfora smootherreverb.Itisadjustablefrom0.00to4.00,with1.00beingnominal(andusuallyoptimal) forthegivenRoomType. Expansecontrolstheamountoflatereverbenergybiasedtowardtheedgesofthestereoimage. Asettingof0%willbiasenergytowardsthecenter.Movingawayfrom0%willbiasenergy towardsthesides.Positiveandnegativevalueswillhaveadifferentcharacter. Buildadjuststheenvelopeofcertainportionsofthereverb.Positivevaluesspeedupthe envelope,andnegativevaluesslowitdown. SizeScalechangesthesizeofthecurrentroom.Alteringthisparameterwillchangethereverb timeandalsocausesomecolorationofthereverb.Itisadjustablefrom0.00to4.00,with1.00 beingnominal(andusuallyoptimal)forthegivenRoomType. InfinDecay,whenturnedOn,causesthereverbtailtodecayinfinitely.WhenitsOff,the decaytimeisdeterminedbytheRvrbTimeorLateRvbTimparameters.Thisisagood parametertocontrolwithafootswitch. WetBal(WetBalance).Somereverbeffectsareactuallytwostereoreverbsinone,witheachone receivingadifferentmonosignal.Thisbalancestheoutputsofthetworeverbs0%meansthey arebeingmixedequally.

9-13

Effects and Effect Mode Effects Parameters

Delays
TherearetwotypesoftapsintheMultitapdelays:TheLooptap,whichhasafeedbackloop backtoitsinput,andthenumberedtaps.Thenumberedtapscanbesingleiterationsortheycan repeataspartofaloop,buttheydonothaveindividualfeedbackpaths. Fdbk(Feedback)LevelcontrolstherepeatingfunctionoftheLoopTap.Asettingof0%means therewillonlybeasingledelay,whileasettingof100%meansthesignalkeepsrepeating withouteverstopping. Bothtypesoftapsareindividuallyadjustablefrom0to2.55seconds.TheLoopCrsandTapn Crs(nbeingthenumberofthetap)parameterssetthecoarsevalueoftheloopin20ms increments,whiletheLoopFineandTapnFineparameterssetthefinevaluein0.2ms increments. InDelayeffectsthatusetempotodeterminetaplengths,thereisaTempoparameterwhichcan besetfrom1to255BPMortoSystem.TheLoopLengthandTapnDelaysarethenexpressed inbeatsrelativetothatoverallTempo. Holdisaswitchthat,whenturnedon,locksanysignalcurrentlyinthedelayandplaysit untilHoldisturnedoff.WhenHoldison,nosignalcanenterthedelayandFeedbackissetto 100%.Agoodparametertocontrolwithafootswitch. DryBal(Balance)istheleft/rightbalanceofthedrysignal.At100%,onlytheleftdrysignal goestotheleftoutput,whileat100%onlytherightdrysignalpassestotherightoutput,andat 0%,equalamountsoftheleftandrightdrysignalspasstotheirrespectiveoutputs. TapnLevelisthelevelofeachnumberedtap,from0%to100%,relativetotheoveralloutputof theeffect. TapnBalistheleft/rightbalanceofeachofthenumberedtaps.At100%,onlytheleftchannelof tapngoestotheleftoutput,whileat100%onlytherightchanneloftapngoestotheright output.At0%,equalamountsoftheleftandrightchannelsofthetappasstotheirrespective outputs.Insomedelays,pairsoftaps(1and5,2and6,etc.)arecontrolledtogetherasstereo pairs. DelayScaleletsyouchangethelengthsofallthetapstogether.Itsrangeis0to10x. Note:ItispossibleforthePC3torunoutofdelaymemorywithovergeneroussettingsof DelayScaleorveryslowTempos.SomeDelayeffectswillsimplygotoamaximumvalueand staythere,whileinsome,acalculationismadethatautomaticallycutsthedelaytimesinhalf, therebymaintainingarelationshipwithtempo. Complex Echo Thiseffecthastwofeedbacktapsperchannelaswellasthreeindependenttaps,andalsoa feedbackdiffuserforsmearingthedelays.Feedbackline1feedsthesignalbacktothedelay inputofthesamechannel,whilefeedbackline2feedsthesignalbacktotheoppositechannel. FB2/FB1>FBisabalancecontrolbetweenfeedbacklines1and2.0%(minimum)turnsoff feedbackline2,onlyallowinguseoffeedbackline1.50%isanevenmixofbothlines,and100% (maximum)turnsoffline1. LDiffDlyandRDiffDlyadjuststhedelaylengthsofthediffusers.Rangeis0to100ms. DiffAmtadjuststhediffuserintensity.Rangeis0to100%. CFdbknDlyadjuststhedelaylengthoftheCchannelsnthfeedbacktap,fedbacktotheC channelsdelayinput.Rangeis0to2600ms.

9-14

Effects and Effect Mode Effects Parameters

Spectral Multitap Delays These4and6tapdelayshavetheirfeedbackandoutputtapsmodifiedwithshapersandfilters. Inthefeedbackpathofeachtapareadiffuser,hipassfilter,lopassfilter,andimager.Eachdelay taphasashaper,combfilter,andbalanceandlevelcontrols. FdbkImagesetstheamountthatthestereoimageisshiftedeachtimeitpassesthroughthe feedbackline.Rangeis100to100%. TapnShapradjuststheintensityoftheshaperateachoutputtap.Rangeis0.10to6.00 x. TapnPitchadjuststhefrequencyofthecombfilterateachoutputtap.RangeisC1toC8,in semitones. TapnPtAmtadjuststheintensityofthecombfilterateachoutputtap.Rangeis0to100%. Gated Ducking Delay Thisrunsthelastthingyouplayedthroughaloopingdelay,butonlyoutputsthedelaysignal whenyouarentplaying.GatedDuckingDelayisgreatforthatannouncersound,sound,sound, sopopularinMonsterTruckradiospots. DegenRegen Thisonesabigloopingdelaywithlotsofgain,distortionandfiltering,andwithacompressor tokeepitallundercontrol.

Equalizers (EQ)
ThePC3hasbothGraphicandParametricEQeffects.ParametricEQsectionsarealsofoundona numberofcombinationeffects. TheGraphicequalizerisavailableasstereo(linkedparametersforleftandright)ordualmono (independentcontrolsforleftandright).Ithas10bandpassfiltersperchannel,eachofwhose gainisadjustablefrom12dBto+24dB. Likeallgraphicequalizers,thefilterresponseisnotperfectlyflatwhenallgainsaresettothe samelevel(exceptat0dB),butratherhasripplefrombandtoband.Tominimizethisripple,itis besttocentertheoverallsettingsaround0dB. TheParametricequalizer(5BandEQ)hastwobandsofshelvingfiltersandthreebandsof trueparametricEQ. TrebFreqandBassFreqsetthecenterfrequenciesfortheshelvingfilters.Bothoftheseare adjustableoverthefullrangeof16to25088Hz,inincrementsofasemitone. TrebGainandBassGaincontroltheamountofcutorboostabove(Treb)orbelow(Bass)the centerfrequency.Therangeis79to+24dB. MidnGainsetsthecutorboostfortheparametricbandn,witharangeof79to+24dB. MidnFreqsetsthecenterfrequencyforparametricbandn,witharangeof16to25088Hz,in incrementsofasemitone. MidnWidthsetthebandwidthofthefilteronbandn,witharangeof0.01to5octaves.

9-15

Effects and Effect Mode Effects Parameters

Enhancers Enhancersmodifythespectralcontentoftheinputsignalbyboostingexistingspectralcontent, orstimulatingnewones.Twoandthreebandversionsareprovided. Driveadjuststheinputintoeachband.Increasingthedrivewillincreasetheeffects.Rangeis 79.0to24.0dB. Xferadjuststheintensityofthetransfercurves.Rangeis100to100%. EQ Morpher Thiseffectusestwofourbandbandpassfilters,AandB,andmovesbetweenthem.Thiscan produceveryconvincinghumanvocaltypesounds. FreqScaleoffsetsthefilterfrequenciesforeachsetoffilters.Aftersettingthefilterparameters (Freq,Gain,andWidth),theFreqScaleparameterswillmoveeachofthefourfilterfrequencies togetherbythesamerelativepitch.Rangeis8600to8600cents. MorphA>B.Whensetto0%theAparametersarecontrollingthefilters,andwhensetto 100%,theBparameterscontrolthefilters.Between0and100%,thefiltersareatinterpolated positions.WhenmorphingfromAtoBsettings,theAfilter#1willchangetotheBfilter#1,A filter#2movestoBfilter#2,andsoon.Rangeis0to100%.

Compressors, Expanders, and Gates

AwiderangeofCompressionandExpansioneffectsisavailableinthePC3.Thevariouseffects includedifferentcombinationsof: compressorswithsoftkneecharacteristicthecompressionactioncomesingraduallyas thesignallevelapproachesthethreshold compressorswithhardkneecharacteristicthecompressionactioncomesinabruptly whenthesignalreachesthethreshold expanders multibandcompressorsthatbreakthesignalupintothreefrequencybandsandcompress themallseparately sidechainsoroutputEQs reverbsandcompressorsincombination gates gatedreverbs

AlloftheCompressioneffectsusetheseparameters: FdbkComprs(FeedbackCompression)selectswhethertousefeedforward(setthistoOut)or feedback(setthistoIn)compression.Thefeedforwardconfigurationusestheinputsignalas asidechainsource,whichisusefulwhenthecompressorhastoactreallyquickly.Thefeedback configurationusesthecompressoroutputasthesidechainsource,whichlendsitselftomore subtle,butnotasquickreacting,compression. Atk(Attack)Timeforthecompressorisadjustablefrom0.0to228.0ms. Rel(Release)Timeforthecompressorisadjustablefrom0to3000ms. SmoothTimesmoothstheoutputoftheexpandersenvelopedetectorbyputtingalowpassfilter inthecontrolsignalpath.SmoothingwillaffecttheAttackorReleasetimesonlywhenthis parameterislongerthanoneoftheothertimes.Therangeis0.0to228.0ms. SignalDly(Delay)putsasmalldelayinthesignalrelativetothesidechainprocessing,sothat thecompressor(orgate)knowswhattheinputsignalisgoingtobebeforeithastoactonit.

9-16

Effects and Effect Mode Effects Parameters

Thismeansthecompressioncankickinbeforeanattacktransientarrives.Inthe SoftKneeCompressandHardKneeCompresseffects,delayisreallyonlyusefulinfeedforward configuration(FdbkComprsisOut).Forothercompressors,thedelaycanbeusefulin feedbackconfiguration(FdbkComprsisIn).Therangeis0to25ms. Ratioistheamountofgainreductionimposedonthecompressedsignal,adjustablefrom1.0:1 (noreduction)to100:1,andInf:1. ThresholdisthelevelindBFS(decibelsrelativetofullscale)abovewhichthesignalbeginstobe compressed.Adjustablefrom79.0to0dB. MakeUpGainallowsadditionaloutputgaintocompensateforgainreductioninthe compressor.ItisessentiallythesameparameterasOutGain,withwhichitissummed.The minimumis79.0,andthemaximumsummedgain(MakeUpGain+OutGain)is+24.0dB. Expansion EffectscontainingExpandershavethesecontrols: AtkorExpAtk(Attack),howfasttheexpanderturnsoffwhentheinputsignalrisesabovethe thresholdlevel,adjustablefrom0.0to228.0ms. RelorExpRel(Release),howfasttheexpanderturnsbackonafterthesignaldropsbelowthe thresholdlevel,adjustablefrom0to3000ms. RatioorExpRatio,howmuchthegainisreducedbelowtheexpansionthreshold,adjustable from1:1.0(noexpansion)to1:17(extremedownwardexpansion). ThresholdorExpThreshold,thelevelbelowwhichthesignalisexpanded,adjustablefrom 79.0to0dB. Inaddition,thetwosegmentcompressorswithexpanderhaveseparateRatioandThreshold controlsforeachofthecompressionsegments. Multiband Compression TheMultibandCompressioneffecthasAttack,Release,Smooth,SignalDelay,Ratio, Threshold,andMakeUpGainparametersforeachofthethreebands(Low,Mid,and High).Inaddition,ithas: Crossover1andCrossover2.Thesesetthefrequencieswhichdividethethreecompression frequencybands.Thetwoparametersareinterchangeable,soeithermaycontainthehigher frequencyvalue.Therangeis16to25088Hz,inincrementsofasemitone. Gates SCInputletsyouselectwhichinputchannel(s)willcontrolthesidechain,whichisresponsible foropeningandclosingthegate.ItcanbesettoL,R,ortheaverageofthetwochannels, (L+R)/2.Youcanusethis,ifyouarrangethesignalpathsandpancontrolsappropriately,togate onemonosignalwithadifferentmonosignal. GateTimeisthetimethatthegatewillstayopenafterthesidechainsignalreachesthe Threshold.Itsrangeis0to3000ms. Duckingreversestheactionofthegate.NormallythisifsettoOff,andthegateopenswhen theinputsignalrisesabovethethreshold.ButwhenthisisOn,thegatecloseswhentheinput signalrisesabovethethreshold.

9-17

Effects and Effect Mode Effects Parameters

AtkTime(attacktime)isthetimeforthegatetorampfromclosedtoopen(reverseifDuckingis on)afterthesignalrisesabovethreshold,adjustablefrom0.0to228.0ms. RelTime(releasetime)isthetimeforthegatetorampfromopentoclosed(reverseifDucking ison)afterthegatetimerhaselapsed,adjustablefrom0to3000ms. Super Gate SuperGateisamoresophisticatedgatethatincludesthesetwofunctions: EnvTimeistheamountoftimeittakesforthesidechainsignalenvelopetodropbelowthe threshold.Ifthistimeistooshort,thegatecancloseandopentooquicklyfromamplitude modulationinthesidechainsignal.Ifitistoolong,thegatemaystaycloseduntiltheenvelope hasachancetofall,andsomesignalswouldnotgetthrough.Thisparameterisonlyineffect whenRetriggerisOff. Retriggerdetermineswhetherthegatetimerwillresetitselfeachtimethesidechainsignalgoes abovethethreshold.IfitisOn,thetimerresetsitself,andthereforethegatestaysopenaslong asthesignalisabovethethreshold,orkeepsgoingabovethethreshold,withintheinterval specifiedbyGateTime.IfitisOff,thegateclosesdownafterEnvTimehaselapsed, regardlessoffthesidechainlevel,andthesidechainlevelmustfallbelowthethresholdand comebackupagainbeforethegatewillopenagain.

Chorus
Chorusisaneffectwhichgivestheillusionofmultiplevoicesplayinginunison.Theeffectis achievedbydetuningcopiesoftheoriginalsignalandsummingthedetunedcopiesbackwith theoriginal.Lowfrequencyoscillators(LFOs)areusedtomodulatethepositionsofoutputtaps fromadelayline.Themovementofthetapscausesthepitchofthesignaltoshiftupanddown, producingtherequireddetuning. Thechorusesareavailableasstereoordualmono.Thestereochoruseshavetheparametersfor theleftandrightchannelsganged,whilethedualmonochoruseshaveseparateleftandright controls. FdbkLevelisthelevelofthefeedbacksignalfromtheLFO1delaytapintothedelayline. Negativevaluespolarityinvertthefeedbacksignal. TapLvlsetsthelevelsoftheLFOmodulateddelaytaps.Negativevaluespolarityinvertthe signal.Settinganytaplevelto0%turnsitoff. TapPansetsthestereopositionforagiventapsoutput.Therangeis100%forfullyleft,to100% forfullyright. LFORatesetsthespeedofmodulationofthedelaylineswitharangeof0.01to10Hz. LFODpthsetsthemaximumdetuningdepthoftheLFOmodulateddelaylines,witharange from0to50cents(=1/2semitone). TapDlyaddsextradelayinfrontoftheLFOmodulateddelaytapsfrom0to230ms. L/RPhaseorLFOnLRPhsadjuststherelativephasesoftheLFOsfortheleftandrightchannels inthestereoChoruses.

9-18

Effects and Effect Mode Effects Parameters

Flanger
Flangingistheprocessofaddingorsubtractingasignalwithatimedisplacedreplicaofitself, whichresultsinaseriesofnotchesinthefrequencyspectrum,generallyreferredtoasacomb filter.InthePC3,theflangerisamultitapdelayline,all(butone)ofwhosetapscanhavetheir lengthsmodulatedupanddownbyalowfrequencyoscillator(LFO).TherateoftheLFOis expressedinTempo. StatDlyLvl(StaticDelayLevel)isthelevelofthefirst,nonmovingtap.Negativevaluesinvert thepolarityofthetap.Therangeis100to100%;0%turnsthetapoff. DlyCrsandDlyFinarethecoarseandfinelengthcontrolsfortheStaticdelay(StatDly)and fortheminimumvalueofthemovingdelays(Dlyn).Thecoarserangeis0to228ms,andthe finerangeadjuststhecoarserangeinsamples(=1/48,000sec=20.8sec)from127to127. XcursCrsandXcursFindeterminehowfartheLFOmodulateddelaytapscanmovefromthe centeroftheirranges.ThetotalrangeoftheLFOsweepistwicetheexcursion.Iftheexcursionis setto0,theLFOdoesnotmoveandthetapbehaveslikeasimpledelaylinesettotheminimum delay.Thecoarserangeis0to228ms;therange0to5msismosteffectiveforflanging.Thefine rangeadjuststhecoarserangeinsamplesfrom127to127.

Quantize
Thiseffectproducesdigitaldistortionknownasquantizationnoise,bylimitingthenumberof bitsavailabletothesignal.Seeeffect329Aliaser. DynamRange(dynamicrange)controlshowmanybitstoremovefromthesignaldatawords. Thelowerthelevel,thegreaterthedistortion.At0dBthehottestofsignalswilltogglebetween onlytwoquantizationlevels,therebyproducingasquarewave.Every6dBaddeddoublesthe numberofquantizationlevels,reducingthenoiseandgettingclosertotheoriginalsignal.Ifthe signalhasalotofheadroom(availablesignallevelbeforedigitalclipping),thennotall quantizationlevelswillbereached.Rangeis0to144dB. Headroomsetstheavailablesignallevelbeforedigitalclipping.Settingthisproperlyprevents thesignalfromgettingtooloudatlowlevelsofDynamRange.Youwanttohaveitmatchthe amountoflevelstillavailableabovetheinputsignal:thisisdonebyfindingtheDynamRange levelatwhichthesignalstartsgettinglouder,andsettingHeadroomtomatchtheDynamRange value.Rangeis0to144dB. DCOffsetaddsapositiveDCOffsettotheinputsignal,whichallowsyoutoaltertheposition wheredigitalzeroiswithrespecttoyoursignal.AtlowDynamRangesettings,thiscancause theoutputtosputter.RangeisOff/79.0to0.0dB.

LaserVerb
LaserVerbisatypeofreverbwhichproducesadelayedtrainofcloselyspacedreflections,or impulses.Astimepasses,thespacingbetweentheimpulsesgetswider,whichcreatesa discerniblebuzzypitchthatgetslowerasthespacingincreases.Thesignalcanbefedbackinto itselftoextendtheeffect. DlyCoarseistheoveralldelaylength,whichcontrolsthedurationordecaytime.0.5secisa goodstartingpoint.Rangeis0to1.3secondsinthe2DSPunitversionoftheeffect,and0to2 secondsinthe3DSPunitversion. DlyFineadjuststhedelaywitharesolutiondownto0.2ms.Rangeis20.0to20.0ms. Spacingdeterminesthestartingpitchofthedescendingbuzzandhowfastitdescends,by settingtheinitialseparationofimpulsesandthesubsequentrateofincreasingimpulse

9-19

Effects and Effect Mode Effects Parameters

separation.Thespacingbetweenimpulsesisgiveninsamples(20.8s).Atlowvalues,thebuzz startsathighfrequenciesanddropsslowly,whileathighvaluesthebuzzstartsatalowerpitch anddropsrapidly.Rangeis0.0to40.0samples,witharesolutionof0.2sample. Contourcontrolstheoverallshapeofthereverb.Whensettoahighvalue,soundspassed throughthereverbstartatahighlevel,anditslowlydecays.Asthecontrolvalueisreduced,it takesmoretimefortheeffecttobuildupbeforedecaying.Atavalueofaround34%,thereverb behaveslikeareversereverb,buildinguptoahit.Whenitissettozero,theeffectactslikea simpledelay.Rangeis0to100%.

Filters
TherearefourtypesofResonantFiltereffectsinthePC3.Allofthemhavetheseparametersin common: FilterType(orFiltType)canbeLowpass,Highpass,Bandpass,orNotch(bandcut). Resonanceistheresonanceofthefilter,adjustablefrom0to50dB. Resonant Filter Frequency(orFreq)isthefixedresonantfrequencyofthefilter.Itsrangeis16to8372Hz. Envelope Filter EnvelopeFilterisaresonantfilterwhosecenterfrequencycanbemadetovaryaccordingtothe leveloftheincomingsignal. FilterTypecanbeLowpass,Highpass,Bandpass,orNotch(bandcut). MinFreqistheminimumresonantfrequencyofthefilter,thatis,thefilterfrequencywhenthe inputgainisbelowthetriggeringthreshold.Itsrangeis16to8372Hz. Sweepdetermineshowfartheresonantfrequencymoveswhentheinputlevelincreases.At positivelevelsitmovesupinpitch,andatnegativelevelsitmovesdown.Thehighestpossible resonantfrequencyis8372Hz,thelowestis0Hz.Thisparametersrangeis100%to+100%. Resonanceistheresonanceofthefilter,adjustablefrom0to50dB. AtkRateadjuststheupwardslewoftheattackportionoftheenvelopedetector.Rangeis0to 300.0dB/sec. RelRateadjuststhedownwardslewofthereleaseportion.Rangeis0to300.0dB/sec. SmoothRateslowsdowntheenvelopefollower.IfitissettoalowerratethanAtkRateorRel Rate,itcandominatethoseparameters.Rangeis0to300.0dB/sec. Triggered Filter TheTriggeredFilterisasweepingresonantfilterthattriggerswhenacertaininputthresholdis reached,andthenfollowsitsownenvelope,consistingofaninstantaneousattackandan exponentialrelease,ratherthantheenvelopeoftheinputsignal. MaxFreqistheresonantfrequencyofthefilteratthepeakoftheinternalenvelope.Itcanbeset lowerthanMinFreq(above),inwhichcasethefilterwillsweepdownwards,thenbackup. Rangeis16to8372Hz. Triggeristheinputsignalthresholdatwhichtheenvelopedetectortriggers.Rangeis79to 0dB.

9-20

Effects and Effect Mode Effects Parameters

Retriggeristheinputsignalthresholdatwhichtheenvelopedetectorresets,sothatitcan triggeragain.ThisparameterisonlyusefulwhenitissetbelowthevalueofTrigger.Rangeis from79to0dB. EnvRateistheenvelopedetectordecayrate.Thiscanbeusedtopreventfalsetriggering.When thesignalenvelopefallsbelowtheretriggerlevel,thefiltercanbetriggeredagainwhenthe signalrisesabovethetriggerlevel.Sincetheinputsignalcanfluctuaterapidly,itisnecessaryto adjusttherateatwhichthesignalenvelopecanfalltotheretriggerlevel.Therangeis0to300.0 dB/sec. RelRateisthedownwardslew(release)rateofthetriggeredenvelopegenerator.Therangeis0 to300.0dB/sec. SmthRateslowsdowntheenvelopefollower.Ifsetlowerthanthereleaserate,itwilldominate it.Youcanalsousethesmoothingratetolengthentheattackoftheinternalenvelope.Therange is0to300.0dB/sec. LFO Filter TheLFOfilteriscontinuouslysweptbetweentworesonantfrequenciesoveraperiodoftime. TheLFOfrequency,expressedinBPMandbeats,canbefixedorsettofollowSystemtempo. MinFreqandMaxFreqarethelowandhighlimitsoftheresonantfrequencyasthefilteris swept.YoucansettheMinFreqhigherthantheMaxFreq,inwhichcasethefilterwillsweep upsidedownrelativetothecontrollingclock.Therangeforbothis16to8372Hz. LFOShapeisthewaveformtypefortheLFO.ChoicesareSine,Saw+,Saw,Pulse,andTri. LFOPlsWid(PulseWidth).WhentheLFOShapeissettoPulse,thissetsthepulsewidthasa percentageofthewaveformperiod.Whenthewidthissetto50%,theresultisasquarewave. Thisparameterhasnoeffectifotherwaveformtypesarechosen.Rangeis0to100%. LFOSmoothsmooths(removesthehigherharmonicsfrom)theSaw+,Saw,andPulse waveforms.ASawtoothwavebecomesmorelikeatrianglewave,andaPulsewavebecomes morelikeasinewave.Rangeis0to100%.

Distortion
DistortioneffectsonthePC3mayalsoincludeaparametricequalizeroracabinetsimulator. DistDriveappliesaboosttotheinputsignaltooverdrivethedistortioneffectintosoftclipping. Thiswilltendtomakethesignalveryloud,soyoumayhavetoreducetheOutGainasthis parameterisincreased.Rangeis0to96dB. Warmthisalowpassfilterinthedistortioncontrolpath.Thisfiltermaybeusedtoreducesome oftheharshnessofsomedistortionsettingswithoutreducingthebandwidthofthesignal. Rangeis16to25088Hz. Highpassallowsyoutoreducethebasscontentofthedistortioncontentinthesmaller distortioneffectsthatdonthavetrueparametricEQ.Rangeis16to25088Hz. CabPresetselectsfromeightcabinetsimulationswhichhavebeencreatedbasedon measurementsofrealguitaramplifiercabinets.Thepresetsare:Basic,Lead12,2x12,Open12, Open10,4x12,Hot2x12,andHot12. CabBypassswitchesonandoffthecabinetsimulationpartoftheeffect.Whenthisissetto In,thecabinetsimulationisactive;whenitisOut,thereisnocabinetaction. CabinetHPandCabinetLParehighpassandlowpassfilterstosetthefrequencyresponse limitsofthecabinets.Rangeofbothfiltersis16to25088Hz.

9-21

Effects and Effect Mode Effects Parameters

Polydistort Thisisamorecomplexdistortioneffectthatprovidestwo,four,orsixstagesofdistortion. Curvencontrolsthecurvatureoftheindividualdistortionstages.0%isnocurvature(no distortionatall).At100%,thecurvebendsoversmoothlyandbecomesperfectlyflatrightbefore itgoesintoclipping.Maximumvalueis127%. LPnFreqareshelvingfrequenciesforonepolelowpassfiltersoneachofthedistortionstages. LP0Freqhandlestheinitiallowpasspriortothefirstdistortionstage.Theotherlowpass controlsfollowtheirrespectivedistortionstages.Rangeis16to25088Hz.

Rotating Speakers
AneffectthatincludesRotatingSpeakersbreaksthesignalintotwofrequencybands,rotates eachbandseparatelythroughavirtualspeaker,andthencombinestheoutputswithapairof virtualmicrophoneswhoseanglerelativetothespeakersisadjustable.Anumberofvery sophisticatedparametershavebeenincludedintheRotatingSpeakerseffect,togivetheeffecta greatdegreeofrealism.Becauseofthecomplexityoftheeffects,youmightwanttoapproach anyparametersthatseemalittleobscuretoyouwithcaution. RotoInOutengagesorbypassestherotaryspeakereffect. Therearefourvirtualmicrophones,withtwoeachonthewoofer(LoMicAandLoMicB)and onthetweeter(HiMicAandHiMicB).Eachmicrophonehas: Pos(position),theangleofthemicrophonefromthefrontofthevirtualspeaker,from180to 180degrees; Lvl(level)from0to100%;and Pan,theleft/rightpanningofthemicrophonesoutput,from100%(fullleft)to100%(fullright). Otherparameters: LoBeamWandHiBeamWsettheacousticradiationpatterns(beamwidth)ofthetwo driversintherotatingspeaker.Ifyouimaginelookingdownontherotatingspeaker,thisisthe anglebetweenthe6dBlevelsofthebeam.Therangeisfrom45to360.At360,thedriveris omnidirectional. Xover(Crossover)isthefrequencyatwhichhighandlowfrequencybandsaresplitandsentto separaterotatingdrivers.Therangeis16to25088Hz. LoGainandHiGainarethegainsofthesignalpassingthroughtherotatingwooferortweeter, respectively.TherangeisOff/79.0to24.0dB. LoSizeandHiSizearetheeffectivesizes(radiusofrotation)oftherotatingspeakersin millimeters.ThisaffectstheamountofDopplershiftorvibratoofthelowfrequencysignal.The rangeis0to250mm. LoTremandHiTremcontrolthedepthoftremolo(amplitudemodulation)ofthesignals.Itis expressedasapercentageoffullscaletremolo.Therangeis0to100%. LoResonateandHiResonatearesimulationsofcabinetresonantmodesexpressedasa percentage.Forrealism,youshoulduseverylowsettings.Therangeis0to100%. LoResDlyandHiResDlyarethenumberofsamplesofdelayineachresonatorcircuitin additiontotherotationexcursiondelay.Therangeis10to2550samples.

9-22

Effects and Effect Mode Effects Parameters

LoResXcursandHiResXcursarethenumberofsamplesofdelaytosweepthroughthe resonatorattherotationrateofeachrotatingspeaker.Therangeis0to510samples. ResH/LPhssetstherelativephasesofthehighandlowresonators.Theanglevalueindegreesis somewhatarbitraryandyoucanexpecttheeffectofthisparametertoberathersubtle.The rangeis0to360.0degrees. MicAngleistheangleofthevirtualmicrophonesindegreesfromthefrontoftherotating speaker.Fortheleftmicrophonetheangleincreasesclockwise(whenviewedfromthetop), whilefortherightmicrophonetheangleincreasescounterclockwise.AssigningaMODtothis parametershouldbedonewithcaution:realtimeadjustmentstoitwillresultinlargesample skips,whichwillcauseclicksinthesignalpassingthrough.Therangeis0to360.0degrees.(In Distort+Rotaryonly.) Thefollowingparametersrelatetorotationspeed: Speedsetstherotatingspeakerstorunateithertheslowrateorthefastrate. Brake,whensettoOn,slowstherotatingspeakerstoahalt. LoMode,intheNormalsetting,willgiveyoufullcontrolofthelowfrequencyspeakerwith theSpeedparameter.TheNoAccelsettingwillholdthelowfrequencyspeakerattheslow speed,andtheSpeedparameterwillhavenoeffectonitsspeed,thoughBrakewillstillwork.In theStoppedposition,thelowfrequencyspeakerwillnotspinatall. LoSlowandHiSlowaretherotationratesinhertz(Hz)ofthespeakerswhenSpeedissetto Slow. LoFastandHiFastaretherotationrateinhertz(Hz)ofthespeakerswhenSpeedissettoFast. LoSlow>FstandHiSlow>Fstarethetimesforthespeakerstoacceleratefromtheslowspeedto thefastspeed. LoFst>SlowandHiFst>Slowarethetimesforthespeakertodeceleratefromthefastspeedto theslowspeed. LoAccelCrvandHiAccelCrvaretheshapesoftheaccelerationcurvesforthespeakers.0%isa constantacceleration.Positivevaluescausethespeakertospeedupslowlyatfirstthenquickly reachthefastrate.Negativevaluescauseaquickinitialspeedupthenslowlysettleintothefast speed.Ifsettoalownegativevalue,itwillovershoot. LoSpinDirandHiSpinDirarethedirectionsofrotationofthespeakers.Thechoiceisclockwise (CW)orcounterclockwise(CCW).

Vibrato/Chorus
TheVibrato/Choruseffectsimulatesthevibratoandchoruseffectsonatonewheelorgan,andis usedinconjunctionwiththeRotarySpeaker.Ithasseveraluniqueparameters: VibChInOutisanin/outswitchfortheVibrato/Choruseffect. Vib/ChoristhetypeofVibrato/Choruseffecttobeused.Thechoicesarefromthreevibratos, V1,V2,V3,orthreechoruses,C1,C2,C3.

9-23

Effects and Effect Mode Effects Parameters

Tremolo and AutoPan

TremoloisamplitudemodulationusinganLFO.AutoPanmovesthesignalbetweentheleftand rightchannels,usinganLFO.Theyhaveseveralparametersincommonandseveralunique ones. LFORateistherateoftheLFO.Therangeis0to10.00Hz,or0to12.00xthetempo. RateScalemultipliesthespeedoftheLFOrateintotheaudiorange.Therangeis1to25088x. Whenabove16x,thevaluesincrementinsemitonesteps.WhentheLFORateissetto1.00Hz, thevalueofthisparameterisequaltotheLFOfrequencyinHertz. LFOShapeisthewaveformtypefortheLFO.ChoicesareSine,Saw+,Saw,Pulse,andTri. LFOPlsWidorPulseWidth.WhentheLFOShapeissettoPulse,thissetsthepulsewidthasa percentageofthewaveformperiod.Whenthewidthissetto50%,theresultisasquarewave. Thisparameterhasnoeffectifotherwaveformtypesarechosen.Rangeis0to100%. AutoPan Origindeterminestheaxisforthepanningmotion.At0%,thepanningiscenteredbetweenthe speakers.Positivevaluesshifttheaxistotheright,whilenegativevaluesshiftittotheleft.At 100%or+100%(therangelimits),thereisnopanningaction. ImageWidthisthewidthoftheoriginalinputprogrammaterialbeforeitisautopanned.At0% (minimum),theinputimageisshrunktoasinglepointsource,allowingmaximumpanning excursion.At100%(maximum),theoriginalwidthismaintainedsonopanningcanoccur. PanWidthcontrolstheamountofpanexcursion.Itisthepercentageoftotalpanningmotion availableafterOriginandImageWidthareset.Rangeis0to100%. CentrAtten(Attenuation)istheamountthesignalleveldropsasitispannedthroughthecenter ofthestereoimage.Forthesmoothesttracking,awidelyacceptedsubjectivereferenceis3dB. Valuesabove3dBwillcausesomewhatofabumpinlevelasanimagepassesthroughthe center,whilevaluesbelow3dBwillcauseadip.Rangeis12to0dB. Tremolo DepthcontrolstheamountofattenuationappliedwhentheLFOisatitsdeepestexcursion point.Rangeis0to100%. LFOPhaseshiftsthephaseofthetremoloLFOrelativetothebeatreference.Rangeis0.0to 360.0degrees. 50%WeightistherelativeamountofattenuationaddedwhentheLFOisatthe6dBpoint.This causestheLFOshapetobowup(positivevalues)ordown(negativevalues).Rangeis16to 3dB. L/RPhasesetsthephaserelationshipofthechannels.InflipstheleftchannelsLFOoutof phase,withtheresultthattheeffectturnsintoanautobalancer.OutleavestheleftLFOalone.

9-24

Effects and Effect Mode Effects Parameters

Pitcher
Pitcherappliesafiltertotheinputsignalwhichhasaseriesofpeaksinthefrequencyresponse. Thesepeaksarenormallyadjustedsothattheirfrequenciesareallmultiplesofaspecific, selectablefrequency,whichimposesastrongsenseofpitchattheselectedfundamental frequency. Pitch.Thefundamentalpitchimposedupontheinput,inMIDInotenumbersfromC1toG9. PtchOffstisanoffsetfromthepitchfrequencyinsemitones,from12.0to12.0.Itcanbeuseful toassignpitchbend,aribbon,oranothercontinuouscontrollertothisparameterthrougha MOD. OddWts,PairWts,QuartrWts,HalfWtsareparametersthatcontroltheshapeofthe frequencyresponseofPitcher.Anexactdescriptionofwhateachonedoesis,unfortunately, impossible,sincethereisagreatdealofinteractionbetweenthem.Formoreinformationand examples,seetheKSP8AlgorithmReferenceGuideavailableasafreedownloadat www.kurzweil.com.

Ring Modulation
Ringmodulationmultipliestwosignals(thecarrierandthemodulator)togethertoproduce unusual,oftennonharmonic,overtones.TheRingModulatoreffectinthePC3hastwomodes: L*Rinwhichtwomonosignalsaremodulatedtogether;andOsc,inwhichtheinputis stereo,anditismodulatedwiththesumoffivewaveformsthataregeneratedfromoscillators withintheeffectitself.Fouroftheseoscillatorsaresinewaves,whileone(Oscillator1)offersa selectionofwaveforms. Wet/Dry.WhentheeffectisinL*Rmode,thiscontrolshowmuchoftheleftsignalonlyis passeddry(therightsignalisntpasseddryatall). ModModeselectsbetweenthetwomodes. Osc1LvlisthelevelofOscillator1,from0to100%. Osc1FreqisthefrequencyofOscillator1,from16to25088Hz. Osc1ShapeisthewaveshapeofOscillator1,selectablefromSine,Saw+,Saw,Pulse,andTri. Osc1PlsWid(PulseWidth).WhenOsc1ShapeissettoPulse,thissetsthepulsewidthasa percentageofthewaveformperiod.Whenthewidthissetto50%,theresultisasquarewave. Thisparameterhasnoeffectifotherwaveformtypesarechosen.Rangeis0to100%. Osc1Smoothsmooths(removesthehigherharmonicsfrom)theSaw+,Saw,andPulse waveforms.ASawtoothwavebecomesmorelikeatrianglewave,andaPulsewavebecomes morelikeasinewave.Rangeis0to100%. Theotherfouroscillators,Sine2throughSine5,eachhaveLvlandFreqcontrols.

Stereo Simulation
TheMonotoStereoeffectconvertsamonauralinputtosimulatedstereooutput. InSelectselectstheinputsignaltobestereoized.ItcanbeLeft,Right,orboth:(L+R)/2. CenterGainisthelevelofthesummedleftandrightchannels.RangeisOff/79.0to24.0dB. DiffGainisthelevelofthedifferencesignalproduced,whichisthespatialcomponentofthe stereosignal.RangeisOff/79.0to24.0dB.

9-25

Effects and Effect Mode Effects Parameters

DiffBassGcontrolsthegainofabassshelffilteronthedifferencesignal.Byboostingthelow frequencycomponentsofthedifferencesignal,youcanincreasethesenseofacoustic envelopment.Rangeis79.0to24.0dB. DiffBassFisthetransitionfrequencyforthebassshelffrequency.Rangeis16to25088Hz. TheprocessedsignalissplitintothreefrequencybandsLo,Mid,andHigheachofwhichcan bedelayedandpannedseparately. Crossover1and2arethetwoCrossoverfrequenciesatwhichthebandsplitfilterssplitthe signalintothreebands.Thetwoparametersareinterchangeable:eithermayhaveahigher frequencythantheother.Rangeis16to25088Hz. Pan[High/Mid/Low]setsthepanpositionforeachband.Rangeis100%(fullyleft)to100% (fullyright.) Delay[High/Mid/Low]setsthedelayforeachband.Rangeis0to1000ms. Stereo Image Thiseffectprovidesenhancementforastereosignal.Italsofeaturesastereocorrelationmeter.It usessomeparametersfromMonotoStereoandsomefromStereoAnalyze(following).

9-26

MIDI Mode The TRANSMIT Page

Chapter 10 MIDI Mode

ThePC3sendsandreceivesMIDIontraditional5pinDINconnectorsandthroughUSB.MIDI canbesentandreceivedonallportsatonce. PresstheMIDImodebuttontoenterMIDImode.TherearethreepagesinMIDImode: TRANSMIT(XMITsoftbutton) RECEIVE(RECVsoftbutton) CHANNELS(CHANLSsoftbutton)

YoullusethesepagestodeterminewhatMIDImessagesthePC3transmits,andhowit respondstotheMIDImessagesitreceivesaswellashoweachMIDIchannelbehaves. WhenyouenterMIDImode,youllseeoneofthethreeavailableMIDImodepages.

The TRANSMIT Page

PresstheXMITsoftbutton,andtheTRANSMITpageappears.Usetheparametersonthispage tocontrolhowthePC3sendsMIDIinformationtoitsUSBorMIDIOutport.Thesesettingsto someextentaffectthePC3sresponsetoitsownkeyboardandcontrollers,buttheyprimarily affecttheresponsesofotherMIDIdevicesthatarereceivingMIDIfromthePC3onthechannel specifiedwiththeChannelparameteronthispage. Whenaprogramisselected,eitherinProgrammodeorinQuickAccessmode,allofthesettings oftheTRANSMITpageareineffect,exceptforChgSetups,whichonlyapplieswhenloadinga setup. Ifasetupisselected,inSetupmodeorinQuickAccessmode,allofthesettingsofthe TRANSMITpageareineffectexceptforControlSetup,Channel,andProgChang(seebelowfor details.) WhensendingMIDItotheUSBorMIDIoutportfromSongmode,Songmodeignoresallofthe settingsontheTransmitpageexceptControlSetup(seebelowfordetails.)

10-1

MIDI Mode The TRANSMIT Page

Parameter Control Setup Destination Channel Transposition Velocity Map Pressure Map Program Change Change Setups

Range of Values Setup List USB_MIDI, MIDI, Local 1 to 16 60 semitones Velocity Map List Pressure Map List Off, On Immediate, KeyUp

Default 126 Internal Voices USB_MIDI+MIDI+Local 1 0 1 Linear 1 Linear On Immediate

Control Setup
Thisiswhereyouselectthecurrentcontrolsetup,Zone1ofwhichsetsthephysicalcontroller assignmentsforallprogramswhileyoureinProgrammode.Thisparameterdoesnotapplyto Setupmode.RefertoControlSetup on page 69formoreinformationonthecontrolsetup.

Destination
TheDestinationparametertellsthePC3whichportswillcarryMIDIinformation,and determinesifthePC3ssoundenginewillreceiveMIDIdata.Selectthedesireddestinationor anycombinationofdestinationsdependingonyourneeds.Forexample,avalueofLocal disablestheUSBandMIDIOutports.UsethissettingwhenyouwanttoplaythePC3,butnotto sendanyMIDIinformationtootherMIDIinstruments(localcontrolonly.)Alternatively,you wouldsetthisparametertoMIDIorUSB_MIDIifyouonlywantedtosendMIDIdatatoother MIDIinstrumentsfromtheMIDIportorUSBport,andnoMIDIdatawouldbesentlocallyto thePC3ssoundengine.AvalueofMIDI+LocalwouldsendMIDIdataonlytotheMIDIout portandthePC3ssoundengine. ForSetupmode,thisparameteractsasafinalfilterforwhichportswillsendMIDIinformation. Forexample,ifthisparameterissettoMIDI_USB+MIDI,andasetupzonehasitsDestination parametersettoMIDI+LocalontheSetupMode:CH/PRGpage,MIDIdatawillbesentonly throughthetraditionalMIDIport.Bothparameters,MIDIXmitDestinationandthesetup DestinationparameterintheSetupMode:CH/PRGpageactasfiltersandbothareactiveinSetup mode. Note:ThisparameterhasnoeffectonSongmode.InSongmodeeachtracksdestinationignoresthis parameter.

Channel
ThisdefineswhichMIDIchannelthePC3usestotransmitMIDImessageswhennotusinga setuporSongmode(eachzonedeterminesthisinasetup,eachtrackdeterminesthisinasong.) ThevalueforthisparametermatchesthecurrentMIDIchanneldisplayedonthetoplineofthe Programmodepage.IfyouchangethecurrentMIDIchannelwhileinProgrammode,the settingofthisparameterchangesaccordingly,andviceversa.

Transpose
ThisparameteraffectsthetranspositionthatsappliedtotheMIDIdatastream.Adjustingthis parametertransposesthePC3snotes,aswellasnotesonslavesreceivingfromthePC3.This transpositionsettingmirrorstranspositionsettingsfromtheProgramandSetupmainpages.Its valueisaddedtotranspositionsettingsmadeelsewhere.ThisparameterhasnoeffectonMIDI datasentfromSongmode.

10-2

MIDI Mode The TRANSMIT Page

Velocity Map (Transmit)

ChangetheMIDITransmitVelocityMapsettingifyouaretriggeringexternalMIDIgearwhich isproducingnotesthataretooloudortooquietbasedonyourplayingstyle(howlightorheavy thatyouplaythekeys.)Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidestrangeofvelocityexpression,but youmaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnotsuityourplayingstyle. MIDI Sources PC3Keyboard MIDIInviaMIDIInportorUSBComputerport

VelocityMapSettingsonMIDIModeReceivePage

KEYVELpageforcurrentControlSetup(inProgramMode)orcurrentZone(inSetupMode)

VelocityMapSettingsonMasterModeMAPSPage

PC3SongMode

VelocityMapSettingsonMIDIModeTransmitPage

MIDI Destinations PC3SoundEngine to PC3audiooutputs MIDIOutviaMIDIOutportorUSBComputerport

ThetransmitVelocityMapaffectsthewaythePC3sendsMIDIvelocityvaluestoitsUSBor MIDIOutport(seethecircledboxaboveforitslocationintheMIDIsignalflow.)Differentmaps outputdifferentMIDIvelocityvaluesforthesamereceivedMIDIattackvelocity.Eachmap appliesadifferentcurvetoreceivedMIDIattackvelocitiesandremapsthemtonewvelocities beforetransmittingthemtotheUSBorMIDIOutport(thisparameterhasnoeffectonMIDI datasentfromSongmodeortothePC3ssoundengine.)Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidest rangeofvelocityexpression,butyoumaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnot suityourplayingstyle.SeethediagramabovefortheotherpagesthataffecttheMIDIattack velocitybeforereachingthetransmitVelmap. Thedefaultmap,Linear,allowsMIDIvelocitiestopassunchanged.MapsLight13makeit increasinglyeasiertoproducehighMIDIvelocityvaluesforthesamekeystrikevelocity(with Light3beingtheeasiest,)sothesemapsmayworkbetterforuserswhoplaywithalighter touch.Hard13makeitincreasinglyhardertoproducehighMIDIvelocityvaluesforthesame keystrikevelocity(withHard3beingthehardest,)sothesemapsmayworkbetterforusers whoplaywithahardertouch.PianoTouchsimulatesthegeneralvelocityresponseofan acousticpiano,andisbestsuitedforplayingacousticpianosounds.EasyTouchissimilartothe Lightsettings,makinghighvelocitieseasiertoplay,butitallowsmoresensitivecontrolover playinghighvelocitiesbynotboostingtheMIDIvelocityforfaststrikevelocitiesasmuchasit doesformediumstrikevelocities.GMReceivemimicsthevelocitymapcommonlyusedby keyboardsthatusetheGeneralMIDI(GM)soundset.TheGMReceivemapmakesmedium strikevelocitiesproducehigherMIDIvelocitiescomparedtotheLinearmap.

10-3

MIDI Mode The TRANSMIT Page

Pressure Map (Transmit)

ChangetheTransmitPressureMapsettingifyouaretriggeringexternalMIDIgearwhichis producingMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesthataretoohighortoolowbasedonyourplaying style(howsoftorhardthatyoupressthekeys.)Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidestrangeof pressureexpression,butyoumaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnotsuit yourplayingstyle. MIDI Sources PC3Keyboard MIDIInviaMIDIInportorUSBComputerport

PressureMapSettingsonMIDIModeReceivePage

PRESSpageforcurrentControlSetup(inProgramMode)orcurrentZone(inSetupMode)

PressureMapSettingsonMasterModeMAPSPage

PC3SongMode

PressureMapSettingsonMIDIModeTransmitPage

MIDI Destinations PC3SoundEngine to PC3audiooutputs MIDIOutviaMIDIOutportorUSBComputerport

ThetransmitPressureMapaffectsthewaythePC3sendsMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesto itsUSBorMIDIOutport(seethecircledboxaboveforitslocationintheMIDIsignalflow.) DifferentmapsoutputdifferentMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesforthesamereceivedMIDI pressure(aftertouch)value.EachmapappliesadifferentcurvetoreceivedMIDIpressure (aftertouch)valuesandremapsthemtonewvaluesbeforetransmittingthemtotheUSBorMIDI Outport(thisparameterhasnoeffectonMIDIdatasentfromSongmodeortothePC3ssound engine.)Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidestrangeofpressure(aftertouch)expression,butyou maywanttochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnotsuityourplayingstyle.Seethe diagramabovefortheotherpagesthataffectMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesbeforereaching thetransmitPressureMap. Thedefaultmap,Linear,allowsMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuestopassunchanged.Maps24 makeitincreasinglyeasiertoproduceMIDIpressurevaluesforthesamephysicalpressure appliedtoakey(with4Easiestbeingtheeasiest.)Maps47makeitincreasinglyharderto produceMIDIpressurevaluesforthesamephysicalpressureappliedtoakey(with7Hardest beingthehardest.)

Program Change (ProgChang)

WhenProgChangissettoOn,thePC3sendsprogramchangecommandstoitsUSBorMIDI OutportwhenyouselectprogramsorsetupsfromthefrontpanelorfromyourMIDIcontroller.

10-4

MIDI Mode The RECEIVE Page

SelectavalueofOffwhenyouwanttochangeprogramsonthePC3butdontwanttosend programchangecommandstotheUSBorMIDIOutport.Thisparameterdoesntaffectthetype ofprogramchangecommandthatssent;itjustdetermineswhetheranycommandissentatall. (ThetypeofprogramchangecommandisdeterminedbytheBankModeparameterontheCH/ PROGpageintheSetupEditorofyourcontrolsetup.SeeControlSetup on page 69formore details.) Note:TheProgChangparameterappliestoallmodesexceptSongmodeandSetupmode(orwhenasetup isloadedfromQuickAccessmode.)SetupsdisregardtheProgChangsettingandinsteadusethe EntryProgChgparameterontheSetupMode:CH/PROGpage(SeeTheChannel/Program(CH/PROG) Page on page 74.)SongsdisregardthisProgChangsettingandinsteadusetheProgChangparameteron theSong:EventFilterPlaybackpage,accessedfromthePLYFLTsoftbuttoninSongmode.

Change Setups (ChgSetups)

Thisparameterdeterminestheexacttimingofsetupchangeswhenyouselectadifferent setupeitherbyanormaldataentrymethodorviaMIDIprogramchangecommands.Choose KeyUptoindicatethatyouwantsetupchangestotakeplaceonlywhenyouvereleasedall currentlyheldnotes.ChooseImmediatetoindicatethatyouwantsuchchangestohappen immediatelywhenyouselectthesetup.

The RECEIVE Page

PressRECVtoselecttheRECEIVEpage,whereyoudefinethePC3sresponsetoincomingMIDI signals(withoneexceptionpertainingtoQuickAccessmode,whichwellexplainlater).
Parameter Basic Channel MIDI Mode All Notes Off Program Change Mode Velocity Map Pressure Map System Exclusive ID Bank Select Local Keyboard Channel Range of Values 1 to 16 Omni, Poly, Multi Normal, Ignore Program Change Type List Velocity Map List Pressure Map List 0 to 127 Ctl 0, Ctl 32, Ctl 0/32 None, 1 to 16 Default 1 Multi Normal Extended 1 Linear 1 Linear 0 Ctl 0/32 None

10-5

MIDI Mode The RECEIVE Page

Basic Channel
ThebasicchanneldetermineswhichchannelwillalwaysbeavailabletoreceiveMIDI information.DependingontheMIDIreceivemode(below),theBasicchannelmaybetheonly receivingchannel,oroneofseveral.

MIDI Receive Mode (MIDI Mode)

TheMIDIModeparameterdeterminestheMIDIreceivingcapabilitiesofthePC3.Whensetto Omni,thePC3respondstoincomingMIDIeventsonallMIDIchannels,andplaysthemonthe currentchannel.Thisisnormallyusedfordiagnosticpurposesonly. AtasettingofPoly,thePC3respondsonlytoeventsthataresentonthesamechannelasthe PC3scurrentMIDIchannel(theonedisplayedonthetoplineoftheProgrammodepage).In Polymode,thecurrentlyselectedchannelisalwaysthebasicchannel,soifyouchangechannels, thebasicchannelchangesaccordingly. WithavalueofMulti(thedefault),thePC3respondstoeventsonallactivechannels.Thisisthe modeyoullusewhenyouredrivingthePC3withasequencer,sinceyoucanplayadifferent programoneachchannel.Atthissetting,youcanturnindividualchannelsonandoff(onthe CHANNELSpage,describedlaterinthischapter).

All Notes Off

IfthisparametersvalueissettoNormal,thePC3respondstoAllNotesOffmessagesreceived overMIDI.Ignorecausesthesemessagestobeignored.IfyoureusingaRolandproductasa MIDIcontrollerforyourPC3,youllwanttosetthevalueofthisparametertoIgnore.Thisis becausesomeolderRolandproductsoccasionallysendanAllNotesOffmessagewhennokeys arehelddownevenifyouresustainingnoteswithapedal.Youmightfindallyoursustains missingfromyoursequence,forexample,ifyouredrivingyourPC3fromoneofRolands hardwaresequencers.SettingthisparametertoIgnoretakescareofthisproblem. Regardlessofthesettingforthisparameter,thePC3alwaysrespondstoitsownPanicbuttonby shuttingoffallactivenotesandcontrollers.

Program Change Mode (PrgChgMode)

ThisdetermineshowthePC3respondstoprogramchangecommandsreceivedviaMIDI.See ProgramChangeFormats on page 1015foranexplanationofthevariousvaluesavailableforthis parameter.

10-6

MIDI Mode The RECEIVE Page

Velocity Map (Receive)

ChangethereceiveVelocityMapsettingifyouaretriggeringthePC3withexternalMIDIgear whichisproducingnotesthataretooloudortooquiet.Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidest rangeofvelocityexpression,butyoumaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnot suityourplayingstyle. MIDI Sources PC3Keyboard MIDIInviaMIDIInportorUSBComputerport

VelocityMapSettingsonMIDIModeReceivePage

KEYVELpageforcurrentControlSetup(inProgramMode)orcurrentZone(inSetupMode)

VelocityMapSettingsonMasterModeMAPSPage

PC3SongMode

VelocityMapSettingsonMIDIModeTransmitPage

MIDI Destinations PC3SoundEngine to PC3audiooutputs MIDIOutviaMIDIOutportorUSBComputerport

ThereceiveVelocityMapaffectsthewaythePC3receivesMIDIvelocityvaluesfromitsUSBor MIDIInport(seethecircledboxaboveforitslocationintheMIDIsignalflow.)Differentmaps outputdifferentMIDIvelocityvaluesforthesamereceivedMIDIattackvelocity.Eachmap appliesadifferentcurvetoreceivedMIDIattackvelocitiesandremapsthemtonewvelocities beforelettingthempass(thisparameterhasnoeffectonMIDIdatasentfromthePC3s keyboard.)Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidestrangeofvelocityexpression,butyoumaywant tochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnotsuityourplayingstyle.Seethediagramabove fortheotherpagesthataffecttheMIDIattackvelocitybeforereachingthereceiveVelocityMap. Thedefaultmap,Linear,allowsMIDIvelocitiestopassunchanged.MapsLight13makeit increasinglyeasiertoproducehighMIDIvelocityvaluesforthesamekeystrikevelocity(with Light3beingtheeasiest,)sothesemapsmayworkbetterforuserswhoplaywithalighter touch.Hard13makeitincreasinglyhardertoproducehighMIDIvelocityvaluesforthesame keystrikevelocity(withHard3beingthehardest,)sothesemapsmayworkbetterforusers whoplaywithahardertouch.PianoTouchsimulatesthegeneralvelocityresponseofan acousticpiano,andisbestsuitedforplayingacousticpianosounds.EasyTouchissimilartothe Lightsettings,makinghighvelocitieseasiertoplay,butitallowsmoresensitivecontrolover playinghighvelocitiesbynotboostingtheMIDIvelocityforfaststrikevelocitiesasmuchasit doesformediumstrikevelocities.GMReceivemimicsthevelocitymapcommonlyusedby keyboardsthatusetheGeneralMIDI(GM)soundset.TheGMReceivemapmakesmedium strikevelocitiesproducehigherMIDIvelocitiescomparedtotheLinearmap.

10-7

MIDI Mode The RECEIVE Page

Pressure Map (Receive)

ChangethereceivePressureMapsettingifyouaretriggeringthePC3withexternalMIDIgear whichisproducingMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesthataretoohighortoolowbasedonyour playingstyle(howsoftorhardthatyoupressthekeys.)Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidest rangeofpressure(aftertouch)expression,butyoumaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthe defaultdoesnotsuityourplayingstyle. MIDI Sources PC3Keyboard MIDIInviaMIDIInportorUSBComputerport

PressureMapSettingsonMIDIModeReceivePage

PRESSpageforcurrentControlSetup(inProgramMode)orcurrentZone(inSetupMode)

PressureMapSettingsonMasterModeMAPSPage

PC3SongMode

PressureMapSettingsonMIDIModeTransmitPage

MIDI Destinations PC3SoundEngine to PC3audiooutputs MIDIOutviaMIDIOutportorUSBComputerport

ThereceivePressureMapaffectsthewaythePC3receivesMIDIpressure(aftertouch)values fromitsUSBorMIDIInport(seethecircledboxaboveforitslocationintheMIDIsignalflow.) DifferentmapsoutputdifferentMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesforthesamereceivedMIDI pressure(aftertouch)value.EachmapappliesadifferentcurvetoreceivedMIDIpressure (aftertouch)valuesandremapsthemtonewvaluesbeforelettingthempass(thisparameterhas noeffectonMIDIdatasentfromthePC3skeyboard.)Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidest rangeofpressure(aftertouch)expression,butyoumaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthe defaultdoesnotsuityourplayingstyle.Seethediagramabovefortheotherpagesthataffect MIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesbeforereachingthereceivePressureMap. Thedefaultmap,Linear,allowsMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuestopassunchanged.Maps24 makeitincreasinglyeasiertoproduceMIDIpressurevaluesforthesamephysicalpressure appliedtoakey(with4Easiestbeingtheeasiest.)Maps47makeitincreasinglyharderto produceMIDIpressurevaluesforthesamephysicalpressureappliedtoakey(with7Hardest beingthehardest.)

System Exclusive ID (SysExID)

TheSysExIDparameterdifferentiatesbetweenmorethanoneMIDIdeviceofthesamemodel. Youwontneedtochangethedefaultsettingof0unlessyouhavemultiplePC3s(orK2600s, K2500s,orK2000s)receivingSysExmessagesfromasinglesource.Inthatcase,makesureeach

10-8

MIDI Mode The RECEIVE Page

instrumenthasadifferentSysExID.ThenyoucandirectSysExmessagestotheappropriatePC3 withtheSysExIDbytethatsincludedwitheverySysExmessage.Avalueof127specifiesOmni Receive.Thatis,atthisvalue,aPC3respondstoaSysExmessageregardlessoftheSysExIDof themessage.

Bank Select
BankSelectallowsyoutochoosebetweenhavingthePC3respondtoController0orController 32orboth.Thereasonforthisisthatvariousmanufacturershavechosenonemethodorthe other.Thethreepossiblevaluesforthisparameterare: Ctl0 Ctl32 Ctl0/32 Respondstocontroller0only. Respondstocontroller32only. Respondsto0or32.

Local Keyboard Channel (LocalKbdCh)

TheLocalKeyboardChannelenablesanexternalMIDIdevicetofunctionasifitisthePC3s keyboardandphysicalcontrollers.ThisallowsoneMIDIchannelofanexternalMIDIdeviceto controlmultipleMIDIchannelsofthePC3,eveniftheexternalMIDIdeviceonlytransmitson onechannel. InSetupMode,whentheLocalKbdChparameterissettomatchthechannelonwhichthe externalMIDIdeviceistransmitting,thesetupwillplayontheexternalMIDIdeviceasitdoes onthePC3skeyboard.SeetheContinuousControllerMessagesFromExternalMIDI Devices on page 1010sectionbelowfordetailsonreceivingcontinuouscontrollermessages fromanexternalMIDIdevicewhenaLocalKeyboardChannelisset.Also,inSetupMode, whentheLocalKbdChparameterissettomatchthechannelonwhichtheexternalMIDIdevice istransmitting,externalMIDIreceivedbyaZoneissenttothedestinationsetwitheachZones CH/PROGpageDestinationparameter(seeDestination on page 75fordetails.)Inthiscase,ifa ZoneissendingtheexternalMIDItotheUSBorMIDIOutports,theMIDImessageswillbe remappedtothechanneloftheZone,andanynotetranspositionsetfortheZonewillbe applied. InSetupMode,whentheLocalKbdChparameterissettoNone,anexternalMIDIdevicewill playasingleProgram.TheplayedprogramwillbeonaZoneofthecurrentSetupthathasa Channelparameter(ontheSetupEditorCH/PROGpage)whichmatchesthechannelonwhich theexternalMIDIdeviceistransmitting.(IfnoZonesChannelparametermatches,theexternal devicewillplaytheprogramthatwaslastusedbythatchannelinProgramorSetupMode.)Whenthe ProgramofaSetupZoneisplayedfromanexternalMIDIcontrollerwiththeLocalKbdCh parametersettoNone,SetupMIDIparameters(mostnoticeablykeyrangeandtransposition) willnotbeapplied.(SeeInputChannel on page 76fordetailsonapplyingtheseparameters whenplayingasinglezonefromanexternalMIDIdevice.)Also,inSetupMode,whenLocal KeyboardChannelissettoNone,externalMIDIsenttoanychannelisoutputfromtheMIDI Thruport,butnotfromtheMIDIOutportorUSBport. TheLocalKeyboardChannelparameteralsoaffectshowexternalMIDIdevicesinteractwith ProgramMode.InProgramMode,whentheLocalKbdChparameterissettomatchthechannel onwhichtheexternalMIDIdeviceistransmitting,theexternalMIDIdevicewillplaythe ProgramonthechannelcurrentlyselectedontheProgramModemainpage.(TheProgramMode mainpageshowsthecurrentchannelontherightofthetopline.)Also,inthiscase,externalMIDI receivedbyaProgrammodeissenttothedestinationsetontheDestinationparameteronthe MIDIModeTransmitpage(seeDestination on page 102fordetails.)

10-9

MIDI Mode The RECEIVE Page

InProgramMode,whentheLocalKbdChparameterissettoNone,anexternalMIDIdevice willtriggertheprogramonthechannelthatitistransmitting,nomatterwhichchannelis currentlyselectedontheProgramModemainpage.Inthiscase,externalMIDIsenttoany channelisoutputfromtheMIDIThruport,butnotfromtheMIDIOutportorUSBport. Continuous Controller Messages From External MIDI Devices WhenusinganexternalMIDIdevicewiththePC3,youcancontrolmanyofthePC3sprogram parametersbysendingMIDIContinuousControllermessages(CCs)fromtheexternalMIDI device.EachparameterthatyouwishtocontrolmusthaveaCCnumberassignedinthe ProgramEditor(seethesectionbelow:AssigningAnExternalCCNumberAsAControlSourceFor AProgramParameter.)SeethesectionsbelowfordetailsonusingexternalCCswiththeavailable settingsinProgramandSetupMode. FordetailsoncontrollableparametersofVASTprograms,seethefollowingsections:TheDSP Modulation(DSPMOD)Page on page 630,TheLFOPage on page 638,TheASR Page on page 640,TheFunction(FUN)Page on page 641,TheEnvelopeControl(ENVCTL) Page on page 645,TheMODPages on page 910,andFXLFO,FXASR,andFXFUN pages on page 911.ForKB3programs,seethefollowingsections:ThePITCHPage on page 621, TheAMPPage on page 621,KB3Editor:TheLFO,ASR,andFUNPages on page 670,TheMOD Pages on page 910,andFXLFO,FXASR,andFXFUNpages on page 911.
Assigning An External CC Number As A Control Source For A Program Parameter

Foreachprogram,theProgramEditorcanbeusedtoassignanexternalMIDIcontrollerCC numberforeachcontrollableparameterinthatparameterssourcefield.Sourcefieldsarenamed differentlydependingontheirpage:Src1,Src2,RateCt,Trigger,Inputa,Inputb,andSource.To assignaCCnumbertoasourcefield,enterthenumberwiththealphanumericpad,thenpress Enter.Withthesourcefieldselected,youcanalsoassignaCCnumberbyholdingtheEnter buttonandsendingaCCvaluefromtheexternalMIDIcontroller.WhenassigningaCCnumber toasourcefield,thenumbermaybedisplayedinthesourcefieldasthenameofthatCCs defaultuse.

Using External CCs In Program Mode, Local Keyboard Channel=None

TocontrolaprogramparameterviaexternalMIDICCinProgramMode,theparametermust firsthaveasourceassignedwithintheProgramEditor,asdescribedintheAssigningAnExternal CCNumberAsAControlSourceForAProgramParametersectionabove.Tocontrolanassigned programparameterwithLocalKeyboardChannelsettoNone,sendtheassignedCCnumber tothechannelwhichcontainstheprogram.

Using External CCs In Program Mode, Local Keyboard Channel Enabled

TocontrolaprogramparameterviaexternalMIDICCinProgramMode,theparametermust firsthaveasourceassignedwithintheProgramEditor,asdescribedintheAssigningAnExternal CCNumberAsAControlSourceForAProgramParametersectionabove.WhenusingLocal KeyboardChannelinProgramMode,itisbesttoassignparameterstobecontrolledbythe defaultCCsforphysicalcontrollers,becausethesematchthedefaultdestinations(seethe ExternalMIDICCRemappingForLocalKeyboardChannelandInputChanneltablebelowfordefault CCs). TheLocalKeyboardChannelmakesanexternalMIDIcontrollerscontinuouscontrollersbehave asiftheywerethePC3sphysicalcontrollers.InProgramMode,whenanexternalMIDI controllerissendingaCConthechannelsetforLocalKeyboardChannel,externalCCscan controlthedestinationssetforeachofthePC3sphysicalcontrollers.SendthedefaultCCfora physicalcontrollertocontrolitsdestination(seetheExternalMIDICCRemappingForLocal KeyboardChannelandInputChanneltablebelowfordefaults.)InProgramMode,these

10-10

MIDI Mode The RECEIVE Page

destinationsaresetintheControlSetup(seeControlSetup on page 69fordetails.)Bydefault,the destinationsforthePC3sphysicalcontrollersarethesameastheirdefaultCCnumbers.To controlanassignedparameter,sendtheassigneddefaultphysicalcontrollerCCtothechannel setforLocalKeyboardChannel. IfaLocalKeyboardChannelissetbutyouaresendingCCstoadifferentchannel,theseCCs willbereceivednormallybythePrograminthatchannel.

Using External CCs In Setup Mode, Local Keyboard Channel=None, Input Channel=None

TocontrolaprogramparameterviaexternalMIDICCinSetupMode,theparametermustfirst haveasourceassignedwithintheProgramEditor,asdescribedintheAssigningAnExternalCC NumberAsAControlSourceForAProgramParametersectionabove.Tocontrolanassigned parameter,sendtheassignedCCnumbertothechannelfortheSetupZonewhichcontainsthe program.

Using External CCs In Setup Mode, Local Keyboard Channel Enabled, Input Channel=None

TocontrolaprogramparameterviaexternalMIDICCinSetupMode,theparametermustfirst haveasourceassignedwithintheProgramEditor,asdescribedintheAssigningAnExternalCC NumberAsAControlSourceForAProgramParametersectionabove. TheLocalKeyboardChannelmakesanexternalMIDIcontrollerscontinuouscontrollersbehave asiftheywerethePC3sphysicalcontrollers.InSetupMode,whenanexternalMIDIcontroller issendingaCConthechannelsetforLocalKeyboardChannel,externalCCscancontrolthe destinationssetforeachofthePC3sphysicalcontrollers.SendthedefaultCCforaphysical controllertocontrolitsdestination(seetheExternalMIDICCRemappingForLocalKeyboard ChannelandInputChanneltablebelowfordefaults.)TheCCisreceivedinSetupModeandsent toaProgrambasedonthedestinationsetinSetupMode.IntheSetupEditor,usethe alphanumericpadtoseteachPC3physicalcontrollerDest,OnControlorOffControl fieldto theCCsyouassignedinProgramMode.WhensettingaCCdestination,thenumbermayturn intothenameofthePC3physicalcontrollerwhichusesthatCCbydefault.IfyoucreateaSetup usingSetup126InternalVoicesasatemplate,thedefaultCCnumberswillalreadybesetfor eachphysicalcontrollerdestination.(DontsaveaSetupatID126,setup126InternalVoicesisthe PC3sdefaultControlSetup,seeControlSetup on page 69fordetails.) Note:InSetupMode,whenanexternalMIDIcontrollerissendingaCConthechannelsetfor LocalKeyboardChannel,anyCCsentthatisnotintheExternalMIDICCRemappingForLocal KeyboardChannelandInputChanneltable(seebelow)getssenttoProgramsonallZonesofthe Setup. IfaLocalKeyboardChannelissetbutyouaresendingCCstoadifferentchannel,theseCCs willbereceivednormallybytheProgramintheSetupZoneforthatchannel.
Using External CCs In Setup Mode, Local Keyboard Channel=None, Input Channel Enabled

TocontrolaprogramparameterviaexternalMIDICCinSetupMode,theparametermustfirst haveasourceassignedwithintheProgramEditor,asdescribedintheAssigningAnExternalCC NumberAsAControlSourceForAProgramParametersectionabove. TouseanInputChannel(seepage 76,)LocalKeyboardChannelmustbesettoNone.The InputChannelmakesanexternalMIDIcontrollerscontinuouscontrollersbehaveasifthey werethePC3sphysicalcontrollers.WhenanexternalMIDIcontrollerissendingaCConthe channelsetforInputChannel,externalCCscancontrolthedestinationssetforeachofthePC3s physicalcontrollers.SendthedefaultCCforaphysicalcontrollertocontrolitsdestination(see theExternalMIDICCRemappingForLocalKeyboardChannelandInputChanneltablebelowfor defaults.)TheCCisreceivedinSetupModeandsenttoaProgrambasedonthedestinationset

10-11

MIDI Mode The RECEIVE Page

inSetupMode.IntheSetupEditor,usethealphanumericpadtoseteachPC3physical controllerDest,OnControlorOffControl fieldtotheCCsyouassignedinProgramMode. WhensettingaCCdestination,thenumbermayturnintothenameofthePC3physical controllerwhichusesthatCCbydefault.IfyoucreateaSetupusingSetup126InternalVoices asatemplate,thedefaultCCnumberswillalreadybesetforeachphysicalcontroller destination.(DontsaveaSetupatID126,setup126InternalVoicesisthePC3sdefaultControlSetup, seeControlSetup on page 69fordetails.) Note:InSetupMode,whenanexternalMIDIcontrollerissendingaCConthechannelsetfor InputChannel,anyCCsentthatisnotintheExternalMIDICCRemappingForLocalKeyboard ChannelandInputChanneltable(seebelow)alsogetssenttotheProgramonthatchannel. IfanInputChannelissetbutyouaresendingCCstoadifferentchannel,theseCCswillbe receivednormallybytheprogramintheSetupZoneforthatchannel.

External MIDI CC Remapping For Local Keyboard Channel and Input Channel PC3 Physical Controller
Pitch Wheel Mod Wheel Arp Button SW Button Continuous Pedal 1 Continuous Pedal 2 Breath Pressure (key pressure) Foot Switch 1 Foot Switch 2 Foot Switch 3 Ribbon Section 1 Ribbon Section 2 Ribbon Section 3 Slider A (Data) Slider B Sliders C-I Programmable Switches 1-8 Bank Buttons (KB3 control buttons, Setup Zone Mute buttons)

Default MIDI CC# Which Controls The Destination Assigned To Each PC3 Physical Controller In The Setup Editor
NA, responds to MIDI pitch bend messages 1 69 29, 70 11 4 2 Not controllable by MIDI CC 64 66 67 18, 21 19 20 6 13 22-28 Not controllable by MIDI CC Not controllable by MIDI CC

10-12

MIDI Mode The Channels Page

The Channels Page

PresstheCHANLSsoftbuttontoselecttheCHANNELSpage,whereyoucandefinenumerous parametersforeachMIDIchannelindependently.UsetheChan/Layerbuttonstoselectthe MIDIchannelyouwishtoworkon. TheCHANNELSpageisveryusefulwhenyouredoingmultitimbralsequencing,with programsassignedtonumerousMIDIchannels.TheCHANNELSpageletsyousetseveral controlcharacteristicsforeachMIDIchannel.Thismakesiteasytoadjusttheplaybackofthe sequencewithouteditingthesequenceitself.Forexample,youmightturnofftheEnable parameterforoneormorechannelstomutethetracksonthosechannels.Youcouldalsosetthe VolLockparametertoOn,toignoreanyMIDIvolumemessagesthePC3receivesonagiven MIDIchannel.
Parameter Enable Program Pan Volume Program Lock Pan Lock Volume Lock Range of Values Off, On Program list 0 to 127 0 to 127 Off, On Off, On Off, On Default On Program ID 1 64 (centered) 127 (maximum) Off Off Off

Enable
Usethisparametertoturnthecurrentlyselectedchannelonoroff.Whenon,thechannelwill receiveMIDIinformation,andthesettingsoftheparametersontheMIDICHANNELSpage willbeineffect.Whenoff,thechannelwillignoreallMIDIinformation.

Program
Usethisparametertoassignaprogramtothecurrentlyselectedchannel.Thechannelwillstill respondtoprogramchangecommandsreceivedviaMIDI,unlessthePrgLockparameter (describedbelow)issettoOn.

10-13

MIDI Mode The Channels Page

Pan
ThisoffsetsthepanpositionofthecurrentprogramassetontheOUTPUTpageintheProgram Editor.Avalueof0ismaximumoffsettotheleft,64isnooffset,and127ismaximumoffsetto theright.ChangingthevalueofthisparameterislikeinsertingaMIDIpanmessage.MIDIPan (MIDI10)messageswillchangethevalueofthisparameter,unlessthePanLockparameter (describedbelow)issettoOn. IftheModeparameterontheOUTPUTpageintheProgramEditorissettoFixed,changingthe valueofPanontheCHANNELSpageinMIDImodehasnoeffect.

Volume
Thissetsthevolumeforanyprogramassignedtothecurrentlyselectedchannel.Avalueof0is silence,andavalueof127isfullvolume.Thevalueofthisparameterwillchangeinresponseto MIDIVolume(MIDI07)messages,unlesstheVolLockparameter(describedbelow)issettoOn.

Program Lock, Pan Lock, Volume Lock

WhentheparameterlocksaresettoOn,thethreeparameterstheycontroldonotrespondto theirrespectiveMIDIcontrollermessages.Inthatcase,youcouldchangetheProgram,Pan,and Volumesettingsfromthefrontpanel,butnotviaMIDI.

10-14

MIDI Mode Program Change Formats

Program Change Formats

ThePC3canstoremoreprogramsthantheMIDIprogramchangespecificationcanhandle (MIDIletsyousendprogramchangenumbersfrom0to127or1to128only).Sowevedesigned asystemthatmakesprogramselectionmoreflexible.Thisistruewhetheryoureselecting programsfromthePC3sfrontpanel,orviaMIDI.

Program Change Type

Extended

For Use With:

Bank changes and Program changes. A bank has 128 ids. Note that our system will recognize 16 banks, from 0 to 15. (2048 ids). This is for connecting a PC2 or a generic MIDI device as a controller device. Bank changes and Program changes. A bank has 100 ids. Our system will recognize in this case 21 banks, from 0 to 20. For example, with MIDI out from a K2600 into the MIDI in of a PC3, if you scroll or enter a number in the K2600 you will see the same numbers in the K2600 and in the PC3 if the programs exist. Other PC3s (or K2600s, K2500s or K2000s) similarly set, when in Quick Access mode

K2600

QAccess

ThePC3givesyouthousandsofprogramchangenumberstoworkwith.Theseareorganized into16banksof128each(thememorybanks).AprogramsobjectIDisitsprogramchange number,asdiscussedinChapter5.Thismakesiteasytokeeptrackofyourprograms.ThePC3 canuseseveraldifferentformatsforinterpretingprogramchangecommands.Thevalueforthe ProgChgModeparameterontheRECEIVEpagedetermineswhichformatisused,andtheone youshouldselectdependsonyourMIDIsystem. IfyouexpectyoullalwayschangeprogramsfromyourPC3sfrontpanel,selectingprogramsis assimpleasenteringtheprogramchangenumber(theprogramsobjectID)onthe alphanumericpad,andpressingEnter.EvenprogramnumbersabovetheusualMIDIlimitof 127canbeselectedthisway.

Extended Program Changes

IfyourecontrollingyourPC3fromaMIDIdevicethatcanhandletheMIDIController0or32 programchangeformat,youllhavethegreatestflexibilityifyousettheProgChgType parametertoavalueofExtended. Whenyoureusingtheextendedprogramchangeformat,thendependingonthevalueofthe BankSelectparameterontheRECEIVEpageinMIDImode,thePC3willrespondtoeitherMIDI Controller0or32programchangecommandsforbankselection,andstandardprogramchange commandsforprogramchangeswithinthecurrentbank.Differentvalueshavedifferentresults, asshowninthefollowingtable:

Program Change Command Type MIDI controller 0 or 32 (MC 0 or MC 32) Standard (PCH)

Value of Message 0 to 16 0 to 127

Result Selects memory bank zeros900s Selects correspondingly numbered program in current memory bank

10-15

MIDI Mode Program Change Formats

IfyourPC3isalreadyinthememorybankyouwanttouse,youcansenditsinglePCHsfrom0 to127,toselectprogramswithinthatmemorybank.ThePC3sresponsedependsonthesetting fortheBank/SelectparameterontheMIDIModeRECVpage.Ifyouwanttochangethememory bank,thePC3mustreceiveeitheranMC0or32messagewithvalue0127.ThenextPCHinthe range0127willselectthecorrespondinglynumberedprograminthenewlyselectedbank.The followingtableofexamplesshouldhelpmakeitclear.

Bank Change Command Received MC 0 or 32: value 0 MC 0 or 32: value 1 MC 0 or 32: value 1 MC 0 or 32: value 7

Program Change Command Received PCH: value 99 PCH: value 41 PCH: value 129 None

Result Program 99 (Base1 bank, 99th program) Program 169 (Base2 bank, 41st program) Program 258 (Classic Keys bank, 2nd program) KB3 bank selected, no change in current program (bank selection is pending for next PCH)

QAccess
UsingthissettingissimilartousingtheExtendedprogramchangeformat,butitgoesonestep further.Incomingprogramchangecommandsareinterpretedjustastheyareinthenormal Extendedformat.Buttheresultingprogramchangenumber,insteadofselectingaprogram, selectsaQuickAccessbankentry(youmustbeinQuickAccessmodeforthistowork).There aretwoadvantagestousingthisformat.First,itallowsyoutoselectbothprogramsandsetups usingprogramchangecommands,withouthavingtoswitchbetweenProgramandSetup modes.Second,youcanremapincomingprogramchangecommandstoselectprogramsor setupswithdifferentIDs.Thisishandyifthesendingunitcantsendprogramchange commandshigherthan127. First,abriefreviewofQuickAccessbankstructure.EachQuickAccessbankcanstoreten entries,eachofwhichcanbeaprogramorasetup.EachofthePC3s10memorybankscanstore 20QuickAccessbanks(excepttheZerosbank,whichcanstore75).Thereforewhenyourein QuickAccessmode,youhaveaccessto200(or750intheZerosbank)programsorsetups withoutleavingthecurrentlyselectedmemorybank.TheQAExtprogramchangeformatlets youselectanyoneofthoseprogramsorsetupsviaMIDI.Ifyouselectanothermemorybank, youhaveadifferentsetof200programsandsetupsatyourdisposal.Whenyoureusingthis format,thePC3willrespondtoMC0or32messagesforselectingQAbanks,andtoPCHsfor selectingentrieswithinthecurrentbank.PCHsselectentriesaccordingtotheirchronological listingwithintheQAbank(notaccordingtotheirIDs).
Command Type MIDI controller 0 or 32 (MC 0 or MC 32) Standard (PCH) Value Range 0 to 127 0127 Result Selects QA bank 0n, 1n, 2n, 3n, 4n, 5n, 6n, 7n in current memory bank Selects last digit (n above) of QA bank, and entry within that bank

DependingontheQAbankentryyouwanttoselect,youllsendthePC3eitheraPCH(value0 to127),oraMIDIController0or32message(value0to127)followedbyaPCH.Sendinga singlecommandwillletyouselectfromarangeof10QAbanksandselectanentrywithinthat bank(seethetablebelow).ToselectadifferentrangeofQAbanks,sendanMC0or32message followedbyaPCH. TheMC0or32messagesselectstherangeofQAbanks(0sthrough70s),whilethePCHselects thebankwithinthatrange,aswellastheentrywithinthatbank.NeithertheMC0or32northe PCHselectsadifferentmemorybank.Infact,youcantchangethememorybankviaMIDIwhen usingthisformat.Allprogramandsetupselectionsaremadewithinthecurrentlyselected

10-16

MIDI Mode Program Change Formats

memorybank.YoullknowwhichmemorybankisselectedbylookingattheIDofthecurrently selectedQuickAccessbankinthetoplineoftheQuickAccessmodepage. QAccess and MIDI Transmission IfyoureinQuickAccessmodeandyoureusingtheQAccessformatfortheprogramchange type,selectingQAbanksorbankentriesfromthePC3(withthealphanumericbuttonpad,the cursorbuttons,theAlphaWheel,thePlus/Minusbuttons,ortheChan/Layerbuttons)also sendscorrespondingprogramchangecommandstothePC3sUSBandMIDIOutport.ThePC3 sendseitheranMC0or32messagefollowedbyaPCH.Thefollowingtablesgivespecific examples.
Commands Sent MC 0 or 32 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 2 2 7 0 0 1 1 1 PCH 10 19 20 29 99 0 99 0 99 59 0 59 99 77 99

Current QA Bank 1 1 2 2 9 12 19 20 29 75 100 105 110 117 119

Entry From Alphanumeric Pad 0 9 0 9 9 8 9 0 9 9 0 9 9 7 9

Table 10-1

QAccess Program Change Examples

10-17

MIDI Mode The Soft Buttons in MIDI Mode

The Soft Buttons in MIDI Mode

ThefirstthreesoftbuttonsselectthethreeMIDImodepages.ThePrgChgsoftbuttonletsyou sendaprogramchangecommandonanyMIDIchannel.TheRsetChsoftbuttonletsyoureturn allchannelparameterstotheirdefaultvalues.ThePanicsoftbuttonsendsanAllNotesOffand anAllControllersOffmessagestothePC3andonall16MIDIchannels.

Program Change (PrgChg)

Whenyoupressthissoftbutton,adialogappearsthatletsyousendprogramchangesoutthe USBorMIDIOutport,butdoesnotchangeinternalprograms.TheChan/Layerbuttons,theUp/ Downcursorbuttons,andtheChanandChan+softbuttonscanallbeusedtochangethe channelonwhichtheprogramchangecommandwillbesent.TheLeft/Rightcursorbuttons,the Plus/Minusbuttons,theAlphaWheelandtheProgandProg+softbuttonscanallbeusedto changetheprogramchangenumberthatwillbesent.Whenyouvesetthechannelandthe programchangenumber,presstheSendsoftbuttontosendtheprogramchangecommand.Or presstheCancelsoftbuttonifyoudontwanttosendit.Youcanchangethechannelandthe programnumberasmanytimesasyouwantbeforeyoupressSend.Youalsocanusethe alphanumericpadtoselectaprogramnumberdirectly.

Reset Channels (RsetCh)

Whenyoupressthissoftbutton,thePC3asksifyouwanttoresetallchannels.IfyoupressYes, allsettingsontheCHANNELSpagewillreturntotheirdefaultvalues.Whentheprojectsover, youcanresettheChannelstorestoretheaudioroutingtoeachindividualprogram(avalueof Prog),ratherthanselectingeachchannelspageandsettingthePairparameterbacktoavalueof Prog.PressNoifyoudecidenottoresetthechannels.

Panic
PanicsendsAllNotesOffandAllControllersOffmessagestothePC3andallMIDIchannels.

10-18

Master Mode MAIN

Chapter 11 Master Mode

PresstheMastermodebuttontoenterMastermode,whichcontainsparametersaffectingthe PC3soverallperformanceandsystemsetup.YoucansetthesystemClocksothatthePC3will timestampyourfilescorrectly.YoucanusetheObjecttooltorenameordeleteselectionsof objects.YoucanalsoentertheBootLoadertoaccessanumberofsystemandfileutilities,oruse ResettodeletealluserobjectsandrestorethePC3smemorytoitsoriginalfactorysettings. WhenyouexitMasterMode(orMIDIMode)thePC3savesaMasterTable(unless MasterTableLockisOnmoreonthisbelow.)TheMasterTableremembersthesettingsofthe Masterpages,aswellasthestateofthePC3,suchaswhichprogramsareassignedtoeach channel,settingsforMIDIModeTransmitandReceivepages,andMasterFXsettings.Explicit savingoftheMasterTableisalsopossible.

MAIN
OntheMasterModeMAINpageyoullfindparametersforsettingtheoveralltuningand transpositionofthePC3,overallFXsettings,drumprogramremapping,clocksourceoptions, IDentryoptions,demosongoptions,aswellasoptionsforsavingmastermodesettingsand remotetriggeringofPC3functions.

Parameter Tune Transpose FX Mode Drum Remap ID Entry Setup Controllers (SetupCtls) Master Lock Demo Button Buttons Mode Display

Range of Values 100 cents -128 to 127 semitones Performance, Multitrack None, GM Global, Bank Instant, Pass Entry On, Off On, Off Off, On Lyr/Zone, Ctls

Default 0 0 Performance None Global Instant Off On Off Lyr/Zone

11-1

Master Mode MAIN

Tune
AdjustingthevalueofthisparametertuneseveryprograminthePC3bytheamountyou specify.Tuningcanbeadjustedupordown100cents(onesemitone)inonecentincrements. Thisparameterisusefulforgettingintunewithrecordingsandacousticinstruments.Adjusting thetuninginMastermodedoesnotchangethesettingsonthePITCHpageofindividual programs,butwillbeaddedtoanyadjustmentsyoumakethere.Mastermodetuning adjustmentsaffectonlytheaudiooutputofPC3programnotes,andnotnotessentviaMIDI.

Transpose
LiketheTuneparameterabove,TransposeaffectseveryPC3program,butnotthosenotessent totheMIDIOutport.YoucanadjusttheMIDItranspositionsenttotheMIDIOutportonthe TRANSMITpageinMIDImode.

FX Mode
WithFXModesettoPerformance,thePC3minimizesdisruptionofexistingeffectswhen changingprograms,andentryvalueswillnotdisruptsustainednoteswhenchangingprograms inProgramorQuickAccessmodes.WhencontrollingthePC3fromanexternalsequencerin ProgramMode,youwillwanttosetFXModetoMultitracktominimizeeffectdisruption.FX ModeissettoPerformanceasadefault,withsomeexceptions.InSongmode,Multitrackmode isalwaysused,despitehowthisparameterissetinMasterMode.Also,theFXModeparameter doesnotaffectSetupModebecauseitusesitsownFXmode.

Drum Remap
ThisparameterwillremapallDrumprogramstoconformtotheGeneralMIDI(GM)drummap, astandarddrummapusedinmanykeyboardsandsynthesizers.TheGMdrummapisnt optimallyintuitiveintermsofplayability,sobydefaultthePC3usesauniquekeymapthatis moreintuitiveandlendsbettertoperformance.However,theGMdrummapisso commonplacethatmanyplayersfeelmorecomfortableplayingdrumprogramswiththeGM drummap.Becauseofthis,thePC3isdesignedsuchthatyoucanremapdrumprogramstothe GMdrummap. WhentheMasterPageDrumRemapissettoNone,noremappingtakesplaceinProgrammode. WhentheMasterPageDrumRemapissettoGM,thePC3remapsDrumprogramstotheGM drummap.

ID Entry
Globalmeansthatanyentryyoumakefromthealphanumerickeypadwillselecttheobject indicated,regardlessofthebankitisin.Forexample,inprogrammodetype36ofthe alphanumerickeypadtoselectprogram36. IfNumericEntryissettoBank,yourselectionwillbelimitedtothecurrentlyselectedbank.For instance,inProgrammode,ifyouareinOrchestrabankandyouenter65,thenthecurrent programbecomesprogram65oftheOrchestrabank,viz.449HornSectLayer.

Setup Controllers (SetupCtls)

TheSetupControllersparameteraffectshowthePC3sphysicalcontrollersrelatetoEntry ValuesinSetupMode(seeEntry(Ent)andExitValues on page 730.)WiththeSetupControllers parametersettoInstant,movingaphysicalcontrollerassignedwithinaSetupwillinstantly sendanewMIDIvaluetothatassignment.WiththeSetupControllersparametersetto PassEntry,movingaphysicalcontrollerassignedwithinaSetupwillnotsendanewMIDIvalue tothatassignmentuntilthephysicalcontrollerpassesthevaluesetforitsEntryValue.Instantis setbydefault,butPassEntrycanbeusefulsothatSetupcontrollerassignmentsdontjumpfar fromtheirentryvalueswhenfirstmovingaphysicalcontroller.

11-2

Master Mode MAIN

Master Table Lock (Master Lock)

WithMasterLocksettoOff,thePC3willsavethecurrentMastermodeconfigurationwhenyou exitMastermode(orMIDImode).ThisinformationisstoredinaMasterTableobject(see Save on page 1117belowformoredetailsonwhatissavedwithaMasterTable.) IfyouhaveaparticularMasterconfigurationthatyouwouldliketosafeguardagainsttheauto savingfeature,setMasterLocktoOn.WiththeMasterLockon,thePC3doesnotsaveany changesunlessyoupresstheSavesoftbutton.NotethatifyouwouldlikeMasterLocktostay onnexttimeyouturnonthePC3,youmustpresstheSavesoftbuttontostorethestateof MasterLocktotheMasterTable.

Demo Button
TheDemoButtonparameterdetermineswhatpressingthePlay/Pausebuttondoesinprogram mode.WiththeDemobuttonparametersettoOn,thePlay/Pausebuttonplaysademosongfor thecurrentprogram.(Toplayademosong,theDemoSongparametermustbesetinthe programeditorforthecurrentprogram,seepage 637fordetails.)WiththeDemobutton parametersettoOff,thePlay/PausebuttonplaysthelastsongthatwasselectedinSongMode. Ifademosongissetforthecurrentprogram,itcanalwaysbeplayedfromprogrammodeby simultaneouslypressingtheupanddowncursorbuttons.

Buttons Mode (Buttons)

IfyousettheButtonsparametertoOn,pressinganybuttonsonthePC3willgenerateSystem Exclusive(SysEx)messagesthataresenttotheMIDIOutport.Thisenablesyoutodotwo things:controlaremotePC3,and/orrecordsequencesofprogrammingbuttonpressestoa sequencerorSysExsoftwarepackage. IfyouhavetheMIDIInportofanotherPC3connectedtothefirstonesMIDIOutport,the secondinstrumentwillrespondtoeverybuttonpressonthefirstinstrument,justasifyouwere pressingthebuttonsofthesecondone.Keepinmindthatbothdevicesmustbeinexactlythe samestate(thesamepageinthesamemode,withidenticallistsofobjects)whenyoustart. Otherwisethebuttonpressesyoumakeonthefirstinstrumentmayexecuteotherfunctionson thesecondinstrument. Again,itsimportanttokeepinmindthatthestateofyourPC3mustbeidenticaltoitsstate whenyourecordedthesequenceofbuttonpresses.Ifyouveaddedordeletedanyobjects,for example,thesequenceofbuttonpresseswillselectdifferentobjectswhenyouplaybackthe buttonpresssequence.

Display
TheDisplayparameterdetermineswhatwillbedisplayedintheinfoboxontheleftsideofthe ProgramModeandSetupModemainpages.WhenDisplayissettoLyr/Zone,theinfoboxwill displayanoverviewofthekeymapnamesandrangesforeachlayerinthecurrentProgram (whileinProgramMode,)oranoverviewoftheProgramnamesandrangesforeachzoneinthe currentSetup(whileinSetupMode.)Thelinebeneaththenameofthekeymap/program indicatesthekeyboardrangeofthatlayer/zone.Forexample,alineextendingallthewayacross theinfoboxrepresentsalayer/zonethatextendsfromC1toG9thefull128noterangeofthe PC3.Therepresentationoftheselayer/zonerangesisapproximate;theyreintendedtoletyou knowifyouhavealayeredkeyboard(linesoverlapping)orasplitkeyboard(linesnot overlapping).InProgramMode,stereokeymaplayersareindicatedintheinfoboxwitha doublecirclesymbol.InSetupMode,zonesthathavetheRiffparametersettoOn(Onthe SetupEditorRIFF1page)areindicatedintheinfoboxwithariFFsymbol.Theinfoboxcan displayuptofourlayers/zonesatatime.IfthecurrentProgram/Setuphasmorethanfour layers/zones,youcanviewtheirkeymaps/programsbypressingandholdingdowntheEnter buttonandscrollingwiththeChan/Layerbuttons.

11-3

Master Mode MAPS

WhenDisplayissettoCtls,ProgramModeandSetupModeusetheinfoboxtodisplaythe controllerassignmentinfoandMIDICCvalueforthelastmovedcontroller.Theinfoboxclears afewmomentsafterdisplayingthecontrollerinfo.

MAPS
OntheMAPSpageyoullfindparametersforsettingkeyboardbehaviorforvelocity,pressure, intonation,andkeyactionmaps.YoucanalsosetthedefaultsequenceforSongmode.

Velocity Map (Master)

ChangetheMasterVelocityMapsettingifyoufindthatthePC3isnotproducingthedesired velocities(tooloudortooquiet)basedonyourplayingstyle(howlightorheavythatyouplay thekeys.)Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidestrangeofvelocityexpression,butyoumaywant tochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnotsuityourplayingstyle. MIDI Sources PC3Keyboard MIDIInviaMIDIInportorUSBComputerport

VelocityMapSettingsonMIDIModeReceivePage

KEYVELpageforcurrentControlSetup(inProgramMode)orcurrentZone(inSetupMode)

VelocityMapSettingsonMasterModeMAPSPage

PC3SongMode

VelocityMapSettingsonMIDIModeTransmitPage

MIDI Destinations PC3SoundEngine to PC3audiooutputs MIDIOutviaMIDIOutportorUSBComputerport

11-4

Master Mode MAPS

TheMasterVelocityMapisanoverallcontrolforMIDIvelocitiesusedinthePC3.MIDI velocitiesarevaluescreatedforeachnotedependingonhowhardyoustrikeakey.TheMaster VelocityMapaffectsMIDIvelocityvaluesforallMIDIsourcesanddestinationsusedinthePC3 (seethecircledboxaboveforitslocationintheMIDIsignalflow.)Differentmapsusedforthe MasterVelocityMapgeneratedifferentMIDIvelocityvaluesforthesamephysicalkeystrike velocity.EachmapappliesadifferentcurvetoreceivedMIDIattackvelocitiesandremapsthem tonewvelocitiesbeforelettingthempass.Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidestrangeofvelocity expression,butyoumaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnotsuityourplaying style.SeethediagramabovefortheotherpagesthataffecttheMIDIattackvelocitybeforeand afterreachingtheMasterVelocityMap. Thedefaultmap,Linear,allowsMIDIvelocitiestopassunchanged.Light13makeit increasinglyeasiertoproducehighMIDIvelocityvaluesforthesamekeystrikevelocity(with Light3beingtheeasiest,)sothesemapsmayworkbetterforuserswhoplaywithalighter touch.Hard13makeitincreasinglyhardertoproducehighMIDIvelocityvaluesforthesame keystrikevelocity(withHard3beingthehardest,)sothesemapsmayworkbetterforusers whoplaywithahardertouch.PianoTouchsimulatesthegeneralvelocityresponseofan acousticpiano,andisbestsuitedforplayingacousticpianoprograms.EasyTouchissimilarto theLightsettings,makinghighvelocitieseasiertoplay,butitallowsmoresensitivecontrolover playinghighvelocitiesbynotboostingtheMIDIvelocityforfaststrikevelocitiesasmuchasit doesformediumstrikevelocities.GMReceivemimicsthevelocitymapcommonlyusedby keyboardsthatusetheGeneralMIDI(GM)soundset.TheGMReceivemapmakesmedium strikevelocitiesproducehigherMIDIvelocitiescomparedtotheLinearmap.GMReceiveeffects notesfromthePC3skeyboardaswellastheMIDIinport.Thismapisautomaticallyusedwhen thePC3isinGMmode(seeGeneralMIDIMode(GMOn,GMOff)below,)thoughusersmay wanttousetheGMReceivemapwhengeneratingMIDIoutsideofGMmodewhichwilllater beplayedbackbyaGMsystem.

11-5

Master Mode MAPS

Pressure Map (Master)

ChangetheMasterPressMapsettingifyoufindthatthePC3isnotproducingthedesiredMIDI pressure(aftertouch)values(toohighortoolow)basedonyourplayingstyle(howsoftorhard thatyoupressthekeys.)Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidestrangeofpressureexpression,but youmaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnotsuityourplayingstyle. MIDI Sources PC3Keyboard MIDIInviaMIDIInportorUSBComputerport

PressureMapSettingsonMIDIModeReceivePage

PRESSpageforcurrentControlSetup(inProgramMode)orcurrentZone(inSetupMode)

PressureMapSettingsonMasterModeMAPSPage

PC3SongMode

PressureMapSettingsonMIDIModeTransmitPage

MIDI Destinations PC3SoundEngine to PC3audiooutputs MIDIOutviaMIDIOutportorUSBComputerport

TheMasterPressMapisanoverallcontrolforMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesusedinthe PC3.MIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesarecreatedforeachnotedependingonhowhardyou pressonakeythatisbeinghelddown.TheMasterPressMapaffectsMIDIpressure(aftertouch) valuesforallMIDIsourcesanddestinationsusedinthePC3(seethecircledboxaboveforits locationintheMIDIsignalflow.)DifferentmapsusedfortheMasterPressMapgenerate differentMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesforthesamephysicalkeypressvalue.Eachmap appliesadifferentcurvetoreceivedMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesandremapsthemtonew valuesbeforelettingthempass.Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidestrangeofpressure (aftertouch)expression,butyoumaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnotsuit yourplayingstyle.SeethediagramabovefortheotherpagesthataffectMIDIpressure (aftertouch)valuesbeforeandafterreachingtheMasterPressMap. Thedefaultmap,Linear,allowsMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuestopassunchanged.Maps24 makeitincreasinglyeasiertoproduceMIDIpressurevaluesforthesamephysicalpressure appliedtoakey(with4Easiestbeingtheeasiest.)Maps47makeitincreasinglyharderto produceMIDIpressurevaluesforthesamephysicalpressureappliedtoakey(with7Hardest beingthehardest.)

11-6

Master Mode MAPS

Intonation
Mostmodernwesternmusicuseswhatisknownasequaltemperament.Thismeansthatthe intervalbetweeneachsemitoneofthe12toneoctaveispreciselythesameaseveryother semitone.However,manydifferentintonationintervalshaveevolvedoverthecenturiesand acrossculturesandinstruments,soequaltemperamentwillnotsoundappropriateforcertain stylesofmusic.ThePC3suppliesyouwith17differentfactoryintonationmapswhichareuseful forarangeofdifferentstyles.Bychangingthevalueforthisparameter,youselectfromamong theintonationmapsstoredinthePC3smemory.Youcanfurthercustomizeeachmaporcreate yourownbyeditingamap(seeEditingIntonationMapsbelow.)Eachofthesemapsdefines differentintervalsbetweeneachofthesemitonesinasingleoctave(usedforalloctaves)by settingpitchoffsetsforeachnoteincents. ScrollthroughthelistofIntonationmaps,andlistenforthedifferencesbetweensemitones. Someoftheintervalsbetweensemitonesmaybequitedifferentfromequaltemperament,but youllnoticethatallnotesarepreciselytunedwithnotesthatareanoctaveapart.Thisisbecause theintonationmapssettheintervalswithinasingleoctave,andapplythoseintervalstoeach octave. Likemanyinstrumentsbeforetheadaptationofequaltemperament,mostoftheseintonation mapsweredesignedtosoundbestinonespecifickey.Thoughsomemayhavehistoricallybeen inadifferentkey,allofthePC3sfactoryintonationmapsaresettorootnoteCbydefault.You canchangetherootkeyofthecurrentintonationmapbyusingtheInt.Keyparameter(seethe IntonationKey(Int.Key)sectionbelow.) List and Description of Intonation Maps
0 None 1 Equal 2 Classic Just 3 Just Flat 7th 4 Harmonic 5 Just Harmonic 6 Werkmeister 7 1/5th Comma 8 1/4th Comma 9 Indian Raga 10 Arabic 11 BaliJava1 12 BaliJava2 13 BaliJava3 14 Tibetan 15 CarlosAlpha No intonation map is used, intonation is equal but cannot be edited. No detuning of any intervals. The standard for modern western music. Tunings are defined based on the ratios of the frequencies between intervals. The original tuning of Classical European music. Similar to classic Just, but with the Dominant 7th flatted an additional 15 cents. The perfect 4th, Tritone, and Dominant 7th are heavily flatted. Approximation of a historical intonation. Named for its inventor, Andreas Werkmeister. Its fairly close to equal temperament, and was developed to enable transposition with less dissonance. Approximation of a historical intonation based on the comma system. Approximation of a historical intonation based on the comma system. Based on the tunings for traditional Indian music. Oriented toward the tunings of Mid-Eastern music. Based on the pentatonic scale of Balinese and Javanese music. A variation on 1Bali/Java, slightly more subtle overall. A more extreme variation. Based on the Chinese pentatonic scale. Developed by Wendy Carlos, an innovator in microtonal tunings, this intonation map flats each interval increasingly, resulting in an octave with quarter-tone intervals. This is a Pythagorean tuning, based on the Greek pentatonic scale. The tritone is 12 cents sharp. This is a Pythagorean tuning, based on the Greek pentatonic scale. The tritone is 12 cents flat.

16 Pyth/aug4 17 Pyth/dim5

11-7

Master Mode MAPS

Ingeneral,youshouldselectanonstandardintonationmapwhenyoureplayingsimple melodies(asopposedtochords)inaparticularmusicalstyle.Whenyouuseintonationmaps basedonpentatonicscales,youllnormallyplaypentatonicscalestomostaccuratelyreproduce thosestyles. Editing Intonation Maps Toeditanintonationmaporcreateanewmap,selectanexistingmapandpresstheEditbutton tobringuptheEditIntonationMapscreen(seebelow.)Intonationmapsarebasedaroundaroot key,shownontherightofthetoplineofthescreen.Usethechanup/downbuttonstochange therootkey(thisisthesameaschangingtheInt.Keyparameter(seeIntonationKey(Int.Key) below.)IntonationKeyisnotsavedwiththeintonationmap.)Usethecursortomovebetween notesteps,eachofwhichislabeledbyitsdifferenceinkeyboardstepsfromtheroot.Eachstep canbeshiftedby200cents(100cents=1halfstep.)Usethealphawheel,alphanumericpad,or plus/minusbuttonstoenterthedesiredcentshiftamountforeachstep.

PressDeletetodeletethemapfrommemory.PressRenametorenamethemapandsave. PressingSavegivesyoutheoptiontosavethemaporrenameandsave.Tocreateanewmap, editanexistingmapandchooseRenamewhensaving.PressExittoreturntoMasterpage2. Whenexitingtheeditor,itwillautomaticallygiveyoutheoptiontosavethemapifchanges havebeenmade.Formoredetailedinstructionsonthesefunctions,seeSavingand Naming on page 53.

Key Action Map

TheKeyActionMapdeterminesthedefaultwaythePC3respondstokeyactionforspecific keyboardcomponentmodels.Generallyspeaking,youwillnotwanttoaltertheKeyAction Map.ThisparameterisincludedfortherareoccasionwhenaPC3hasbeensetupatthefactory foradifferentkeyboardcomponentmodelthantheoneinstalled.Ausermaydiscoverthatthey needtochangetheKeyActionMapwhentheyhavetriedalloftheVelocityMapsettingsand stilldonotfeelcomfortablewiththekeyresponseoftheirPC3.Differentmapsresultindifferent responsesfromthePC3forthesamephysicalkeyaction,andeachmapcorrespondstoa differentkeyboardcomponentmodel.Ifyouhavechangedthisparameterandwanttochangeit backtothedefaultmapforyourPC3,simplyenteravalueof0intheKeyActionMap parameterfield.

Intonation Key (Int.Key)

Thissetsthetonic,orbasenotefromwhichthecurrentlyselectedintonationmapcalculatesits intervals.IfyouselectGastheintonationkey,forexample,andtheintonationmapyouselect tunestheminor2nddownby50cents,thenG#willbeaquartertoneflatrelativetoequal intonation.IfyouchangetheintonationkeytoD,thenD#willbeaquartertoneflat.Ifyouuse nonstandardintonations,youllwanttosetInt.Keytothekeyyoureplayingin.IftheIntonation parameterissettoEqual,changingInt.Keyhasnoeffect.

11-8

Master Mode OUTPUT

Default Sequence
TheDefaultSequenceparameterspecifiesthesongthatisusedasatemplatefornewandclear songsinSongmode.

OUTPUT
TheOUTPUTpagehasoptionsfordigitalaudiooutputvolumeandsamplerate.Youcanalso settheanalogAuxoutputstomirrortheprimaryanalogoutputs.YoucanalsocontroltheMIDI clocksourceandMIDIclockoutput.

Parameter Output Clock Digital Output Volume (Dig. out volume) Digital Output (Dig.Out) Aux Out Pair Mode Clock Source

Range of Values Off, On Variable, Fixed Digital Output List Normal, Mirror Primary Outputs Internal, External

Default Off Variable 48 KHz Normal Internal

Output Clock
TosendaMIDIclockpulsetotheMIDIOutport,setthisparametertoOn.Otherwise,setitto Off.

Digital Output Volume (Dig. out volume)

TheDigitalOutputVolumeparameterspecifiesthebehaviorofthePC3sDigitalOutput.Setting thisparametertoVariablemakestheDigitalOutputrespondtochangesmadeonthevolume slider.SettingthisparametertoFixedmakestheDigitalOutputoutputasignalwithafixed volume.

Digital Output (Dig. Out)

ThisDigitalOutputparameterspecifiesthePC3sdigitaloutputsamplerate.Internallyclocked sampleratesgofrom44.1Kupto192K. Externallysyncedsampleratescover20220KHzin3ranges.Besuretheexternalclock frequencyiswithintherangeyouselect.

Aux Out Pair Mode

TheAuxOutPairModeparameterspecifiesthebehavioroftheSecondaryAudioOutputs (locatedonthebackpanelunderneaththeBalancedAnalogOutputsAUXlabel.Settingthis parametertoNormalmakestheAuxOutputsbehaveassuch.SettingthisparametertoMirror PrimaryOutputsmakestheAuxOutputsoutputthesameaudiosignalasthePrimaryoutput.

11-9

Master Mode TEMPO

Clock Source
WiththeClockSourceparameter,youcansetthePC3togenerateitsowntempobysetting ClockSourcetoInternal,oryoucansetthePC3tosyncupwiththetempofromanother deviceassumingthedeviceissendingMIDIclockdatatothePC3viaMIDIorUSBby settingClockSourcetoExternal.SeeImportantNoteAboutExternalSequencers: on page 128for relatedinformation.

TEMPO
PresstheTEMPOsoftbuttontogototheTEMPOpage(seebelow.)WhentheClockSource parameterissettoInternal(seeClockSource on page 1110,)theTempoparameteronthe TEMPOpagesetsthePC3ssystemtempo.Thesystemtemposetsthetempoforallmodes exceptSetupMode,whichhasitsowntemposettings.Also,inSongmode,changingtoanew songwilloverridethesystemtempo.TheTempoparametervaluesareinunitsofBPM(beats perminute).

YoucanalsocalluptheTEMPOpagefromanyotherpagebypressingtheleftandrightcursor buttonssimultaneously. SettheTempoparameterwiththe/+buttons,theAlphaWheel,orthealphanumericpad.You canalsosetthesystemtempobytappingtheTapsoftbuttonatthedesiredspeed.Youneedto tapatleasttwiceforatempotobecalculated,thoughtappingseveraltimes(likeoneachbeatof oneormoremeasures)worksbest.Thenewlytappedtempoisdisplayedinthetempofield,and alongthebottomfourProgramselectbuttonsalitLEDmovesfromlefttorightatthistempo. Alternatively,atemporarycontrollercanbesetforuseintheTemporaryTAPcontrollerfield, insteadofusingtheTapsoftbutton.TheTemporaryTAPcontrollerfieldlistsgroupsofPC3 controllersinorderoftheirusefulnessfortapping.Listedfirstarethefootswitchesandswitch buttons(thoughitwouldbeeasiertousetheTapsoftbuttonthansetatemporaryswitch button.)AftertheseisNoteOn,whichletsyoutapthetempowithanykeyboardkey.Lastare theMIDIcontrollernumbers,whichincludesallofthecontinuouscontrollers,though continuouscontrollers(suchasaslider)arenoteasyorrecommendedfortappingthetempo. TheTemporaryTAPcontrollerworksonlywhileontheTEMPOpageandwillremainselected whenaccessingtheTEMPOpagefromothermodes,buttheselectionwillreturntoOFFthenext timethePC3isturnedon. Youcanalsoassignacontrollertocontrollerdestination168,TapTempo,tobeusedasatap tempobuttonwhennotviewingtheTEMPOpage.Forthosewhofrequentlyusetaptempo,this isatimesavingadditiontoanysetuporcontrolsetup(seeChapter 7,SetupModeformoreon controllersanddestinations.)AnyMIDIvaluesreceivedbydestination168sendatapsignalto thetaptempofunction.Thiswouldbebestusedwithaprogrammableswitch(orfootswitch.) ConfiguretheselectedswitchsothatitisToggled,hasitsOnandOffControlssettodestination 168(TapTempo,)andsettheOnandOffValuestoanyvalueotherthanNone.EntryandExit StateshouldbesettoNone.

11-10

Master Mode General MIDI Mode (GM On, GM Off)

General MIDI Mode (GM On, GM Off)

ThissoftbuttonenablesordisablesGeneralMIDI(GM)mode.WhenGMmodeisoff(the default,)thebuttonsislabeledGMOn.PresstheGMOnsoftbuttontoenterGMmode.ThePC3 willpromptyoutoconfirmorcancel.WhenGMmodeisonthebuttonsislabeledGMOff.Press theGMOffsoftbuttontoexitGMmode.ThePC3willpromptyoutoconfirmorcancel.Youcan notaccessSetupModeorQuickAccessModewhileinGMmode.Asidefromwhatisnotedin thissection,allotherPC3functionsoperatenormallywhileinGMmode.InGMmode,thePC3 compliesspecificallywiththeGeneralMIDI(GM1)specification. AnOverviewofGeneralMIDI GeneralMIDIisaspecificationcreatedbytheMIDIManufacturersAssociationwhichdefines specificfeaturesthataMIDIinstrumentmusthave(seetheMMAwebsiteatwww.midi.orgfor moreinformation.)Amongotherthings,theGMspecificationsetsastandardbankofprogram namesandnumbers,aswellasastandarddrummappinglayout,sothatsequencescreatedon anyGMinstrumentwillplaybackwiththecorrectinstrumentationonanyotherGM instrument,nomatterthemanufacturer.GMhasmanyuses,forexampleitmakesiteasyfor musicianswhouseMIDIfilestoshareideasandcollaboratewhileusingdifferentsetsof equipment.Alsomanyinstrumentalversionsofpublicdomainsongscanbefoundforfreeon theinternetasGMcompatibleMIDIfiles.These,likeallMIDIfiles,offercertainadvantagesover audiosuchassmallfilesize,theabilitytoedit,orchestrate,orchangetempotoeasilylearnfrom thesequences,orevenconvertnoteinformationtostandardnotationwithathirdparty application. OverviewofGeneralMIDIMode Onceenabled,Programmodewilldisplaythesetof128standardGMprogramnamesonthe rightsideofthescreen(seebelow.)Asidefromthedifferentlayoutandprogramchoice,Program modeoperatesnormally(seebelowforinfoontheleftsideofthescreen.)AdefaultGMsequencewill beloadedwhichsetsFXsendsforreverbandchorus,whicharepartoftheGMspecification. DrumprogramswillalsoberemappedtotheGMdrummap.ThestandardPC3programswill notbevisibleuntilGMmodeisturnedoff.

ReplacingDefaultGeneralMIDIPrograms ThePC3sGMsoundsconsistofPC3programstailoredtoworkwellinallGMsequences,but youcanalsoeditorexchangetheseprogramstosuityourtaste.ThePC3providesyouwitha GMsoundseteditorwhichallowsyoutoreplacethePC3sdefaultGMprogramswithanyother PC3factoryorusercreatedprogram.Forexample,youcouldchooseadifferentfactoryoruser createdpianoprogramtoreplacethedefaultGMprogram1,AcGrandPiano.Thisway,anyGM sequencethatusesGMprogram1wouldnowusethenewpianoprogramthatyouselected. Alternatively,youcouldevenchooseadifferentinstrumenttoreplacethedefaultGMprogram

11-11

Master Mode OBJECT

1,suchasPC3program47Harpsichord.Thisway,anyGMsequencethatusesGMprogram1 wouldnowusethenewharpsichordprogramthatyouselected.UsingaPC3programthatdoes notresembletheinstrumentnamedinthecurrentGMprogramwouldtechnicallymakethePC3 incompatiblewithGM,butsomeusersmaywanttodothisasawaytoremixGMsequences. ItiseasytoreplacedefaultGMprogramsinordertomakeacustomGMsoundset.OnceinGM mode,therightsideofProgramModescreendisplaysalistoftheGMprogramswiththeir standardGMnames.TheleftsideofthescreenshowsyouwhatPC3programisbeingusedfor theselectedGMprogram.Pressingleftonthecursormovesyoutothisfield.Usethecursors up/downbuttons,thealphanumericpad,theplus/minusbuttons,orthealphawheelifyouwish toselectadifferentPC3programforthecurrentGMprogram.Dontusetheprogramor categorybuttonsbecausethesewillchangethecurrentlyselectedGMprogram.Thenewly selectedPC3programwillbeusedbythecurrentGMprogram,thoughthenameoftheGM programwillnotchange.Tosavethesesettingsyoumustsavethemastertable(seeSavebelow.) SavedsettingscanberecalledafterpoweringofforleavingGMmode.TorestoreGMmodes factoryselectedprograms,presstheResetsoftbutton(seebelow.)

OBJECT
PressingtheOBJECTsoftbuttoncallsuptheOBJECTSpage(seebelow.)Fromhereyoucan chooseoneoftwoutilityfunctionsforrenamingordeletingselectionsofusercreated(oredited) objects.PresstheRenameorDeletesoftbuttontoaccesseachfunction(seebelowfordetails.) TheOBJECTSpagealsodisplaysthenumberofuserobjectssavedtointernalmemory(inthe UserObjectsfield,)themaximumnumberofuserobjectsthatcanbesavedtointernalmemory (intheMaxUserObjectsfield,)andtheamountoffreeinternalmemory(intheIntMemoryFree field.)(TheMaxUserObjectsfieldshowsthemaximumamountofuserobjectsthatcanbeloaded/saved tointernalmemoryforallobjecttypescombined.Keepinmindeachobjecttypeonlyhas2560ID#s availabletosave/loadobjectsto,manyofwhichareusedbyfactoryROMobjects.) Note:ThenumbergivenfortheMaxUserObjectsfieldisbasedonloading/savingthesmallestuser objectstointernalmemory.Whenloading/savinglargeruserobjects(suchasProgramswithmanylayers andSetupswithmanyzones),thePC3mayrunoutofinternalmemorybeforethemaximumnumberof userobjectshasbeenloaded/saved. TheinformationontheOBJECTSpageishelpfulwhenorganizinguserobjects.Forexample, whenloadingmanyuserobjectsfromanexternalsource,youshouldfirstdetermineifthereis enoughinternalmemoryavailablefortheobjectsbeingloaded.Ifthereisnotenoughinternal memoryavailable,usetheDelete softbuttontodeleteuserobjects.(Tosaveuserobjectsbefore deletion,seeTheSTOREPage on page 135.) TheOBJECTSpagealsodisplaysthecurrentinstalledobjectsversion(factoryobjects,)andthe currentinstalledOSversion.Thisinformationisusefulwheninstallingupdates.

11-12

Master Mode OBJECT

Rename
TheRenameutilityallowsyoutorenameanobjectwithoutenteringtheobjectseditor.The Renamepageshowsalistofallusercreatedobjects,groupedbyobjecttype(seebelow.)Usethe alphawheelorplus/minusbuttonstoselectanobjectfromthelist.PressRenametobringupthe objectRenamescreenandenteranewnamebyfollowingthestandardrenamingprocedure.For moreinformation,seeSavingandNaming on page 53.

AsinallnamingdialogsonthePC3,youcandoadoublepressoftheLeft/Rightcursorbuttons toputthenamingcursoronthelastcharacterofthestring.Thisishelpfulwhenputtingunique charactersattheendsofnames. Left/Rightcursorbuttondoublepress>Movecursortotheendofthenameinanynamingdialogue.

Delete
TheobjectDeleteutilityisusefulfordeletingunwantedusercreatedobjectsinordertoincrease freeinternalmemoryspaceinyourPC3.OnthemainDeletepage,foreachobjecttypeyoucan selectabankofobjectstodelete,arangeofobjectstodelete,ordeleteallobjects.OntheDelete advancedpage,youcanselectasingleobjectormultipleobjectstodelete. Todeleteagrouporrangeofobjects,usethemainDeletepage(seebelow.)Usethecursorto selecttheleftcolumn,thenusethecursor,alphawheelorplus/minusbuttonstoselectoneor moreobjecttypesfromthelist.UsetheSelectsoftbuttontomakeyourselection(s),whichwill bemarkedwithastar.SelectAllTypesifyouwanttodeletealluserobjects(thiswillselectall objecttypesandnumbersautomatically.)Next,usethecursortoselecttherightcolumn,then usethecursor,alphawheelorplus/minusbuttonstoselectoneormorerangesofobject numbersfromthelist.Youcanselectobjectnumbersbybankgrouping(groupsof128),by numberrange(select1...100RangeusetheSetRngsoftbuttonandchooseanyrangeof2048 objects)orselectEverythingtodeleteallobjectsoftheselectedtype.Again,usetheSelectsoft buttontomakeyourselection(s),whichwillbemarkedwithastar.TheClearsoftbuttonwill clearyourselection(s)fromthecurrentlyselectedlist.PresstheDeletesoftbuttontodeleteyour selection,youwillbegiventhechoicetoDeleteorCancel.TheCancelsoftbuttononthemain deletepagewillreturnyoutotheOBJECTSpage.

11-13

Master Mode OBJECT

Todeletesingleormultipleobjects,gototheDeleteadvancedpagebypressingtheAdvncesoft buttononthemainDeletepage(seebelow.)Therightcolumnshowsyoualistofallusercreated objects.Theleftcolumntellsyouwhattypeeachobjectis,andobjectsaregroupedbytype.Use thealphawheelorplus/minusbuttonstoselectoneormoreobjectsfromthelist.UsetheSelect softbuttontomakeyourselection(s),whichwillbemarkedwithastar.UsetheTypesoftbutton tojumptothelowestnumberedobjectofthenextgroupofobjecttypes.Youcanusethe alphanumericpadtojumptoanobjectoftheselectedtypebynumber,orenter0tojumptothe lowestsavedobjectnumberofthecurrentlyselectedtype.Toreviewwhichobjectsyouhave selected,presstheNextsoftbuttontomovetothenextselectedobjectinthelist.Pressthe Deletesoftbuttontodeleteyourselection,youwillbegiventhechoicetoDeleteorCancel.The CancelsoftbuttonontheDeleteadvancedpagewillreturnyoutothemainDeletepage.

ForDeleteandDeleteadvance,ifanyoftheselectedobjectshavedependentsthatwerenot selected,youwillseethequestion:Deletedependentobjects? IfyouanswerYestothisquestion,alldependentobjectsoftheselectedobjectsaredeleted, unlesstheyarebeingusedasdependentsofotherobjectsthataretoremaininmemory. AnsweringNowilldeleteonlythoseobjectsthatwereselectedandnottheirdependents.

11-14

Master Mode UTILS (UTILITIES)

UTILS (UTILITIES)
PressingtheUTILSsoftbuttoncallsuptheUTILITIESpage,whichgivesyouaccesstotwo analyticanddiagnostictool.Additionally,pressingthetworightmostsoftbuttonswillcallup theUTILITIESpagefromanymodeoreditor.TheUTILITIESpageappearsasshownbelow:

PressingtheMIDIsoftbuttonlaunchesMIDIScope,ausefulsubprogramthatletsyou monitortheMIDImessagesfromthePC3andthosereceivedviaMIDI.Thisisagoodwayto makesureyourereceivingMIDIfromMIDImasters.Itsalsogoodformakingsureyour controlsareassignedasyouwantthem,checkingyourattackvelocities,checkingyour controllervalues,etc. PressingtheVoicessoftbuttoncallsuptheVoiceStatuspage,whichshowsthePC3sactive voicechannelsasyouplay.TheVoiceStatuspagesdisplayseachactivevoiceasasolid rectangularblockformonovoicesordisplaysstereopairsofvoicesasa>fortheleftchannel voiceanda<fortherightchannelvoice.Whateversymbolthepagedisplays,whenthekeyofa voiceisreleased,thatvoicessymbolontheVoicesStatuspageturnsintoadotduringthe releaseportionofthatvoicesenvelope.Whenthevoicedecaystosilence,itisnolongeractive, andthedotdisappears.TheVoiceStatussymbolsappearsasshownbelow:

TheVoiceStatuspagegivesyouanindicationoftheenvelopelevelofeachvoice,thoughnot necessarilythevolumelevel.Nonetheless,thiscangiveyouavaluableindicationofhowyour voicesarebeingused.Forexample,ifallormostofthevoicesareactive,thentheresagood chancethatwhenvoicestealingtakesplaceanaudiblevoicewillbereallocated. TheVoicesutilityworksabitdifferentlyforKB3programs.ThePC3usesonevoiceof polyphonyforeverytwotonewheelsinaKB3program.IntheVoicesutility,thevoicesusedby thetonewheelsappearassolidrectangularblock,meaningthatthevoicesareusedfortheKB3 program.Theydontgetreallocatedatanytime,sincetheyrealwayson,evenifyourenot playinganynotes.AnyvoicesnotdedicatedtoaKB3programbehavenormally.Soifyouhave asetupthatcontainsaKB3programinonezone,andVASTprogramsinoneormoreother zones,youcanmonitorthevoiceallocationofthenonKB3voicesinthesectionofthedisplay thatisntconstantlyfilledwithsolidrectangularblocks. CPUusageisdisplayedinpercentonthebottomofthepage,whichreflectshowmuchofthe PC3stotalavailableCPUpowerisbeingusedfrommomenttomoment.Generally,havingmore voices,complexProgramsandeffectsinuseatoncewillresultinhigherCPUusage.

11-15

Master Mode CLOCK

CLOCK
PressingtheCLOCKsoftbuttonallowsyoutoviewthePC3sSystemClock(seebelow.)When objectsaresaved,theyaretimestampedwiththedateandtimeofthisclock.Thistimestamp canbeseeninthefilepropertieswhenviewingthefileswithacomputer.

TheFormatsoftbuttonchangestheviewformatofthedateonthispage.TheSetsoftbutton bringsyoutotheSetclockpagewhereyoucansetthesystemclockanddate.Usethecursorto movebetweenfields,usethealphawheelorplus/minusbuttonstochangeeachfield.OntheSet page,presstheSetsoftbuttontosavechangesandreturntotheSystemClockpage,orthe CancelsoftbuttontoreturntotheSystemClockpagewithoutsavingchanges. TheChronosoftbuttonbringsupthePC3sChronometer(stopwatch)page(seebelow.)This canbeusefulfortimingthelengthofsongsorperformances.PresstheStartsoftbuttontobegin timing.TheChronometerwillcontinuerunningevenifyouexittootherscreensormodes.Press theStopsoftbuttontostoptiming,theResetsoftbuttontoresettheChronometer,ortheCancel softbuttontoreturntotheSystemClockpage.

Reset
PresstheResetsoftbuttonifyouwanttoreturnyourPC3smemorytothestateitwasinwhen youboughtit. CAUTION:ResettingthePC3systemcausesALLparameterstoberestoredtodefaultvaluesandALL userobjectstobeerased.ThePC3willaskyouifyouwanttodeleteeverything(meaningallobjects),and apairofYes/Nosoftbuttonswillappear.PressNoifyouwanttokeepanyobjectsyouhavesaved.Press Yes,andeverythingstoredinthePC3willbeerased.Afterafewseconds,thePC3willreturntothe Programmodepage.

11-16

Master Mode Loader

Loader
PressingtheLoadersoftbuttoncallsuptheBootLoader.SeeAppendix B.

About
PressingtheAboutsoftbuttoncallsupthegeneralinfopageforthePC3.Onthispageisthe versionoftheinstalledOSandfactoryobject.Pressanykeytoleavethispage.

Save
PressingtheSavesoftbuttonsavestheMasterTableobject,whichsavesmanyimportantPC3 settingsasdefaults.SincetheMasterTableisalwayssavedwhenexitingMasterMode(orMIDI mode,)theSavesoftbuttonisonlyneededinordertosavewhenMasterTableLockison(see MasterTableLock(MasterLock) on page 113,above.) TheMasterTablesavesthecurrentconfigurationofthepagesinMastermode.TheMasterTable alsosavesdefaultsettingsforwhichprogramisselectedoneachofthe16channelsinProgram mode(notethatthesechannelsettingsareoftenalteredbyloadingasonginSongmode.)The currentchannelandprogramselectedinProgrammodewhentheMasterTableissavedwillbe loadedbydefaultthenexttimethePC3ispoweredon.TheMasterTablesavessettingsfrom MIDImodefortheTransmit,Receive,andChannelspages.TheMasterTablealsosavessettings forfavoriteprograms(seetheUserInterfaceBasicschapter,page34.)Lastly,theMasterTable savessettingsfortheMasterEffectspageinEffectmode. OnlyoneMasterTableobjectcanbesavedinthePC3sinternalmemory,andthisshouldbe sufficientformostusers.ForuserswhowishtosavealternateMastertablesforquickeraccessto differentsystemconfigurations,theobjectmustbesavedtoanexternaldevice(seetheStorage Modechapter.)

Preview Sample (PRVIEW)

PressthePRVIEWbuttontogotothePREVIEWpage.ThePREVIEWpagecanbeusedto automaticallymakeanewkeymapandprogramusinganysampleorgroupofsampleroots. ProgramscreatedwiththepreviewfunctionaresavedinProgramMode.Thisallowsyouto quicklyhearwhatasampleorgroupofsamplerootswillsoundlikeinaprogram.Thepreview functionisalsoaquickwaytobeginmakinganewprogramwhichcanbeeditedfurtherif desired. Ifasinglesampleisselectedasinglekeyrangekeymapwillbecreated.Ifagroupofsample rootsisselected,thepreviewfunctionwilltrytocreateakeymapwithmultiplekeyrangesbased oneachsamplesrootkey.Ifthesampleorgroupofsamplerootsarestereo,thecreatedprogram willbestereo. Tousethepreviewfunction,gotothePREVIEWpage,selectasampleorgroupofsampleroots intheSamplefieldusingtheAlphaWheel,/+buttons,orthealphanumericpad,thenpressthe OKsoftbutton.NextyouwillbeshownalistofbanksbyID#range(bank1=1...128,bank2= 129...256,etc.)UsetheAlphaWheelor/+buttonstochooseabankfromthislist.Thepreview functionwillsavethecreatedprogramandkeymapusingthelowestunusedIDnumbers availableinthatbankorhigher.Thepreviewfunctionwillneveroverwriteexistingprogramsor keymaps.SavingtotheUserbank(1025...1152andabove)willmakeiteasiesttofindthenew programorkeymapsintheProgramslistorKeymapslist.PresstheOksoftbuttontochoosethe selectedbankandcreatethenewprogramandkeymap.Thenewprogramwillbeselectedinthe currentlyselectedchannelinProgramMode.

11-17

Master Mode Preview Sample (PRVIEW)

11-18

Song Mode and the Song Editor Getting Started with the Sequencer

Chapter 12 Song Mode and the Song Editor

Getting Started with the Sequencer
ThePC3ssequencerisapowerfulandversatiletoolforsongwriters,composers,andanyone elsewhowantstorecordandplaybacksongs.Aswithanytool,however,itsbesttostartwith thebasics.Ifyouarefamiliarwithothersequencers,youwillhavenoproblemusingSongmode inthePC3.Readthroughthissection,tolearnaboutthefeaturesthatmakethePC3ssequencer unique.SeeChapter 15,Tutorial:SongModeforaguideonbasicrecordinginSongMode.

What is a Sequencer?
Asequencerissimilarinsomewaystoamultitracktaperecorder:youcanrecordandplay backallsortsofmusicandsounds,layersoundsontopofothersounds,andchangeor manipulatethingsthatyouvepreviouslyrecorded.Unlikeataperecorder,however,youdonot actuallyrecordsoundswithasequencer.Rather,youarerecordingcommandsthatcause soundstobeplayed.Nonetheless,wewillsometimesexplainsequencerfeaturesbydrawing analogiestofamiliartaperecordingtechniquessuchassplicingandoverdubbing. Thereareseveraladvantagestorecordingasongbysequencing.Foronething,sequencer commandstakeupmuchlessdiskspacethandigitallyrecordedmusicwould,soyoucangeta lotofinformation(thatis,music)permegabyte.Furthermore,youcaneasilymakechangesto yoursequences.Forexample,youcanchangeindividualnotes,transposeparts,orchange instrumentation.Lastly,youcansharethesequencesyoucreatewithothermusicians.

Song Mode: The MAIN Page

TheSongmodeMAINPageallowsrealtimerecordingandplayback,songandtrackselection. Fromthispageyoucanviewandeditthetrackschannel,program,volumeandpansettings,as wellasotherusefulitems.

Parameter Current Song Recording Track Program

Range of Values Song List 1 to 16, None, Mult Program List

Default 0*New Song* 1 Current Program

12-1

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The MAIN Page

Parameter Track Status Channel Volume Pan Tempo Mode Location

Range of Values , R, M, P 1 to 16 0 to 127 0 to 127 20.0 to 400.0 BPM, EXT Merge, Erase -9999:9 to 9999:9

Default 1 to 16 left to right 127 64 120.0 BPM Merge 1:1

TheEventsfieldonthetoplinedisplaysthefreeRAMavailableforeventsintheselectedsong. TheSongStatus,alsoonthetoplineofthedisplay,isalwaysoneofthefollowing: STOPPED PLAYING REC.READY Thedefaultsequencerstatus;alsoappearswhenyoupresstheStoporPause button. AppearswhenthePlaybuttonispressed,butonlyifthefollowingconditions aretrue:theRecordwasnotpressedpriortopressingPlay. AppearswhentheRecordbuttonispressedwhileSongStatusisSTOPPED. REC.READYflashes,indicatingthatthesequenceriswaitingtostart recording.

Current Song (CurSong)

ThisshowstheIDand16characternameofthesongcurrentlyselectedforrecording,playback, orediting.Whenasongisselected,ProgramChange,Volume,andPaninformationissenttoall MIDIchannelsassignedtotracksthathavedataonthem,andtheinternalclockissettomatch thesettingoftheTempoparameter.Whenlookingforapreviouslysavedsong,youcanscroll throughsongswhilethesequencerisplayingtoquicklyhearthebeginningofeach.

Tempo
TheTempoparameterdeterminestheinitialtempofortheselectedsong.Thesongwillalways startplaybackattheinitialtempo.Whateverthetempoissettowhenyourecordyourfirsttrack willbethesongsinitialtempo.Duringplayback,thecurrenttempoisshowninthisfield. Duringrecording,temposdialedinheregetrecordedintheTempoTrack.Theinitialtempoand othertempochangescanalsobeeditedintheeventlistfortheTempoTrack.TheTempotrack alsoallowsyoutoprogrammoreprecisefractionaltemposwithtwodecimalplaces. Toquicklychangeasongsinitialtempo,pressRecord(theSongStatuswillchangetoREC READY),setthetempodesired,thenpressStop.Theinitialtempocanalsobechangedwiththe TempoparameterontheCOMMONpageintheSongEditor,oratthetopoftheeventlistforthe TempotrackontheEVENTpageintheSongEditor. Note:Youcanalsosetthetempousingthetaptempofunction.Presstheleftandrightcursor buttonssimultaneouslytoaccesstheTEMPOpage(seeTEMPO on page 1110.) Youcanalsosetthetempotobecontrolledbyanexternalsequencer.UsetheAlphanumericPad toenter0inthetempofield,andpressenter.EXTwillappearinthetempofield.AnyMIDI TimeClock(MTC)signalreceivedatthePC3sUSBorMIDIinportwillnowsettheSong playbacktempo.

12-2

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The MAIN Page

Recording Track (RecTrk)

TheRecTrkparameterdetermineswhichtrackisrecordenabled.Settherecordenabledtrackto Multtorecordmorethanonechannelsimultaneously. WhenRecTrkissettoasingletrack(116),Record(R)isdisplayedforthattrackintheTrack StatusIndicatorregion(abovetheTrackandChannelsregion).Conversely,withoneexception, whenanytracksStatusIndicatorischangedtoRecord(R),thattrackisshownasthevaluefor theRecTrkparameter. TheexceptioniswhenRecTrkisalreadysettoMult,youcanselecttherecordenabledtracksby togglingtheTrackStatusIndicatortoRecord(R),andtheRecTrkwillremainsettoMult. WhenMultisinitiallyselected,alloftheemptytrackswillberecordenabled.Trackscontaining datawillremainsettoplay(P),butyoucanmanuallysetthemtorecord(R). Theparameter(s)belowRecTrkchangeaccordingtothevalueofRecTrk.IfRecTrkissettoa singletrack(116),Progisdisplayedandyoucanselecttheprogramtobeassignedtothattrack. Ifyouswitchthroughthechannels,theprogramalsochanges,showingtheprogramcurrently assignedtothatchannel. IfyouchangeRecTrktoNoneorMulti,thedisplaychangestoshowTrk:#.Thisfieldindicates whichtrackiscurrentlybeingtriggeredbythekeyboard,andyoucanusethisTrk:#fieldto selectatrack.

Program (Prog)
Usethisfieldtoscrollthroughtheprogramsinmemoryandselectaprogrambeforeinitially recordingeachtrackofyoursong.AprogramselectedonthecurrentRecTrkbecomesthe tracksinitialprogramthefirsttimethatthetrackisrecorded.Aninitialprogramistheprogram thatwillbeusedforatrackwhenitisplayedfromthestartofbar1(oranyotherpointifthere arenoprogramchangesandControlChaseisturnedon,seeControlChase on page 1217.) ProgramsselectedinProgramorQuickAccessModeareselectedastheprogramonthecurrent RecTrkwhenyoureturntoSongmode. FollowthesestepstochangethecurrentRecTrksinitialprogramafterrecordinghastakenplace onthattrack.Whilethesequencerisstopped,pressRecord,selecttheprogram,pressStop,and savethesong.Thispreservesallchangesyouhavemadetoanyothertrackparameters:volume, pan,tempo,etc.YoucanalsochangetheinitialprogramatthetopofatracksEVENTlist(see SongEditor:TheEVENTPage on page 1231.) AnyMIDIprogramchangesonthecurrentRecTrkorChancausetheIDandnameofthetracks programtochangeduringplayback.Programchangescanbewrittentotheeventlistofthe currentRecTrkbychangingtheProgparameterwhilerecording.Ifaprogramchangetakes place,theprogramwillonlyreturntotheinitialprogramiftriggeredbyanotherprogram change,orifthesequencerisstoppedandrestartedfromthebeginningofthesequence.One exceptiontothisiswhenusingtheControlChasefeature,youwouldonlyneedtorestartthe sequencebeforethefirstprogramchangeinordertoreturntotheinitialprogram(seeControl Chase on page 1217.) ProgchangestoTrk:#ifRecTrkissettoNoneorMult.Thisfieldindicateswhichtrackis currentlybeingtriggeredbythekeyboard,andyoucanusethisTrk:#fieldtoselectatrack.

Track Number (Trk:#)

ThisparameterisavailableonlywhenRecTrkissettoNoneorMult(replacingtheProg parameter.)Itindicateswhichtrackiscurrentlybeingtriggeredbythekeyboard,andyoucan usethisfieldtoselectatrack.

12-3

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The MAIN Page

Volume (Vol)
Youcansetavolumelevelforeachtrackasavaluebetween0and127.Ifthechannelofthe RecTrk(orthecontrolchannel,ifRecTrkissettoMultiorNone)containsanyrecordedvolume change(controller7),thechangewillbereflectedastheVolparametersvalueinrealtime,as wellasontheMIXERpage.Also,changingtheVolvaluewhilerecordingwillwritevolume automation(controller7messages)tothecurrentRecTrkseventlist. Initial Volume Settings Eachsongfiledoesnotautomaticallysaveyourvolumesettingforeachtrack.Tomakeasong saveyourvolumesettingsforeachtrack,youmustwriteaninitialvolumeforeachtrack.Initial volumeisthevolumesettingthatwillbeusedwhenyoursongisplayedbackfromthestartof bar1.Aninitialvolumesettingisessentiallyavolumeautomationmessagethatiswritten beforethefirsttickofatrack.Initialvolumesettingsarenotautomaticallywrittenduring recordingbecausetheymakeithardertotryoutdifferentvolumesettingsforatrack.For example,aninitialvolumewillresetanyvolumeadjustmentsthatyoumakeduringplayback eachtimethesongisstoppedandplayedfromthestartofbar1,orifthesongisstoppedand playedfromanypointiftheControlChaseparametersettoOnontheSong:MISCpage(see SongMode:TheMISCPage on page 1217.)Ifyouplantotryoutdifferentvolumesettings,itis easierifyouwriteaninitialvolumeafteryouhavefoundthedesiredsetting. Setting Initial Volume Per Track FollowthesestepstochangethecurrentRecTrksinitialvolume.Whilethesequenceris stopped,pressRecord,changethevalueofVol,pressStop,andsavethesong(followthesame methodtoquicklysetinitialprogramorpansettings.)Initialprogram,volume,andpancanalso besetatthetopofeachtrackseventlist(seeSongEditor:TheEVENTPage on page 1231.) Setting Initial Values For All Tracks AnimportantlaststepbeforesavingafinishedsongistostoreinitialvaluesofProgram,Volume andPanforalltracks.Thiscanbedoneatanytime,butisbestdoneasalaststepifyouplanto makealotofadjustmentstothesesettings.Towriteinitialsettingsforalltracks,presstheKeep softbuttonontheSong:MIXERpage(seeSongMode:TheMIXERPage on page 1212.)After pressingtheKeepsoftbuttonyoumustsaveyoursongtosavethesesettings(youare automaticallypromptedtosaveuponexitingtheSong:MIXERpage.)PressingtheKeepsoft buttonstoresthecurrentvalueofeachtracksProgram,VolumeandPansettingsasinitial settings.Besurethatthesevaluesoneachtrackaresettothevaluethatyouwishtostore,asthe settingsmayhavechangedifyouhavewrittenanyautomation. Note:DontusetheKeepsoftbuttonifyouwouldlikecertaintrackstonotbestoredwithinitialvalues. Inthiscase,onlysetinitialvaluesforeachdesiredparameterasdescribedabove(seeSettingInitial VolumePerTrack.) Volume Sources When An Initial Volume Is Not Set Ifaninitialvolumeisnotstoredwitheachtrack,thevolumeforeachtrackofyoursongwillbe setdependingonwhatmodeyouwereinprevioustoloadingthesong.IfyouareinSongmode andhaveplayedasong,andthenyouloadasongwithoutinitialvolumes,thevolumeofeach trackofthenewlyloadedsongwillbesetbythepreviouslyplayedsong.Volumesettingsare tiedtoMIDIchannels,sothevolumeofeachtrackwillbedependentonwhichMIDIchannelis assignedtoeachtrackineachsong.IfyouareinSongmodeandyouloadasongthatdoesnot haveinitialvolumeswithoutplayinganothersongfirst,thevolumeoftheMIDIchannelfor eachtrackissetdependingonwhichmodeyouenterSongmodefrom.IfyouenterSongmode fromMIDImode,Programmode,orQuickAccessmode,thevolumeofeachMIDIchannelis setinMIDImodeontheChannelspage.IfyouenterSongmodefromSetupmode,thevolume

12-4

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The MAIN Page

ofeachMIDIchannelissetifazoneusesthesameMIDIchannelontheSetupModeCH/PROG page(setwiththeChannelparameter.)IfazonedoesuseaMIDIchannelthatoneofthetracks inyoursonguses,thevolumeofthattrackwillbesetbytheExitVolumeparameterofthatzone (ontheSetupMode:PANVOLpage.)IfmultiplezonesusethesameMIDIchannel,the ExitVolumeofthehighestnumberedzonethatusesthatchannelwillsetthevolumefortracks thatusethatchannel.IfExitVolumeissettoNONE,thevalueforEntryVolumeisused.If EntryVolumeandExitVolumearesettoNONE,thenthetrackforthatchannelusesthevolume setforthatchannelinMIDImodeontheChannelspage.Ifthereisnozonethatusescertain channelsusedbyyoursong,thenthosechannelsinyoursongwillusethevolumesettingof thosechannelsinMIDImodeontheChannelspage.

Pan
Youcansetaninitialpanposition(thebalancebetweentheLeftandRightaudiochannels)for theplaybackandrecordingofeachtrackasavaluebetween0and127.Avalueof64iscenter.If thechanneloftheRecTrkorthecontrolchannelcontainsanypanningdata(controller10),the changewillbereflectedasthePanparametersvalueinrealtime,aswellasontheMIXERpage. Also,changingthePanvaluewhilerecordingwillwritePanautomation(controller10 messages)tothecurrentRecTrkseventlist. Initial Pan Settings EachsongfiledoesnotautomaticallysaveyourPansettingforeachtrack.Tomakeasongsave yourPansettingsforeachtrack,youmustwriteaninitialPanvalueforeachtrack.InitialPanis thePansettingthatwillbeusedwhenyoursongisplayedbackfromthestartofbar1.Aninitial PansettingisessentiallyaPanautomationmessagethatiswrittenbeforethefirsttickofatrack. InitialPansettingsarenotautomaticallywrittenduringrecordingbecausetheymakeitharder totryoutdifferentPansettingsforatrack.Forexample,aninitialPansettingwillresetanyPan adjustmentsthatyoumakeduringplaybackeachtimethesongisstoppedandplayedfromthe startofbar1,orifthesongisstoppedandplayedfromanypointiftheControlChase parametersettoOnontheSong:MISCpage(seeSongMode:TheMISCPage on page 1217.)If youplantotryoutdifferentpanpositions,itiseasierifyouwriteaninitialPanafteryouhave foundthedesiredsetting. Setting Initial Pan Per Track FollowthesestepstochangethecurrentRecTrksinitialPan.Whilethesequencerisstopped, pressRecord,changethevalueofPan,pressStop,andsavethesong(followthesamemethod toquicklysetinitialprogramorvolumesettings.)Initialprogram,pan,andvolumecanalsobe setatthetopofeachtrackseventlist(seeSongEditor:TheEVENTPage on page 1231.) Setting Initial Values For All Tracks AnimportantlaststepbeforesavingafinishedsongistostoreinitialvaluesofProgram,Volume andPanforalltracks.Thiscanbedoneatanytime,butisbestdoneasalaststepifyouplanto makealotofadjustmentstothesesettings.Towriteinitialsettingsforalltracks,presstheKeep softbuttonontheSong:MIXERpage(seeSongMode:TheMIXERPage on page 1212.)After pressingtheKeepsoftbuttonyoumustsaveyoursongtosavethesesettings(youare automaticallypromptedtosaveuponexitingtheSong:MIXERpage.)PressingtheKeepsoft buttonstoresthecurrentvalueofeachtracksProgram,VolumeandPansettingsasinitial settings.Besurethatthesevaluesoneachtrackaresettothevaluethatyouwishtostore,asthe settingsmayhavechangedifyouhavewrittenanyautomation. Note:DontusetheKeepsoftbuttonifyouwouldlikecertaintrackstonotbestoredwithinitialvalues. Inthiscase,onlysetinitialvaluesforeachdesiredparameterasdescribedabove(seeSettingInitialPan PerTrack.)

12-5

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The MAIN Page

Pan Sources When An Initial Pan Is Not Set IfaninitialPanisnotstoredwitheachtrack,thePanforeachtrackofyoursongwillbeset dependingonwhatmodeyouwereinprevioustoloadingthesong.IfyouareinSongmode andhaveplayedasong,andthenyouloadasongwithoutinitialPansettings,thePanofeach trackofthenewlyloadedsongwillbesetbythepreviouslyplayedsong.Pansettingsaretiedto MIDIchannels,sothePanofeachtrackwillbedependentonwhichMIDIchannelisassignedto eachtrackineachsong.IfyouareinSongmodeandyouloadasongthatdoesnothaveinitial Pansettingswithoutplayinganothersongfirst,thePanoftheMIDIchannelforeachtrackisset dependingonwhichmodeyouenterSongmodefrom.IfyouenterSongmodefromMIDI mode,Programmode,orQuickAccessmode,thePanofeachMIDIchannelissetinMIDImode ontheChannelspage.IfyouenterSongmodefromSetupmode,thePanofeachMIDIchannel issetifazoneusesthesameMIDIchannelontheSetupModeCH/PROGpage(setwiththe Channelparameter.)IfazonedoesuseaMIDIchannelthatoneofthetracksinyoursonguses, thePanofthattrackwillbesetbytheExitPanparameterofthatzone(ontheSetupMode:PAN VOLpage.)IfmultiplezonesusethesameMIDIchannel,theExitPanofthehighestnumbered zonethatusesthatchannelwillsetthePanfortracksthatusethatchannel.IfExitPanissetto NONE,thevalueforEntryPanisused.IfEntryPanandExitPanaresettoNONE,thenthetrack forthatchannelusesthePansettingofthatchannelinMIDImodeontheChannelspage.Ifthere isnozonethatusescertainchannelsusedbyyoursong,thenthosechannelsinyoursongwill usethePansettingofthosechannelsinMIDImodeontheChannelspage.

Mode
IfModeissettoMergeyouwillbeabletooverdubwhenrecordingonatrackcontaining previouslyrecordeddata.YoullusuallywanttosetModetoMergewhenRecMode(ontheBIG page)issettoLoop.Otherwise,eachtimethroughtheloop,thepreviouslyrecorded informationwillbeerased. IfyousetModetoErase,thepreviouslyrecordeddataontherecordenabledtrackwillbe replacedwiththenewdataonlyduringtheBarsandBeatsyouareactuallyrecording,andthe previouslyrecordeddatabeforeandafterthenewlyrecordedBarsandBeatswillbepreserved.

Location (Locat)
TheBarandBeatdisplayedastheLocatevaluechangesrelativetocurrentlocationofthesong duringplaybackandrecording.YoucansetthistoanegativeBarandBeatlocationtostart playbackasetlengthoftimebeforethebeginningofthesong. WheneveryousettheLocatepoint,thatlocationwillbeusedasthereturnpointwhenStopis pressed.SimplypressStopagaintoresetthesongtothetop(1:1).

Mode Indicators (+ and x):

ModeIndicatorsappearonlyfortracksthatalreadycontaindata. Aplussign(+)appearsabovetheTrackStatusIndicatorofatracksettorecord(R)whenthe ModeparameterissettoMerge. An(x)appearsabovetheTrackStatusIndicatorofatracksettoRecord(R)whentheMode parameterissettoErase.

Activity Indicators
AsmallsquareabovetheTrackStatusIndicatorofatracksettoPlay(P)orMute(M)meansthe trackcontainsdata.

12-6

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The MAIN Page

Duringplaybackandrecording,theindicatorsabovetrackscontaininganyMIDIdatawillflash asmall,filledinsquarewhenanyMIDIactivityisdetected.

Track Status Indicators

UsingtheUp,Down,Left,andRightcursorbuttonstopositionthecursorontoaTrackStatus Indicator,youcantoggleanemptytrack()intoRecord(R)withtheAlphaWheelorPlus/ Minusbuttons. Onceatrackcontainsdata,itwillhavea(P)asaTrackStatusIndicator,anditwillbeplayed duringplayback.YounowwillbeabletotogglebetweenPlay(P),Mute(M),andRecord(R). ThetrackselectedastheRecTrkwilldisplayan(R),designatingitastherecordingtrack.Ifthe RecTrkissettoMult,initiallyallemptytrackswillhaveRecord(R)asaTrackStatusIndicator, anyofwhichcanbeswitchedbacktoempty()ifatanytimerecordingonspecifictracksisnot desired. Ifthereisntatrackwithan(R),theRecTrkparametersvaluewillbeNone.(Theexceptionis whentheRecTrkissettoMultandyouhaveswitchedallofthetracksoutofrecordenable.)

Track Channels
EachtrackhasaMIDIChannelthatitusestoreceiveandtransmitdata.Bydefault,tracks116 ofanewsongareassignedtoChannels116respectively,althoughatrackcanplayorrecordon anychannelandthesamechannelcanbeusedformorethanonetrack.Keepinmind,however, thatonlyoneprogramcanbeassignedtoachannelatatime,soifyouhavemorethanonetrack assignedtothesamechannel,theyllplaythesameprogramtheoneonthehighernumbered track,sincethatsthemostrecentProgramChangecommandreceivedonthatchannel.

Soft Buttons on the MAIN Page

Thissectioncontainsdescriptionsofthefunctionsofthefunctionsoftbuttons,thatis,the buttonswithlabelsnotinallcaps.Aswithallothermodes,thesoftbuttonsinSongModethat havelabelsinallcapscallupdifferentpages.Seethefollowingsectionsfordescriptionsonhow thesepageswork. The Rec, Play, and Stop Soft Buttons NOTE:Thesebuttonsaresimilartothetransportcontrolsonatapedeck.Someofthosedecksrequireyou topressPlayandRecordsimultaneouslytobeginrecording.ThePC3stransportbuttonsarentlikethat, however.Itsimportantthatyoupressonlyoneofthesesoftbuttonsatatimetoinsureproperrecording startpoints,andtoalwaysbesureofthecurrentsequencerstatus. TheRecsoftbuttonchangestheSongStatustoREC.READYifthecurrentSongStatusis STOPPED.IfthecurrentSongStatusisPLAYING,itwillbeswitchedtoRECORDINGwhenyou pressRec. ThePlaysoftbuttonplaysbackanyrecordeddatawhenpressedwhilethesongstatusis STOPPED.PlaybackwillbeginfromthebarandbeatspecifiedintheLocateparameter.When theSongStatusisRECREADY,pressingthePlaysoftbuttonwillbeginrecording. ThePlaysoftbuttonfunctionsasaPausebutton,butonlywhentheSongStatusisPLAYINGor RECORDING.PressingPlaywhilethesongisplayingwillstoptheplayback,andthelocation remainsatthecurrentbarandbeat,allowingyoutocontinuefromthatlocationbypressing Playagain. PressingPausewhilerecordingwillstoptherecordingprocessasifyouhadpressedStop.

12-7

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The MAIN Page

TheStopsoftbuttonhaltstheplaybackorrecording,andresetsthesongslocationtoeitherthe defaultBar 1, Beat1value,ortowhateverlocationyoudefinedwiththeLocateparameter.Ifthe locationisdefinedassomethingotherthanBar1,Beat1,pressStoptwicetoresetto1:1. PressingStopwhentheSongStatusisRECORDINGwillalwaysprompttheSavechangesto thissong?dialog(describedbelow),andprovidesyouwiththeopportunitytolistentothenew songandcompareitwiththeold,previouslysaved,songbeforeansweringYesorNo. ThePC3alsohasdedicatedfrontpanelbuttonsforRecord,Play/Pause,andStop.Youllfind themjustbelowtheeightmodebuttons.Additionallyyoucancontrolthesefunctionsfromany externalsequencerthatsendsMIDIMachineControl(MMC)messages.ThePC3will automaticallylistentoanyMMCmessagesreceivedattheUSBorMIDIinport.ThePC3will alsoautomaticallysenditsownMMCmessagesfromtheUSBandMIDIoutport,enablingthe PC3stransporttocontrolanexternalsequencer.Thisworksfromanymode,thoughinProgram modeyouwillwanttomakesurethattheDemoButtonfunctionissettooff.Youcandothis fromtheMasterModeMainpage.WhenDemoButtonissettooff,youcanstillhearProgram demosbypressingthecursorupanddownbuttonssimultaneously.
Important Note About External Sequencers:

IfusingthePC3transportcontrolstorecordtoanexternalsequencer,youmustbeinSongmode withtheRecTrksettoNone.Ifthisisnotdone,youwillsimultaneouslyrecordtotheexternal sequencerandtheselectedRecTrkifinSongMode,oractivatetheQuickSongRecording functionfromothermodes.ThiswillcauseunwantedsequencestoberecordedinthePC3s sequencer. IfyouarealsotriggeringPC3soundsfromtheexternalsequencer,youwillrunintothesame issuewhenusingthetransportontheexternalsequencer(ifitissendingMMC.)Inthiscase, eitherturnoffoutgoingMMContheexternalsequencer,orusethesameprecautionsasabove. The Load, Save, and Export Soft Buttons TheLoadsoftbuttoncallsupascrollinglistfromwhichyoucanquicklylocateandloada sequence.YoucanselectasequenceusingeithertheAlphaWheelor/+buttons,oryoucan enterasequencesIDnumber. TheSavebuttoncallsuptheSaveAsdialog. TheExportbuttonexportsthecurrentsongtoamemorycardasaStandardMIDIFile.Select StandardMIDIFiletype1(saveswithmultiplechannels,)orStandardMIDIFiletype0(savesas 1channel.) The NewSng, ClrSng and Delete Soft Buttons TheNewSngsoftbuttoncreatesanewsongusingtheDefaultSequence(specifiedonPage2of MasterMode)asaparametertemplate.Pressingthisbuttonisthesameasselecting0*New Song*. TheClrSngsoftbuttoncreatesanewsongwhoseparametersaresettothedefaultvalueslisted inthetablebeneaththissectionsheader(SongMode:TheMAINPage).Keepinmindthatthe selectedprogramforthenewsongwillbethecurrentlyselectedprogram. PresstheDelete softbuttontodeletethecurrentsong.ThePC3willpresentaprompt,atwhich pointyoumaycancel,orconfirmtodeletethesong.

12-8

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The MAIN Page

The Save Changes Dialog

ThefollowingdialogappearsafteryouhaverecordedatrackandpressedStop,orifyouhave enteredtheSongEditorandmadechanges,thenpressedExit,orifyoupressSaveintheSong Editor.

ThePlyNewsoftbuttonallowsyoutoplaythesongwithyourlastrecordedperformance.You willlikelywanttohearthisfirst. PressingPlyOldwillplaythecurrentsong,minustheperformancethatyoujustrecorded.You cantogglebetweenPlayOldandPlayNewwithoutrestartingthesongbypressingeither buttonwhilethesongisplaying.Thisisusefultocheckifyourlastperformancewasbetteror worsethanwhatwaspreviouslysaved(ifanythingwaspreviouslysaved.) TheLocatefieldallowsyouchooseastarttimefortheoldornewplayback.Thisisusefulwhen youjustwanttohearacertainpartofthesongwithoutlisteningtothewholething.ThePlaying fielddisplayswhethertoNEWorOLDdataisplaying. StophaltstheplaybackofeithertheOldortheNewversionofthesongyouarecurrently auditioning.ThisalsoresetsthesongsstartlocationtoeitherthedefaultBar1,Beat1value,or towhateverlocationyoudefinedintheLocatefield. PressingRetryrestartsrecordingfromthesamepointyoulaststartedrecordingat. Yessavesthesongwiththeperformanceyoujustrecorded.Whateverwasplayedbackwhen youpressedPlayNewwillbetheversionofthesongsavedwhenyoupressYes.Thesaveas dialogwillbedisplayed:

UsetheAlphaWheel,/+buttons,orAlphanumericPadtochooseafreeID#locationtosavethe song,orchooseausedID#locationtooverwriteapreviouslysavedsongwithyournewversion. Whenoverwritingasongfile,thesaveasdialogdisplaysReplacefollowedbythenameof thefilebeingreplaced.PressRenameifyouwouldliketochangethesongsname.PressSaveto savethesong,orCanceltoreturntothepreviousscreen.

12-9

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The BIG Page

Ifyoudecidenottosaveorrename,NoreturnsyoutotheSongmodepageinwhichyouwere lastrecording.Changestothecurrentsongarenotsaved,thoughthesequencerwillremember changestocertainsettingsfromtheMAINandBIGpages.ThesesettingsareTempo,Merge/ EraseMode,Locate,trackmutestatus,TimeIn,TimeOut,SongEnd,Loop,Punch,andMetron. Topermanentlysavethesechangeswiththesong,makesuretochooseSavefromthesoft buttonmenubeforepoweringofforloadinganewsong.Alternatively,youwillbepromptedto savethesechangesuponloadinganewsongiftheMAINpagesettingswerechangedwhile recordingorwithrecordingarmed,orifanyoftheBIGpagesettingswerechanged. Formoredetailedinstructions,seeSavingandNaming on page 53.

Song Mode: The BIG Page

OntheBIGpage,thePC3displaysinalargefont,thusthepagesnamethecurrenttime/ locationoftheplayheadofthesequencerinaBar:Beat:Tickformat(liketheRifftime/location display).Alsodisplayedisthecurrentstatusofthesequencer,andtheBIGpagessix parameters.

Parameter (Bar) (Current Position) (Beat) (Tick) (Bar) Time In (Beat) (Tick) (Bar) Time Out (Beat) (Tick) (Bar) Song End Loop RecMode Metron (Beat) (Tick)

Range of Values

Default

Depends on Time Signature 0 to 959 1 to 4 0 to 959 1 to 4 0 to 959 1 to 4 0 to 959 (----), Loop Linear, PunchIn, UnLoop Off, Rec, Always, CountOff 0 (----) Linear Rec 0 0 0

12-10

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The BIG Page

Time In
TheTimeInparameterdeterminesthestarttimeforLooporPunchInrecording(moreonthis below).

Time Out
TheTimeOutparameterdeterminesthestoptimeforLooporPunchInrecording.

Song End
TheSongEndparameterdeterminestheendpointforthesong.NotethatwhenTimeOutand SongEndaresettothesamelocation,changesmadetoSongEndarereflectedinTimeOut. WhenrecordingbeyondyourinitiallyspecifiedSongEndpoint,youllnoticethattheSongEnd locationautomaticallymovesandroundstothenextbar,soastoalwaysbeaheadofthe playhead.ItispossibletomovetheSongEndpointtoalocationbeforeotherMIDIevents(i.e., inthemiddleofthecurrentsong)thesequencerwillignore(butnotdelete)eventsafterthis point.

Loop
WiththeLoopparametersettoLoop,thesequencerwillloopthesegmentofthesongbetween TimeInandTimeOut.

RecMode
WiththeRecModeparametersettoLinear,thesequencerwillrecordnormally,fromwhereever youstart,towhereeveryoustop,oruntiltheSongEndpointisreached.WiththeRecMode parametersettoPunchIn,thesequencerwillrecordeventsonlybetweenthepointssetforTime InandTimeOutparametersontheBIGpage. TousetheUnLoopsetting,theLoopparametermustbesettoLoop,andalooplengthmustbe setwiththeTimeInandTimeOutparametersontheBIGpage.WiththeRecModeparameter settoUnloop,anyexistingtrackswillbeplayedbackasiftheywereloopingfromtheTimeInto theTimeOutpoint,buttheyareactuallybeingrerecordedlinearlyoverabsoluteBarsandBeats untilyoupressStop.UnLoopallowsyoutorecordalineartrackoverashortloopingsection withoutrsthavingtocopythesectionoverandoveragaintoachieveanewdesiredSong length.TheEndpointoftheSongisextendedtothedownbeatofthe(empty)Barimmediately followingthelastBaryouwererecordingwhenStopwaspressed. Forexample,letssayyouhavearecordedafourbardrumloopandnowwanttorecordan eightbarbassline.ThiswouldbeasituationwhereUnLoopwouldcomeinhandy.Whilethe drumtrackkeepslooping,thebasstrackwillrecordinlinearfashion,andtheendpointwillbe movedtothepointatwhichyoupressStop.Actually,thedrumtrackwillalsochange.Itwill playthroughitslooptwice,butwhiletheinformationisrepeatingintheloop,itwillbe recordedtothetrack.Sonowifyoulookatthedrumtrack,youwillseeinformationinbars58 (aduplicateoftheinformationinbars14).

Metron
TheMetronparameterdeterminestherecordingmodesinwhichthemetronomewillplay.With MetronsettoOff,themetronomedoesntplayatall.WithMetronsettoRec,themetronome onlyplayswhilerecordingisinprogress.WithMetronsettoAlways,themetronomeplays duringplaybackandrecording.WithMetronsettoCountOff,themetronomeplaysonly duringcountoff(iftheCountOffparameterontheMETRONOMEpageissettosomething otherthanOff.)

12-11

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The FX Pages

Song Mode: The FX Pages

ThefourSongmodeFXpagesFX,AUX1,AUX2,andMasterEffectsworkthesamewayas theEffectsmodepagesEffectsEnable,Aux1Override,Aux2Override,andMasterEffects.See EffectModeandtheEffectsPages on page 94forinformationoneditingthesepages.

Song Mode: The MIXER Page

TheMIXERpageshowsthecurrentsettingsfortheprogramnumber,panning,andvolumeof eachtrack(ingroupsof8).Theselectedtracknumber,aswellastherangeoftracksdisplayed onthepage,aredisplayedintheupperrighthandcornerofthescreen.UsetheChan/Layer buttonsorthecursorbuttonstochangethecurrentlyselectedtrack.Togettootherpagesof tracks,continuescrollingpastthefirstorlasttrackonthepage.Thebottompartofthescreen displayscurrentsettingsfortheselectedtrackincludingprogramnumberandname,panning, andvolume. Changingthesettingsforatracksprogram,volume,orpanningwhilethesequenceris recordingwillrecordthesechanges,viewableinthecorrespondingtracksEVENTpage.Upon playback,theseautomatedmixerparameterswilldisplaytheirchangingvaluesinrealtimeon theMIXERpage.BelowisanexampleMIXERpage:

Parameter Current Pan (Pan) Current Volume (Vol) Current Program (Prg) Output (Out) Current Program (Cur) ** Bottom Line (For Selected Track) Current Volume (Vol) ** Current Pan (Pan) **

Range of Values 0 to 127 0 to 127 Program List Auto, Pri., Sec. Program List 0 to 127 0 to 127

Default None None None Auto (Current Program) 127 64

**Uneditable,thesevaluesareanexpandedviewofthemixervaluesforthecurrentlyselectedtrack,which canbeeditedinthefirstthreerowsoftheMIXERpage.

Out
UsetheOutparametertosettherearpanelaudiooutputsusedforeachtrackofthecurrent song.Thisparameterdeterminestheoutputsettingsforthemainprogramsignalandinsert effectsofeachtrack(forAuxeffectsoutputsettings,usetheOutputparameterontheSong ModeAUX1orAUX2pages.)

12-12

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The METRONOME Page

AsettingofAutowillmakethattrackoutputaudiobasedonthesettingsfortheprogramused bythattrack.ProgramoutputsettingsaresetintheProgramEditorusingtheOutputparameter onthetoplineofPROGFXpage(seeOutput on page 648fordetails)ortheOutputparameter ontheLAYERFXpage(seepage 649fordetails.)AsettingofPri.(primary)willoutputtrack audiototheMAINBalancedAnalogOutputs.AsettingofSec.(secondary)willoutputtrack audiototheAUXBalancedAnalogOutputs.

The Rec, Play, and Stop Soft Buttons

ThesesoftbuttonsfunctionasdescribedinTheRec,Play,andStopSoftButtons on page 127.

The Keep Soft Button

PressingtheKeepsoftbuttoncapturesthecurrentsettingsforeachtracksprogram,panning, andvolumeastheinitialsettings.Remembertosaveifyouwantthesechangetobepermanent!

The Done Soft Button

IfnochangesweremadeintheMIXERpage,pressingtheDonesoftbuttoncallsuptheMAIN page.Ifchangesweremade,pressingtheDonesoftbuttoncallsuptheSaveChangesdialog.

Song Mode: The METRONOME Page

AlloftheparametersaffectingthesequencermetronomeareontheMETRONOMEpage.Like theotherpagesintheSongEditor,youcansavechangesmadeinthispage.

Parameter Metronome Count Off Program Channel Strong Note Strong Velocity Soft Note Soft Velocity

Range of Values Off, Rec, Always Off, 1, 2, 3, 4 (StartOnly, Always) Program List 1 to 16 0 to 127 0 to 127 0 to 127 0 to 127

Default Rec 1 (StartOnly) 998 Click Track 16 102 127 104 100

12-13

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The METRONOME Page

Metronome
Thisparameterdeterminestherecordingmodesinwhichthemetronomeplays.With MetronomesettoOff,themetronomeneverplays.WithMetronomesettoRec,themetronome onlyplaysduringrecording.WithMetronomesettoAlways,themetronomeplaysduring playbackandrecording.WithMetronomesettoCountOff,themetronomeplaysonlyduring countoff(iftheCountOffparameterissettosomethingotherthanOff.)

CountOff
ThisparameterdeterminesthenumberofmeasuresthePC3willcountoffbeforerecording. WithStartOnlyselected,thePC3willonlycountoffatthebeginningofasequence.With Alwaysselected,thePC3willcountofffromanypointinasequence.

Program
Thisparameterdeterminestheprogramwithwhichthemetronomeisplayed.Ifyouwanteda pianoforametronome,forinstance,youcouldsetProgramtoapianoprogram.Thedefault programis998ClickTrack.

Channel
ThisparameterdeterminestheMIDIchanneltowhichthemetronomeprogramandeventsare sent.

Strong Note
ThisparameterdeterminestheMIDInumberofthenoteplayedbythemetronomeforthe downbeats(the1ofeachmeasure).

Strong Vel
Thisparameterdeterminesthevelocityofthenoteplayedbythemetronomeforthedownbeats (the1ofeachmeasure).

Soft Note
ThisparameterdeterminestheMIDInumberofthenoteplayedbythemetronomeforthe upbeats(the2,3,and4ofeachmeasure).

Soft Vel
Thisparameterdeterminesthevelocityofthenoteplayedbythemetronomefortheupbeats (the2,3,and4ofeachmeasure).

The Rec, Play, and Stop Soft Buttons

ThesesoftbuttonsfunctionasdescribedinTheRec,Play,andStopSoftButtons on page 127.

The Done Soft Button

IfnochangesweremadeintheMETRONOMEpage,pressingtheDonesoftbuttoncallsupthe MAINpage.Ifchangesweremade,pressingtheDonesoftbuttoncallsuptheSaveChanges dialog.

12-14

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The Filter Pages (RECFLT and PLYFLT)

Song Mode: The Filter Pages (RECFLT and PLYFLT)

OntheRECFLTandPLYFLTpagesyoucanspecifywhateventareignoredduring,respectively, recordingandplayback.Bothpageshavethesameparameterswiththesamerangesofvalues, butyouwouldusetheRECFLTpagetoconfigurerecordingeventfiltering,andthePLYFLT pagetoconfigureplaybackeventfiltering. BelowistheRECFLTpage.

Parameter Notes Low Key Note Filter Hi Key Low Velocity Hi Velocity Controllers Controller Filter Controller Low Value Hi Value Pitch Bend Program Change Mono Pressure Poly Pressure

Range of Values On, Off C -1 to G 9 C -1 to G 9 0 to 127 0 to 127 On, Off ALL, MIDI Control Source List 0 to 127 0 to 127 On, Off On, Off On, Off On, Off

Default On C -1 G9 0 127 On ALL 0 127 On On On On

Notes
WithNotessettoOff,allnotesareignoredduringrecording/playback.WithNotessettoOn, onlythenoteswithinthespecifiednoterangewithvelocitieswithinspecifiedvelocityrangeare recorded/played.

LoKey
LoKeydeterminesthelowestkeythatisrecorded/playedbackwhenNotesissettoOn.

Hi
TheHitotherightofLoKeydeterminesthehighestkeythatisrecorded/playedbackwhen NotesissettoOn.

12-15

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The Filter Pages (RECFLT and PLYFLT)

LoVel
LoVeldeterminesthelowestnoteon/offvelocitythatisrecorded/playedbackwhenNotesisset toOn.

Hi
TheHitotherightofLoVeldeterminesthehighestnoteon/offvelocitythatisrecorded/played backwhenNotesissettoOn.

Controllers
WithControllerssettoOff,allcontrollersareignoredduringrecording/playback.With ControllerssettoOn,controllerdataonlyofthespecifiedcontrollerandonlywithinthe specifiedvaluerangearerecorded/played.

Controller
TheControllerparameterdetermineswhichcontroller(s)is/arerecorded/playedbackwhen ControllersissettoOn.

LoVal
LoValdeterminesthelowestvalueforthespecifiedcontrollerthatisrecorded/playedback whenControllersissettoOn.

Hi
TheHitotherightofLoValdeterminesthehighestvalueforthatspecifiedcontrollerthatis recorded/playedbackwhenControllersissettoOn.

PitchBend
Thisparameterenables/disablespitchbendeventstoberecorded/playedback.

ProgChange
Thisparameterenables/disablesprogramchangestoberecorded/playedbackthisincludes Controllers0and32(bankchange).

MonoPress
Thisparameterenables/disablesmonophonickeypressureeventstoberecorded/playedback.

PolyPress
Thisparameterenables/disablespolyphonickeypressureeventstoberecorded/playedback.

The Rec, Play, and Stop Soft Buttons

ThesesoftbuttonsfunctionasdescribedinTheRec,Play,andStopSoftButtons on page 127.

12-16

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The MISC Page

The Done Soft Button

IfnochangesweremadeintheRECFLT/PLYFLTpage,pressingtheDonesoftbuttoncallsup theMAINpage.Ifchangesweremade,pressingtheDonesoftbuttoncallsuptheSave Changesdialog.

Song Mode: The MISC Page

TheMISCpagecontainsfivemiscellaneous(butveryimportantanduseful)sequencer parameters.TheMISCpageappearsbelow:

Parameter Control Chase Quantize Grid Resolution Swing Release Quantization Key Wait

Range of Values On, Off Off, 1 to 100% 1/1 to 1/480 -100% to 125% Yes, No Off, On

Default On Off 1/8 0 No Off

Control Chase
Acommonshortcomingofmanyoldersequencersisthatwhenyoustartasequenceatsome pointinthemiddleofsequence,thecontrollersremainattheircurrentlevelsuntilthesequencer comesacrossacontrollerevent.ControlChaseremediesthis(generally)undesiredbehavior. WhenControlChaseisOn,allnonnoteMIDIeventsfromthebeginningofthesonguptothe currenttimearecomputed,andthemostrecentnonnoteMIDIeventissentoutbeforestarting playback.Thisensuresthatthevolume,panning,programchanges,andothercontrollersforthe songarecorrect,regardlessofwhereyoustartthesong.WithControlChasesettoOff,the sequencerbehavesaspreviouslydescribed.

Quant
TheQuantizeparameterdeterminestheamountofrealtimequantization(ifany)appliedtothe sequenceduringrecording.Thepercentagespecifiedforthisparameteristheamountof quantizationthesequencerappliestothegrid(seebelow)foreachNoteeventrecorded. Notethatusingrealtimequantizationhasthesameeffectasrecordingnormally,andthenusing theQuantizeTrackEditingoperation.

12-17

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The STATS Page

Grid
Thegridparameterdeterminestheresolutionofquantizationandthepositionofthegrid points.

Swing
TheSwingparameterdeterminestheamount(inunitsofpercent)ofswingappliedduring quantization.

Release
TheReleaseparameterdetermineswhetherornotnoteoffeventsarequantized.

Key Wait
WithKeyWaitsettoon,akeystrikewilltriggerplaybackofasequence(iftheplay/pause buttonisarmed,)ortriggerrecordingofasequence(iftherecordbuttonisarmed.)

Song Mode: The STATS Page

TheSTATSpageisadisplayonlypagethatshowsthestatusofthePC3eventpool.Theevent poolisusedbyallthesequencesloadedatagiventimeinthesystem.Theseinclude:thecurrent song,thecomparesongbuffer,andupto16riffs. TheSTATSpageshownbelowisthestateofthePC3eventpoolwith0*NewSong*selected,and nootheruserobjectsloadedinanyothermodes:

TheeventsinthePC3aresimilartoeventsofothersequencerswithasinglemajordifference: theNoteeventsarestoredasasinglebigevent,i.e.,onePC3Noteeventiscomprisedofthe noteonandnoteoffevents.AllothereventsarestoredassingleeventsonthePC3. ThefieldsontheSTATSpageare: Maxthemaximumnumberofnotes/eventsinmemory. Usedthetotalnumberofnotes/eventsbeingused. Freethenumberofnotes/eventsthatarefree. Part.thenumberofpartitionedevents,whichareeventsforwhichspaceinmemoryis allocated.Thisistechnicalinformationofimportanceonlytoengineers(andmaybeafew powerusers).

12-18

Song Mode and the Song Editor The Song Editor

Songthetotalnumberofevents(includingnotes)inthecurrentsong. Tempthetotalnumberofeventsinthetempbuffer(thetempbufferisusedwhen grabbingeventsfromadifferentsong). Riffs116thetotalnumberofeventsineachriff.

The Song Editor

Ingeneral,youllgettotheSongeditorpagesbypressingtheEditbuttonanytimeyourein Songmode.Theresoneexception:iftheProgramparameteriscurrentlyhighlightedonthe display,youllentertheProgrameditorwhenyoupressEdit. ThereareafewconventionssharedbyalloftheSongeditorpages.Displayedatthetopofeach Songeditorpageisthenameofthepageandthecurrentlyselectedtrack(116,oralltracks).All ofthevaluesfortheparametersfoundinanyoftheSongeditorpagesaresavedinthesong object.

Song Editor: The COMMON Page

PresstheEditbuttononthefrontpanelofthePC3todisplaytheCOMMONpageandbegin editingasong.Thisiswhereyouwillfindparameterscommontoalltracks,suchastempoand timesignature,controlparametersforeffects,andsoftbuttonsforswitchingtootherSong editorpages.

Parameter Tempo Time Signature FX Track Drum Track MIDI Destination (Numerator) (Denominator)

Range of Values 0 (external), 20.00 to 400.00 BPM 1 to 99 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, and 64 1 to 16 , D , L, M, U

Default 120 4 4 1 L

Thetoplineofthispagedisplaystheselectedtrackortracks.Selecttheavailablecurrenttrack foreditingbyusingtheChan/Layerbuttons. Althoughthecurrenttrackinformationisdisplayedonthetopline,theCOMMONpages parametersareglobalsettingsforthesonganddonotdirectlyaffectindividualtracks.

12-19

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: The COMMON Page

Tempo
Thisisanotherplacewherethesongsinitialtempocanbesetormodified.

TimeSig
Affectstheclick,playbacklooping,andlocatefunctionaswellassomeeditingoperations.Does notchangetherecordeddata,thoughitdoeschangethewaydataisdisplayedonthescreen.

FX Track
ThePC3usesthechannelofthetrackspecifiedforFXTrackastheAuxFXchannel.

DrumTrack
AnyofthesongstrackscanbedefinedasDrumTrackssothattheirNoteeventsdonotget transposedwhenatranspositionisappliedinriffsandsetups. Thisfeatureisparticularlyusefulwhenadrumkitprogram(oranyothernonpitchedprogram) isusedinasong,andyouwantthesoundsproducedbyeachnotenumberinthatprogramtobe preservedineachtransposition.Ifinthesongbeingusedasastepinanrifforsetup(NOTthe rifforsetupsongitself),thereisa(D)designatingthetrackplayingthedrumprogramasa DrumTrack,theoriginallyrecordedNoteeventsonthattrackwillremainunchanged.

TheDrumTrackssettingsdonothaveanyeffectoneditsmadeontheTRACKpageintheSong Editor.AnytracksdefinedasDrumTracksaretransposedwhenatranspositionisappliedto thesetracksfromtheTRACKpage.

MidiDst

TheMIDIdataoneachtrackhasadestinationassignmentselectablewiththeTrackDest parameter.Therearefourpossibleindicators: L=Local.ThetracksMIDIdatawillbetransmittedlocallyonly,tothePC3sinternalsound generator.NoneofthetracksMIDIdatawillbesenttotheUSBorMIDIOutport. M=MIDI.ThetracksMIDIdatawillbetransmittedonlytotheMIDIOut. U=USBMIDI.ThetracksMIDIdatawillbetransmittedonlytotheUSBport. =None. PairsandgroupsoftheabovelettersindicatethatMIDIisbeingsenttoeachletters correspondingdestination.

12-20

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: The TRACK Page

Soft Buttons on the COMMON Page

TRACKcallsuptheTRACKpage.Thispageaccessesusefultrackbasededitfunctions.There isaselectableeditfunctionthatcanbeappliedtotheselectedtrackoralltracksinyoursong. TheTRACKpageisdescribedonpage 1221. EVENTcallsuptheEVENTpage,aneventliststyleeditor.OntheEVENTpageintheSong Editor,youcanscrollthrough,modify,add,ordeleteanyorallofthetracksMIDIevents.The EVENTpageisdescribedonpage 1231. Rec,Play,andStopfunctionasdescribedinTheRec,Play,andStopSoftButtons on page 127. SavecallsuptheSaveasdialog.

Song Editor: The TRACK Page

Thispageallowsyouaccesstousefultrackbasededitfunctions.Thesefunctionsare:
Erase Copy Bounce Insert Delete Quantize Shift Transpose Grab Change Remap

Foreachfunction,thereisasetofparameterstocontrolhowthefunctionoperates,andonwhat regionoftheselectedtrack(s).Asusual,thetoplineofthispagedisplaystheselectedtrackor tracks.Selecttheavailablecurrenttrack(s)foreditingbyusingtheChan/Layerbuttons.Press bothoftheChan/LayerbuttonstogethertoselectAlltracks. BelowisanexampleoftheTRACKpagefortheBouncefunction.

Youwillnoticethatthepageisdividedintotwohalves,withtherighthalfbeingaseparatebox ThisiscalledtheRegion/Criteriabox.Theparametersinthisboxareusedtoselecttherangeof events(fromastartBarandBeattoandendBarandBeat)formodification,aswellaswhich typesofeventsfunctionwillaffect. Theparametersinthisboxwillgenerallybethesameformostfunctions.Forsomefunctions, however,someparametersmaynotapply.Forexample,QuantizeandTransposeapplyonlyto notes,whileRemapappliesonlytoControllers.InadditiontotheRegion/Criteriabox parameters,theLocateparameterisalsofoundoneachfunction.

12-21

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: The TRACK Page

SincetheseparametersarecommontomostTrackfunctions,wewilldefinethemfirst.Then welldescribetheindividualfunctionsalongwiththeparametersspecifictoeach,whichare normallyfoundontheleftsideofthepage.ThefunctionQuantizehasuniqueparameterinits Region/Criteriaboxes.Welldescribethoseparametersalongwiththefunctions. Onceyouvechosenafunctionandsettheparameterstoyourliking,pressGo.Thisexecutesthe editingfunction.Youcanthenplaythesequencetoheartheresultsofyouredit.Ifyoudontlike youredit,simplyexittheeditorandpressNowhenyouareaskedifyouwanttosave.Ifyoudo likeyouredit,youcanpressDoneandthenSave,orjustexittheeditorandsavethechanges. Or,youcangotoanothereditfunction.Keepinmindthough,thatifyouchoosetoperform morethanoneeditwithoutsaving,andyouarenotsatisfiedwithoneofthechangesyoumake, youwillhavetoexittheeditorwithoutsavingandthenredoeachofthechangesyoumade. Thatswhyitsusuallybesttosaveaftereachsuccessfuledit.

Common Parameters for Edit Song: Track Functions

Locate ThisparameterisavailableforeveryfunctionontheTRACKpage.Itappearsatthelowerleft handcornerofthepage. TheLocatebar,beat,andtickwillchangeinrealtimeduringplaybackandrecordingtoreflect thesongscurrentposition.Itcanbesettoanybar,beat,andtick,includingnegativevalues. Playbackbeginsat,andStopresetsthesongtotheLocatebar,beat,andtick.

Region/Criteria Box Parameters

From and To FromandToareavailableinmostTRACKeditfunctionstodefinearangeoftimeonthe selectedtrack(s). TheFromvaluedefinesthefirstbar,beat,andtickinarangeoftimeselectedforediting.TheTo valuedefinesthefinalbar,beat,andtickinarangeoftimeselectedforediting. Events AnyandalltypesofMIDIeventsareavailableforediting,selectableinthisparameter.Some eventswillprovideyouwithsettingsforarangeofvalues,orotherMIDIeventspecificcriteria. AvailableValuesare:All,Notes,Controllers,MonoPress,PitchBend,ProgChange,PolyPress. WhenEventsissettoALL,allMIDIeventsonthetrack(s)youareediting,thatoccurinthe regionoftimebetweentheFromandTosettings,willbeaffectedbytheeditfunction. WhenEventsissettoNotes,notenumberandvelocityrangescanbesetforNoteevents.
LoKey

Determinesthelowestnoteinarangeofnotestobeaffected.Thiscanbesettoany MIDInotevalue;thedefaultisC1.
High Key (Hi)

Determinesthehighestnoteinarangeofnotestobeaffected.Thiscanbesettoany MIDInotevalue;thedefaultisG9.

12-22

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: The TRACK Page LoVel

AnattackvelocityrangecanbespecifiedascriteriaforselectingNoteeventsforediting. TheLoVelparametersetsthelowestvelocityaNoteneedstohaveinordertobeedited. Notesontheselectedtrack(s)withaattackvelocitieslowerthantheLoVelwillnotbe affectedbytheedit.Theavailablevaluesare1127;thedefaultis1.

High Velocity (Hi)

TheHiparametersetsthehighestattackvelocityaNoteneedstohaveinordertobe edited.Notesontheselectedtrack(s)withattackvelocitieshigherthanthevalueofHi arenotaffectedbytheedit.Theavailablevaluesare1127;thedefaultis127. WhenEventsissettoController,theController(s)andaControllervaluerangecanbesetfor Controllerevents.

Controller

TheControllerparameterselectstheController(ifany)orallControllerstobeaffected.
LoVal

Youmayfurtherspecifyaparticularrangeofvaluestoeditbysettingahighandlow value.LoValwilldefinethelowestmodifiablevalueintheselectedcontrollersrecorded data.ValuerangesarenotdefinablewhenCtlissettoAll.AvailableValuesare0127.

High Value (Hi)

Hidefinesthehighestmodifiablevalueintheselectedcontrollersrecordeddata.Value rangesarenotdefinablewhenCtlissettoAll.AvailableValuesare0127.

Soft Buttons on the TRACK Page

FromToisaquickwaytodefinetheregionoftimeyouintendtoedit.Thereareacoupleofways tousethisfeaturewhenthesequenceisplayingbackinrealtime,andbothwayswillsetthe temporalboundariesoftheregion. OnewayistofirstpositionthecursorovertheFromparameterintheRegion/Criteriaboxand thenpressthePlaysoftbutton.Duringplayback,everytimeyoupressFromTo,thePC3updates thevalueofFromtomatchthecurrentplaybacklocation.PositionthecursorovertheTo parametertochangethevalueofToinasimilarfashion. IfyouhaventselectedeithertheFromorToparameter,pressingFromToduringplayback updatesFromorToorbothdependingonthecurrentplaybacklocation(thevalueofthe Locateparameter)atthetimeyoupressFromTo.IfyoupressitwhiletheLocatevalueisearlier inthesongthanthecurrentTovalue,thePC3updatestheFromvalue.IfyoupressFromTo again(withoutstoppingplayback)whiletheLocatevalueislaterthanthecurrentFromvalue, thePC3updatestheTovalue. PlaywillstarttheplaybackofthesongfromtheBarandBeatsetintheLocateparameter.When thesongisplaying,thissoftbuttonfunctionsasaPausebutton. StopstopstheplaybackofthesongandreturntotheBarandBeatsetastheLocatevalue. GoperformsanyoftheTrackbasededitfunctionsdescribedabove. DonewillreturnyoutotheEditSong:COMMONpage.

12-23

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: Track Functions

Song Editor: Track Functions

Erase
Thisfunctionerasesspecifiedeventsfromaregionoftime,butitdoesntdeletetheregionof time.Theresultislikeerasingasectionofrecordingtape.Ifyouwanttocompletelyremovea segmentandshortenthelengthofthetrack,youcandoitwiththeDeletefunction.

Copy
UsetheCopyfunctiontoduplicatetheselectedeventsfromthecurrenttrackandplacethemin thesametrackoronanothertrack,eithermergingwithoroverwritingexistingdata.

IfyoudonotwanttocopyalloftheMIDIeventsinthedefinedrangeoftimeonthecurrent track,usetheEventsparameterintheRegion/CriteriaboxtoselectaspecificMIDIeventtype youwouldliketheeditfunctiontoaffect.Someeventtypesprovideyoumorecriteriaselection parameters.ItisoftenagoodideatosetEventstoNoteswhencopying,andthenaddany necessarycontrollerorotherdatatothetrackatalatertime. DstTrack:1to16/All SelectadestinationtrackforthecopiedeventswiththeDstTrackparameter.Allselectedevents describedintheRegion/Criteriaboxwillbeplacedinthedestinationtrack(s)atanyBarand Beatyouspecify. IfthecurrentlyselectedtrackisAlltracksthenthedestinationtrackwillbeAlltracksaswell. Nomatterwhatchannelthecurrenttrack(sourcetrack)issettowhenyouusethecopy function,theeventswillbeplayedonthedestinationtrackschannel. Location:Bars:Beats:Ticks

12-24

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: Track Functions

Specifyabar,beat,andticklocationinthedestinationtrackwherethecopieddatawillbe placedwiththeLocationparameter.IfthelengthofthecopiedregionextendsfromtheLocation pointbeyondthesongsexistingEndpoint,anewEndpointisdefined. Mode:Merge/Erase/Slide TheModesettingdetermineswhetherthecopiedeventsmergewith,oreraseexistingeventson thedestinationtrackfromthelocationpointtotheendofthecopiedregion.WithModesetto Slide,thesequencercreatesspaceforthenewevents,andslidestheexistingeventstouniformly latertimesinthesong. Times:1to127 ThevalueselectedfortheTimesparameterdetermineshowmanycopiesoftheselectedregion areplaced,oneafteranother,inthedestinationtrack.

Bounce
UsetheBouncefunctiontomovetheselectedeventsfromthecurrenttracktoanothertrack, eithermergingwithoroverwritingexistingdataonthedestinationtrack.TheBouncefunction differsfromtheCopyfunctioninthattheoriginaldataisnotpreservedintheoriginaltrack.As onamultitracktaperecorder,Bouncewillalwaysputthedatainthesametimelineonthenew trackthatitwasontheoldtrack.

DstTrack:1to16 SelectadestinationtrackfortheeventstobemovedtowiththeDstTrackparameter.Allselected eventsdescribedintheRegion/Criteriaboxwillbeplacedinthedestinationtrackatthedatas originallocation. Nomatterwhatchannelthecurrenttrack(sourcetrack)issettowhenyouusethebounce function,theeventswillbeplayedonthedestinationtrackschannel. Mode:Merge/Erase TheModesettingdetermineswhetherthebouncedeventsmergewith,oreraseexistingevents onthedestinationtrackfromthelocationpointtotheendofthecopiedregion.

12-25

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: Track Functions

Insert
TheInsertfunctionisusedtoaddblanktimetothecurrentsong,modifyingthesongsEnd pointappropriately.TheInsertfunctionwillaffectalltracks.Thisissimilartosplicingapieceof blanktapetoanexistingsegmentofrecordingtape.

Location:Bars:Beats:Ticks TheinsertionpointfortheblanktimebeingaddedisselectedasaBarandBeatLocationvalue. EventsthatoccurredatorafterthisBarandBeat,beforeyouinserttime,arenoterasedwhen youperformthisfunction,rathertheyareoffsetbythelengthoftheblanktimebeingaddedtoa BarandBeatlaterinthesong. Amount:Bars:Beats:Ticks ThelengthoftheblanktimebeingaddedisdefinedasanumberofBarsandBeatsinthe Amountparameter. TherearenoRegion/CriteriaparametersavailablefortheInsertfunction.

Delete
TheDeletefunctionisusedtoremovearegionoftimefromthecurrentsong.Thisfunctionis differentfromtheerasefunctionbecausenotonlydoesitremovetheeventsfromtheselected time,itwilldeletetheentireselectedrangeoftimefromthesong,modifyingthesongsEnd pointappropriately(onalltracks).Thisissimilartocuttingasectionoutofatapeandsplicing theends.

12-26

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: Track Functions

Quantize
UsetheQuantizefunctiontoadjustthetimingofNoteevents.KeepinmindthatonlyNote eventsarequantized;othertypesofevents,suchascontrollers,arenotquantized.

Quant:Off/1to100% TheQuantizeparameterdetermineshowmuchtheselectedNoteeventsaremovedtowards gridlocations.IfsettoOff,noaligningofpreviouslyrecordednotestogridlocationswilloccur. Ifsetto100%,everyrecordedNoteeventwillbealignedtotheclosestgridlocation,definedby theGridsetting.Noteswillbemovedtoapositionhalfwaybetweenthegridlocationandthe originalNoteeventlocationifQuantissetto50%. Grid:1/1to1/480 ThissettingdeterminesthesizeoftheQuantizegrid,expressedasafractionofaBarwitha4/4 meter.SetGridto1/1forwholenotegrid,1/16forsixteenthnotes.Allofthestandardnote durationsandeveryfractionalBardivisionsinbetweenareavailableasthesizeoftheInput Quantizegrid. Swing:100to125% TheSwingpercentageisappliedtothequantizegrid.0%swingisstraighttime,100%produces aswingfeel(tripletfeel).ApositiveSwingvaluedetermineshowcloseeveryothergridlocation ismovedtoapoint1/3ofthewaytowardsthenextgridpoint.NegativeSwingmovesevery othergridlocationclosertoapoint1/3ofthewaytowardsthepreviousgridpoint. Release:Yes/No SettheReleaseparametertoYesifyouwouldlikeeachquantizedNoteeventsNoteOff messagetobealignedtothegridlocationnearesttothetimethekeywasoriginallyreleased.

12-27

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: Track Functions

Shift
TheShiftfunctionallowsyoutooffsettheexistingMIDIeventsforwardorbackwardintime anynumberofticks(1/480thofaBeat)andbeats.ThisfunctiononlyaffectstheEndpointifany oftheshiftedeventsareaftertheEndpointofthesong. EventscannotbeshiftedbeyondtheEndpointorbeforeBar1:Beat1:Tick0.Theeventscanbe shiftedonlyasfarasthesetemporalboundaries.AlleventsthatcantbeshiftedthefullTicks amountwillbeplacedattheboundarylocation.

Amount:Bars:Beats:Ticks TheTicksparameterspecifiesthenumberofbars,beats,andticksthattheMIDIevents,from withintheselectedregion,aremovedforward(forpositivevalues)orbackward(fornegative values)intimerelativetotheiroriginallocations. Mode:Merge/Erase TheModesettingdetermineswhethertheshiftedeventsmergewith,oreraseexistingeventson thedestinationtrackfromthelocationpointtotheendoftheshiftedregion.

Transpose
UsetheTransposefunctiontochangetheMIDINotenumbersoftheselectedNoteevents.

Semitone:128to127semitones AnincrementofonesemitonerepresentsachangeofoneMIDINotenumber.Youcantranspose NoteeventsonlywithintherangeofMIDINotenumbers0to127.

12-28

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: Track Functions

Grab
GrabissimilartotheCopyfunction,exceptthattheGrabfunctionallowsyoutocopyselected datafromtracksthatexistinothersongsinmemory.

SrcSong:SongList TheSourceSongparameterissettotheIDandnameofthesonginmemorythatcontainsthe desiredtrackdatayouwishtograbinordertouseitinthecurrentsong.Thesourcetrackis determinedbytheTrackparameterdisplayedonupperrighthandsideofthepage,selectable withtheChan/Layerbuttons. DstTrack:1to16/All SelectadestinationtrackforthegrabbedeventswiththeDstTrackparameter.Allselected eventsfromthesourcesongandtrackdescribedintheRegion/Criteriaboxwillbeplacedinthe destinationtrack(s)atanybar,beat,andtickyouspecify. IfthecurrentlyselectedtrackisAlltracksthenthedestinationtrackwillbeAlltracksaswell. Nomatterwhatchannelthecurrenttrack(sourcetrackinthesourcesong)issettowhenyou usethegrabfunction,theeventswillbeplayedonthedestinationtrackschannel. Location:Bars:Beats:Ticks Specifyabar,beat,andticklocationinthedestinationtrackwherethegrabbeddatawillbe placedwiththeLocationparameter.Ifthelengthofthegrabbedregionextendsfromthe LocationpointbeyondthesongsexistingEndpoint,anewEndpointisdefined. Mode:Merge/Erase/Slide TheModesettingdetermineswhetherthegrabbedeventsmergewith,oreraseexistingevents onthedestinationtrackfromthelocationpointtotheendofthegrabbedregion.WithModeset toSlide,thesequencercreatesspaceforthenewevents,andslidestheexistingeventsto uniformlylatertimesinthesong. Times:1to127 ThevalueselectedfortheTimesparameterdetermineshowmanycopiesoftheselectedregion areplaced,oneafteranother,inthedestinationtrack.

12-29

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: Track Functions

Change
TheChangefunctionisusedtomodifyattackvelocities,releasevelocities,orthevaluesofany existingcontrollerdataonthecurrenttrack.Astaticchangeofvaluescanbemadeaswellas havingthechangetakeplaceoveraregionoftime. Changecannotmodifyoradddatathatdoesntexistonthecurrenttrack.IfyouhearNote eventsplayedbackonatrack,thenyouknowthereisanattackandreleasevelocityvaluefor eachone,andtheeffectoftheChangefunctioncanusuallybeeasilydetected.Controllervalues aresometimesmoredifficulttochangesincetherecanbeinconsistentgapsoftimebetweeneach controllerevent.

Scale:0%to20000% Theselectedvelocityorcontrollereventsvaluescanbechangedtoapercentageoftheoriginal valuesdeterminedbytheScaleparameter.Asettingof100%hasnoaffect.Valuesarescaled lowerwithaScalepercentagesetfrom0%to99%.LowvaluescanbesethigherusingaScale percentageabove100%onupto20,000%,althoughthemaximumvalueof127cannotbe exceededforanyvelocityorcontrollertype. Offset:128to127 OffsetcanbeusedaloneorinconjunctionwithScaletoaddorsubtractasetamounttoorfrom theoriginal(orscaled)values.Valuesforvelocitiescannotbelessthan1orgreaterthan127. Valuesforcontrollerscannotbelessthan0orgreaterthan127. Asanexample,tosetallVelocitiestoavalueof55,youwouldsetScaleto0%(multipliesall originalvaluesbyzero)andsetOffsetto55(adds55totheproductoftheScaleparameter). Mode:Constant/PosRamp/NegRamp SetModetoConstanttohavevaluesmodifiedinauniformfashion,asdeterminedbytheScale andOffsetsettings,fortheentireselectedregionoftimeandrangeofvalues. WhentheChangefunctionisappliedwithModesettoPosRamp,theselectedvelocityor controllervalueswillgraduallychangeovertheregionoftime,definedbythelocationssetfor theFromandToparameters,fromtheoriginalvaluetothenewvaluedeterminedbytheScale andOffsetsettings.Thefirsteventsbeingmodifiedwithintheregionwillhavelittleorno changefromtheiroriginalvalues.TheamountofScaleandOffsetappliedwillincreaseasthe songapproachestheBarandBeatdefinedintheToparameter,wherethefullamountof describedchangewilloccur. YoucansetModetoNegRamptoachievetheoppositedynamiceffectofPosRamp.NegRamp worksinthesameway,buttheamountofScaleandOffsetappliedwilldecreasefromthefull amountofchangedescribedbyScaleandOffsettolittleornochangeasthesongapproachesthe bar,beat,andtickdefinedintheToparameter.

12-30

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: The EVENT Page

Remap
UsetheRemapfunctiontoapplythevaluesofanyonetypeofcontrollerdata,alreadyrecorded onatrack,toanothercontrollertype.TheeffecttherealtimechangesoftheOldcontrollerhad willbereplacedbytheeffecttheNewcontrollerhasbyusingtheexactsamecontrollervalues.

Old:ControlSourceList(0to120) TheOldControllerissettotheControllertypethatyouwishtoremap.ThisControllerdata mustalreadyexistonthecurrenttrackinordertoapplyittotheNewControllertype. New:ControlSourceList(0to120) TheNewparameterissettotheControllercodeyouwishtohaveusetheexistingvalues, onceusedbytheOldController,toproduceadifferenteffect.

Song Editor: The EVENT Page

EverytypeofrecordedMIDIeventisvisiblefromthispage.Youcanviewandchangethese eventsifnecessary.Eachtrackdisplaysitsinitialprogram,volume,andpanatthetopofits eventlist.Youcanalsoaccessthetempotrack(instructionsbelow.)

Location Initial Program, Volume, Pan --

Bar:Beat:Tick

Event Type and Value

Thetoplineofthepagedisplaysthecurrentsongpositioninthecenter,andthecurrently selectedtrackandcorrespondingchannelontheright.UsetheChan/Layerbuttonstoselectan activetracktoviewandedittheMIDIeventsrecordedonit.

12-31

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: The EVENT Page

Toscrollthroughtheevents,makesurethelocation(BarandBeat,inthefirstcolumn)is highlighted.UsetheAlphaWheel,theUpandDowncursorbuttons,orthePlus/Minus buttons.Asyouscrollthroughtheevents,eacheventisexecutedbythesequencer.Inthecaseof Noteevents,youwillhearthenoteplayed,althoughthedurationwillbeshort.Ifyouhave scrolledthroughaSustain(MIDIController64)messagewithanOnvaluethenyouwillhear thenotesustainasifthesustainpedalwasdepressed.Thenotewillcontinuetosustainuntilyou scrollthroughaSustainmessagewithavalueofOff. Youcanalsojumpdirectlytoaspecificbarandbeatbytypingthebarnumberandbeatnumber, thenpressingEnter.Keepinmindifyouhavecontrollerorprogramdataprevioustothepoint thatyoujumpto,thoseeventsmaynothavebeenexecutedandyoumayhearunexpected results.Forexample,ifyouhaveprogramchangesatbar1andbar8,andyoujumpfrombar1 tobar9,anynotesyouscrollthroughwillbeplayedwiththeprogramchangefrombar1.

Initial Program, Volume, Pan

Atthetopoftheeventlistforeachtrack,youcanviewandchangetheinitialprogram,volume andpansettingsforthecurrenttrack.SeeSongMode:TheMAINPage on page 121fordetailson initialsettingsforprogram,volume,andpan.EachoftheseparameterscanbesettoNONEby entering0onthealphanumericpadandthenpressingtheminusbuttontofindNONE.

Location
ThefirstcolumnrepresentstheBarandBeatLocationsofthedifferenteventsinasong.Scroll throughtheeventsontheselectedtrack(s)withtheAlphaWheelorenterinaspecificBarand BeatonthealphanumericbuttonpadtojumptoeventsoccurringonthatBeat.Aquickwayto jumptotheEndpointinatrackistopress9999andthenEnteronthealphanumericbuttonpad.

Bar, Beat, and Tick

Bar,Beat,andTickareeditableparametersforeachevent.Theydeterminewhenanevent happensrelativetotheothereventswithinthesong.

Event Type and Value

TheEventTypeandValueregiondisplaystheMIDIeventtype(andrelatedinformation)ateach Eventlistlocationinthesong.Differenteventtypesdisplaydifferentkindsofinformation,and havedifferenteditablevalues. Theeventtypeistheleftmostfield.Youcanhighlightthisfieldandchangetheeventtype. MIDInoteeventsaredenotedbya>followedbythenotename.The>iseffectivelythe eventtypefornotes,andtochangetheeventtype,highlightthe>.Tochangethenote, highlightthenotename. Table 121liststherangesoftheeditableeventvalues:

12-32

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: The EVENT Page

Event Type
Program Change (PCHG) Pitch Bend (BEND) Mono Pressure (MPRS) Poly Pressure (PPRS) 0 to 127 -8192 to 8191 0 to 127 0 to 127

Values

C -1 to G 9

Note events have four editable values: Note Name, Attack Velocity (indicated by a v), Release Velocity (indicated by a ^), and Note Duration. MIDI Note Events (>) Note Number Attack Velocity Release Velocity Note Duration C -1 to G 9 v1 to v127 ^1 to ^127 Bar : Beats : Ticks

MIDI Controller Events (CTRL)

Controller events have two editable values: Controller Type and Controller Value. Defined controllers are referred to by their names. Controller Type Controller Value Control Source List (0 to 127) 0 to 127

Tempo Change

20.00 BPM to 400.00 BPM

Table 12-1

MIDI-event Value Ranges

Soft Buttons on the EVENT Page

Cut:RemovesthecurrentlyselectedeventfromtheEventlistandtemporarilystoresitina memorybuffersothatyoucanimmediatelypasteitintoanewlocation. Copy:Makesaduplicateofthecurrentlyselectedeventandtemporarilystoresitinamemory buffersothatyoucanimmediatelypasteitintoanewlocation. Paste:InsertsthemostrecentcutorcopiedeventintotheEventlistatthecurrentlyselected Bar:Beat:Ticklocation.Thepastedeventwillsharethesamelocationwiththeeventthat alreadyexistedatthatlocationintheEventlist,butitwillappearbeforethepreexistingevent. New:Insertsaneweventbyduplicatingthecurrentevent. Done:OntheViewpage,returnstotheEVENTpage.OntheEVENTpage,returnstothe COMMONpage.

Tempo Track
Toaccessthetempotrack,usethechannelup/downbuttonstonavigatetotrack1,thenpress channeldown.Thetempotrackfunctionsthesameastheothertracks,excepttheonlyevent typeavailableistempochange.

12-33

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: The EVENT Page

12-34

Storage Mode Storage Mode Page

Chapter 13 Storage Mode

UseStoragemodetoload,save,backup,andcopyfilesbetweenthePC3andtheoutsideworld. StorageModecanloadandsavewithanxDcardorwithacomputerbyusingtheUSBport. StorageModefeaturesinclude: SaveagroupofPC3objects(Programs,Setups,Songs,etc.)orasinglePC3objecttoa.PC3file (seeTheSTOREPage on page 135.) Loadagroupofobjectsorasingleobjectfroma.PC3orcompatiblefile(seeTheLOAD Page on page 138fordetails.)(SeeAppendix Eforfilecompatibilitydetails.) LoadastandardMIDIsequencefile(.MIDfile)whichcanbeplayedinSongModeorused asariffinSetupMode(seeTheLOADPage on page 138fordetails.) ExportasongfromSongmodeasastandardMIDIsequencefile(seeExport on page 1313.) Exportalistofcontrollerassignmentsoralistofobjects(seeExport on page 1313.) OrganizefilesandfoldersonanxDcard(seeTheUtilities(UTILS)Page on page 1312.)

Storage Mode Page

ToenterStoragemode,presstheStorageModebutton,andtheStoragemodepagewillappear:

Usethispagetoselectthestoragedeviceyouwishtouse.Thecurrentlyselecteddevicewillbe readfromorwrittentowhenyouload,save,rename,ordeletefilesinStoragemode. Inthecenterofthepagethecurrentlyselectedstoragedeviceishighlighted.Usethecursor buttons,/+buttonsorthealphawheeltoselectoneofthetwostoragedevices.(Youcanalsoselect theUSBdrivebypressingtheUSBDrvsoftbutton.)WhentheUSBdriveisselected,therewillbea prompttellingyouthattheUSBMIDIconnectionwillbedisconnected.Youmustacknowledge thisprompttocontinue. Whennodeviceispresent,thispagereadsCardSlotEmptyandUSB:Noconnection.Whenan xDcardisavailable,thiscardslotlinedisplaysCard:followedbythexDcardsizeand manufacturer.WhentheUSBportisconnectedtoacomputer,theUSBportlinedisplaysUSB TemporaryDrive.Thetoprighthandcornerofthepagedisplaysthecurrentlyselectedstorage destination,CardorUSBTemporary.

13-1

Storage Mode Storage Mode Page

Afterselectingastoragedevice,usethesoftbuttonsontheStorageModepagetostartoneofthe availableoperations: STORE LOAD UTILS USBDrv EXPORT Format Saveobjectsasa.PC3fileonthecurrentdevice. LoadobjectsorMIDIfilesfromthecurrentdeviceintoPC3memory. OrganizefilesandfoldersonanxDcard. SelecttheUSBdrive. ExportaMIDIfile,alistofcontrollerassignmentsoralistofobjects. FormatthecurrentlyloadedxDcard.

Using xD Cards
YoucanusexDcardsforallyourbackupandstoragerequirements.ThePC3iscompatiblewith xDcardstypeS(upto512MB)ortypeM+(upto1GB)formattedFAT16.(ThePC3doesNOT supporttypeMortypeHxDcards.) ThexDcardslotisonthebackpanelofthePC3,butitiseasilyaccessiblefromthefrontofthe instrumentjustrunyourhandalongthebackpanelattherightend(asviewedfromthefront); thebluelightofthecardslotwillreflectoffyourhand.Thegoldcontactsonthecardmustbe facingupwhenyouinsertitintothePC3.YoucanremoveanxDcardanytimetheblueStorage ActiveLEDonthefrontpanelisunlit. Caution:DonotremoveanxDcardwhiletheblueLEDislit;thiscancausedatacorruption. Formatting an xD Card SeeFormat on page 1313.

Using The USB Drive

YoucantransferfilesdirectlytoacomputerthatisequippedwithaUSBportbyusingtheUSB portonthebackpanelofthePC3.ConnectaUSBcablefromthePC3sUSBporttoaUSBporton yourcomputer.EnterStoragemodeandselecttheUSBdrive,therewillbeaprompttellingyou thattheUSBMIDIconnectionwillbedisconnected.Youmustacknowledgethispromptto continue.AvirtualdrivenamedPC3willappearonyourcomputersdesktop. LoadfilesfromyourcomputertoyourPC3byfirstputtingfilesonthePC3virtualdrive,then pressingtheLOADsoftbuttoninStoragemode(seeTheLOADPage on page 138fordetails.) Whenloading,followtheinstructionsonthedisplaytoejectthevirtualdrivebeforeloading. Yourcomputermayshowadeviceremovalwarningafterusingthevirtualdrive.Youmay disregardthiswarningwithoutworriesofdamagetoyourPC3orcomputer. WhenyousavefileswiththeUSBdriveconnected(seeTheSTOREPage on page 135,)saved fileswilltemporarilyappearonthePC3virtualdriveonyourcomputersdesktop,andyouthen mustcopyyoursavedfilestoanotherlocationonyourcomputer.Youmustcopydatafromthe PC3virtualdrivetoyourcomputersdriveorelsethedatawillbelost. WhenyouexitStoragemodeorselectthexDcard,therewillbeaprompttellingyouthatthe USBMIDIconnectionwillberestored.Youmustacknowledgethisprompttocontinue.Your computermayshowadeviceremovalwarningafterusingthevirtualdrive.Youmaydisregard thiswarningwithoutworriesofdamagetoyourPC3orcomputer. Caution:DonotremovetheUSBcablewhilethedisplaysaysLoading...orSaving....thiscancause datacorruption.

13-2

Storage Mode Storage Mode Common Features

Storage Mode Common Features

Thefollowingfeaturesareusedinstoragemodewhensavingorloadingfiles.

Directories
Adirectoryletsyougroupfilestogetherasyoumightseparatedocumentsusingfoldersinafile cabinet.Bydefaultallstoragedeviceshaveatleastonerootdirectory.ToorganizefilesinxD cardsyoucancreateadditionaldirectories,aswellassubdirectorieswithindirectories. Directoriesappearinthefilelistwiththeindicator<dir> totherightofthedirectoryname.See TheUtilities(UTILS)Page on page 1312fordetailsoncreating,deleting,andrenaming directories.

Path
ThePathfieldshowsthecurrentdirectoryonthecurrentdevice.Thisfieldisdisplayedwhen loading,saving,orexportingfilesinStoragemode.ThePC3alwaysdisplaystheroot(toplevel) directorywhenyouviewastoragedevice. Therootdirectoryisdisplayedasabackslash: Path:\ IfyoupresstheLOADsoftbuttonandloadafilefromasubdirectorycalledBACKUPS,thePath fieldwillappearas: Path:\BACKUPS\ Thebackslashcharacterisadirectoryseparator,asinthefollowingPath: Path:\BACKUPS\ROCK\SETUPS\ ThisrepresentsthedirectorySETUPS,whichisasubdirectoryoftheROCKdirectory,whichisa subdirectoryoftheBACKUPSdirectoryintherootdirectory.Ifthepathistoolongtofitonthe toplineofthedisplay,itgetsabbreviated.ThemaximumlengthofapathinthePC3is 64 characters(includingthebackslashcharacters).

Common Dialogues
ThesearedialoguesthatthePC3callsupwhenabouttoperformcertainstoragefunctions. The Select Directory Dialogue WhenstoringanobjectorgroupofobjectsthePC3promptsyoutoselectadirectoryin whichtosavethatobjectorgroup. Therearethreenavigatingsoftbuttonsontheleftsideofthebottomofthepage: NewDir Open Parent Createnewdirectory.CallsuptheNewDirectorydialogue(seethefollowing section) Opensthehighlighteddirectory. Movesyouuponelevelinthedirectoryhierarchy.Ifthedisplayisalreadyatthe rootdirectory,thisbuttonhasnoeffect.

Whenyouhavechosenyourdirectory,presstheOKsoftbuttontocalluptheFileName dialogue(seethefollowingsection)andcompletethestoringprocess.

13-3

Storage Mode Storage Mode Common Features

The File Name/New Directory/Rename Dialogue WhenyoucreateanewfileinStoragemode,createanewdirectory,orrenameafileordirectory, thePC3promptsyoutoentertheobjectsname.ThisFileNamedialogueappearsasshown below,althoughboththeNewDirectoryandRenameappearandfunctionsimilarlytotheFile Namedialogue:

NewfilenameswilldefaulttoeitherFILENAME(afterapowerup),orthenameofthemost recentfilesavedorloaded.NewdirectorynameswilldefaulttoeitherDIRNAME(aftera powerup),orthenameofthemostrecentfilesavedorloaded.Youcaneditthenameusingthe alphanumericpad,alphawheel,/+buttons,LeftandRightcursorbuttons,theDeleteand Insertsoftbuttons,andthe<<and>>softbuttons.SeeSavingandNaming on page 53formore detailsonnamingoptions. PresstheOKsoftbuttontofinishtheoperation.

13-4

Storage Mode The STORE Page

The STORE Page

PressingtheSTOREsoftbuttoncallsuptheStorepage,whereyoucanselectgroupsofobjects fromthePC3tostoreasa.PC3fileinthecurrentstoragedevice.Onlyusercreatedoruser editedobjectscanbestored. Note:Tostoreanindividualobjectorselectobjectsindividuallyinsteadofbyrange,pressthe AdvncesoftbuttononthispagetogotoTheStoreAdvancedPage.SeeTheStoreAdvancedPage belowfordetails.

Atthetoprightofthepage,thedisplayshowshowmuchmemoryisavailableinthecurrent storagedevice.AlongthebottomofthepagearetheStorepagessixsoftbuttons.Belowisa descriptionofthefunctionofeachsoftbutton: Select Clear SelectordeselectthehighlightedObject/TypeorRange/Bank.Anasterix(*)appears totheleftofselectedentries. Clearallselectionsinthecurrentfield.NotethatifyoupresstheClearsoftbutton whileintheRange/Bankfield,onlyselectedRange/Bankentriesarecleared; however,ifpresstheClearsoftbuttonwhileintheObjectTypefield,allselected entriesinbothfieldsarecleared. SetacustomrangeofobjectIDnumberstostore.NoteintheRange/Bankfieldthat thelastentryis1...100Range.YoucansetthisrangeintheSetRangedialogueby pressingtheSetRngsoftbutton.Ifyoutrytosetaninvalidrangesuchas10223 thenthePC3willinformyouthattherangeisinvalid. PresstheAdvncesoftbuttontogotoTheStoreAdvancedPagewhereyoucanstore anindividualobjectorselectobjectsindividuallyinsteadofbyrange.SeeTheStore AdvancedPagebelowfordetails. Storetheselectedobjectstothecurrentstoragedevice.Pressingthissoftbuttoncalls uptheSelectDirectorydialogue. ExitstheStorepageandreturnsyoutotheStoragemodepage.

SetRng

Advnce

Store Cancel

Storing Overview
TostoreusercreatedoreditedobjectsfromthePC3,youmustpickthetype(s)ofobject(s)to saveandselecttheobjectIDrange(s)tosave(seethesectionsbelowfordetails.)Afterselecting objecttypeandrange,presstheStoresoftbutton.Ifanyobjectswithintheselectedrange(s)have dependentRAMobjectsthathavenotbeenselected,youwillbeaskedifyouwanttosave dependentobjects.Dependentobjectsshouldusuallybesaved. AfterpressingtheStoresoftbuttonyouwillbepromptedtochooseadirectorytosaveto(seeThe SelectDirectoryDialogue on page 133fordetails.)Next,theFileNamedialoguewillappear(see TheFileName/NewDirectory/RenameDialogue on page 134fordetails.)Namethefile,andpress

13-5

Storage Mode The STORE Page

OK(filenamescanbeuptoeightcharacterslong.)Whenthefileissaved,thePC3addsanextension (.PC3)tothefilename.Notethatalthough.PC3filesarecollectionsofobjects,youcanload individualobjectsfora.PC3fileifyouwantto.SeeLoadingIndividualObjectsFromA.PC3Or CompatibleFileType on page 139. Saving Master Files AmongyourchoicesintheObjectTypelistareMasterfiles.Masterfilesconsistprimarilyofthe itemsontheMastermodepagesandtheMIDImodepages,aswellastheprogramselectedfor eachMIDIchannelinProgrammode.SavingMasterfilesisagoodwaytoconfigureyourPC3 (oranotherPC3)toyourperformanceorsequencingneeds.Forexample,youuseanexternal sequencerwithProgrammode,youmightsavedifferentMasterfilesforeverysequenceyou createforwithexternalsequencer.Then,whenyouloadtheMasterfile,youwouldhaveallthe correctprogramsassignedtotheappropriateMIDIchannels.

Select Object Type To Store

UsetheObjectTypelistontheleftsideofthepagetoselectthetype(s)ofobject(s)tosave.Scroll throughthelistusingthealphawheel,cursorbuttons,or/+buttons.UsetheSelectsoftbutton toselectordeselecteachobjecttype.Anasterix(*)appearstotheleftofselectedentries.Select Alltypestoselectallobjecttypes.

Select Object Range To Store

UsetheRange/BanklistontherightsideofthepagetoselecttherangeorrangesofIDnumbers tosavefortheselectedobjecttype(s).ObjectIDnumberstosavecanbeselectedingroupsof128 objects(alsoknownasbanks,forexample,objects1...128,129...256,etc.)AllobjectIDnumbers canbeselectedbyselectingEverything.AcustomrangeofobjectIDnumberscanalsobe createdusingtheSetRngsoftbutton.ThecustomrangeisthelastentryintheRange/Bank list,by defaultitiscalled1...100Range,butthenameoftheentrychangestotherangesetwiththe SetRngsoftbutton. ScrollthroughtheRange/Banklistusingthealphawheel,cursorbuttons,or/+buttons.Usethe Selectsoftbuttontoselecteachbankrangetosave.Anasterix(*)appearstotheleftofselected bankranges. RangesintheRange/Banklistmusthavea(u)symbolinorderforobjecttobesavedfromthat range.ARange/Banklistentrywitha(u)symbolindicatesthattherangecontainsusercreatedor editedobjectswhichcanbesaved.

The Store Advanced Page

PressingtheAdvncesoftbuttoncallsuptheStoreAdvancedpage.Onthispage,youcanselect andstoreobjectsindividually,ratherthanbyrange.TheStoreAdvancedpagelistseveryuser editedobjectinthePC3.TheobjectsareorganizedbynumericalIDandobjecttype. TherearefivesoftbuttonsontheStoreAdvancedpage: Select Next Type Selectordeselectthehighlightedobject.Anasterix(*)appearsbetweentheIDand objecttypeofselectedobjects. Scrolltonextentry.SamefunctionaspressingtheDownor+buttons,orturningthe AlphaWheeloneclickclockwise. Jumptonextobjecttypeinthelist.

13-6

Storage Mode The STORE Page

Store Cancel

Storetheselectedobjectstothecurrentstoragedevice.Pressingthissoftbuttoncalls uptheSelectDirectorydialogue. ExitstheStoreAdvancedpage.

Shortcuts when Storing Individual Objects Selectingordeselectingalloftheobjectsatoncecanbedonewiththefollowingdoublepresses (twofrontpanelbuttonssimultaneouslypressed): Left/Rightcursordoublepress:SelectAllObjects Up/Downcursordoublepress:ClearAllSelections

Ifyouwanttostoremostbutnotalloftheitemsinafile(forexample,iftherearesomesongsin RAMthatyoudontwanttobestoredinthefile),itmaybefastesttofirstselectallobjectsusing theLeft/Rightdoublepress,andthenmanuallydeselectanyunwanteditems.

13-7

Storage Mode The LOAD Page

The LOAD Page

PressingtheLOADsoftbuttoncallsuptheLOADpage(seebelow,)whereyoucanloadgroups ofobjectsfrom.PC3,.P3K,.K26,.K25,or.KRZfiles,loadindividualobjectsfromwithinthose files,orloadaMIDIsequencefileorfiles(.MID)fromthecurrentstoragedevice. Usethecursorbuttons,/+buttonsorthealphawheeltobrowsethefilesinthecurrently selectedstoragedevice.Seebelowfordescriptionsofthesoftbuttonsonthispage,whichhelp youbrowseandselectthefilesinthecurrentlyselectedstoragedevice. Afterselectingthefileorfilestoload,presstheOKsoftbutton,andyouwillbepromptedto chooseabanktoloadtheselectedobject(s)orMIDIfile(s)into.SeeLoadingMethods on page 1310 forinstructionsonchoosingabanktoloadtoafterpressingOK. Note:Whenselectingafiletoload,filenamesontheLoadpagethatarelongerthaneight characterswillbeshortenedtoeightcharactersandspaceswillberemoved.(Thishasnoeffecton thenamesofobjectsstoredwithina.PC3orothercompatiblefiletype.)WhenloadingaMIDIfile (.MID)toSongmode,thePC3willattempttousetheMIDIfilesinternalsequencenameasthe Songname.Iftheinternalsequencenamecannotbeloaded,thefirsteightcharactersofthefile namewillbeusedastheSongname.ShortenedsongnamescanberenamedinSongmode.

Select

Selectordeselectthehighlightedfile.Anasterix(*)appearstotheleftofselected files.Multiplefilescanonlybeselectediftheyareinthesamedirectory.Enteringa newdirectorywilldeselectallfiles. PresstheSelAllsoftbuttontoselectordeselectallfilesinthecurrentdirectory (directorieswithinthecurrentdirectorywillnotbeselected.)Enteringanew directorywilldeselectallfiles. Movesyouuponelevelinthedirectoryhierarchy.Ifthedisplayisalreadyatthe rootdirectory,thisbuttonhasnoeffect.Enteringanewdirectorywilldeselectall files. Openselecteddirectoryorviewobjectswithina.PC3fileorothercompatible Kurzweilfiletypeforloadingindividualobjects.SeeLoadingIndividualObjectsFrom A.PC3OrCompatibleFileTypebelowforinstructionsonopening.PC3andother Kurzweilfiletypestoviewandloadindividualobjects(seeAppendix Efor compatibilitydetails.)Enteringanewdirectorywilldeselectallfiles.Viewingobjects withina.PC3fileorotherKurzweilfilewilldeselectanyotherfilesthathadbeen selected. Loadtheselected.PC3file(s)orothercompatibleKurzweilfiletype,orloadthe selectedMIDI(.MID)file(s).SeeLoadingMethods on page 1310forinstructionson usingtheLoaddialoguepresentedafterpressingOK. ExitstheLoadpageandreturnsyoutotheStoragemodepage.

SelAll

Parent

Open

OK

Cancel

13-8

Storage Mode The LOAD Page

Loading Individual Objects From A .PC3 Or Compatible File Type

Sincea.PC3filecancontainover3000objects,itisoftenusefultoloadonlyasubsetofthe informationcontainedinafile.Youcanselectindividualobjectsorgroupsofobjects(programs, effects,songs)forloadingfromwithinasingle.PC3,.P3K,.K26,.K25or.KRZfile(see Appendix Eforcompatibilitydetails.) IndividualobjectscanbeloadedfromtheLOADpage.Selecta.PC3orcompatiblefile,then presstheOpensoftbutton.ThePC3scansthefilecontentsinordertopresentalistofallofthe objectsinthefile.Sometimesthisprocedurecantakeafewmoments,dependingonhowmany objectsareinthefile. Theobjectsinthelistaregroupedbytype(program,setup,etc.).Scrollthroughthelistusingthe alphawheel,cursorbuttons,or/+buttons.Eachlineinthelistrepresentsoneobject,and displaystheobjectsnumberinthelist,aswellastheobjectstype,IDnumber,andname.TheID numberofeachobjectisthenumberthatwasusedtoreferencetheobjectwhenthefilewaslast savedbythePC3.Thesenumberswillusuallybedifferentaftertheobjectsareloaded, dependinguponthebank(forexample,128...255)andmodethatisspecifiedforloading(see LoadingMethods on page 1310fordetails.) Enteringinanumberfromthealphanumericbuttonpadwilljumptotheindexedentry,and typinginalargenumberlike9999willgototheendofthelist. Thefollowingsoftbuttonsareusedforselectingobjectstoload: Select Next Type OK Cancel Selectordeselectanobject. Jumptothenextselectedobjectinthelist. Jumptothenextobjectofadifferenttype. Loadtheselectedobjects. ExitbacktotheFileListDialog.

PresstheSelectbuttontoselectordeselectthehighlightedobjectforloading.Anasterisk(*)is placedtotheleftoftheobjectindexforanyitemsthatareselected. TheNextbuttonwillcausetheindexintothelisttojumptothenextselectedobject,forwardin thelist.Whentheendofthelistisreached,thesearchwillwraparoundfromthebeginning.If therearenoitemsselected,thenthisbuttondoesntdoanything. TheTypebuttonjumpstothenextobjectofadifferenttypefromtheonethatiscurrently highlighted.Thisisaconvenientwaytofindaparticulartypeofobjectinthelist. Whenyouarefinishedselectingobjectstoload,pressOKandyouwillbepromptedtochoosea banktoloadtheselectedobject(s)into.SeeLoadingMethods on page 1310forinstructionson choosingabanktoloadtoafterpressingOK. Cancelreturnstothefilelistdialog,highlightingthefileyoujustopened. Select All/deselect All Selectingordeselectingalloftheobjectsatoncecanbedonewiththefollowingdoublebutton presses: Left/Rightcursordoublepress:SelectAllObjects Up/Downcursordoublepress:ClearAllSelections

13-9

Storage Mode The LOAD Page

Ifyouwanttoloadmostbutnotalloftheitemsfromafile(forexample,iftherehappenstobea Mastertableinthefilethatyoudontwanttoload),itmaybefastesttofirstselectallobjects usingtheLeft/Rightdoublepress,andthenmanuallydeselectanyunwanteditems.

Loading Methods
OnceyouhavepressedOKtoloadtheselectedfile(s)orobject(s),youmustselectthebankto loadtoandaloadingmethod.Thisdeterminestheobjectnumbersthatyourloadedobjectswill have,andwhetherornotexistingobjectsinthePC3willbedeletedwhenthenewobjectsare loaded.Youwillseethisdialog:

Firstselectabankrangetoloadto,thenselectaloadingmethodbychoosingoneofthesoft buttons.Thesoftbuttonscontrolthemodeforloadingandrenumberingofobjectsfromthefile. Caution:Carefullyreadthedescriptionofeachloadingmethodbeforepressingoneofthesoftbuttons. SomeoftheloadingmethodswilldeleteexistingobjectsinthePC3. Hereshowtheloadingmethodswork: OvFill Overwrt Merge FirstdeletesallRAMobjectsintheselectedbank,andthenloadsobjectsusing consecutivenumbering. FirstdeletesallRAMobjectsintheselectedbank,andthenloadsobjectsusingthe objectIDnumbersstoredinthefile. PreservetheobjectIDnumbersstoredinthefilefortheobjectstobeloaded, overwriteobjectsalreadyinmemoryifnecessary.ForMIDIfiles(.MID),Merge behavesthesameasFillsinceMIDIfilesdonothaveIDnumbers. TrytousetheobjectIDnumbersstoredinthefilefortheobjectstobeloaded.Ifan IDnumberisalreadyinuse,incrementtheIDnumberuntilafreeslotisfound.For MIDIfiles(.MID),AppendbehavesthesameasFillsinceMIDIfilesdonothaveID numbers. IgnoretheobjectIDnumbersstoredinthefile.Trytouseconsecutivenumbering fromthebeginningoftheselectedbank.IfanIDnumberisalreadyinuse, incrementtheIDnumberuntilafreeslotisfound. CanceltheobjectloadingandreturntothemainLoadpage.

Append

Fill

Cancel

Typically,youwilljustwanttousetheFillmethod.Append,Merge,andOverwrttryto preservethenumbersstoredwiththeobjectsinthefile,butthisshouldonlyreallybenecessary ifyoudependonprogramnumbersoreffectnumberstobeatacertainMIDIprogramchange

13-10

Storage Mode The LOAD Page

numbers.OvFillislikeFillexcepttheselectedbank(orEverything)isclearedoutbefore loading. OverwrtandOvFilloperateindifferentwaysafteraselectedbankhasbeenfilledupforagiven objecttype(forexample,afteryouhaveloadedmorethan128programsintoabank).Overwrt willcontinuetopreservetheobjectIDsstoredinthefile,andwillindividuallyoverwriteobjects inthebankfollowingthejustfilledbank.OvFilldoesnotoverwritepasttheendoftheselected bank;itinsteadskipsoverobjectIDsthatareinuse,loadingonlyintounusedIDs.Becauseof thisdifference,itcansometimesbefastertoloadafileusingOvFillratherthanOverwrt. However,thisappliesonlyiftheobjectstobeloadedwouldextendpasttheendofaselected bank. Notethatwhenloadingintoaspecificbank(asopposedtoloadingasEverything),theobject IDsinthefileareusedasfollows:Thebankdigitisignored,andtheremainderofthenumber isusedwhenthePC3rebankstheobjectIDintothebankthatyouspecify.Forexample,ifyou saveProgram453intoafile,andloaditbackintothe129...256bank,thePC3willusethe number69(itsbankspecificIDinthe385...512bank)whendecidinguponanewobjectID.Ifthe 129...256bankwaspreviouslyempty,andtheloadmodeisAppend,thentheprogramwillend upwithID197(128+69). ForloadingasEverything,theIDnumberforanobjectstoredinafileistakenliterally,and notrebanked(exceptifFillorOvFillmodeischosen). Thefollowingexampleshowshoweachdifferentloadingmethodsaffecthowfourprograms loadintoabankthatalreadycontainsprograms. Example:StartingwiththefollowingobjectsalreadystoredinthePC3internalRAM:

Program ID 129 133 134 139 140

Program Name Piano Stack Ole Upright 1 WestCoastPno&Pad The Ancient DancePnoEchplex

SupposeyouweretoloadafilecontainingthefollowingobjectsintotheBase2(129...256)bank:

Program ID 260 261 264 265

Program Name Brighter CP TouchRezSynthCP Inside Out CP Pianet Classic

13-11

Storage Mode The Utilities (UTILS) Page

ThefollowingtableshowstheIDsthateachprogramendupwithwhenyouloadtheprograms fromtheClassicKeysbank(255...384)intotheBase2bank:

Original Program ID 129 133 134 139 140 260 261 264 265

Program IDs After Loading Program Name OvFill Piano Stack Ole Upright 1 WestCoastPno&Pad The Ancient DancePnoEchplex Brighter CP TouchRezSynthCP Inside Out CP Pianet Classic Deleted Deleted Deleted Deleted Deleted 129 130 131 132 Overwrt Deleted Deleted Deleted Deleted Deleted 260 261 264 265 Merge 129 Deleted Deleted 139 140 133 134 137 138 Append 129 133 134 139 140 135 136 137 138 Fill 129 133 134 139 140 130 131 132 135

The Utilities (UTILS) Page

PressingtheUTILSsoftbuttoncallsuptheUtilitiespage.UsetheUtilitiespagetocreate directories(folders)onthecurrentxDcard,orusetheUtilitiespagetodelete,renameorcopy filesonthecurrentxDcard.Seethesoftbuttonsbelowfortheeachavailablefunction:

Soft Buttons on the Utilities Page

NewDir Delete Rename Copy Createanewdirectory(folder)inthecurrentdirectory.Directoriescreatedbythe PC3canhavenamesuptoeightcharacterslong. Deletethehighlightedfilefromthecurrentdevice. Changethenameofafile. Copyafiletoadifferentdirectory.AfterpressingCopy,youmustselectadirectory tocopyto,presstheOpensoftbuttontoopenthedirectorytocopyto,thenpress theOksoftbuttontocopythefile.YoucanalsopresstheNewDirsoftbuttonto createanewdirectorytocopyto. Opensthehighlighteddirectory. Movesyouuponelevelinthedirectoryhierarchy.Ifthedisplayisalreadyatthe rootdirectory,thisbuttonhasnoeffect.

Open Parent

13-12

Storage Mode Export

Export
PresstheEXPORTsoftbuttontogototheExportpage.TheExportpageallowsyoutoexport MIDIfilescreatedinSongmode,listsofcontrollerassignmentinfothatareautomatically createdforeachProgramandeachChain,oralistofallobjectsintextformat.Developerscan alsoexportanobjectinXMLformat,orexportaKPN. ToexportaMIDIfilecreatedinSongmode,thesongmustbecurrentlyloadedinSongmode. GotoSongmodeandloadthedesiredsong,thenreturntotheStoragemodeEXPORTpageand presstheSongsoftbutton.Youwillbepromptedfirsttochooseadirectorytosavethefileinto, andthenyouwillbepromptedtonametheMIDIfile.Whenyounamethefile,youcanusethe TypefieldtochoosetoexporteitheraStandardMIDIFiletype1(saveswithmultiplechannels,) orStandardMIDIFiletype0(savesallchannelsas1channel.) ToexportalistofcontrollerassignmentinfoforallProgramsorforallChains,pressthePrInfo softbuttonortheFXInfosoftbutton.Youwillbepromptedtochooseadirectorytosaveinto, andthenyouwillbepromptedtonametheinfofile.Acommaseparatedvaluefilewillbe exported. Toexportalistofallobjectsintextformat,presstheObjLstsoftbutton.Youwillbepromptedto chooseadirectorytosaveinto,andthenyouwillbepromptedtonamethefile.Acomma separatedvaluetextfilewillbeexported,listingeachobjecttypewithIDnumber,objectname, andwhethertheobjectisinternaloruser. ToexportanobjectinXMLformat,presstheObjFmtsoftbutton.Chooseanobjectfromthelist usingtheAlphaWheel,/+buttons,orthealphanumericpad,thenpresstheOksoftbutton.You willbepromptedtochooseadirectorytosaveinto,andthenyouwillbepromptedtonamethe file. ToexportaKPN,presstheKPNsoftbutton.ChooseaDomainandChannel,thenpresstheOk softbutton.Youwillbepromptedtochooseadirectorytosaveinto,andthenyouwillbe promptedtonamethefile.

Format
xDcardscomeformattedandreadytousewiththePC3.Ifyoueverneedtoformatacard, however,insertthexDcard(withgoldcontactsup)intothePC3sxDslot,orinthexDslotof anycomputerwithxDformattingcapability.Makesurethecarddoesnothaveawrite protectionstickerattached. PresstheStoragemodebuttontoenterStoragemode.PressthesoftbuttonlabeledFormat.The PC3willaskyouifyouwanttoformat,andapairofYes/Nosoftbuttonswillappear.Pressthe Yessoftbuttonwhenyouarereadytobegin. ThePC3willremindyouthatformattingwillerasethexDcard,andwillgiveyoutwomore chancestocanceltheformattingprocedurewewanttomakesureyoudontaccidentallyerase anycards.PresstheYessoftbuttontocontinueformatting.Whenformattingbegins,thedisplay willtellyouthatthecardisbeingformatted.ThebluexDLEDwilllight.

13-13

Storage Mode Format

13-14

Keymap and Sample Editing The Keymap Editor

Chapter 14 Keymap and Sample Editing

The Keymap Editor
TheKeymapEditorletsyoucustomizethePC3sfactorypresetkeymapsandsavethemtoRAM. Youcanalsobuildyourownkeymapsfromscratch(seeBuildingaKeymap on page 147.) Keymapsareanintegralpartofeverylayerofaprogram.Eachkeymapcontainsasetof parametersdeterminingwhichsample(s)thePC3willplaywhenyoutriggeranote.Eachlayer hasatleastonekeymap,butitcanhavetwokeymapswhenyoureworkingwithstereo samples.Eachofthesestereokeymapsusestwoofthe128availablevoices. Eachkeymapconsistsofasetofkey(note)rangesC4toG4,forexample.Theentirespanof eachkeymapisfromC0toG10.Eachrangehasasamplerootassignedwithintherange.Each samplerootisadistinctROMsample.Withineachkeyrange,thesamplerootistransposedup anddowntoplayoneachoftherangesnotes.Youcanvieweachrangebychangingthevalueof theKeyRangeparameterontheKeymapeditorpage.Youcanmixsamplesofdifferenttimbres withinasinglekeymap,andeventuneindividualkeystoanypitchbydefiningkeyrangesto singlenotesandassigningsamplestoeachofthosenotes. Whenyoutriggeranote,thePC3identifiesthekeyrangewheretheNoteOneventoccurred.It alsocheckstheattackvelocityvalueofthenote.Itthenaddressesitsmemory,andretrievesthe samplerootthatsassignedtothatkeyrangeandattackvelocityvalue.Ifthenotethats triggeredisnotthenotewherethesamplerootisassigned,thesampleistransposedtoplayat thecorrectpitch.ThePC3thengeneratesthedigitalsignalthatrepresentsthesoundofthenote. Atthispointthekeymapsjobisdone,andthesignalproceedsthroughthelayersalgorithm andontotheaudiooutputs. Youcanassignasmanykeyrangestoakeymapasyoulike,evencreatingaseparaterangefor eachnote.Thiswouldallowyoutotuneeachkeyindependently,tocreatemicrotonaltunings. Forkeymapsthatuseasingletimbre,liketheGrandPiano,theresakeyrangeforeachsample rootstoredinmemory.Foracousticinstrumentalsounds,themorekeyrangesyouhavefora keymap,themorerealisticthesoundwillbe,sincetherewillbelesspitchshiftingofthesample rootwithinthekeyrange. Ofcourse,youcanassignsamplerootswithdifferenttimbreswithinthesamekeymap.Manyof thedrumkitkeymapsinROM,forexample,haveabout20keyranges,withseveraldifferent timbresassignedasthesampleroots.Youcanalsocreateakeymapwithasinglekeyrangethat spansfromC0toG10,ifyouwanttostretchasinglesamplerootfromC0toG 10.Keepin mind,however,thatsamplescanonlybetransposedupwardbyanoctavefromthesamples originalpitch.Samplescanbetransposeddownwardwithoutlimit. Thinkofakeymapasifitwereasinglepieceofstring,dividedintodifferentsectionsthatadjoin oneanother.Sectionscannotoverlap.IfyouhaveonerangethatgoesfromC4toF4andanother thatgoesfromF#4toC5,thenifyouchangethefirstrangetobeC4toG4,thesecondonewill changetobeG#4toC5. Also,youcanthavenothingassignedtoakeyrange.EvenifitisSilence(#999),therewill alwaysbeasampleassignedtoeveryrangeinthekeymap.Thisissomethingtowatchoutfor whencreatingdrumprograms.Forexample,letssayyouarecreatingaprogramwith20layers. Eachlayerhasitsownkeymap,whichhasjustonesampleassignedtopartofthekeyboardwith therestofthekeyrangeassignedtoSilence.Makesurethatyoulimitthenoterangeofeach

14-1

Keymap and Sample Editing The Keymap Editor

layerusingtheLoKeyandHiKeyparametersontheLAYERpageintheProgramEditor.Ifeach layercoverstheentirerange,theneachnoteyouplayedwouldtrigger20voices(oneforeach layer).Youwouldonlyhearonedrumpernotebecausealltheotherlayersaretriggering Silence.BecauseofthevoicestealingalgorithmsinthePC3,thevoiceswouldalmost immediatelybecomeavailableagain,sincetheyhavenoamplitude.Butforonebriefinstant,the voicewouldbetriggered,whichcouldcauseothervoicestobecutoff. Youcanalsocreatemultivelocitykeymapsthatis,keymapsthatwillplaydifferenttimbres dependingontheattackvelocitiesofyourNoteOnevents.Program6PopPowerPiano,for example,usesakeymapwiththreevelocityranges.Eachkeyrangeinamultivelocitykeymap containstwoormoredistinctsamplerootsthatthePC3choosesbetween,accordingtothe attackvelocityofthenote.SeeVelocityRanges(VelRng) on page 145fordetails. TheKeymapEditorisnestedwithintheProgramEditor.ThefirststepinusingtheKeymap Editoristoselectthekeymapyouwanttoedit.ThisisdoneontheKEYMAPpageinthe ProgramEditor,usingtheKeymapparameter.Onceyouvedonethis,justpresstheEditbutton, andyoullentertheKeymapEditor.Ifyouwanttoeditadifferentkeymap,presstheExitbutton toreturntotheKEYMAPpageintheProgramEditorandselectthedesiredkeymap.Ifyou wanttobuildakeymapfromscratch,startwiththekeymap999Silence(seeBuildinga Keymap on page 147).ThiskeymaptemplatecontainsonekeyrangefromC0toG10,andisa convenientstartingpointforaddingkeyrangesandassigningsampleroots.TheKeymapeditor pagelookslikethis:

Parameter Sample Key Range Low Key High Key Velocity Range (VelRange) Low Velocity (Lo) High Velocity (Hi) Coarse Tune Fine Tune Master Transpose Volume Adjust

Range of Values Sample Root list Variable from C0-G10 C 0 to G 10 C 0 to G 10 Variable from ppp-fff ppp-fff ppp-fff 128 to 127 semitones -49 to 50 cents -126 ST to127 semitones 24 dB

14-2

Keymap and Sample Editing The Keymap Editor

Keymap Editor Parameters

Sample Thisiswhereyouassignasampleroottothecurrentkeyrange.Dependingonthenatureofthe samplerootanindividualsampleorablockofsamplerootsthesamplesnamelooksabit differentinthedisplay.Eachsamplesnameconsistsofthreeparts:anumeral,aname,anda notenumberforexample,999SilenceC4.Additionally,thenameofstereosampleswillend withanS.(Touseastereosample,theStereoparametermustbesettoOnintheProgramEditor, andtwokeymapsmustbeselected,seeTheKEYMAPPage on page 614fordetails.) ThenumeralisthesampleblockID.Ifthesampleobjectisanindividualsample,thesample blockIDisthesameasthesamplesobjectID.Ifthesampleobjectisagroupofsampleroots,the objectIDofthefirstrootinthegroupdeterminesthesampleblockID.Theremainingrootsin theblockhavethesameID,anddifferonlyintheirnotenumbers. Nextcomesthenameofthesample,whichtypicallydescribesthesamplestimbre.Thefinal partofthesamplesnamereferstothepitchatwhichitwasoriginallysampled.Formany timbres,multiplesamplesaremadeatvariouspitches.AsyouscrollthroughtheSamplelist, youllseeonlythepitchofthesamplechangeuntilyoureachthenextsampleblock.The samplesoriginalpitchissetintheSampleEditor(seeRootKey on page 1410.)Thisdetermines whichkeywillplaythesampleatitsoriginalpitchwhenasampleisusedinakeyrange(see KeyRangebelow.) Key Range Akeyrangeisarangeofkeyboardkeysthatplaysonesample(pervelocityrange,seeVelocity Range(VelRange)belowfordetails.)Eachsampleinakeyrange(pervelocityrange)is transposedbasedoneachsamplesRootKeyparametersothatitplaysatthecorrectpitchonthe keyboardrelativetoitsrootkey(seeEditingSamples on page 149fordetailsontheRootKey parameter.)Otherkeyswithinthekeyrangetransposethesamplechromaticallyrelativetothe rootkey.SamplepitchrelativetotherootkeycanalsobeoffsetusingtheCoarseTuneandFine Tuneparameters,seebelow.) TheKeyRangeparametershowsyouwhichkeyrangeyourecurrentlyviewingorediting(key rangesarenamedbytheirlowestandhighestnotes.)ChangingthevalueoftheKeyRange parameterselectsfromtheavailablekeyranges,andallowsyoutovieworeditthesample assignmentandotherparametersoftheselectedkeyrange.WhentheKeyRangeparameteris selected,youcanalsoscrollthroughavailablekeyrangesusingtheAlphaWheelorthe/+ buttons.MultiplekeyrangesareonlyshownifthecurrentKeymapusesmorethanonekey range.IfthetoplineoftheEditKeymappagedisplaysKeyRange,youcanscrollthroughthe availablekeyrangeswithanyparameteronthepageselectedusingtheChan/Layerbuttons. (PresstheTogglesoftbuttontotogglethetoplinebetweendisplayingKeyRangeand VelRange.) WiththeKeyrangeparameterselected,keyrangescanalsobeselectedbyholdingtheEnter buttonandplayingakey.Thekeyrangeassignedtothatkeywillbeselected. Low Key (Lo), High Key (Hi) Withtheseparametersyoucanuseanyofthedataentrymethodstochangethelowandhigh notesofthecurrentkeyrange.YoucanextendakeyrangetothefullcapacityofthePC3(C0to G10).Ifyouextendthecurrentkeyrangeintoanother,theboundariesoftheotherkeyrange willbecomeshortenedtoaccommodatethekeyrangeyouareextending.Ifthekeyrangeyou areextendingcoversanotherkeyrange,theotherkeyrangewillbedeleted. Thesettingforthelowkeycannotbehigherthanthesettingforthehighkey.Similarly,the settingforthehighkeycannotbelowerthanthesettingforthelowkey.

14-3

Keymap and Sample Editing The Keymap Editor

Velocity Range (VelRange) Thisparametershowsthekeyboardvelocityrange(indynamiclevels)thatwilltriggerasample forthecurrentKeyRange.Inakeyrangewithmorethanonevelocityrange,eachvelocityrange canuseadifferentsample,aswellasdifferentCoarseTune,FineTune,andVolumeAdjust settings.Velocityrangesareintendedforusewithinstrumentsamplesrecordedatdifferent velocities.Thishelpstomakeplayingsampledinstrumentssoundmorerealistic.Sample volumesarealsoscaledbasedonkeyboardvelocitywithineachvelocityrange.Velocityranges forthecurrentKeymaparesetusingtheVelRngsoftbutton(seeVelocityRanges (VelRng) on page 145)ortheLowVelocity(Lo),HighVelocity(Hi)parameters(seebelow.)All keyrangesinaKeymapsharethesamesetofvelocityranges.Uptoeightvelocityrangescanbe used. WhentheVelRangeparameterisselected,youcanscrollthroughavailablevelocityrangesusing theAlphaWheelorthe/+buttons.Multiplevelocityrangesareonlyshownifthecurrent Keymapusesmorethanonevelocityrange.IfthetoplineoftheEditKeymappagedisplays VelRange,youcanscrollthroughtheavailablevelocityrangeswithanyparameteronthepage selectedusingtheChan/Layerbuttons.(PresstheTogglesoftbuttontotogglethetopline betweendisplayingVelRangeandKeyRange.) Low Velocity (Lo), High Velocity (Hi) Usetheseparameterstosetthevelocityrangeofthecurrentkeyrange.Ifyouextendthecurrent velocityrangeintoanother,theboundariesoftheothervelocityrangewillbecomeshortenedto accommodatethevelocityrangeyouareextending.Ifthevelocityrangeyouareextending coversanothervelocityrange,theothervelocityrangewillbedeleted. Coarse Tune CoarseTuneallowsyoutotransposeasampleforagivenrange.Thisisextremelyusefulwhen youhavesettheRootkeyofthesampleforonenotebutwanttoassignthesampletoadifferent partofthekeyboardandstillbeabletoplayitwithouttransposition(seeRootKey on page 1410 fordetails.)Forexample,ifyouoriginallysettheRootkeyatC4butwantthesampleassignedto C3,youwouldsetCoarseTuneto12ST,transposingituponeoctave.Nowtheoriginalpitchwill playatC3,oneoctavedown.IfyouexaminethedrumandpercussionkitkeymapsinROM,you willseethatwehavedonethis.MostofourROMdrumsampleshavetheRootkeysetatC4. TheresashortcutforadjustingtheCoarseTuneautomaticallysothatthesampleplayswith minimaltranspositionintheassignedkeyrange.SeeSpecialDoubleButtonPressesintheKeymap Editor on page 146. Fine Tune Thisgivesyoufurtherpitchcontrol.Oncethesamplespitchisclosetothedesirednote,usethe Finetunetosharpenorflattenitasmuchasahalfsemitone. Master Transpose (MasterXpose) Thisparameterdoesnotreallypertaintothekeymapitself.Insteaditisidenticaltothe TransposeparameterfoundontheMIDImodeTRANSMITpage.Ifyouchangethevaluehere, thesamevaluewillbereflectedontheMIDImodeTRANSMITpage,andviceversa.It transposestheentireinstrumentglobally.Thereasonitisplacedonthispageisthatitwillallow youtoassignsamplesacrosstheentirekeyboardeasily,whenyouareusingakeyboardthathas fewerthan88notes. Volume Adjust Hereyoucanadjustthevolumeofthenotesinthecurrentkeyrange.Thisenablesyoutomake eachkeyrangeplayatthesamevolumeevenifthesamplesinthevariousrangeswererecorded atdifferentvolumes.

14-4

Keymap and Sample Editing The Keymap Editor

The Soft Buttons in the Keymap Editor

Toggle PressingtheTogglesoftbuttonswitchesthefunctionthattheChan/Layerbuttonsperform whileontheEditKeymappage.PresstheTogglesoftbuttontotogglethetoplinebetween displayingKeyRangeorVelRange.IfthetoplineofthepagedisplaysKeyRange,thenthe Chan/Layerbuttonswillscrollbetweentheavailablekeyrangesinthekeymap(ifthecurrent keymaphasmorethanonekeyrange.)Thenoterangeforeachkeyrangewillalsobedisplayed onthetopline.IfthetoplineofthepagedisplaysVelRange,thentheChan/Layerbuttonswill scrollbetweentheavailablevelocityrangesinthekeymap(ifthecurrentkeymaphasmore thanonevelocityrange.)Thedynamicrangeforeachvelocityrangewillalsobedisplayedon thetopline. Velocity Ranges (VelRng) PresstheVelRngsoftbuttontoviewtheVELRANGESpage(seebelow.)UsetheVELRANGES pagetoadd,editordeletevelocityrangesforthecurrentkeymap.TheVELRANGESpage showsachartofakeymapsentireavailabledynamicrange,frommostquiet(ppp)tomostloud (fff.)VelocityrangescanalsobeadjustedfromtheEditKeymappage,buttheVELRANGES pageprovidesachartasavisualaid.Eachkeymapcanbesplitintoamaximumofeightvelocity ranges.Eachkeyrangeinakeymapcanuseitsownsampleforeachvelocityrange.Allkey rangesinakeymapsharethesamevelocityranges.

PresstheSplitsoftbuttontosplitthecurrentlyselectedvelocityrangeintotworanges(untilthe maximumofeightvelocityrangeshavebeencreated.)PresstheDeletesoftbuttontodeletethe currentlyselectedvelocityrange.PresstheExitsoftbuttontoreturntotheEditKeymappage. OntheVELRANGESpage,thecurrentlyselectedvelocityrangeishighlightedinthechart,and itsnameisdisplayedintheVelRangefield.WiththeVelRangefieldselected,youcanusethe AlphaWheelor/+buttonstomovebetweentheavailablevelocityranges(ifthereismorethan onevelocityrangeavailable.)YoucanalsousetheChan/Layerbuttonsatanytimetomove betweentheavailablevelocityranges.Ifthereismorethanonevelocityrangeavailable,youcan adjustthedynamicrangeofeachusingLoandHiparameters.TheseHiandLoparametersare thesameastheLowVelocity(Lo)andHighVelocity(Hi)parametersontheEditKeymappage (seeLowVelocity(Lo),HighVelocity(Hi) on page 144fordetails.)Changesmadewitheithersetof parametersareshownonbothpages. New Range (NewRng) TheNewRngbuttonletsyoudefineanewkeyrangetoedit,whetheritstoassignadifferent sample,ortoadjustthepitchorvolume.JustpressNewRng,thenplaythenoteyouwantasthe lownote,thenthehighnote.ThePC3willpromptyouforeachnote.Whenyoutriggerthehigh note,youllreturntotheKeymapeditorpage,andthenewkeyrangeyoudefinedwillbe selected.Thenextchangeyoumakewillaffectonlythateditrange.

14-5

Keymap and Sample Editing The Keymap Editor

Ifyousetanewkeyrangethatscompletelywithinanexistingkeyrange,theexistingkeyrange willbesplitintotwokeyranges,withthenewkeyrangebetweenthetwo.Atthispoint,you mustchangeatleastoneparameterofthenewkeyrangebeforeeditingadifferentkeyrange, otherwisethenewkeyrangewillbemergedwiththeadjacentkeyranges.Ifyousetanew keyrangethatoverlapspartorallofanotherkeyrange,thesampleassignedtothelowerkey rangewillbeappliedtothenewkeyrange.Again,atthispointyoumustchangeatleastone parameterofthenewkeyrangebeforeeditingadifferentkeyrange,otherwisethenewkeyrange willbemergedwiththelowerkeyrangethatitoverlapped. Assign TheAssignsoftbuttonletsyouselectasample,thenspecifythekeyrangetowhichits assigned.Thisenablesyoutoinsertanewkeyrangewithinthecurrentkeymap.Whenyou presstheAssignsoftbutton,adialogappearsthatpromptsyoutoselectasamplefromthe Sampleslist.Scrollthroughthelist,thenpresstheOKsoftbutton.Youllthenbepromptedto definethenewkeyrangebyplayingthenotesyouwanttobethelowestandhighestnotesofthe range.(PresstheCancelsoftbuttonifyouchangeyourmind.)Whenyoutriggerthelowand highnotes,thenewkeyrangeisinserted.Ifthenewkeyrangepartiallyoverlapsanadjacentkey range,theexistingkeyrangewillbeadjustedtoaccommodatethenewrange.Ifthenewkey rangecompletelyoverlapsanexistingkeyrange,theoriginalkeyrangewillbereplaced. Rename Callupthepagethatenablesyoutochangethenameofthecurrentkeymap. Save Starttheprocessofsavingthecurrentkeymap. Delete Deletethecurrentkeymapfrommemory.FactoryROMkeymapscannotbedeleted.

Special Double Button Presses in the Keymap Editor

SupposeyouhaveasamplewhoserootkeyisC4,andyouwanttoassignittoA0,becauseyou dontexpecttoplayitoften.Ifyouwantittoplaybackwithouttransposition,youllhaveto adjusttheCoarseTuneparameter.CalculatingtherightvalueforCoarseTunecangettediousif youreassigningalargenumberofsamples.Fortunately,theresashortcut. 1. Assignasampleroottoakeyrange,eitherusingtheLo,Hi,andSampleparametersor usingtheAssignsoftbutton. 2. HighlightthevalueoftheCoarseTuneparameter. 3. PressthePlus/Minusbuttonsatthesametime.ThevalueofCoarseTunechanges automatically.Ifthesampleisassignedtoonenote,thePC3setsCoarseTunesothatthe noteplaysthesamplewithouttransposition.Ifthesampleisassignedtoarangeofnotes, thePC3setsCoarseTunesothatthemiddlenoteoftherangeplaysthesamplewithout transposition.

14-6

Keymap and Sample Editing Building a Keymap

Building a Keymap
Readbelowfordetaileddirectionsonmanuallycreatingandeditingakeymap.(Seethepreview functiononpage 1117forawaytoautomaticallycreateaprogramandkeymap.)Tobuilda keymap,firstgototheProgrammodemainpage(thiscanbedonebyrepeatedlypressingthe Exitbutton.)FromtheProgrammodemainpage,usethealphanumericpadtoselectprogram 999DefaultProgram.NextpresstheEditbuttontoentertheProgramEditor.Pressthe KEYMAPsoftbutton,andtheKEYMAPpagewillappear.TheKeymapparameterwillbe automaticallyselected.Press999andEnteronthealphanumericpadtoassignthekeymap999 Silence.Thisisntabsolutelynecessary,butitmakesiteasiertorecognizethekeyrangesthat havesamplesassignedtothemwhenyoustartassigningsamples.Youcanactuallychooseany programorkeymapyouwanttostartwith,butbychoosingthese,youarestartingwitha blankslate. WiththeKeymapparameterstillselected,presstheEditbutton,andyoullentertheKeymap Editor.TheKeyRangeparameterwillbeautomaticallyselected,andyouseeitsvalues:C 0to G 10(theentireMIDIkeyboardrange).TheSampleparameterwillhaveavalueof 999 SilenceC 4. Nowyourereadytostartassigningsamplestokeyrangeswithinthekeymap.Wellassume thatyouareusingsampleswithrootsatC1,C2,C3,etc.(mostoftheROMsamplesaresetup thisway)andthatyouplantoassignaroottoeachoctave.Tobegin,presstheAssignsoft button.Thedisplaywillpromptyoutoselectasample.UsetheAlphaWheeltoscrolltooneof thesamples,ortypeitsIDonthealphanumericpadandpressEnter.Whenyouvefoundthe sampleyouwanttouse,presstheOKsoftbutton.ThedisplaywillsayStrikelowkey TriggerA0(MIDInotenumber21,thelowestAonastandard88notekeyboard).Thedisplay willchangetosayStrikeHighKeyNowtriggerF1(MIDInotenumber29).Thedisplaywill returntotheKeymapeditorpage.TheKeyRangeparameterwillshowA0F1,andtheSample parameterwillshowthesampleyouselectedwhenyoustartedtherangeassignment. EachsampleinakeyrangeisautomaticallytransposedbasedoneachsamplesRootKey parametersothatitplaysatthecorrectpitchonthekeyboardrelativetoitsrootkey(seeEditing Samples on page 149fordetailsontheRootKeyparameter.)Otherkeyswithinthekeyrange transposethesamplechromaticallyrelativetotherootkey.Automatictranspositionbasedon eachsamplesRootKeyisimportantifyouwantthesampletoplayintunewithotherPC3 programsorotherinstruments.ThePC3makesthiseasybecauseeachROMsamplehasthe correctRootKeysettings.GenerallyyoushouldsetakeyrangesothatthesamplesRootKey (displayedattheendofthesamplename)isinthemiddleoftherange.Ifyousetakeyrange thatdoesnotcoverthesamplesRootKey,thesamplewillhavetoautomaticallytransposeby manysemitones,andwilllikelynotsoundcorrect.Samplesarealsolimitedtoanoctaveof upwardtranspositionfromthesamplesoriginalpitch.Ifyousetakeyrangetoohighbasedon theRootKey,somesamplesmaynotbeabletotransposeupwardfarenoughtoplayintune, andmanykeysmayplaythesamenote(thehighestnotethatthesamplecanbetransposedto.) AutomatictranspositionrelativetotherootkeycanbeoffsetusingtheCoarseTuneandFine TuneparametersontheEditKeymappage,(seeCoarseTuneandFineTune on page 144.) Continuingwiththeexample,presstheAssignsoftbuttonagain.Selectanothersamplerootat theprompt,andpresstheOKsoftbutton.NowtriggerF#1fortheLowKeyprompt,andF2for theHighKeyprompt.Atthispointyouvedefinedtwokeyranges,thefirstfromA0toF1,and thesecondfromF#1toF2.Youcanrepeattheprocessasmanytimesasyouwant,creatinga newkeyrangeeachtime. Onceyouhavesamplesassigned,youmayneedtotransposethemsothattheyplaybackatthe correctpitchwithintherangeyouhavechosen.Todothis,highlighttheKeyRangeparameter, scrolltotherangeyouneed,thenhighlighttheCoarseTuneparameter.AdjustCoarseTuneto bringthesampletotheproperpitchwithinthatkeyrange.ThenscrollbackuptotheKeyRange parameter,selectthenextrange,andcontinueasneeded.

14-7

Keymap and Sample Editing Building a Keymap

Heresafairlyimportantpointthatmayormaynotaffectyourkeymapconstruction.Suppose youwanttobuildakeymapthatusesthesamesampleinseveraladjacentkeyranges,andyou plantoaddabitofdetuningtothesamplesineachrange.Youmightthinkthatyoucouldbuild thekeymapfirst,thengointotheSampleEditorandtweakthesamplesettingsofeachkeyrange whenthekeymapisfinished.Yes,but SupposeyouusedthetechniquewedescribedabovetoassignasamplewhoserootwasC 4toa keyrangefromA3toE4.ThenyouassignedthesamesampletoakeyrangefromF4toB 4. YoumightbesurprisedtofindthatwhenyoufinishedtheF4B4keyrangeandthe Keymapeditorpagereappeared,thecurrentkeyrangewouldnotbeF4toB4,butA3toB4! ThisisbecausethePC3automaticallymergesadjacentkeyrangesthatareidentical(thisisdone tosavememory).Therefore,someparametermustbedifferentineachadjacentkeyrangeyou createifyouwanttobuildkeymapsusingthetechniquewejustdescribed.Soifyouwanttouse thesamesamplesinadjacentkeyrangeswith,forexample,minorpitchorvolumemodification, youshouldmakethosechangestothecurrentsampleontheKeymapeditorpagebefore assigningthenextrange.

14-8

Keymap and Sample Editing Editing Samples

Editing Samples
ToentertheSampleEditor,firstselecttheprogramyouwishtoeditinProgrammode.Withthe programselected,presstheEditbuttontoentertheProgramEditor.Intheprogrameditorthe KEYMAPpagewillbeselected(ifnotpresstheKEYMAPsoftbutton.)WiththeKeyMap parameterselectedontheKEYMAPpage,presstheEditbuttonagaintoentertheKeymap Editor.OntheEditKeymappage,selecttheKeyRangeparameterandusetheAlphaWheelor/ +buttonstochooseoneoftheavailablekeyranges(ifthereismorethanonekeyrange.)Youcan edittheexistingsampleofakeyrange,orchooseanewsampleforthekeyrangeandeditthat. WhentheKeymapparameterisselectedyoucanholdtheEnterbuttonandtriggernotesto selectdifferentkeyranges. Ifyouwanttoselectadifferentsample,usethecursorbuttonstoselecttheSampleparameter. UsetheAlphaWheeltoselectasample.PresstheEditbuttononcemore,andyoullenterthe SampleEditor.Thesamplewillplaythroughtheeffectsofthecurrentprogram.Thenameof stereosamplesendwithanS.Touseastereosample,theStereoparametermustbesettoOnin theProgramEditor,andtwokeymapsmustbeselected,seeTheKEYMAPPage on page 614for details. TherearetwosampleeditingpagesMISC(Miscellaneous)andTRIM.Thesoftbuttonsfor thesepagesarevisiblewhenyouentertheSampleEditor.Youcantriggernotesatanytime whileyoureediting,tohearyourchangesasyoumakethem.Whenyouhavefinishedediting yoursampleorsamples,seethepreviewfunctiononpage 1117forawaytoautomatically createaprogramandkeymapusingasampleorgroupofsampleroots.

The Miscellaneous (MISC) Page

OntheMISCpage,youllsetseveralparametersthataffectthebehaviorofthecurrentsample. Theseparametersaffecttheentiresample.Therightsideofthetoplinedisplaystheroot numberandRootKeyofthesample.Forstereosamples,LorRisdisplayedaftertheRoot# parametertoindicatethatyouareviewingparametersfortheleftorrightchannelofthesample. UsetheChan/Layerbuttonstomovebetweenchannelsofstereosamples.Althoughyoucan editparametersfortheleftandrightchannelsofasample,bothchannelscanonlybeheardif theStereoparameterissettoOnintheProgramEditor,andthesamekeymapisselectedforthe Keymap1andKeymap2parametersintheProgramEditor.IftheStereoparameterissettoOffin theProgramEditor,onlytheleftchannelofstereosampleswillbeheard(inmono.)Ifthe sampleispartofagroupofsampleroots,youcanalsousetheChan/Layerbuttonstoscroll througheachsampleinthegroup.ArepresentativeMISCpageisshownbelow:

Parameter Root Key Number Pitch Adjust

Range of Values C -1 to G 9 Variable (depends on sample rate)

14-9

Keymap and Sample Editing Editing Samples

Parameter Volume Adjust Alternative Volume Adjust Decay Rate Release Rate Loop Switch Playback Mode Alternative Sample Sense Ignore Release

Range of Values -64.0 to 63.5 dB -64.0 to 63.5 dB 0 to 5000 dB per second 0 to 5000 dB per second Off, On Normal, Reverse, Bidirectional Normal, Reverse Off, On

Root Key Therootkeyrepresentsthekeyboardkeyatwhichthesamplewillplaybackwithout transposition(thatis,atthesamepitchasthepitchoftheoriginalsample).Usethe/+buttonsor AlphaWheeltoselectaRootKeynote,orusethealphanumericpadfollowedbytheEnter buttontoenteraRootKeybyMIDInotenumber. Pitch Adjust Usethisparametertochangethepitchofthesamplerelativetothekeyfromwhichitsplayed. Settingavalueof100cts,forexample,willcausethesampletoplaybackonesemitonehigher thannormal.Thisparameterishandyforfinetuningsamplestoeachotheriftheyreslightlyout oftune. Volume Adjust Uniformlyboostorcuttheamplitudeoftheentiresample. Alternative Start Volume Adjust (AltVolAdjust) Thisparametersetstheamplitudeofthesamplewhenthealternativestartisused.Seepage 616 foradiscussionofAltSwitch. Decay Rate Thisparameterdefineshowlongthesampletakestodecay(fade)tozeroamplitude(silence). DecayRatetakeseffectintheloopportionofthesample,afteralltheattackstagesofthe amplitudeenvelopearecomplete.DecayRateaffectseachsampleindividually,andisineffect onlywhentheamplitudeenvelopefortheprogram(theModeparameterontheAMPENVpage intheProgramEditor)issettoNatural.IfModeisUser,thesettingsontheAMPENVpage overridethesettingforDecayRate. Release Rate Thereleaseratedetermineshowlongthesamplewilltaketodecaytozeroamplitudewhenthe notetriggerisreleased.Thehigherthevalue,thefasterthereleaserate.Thisreleaseaffectseach sampleindividually,andisineffectonlywhentheamplitudeenvelopefortheprogram(the ModeparameterontheAMPENVpageintheProgramEditor)issettoNatural.Inthiscase,the releasebeginsassoonasthenoteisreleased.IfModeisUser,thesettingsontheAMPENVpage overridethesettingforReleaseRate. Tocreateanextendedsampleloopthatwillplaydataafterthesampleslooponkeyup,setthe AlternativeStartsamplepointerafterthesampleendpointer,thensetarelativelylowvaluefor thereleaserate.

14-10

Keymap and Sample Editing Editing Samples

Loop Switch Thisparameteractivatesordeactivatestheloopingofthecurrentlyselectedsample.Whensetto On,thesamplewillloopaccordingtothesettingsontheTRIMpage.WhensettoOff,the samplewillplaythroughtoitsEndpointandstop. Playback Mode (Playback) Thisparameterletsyoumodifythedirectioninwhichthesampleisplayed.Setittoavalueof ReverseifyouwantthesampletoplayfromitsEnd(E)pointtoitsStart(S)point.Choosea valueofBidirectionaltocausethesampletoplayfromStarttoEnd,thenreversedirectionand playagainfromEndtoLoopandback,repeatinguntilthenotetriggerisreleased(thisworks onlywhentheLoopSwitchparameterissettoOn). Alternative Sample Sense (AltSense) Thisprovidesaconvenientwaytoactivatethealternativestartofasample.WhensettoNormal, thealternativestartwillbeusedwhentheAltSwitchcontrolisOn(thisissetontheKEYMAP page),orwhenthecontrolsourceassignedtoitisaboveitsmidpoint.WhensettoReverse,the alternativestartwillbeusedwhentheAltSwitchcontrolisOff,orwhenthecontrolsource assignedtoitisbelowitsmidpoint. Ignore Release (IgnRelease) WhensettoavalueofOff,thesamplewillreleasenormallywhenthenotetriggerisreleased. WhensettoOn,thenotewillnotrelease,evenwhenthenotetriggerisreleased.Thissetting shouldbeusedonlywithsamplesthatnormallydecaytosilence;nondecayingsampleswill playforeveratthissetting.ThisparameterisequivalenttotheIgnReleaseparameteronthe LAYERpage,butaffectsonlythecurrentlyselectedsample. SampleRate and NumSamples Theseparameterscannotbeedited,butshowthesamplessamplerateandthesampleslength insamples.Samplesthatarelongerthan1millionsamplesaredisplayeda1Ms. The Soft Buttons on the MISC Page
Rename

Callupthepagethatenablesyoutochangethenameofthecurrentsample.
Save

Starttheprocessofsavingthecurrentsample.
Delete

Starttheprocessofdeletingthecurrentsample.Ifthecurrentsamplehasbeensavedtoauser ID#(above1024,)thisdeletesthesamplesettingsatthatID#(thesampleaudiodatacannotbe deletedandremainsinthefactoryROMunderthesamplesoriginalfactoryID#.)Ifthecurrent samplehasbeensavedtoafactoryROMID#(11024,)thisrestoresthefactorydefaultsettings andaudiodataforthatsampleID#.

14-11

Keymap and Sample Editing Editing Samples

The TRIM Page

TheTRIMpageletsyousettheStart,AlternativeStart,Loop,andEndpointsofthecurrent sample.ThetoplineindicatestheZoomandGainsettings.ThisGainsettingdoesntaffectthe amplitudeofthesample,justtheviewinthedisplay.Therightsideofthetoplinedisplaysthe rootnumberofthesample.Ifthesampleispartofagroupofsampleroots,youcanusethe Chan/Layerbuttonstoscrollthrougheachsampleinthegroup.

ThefourparametersonthispageareStart(S),AlternativeStart(A),Loop(L),andEnd(E). Selectingtheseparametersandadjustingtheirvaluesenablesyoutomodifyhowthesample playsbackwhennotesaretriggered.Eachoftheseparameterpointsareexpressedinindividual samples.Forexample,aonesecondsampleatasamplerateof44,100Hzwouldhave44,100 valuesavailabletoadjustforeachoftheseparameters. Thereisaverticallineinthecenterofthedisplayindicatingtheplacementofthecurrent parameterinthesamplewaveform.Thesamplewaveformwillmoverelativetothelinewhen eachparameterisselectedoradjusted.Thelineremainsinthecenterofthedisplay,andthe waveformshiftstoindicatethenewpositionofthepoint.Eachparametercanbeadjustedwith the/+buttons,theAlphaWheel,orthealphanumericbuttonpadfollowedbytheEnterbutton. TheStart(S)pointdeterminesthebeginningofthecurrentsample.Youcantruncatethe beginningofthesamplebyincreasingthevalueoftheStart(S)parameter.Youmightdothisto removesilenceatthebeginningofasample,ortoremovesomeoralloftheattack.Youcant decreasetheStartpointofsamplesbelowzero. TheAlternativeStart(A)parameterletsyousetasecond,optionalstartorendpointforthe currentsample.TheAlternativeStartwillbeusedwhentheAltSwitchparameteronthe KEYMAPpageissettoOn,orwhenitssettoaspecificcontrolsourceandthatcontrolsourceis generatingavalueofmorethan+.5.(Forexample,ifyouassignMWheelasthecontrolsource fortheAltSwitchparameter,theAlternativeStartwillbeusedwhentheModWheelor whatevercontrolsourceyouhavesettosendMWheelisaboveitshalfwaypoint.)The AlternativeStartcanbesetbefore,after,oratthesamepointastheStartorEnd. IfyousettheAlternativeStartaftertheEnd,youcanextendtheplayofloopedsamples. Normally,loopedsampleswillplaythroughtotheEnd,thenwillloopbacktotheLooppoint, andcontinueloopinglikethisuntilthenoteisreleased,whentheygointotheirnormalrelease. IftheAlternativeStartissetaftertheEnd,loopedsampleswillloopinthesamewaywhilenotes aresustained.Assoonasyoureleasethenotes,however,thesampleswillplaythroughtothe AlternativeStartpointbeforegoingintorelease. TheLoop(L)parametersetsthebeginningoftheloopedportionofthecurrentsample.The LoopcanbesetatanypointbeforetheEnd,includingbeforetheStartandAlternativeStart.If youtrytomoveitaftertheEnd,theEndwillmovewithit.Whenyouresettingaloopsegment forasample,youshouldadjustboththeLoopandEndparameterssothatthetwoendsofthe waveformwouldmeet(orcomeascloseaspossible)whentheloopoccurs.Youcandothis visuallybyzoominginclosetothewaveform(untilitbecomesasingleline,)thenadjustingthe LoopandEndparametersofthewaveformuntilbothendsarethesamedistanceaboveorbelow

14-12

Keymap and Sample Editing Editing Samples

thezeropointofthedisplay(thehorizontallineinthemiddleofthewaveformdisplay.)Though adjustingthesepointsvisuallyishelpful,alwayslistentothesampleandmakethefinalsettings basedonwhatsoundsbest.Youllnoticeanaudibleclickinyoursampleloopiftheendsofthe waveformdonotmeetwheretheloopoccurs.Thecloseryoucangetthetwoendsofthe waveform,thebetterthesoundqualityofyourloopwillbe.UsingzerocrossingsfortheLoop andEndparametersmayalsohelpreduceclicksatthelooppoint,seeZeroandZero+belowfor details. TheEnd(E)parametersetsthepointatwhichthecurrentsamplewillstopplayback.Typically youllusethisparametertotrimunwantedsilenceofftheendofasample,althoughyoucanuse ittoshortenasampleasmuchasyouwant. NoteOnSavingSamples:Trimmedportionsofasamplearenotsaved.Trimmedportionsbeforethe Start(S),orAlternativeStart(A)points(whicheverhasalowervalue)willbelostuponsaving,and whicheverparameterhadalowervaluewillhaveavalueofzerothenexttimeitisloaded(valuesforall othersamplepointparameterswillbeadjustedrelatively.)TrimmedportionsaftertheAlternativeStart (A)orEnd(E)points(whicheverhasahighervalue)willbelostuponsaving.Ifyouwishtosaveacopyof theoriginaluntrimmedsample,savethetrimmedversionunderadifferentID#.Ifyousaveatrimmed sampleatitsoriginalID#,youcanalwaysrestoretheoriginalversionbydeletingthemodifiedversion thatyousaved.Todeleteasample,seeDelete on page 1411,orOBJECT on page 1112,theDelete function. Zoom- and Zoom+ Thesebuttonsincreaseordecreasetheresolutionofthewaveformdisplay,enablingyoutoseea largerorsmallersegmentofthewaveformofthecurrentlyselectedsample.Thetoplineofthe displayindicatesthezoompositionintermsofafractionforexample,1/256whichindicates thenumberofindividualsampleelementsrepresentedbyeachdisplaypixel.Avalueof1/256 meansthateachpixelrepresents256individualsampleelements.Themaximumzoomsetting of1showsyouaverysmallsegmentofthesample.Theminimumsettingof1/16384showsyou thelargestpossiblesegmentofthesample.EachpressofaZoomsoftbuttonincreasesor decreasesthezoombyafactorof4. Gain- and Gain+ Thesebuttonsincreaseordecreasethemagnificationofthecurrentlydisplayedsample waveform,enablingyoutoseethewaveformingreaterorlesserdetail.Attheleftofthedisplay, youllseethemagnificationsetting,whichisexpressedindBunits.Youcanadjustthe magnificationfrom48dB(maximummagnification)to 0 dB.Thisdoesntaffecttheactual amplitudeofthesample,onlythemagnificationofitsdisplay. ThesimplestwaytothinkoftheZoomandGainbuttonsistorememberthattheZoombuttons controltheleft/rightmagnificationofthewaveform,whiletheGainbuttonscontroltheup/ downmagnification.Neitherbuttonhasanyaffectonthesoundofthesample.Youlloftenuse theZoomandGainsoftbuttonstogethertofocusinonaparticularsamplesegment,then magnifyittoseeitinclosedetail. Forexample,youmightwanttozoomouttoviewanentiresamplewaveform,todecidewhich segmentyouwanttoedit.Youcouldthenzoomintofocusonaparticularsegment.Onceyouve zoomedin,youmaywanttoboosttheGaintoenableyoutosetanewStart(S)pointwith greaterprecision,orensurethatyougetasmoothlooptransition. Zero- and Zero+ PressingtheZeroorZero+buttonswillsearchleftorrightrespectivelyforthesamplesnext zerocrossing.Azerocrossingisapointwherethesamplewaveformisneitherpositiveor negative(crossingthehorizontallineinthemiddleofthewaveformdisplay.)Thecurrently selectedparameter(Start(S),AlternativeStart(A),Loop(L),orEnd(E))willbesettothispoint inthesample.Settingtheseparameterstozerocrossingscanhelpminimizeclicksatthestart, end,orlooppointofasample.Itsbesttohaveeachofthesepointssetfirstbyadjustingeach parameterandlisteningtothesample,thenifneededsearchforanearbyzerocrossing.

14-13

Keymap and Sample Editing Editing Samples

14-14

Tutorial: Song Mode

Chapter 15 Tutorial: Song Mode

InSongmode,youcanusethePC3ssequencertorecordsongsusingmultipleinstrument sounds.Youcaneasilychangeyoursongstempo,fixmistakes,andadjustthevolumeofeach instrument. Thefollowingguideincludesinstructionstochoosespecificinstrumentsoundsandtrack numbers,simplyasexamples.Whenyouarereadytomakeyourownsong,followthesame methodsandchooseanyinstrumentandtrackselectionthatyouwant. Thestepsbelowexplainthesimplestwaytorecord,inalinear,trackbytrackfashion.Thereare manymethodsforrecordingsongs,andtherearerecordingoptionsthatyoumaywishto changeonceyoubecomefamiliarwiththeprocess.SeetheSongmodechapterformoreoptions. Recording Overview Inthisguideyouwillbeinstructedtorecordintotracksinasong.Atrackislikealayerinasong containingtherecordedpartforoneinstrumentprogram.Youcanrecordupto16tracks,and eachcanbeseparatelyeditedoradjustedinvolumelevel(withmanyotheroptionsavailableas well).
About MIDI

InSongmodethePC3functionsasaMIDIsequencer.MIDI(MusicalInstrumentDigital Interface)isastandardizedsystemthatallowsdifferentelectronicinstrumentstoworktogether, amongothermusicaluses.AMIDIsequencerdoesntrecordthesoundofyourperformance, justmessagesthatcausetheinstrumenttoplaynotes.Whenyouplaybackasong(a.k.a.aMIDI sequence)inSongmode,thePC3triggerseachofthenotesthatyouhaverecorded,sortoflikea playerpiano.MIDIisveryusefulforrecordingsongswithelectronicinstrumentssuchasthe PC3,becauseyoucaneasilymakechangestorecordedsequences.Forexample,youcanchange individualnotes,transposeparts,orchangetheinstrumentationoftracksthathavealready beenrecorded.SinceMIDIsequencesonlyplaybackmessagesthattriggernotes,ifyoustart recordingorplayingbackfromthemiddleofyoursong,youwillnotheartheresultofnotes beforethatpoint(suchasnotessustainingfromthepreviousbar.)Inthesecases,makesureto startplaybackorrecordingbeforethenotesthatyouwanttohear.
About The Time Position Format

Inthisguideyouwillbeinstructedtoselectspecifictimepositionsinasong.InthePC3s sequencer,timepositionsaremeasuredfromthebeginningofthesonginBars,Beats,andTicks. Dependentonthetimesignature,theseunitsofmeasurementscanhavedifferentvalues.In theseexampleswewillbeusinga4/4timesignatureinwhichaBarcontains4beats,andabeat contains960ticks(from0to959,seebelowformoreaboutticks.)TheSongmodeMAINpage displayssongtimeintheLocatfieldasBarsandBeats,forexampleaLocatpositionof1:3 wouldcorrespondtoBar1,Beat3.TheSongmodeBigTimepagedisplayssongtimeinlarge numbersonthetophalfofthescreenasBars,Beats,andTicks.ForexampleaBigTimeposition of1:3:480wouldcorrespondtoBar1,Beat3,Tick480(in4/4Tick480wouldbethesecond eighthnoteofthebeat.)

15-1

Tutorial: Song Mode

Barsandbeatsshouldbefamiliartermsformusicians,butticksareatermspecifictoMIDI sequencers.Ticksprovidefineresolutionwhenrecordingandeditingsequences.Forexample,if youweretoplayalongwiththesequencersmetronometorecordonenoteoneachbeatofabar, uponreviewingthesequenceyouwouldmostlikelyfindthateachnotewasnotrecorded exactlyoneachbeat,butthateachwasrecordedadifferentsmallnumberofticksawayfromthe beats.(SeePart7,TheEventList,belowforawaytoviewnotetimeposition.)Ticksallowforthe sequencertorecordthesetinydifferencesintiming,thusretainingtheoriginaltimingnuances oftheperformance.Whenlocatingnotevaluessmallerthan1beat,dividethenumberofticksin abeatbytheappropriatenumber(aquarternoteisalwaysworth960ticks,nomatterthetime signature.)Forexample,ina4/4timesignaturethereare960ticksinabeat(sinceabeatisworth aquarternotein4/4.)Tofindthevalueofan8thnote,divide960by2,sincetherearetwo8th notesinaquarternote.Divide960by4for16thnotes,by6for16thnotetriplets,by8for32nd notes,andsoon.Youcanalsouserecordquantizationwhichautomaticallymovesrecorded notestothenearestsettimedivision,suchas8thor16thnotes.(SeePart7,Quantizing,belowfor details.)

Part 1: Assign Instruments To Tracks

1. Press the Exit button until you reach the ProgramMode page. Next, press the Song mode button, located with the mode buttons to the left of the display. This will bring you to the Song mode MAIN page (see below.) Step2(below)

Step1(above)

2. 3.

On the Song mode MAIN page choose 0*New Song* in the CurSng field (if not already selected). This loads an empty song file (see above.) Use the Chan/Zone buttons (to the left of the display) to Set the RecTrk parameter to 1. This sets the track that you will be recording to (see below.)

4.

Use the cursor buttons to navigate to the Prog field and choose a program with the plus/minus buttons, alpha wheel, or by entering the desired program number with the alphanumeric pad. This sets the instrument sound for the current track. For example, choose program 1 Standard Grand to

15-2

Tutorial: Song Mode

make the first track contain the piano part for this song (see below.) You can do this quickly by entering 1 on the alphanumeric pad and pressing Enter.

Part 2: Set The Tempo

Forthisexample,wewillleavethesongatitsdefaulttimesignature,4/4(seeChapter 12,Song ModeandtheSongEditorfordetailsonsettingthetimesignature.)Followthestepsbelowtoseta tempoforyoursong.Itiseasiesttochooseyourtempobeforerecordinganytracks,butthe tempocanbeadjustedafterrecordingaswell(seeChapter 12,SongModeandtheSongEditorfor detailsonchangingthetempoafterrecording.) 1. On the Song mode MAIN page, use the cursor buttons to navigate to the Tempo field and enter a tempo. Entering the tempo with the alphanumeric pad is the easiest method if you know your desired tempo. The plus/minus buttons and alpha wheel are useful for making smaller adjustments. Tempo is set in beats per minute (BPM.) For this example, lets set a medium tempo of 100 BPM. In the Tempo field use the alphanumeric pad to enter 100 and press Enter (see below.)

Note:YoucanalsosetthetempousingtheTapTempofeature(simultaneouslypresstheleftandright cursorbuttons),seeTEMPO on page 1110fordetails.

15-3

Tutorial: Song Mode

2.

To hear the metronome play your tempo, use the right more button to find and then press the BIG soft button. This brings you to the Song:Big Time page. On the Song:Big Time page, set the Metron parameter to Always (see below.) Make sure the PC3s main volume is set at a moderate level, then press the Play/Pause button to hear the metronome play the selected tempo.

3.

Press the BIG soft button again to return to the Song mode MAIN page (the MAIN soft button also works for this, but using the BIG soft button is quicker.) Now you can adjust the Tempo parameter and press the Play/Pause button to hear the metronome play the tempo. For this example we will leave our previous Tempo setting of 100.0. Once you are happy with the tempo, press the BIG soft button to return to the Song:Big Time page. Set the Metron parameter back to Rec so that you will only hear the metronome during recording (see below.) When finished, press the BIG soft button again to return to the Song mode MAIN page.

4.

Part 3: Record Your First Track, Save The Song

1. On the Song mode MAIN page, usetheChan/Zonebuttons(totheleftofthedisplay)to choosethetrackyouwishtorecordto.ThetracknumberisdisplayedintheRecTrkfield (seebelow.)Lets begin by recording to track 1, to which we have assigned a piano program.

15-4

Tutorial: Song Mode

2.

Press the Record button located on the front panel. This prepares the PC3 for recording on the current RecTrk. The Record button lights, and on the Song mode MAIN page the right of the top line will display REC. READY, which means that the sequencer will record when the Play/Pause button is pressed (see below.)

3.

Press the Play/Pause button located on the front panel. The metronome will play for 1 bar and then recording will begin (see Chapter 12,SongModeandtheSongEditorfordetailsonsetting metronomecountoffoptions.) Play your part for the current track, when finished, press the Stop button on the front panel to stop recording. The Save Changes screen will be displayed where you can retry the last performance of recording, save the song with the last recorded performance, or compare your new performance with the last saved version of the song. For this example we will name the song My Song under ID# 1025. See below for an explanation of this page:

4.

Soft Button Functions On the Save Changes Page: ThePlyNewsoftbuttonallowsyoutoplaythesongwithyourlatestrecordedperformance.You willlikelywanttohearthisfirst. PressingPlyOldwillplaythecurrentsong,minustheperformancethatyoujustrecorded.You cantogglebetweenPlayOldandPlayNewwithoutrestartingthesongbypressingeither buttonwhilethesongisplaying.Thisisusefultocheckifyourlastperformancewasbetteror worsethanwhatwaspreviouslysaved(ifanythingwaspreviouslysaved.) TheLocatefieldallowsyouchooseastarttimefortheoldornewplayback.Thisisusefulwhen youjustwanttohearacertainpartofthesongwithoutlisteningtothewholething.ThePlaying fielddisplayswhethertoNEWorOLDdataisplaying. StophaltstheplaybackofeithertheOldortheNewversionofthesongyouarecurrently auditioning.ThisalsoresetsthesongsstartlocationtoeitherthedefaultBar1,Beat1value,or towhateverlocationyoudefinedintheLocatefield.

15-5

Tutorial: Song Mode

PressingRetryrestartsrecordingfromthesamepointyoulaststartedrecordingfrom. Yessavesthesongwiththeperformanceyoujustrecorded.Whateverwasplayedbackwhen youpressedPlayNewwillbetheversionofthesongsavedwhenyoupressYes.Thesaveas dialogwillbedisplayed:

UsetheAlphaWheel,/+buttons,orAlphanumericPadtochooseafreeID#locationtosavethe song,orchooseausedID#locationtooverwriteapreviouslysavedsongwithyournewversion. For this example we will save the song under ID# 1025 (seeabove.) Whenoverwritingasongfile,the saveasdialogdisplaysReplacefollowedbythenameofthefilebeingreplaced.PressSave tosavethesongwiththecurrentname,orCanceltoreturntothepreviousscreen. PressRenameifyouwouldliketochangethesongsname.Thisbringsyoutothe SongMode:namepage.For this example we will rename the song My Song (seebelow.)Formore detailedinstructions,seetheEditingConventionschapter,SavingandNamingsection.

IfyoudecidenottosaveorrenameontheSong:SaveChangespage,pressingtheNosoftbutton returnsyoutotheSongmodepageinwhichyouwerelastrecording.Changestothecurrent songarenotsaved,thoughthesequencerwillrememberchangestocertainsettingsfromthe MAINandBIGpages.ThesesettingsareTempo,Merge/EraseMode,Locate,trackmutestatus, TimeIn,TimeOut,SongEnd,Loop,Recmode,andMetron.Topermanentlysavethesechanges withthesong,makesuretochooseSavefromthesoftbuttonmenubeforepoweringoffor loadinganewsong.Alternatively,youwillbepromptedtosavethesechangesuponloadinga newsongiftheMAINpagesettingswerechangedwhilerecordingorwithrecordingarmed,or ifanyoftheBIGpagesettingswerechanged. About ID#s Whensaving,youmustchooseanID#.AnID#givesyouawaytolocateasongasidefromits name(youcanstoreupto2,560uniqueID#sforeachobjecttype:songs,setups,programs,etc., thoughmanyID#sarealreadyusedforfactoryROMobjects.)ID#salsoallowyoutosavesongs withthesamenameunderdifferentID#s,andrenamethematalatertimeifdesired.Choosean unusedID#tosaveanewsong.ThenextavailableunusedID#isautomaticallyselectedwhen

15-6

Tutorial: Song Mode

editingafactoryROMsong.Wheneditingasongthathasbeenstoredinusermemory(any originallyunusedID#,)theeditedsongsID#isautomaticallyselected.Thisassumesthatyou wishtoreplacetheexistingsong,butyoucanchooseanotherID#ifdesiredtosaveanewcopy. ChooseausedID#toreplaceanexistingsavedsong.IfyoureplaceafactoryROMsong,youcan reverttotheoriginalsongbydeletingthesongusingtheSongModeDelete softbutton.

Part 4: Record Additional Tracks

Whenyouarehappywithyourfirsttrackandyouhavesavedyoursongsofar,moveonto addingotherinstrumentpartsonothertracks.Youcanrecordupto16tracks. 1. On the Song mode MAIN page, usetheChan/Zonebuttons(totheleftofthedisplay)toSet theRecTrkparametertoanunusedtracknumber(forexample,track2.)

2.

Set the instrument sound for the current track. Use the cursor buttons to navigate to the Prog field and choose a program with the plus/minus buttons, alpha wheel, or by entering the desired program number with the alphanumeric pad. Thissetstheinstrumentsoundforthecurrenttrack.For example, choose program 105 P-Bass to make the next track contain the bass part for this song (see below.) This would be useful to play a bass part that matches the root notes of your left hand piano part from track 1.

3.

Follow the same steps in Part 3 above (starting on step 2) to start and stop recording, and review, save or discard your performance. When saving the song with your new tracks recorded, press the Save soft button on the SongMode:save as page in order to replace the currently saved song with your new version. Repeat the steps above with different track and program numbers to add additional instrument parts to your song.

4.

15-7

Tutorial: Song Mode

Part 5: Fixing Mistakes

ForeachtrackinSongmode,youcanfixmistakesinyourperformancewithoutrerecordingthe entireperformance.Herewewilldescribethemethodthatiseasiestforfixingspecificpassages inatrack.(Forawaytofixsinglenotes,seeSongEditor:TheEVENTPage on page 1231in Chapter 12,SongModeandtheSongEditor.) 1. On the Song mode MAIN page, usetheChan/Zonebuttons(totheleftofthedisplay)toSet theRecTrkparametertothetrackthatyouwanttofix.Forexample,letsfixtrack1(see below.)

2.

Set the Mode parameter to Erase (see below.) This causes previously recorded notes to be erased when a track is being recorded into.

3. 4.

Press the BIG soft button to go to the Big Time page. On the Big Time page, set the RecMode parameter to PunchIn. This causes recording to only take place between the times set in the Time In and Time Out fields.

15-8

Tutorial: Song Mode

5.

Set times for the Time In and Time Out fields to select the time to fix. For this example we will fix bar 3 (see below.)

Note:Ifyouneedtofixasectionwhichisntexactlywithinonebaroranevendivisionofbeats, usethefollowingmethodtofindyourTime In and Time Out points:Usethebigtimelocation numbersonthetopofthepagetofindatimewherethefirstnotesplayed(whenyoupressplay/ pause)arethenotesthatyouwishtoreplace.EnterthislocationintheTimeInfield.Next,use thebigtimelocationnumbersonthetopofthepagetofindatimewherethefirstnotesplayed (whenyoupressplay/pause)arethefirstnotesthatyouwishtokeepafterthenotesthatyou wishtoreplace.EnterthislocationintheTimeOutfield. 6. Use the big time location numbers on the top of the page and set a time before the area you want to replace. This will be where you start playback of the song in order to re-record the desired section. Leave enough time (usually a bar or two) so that you will have time to prepare before the section you are replacing plays. For this example we will set our start time to 1 :1 :0, because it is two bars before bar 3 (see below.)

7.

Press the Record button, then the Play/Pause button located on the front panel. Play your new part when the song reaches the part you want to replace. This technique is called punching in. You will often get more natural sounding results if you play along with the song before the part that you are fixing. Doing this allows you to match your performance style (loudness, timing, phrasing) with what has already been recorded. Because of your settings in steps 4, 5 and 6, no extra notes will be recorded outside of the time that you want to replace. Press the Stop button when you are done. You will be able to review and save your changes just as in Step 4 of Part 3 (see above.) Remember to set the RecMode parameter back to Linear when you are done if you wish to record in the standard way again (as in Part 3, above.) This is done on the Big Time page (see below.)

8. 9.

15-9

Tutorial: Song Mode

Part 6: Adjusting The Volume Of Each Instrument

Adjustthevolumeofaninstrumentbyadjustingthevolumeofthetrackcontainingthat instrumentprogram.Whileyoursongisplaying,youcanusetheVolparameterontheSong modeMAINpagetoadjustthevolumeforthetrackcurrentlysetintheRecTrkparameter.To permanentlystoreyourvolumesettingswiththesong,youmuststoreaninitialvolumeforeach track.Letsusethesongwecreatedinthepartsaboveasanexample.Letsadjustthevolumeof track1andstorethevalueasaninitialvolumesetting: 1. OntheSongmodeMAINpage,use the Chan/Zone buttons (to the left of the display) to Set the RecTrk parameter to track 1.

2.

Find the desired volume level by adjusting the Vol parameter during playback, then press stop. For this example, lets set the Vol parameter to 80.

3.

Use the left and right more soft buttons at the bottom corners of the display to find the MIXER soft button and press it (see below.) This brings you to the Song:MIXER page.

15-10

Tutorial: Song Mode

4.

On the Song:MIXER page, press the Keep soft button to store initial values for all tracks (see below.)

5.

On the Song:MIXER page, press the Done soft button or the front panel Exit button. You will be asked to save changes to your song, just as in Part 3, step 4 of this guide (see above.) Saving your song completes the process of storing initial volume settings with your song.

PressingtheKeepsoftbuttonontheSong:MIXER page stores initialvaluesofvolume,pan,and programnumberforeachtrack.Initialvaluesarethesettingsthatwillbeusedwhenyoursong isplayedbackfromthebeginning.Volume,pan,andprogramsettingscanchangeautomatically overthecourseofthesongifyouchangethemwhilerecording,butpressingtheKeepbutton storesthecurrentvalueforeachsettingtoberecalledatthesongsbeginning. 6. Follow the above procedure in steps 4 and 5 to store current values as initial values after changing any volume, pan, or program parameters.

Note:Mostuserswillwanttostoreinitialvaluesasdescribedabove.Advancedusersmaynotwantto storeinitialvaluesforeverytrack.Fordetailsonsavinganinitialvalueforasingletrackonly,seethe Program,Volume,andPansectionsintheSongMode:TheMAINPage section on page 121. Part 6 b: Recording Volume Automation Youcanalsorecordvolumeautomation.Volumeautomationisthemethodofrecordingaseries ofvolumeeventmessagesthatchangeatracksVolparameteroverthecourseofthesong.This isusefulforfadinginstrumentsinoroutofasong,oradjustinginstrumentvolumesforonly specificsectionsofasong. 1. On the Song mode MAIN page, make sure the Mode parameter is set to Merge (see below.) (Also make sure the RecMode parameter has been set to Linear, as in Part 5, step 9, above.)

15-11

Tutorial: Song Mode

2. 3.

Press the Record button, then press Play/Pause. Select the Vol parameter and adjust it with the alpha wheel while the sequencer is recording. Any changes to the Vol parameter will be recorded as data in the current track.

4.

When you are finished, press the Stop button. You will be able to review and save your changes just as in Step 4 of Part 3 (see above.)

Part 6 c: Erasing Volume Automation Ifyouvesavedasongwithvolumeautomationandyouwishtochangeorremoveit afterwords,followthestepsbelowtoeraseaselectionofvolumeautomation: 1. In Song mode, press the Edit button with anything except the Prog parameter selected. This brings you to the current songs EditSong:COMMON page.

2.

On the EditSong:COMMON page, press the TRACK soft button (see below.) This brings you to the EditSong:TRACK page.

15-12

Tutorial: Song Mode

3.

On the EditSong:TRACK page, set the Function parameter to Erase (see below.)

4. 5.

Use the Chan/Zone buttons (to the left of the display) to choose the track to erase volume automation from. You can view the selected track number in the upper right corner of the screen. Set the Events parameter to Controllers (see below.)

6.

Set the Controller parameter to Volume. You can do this quickly by selecting the Controller field, entering 7 on the alphanumeric pad, and pressing Enter. Make sure the LoVal parameter is set to 0 and the Hi parameter is set to 127 (see below.)

15-13

Tutorial: Song Mode

7.

Use the From and To parameters to set the range of time from which you want to remove your volume automation. You can play the song and watch the Locate field to determine these times. For this example, lets say that we want to erase volume automation from bar 3 (see below.)

8.

Press the Go soft button to delete the selected volume automation. A screen will appear reading Erase Operation Completed! Press the OK soft button to return to the EditSong:TRACK page (see below.)

9.

Once back on the EditSong:TRACK page, press the Play/Pause button to hear the result. Next, press the Exit button twice to return to the Song mode MAIN page. You will be presented with the Song: Save Changes page, where you can decide whether or not to save the changes you have made.

10. To re-record volume automation, follow the steps in Part 6 b, above.

15-14

Tutorial: Song Mode

Part 7: Learning More About Song Mode

Factory ROM Songs ThePC3includesanumberofprerecordedsongsstoredinthefactoryROM.Investigatethese songstoseethepossibilitiesofSongmode.Feelfreetoeditoraddtoanyofthesesongsinorder tolearnmoreaboutsongmode.Youcansavethedemosongsyouveexperimentedwithunder newIDnumberssothatyoucancomparebetweenyourversionandtheoriginal.Also,ifyou replaceafactoryROMsong,youcanreverttotheoriginalsongbydeletingthesongusingthe SongModeDelete softbutton. Quantizing Quantizingisamethodofadjustingthetimingofnotesrecordedintoasequence.Itcanbeused toadjustnotetiminginordertofixmistakesinaperformance,ortomakenotesadheretoa stricttiminggridasastylisticchoice(asinmuchmodernelectronicmusic.)Quantizednotes havetechnicallyperfecttimingbuttendtosoundlesslikeahumanperformance.Quantization canbeappliedautomaticallytoeachtrackasitisrecorded,oritcanbeappliedafterrecordingto onlyspecificselections.FordetailsseetheQuantparameteronpage 1217intheSongMode:The MISCPagesection,andtheQuantizefunctiononpage 1227intheSongEditor:TrackFunctions section. Creating Loops With The Big Time Page OntheBigTimepageyoucansetthesequencertoloopaselectionofbars.SettheLoop parametertoLoop,andsetatimefortheTimeInandTimeOutparameters.Now,pressing Play/Pauseonthefrontpanelwillcauseyourselectiontoplayrepeatedlyandseamlessly.You willmostcommonlywanttosetyourTimeInandTimeOutpointstoequalanevennumberof barssuchas2,4,8,etc.Recordingintoaloopedsectionofbarsisacommontechniquefor recordingsequencebasedmusic.Forexample,withadrumprogramselectedforatrack,you couldrecordadrumpartbyplayingonedrumsoundeachtimethrougha2barloop,untilthe entire2bardrumbeatsoundscomplete. Next,youcouldsettheRecModeparametertoUnloop.(TousetheUnLoopsetting,theLoop parametermustbesettoLoop,andalooplengthmustbesetwiththeTimeInandTimeOutparameters ontheBIGpage.)WiththeRecModeparametersettoUnloop,anyexistingtrackswillbeplayed backasiftheywereloopingfromtheTimeIntotheTimeOutpoint,buttheyareactuallybeing rerecordedlinearlyoverabsoluteBarsandBeatsuntilyoupressStop.UnLoopallowsyouto recordalineartrackoverashortloopingsectionwithoutfirsthavingtocopythesectionover andoveragaintoachieveanewdesiredSonglength.TheEndpointoftheSongisextendedto thedownbeatofthe(empty)BarimmediatelyfollowingthelastBaryouwererecordingwhen Stopwaspressed.SeeRecMode on page 1211fordetails. Youcanalsocopy,paste,duplicate,ordeletesectionsofthesongifyouwanttoreusesectionsor makesectionsshorterorlonger(seeSongEditingAndStructureWithTrackFunctionsbelowfor details.)Keepinmindthatyoucanloopanylengthofasong,andrecordintoaloopwith multiplelayersofinstrumentsondifferenttracks.Thisisalsoacommonmethodforrecording sequencebasedmusic,inwhichyoucreateeachsectionofyoursongfromloopedsequences, andthenarrangetheloopsintothedesiredorderforyoursongsstructure.Afterwardsyoucan makevariationstoeachsectionifyouwantthesongtohavelessofaloopedsound.

15-15

Tutorial: Song Mode

Song Editing And Structure With Track Functions Insongmodeyoucaneasilycopypartofasequencetoanothertimeinthesong,orfromone tracktoanother.Youcanalsocopyasectionofalltracksatonceinordertoduplicateor structureentiresectionsofyoursong,suchasverseandchorussections.Youcanalsochoose groupsofnotestoerase,orentirebarsoftimetodelete.Therearemanybasicandadvanced editingfunctionsavailable.FordetailsseeSongEditor:TrackFunctions on page 1224in Chapter 12,SongModeandtheSongEditor. Program Changes Ifyoursongrequiresmorethan16instrumentparts,onemethodofachievingthisiswith programchanges.Forexample,letssayyouveusedall16tracksbutdesireanewinstrument forthenextsectionofthesong.Ifthereisatrackwhoseinstrumentisnotneededinthenew section,thistracksprogramcouldchangetoanewinstrumentsoundforthesection,andthen changebacktotheoriginalinstrumentsoundafterthesection.Todothis,simplypressRecord andPlay/PauseandthenchangetheProgparameterontheSong mode MAIN page to the new program at the desired time. This can be done most precisely if you know the ID# of the program you wish to change to. Enter the number with the alphanumeric pad and then press Enter when you want to make the change. You wont be able to see the numbers youve entered until you press Enter,butyoucan pressCanceltostartoverifyouvemadeamistakeorifyouareunsurewhatyouveentered. Use the same method if you would like to change the program back to the original after the new section. The Event List SongmodeisapowerfulcompositiontoolbecausejustaboutanythingthatyoudoonthePC3is recordedintoatrackaseventmessages.Oncerecorded,theseeventscanbealtered,copiedor removed.Eachtrackhasaneventlist,containingalloftheeventsrecordedintoatrack,from whichtheycanbeviewedandedited.FordetailsseeSongEditor:TheEVENTPage on page 1231 inChapter 12,SongModeandtheSongEditor.

15-16

Specifications MIDI Implementation Chart

Appendix A Specifications
MIDI Implementation Chart
Model: PC3
Manufacturer: Young Chang Digital Synthesizers Function
Basic Channel Default Changed Default Mode Messages Altered Note Number Velocity After Touch Pitch Bender O Control Change O True # Song Pos. System Common Song Sel. Tune System Real Time Clock Messages Local Control Aux Messages All Notes Off Active Sense Reset Notes 0 - 127 True Voice Note ON Note OFF Keys Channels 0 - 127 O O X O O 0 - 31 32 - 63 (LSB) 64 - 127 1 - 999 0 - 127 O O O X O O O O X X *Manufacturers ID = 07 Device ID: default = 0; programmable 0127 O 0 - 127 O O O O O 0 - 31 32 - 63 (LSB) 64 - 127 1 - 999 0 - 127 O* O O X O O O O X X Controller assignments are programmable Standard and custom formats

Date: 12/01/07 Version 1.0

Transmitted
1 1 - 16 Mode 3

Recognized
1 1 - 16 Mode 3

Remarks
Memorized Use Multi mode for multitimbral applications

Program Change System Exclusive

Mode 1: Omni On, Poly Mode 3: Omni Off, Poly

Mode 2: Omni On, Mono Mode 4: Omni Off, Mono

O = yes X =no

A-1

Specifications Specifications

Specifications
PC3X Height: (4.33") (11.00 cm) Depth: (13.98") (35.50 cm) Length: (54.33") (138 cm) Weight: (54 lb.) (24.50 kg) PC3 Height: (4.33") (11.00 cm) Depth: (13.98") (35.50 cm) Length: (47.75") (121.29 cm) Weight: (37.35 lb.) (16.94 kg) PC361 Height: (4.84") (12.30 cm) Depth: (13.98") (35.50 cm) Length: (39.37") (100 cm) Weight: (30.86 lb.) (14.00 kg)

Power Internal AC power supply. User selectable 120/240V AC operation. 120V current 0.5A maximum 240V current 0.25A maximum Typical Power Consumption is 25 watts power-on, 0 watts power-off. Audio Outputs Main and Aux: Balanced 1/4 TRS jack +21DBu maximum output 400 ohms balanced source impedance 24-bit A-to-D converters >120dB dynamic range, balanced Headphones: 8Vrms maximum output, 47 ohms source impedance

A-2

Appendix B PC3 Bootloader

TheBootloaderistheprogramthatrunswhenthePC3isfirstturnedon.Itsjobistocheckthat hardwareisfunctional,initializethedigitalsystems,andloadthemainsynthesizerprogram. UndernormalcircumstancesyoumightnotevennoticethattheBootloaderisthereatall,since thePC3willstartuponitsownwithoutanyproblem.However,ifyouwanttoupdateyour unit,orperformmaintenanceonit,youmayneedtointeractwiththeBootloaderprogramitself. ThisappendixdescribeswhattheBootloadercandoandhowyoucanuseitsfunctions. ThefirstthingtounderstandisthatPC3executableprogramsandallobjectdataresideonafile systemcontainedinsidetheinstrument.Thisfilesystemisbasedonflashmemorytechnology andwillpersistacrosspowercycles.WhenthePC3startsup,theBootloadercopiesthe synthesizerprogramintomemoryandexecutesitjustlikeaPCbootsupwhenyouturnit on.ThePC3alsostoresitsfactorydefinedobjects,andallofyourowncustomizeduserobjects onthefilesystem.TheBootloaderprogramitselfisnotfoundonthefilesystem.Instead,it residesinaROMchipthatcannotbeerased,andthereforeispermanentlyinstalledinyourPC3.

Using the Bootloader Menu

NormallytheBootloaderprogramwilldoitstasksandhandovercontroltothesynthesizer programautomatically.IfyouwanttointeractwiththeBootloaderitself,holddowntheExit button(totherightofthedisplay)whileturningthepoweron(whilethemessageInitializing Scannerisdisplayedonthefrontpanel).Insteadofcompletingthebootprocess,theBootloader willdisplayitsmainmenupageonthescreen: PC3 Boot Loader Version 1.0

RUN UPDATE RUN SYSTEM FILE PC3 IMAGE DIAGS RESET UTILITIES Usethesoftbuttonsunderneaththedisplaytochooseanaction. RUN PC3 UPDATE IMAGE RUN DIAGS SYSTEM RESET FILE UTILITIES Thiswillbootthesysteminitsusualway.Thisisusefulifyouveupdated thesynthesizerprogramandwanttotryitout. Thisoffersamenuofchoicestoyouforsystemupdate. ThiswillrunthePC3diagnosticswhichcanhelpdetermineiftheresa hardwareerroronyourunit,andifsowhatitis. ThiswillclearoutalluserdefinedobjectsandreturnthePC3toits defaultFactorystate. Thisoffersamenuoffilesystemfunctionsthatcanbeusefulin maintainingyoursystemordiagnosingsoftwareproblems.

YoucanalsoentertheBootloadermenufromtheMasterModemenuduringnormaloperation.

B--1

Updating PC3 Software and Objects

ThemostcommonuseoftheBootloadermenuistoupdateyourPC3usingnewversionsof softwareandobjectssuppliedbyKurzweil.Newversionswillbemadeperiodicallyasweadd newfeaturesorimproveperformance;downloadthesefreeupgradesfromourwebsiteat www.kurzweil.com. TherearetwowaystosendfilestothePC3:usinganxDmemorycard,orviatheUSBcable connectedtoacomputer.TheBootloaderrecognizesbothmethods,andwillchoosetheonethat isactivewhenrequested,i.e.acardpluggedintothesocketontherearpanelortheUSBcable pluggedintoanactivecomputersupportingUSBcommunications. ThePC3iscompatiblewithxDcardstypeS(upto512MB)ortypeM+(upto1GB)formatted FAT16.(ThePC3doesNOTsupporttypeMortypeHxDcards.)Touseacardyoullneedacard writerthatwillallowyoutocopyfilestothecardfromacomputer.MostmodernWindowsand MacOScomputerssupportcardwritinginaverystraightforwardway.Youshouldbeableto draganddropthePC3filesrightontothecarddirectory.Afterthefilesarecopied,removethe cardfromthecardwriterandplaceitinthexDslotontherearpanelofthePC3.Thecard contactsfaceupward. TouseaUSBtransfer,youshouldplugtheUSBcableintothePC3andthecomputer.Afteryou enterthebootloadermenu,thecomputershouldrecognizethatanewdeviceisavailablehaving thenameKurzweilPC3.Filescanbedraggedanddroppeddirectlytothisdeviceiconandwill beimmediatelyavailableonthePC3. TheUPDATEIMAGEmenulookslikethis:

What module do you want to update?

MAIN DIAG MAIN ALT RESTORE IMAGE IMAGE OBJECT OBJECT OLDER

<back>

Usethesoftbuttonsbelowthedisplaytochoosetheappropriatemoduletoupdate.Mostofthe timeyoullwanttochooseMAINIMAGEorMAINOBJECT.Theexecutableimagefilewill beafilewithanamelike:PC3SY150.BIN.Theobjectlibraryfilewillhaveanamelike: OBJ120.PC3.Afterchoosingamoduletypetoload,thePC3willpresentalistoffilesavailable ontheactivetransfermedia(cardorUSB).IfbothacardandaUSBcablearepluggedinand havefilesonthem,youwillbeofferedachoice. UsetheUPandDOWNarrowbuttonsorthealphawheeltochooseafilefromthefilelist displayedonthescreen.Theasteriskontheleftsidepointstothefileselected.Ifthereare subdirectoriesonthecard,youcanusethesoftbuttonslabeledDOWNandUPtonavigate throughthem.Whenyouveselectedthefileyouwanttoinstall,pressthesoftbuttonlabeled CHOOSEtoperformtheinstallation. Ifyouhaveupdatedanimagebutwishtoreturntotheearlierversion,youcanusethe RESTOREOLDERfeatureintheUPDATEIMAGEmenu.Youwillagainbeaskedtochoosethe imagetorestore.Notethatonlyoneversionofthepreviousimageisavailabletoberestored.If youverestoredonce,anotherrestorewillbringbackthemostrecentlyupdatedversion.

B--2

PC3 Diagnostics
ThisprogramrunsspecifichardwarechecksonPC3systems.Mostofthetimeyouwontneedto runthediagnostics,butifyourehavingsomeproblemswiththeinstrumentitmaybehelpfulto performtheseinteractivetestswhencontactingKurzweilsupport. Toexitthediagnosticprogram,presstheEXITbutton.YouwillreturntothemainBootloader menu.

System Reset
Ifyouvemademany,complexupdatestoyourobjects,andhavesavedanumberoffilesoffto externalstorage,youmightwanttorestoretheinstrumenttoitsdefaultstate.Thisisespecially helpfulifyourehavingproblemsgettingsoundprogramsorsetupstoworkproperly,orthink theremaybesomekindofunderlyinghardwareproblem.Toclearalluserobjectsandrestore thefactorydefaultstate,pressthesoftbuttonlabeledSYSTEMRESETontheBootloadermenu. ThePC3willaskyoutoconfirmthisaction.PressRESETtocompletetheclearfunction,and CANCELtostopwithoutalteringanything. RemembertosaveyourworkintheStoragemenu.Oncedeleted,thefilesarecompletely removedfromthePC3andthereisnowaytoretrievethem.

File Utilities
ThesefunctionsallowyoutomovefilesfromtheexternalstorageontothePC3internalfile systemorviceversa.ItisalsopossibletoexecutePC3imagesdirectlyfromacardorUSBfile, whichcanbeusefulindiagnosingandfixingsystemerrors. ThemostcommonlyusedfunctioninthismenuisFORMATcard.ThiscleansupanxDcardand restoresitsfilestructure.Cardsareoccasionallycorruptedduringusage,throughelectronic glitchesorothererrors.Ifyourcardbecomesunreadable,youcanrestoreitusingtheFORMAT function.Notethatallfilesonthecardarecompletelyandpermanentlydeletedwiththis functionsousewithcaution! ItispossibletoexecuteaPC3programimagedirectlyfromtheexternaldevice.Pressthesoft buttonlabeledEXECfromfiletodothis.TheBootloaderwillpresentalistofavailablefileson theexternalstorage(cardorUSB)ofwhichyoucanselectoneusingtheUP/DOWNarrow buttonsasdescribedaboveunderUpdatingPC3Software.

B--3

Restoring the PC3 File System

Itispossible(thoughnotlikely)thatthePC3filesystemcanbecomecorruptedduetohardware failureorpoweroutageduringcertainoperations.ThiswillresultintheBootloaderbeing unabletobringupthesynthesizersystemcorrectly.Insuchacircumstance,theBootloaderwill takeovercontrolandpresentitsusualmenu.Ifthefilesystemiscompletelycorrupted,itwill notbepossibletoreconfigurewithoutfirstformattingtheinternalflashmemory. Torebuildthesystemfromacorruptedstate,youmustrunthePC3FILESutilitywhichis shippedwithyourPC3ontheCDROM,orwhichcanbedownloadedfromtheKurzweil website.Copythisprogram(calledPC3FILES.BIN)ontoanxDcardandinsertthecardintothe PC3cardslot,orstartthePC3BootloaderwiththeUSBcableconnectedtoacomputerandcopy theprogramtotheUSBwindow.YoushouldalsocopythecurrentPC3executableimageand diagnosticsimages,andthePC3objectlibrary,tothesameexternalmediumusedforthe PC3FILESprogram. ChooseFILEUTILITIESandEXECfromfilesoftbuttons,andselectPC3FILES.BINfrom thelistoffilesshown.PressthesoftbuttonlabeledCHOOSEtoexecutethePC3FILES program.Theprogramwilldisplaythemenu:

PC3 File System Utility 0.02 File system status <status given here>

FORMAT SETUP COPY FILE FLASH SYSTEM FILES UTILS QUIT

PressthesoftbuttonlabeledFORMATFLASHtoreinitializetheinternalfilesystem.Thiswill deleteeverythingthatwasstoredinternallyonthePC3,andleaveaclean,emptyfilesystem readyforuse. Aftertheformatiscomplete,pressthesoftbuttonlabeledSETUPSYSTEM.Youwillbeasked toprovidethenameofPC3softwaremodules(mainexecutableanddiagnostics)andaPC3 objectlibrary.UsetheUP/DOWNarrowbuttonsoralphawheeltoselecttherequestedfile,and theCHOOSEsoftbuttontoinstalleachone.Ifyoudonthaveaparticularfilereadytoload, simplypressCANCELtomoveontothenextmodule.

B--4

Appendix C Changing PC3 Voltage

Inmostcases,youwillnotneedtochangethevoltageonyourPC3.However,sincedifferent countriesusedifferentstandardvoltagesettings,theremaybetimeswhenyouneedtomakethe change. ThePC3sfuseholder(wherethepowercableplugsin)iswhereyouchangethevoltage.The marksonthefuseholderare115and230.115shouldbeusedforvoltagesfrom100to125.230 shouldbeusedfor200to240.Generally,NorthAmericauses115,andEuropeandAsia/ Australiause230,butthereareexceptionstothisgeneralrule. ThePC3usestwo250mAfastblowfusesfor230Vortwo500mAfastblowfusesfor115V. Thesecanbeeither1.25X0.25sizeor5mmX20mmsizefuses.Extrafusesarenotprovided, soyouwillneedtoacquirethecorrectfusebeforeyouchangethevoltage.

Removing the fuse holder

Removethepowercord. Pryopenthefuseholdercover.Useathintoolinsertedintotheholewheretheredvoltage indicatorshowsthrough.

C--1

Pullupgentlytoopenthefuseholdercover.Thecoverishingednexttothepowercord connection.

Pryoutthefuseholder.

C--2

Ifthereisonlyonefuseinthefuseholder,youmustremovethemetalclipontheemptyside.

Theclipjustpullsoff:

C--3

Theclipremovedfromthefuseholder:

Removethefuse.Installtwo250mAfastblowfusesfor230Vortwo500mAfastblowfusesfor 115V,oneoneachsideofthefuseholder. Thefuseholderwillaccepteither1.25X0.25sizeor5mmX20mmsizefuses.Ifusing5mmX 20mmsizefuses,installthemtowardstheinsideendofthefuseholdernearthemetalpins,as shownhere:

Replacethefuseholderinthepowerentrymodulewiththeindicatorforthedesiredvoltage towardstheedgeofthemodule,awayfromthepowerswitch.Closethefuseholdercover,and checkthatthedesiredvoltageindicationshowsthroughthehole.Replacethepowercord.

C--4

PC3 Objects (V 2) Programs

Appendix D PC3 Objects (V 2)

Programs
PresstheInfosoftbuttonforcontrollerinformation.

ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Program StandardGrand StudioGrand RubensteinSWComp HorowitzGrand NYCJazzGrand PopPowerPiano ColdPliano GrandEvans BluesPiano1974 RockPiano1974 LolaPiano TakeMeToThePilot DebsGhostPno KenBrnsUprigt SMiLE/RkyRaccoon Piano&String BeateninRhds SteviesRhds GilpinsSuitcase DukesDynoRhds MotorBootyMutron SweetLorettaEP Rhds/WahSW HotrodDynoRhds

ID 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

Program WoodstockClunker StageMixWurly SupertrampWurly FlydDarkside/Wah WhatdISayWrly DeepFuzzWurly NoQuarterPnt MistyMountainEP UKPopCP70 AcidJazzVelFlute TimbaSynth BluePVCTubes SimpleHipHopLead StereoTouchKoto ModwheelDJ RetroSparkle RealSupasticious JoesClav Rufus/MarleyWAH BlackCowClav HiyaGroundsw TrampledUnderD6 Harpsichord BriteHarpsichord

ID 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72

Program GreggsB RealAllOutB CleanPerc TheNinthBar LordsB3MW OleTimeGospel FooledAgnVox BostonScreamer PowerPopHorns Sax/TrumpetSctn BigBand/AMradio MeanSalsaSection R&B/FunkSection BassieOrchestra P*FunkHorns 70sStonesHorns BigLAStrings DarkNYCStudio PopTripperStr LoFiStudioStr ViennaOctaves LondonSpiccato Pizzicato Tremolando

D-1

PC3 Objects (V 2) Programs

ID 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

Program ChoirComplete HaahSingers ManhattanVoices Aaahlicious NYCinLA CrystalVoices AiryPad CathedralVox ClassicComp FittyFittyLead BigOldJupiter 9YardsBass BowhSawBass ARPesqueBass DaywalkerBassMW Harpolicious SloQuadraPad PhaseShimmer LePesque WispyOne BladerunnerARP FairlightPad Tronesque SoLushPad BoutiqueSixStr Boutique12Str EmoVerser VoxxedElec12 RealNylon DualStrat BurningTubesMW

ID 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134

Program RockinLeadMW PBass EBass BeastiesBass Flea/Bootsy BigDummy JacoFretless UprightGrowler Levin/GabrlFrtls NYCKits LAKits RockKits Roots/IndieKit Kikz/SnarzMW EarthKikznSnrz AnazlogMachine ProducedKit08 NaturalPerc Rhythm4Reel NewMarimba 2HandSteelDrums RealVibes SteamPunkMallets MagicCeleste DrumsnBells PianoStack DarkGrand GrandPiano440 PianoRecital OleUpright1 WestCoastPno&Pad

ID 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165

Program PerfectPnoPad DreamyPiano PianowDvStrgs PnoAgtStrngs TheAncient DancePnoEchplex IvoryHarp PianoLushness Piano&Wash Piano&VoxPad XfadBelltoneRhds ExtremeHardstrk FagenPhaser RoyalScamRhds AustnCtyLmtsWrly BrightDynamicWly 70sWahLeslieEP 3DogPianet ClassicDXRhds RichEP+Pad 90sFMShimmer BrightHardstrEP CrispandSoft SoftWarmBallad TXStack1 TightBrightFM PolyTechnobreath PianoSynthStack ElecGrandStack BigSyn/HornStack 70sArenaSynth

D-2

PC3 Objects (V 2) Programs

ID 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196

Program 80sArenaSynth 90sFunkStack NexxProgStack CrispClav StevieFuzz HeartbreakerWAH ChoclateSaltyClv SailinShoesClav StopMakingSense HarpsiRotovibe PhsyclGrafitiClv ParisCmboAccordn WhiterShadeB3 DoorsVox Indagardenoveden AnimalsVox MagicWolf Farfisa1 VASTBars13,8&9 1NotePowerRiff MiamiPopHorns 80sPopOctaveSax BuenaVistaBrass TenorExpress Sgt.PepperBrass GoldfingerBrass Bari/TenorSect StudioAStrings StudioBOctaves NashvilleStrings ProcessedStrgs

ID 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227

Program OwensStrings StudioCStrings TenderStrings ToxicStrings MixedChoir ConcertChoir AaahVocals JazzyBalladVox AntiqueAhhChorus BrightSynVox VoxOrgel Vox&Strings PressLead ClassSquare ARP2500Brass SynBellMorph Perc>Morph>Bass EvilOctaveWheel TranceRiff SickoSynco BuzzyStrings VA1Saw/Sqr/Pulse AiryImpact SpidersWeb ARPBigSynth ClassPad HarmonicEnvelops Heaven&Earth Bling6String MediumCrunchLead DoubleCleanChrs

ID 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258

Program CompdPhaser TremBucker CascadeSitar HeavyBuckers Nasty70sGuitar FingerBass KneeDeepMinimoog ACBuzzerBass MotownBass SquiresHeavyPik LowdownBass EberhardtFrtls SlyBass MaroonDrums BourneRemixDrum BeastieRetroDrum DryPumpinDrums 60sRock&Soul HeadhuntersKit FranticHouseDrms Dance/Marilyn MellowMarimba Skullophonic Percussionist ShinySparkles HybridTunedPerc DynamicPerc CagesEnsemble MagicMbira CP80Enhanced GabrielsMelt

D-3

PC3 Objects (V 2) Programs

ID 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289

Program VideoKilledRadio BrighterCP TouchRezSynthCP PowerCP DarkChorusCP InsideOutCP PianetClassic ShesNotThere WalrusPianet FlamingHohner PowerChordPianet SlyBallad BlackFriday TheseEyes VA1SawLead VA1SqrLead MaroonSynBass VA1DistBassSolo! DownwardSpiralMW VA1DstPulseWheel NewOrderPulses VA1DetunedPulse VA1DetunedSaws VA1DetunedSqrs VA1EmersonLead MwhlClubsweeper Innervate ChemBrosBassLead UFOPad VA1SliderMorphSQ ShoobieModelC

ID 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320

Program StereoPickups 70sBubblegumClav TreblClavWhlmute Mutron+Synthsw Bi*PhazClav 80sFlangeClav VASTEnvSynClav CharlemagneClav SwitchPickups EvilWomanDeepFuz HeadhuntersWAH MorleyWAHClav DblWAHInsanity Psychedeliclav PrestonSpaceWah Analog/DigHybrid Jump!Obx 80sEndCredits VA1DistleadCC Divider MonoTrekkies DiscoDivebomb MutronTweetyPerc DisgustingBass VA1ShaperSweeper ElectroPercSynth MWhlMayhemBass ElectronicaSplit HiPassMWhlBlips PlasmaCannon 32LayerBass!

ID 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351

Program YesesisTronStr MobyTurntblTron SpaceOditty RocknRollSuicide OctaveTronStr SiberianKhatru ModwhlRemixStr PdlPitchbendStr SilentSorrow BandpassChoir SweptTronVoice MellotronFlutes SldrEQMltrnVox StrawberryFlutes WhiteSatinSplt 3WaySplitMltrn RMIHarpsi LambLiesDown RMIPiano&Harpsi BrightRMIPn/Hrp DualModeHarpsi RoyalKingWakeman OrganModePn/Hrp Dr.JohnsRMI PhaseswOrgan SpacedOutBach TobaccoRoadRMI TrafficEP TeknoTempoEcho TrickofthTail RMIClavWAH

D-4

PC3 Objects (V 2) Programs

ID 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382

Program DreamOnSession LightYearStrings FunkensteinzARP MurkyRezPad StPanPhaseARP ARPStr+Oberheim FXSweepARP HotFilterARP St.PPWMBASS SquareChirpLead MyOldPPG*2.3 KashmirStr+Brs GenesisBroadway GarthsLastWaltz SynbrassPillow WarszawaLayers ELOStringSection OutkastDrums PopRock08Kit HelloBrooklyn SnoopKit EpicRemixDrums ZooYorkRemixDrms RocAFellaKit BreakestraKit CosmicSusPedal DigitalMoonscape FalgorsLament BPMBionicStrngs Swell&Hold Bowie/HeroesPad

ID 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413

Program MeanStereoSweep PulseVowel Winds&Strings Winds,Horn&Str MoreBrass&Str LHTimpRollOrch GothicClimax Denouement PoltergeistTrem ManyCharacters Pizzw/PercUpTop FastStr&Perc FastWinds&Pizz ImperialArmy BattleSceneOrch FinalVictory SloLineInterlude Winds&EspressStr FastWinds&Str SugarPlumFairies AdagioPizzSplit PastoralOrch PastoralClrFlt PastoralDblRds Pastoralw/Pizz Strings&Silver Reeds&Bells PercAtkStrings WilliamTellA WilliamTellB Orchw/BellsOn

ID 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444

Program Winds&EspStr Horns,Winds&Str TripleStrikeOrch TuttiOrchestra StBaroqueHarpsi StringContinuo VivaldiOrchestra TrumpetVoluntary Fifes&Drums SoloFlute TremoloFlute FastOrchFlute Piccolo SoloOboe SlowOboe FastOrchOboe LeadOboe SoloEngHrnprs FastOrchEngHrn SlowEngHornprs LeadEnglishHorn SoloClarinet SloOrchClarinet FastOrchClar LeadClarinet SoloBassoon SoloBassoonvib SoloDblReeds WoodwindSection EnsembleWWinds BassClar/Clar/Fl

D-5

PC3 Objects (V 2) Programs

ID 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475

Program SoloFrHorn EnsembleFrHorn LeadFrenchHorn DynOrchFrHorns HornSectLayer SoloBrtTrumpet HardTrumpet LeadTrumpet SoftTrumpet SlowSoftTrp TwoLeadTrumpets LeadMuteTrumpet SoloTenorSax Sax,Horns,MuteTrp SoloTrombone EnsTrombone TromboneSection DynOrchBones BariHornSection DynBariHorns SoloTuba DynOrchTuba LowOrchBrass LowBrassChorale FastOrchBrass BrassFanfare DynOrchTrumpets SoloViolinfast FolkViolinslow SoloViolafast SoloViolaslow

ID 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506

Program SoloCellofast SoloCelloslow SoloBasso1 SoloBasso2slo StringQuartet SoloHarp OrchHarp1 DelicateHarp HarpArps&Gliss SloOrchChorus PipeStops SoftStops AllStops ChapelOrgan AllStopsAllVox Pipes&Voices OrchTimpani SoloTimpani Tam/Cym/BD/Timp BasicOrchPerc Timp&AuxPerc TempleBlocks ModernBlockery Perc&Blocks StereoTamtam CymbalRollTr Xylophone SoloMarimba OrchMarimba Vibraphone Celeste

ID 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537

Program Glockenspiel Chimes/Glock BellsAcross CelesteGlockHarp ChimeBell Carillon AdagioStrings AdagioDivisiSt LeadStrings LeadDivisiStr FastStrings FastDivisiStr AggressoStrings AggressDivisiStr AdagioTuttiMix AdagioDivisiMix LeadDivisiMix LeadTuttiMix FastTuttiMix FastDivisiMix AggressTuttiMix AggressDivisiMix Agrslo/Tremhi AgresTrem8ves AgressoHalfTrem FastTremolandi SloStrPrsTrem MarcatoPrsTrem SfzPrsTrem PoltergeistPad AdagioTremSplit

D-6

PC3 Objects (V 2) Programs

ID 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568

Program FullPizzicato TouchFullPizz VariablePizz PizzBass/ArcoLead Lead&Adagio AdagioSplit AdagioBs/VlnI TripleStrikeStr AdagioTutti8ves AdagioDiv8ves AdagioOctaves Lead&8vaAdagio DualSlowSplit LeadTuttiMixB LeadStringsSplit LeadMixOctvs DivisiMix+solo LeadUpperRange LeadDiv8ves DualUpperDivisi DualUppertutti DualHalfTrem FastMixOctaves FastDivisi8ves Marcatodivisi MarcatoMix1 MarcatoMix2 MarcatoMix3 SloMutedStrings LargoMix LargoMix2

ID 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599

Program LargoconSordino Largo8ves EspressivoLead EspressivoViolas SlowThickMix VerySloVeryThick TouchThickMix MoreViola SloStrPrsSwell RiteofStrings AdagioViolinsI AdagioViolinsII AdagioViolindiv AdagioViolas AdagioViolasdiv AdagioCelli AdagioCellidiv AdagioBassi AdagioBassidiv AdagioTremolo LeadViolinsI LeadViolinsII LeadViolinsdiv LeadViolas LeadViolasdiv LeadCelli LeadCellidiv LeadBassi LeadBassidiv LeadTremolo FastViolinI

ID 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630

Program FastViolinII FastViolindiv FastViola FastVioladiv FastCello FastCellodiv FastBassi FastBassidiv FastTremolo LegatoViolinsI LegatoViolinsII LegatoViolindiv LegatoViolas LegatoVioladiv LegatoCelli LegatoCellidiv LegatoBassi LegatoBassidiv LegatoTremolo AggressoViolin AggressoVlnII AggressoViolind AggressoViola AggressoViolad AggressoCello AggressoCellod AgressoBassi AgressoBassid AgressoTremolo RigbysStrings KeyboardStrings

D-7

PC3 Objects (V 2) Programs

ID 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661

Program StringMachine LushPad AddAPad1 AddaPad2 HiResStringPad LoFiStrings BlueResonance AutoResStrPad EtherealJoe AdagioMagic BrtNaturalKit SmoothRockerKit LowRockerKit SuperNaturalKit BigWooshKit FatNatKit AbeJuniorKit CharlemagneKit HFactKit SoftCookieKit BrushesKit HipgigJuniorKit CocktailKit BeatBoxBrushKit JinglehopKit TinyBopperKit MovenAirKit AlisPunchKit RockTranceKit RinglingPopKit MarleyKit

ID 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692

Program LtricNatKit TrashPanTomKit TinManKit CheapoDistKit AngryBastardKit VibraLunchKit RicochetKit FridasGateKit MetallicCutKit CannibalKit TunnelFeelKit TunaSlapKit PlywoodKit DoorKnockerKit SlapstickKit ScratchboxKit AnvilHeadKit CatScratchKit ScreamKitMW MangledKit RawhideKit ShrugieKit BigDogKit SweeperKit GravelDumpKit MudflapKit MudSlingerKit ShrugsBrosKit WetSpongeKit SuccotashKit BacksweepKit

ID 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723

Program BugZapperKit ElektroSandKit SandyBottmKit BoxoSandKit FineGritKit MatchmakerKit ZucchinniKit PumpdaWellKit LtrkRefluxKit SquashClapKit ScoopitUpKit ToneKeeperKit PhaseEKit StrawBlowKit FallingStarKit SuperBallKit PixieDustKit AirWavesKit TubFloaterKit WhyNotKit TurntablismKit Studio3and4 RadioKings ResonntTraps AmbientRock ColiseumKit RipperKit TripTrash Beatbox SumpKitMWSus ElectroKitMW

D-8

PC3 Objects (V 2) Programs

ID 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777

Program PaperTom Boinker GlubFlangeKit DryFattyKit DrumswBass1 RMIElecKit GateClapDrmLE DubKit RockRoomDrums ResNoiseKit 144msGatedKit FatNoiseKit HypdNaturalKit RangoKit NoiseSlapToms 16LayerCakeKit HopRoomKit NaturalRinger BeachGroover RockSnarer DrumPadKit1 FilterKit FMEPiano1 FMEPiano2 HybridDX&Pad FluidStradaGtr FluidEGtr OrganWaveComper PolyBrassy SynBrassComper PolyPitchBrass

ID 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808

Program PolySweep2 ScatVocals ScatChoir FMSqareBell TootLead WetToot LegatoBrassyLead TrebleFMLead DelicateFMLead MicromoogPlus DeepVoxBed SloSynOrchWet VoxBed2 HiVoxCloud LFOPitcherPad MagicChinaFlower ClimaxPerc 16OpenFlute 16StopFlute 16Diapason 16PedBourdon 16PedDiapason 16PedReed 16ReedA 16ReedB 16Gamba 16DiaCeleste 16BallparkSto 16Viol 8OpenFlute 8StopFlute

ID 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839

Program 8Diapason 8PedBourdon 8Reed 8Gamba 8DiaCeleste 8BallparkStop 8Viol 51/3PedBourd. 4OpenFlute 4StopFlute 4Diapason 4PedBourdon 4Reed 4Gamba 4DiaCeleste 4BallparkStop 4Viol 22/3OpenFlute 22/3StopFl12 22/3Diapason 22/3Reed 22/3Gamba 22/3DiaCelest 22/3BallparkS 22/3Viol 2OpenFlute 2StopFlute 2Diapason 2Reed 2Gamba 2DiaCeleste

D-9

PC3 Objects (V 2) Programs

ID 840 841 842 843 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923

Program 2BallparkStop 2Viol ProPiano BigPopPiano EzrasBurner HotTubeGospel B3Midrange Blues&Gospel ProgB3Perc2 ProgB3Perc3 TubeB3Perc ProgB3Perc4 BrgtTubeScream ZepelinSolo ArgentB3 MusselShoalsB3 XtremTubeB3Prc ClassicTraffic WarmB3 WarmerB3 ChrsEchoOrgan SlowPhaseOrgan RoomB LordsDirtBomb MellowMitch SlysRevenge LateNighter FirebreatheC3 MrSmith ErrolG. Testify

ID 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954

Program WahB3+Echoplx SweetnNice SoftChords SputtringingB3 MelvinC. AllOut JsComper BrotherJack ModelOne ThickGospel GrowlerB Ready2Rock Thimmer TheRealABC GospelSpecial InTheCorner NightBaby GimmeSome TheGrinder MeanBean DewDropper TwoOut JsAllOut MySunday GoodStarter Sacrificer LeeMichaelsB3 GMStandardKit GMRoomKit GMPowerKit GMElecKit

ID 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988

Program GMSynthKit GMJazzKit GMBrushKit GMOrchKit VAST13Ch/Perc VAST13Ch/Perc2 FishersVASTB3 RipplySix RippleSiner RippleThump RippleRevDrum DarkRevDrum SpacerLead RippleSine2 RippleThump2 BluesHarmonica WheelBowCello WheelBowViola WheelBowFiddle ElectricCello ClassicMiniBass TalkWahPoly+Syn MeanWahMono BassPedal SyncSqrTemplate CarpenterSndtrck ElectroMechLead PannerTemplate HiArpDelay PercArpSynth Candy*OSyncLead

D-10

PC3 Objects (V 2) Programs

ID 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019

Program WheelSyncBlips 12SAWMWheelLead HotMalletMWheel ScreaminWhlBass SyncWheelLead ModwheelKotoSyn VASprSaw VASprSaw+Allpass SilentProgram ClickTrack DefaultProgram DiagnosticSine ProphtVSyncLd TempoSyncPulse SloSynOrch Anabrass FatSynOrch WheelGrowlMoogue TheWayItIs AlphaCentauri SynOrcWhaleCall DownesLead Minipulse4Pole BPMLead GatedSqrSweepBPM BPMEchplexPad GatedNoisweepBPM CarsSquareLead DataShapeSaw Saw+Mogue4Pole VA1NakedPWMPoly

ID 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 4096 4097 4098 4099 4100 4101 4102 4103 4104 4105 4106 4107 4108 4109 4110 4111 4112 4113 4114 4115 4116 4117 4118 4119 4120 4121

Program VA1NakedPWMMono VA1NakedSawPoly VA1NakedSqrPoly VA1NakedSqrMono VA1NakedSawMono GMPiano1 BrightGrand ElectricGrand HonkyTonkPno ElecPiano1 ElecPiano2 Harpsichord Clavinet GMCelesta Glockenspiel MusicBox Vibraphone Marimba Xylophone TubularBells Dulcimer DrawbarOrgan PercOrgan RockOrgan ChurchOrgan ReedOrgan GMAccordion Harmonica Bandoneon NylonGuitar SteelStrGtr

ID 4122 4123 4124 4125 4126 4127 4128 4129 4130 4131 4132 4133 4134 4135 4136 4137 4138 4139 4140 4141 4142 4143 4144 4145 4146 4147 4148 4149 4150 4151 4152

Program JazzGuitar CleanEGtr MutedGuitar OverdriveGtr DistortedGtr GtrHarmonics AcousticBass FingerBass PickedBass FretlessBass SlapBass1 SlapBass2 SynthBass1 SynthBass2 Violin Viola Cello Contrabass TremoloStrings PizzStrings Harp Timpani EnsembleStrings GMSlowStrs SynthStrings1 SynthStrings2 ChoirAahs VoiceOohs SynthVox OrchestraHit Trumpet

D-11

PC3 Objects (V 2) Programs

ID 4153 4154 4155 4156 4157 4158 4159 4160 4161 4162 4163 4164 4165 4166 4167 4168 4169 4170 4171 4172 4173 4174 4175 4176 4177 4178 4179 4180 4181 4182 4183

Program Trombone Tuba MutedTrumpet FrenchHorn BrassSection SynthBrass1 SynthBrass2 SopranoSax AltoSax TenorSax BaritoneSax Oboe EnglishHorn Bassoon Clarinet Piccolo Flute Recorder PanFlute BottleBlow Shakuhachi Whistle Ocarina SquareWave SawtoothWave SynthCalliope ChifferLead Charang SoloVox 5thSawWave Bass&Lead

ID 4184 4185 4186 4187 4188 4189 4190 4191 4192 4193 4194 4195 4196 4197 4198 4199 4200 4201 4202 4203 4204 4205 4206 4207 4208 4209 4210 4211 4212 4213 4214

Program Fantasia WarmPad Polysynth SpaceVoice BowedGlass MetalPad HaloPad SweepPad IceRain Soundtrack Crystal Atmosphere Brightness Goblins EchoDrops StarTheme Sitar Banjo Shamisen Koto Kalimba Bagpipe Fiddle Shanai TinkleBell Agogo SteelDrums WoodBlock Taiko MelodicTom SynthDrum

ID 4215 4216 4217 4218 4219 4220 4221 4222 4223

Program ReverseCymbal GtrFretNoise BreathNoise Seashore Bird Telephone Helicopter Applause GunShot

D-12

PC3 Objects (V 2) Setups

Setups
PresstheInfosoftbuttonforcontrollerinformation.

ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

Setup TeknoRiffSw18 BluesJaminG TechnoSubstance AcousticSplit Slap/EPSplit BlackCowSplit SomeLovingSplt Piano&Pad PedalsModeW/Beat AnaBanana Sanctuary WorldBeneath DeepBurn SyncScene MeanClav/Rhds BigbandPBttn1 MeanPianet/Piano OldtimeyBlues OldR&B OldSchoolJam BrooklynSmoov Country RockrollinA HipHop Jazz Reggae World Dance

ID 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56

Setup SlowRock Oldies Funk LatinDanzhall Metal GrowthPad MorriconesFall StringsOld&New MonoBass&ArpSt JazzBass/Piano Bass+KB3Split ZepKB3/Pianet ElectricBass/EP ARP&Bass FretlessSplit BigLead SynBass/Lead Play MovieBuildup GuitarEnsemble BignWarmPn/Gt JoniSplit StrangeLands PercAttackOrch DiscoFanfare Padw/Benefits AnaSoup BlueLightsOn

ID 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84

Setup PluckedHammers ForbiddenPlanet ChildhoodMagic Autobeller SquareArper PizzicatoBenefit GrandPad&Magic TinklySweepySpcy PulsingAnthem PedHoldPnoSolo RhythmPadSW TheWonders DropsofJupiter NoComplaints BrightonLush NylonandIvory Drawbr/SlidrSW Mini/E3/Clav LASplit BlumanLive Shwales EdensSky Marimbatronic Tronotronic OrchFantasy Stringotronic HarpEnsemble MarimbasGoneWild

D-13

PC3 Objects (V 2) Setups

ID 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115

Setup IvoryEnsemble Spaces BubblePad FatAna FretsoLush DualManualB3 DualManualB32 DualManualB33 DualManualB34 MwhlBlipsARP MwheelDJArp MargaritaSplit ConstantGardener RunRagoRun BionicRock PeaSoup WalkingArps EminenceinC VampireNightclub KurzJacinto MusicBed Octavia RosinRhythm Insanity Bells LowChunkerGroove HoldSumNotes ReichPiano AnaBouncer TheFactory FattyFatFat

ID 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146

Setup BrassBouncer ElectricDancer TresoPulser MellowTripper SpacePulser MoodArpC2 StrumThurmond DrumnBassr funksetup HazelJam InternalVoices ClearSetup DefaultSetup GetBerniSldEI PipeOrgan1 PipeOrgan2 PipeOrgan3 PipeOrgan4 PipeOrgan5 PipeOrgan6 BuildAnOrchestra SugarPlumArmy FanfareOrchestra ElecFanfareOrch ElecBalladOrch MagicPizzOrch ElecBalladSplit JaconJoe PianoComp/Split FusionComper Pno&ChoirorStr

ID 147 148 149 150

Setup RichBalladComper NewAgeComper VoyagerOne OrchestraOfBells

D-14

PC3 Objects (V 2) Effect Chains

Effect Chains
#
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 214

Chain
LittleBooth Soundboard SmallDarkRoom SaxChamber SmallHall MediumHall GreenRoom OperaHouse RealNiceVerb EmptyStage MedDrumRoom AbbeyPianoHall PredelayHall SweeterHall ConcertHall SymphonyHall CathedralChorus DeepChorsDlyHall OmniStage ClassicPlate MediumWarmPlate RealPlate SmoothPlate GatedPlate BasicDelay1/8 4TapDelayBPM EchoPlecksBPM TimberedTaps DubDelay SmStereoChorus Chorusier LiveRoom

#
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 275

Chain
StereoChorus DenseChorus SoftFlange WetlipFlange FlangedTaps SlowDeepPhaser Fast&SlowPhaser PhaserEGT ThinPhaseSweep TremoloBPM SimplePanner ThinPhaseSweep Lesliestart SubtleDistortion EPianoDistortzn Distortion+EQ RaysEP ScoopedDistort BurningTubes! 3BandDrumComp SnareCompressor SnareCmpw/Rvb KickCompressor HardKneeComprs BassCompMutrn PnoEnhancement LA2AforStrings ResonantFilter AuxEchoplex BandsweepFilter HiFrequencyStim gshotvrb

#
63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 129 147 176 193 203 204 206 209 210 211 212 213 337

Chain
RingModulation FrequencyOffset LazerTagFlange FalloutPitchLFO ReverseReverb ReverseReverb2 OilTankReverb LaserReverb GatedLaserverb ReverseLaserverb EnvelopeFollowr EnvelopeFilter2 TripFilter Stereoizer BarberpolePhzr LaserDlyReverb Degenerator BasicDelay1/8 ArpDelayLoop BasicDelay1/8 snarcmp1 LeadEGT6 LitePad2 PhaseDly1 ThinphaseSweep hhpitchr1 Snarcmp1 SymphonyHall1 SymphonyHall2 SymphonyHall3 JazzStage HotLeslie122e

D-15

PC3 Objects (V 2) Effect Chains

#
215 216 217 218 219 220 223 224 226 229 230 233 240 255 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 395

Chain
StringChamber FifeStage LiveRecitalHall AbbeyBrasHall2 SmoothLongHall kickcmp3 kickcmp4 snarcmp4 kickcmp5 BrightHatRoom BrightFlange snarshaper6 Reverb2 Flange+Delay EmptyStageII AbbeyPianoHall2 OperaHouseII VintageStrings2 ClassicPlateII RecitalHallII SmallHallII RealNiceverbII MediumHallII SmallDarkRoom2 PnoRvbII ShortPnoRvbIII PnoEnhancRvb3 RevComp5 ClunkerII StCHDlyII OmniStage OmniStage CathedralVx

#
276 277 278 279 300 301 302 303 304 310 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 333 334 335 450

Chain
deeppart1 DblSloFlangeCmp alphacentauri1 TimberedTaps2 GospelDistLeslie GimmeSomeLeslie DFOrganRoom GimmeSomeLesl GimmeSomeLesl2 AcceleratorLes2 ExpressLeslie Leslie122a MitchsLeslie MelvinsLeslie GregsLeslie RoomyLeslie122 SoftLeslie122 CrunchLeslie147 ThimmerLeslie JimmysLeslie2 OrganTaps LeslieCleanAS Leslie122cr JimmysBrakeLes GregsLatcher NiceLeslie CleanLeslie WarmLeslie NewLord1 CrunchLeslie122 HotLeslie122b BostonLeslie1 SynthLead

#
338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 375 376 377 378 379 380 385 386 387 388 389 391 392 489

Chain
HotLeslie122f SoulLeslie1224 LeslieB122 JoeyLeslie122 HotLeslie122g HotLeslie122h TapChorusLeslie SlowPhasedLeslie Nonkb3A WarmLeslie12 WarmDistlLes1dw BrighDistlLes1 DistleratorLes6 BrightDistlLes DistlLesdw41 ProgLeslie1 LightDistlLes2 DWLeslie13 LeeMichaels1 DWLeslie12 DistlLes5 SlyLeslie LightDistlLes FisherLeslie SoulLeslie1227 NewLord1 SystemTempTap WaterDistSynth FlangeVoiceHall BrightFlangeHall FlngRecitalHall MedDrumRoom HeavyBuckers

D-16

PC3 Objects (V 2) Effect Chains

#
396 397 399 400 401 403 411 412 414 415 416 420 422 424 425 426 427 428 430 431 434 435 436 439 440 441 442 445 446 447 448 449 666

Chain
BurningTubes5 PunchBassAmp RevverLeslie BradleysBarn1 BradleysBarn2 LA2AforStrings ChrsDly RealDrmComp RealDrmComp2 TiteDrmComp MarimbaHall AGTReverb WarmCruncher FierceLead CompTrem 12StWarmCrunch PhaserEGT SnareComp1 KickComp1 60sBigDrumRoom AGTEnhCD CDRecitalHall NylonEnhCD ChrsDblRoom EnhcBassAmp FlangVoiceHall2 VocalswFXnMic Harpolicious ChrsDly EGTHall BurningTubes ChorusAGT SmallDarkRoom

#
451 452 454 455 456 457 458 459 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 472 473 474 477 478 479 480 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 717

Chain
SynthBassAmp MosqueySwirl PadFX2 PadFX1 Chr&Echo VocalswFX DrySynthCDR WetSynthCDR VibesRoom PercussionRoom CagesRoom CmpRecitalHall StrRecitalHall1 StrRecitalHall2 RecitalHall MyJaco UprightBassRoom LevinChorus BrightRoom MedDarkRoom BasicReverb MediumHall4U KickComp2 ColdPliano2 FDRPercRoom NylonAgtVerb 3BandDrumComp KikComp4:1 ToxicStrings 3BandDrumComp2 ScoopdDistEGT2 NotScoopdDist DeepFuzzBass1

#
491 492 493 496 500 501 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 644 645 646 648 651 652 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 764

Chain
ProBassComp NYCTripStrings ProBassComp2 DirtLordAmp SetupAuxVerb SetupAuxDDL EarlyReflection PadDepthPt1 GunshotVerb AlphaCentauri1 BasicCDR SynthorcBPM BPMFlangeDly DblSloFlangeCmp StevieTremEP1 BeaterEP1 Jamerson1 SlyBASSComp1 Trampler1 HipHopDrms1 HipHopDrms2 TOPDrumReverb1 HOPDrumReverb1 HopKickcmp1 NoQuarter TechnoHHDly1/8 HOPDrumReverb3 HopKickcmp7 Roomverb1 Kickcmp6 Snarcmp11 Reverb3 ShortPnoRvb31

D-17

PC3 Objects (V 2) Effect Chains

#
667 668 670 671 675 676 680 681 682 685 687 690 691 692 694 695 696 697 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 711 713 714 715 716 810

Chain
Snarcmp12 Kickcmp13 BeastieDrums Clunker13 Funksnare9 Funksnare8 EPDistPhase1 RayEP1 DeepFuzz1 DeepFuzz31 ReverseVerb1 Acidflute Blueman1 CompDelay12 SmallDarkRoom3 PlainComp15 RevComp4 EPRotoAmp12 HiMutron1 SaxChamber21 BigDarkRoomDW NewGtr31 PnoRvb14 SmallHall11 PnoRvb21 EmptyStage11 Mutron2 PlainComp12 CDRSynth SynthFlangenDely QuantzEnhanceSyn BladerunnrRvb BassFleaCompMu

#
718 719 720 721 722 723 724 726 727 729 730 732 733 734 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 750 754 756 757 758 759 760 762 845

Chain
EberBass SynFatener&Ech2 CP80Enhanc1 FishersHarmMic AbbeyPianoHall2 MediumHall2 FagenPhaser SmallWurly BasicWurlyEP CheeseHorns BasicChorusDly2 WallflowerCh ChPanDlyComp CheeseChorus CompDelay SynFatener&Ech3 BIGCompDelay UprightPiano SitarCmpRvb ACBass3 VoxKB3 Blackfriday Blackestfriday Flange4 GoodLeslie1 GoodLeslie4 GoodLeslie6 WhitrShadeLeslie Inagadadavita GoodLordLeslie SmallHallComp1 GoodLeslie5 Elton1

#
765 766 768 771 772 773 775 780 781 782 784 785 786 787 788 790 792 793 794 795 797 798 799 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 882

Chain
StCHDly Synphase1 StCHDly WalrusEP EPChr16 Siberia DeepFuzz5 FlangeEcho2 ARPMosqueRoom Chr&Echo MutronClav2 SiberiaII EnhanceComp1 Shaper>Reverb2 ClavPhase1 SynlaserFlange1 RockyRaccoon Squire Flange4 DeepFuzzClav ClavComp1 SmallClav SynthShimmer PhaseDly1 Shredlead1 ThinphaseSweep EnvComp41 MoogBASSComp11 SynFatener&Ech4 Shredlead15 PlainComp21 Garth EPChr6

D-18

PC3 Objects (V 2) Effect Chains

#
811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 917

Chain
Chr&Echo2 BasicCDR2 ShaperFuzzLead2 AMBigBand Clunker20 PadFX3 SynFatener&Ech5 MarleyClav1 FlangeEcho4 DeepFuzzClav3 GetBack1 DeepFuzzClav5 ChrsDly4 LeslieBasic MoogBASSComp5 EPChr1Dyno Synphase17 LeslieComp1 PhaseDly104 GoodLeslie52 CPChrRvb1 DistLeslieBasic CompKit111 CarlosSyn MaroonSynbass FloydEP1 PnoCmpSndBoard1 SuperTrmpPhase Wurly1 ShortPlate4EPs ShortPlate4EPs2 AuxDarkRoom2 AuxEchplex

#
846 847 848 849 850 851 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 862 864 865 866 867 868 869 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 950

Chain
AuxChamber BowiePno1 BluesPnoCmpRvb1 NewGtr31 Soundboard3 OmniStage MedPlateJazFlute MistyMntnEP2 PnoEnhanc22 ClavPhase1 MedRoom10 EPChr11 HardRhds1 PnoEnhancement SmallHornChamber Clunker50 PnoEQCmp3 Comp4 3DogEP1 CompDelay PnoEnhanc22 EPChr11 OldChamber ChefAid1 ZepFuzz1 BernieClav ClavRotoAmp DarkNiceverb BasicRayEP3 LatinHornCmp BasicRayEP2 RaffasDX7 Snarcmp112

#
883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 896 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 983

Chain
PnoEnhanc3 SynEnhancement CompKik11 VintChamber SmallWurly2 DeepFuzzPnt1 Comp70 FooldAgainVox CompKik111 VintageHorns3 LeslieGospl EPChr60 DeepFuzz51 Shredlead3 Synphase1 Synphase2 SynthTrem2 DWAuxRvb1 SmallDarkRoom2 SaxChamber2 SmallHall2 MediumHall2 RealNiceverb OperaHouse2 MosqueRoom2 BrightHall Echplex1 AbbeyPianoHall RecitalHall2 Echplex2 MedmWarmPlate2 EQVelMorph RayEP1

D-19

PC3 Objects (V 2) Effect Chains

#
918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 Farfisa1

Chain
GoodLeslie33 ZepLeslie Snarcmp801 kickcmp401 DeepFuzz6 SynEnv4 SmallComp9 KickComp201 GoodLeslie9 FalgorGtr KickComp701 GoodLeslie34 Syncblip CompDelay3 CheeseHorns2 SynthCDR20 VintageHorns2 ChorusPanDelay Snarcmp101 Filter1 Syncpulsedw Kickcmp501 Snarshaper601 ProBassComp3 SynEnv5 SnareComp101 BostonLeslie2 Kickcmp104 LeslieMShoals Snarcmp121 WhitrShadeLesli3

#
951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982

Chain
Snarcmp113 EnvKickcmp1 Kickcmp602 Snarcmp112 HipHopDrms101 PnoCmpSndBoard10 Epicsnare1 JumpSynth Funksnare88 Kickcmp441 Upright3 HopKickcmp701 LeslieComp2 Kickcmp301 PnoRvb1 PnoRvb2 HipHopDrms201 Breakdrums1 Blackfriday2 CompDelay101 SaxChamber2 Clunker501 HornPlate1 VintageHorns BrightFlange2 ThinphaseSweep2 SmallComp102 EPPhase1 NonKB3LesliePdl2 FlangeComp3 MutronClav201 SynChorusDly202

#
984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 2000 2001

Chain
EnhanceComp121 ClunkerIIa PadDepthPt1 AuxChorusHall TechnoSyn1 Synphase102 CompDelay CompMeltrn ARP Tripletdelay Bigverb Syncpulse compbass2 CompDelay3 Comp501 RMIPhase1 JoeyLeslie122 GMReverb GMChorus

D-20

PC3 Objects (V 2) Effect Presets with Algorithms

Effect Presets with Algorithms

How to Use These Tables
EacheffectpresetinthePC3(foreffectsboxeswithintheChaineditor)isbasedonaneffect algorithmfromtheKurzweilKSP8effectsprocessor.TomakethefullestuseofthePC3seffects, youwillneedtodownloadacopyoftheKSP8AlgorithmReferencefromtheKurzweilMusic Systemswebsite.Thisbookprovidesextensivedetailonalleffectsparameters.Foreaseofuse, thealgorithmsareindexedandlinkedbynameandnumber. Forexample,tofindinformationontheavailableparametersforPC3effectspreset1Small WoodBooth,firstrefertothechartbelowforthenameandnumberofthepresetsunderlying algorithm.Inthiscase,theKSP8algorithmis4ClassicPlace.ThedescriptionoftheClassic Placealgorithmbeginsonpage19oftheKSP8AlgorithmReference,andits3pagesofparameters aredescribedstartingonpage21oftheKSP8AlgorithmReference.

Reverbs
Booth/ Ambience 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Room 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 SmallWoodBooth NaturalRoom PrettySmallPlace NiceLittleBooth SunRoom Soundboard AddMoreAir StandardBooth ADistanceAway LivePlace ViewingBooth SmallCloset AddAmbience WithAMic BrightSmallRoom BassyRoom PercussiveRoom SmallStudioRoom ClassRoom UtilityRoom ThickRoom TheRealRoom SmallDrumRoom alg4ClassicPlace alg5ClassicVerb alg4ClassicPlace alg1MiniVerb alg5ClassicVerb alg7TQVerb alg10OmniPlace alg8DiffusePlace alg6TQPlace alg8DiffusePlace alg1MiniVerb alg10OmniPlace alg1MiniVerb alg4ClassicPlace alg1MiniVerb alg1MiniVerb alg1MiniVerb alg4ClassicPlace alg5ClassicVerb alg5ClassicVerb alg5ClassicVerb alg5ClassicVerb alg1MiniVerb 2U 2U 2U 1U 2U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 1U 3U 1U 2U 1U 1U 1U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 1U

D-21

PC3 Objects (V 2) Effect Presets with Algorithms

24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Chamber 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 Hall 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

RealBigRoom TheComfyClub SpittyDrumRoom StallOne GreenRoom TablaRoom LargeRoom PlateyRoom Bathroom DrumRoom SmallDarkRoom RealRoom BrtEmptyRoom MedLargeRoom BiggerPercRoom SizzlyDrumRoom LiveChamber BrassChamber SaxChamber PlebeChamber JudgeJudyChamber BloomChamber ClassicalChamber InTheStudio MyGarage CoolDarkPlace SmallHall MediumHall RealNiceverb OperaHouse MosqueRoom GrandioseHall ElegantHall BrightHall Ballroom SpaciousHall ClassicChapel

alg5ClassicVerb alg9DiffuseVerb alg7TQVerb alg7TQVerb alg7TQVerb alg12PanauralRoom alg7TQVerb alg14GrandPlate alg5ClassicVerb alg12PanauralRoom alg12PanauralRoom alg5ClassicVerb alg7TQVerb alg12PanauralRoom alg7TQVerb alg5ClassicVerb alg11OmniVerb alg1MiniVerb alg1MiniVerb alg1MiniVerb alg7TQVerb alg7TQVerb alg7TQVerb alg4ClassicPlace alg4ClassicPlace alg11OmniVerb alg5ClassicVerb alg1MiniVerb alg5ClassicVerb alg5ClassicVerb alg7TQVerb alg1MiniVerb alg1MiniVerb alg1MiniVerb alg1MiniVerb alg5ClassicVerb alg5ClassicVerb

2U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 2U 3U 3U 2U 3U 3U 3U 2U 3U 1U 1U 1U 3U 3U 3U 2U 2U 3U 2U 1U 2U 2U 3U 1U 1U 1U 1U 2U 2U

D-22

PC3 Objects (V 2) Effect Presets with Algorithms

61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 Plate 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97

SemisweetHall PipesHall ReflectiveHall SmooothHall EmptyStage PadSpace BobsDiffuseHall AbbeyPianoHall ShortHall TheLongHaul PredelayHall SweeterHall ThePianoHall BloomHall RecitalHall GenericHall BurstSpace RealDenseHall ConcertHall StandingOvation FlintyHall HighSchoolGym MyDreamy481!! DeepHall SweetHall Soundbrd/rvb Long&Narrow LongPreDlyHall SchoolStairwell RealPlate BrightPlate MedmWarmPlate BloomPlate CleanPlate PlateMail RealSmoothPlate ClassicPlate

alg5ClassicVerb alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg5ClassicVerb alg5ClassicVerb alg7TQVerb alg11OmniVerb alg9DiffuseVerb alg7TQVerb alg13StereoHall alg7TQVerb alg9DiffuseVerb alg7TQVerb alg7TQVerb alg9DiffuseVerb alg12PanauralRoom alg12PanauralRoom alg9DiffuseVerb alg7TQVerb alg9DiffuseVerb alg11OmniVerb alg7TQVerb alg7TQVerb alg9DiffuseVerb alg9DiffuseVerb alg5ClassicVerb alg11OmniVerb alg7TQVerb alg11OmniVerb alg4ClassicPlace alg14GrandPlate alg14GrandPlate alg7TQVerb alg9DiffuseVerb alg9DiffuseVerb alg11OmniVerb alg9DiffuseVerb alg5ClassicVerb

2U 2U 2U 2U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 2U 3U 3U 3U 2U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 2U

D-23

PC3 Objects (V 2) Effect Presets with Algorithms

98 99 XL 100 101 102 103 104 Reverse 105 106 107 Gated w/Comprs 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 Unusual 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134

WeightyPlatey HugeTightPlate ImmenseMosque Dreamverb SplendidPalace BigGym HugeBatcave ReverseReverb1 ReverseReverb2 ReverseReverb3 GatedReverb GatePlate VocalRoom VocalStage Reverb>Compress Reverb>Compress2 DrumComprs>Rvb RvrbCompression SnappyDrumRoom Roomitizer LiveToTape L:SmlRmR:Hall NonLinear1 NonLinear2 NonLinear3 ExponentBooth DrumLatch1 DrumLatch2 DiffuseGate AcidTripRoom RingyDrumPlate OilTank WobblyPlate PitcherHall DistantTVRoom DrumNeurezonate Growler

alg5ClassicVerb alg9DiffuseVerb alg7TQVerb alg10OmniPlace alg5ClassicVerb alg11OmniVerb alg12PanauralRoom alg15FiniteVerb alg15FiniteVerb alg15FiniteVerb alg3GatedMiniVerb alg3GatedMiniVerb alg53Gate+Cmp[EQ]+Rvb alg53Gate+Cmp[EQ]+Rvb alg51Reverb<>Compress alg51Reverb<>Compress alg51Reverb<>Compress alg50Reverb+Compress alg50Reverb+Compress alg50Reverb+Compress alg50Reverb+Compress alg2DualMiniVerb alg10OmniPlace alg15FiniteVerb alg6TQPlace alg10OmniPlace alg10OmniPlace alg10OmniPlace alg9DiffuseVerb alg10OmniPlace alg104GatedLaserVerb alg104GatedLaserVerb alg104GatedLaserVerb alg383Pitcher+Miniverb alg383Pitcher+Miniverb alg102MonoLaserVerb alg104GatedLaserVerb

2U 3U 3U 3U 2U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 2U 2U 4U 4U 3U 3U 3U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 2U 2U 1U 3U

D-24

PC3 Objects (V 2) Effect Presets with Algorithms

Laserverb

135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143

LaserVerb Laserwaves CheapLaserVerb GatedLaserVerb RvrsLaserVerb LazerfazerEchoes SimpleLaserVerb Crystallizer SpryYoungBoy GunshotVerb Slapverb FarBloom Room+Delay NewHallw/Delay DelayBigHall

alg100LaserVerb alg100LaserVerb alg101LaserVerbLite alg104GatedLaserVerb alg103RevrseLaserVerb alg102MonoLaserVerb alg102MonoLaserVerb alg100LaserVerb alg101LaserVerbLite alg105LasrDly<>Reverb alg11OmniVerb alg9DiffuseVerb alg105LasrDly<>Reverb alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb

3U 3U 2U 3U 4U 1U 1U 3U 2U 2U 3U 3U 2U 2U 2U

Rvbw/Dly

144 145 146 147 148 149

Delays
DELAY 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 BasicDelay1/8 BasicDly250ms SimpleSlap60ms TightSlapbk30ms MedSlapback76ms LongishSlap95ms WideSlapbk76ms TiteSlapAmb50ms 33msAmbience 17msAmbience StereoDelayms StereoFlamDelay CheapTapeEcho BetterTapeEcho StereoTapeSlap DubDelayms 4TapDelayBPM 4TapDlyPanms alg1504TapDelayBPM alg190MovingDelay alg190MovingDelay alg190MovingDelay alg190MovingDelay alg1514TapDelay alg191DualMovDelay alg191DualMovDelay alg191DualMovDelay alg191DualMovDelay alg1514TapDelay alg191DualMovDelay alg154Spectral4Tap alg171DegenRegen alg171DegenRegen alg190MovingDelay alg1504TapDelayBPM alg1514TapDelay 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 2U 4U 4U 1U 1U 1U

D-25

PC3 Objects (V 2) Effect Presets with Algorithms

168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199

SemiCircle4Tap 8TapDelayBPM Multitapsms DiffuseSlaps OffbeatFlamDelay SloppyEchoes PadPsychosis 500msBehindSrce DubSkanqueDly ElectronicaSlap Spectral4Tap AstralTaps SpectraShapeTaps FanfareInGmaj EckoPlecksBPM EckoPlecksms Degenerator NanobotFeedback Takesawhile... WaitforUFO NewsUpdate TimbreTaps LaserDelay>Rvb Furbelows Festoons DuckedDelay Drum+BassZapper 3BandDlyDrums=! WarpedEchoes Weenvox L:FlangeR:Delay 2Dlys1Chr1Flng

alg1514TapDelay alg1528TapDelayBPM alg156ComplexEcho alg156ComplexEcho alg1504TapDelayBPM alg156ComplexEcho alg191DualMovDelay alg156ComplexEcho alg154Spectral4Tap alg156ComplexEcho alg154Spectral4Tap alg154Spectral4Tap alg155Spectral6Tap alg155Spectral6Tap alg170DegenRegenBPM alg171DegenRegen alg170DegenRegenBPM alg170DegenRegenBPM alg170DegenRegenBPM alg170DegenRegenBPM alg172SwitchLoops alg105LasrDly<>Reverb alg105LasrDly<>Reverb alg9DiffuseVerb alg9DiffuseVerb alg174GatedDelay alg174GatedDelay alg1733BandDelay alg191DualMovDelay alg190MovingDelay alg191DualMovDelay alg192DualMvDly+MvDly

1U 2U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 2U 1U 2U 2U 3U 3U 4U 4U 4U 4U 4U 4U 2U 2U 2U 3U 3U 2U 2U 2U 1U 1U 1U 2U

D-26

PC3 Objects (V 2) Effect Presets with Algorithms

Chorus
CHORUS 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 BasicChorus SmoothChorus Chorusier OrdinaryChorus SlowSpinChorus ChorusMorris EverydayChorus ThickChorus SoftChorus RockChorus SmStereoChorus LgStereoChorus FullChorus DenseGtrChorus StandrdGtrChor BassChorus StereoChorus ChorusFastback WideChorus NickelChorus RichNoodle PinchChorusDelay StChorus+Delay StChor+3vs2Delay CDRforLeadGtr alg202DualChorus1 alg202DualChorus1 alg202DualChorus1 alg202DualChorus1 alg202DualChorus1 alg202DualChorus1 alg202DualChorus1 alg202DualChorus2 alg202DualChorus2 alg202DualChorus2 alg200Chorus1 alg201Chorus2 alg402Chorus<>4Tap alg201Chorus2 alg406StChorus+Delay alg202DualChorus1 alg202DualChorus2 alg400Chorus+Delay alg202DualChorus2 alg387WackedPitchLFO alg190MovingDelay alg406StChorus+Delay alg406StChorus+Delay alg406StChorus+Delay alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 2U 2U 2U 1U 2U 2U 2U 1U 1U 2U 1U 2U 3U 1U 1U 1U 1U 2U

Flange
FLANGE 225 226 227 228 229 230 BigSlowFlange SqueezeFlange SweetFlange ThroatyFlange PseudoAnaGtrFlng FlangerDouble alg225Flanger1 alg225Flanger1 alg225Flanger1 alg225Flanger1 alg225Flanger1 alg225Flanger1 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U

D-27

PC3 Objects (V 2) Effect Presets with Algorithms

231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249

WetlipFlange SimplyFlange AnalogFlanger SoftEdgeFlange NedFlangers WispyFlange CrystalFlange NarrowResFlange TightSlapFlange FlangedTaps StFlange+Delay StFlng+3vs2Delay SingingFlanger DampedEchoFlange StereoFlanger GulpFlange SplatFlange SpreadFlange CacophonousFlng

alg225Flanger1 alg225Flanger2 alg225Flanger2 alg225Flanger2 alg225Flanger1 alg225Flanger1 alg456StFlange+Delay alg452Flange<>4Tap alg450Flange+Delay alg455Flange<>LasrDly alg456StFlange+Delay alg456StFlange+Delay alg456StFlange+Delay alg456StFlange+Delay alg225Flanger2 alg225Flanger1 alg225Flanger1 alg225Flanger1 alg225Flanger1

1U 2U 2U 2U 1U 1U 1U 2U 1U 2U 1U 1U 1U 1U 2U 1U 1U 1U 1U

Phaser
PHASER 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 SlowDeepPhaser Circles SaucepanPhaser ThunderPhaser FastPhaser VibratoPhaser Fast&SlowPhaser Wawawawawawawawa SlowSwishPhase SlipperySlope StaticPhaser1 StaticPhaser2 StaticPhaser3 StaticPhaser4 StaticPhaser5 alg251LFOPhaserTwin alg250LFOPhaser alg253SingleLFOPhaser alg254VibratoPhaser alg251LFOPhaserTwin alg254VibratoPhaser alg250LFOPhaser alg253SingleLFOPhaser alg253SingleLFOPhaser alg385FrequencyOffset alg255ManualPhaser alg255ManualPhaser alg255ManualPhaser alg255ManualPhaser alg257AllpassPhaser4 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 2U 1U 1U 1U 1U 4U

D-28

PC3 Objects (V 2) Effect Presets with Algorithms

265 266 267 268 269

SlowRiser BarberPoleNotch BarberPolePeak AllTheWayDown WestwardWaves

alg258BarberpoleComb alg258BarberpoleComb alg258BarberpoleComb alg258BarberpoleComb alg385FrequencyOffset

4U 4U 4U 4U 2U

Trem / Panner / Spatial

TREM/ PANNER/ SPATIAL 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 TremoloBPM FastTremoloBPM TremoloinHz FastPulseTremolo SimplePanner DualPanner Widespread WidenerMn>St DynamStereoizer alg270TremoloBPM alg270TremoloBPM alg271Tremolo alg270TremoloBPM alg275AutoPanner alg276DualAutoPanner alg280StereoImage alg281Mono>Stereo alg282DynamicStereoize 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 2U 1U 1U 2U

Rotary
ROTARY 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 CleanRotorsfast CleanRotorsslow CleanRotorsfC1 CleanRotorsfV1 CleanRotorsfHi CleanRotorssHi SlightDstRotorf SlightDstRotors DirtyRotorsfast DirtyRotorsslow MoreDistRotorf MoreDistRotors HeavyDistRotorf HeavyDistRotors ResRotor1fast ResRotor1slow FullRotors4fast alg290VibChor+Rotor2 alg290VibChor+Rotor2 alg290VibChor+Rotor2 alg290VibChor+Rotor2 alg290VibChor+Rotor2 alg290VibChor+Rotor2 alg291Distort+Rotary alg291Distort+Rotary alg292VC+Dist+HiLoRotr alg292VC+Dist+HiLoRotr alg293VC+Dist+1Rotor2 alg293VC+Dist+1Rotor2 alg294VC+Dist+HiLoRot2 alg294VC+Dist+HiLoRot2 alg295Rotor1 alg295Rotor1 alg296VC+Dist+Rotor4 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 1U 1U 4U

D-29

PC3 Objects (V 2) Effect Presets with Algorithms

297 298 299

FullRotors4slow VibChorStortCab HiLoRotoKB3

alg296VC+Dist+Rotor4 alg298BigKB3Effect alg298BigKB3Effect

4U 4U 3U

Distortion
DIST 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 329 ClassicGtrDist CrunchGuitar SaturatedGtrDist Mean70sFunkGtr BlownSpeaker SynthDistortion Superphasulate DistCabEPiano Distortion+EQ BurntTransistor SubtleDistortion Alittledirty SlightOverload ODriveGtrLdDlCh KrazyGtrComper MildGtrOD+Dly+Fl LeadGtrDlyFlng DrumShaper SubtleDrumShape SuperShaper 3BandShaper New3BandShaper Shaper>Flange Shaper>Reverb Aliaser alg310Gate+TubeAmp alg310Gate+TubeAmp alg310Gate+TubeAmp alg310Gate+TubeAmp alg390Chaos! alg303PolyDistort+EQ alg170DegenRegenBPM alg301MonoDistort+Cab alg302MonoDistort+EQ alg304StereoDistort+EQ alg300MonoDistortion alg305SubtleDistort alg305SubtleDistort alg317TubeAmp<>MD>Chor alg317TubeAmp<>MD>Chor alg320PolyAmp<>MD>Flan alg318TubeAmp<>MD>Flan alg306SuperShaper alg3073BandShaper alg306SuperShaper alg3073BandShaper alg3073BandShaper alg321Flange<>Shaper alg322Shaper<>Reverb alg308Quantize+Alias 3U 3U 3U 3U 2U 2U 4U 2U 2U 3U 1U 1U 1U 3U 3U 3U 3U 1U 2U 1U 2U 2U 2U 2U 1U

D-30

PC3 Objects (V 2) Effect Presets with Algorithms

Dynamics
DYNAMICS 330 331 332 333 334 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 HKCompressor3:1 HKCompressor5:1 SKFBComprs6:1 SKCompressor9:1 SKCompressr12:1 Compressw/SCEQ Compress/Expand Comprs/Expnd+EQ Expander SimpleGate Gatew/SCEQ 3BandCompressor 3BandCompress2 MidCompressor OddHarmSuppress 60HzBuzzKill DualSKCompress DualComprsSCEQ Dual3BandComprs alg330HardKneeCompress alg330HardKneeCompress alg331SoftKneeCompress alg331SoftKneeCompress alg331SoftKneeCompress alg332Compressw/SCEQ alg341Compress/Expand alg342Comp/Exp+EQ alg340Expander alg343Gate alg344Gatew/SCEQ alg3363BandCompress alg3363BandCompress alg335BandCompress alg374HarmonicSuppress alg374HarmonicSuppress alg347DualSKCompress alg348DualComprsSCEQ alg349Dual3BandComp 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 2U 2U 3U 1U 1U 2U 4U 4U 3U 2U 2U 2U 3U 8U

EQ / Filters
EQ/ FILTERS 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 362 AMRadio UShapedEQ 5BandEQFlat GraphicEQFlat DualGraphicEQ Dual5BandEQ BasicEnvFilter PhunkEnvFilter SynthEnvFilter BassEnvFilter EPnoEnvFilter LFOSweepFilter alg3503BandEQ alg3503BandEQ alg3515BandEQ alg352GraphicEQ alg353DualGraphicEQ alg354Dual5BandEQ alg360EnvFollowFilt alg360EnvFollowFilt alg360EnvFollowFilt alg360EnvFollowFilt alg360EnvFollowFilt alg362LFOSweepFilter 1U 1U 3U 3U 3U 3U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U

D-31

PC3 Objects (V 2) Effect Presets with Algorithms

363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 395 396 397 398 399

DoubleRiseFilter CircleBandsweep TripFilter ResonantFilter DualResFilter 2BandEnhancer 3BandEnhancer ExtreemEnhancer HFStimulator RingModulator PitcherA PitcherB PolyPtVoxChanger HollowPolyPitchr Pitcher+Chorus Pitcher+Flange Pitcher+Chor+Dly Pitcher+Flng+Dly RingLinger Waterford HipHopAura Woodenize Marimbafication FrequencyOffset DrumLoosener DrumTightener VoxHonker EQMorpherahoo EQMorphereeaa EQMorpherawer Contact DrumFrightener MadHatter Fallout Ascension

alg362LFOSweepFilter alg362LFOSweepFilter alg362LFOSweepFilter alg363ResonantFilter alg364DualResFilter alg3702BandEnhancer alg3713BandEnhancer alg3713BandEnhancer alg372HFStimulate1 alg380RingModulator alg381Pitcher alg381Pitcher alg382PolyPitcher alg382PolyPitcher alg411MonoPitcher+Chor alg461MonoPitcher+Flan alg409Pitcher+Chor+Dly alg459Pitcher+Flan+Dly alg390Chaos! alg103RevrseLaserVerb alg256AllpassPhaser3 alg256AllpassPhaser3 alg256AllpassPhaser3 alg385FrequencyOffset alg385FrequencyOffset alg385FrequencyOffset alg386MutualFreqOffset alg365EQMorpher alg365EQMorpher alg365EQMorpher alg387WackedPitchLFO alg387WackedPitchLFO alg387WackedPitchLFO alg387WackedPitchLFO alg387WackedPitchLFO

2U 2U 2U 1U 1U 1U 2U 2U 1U 1U 1U 1U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 4U 3U 3U 3U 2U 2U 2U 2U 4U 4U 4U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U

D-32

PC3 Objects (V 2) Effect Presets with Algorithms

Chorus / Combi
CHORUS COMBI 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 BasicChorusDelay ChorusPanDelay Chorus&Echo CDRLead CDRLead2 ChorusDelay2 Doubler&Echo ChorusBooth ChorusSmallRoom ChorusMedChamber ChorusMiniHall ChorusHiCeiling ChorBigBrtPlate CathedralChorus FlamDlyBckgrnd CDHallHalo CrackedPorcelain RichDelay FastChorusDouble MultiTapChorus ChorusedTaps MultiEchoChorus DeepChorDlyHall ClassicEPChorRm ChorusSlowHall SoftChorusHall ChorusAir PsiloChorusHall SpeeChorusDeep ChorusRoom ChorusSmallhall ChorusMedHall ChorusBigHall ChorusEchoverb alg400Chorus+Delay alg400Chorus+Delay alg400Chorus+Delay alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg400Chorus+Delay alg400Chorus+Delay alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg401Chorus+4Tap alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg400Chorus+Delay alg401Chorus+4Tap alg402Chorus<>4Tap alg405Chorus<>LasrDly alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg400Chorus+Delay alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg402Chorus<>4Tap 1U 1U 1U 2U 2U 1U 1U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 1U 2U 1U 1U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 1U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U

D-33

PC3 Objects (V 2) Effect Presets with Algorithms

434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449

ChorusBassRoom NewChorusHall FloydHall IntoTheAbyss BroadRevSlapback CarlsbadCavern Chr>GtrDst>Chr ThatsNoMoon!! LaserAmalgam Cutitout!!CDR ChorDelayBooth ChorTinRoom BoilerPlate O.T.T.Pad TheChorusCloset CD

alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg317TubeAmp<>MD>Chor alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg405Chorus<>LasrDly alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg402Chorus<>4Tap

2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 3U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U

Flange / Combi
FLANGE COMBI 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 Flange+Delay ThroatyFlangeDly SlapbackFlange FlangeBooth FlangeVerbClav FlangeAmbSmack FlangeDly3D FlDlLargeHall FlangedEdge Flange+4Tap FlangeDelayHall SloFlangeDlyRoom FlangeHall FlangeDlyBigHall FlangeTheatre FlangeTapSynth FlangeRoom FlangeEcho alg450Flange+Delay alg450Flange+Delay alg450Flange+Delay alg454 alg454 alg454 alg453Flan+Dly+Reverb alg453Flan+Dly+Reverb alg321Flange<>Shaper alg451Flange+4Tap alg453Flan+Dly+Reverb alg453Flan+Dly+Reverb alg454 alg453Flan+Dly+Reverb alg454 alg452Flange<>4Tap alg453Flan+Dly+Reverb alg452Flange<>4Tap 1U 1U 1U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 1U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U

D-34

PC3 Objects (V 2) Effect Presets with Algorithms

468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 494 495 799

Flange4Tap FlangeHall2 FlangeDlyHall FlangeDelay MechaGodzilla IndustroFlange PanningFDRoom Drum&BassFlgDly Laserflange PewterFlangeVrb WeirdFlangePlate FDHall SyntheticRmFlg SpaceFlanger LazertagFlange Flange>Pitcher Flange>Shaper PitchSpinner FDLeadMadness BriteRippleverb RotaryClub FlangeyHall Flg>GtrDst>Chr MyGtrAteYoMomma GlacialCanyon UltimaThulePad Dr.Who PassThrough

alg452Flange<>4Tap alg454 alg453Flan+Dly+Reverb alg450Flange+Delay alg451Flange+4Tap alg453Flan+Dly+Reverb alg453Flan+Dly+Reverb alg451Flange+4Tap alg455Flange<>LasrDly alg454 alg454 alg453Flan+Dly+Reverb alg453Flan+Dly+Reverb alg452Flange<>4Tap alg455Flange<>LasrDly alg384Flange<>Pitcher alg321Flange<>Shaper alg384Flange<>Pitcher alg450Flange+Delay alg453Flan+Dly+Reverb alg453Flan+Dly+Reverb alg453Flan+Dly+Reverb alg319PolyAmp<>MD>Chor alg318TubeAmp<>MD>Flan alg456StFlange+Delay alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg225Flanger1

2U 2U 2U 1U 1U 2U 2U 1U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 1U 2U 2U 2U 3U 3U 1U 2U 1U

D-35

PC3 Objects (V 2) Keymaps

Keymaps
ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Keymap PianofLeft PianofRight PianomfLeft PianomfRight PianompLeft PianompRight Piano3VelL Piano3VelR Piano3VEasyL Piano3VEasyR PianofMono PianomfMono PianompMono Piano3VelMono Piano3VEasyM Piano440fL Piano440fR Piano440mfL Piano440mfR Piano440mpL Piano440mpR Piano4403VelL Piano4403VelR Piano4403VEZL Piano4403VEZR Piano440fMono Piano440mfM Piano440mpM ID 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 50 51 52 53 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 Keymap Piano4403VelM Piano4403VEZM Piano3VelLalt Piano3VelRalt Piano3VelragL Piano3VelragR PianofragL PianofragR Pianoalttimb1L Pianoalttimb1R Pianoalttimb2M Pianoalttimb3M kGrandPiano kSynPiano RhoadzHard RhoadzSoft Rhoadz2Vel RhoadzThump WurlyHard WurlyMed WurlySoft Wurly3Vel WurlyThump WurlyKeyReleas FMElecPiano Clav Clavalt Clavalt2 ID 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 Keymap ClavKeyRelease Harpsichord HarpsichordRel Accordion Celesta kHarpsichord kClav kClavRel kAccordion B3Bars13 B3Full B3KeyClick B3DistWave B3FullWave B3Bars13Wave B3Bars14Wave B3SWWave ToneWheelWave kToneWheelOrga Trumpets Trombets Trombetsalt Trombones Trombonesalt LowBones TenorSax TenorSaxalt TenorSaxFast

D-36

PC3 Objects (V 2) Keymaps

ID 99 100 101 102 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139

Keymap TenorSaxmed Bari/TenorSax BaritoneSax LegatoTenorSax StereoStrings StringsLeft StringsRight MeteorStrings kEnsembleString kSynstrings1 kSynstrings2 kEnsStrings2 Take6AahAttack Take6AahLoop Take6AahLoopa Take6OohAttack Take6OohLoop Take6OohLoopa Take6OohLoopa2 Take6OohGlide Take6Bop Take6B(op) Take6Dot Take6Dotalt Take6D(ot) Take6Doop Take6Doopalt Take6D(oop) Take6Accents2V Take6Accents3V kTake6AahLoop

ID 140 141 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178

Keymap kTake6OohLoop kSynVox SineWave Partials12 Partials13 Partials14 Partials16 Partials18 Partials112 Partials123 Partials124 Partials1246 Partials135 Partials234 Partials24Gli Partials210Evn Partials212Evn Partials34 Partials345 Partials4567 Partials567 Partials511Odd Partials1115 Partials1320 Partials1621 Partialsprime SawtoothWave SawWaveDull SawWaveDuller SawWaveDullest TriangleWave

ID 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 212 213 214 215 216

Keymap SquareWave SquareWaveDull PulseWave1/3 BuzzWave BellWave ClavWave SineWavealttun SynthVox Koreana HybridPan ReedPipeBassoon FlutePipeChiff kMDistGuitar kGMCleanStrat kShiftGuitar SteelStringGtr StlStrGtrHiDecay CleanElecGtr DistortedGuitar kElecJazzGtr kAcousticGuitar k5StringGuitar kShiftGuitar2 kSingleMute ksynElecJazzGtr EBass1Finger EBass1Fingalt EBass1Fngalt2 EBass2Finger EBassSlap SynthFretless

D-37

PC3 Objects (V 2) Keymaps

ID 217 218 219 220 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 260 261 262 263 264 265 266

Keymap UprightBass UprightBass2 kEBassSlap kAcousticBass DryKit1 DryKit2 DryKit3 AmbientKit1 AmbientKit2 ElectricKit1 ElectricKit2 LightKit HybridKit1/L HybridKit2/R HybridKit3/L HybridKit4/R KicksandSnares JazzToms/Kicks SineToms/Kicks RideCymbal DrumLyrs1C4B4 DrumLyrs2C4B4 SFXLayersC4B4 ReverseDrums Percussion1 Percussion2 Percussion3 Percussion4 Percussion5 PercLayers1 PercLayers2

ID 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316

Keymap PercLayers3 PercLayers4 PercLayers5 PercLayers6 PercLayers7 CongaMooseLyr VeryMutedTriang1 Marimba Vibes Vibes/Bells Agogo/Bells AgogoBellsKeys TriangleKeys LayerVibes Flute Flute2 Oboe EnglishHorn Bassoon Bsn/Ehrn/Oboe Bassoon/Oboe Clarinet EngHorn/Oboe kSynfluteBrt kSynflutemello FrenchHorn FrenchHrnSec BaritoneHorn Trumpet Trombone Trombone/Trumpet

ID 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 333 337 341 342 343 344 346 347 350 351 352 354 355 356 357 358 359 360

Keymap Trombet Trumpbone SoftTrumpet HarmonMuteTrp Tuba Tuba/Horn Tuba/HrnSection Tuba/SftTrp kBone/Trp2 kHarmonMuteTrp PluckedHarp HarpArpeggios HarpGliss NylonStringGtr Choir CathedralOrgan ChurchOrgan Timpani/Perc88ky BassDrum&Snare Percussion5b Timpani/Perc76ky Tam/Crsh/BD/Timp Temple&WdBlock Percussion1b Percussion2b2 kTambourinex3 kCastanetsx3 DoubleBassalt1 Castanetsx3 Tambourinex3 Glockenspiel

D-38

PC3 Objects (V 2) Keymaps

ID 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 394 395 396 397

Keymap Chimes Xylophone Timpani OrchBassDrum OrchCrash StereoTamTam TamTamLeft TamTamRight Triangle TambourineRoll Tambhit SnareRoll SnareHit Woodblock SleighBells CastanetHit CastanetUp Vibraslap TempleBlock1 TempleBlock2 TempleBlock3 TempleBlock4 BassDrum/Timpani ChurchBell PizzStrngsLeft PizzStrngsRight StereoPizzStrg TremStrngsLeft TremStrngsRight StereoTremStrg StereoTremStr2

ID 400 401 402 404 405 406 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 423 424 425 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 450

Keymap SoloViolin SoloViola SoloCello SoloDoubleBass Bass/Cello Bass/Cello/Vln Cello/Vla/Vln SoloSection1 SoloSection2 SoloSection3 SoloSection4 BagpipeDrone Bottle Chiff HarmPick HarmWave GMJazzGtr GMCleanStrat StratMutes Koto Mbira OrchestraHit GMApplause FretNoise GMBird Gunshot IceRain SynDrum Telephone SinePC3 Belltree

ID 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483

Keymap CuicaHi FiltersnapHiQ Guiro GMScratch Whistle ChineseCymbal BrushSnareHit1 BrushSnareHit2 BrushStirShort BrushStirLong 808Cowbell 808Kick 808Snare 909Clap 909ClosedHat 909OpenHat JazzKit GMStandardKit GMRoomKit GMPowerKit GMElecKit GMWhstle/metbell GMRoomTomLyr GMSynthKit GMElecTomSine GMSynthTom/Cnga GMJazzKit GMBrushKit GMBrushStir GMOrchKit GMApplause

D-39

PC3 Objects (V 2) Keymaps

ID 485 486 488 490 494 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521

Keymap 808Hats 808Congas Timpstretch MelTomKM 808cym RevCym DryKitnw54v DrySet14v DrySet24v AmbSet14v KurzHats ElecSet14v PercLayers4kits Tamb4DrmLyr FloorTom MidTom HiTom DubKit1 GlubKit StandardKit2 DrumswBass1 ASElecKit1 ASElecKit3 PhunkDrums1 StandardKit1 ElecKit3 RangoKit BoinkerKit ElecTuneKik1 GlockAltAs5 DrumPadMap1

ID 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552

Keymap ClaveTransposed PercLayers7b2 Percussion2c PercLayers2cage PercLayers7cage PercLayers1cage TempleBlock1ign TunedTBlocks1 TunedTBlocks2 SoloCelloalt1 SoloCelloalt2 DoubleBassalt2 DoubleBassalt3 OrganReeds Crashonly KitLayers1 kGuiro kBelltree kFingersnap kOrchestraHit kWhistle kBirds kIceRain kFretNoise kTelephone kGunshot kChineseCymbal kBrushSnareHit kBrushSnareHit kBrushStirShor kBrushStirLong

ID 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583

Keymap kSynDrum k808Kick k808Snare k909ClosedHat k909OpenHat k808Cowbell k909Clap kXylorelalt kSleighLoop kAgogoHi kAgogoLo kCowbell kTriangleMute kBongoHi kBongoLo kBongoSlap kCongaOpen kCongaClosed kCongaSlap kTumbaOpen kTumbaFlathand kCajonHit kCajonMute kTambourineUp kTambourineHit kMaracas kShakerUp kShakerDown kTempleBlock kVibraslap kCuica

D-40

PC3 Objects (V 2) Keymaps

ID 584 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 700 701 705 706 710 711 715 716 720 721 725 726 730 731 735 736 740 741 744 745 746 747

Keymap Glockrelalt k2vel[1____2__ k3vel[1__2__3_ k4vel[12_3_4__ k4vel[1_2_3_4_ k5vel[1_2_3_45 k6vel[1_2_3456 k7vel[1_234567 k8vel[12345678 VlnsIFullL VlnsIFullR VlnsIIFullL VlnsIIFullR ViolasFullL ViolasFullR CelliFullL CelliFullR BassesFullL BassesFullR VlnsDiv2L VlnsDiv2R ViolasDiv2L ViolasDiv2R CelliDiv2L CelliDiv2R BassesDiv2L BassesDiv2R Db/VaFullL Db/VaFullR Db/VnIFullL Db/VnIFullR

ID 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 800 801 802 810 815

Keymap Db/VnIIFullL Db/VnIIFullR Db/VnIIFull2L Db/VnIIFull2R Db/Vc/Va/VnIIFL Db/Vc/Va/VnIIFR Vc/VnIFullL Vc/VnIFullR Vc/Va/VnIIFulL Vc/Va/VnIIFulR Va/VnIIFullL Va/VnIIFullR Db/VaDivL Db/VaDivR Db/VnDivL Db/VnDivR Dbdiv/VnIfulL Dbdiv/VnIfulR Db/Vc/Va/VnDivL Db/Vc/Va/VnDivR Vc/VnDivL Vc/VnDivR Vc/Va/VnDivL Vc/Va/VnDivR Va/VnDivL Va/VnDivR CP80Hard CP80Soft CP80DualStrike MellotronString MellotronChoir

ID 820 825 830 833 834 835 836 840 841 845 846 847 848 850 851 852 899 909 999

Keymap MellotronFlute ARPStringEns ClavII Clavalt3 ClavKeyRelease Pianet FastPianet RMIElectraPno RMIElectraPno2 RMIHarpsichord RMIHarpsichord2 RMIHarpsichord3 RMIPiano3 RMIAccenter RMI_accenterlo RMI_accenterhi SineWave DiagnosticSine Silence

D-41

PC3 Objects (V 2) Samples

Samples
ID 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Sample StereoPizzF#1 StereoPizzB1 StereoPizzD2 StereoPizzF2 StereoPizzG#2 StereoPizzA#2 StereoPizzD3 StereoPizzF3 StereoPizzG#3 StereoPizzB3 StereoPizzC#4 StereoPizzE4 StereoPizzG4 StereoPizzA#4 StereoPizzC#5 StereoPizzE5 StereoPizzG#5 StereoPizzC6 StereoPizzE6 StereoPizzG#6 StereoPizzC7 StereoTremF1 StereoTremA1 StereoTremC#2 StereoTremD#2 StereoTremF#2 StereoTremA#2 StereoTremC#3 ID 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 70 72 80 83 84 Sample StereoTremD#3 StereoTremF3 StereoTremG3 StereoTremA#3 StereoTremC4 StereoTremD#4 StereoTremF#4 StereoTremA#4 StereoTremC#5 StereoTremE5 StereoTremG#5 StereoTremC#6 StereoTremE6 StereoTremA6 StereoTremC7 LeftPianof RightPianof LeftPianomf RightPianomf LeftPianomp RightPianomp LeftPianofjk RightPianofjk Rhodes RhodesThump Wurlitzer WurlitzerThump WurliKeyRel ID 90 95 96 99 100 101 105 107 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 118 119 121 122 124 125 126 127 128 130 131 132 133 Sample FMEPiano Clav ClavRelease kHarpsichordv Harpsichordv HarpschrdRelv Celesta Accordion Hammond1st3 HammondB3Full HammondKeyClick Hammond1st3b kToneWheelOrga Trumpets Trombets2 Trombones altTrombones TenorSaxes TenorSaxesfast BariSax BariSax2 Trombones Trombonesjkalt TenorSaxesmed StStringsg1 StStringsc2 StStringsgs2 StStringse3

D-42

PC3 Objects (V 2) Samples

ID 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 165 173 175 177 179 180 183

Sample StStringsgs3 StStringse4 StStringsgs4 StStringscs5 StStringsf5 StStringsd6 StStringsc7 LeftStrings RightStrings Take6Bopa Take6AahAttk Take6AahLoop Take6Bop Take6Doop Take6Dot Take6OohAttk Take6OohLoop Take6B(op) Take6D(oop) Take6(D)ot Take6AahLoopHI Take6AahLoopa Take6OohLoopa Take6Doopa Take6Dota SynVox Koreana HybridPan StlStrGtrHiDecay SteelStringGtr CleanElecGtr

ID 186 187 190 193 194 196 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 210 211 218 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263

Sample DistortedGuitar kDistortedGuita EBassFingNew EBassFnge2alt EBassFnge2al2 EBassBlkB EBassSlapBlkB synFretless TenorSaxesRVRS AcousticBassmr AcoustBassAltDcy MaracasDown Take6Bopa kEBassSlapBlk Marimba Vibes celestehiroot b3ds b3ful b3st3 b3st4 b3sw buzz dw15 dw6 e10 e12 eln15 five7 for7 fv11o

ID 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 298 299 300 301 302 303 on246 one23 one24 one2 one35 one3 onep4 onep6 onep8 onp12 prime saw sawd sawsd sawvd sine sq sqsd sxt21 third thn20 thre4 thre5 tri two4

Sample

kEDrum1Kick kEDrum1Snare LUD223 Mykik2 Sonkik Sonkikalt

D-43

PC3 Objects (V 2) Samples

ID 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334

Sample YAMkik2 BD2 BD123 BD51 E2kik2 LUDdryM LUDdryH Eamesm Eamesh PrldryM PrlambH EAMwoodH kEDrum2Kick2 LUDambM LUDambMalt LUDambH LUDambHalt YAMamb YAMambalt Snare55 Snare58 Snare87 Snare89 e2snr e2snr3 CrossStick CrossStickalt Yam102 Yam124 Yam182 Yam102alt

ID 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365

Sample Yam124alt Yam182alt ClosedHatAlt ClosedHat SlightlyOpnAlt SlightlyOpnHat OpenHat Open/ClsHat FootHat CrashCymbal2 CrashCymbalalt RideRim3 RideBell AgogoHi AgogoHienv1 AgogoHienv2 AgogoHienv3 AgogoHienv4 AgogoLo AgogoLoenv1 AgogoLoenv2 AgogoLoenv3 AgogoLoenv4 BongoHiTone BongoHienv1 BongoHienv2 BongoHienv3 BongoHienv4 BongoLoTone BongoLoenv1 BongoLoenv2

ID 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396

Sample BongoLoenv3 BongoLoenv4 BongoSlap BongoSlapenv1 BongoSlapenv2 BongoSlapenv3 CajonHit CajonMute Clap Clapenv1 Clapenv2 Clapenv3 Clave Claveenv1 Claveenv2 Claveenv3 CongaOpenTone CongaOpenenv1 CongaOpenenv2 CongaOpenenv3 TumbaOpenTone TumbaOpenenv1 TumbaOpenenv2 TumbaOpenenv3 CongaSlap CongaSlapenv1 CongaSlapenv2 CongaClosedSlap CongaClSlpenv1 CongaClSlpenv2 TumbaFlatHand

D-44

PC3 Objects (V 2) Samples

ID 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427

Sample TumbaFlatenv1 TumbaFlatenv2 TumbaFlatenv3 CowBell CowBellenv1 CowBellenv2 FingerSnap FingerSnapenv1 FingerSnapenv2 FingerSnapenv3 MaracasDown MaracasDwnenv1 MaracasUp MaracasUpenv1 ShakersDown ShakersUp TambDown TambDownenv1 TambUp TambUpenv1 TambHit TambHitenv1 TambHitenv2 TimbaleHimf TimbaleLomf TimbaleHiff TimbaleLoff TimbaleHmfenv1 TimbaleHffenv1 TimbaleLmfenv1 TimbaleLffenv1

ID 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458

Sample TimbaleShell TimbaleShellEnv1 TriangleOpen TriangleOpenEnv1 TriangleOpenEnv2 TriangleOpenEnv3 TriangleMute TriangleMuteEnv1 SplashCymbal ShakersDownnl ShakersUpnl MaracasUpja MaracasUpe1ja MaracasDownja MaracasDwne1ja Clapnoflam MaracasDownsa1 MaracasUpsa1 ShakersDownsa1 ShakersUpsa1 TambUpenv1sa1 TambDwnen1sa1 TambHitsa1 CrossStckaltAR CrashCymbalAR Sonkikrev YAMkik2rev BD123rev E2kik2rev Eamesmrev Eameshrev

ID 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489

Sample PrldryMrev PrlambHrev LUDambHrev YAMambrev Yam102rev Yam124rev Yam182rev ClosedHatrev OpenHatrev Crashrev Snare55rev e2snrrev e2snr3rev slapsnare tonalsnare newsidestick CoughKick pan Open/ClsHtIGNREL globlah2 mutatedkick mutatedkick2 warpdrop OpnHatscrape sine2 kTumbaOpenenv1 minisweep2 kCongaClosedSla kCongaSlap kickbottom2 Gong

D-45

PC3 Objects (V 2) Samples

ID 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520

Sample stoneloop pulsegrunge zipyipe bentblade vaculunt automaraca errietamb distachime popshayknroll Lazercork2 CongaOpenToneA AgogoHienv2A TimbaleHmfenv1j TumbaOpenj Claveenv1a1 CongaClsdSlpJ1 TimbaleLmfjk1 TumbaOpenenv4 CongaOpenenv4 ShakersDwnrvs CongaOpenigoff TumbaOpenigoff ShakersDownsa1j ShakersUpj AgogoHigong AgogoLogong CowBellgong CrashCymrvajk ShakersUpjk2 ShakersDownj1 ShakersUpj3

ID 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551

Sample Claveenv2bjk Clavee1altcstn MaracasDwnenv1 CrossStickgt1 MaracasDowngt1 TumbaOpenigfa LegatoTenorSax kCongaOpenTone kBongoSlap Open/ClsHatR TriangleOpnRls MelTomalt GMCrashCym2 GMkik1 GMCrashrev GMELECKiK kBongoLoTone kBongoHiTone kTriangleMute kAgogoLo kAgogoHi kEDrum2HHClose kEDrum2HHOpen kSnareHit kSnareRoll kTimpani kTriangle kTambHit kTambRoll kCastanetHit kCastanetUp

ID 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 577 578 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610

Sample kSleighBells kTriangle(rel) kChimes kCelesta kXylophone kHarp kAcousticBass kChurchBell kTempleBlock kGuiro kBelltree kOrchestraHit kFretNoise kTelephone kGlockrelalt kXylorelalt kTambHit kMaracas BariSax2 TrombonesMod Flute Oboe EnglishHorn Bassoon DblReeds Clarinet FrenchHorn FrenchHrnSec BaritoneHorn Trumpet/Trombone SoftTrumpet

D-46

PC3 Objects (V 2) Samples

ID 611 613 614 615 618 620 621 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 635 636 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 646 647 648 649

Sample HarmonMuteTrp Tuba Harp HarpArpeggios NylonStringGtr Glockenspiel K250Choir K250PipeOrgans Chimes Xylophone Timpani OrchBassDrum kGlockenspiel OrchCrash OrchCrashjk1 StereoTamTam TamTamLeft TamTamRight Triangle DarkTriangle Triangle(rel) TambourineRoll Tambhit SnareRoll SnareHit Woodblock SleighBells CastanetHit CastanetUp Vibraslap TempleBlock1

ID 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 666 667 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686

Sample TempleBlock2 TempleBlock3 TempleBlock4 ChurchBell kVibraslap SoloViolin SoloViola SoloCello FastSoloCello SoloDoubleBass PizzStrngsLeft PizzStrngsRight TremStrngsLeft TremStrngsRight kChiff Bagpipe Bottle Chiff HarmPick HarmWave GMJazzGtr GMCleanStrat StratMutes Koto Mbira OrchestraHit Belltree CuicaHi Filtersnap Guiro Scratch

ID 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717

Sample Whistle ChineseCymbal BrushSnareHit1 BrushSnareHit2 BrushStirShort BrushStirLong 808Cowbell 808Kick 808Snare 909Clap 909ClosedHat 909OpenHat GMApplause FretNoise GMBird Gunshot IceRain SynDrum Telephone SinePC2ROM1 Metrobell kEDrum2Clap kWoodblock Woodblockshort GM808Kick VibraslapGM GMHiGuiro GMGuiro CuicaHialt CuicaLoalt kEDrum2Snare1

D-47

PC3 Objects (V 2) Samples

ID 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 750 751 755 756 760

Sample Belltreealt FS808Tom GMChinCym GMShrtWhistle OrchCrashjk1 OrchCrasha2 TambourineRoll OrchBassDruma kOrchCrashjk1 SnareHits1 SnareRoll Tambhit SleighBells TempleBlock1ign SoftTrpPipes Glockenspiel Timpani kEDrum1Cowbell kEDrum1Kick kBrushStirLong kBrushStirShor kBrushSnareHit kBrushSnareHit kIceRain kFingerSnap kCuica VlnsIFullL VlnsIFullR VlnsIIFullL VlnsIIFullR ViolasFullL

ID 761 765 766 770 771 775 776 780 781 785 786 790 791 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 810 815 820 825 830 834 835 836 840 845

Sample ViolasFullR CelliFullL CelliFullR BassesFullL BassesFullR VlnsDiv2L VlnsDiv2R ViolasDiv2L ViolasDiv2R CelliDiv2L CelliDiv2R BassesDiv2L BassesDiv2R SplitExtFullL SplitExtFullR SplitExtDivL SplitExtDivR SineWave LeftPianofjk RightPianofjk CP80EGrand MellotronStrings MellotronChoir MellotronFlute ARPStringEnsemble ClavII ClavKeyRelease Pianet FastPianet RMIElectraPiano RMIHarpsichorda

ID 850 851 852 899 900 901 902 904 950 998 999

Sample RMIAccenter RMI_accenterlo RMI_accenterhi SineWave Trombonesjkalt CrossStickgt1 MaracasDowngt1 sinenodemph TenorSaxesmed sinenodemph silence

D-48

PC3 Objects (V 2) Arpeggiator Shift Patterns

Arpeggiator Shift Patterns

ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Shift Pattern major minor Oct+ Oct Oct2x 1sn12s FullMajor FullMinor Major7 Minor7 MajorMaj7 Sus2 Sus4 FullSpanish Dim Dim7d Dim7m PentaA PentaB PentaC MajArpOct Root5Oct5 Root5/4/5 1stInvM 1stInvM2 1stInvm 2ndInvM 2ndInvm ID 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Shift Pattern BacknForth 1InvMin3 Root5/3/5 Root5/m3/5 Root6/4/6 bluesy1 bluesy2 bluesy3 bluesy4 rashi1 rashi2 rashi3 rashi4 petals1 petals2 petals3 Urger1 Urger2 Urger3 Urger4 Hala1 Satch Satch2 Cascade TripletCascade Buzzer Angus BouncingZero ID 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 1To3 1To3b Blues Blade Repeatw/Rests1 Repeatw/Rests2 Repeatw/Rests3 Bass1 Immenence Immenence2 Minor1 Minor2 Minor3 3NoteDrumArp onefive mysterious1 mysterious2 mysterious3 percolator1 percolator2 percolator3 percolator4 sparser1 sparser2 boomboomwack boomboomquick herecomesda herecomesda2 Shift Pattern

D-49

PC3 Objects (V 2) Arpeggiator Shift Patterns

ID 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132

Shift Pattern herecomesda3 moving1 moving2 moving3 wheresone? wheresone?2 happyone happyone2 crafty1 crafty3 crafty4 crafty5 cando1 cando3 chromoup1 RisingMinor Minor7Pattern Oct5thupdown Major1A Major1B Major1C Minor1A Minor1B Minor1C 48StepTemplate 24StepTemplate 16StepTemplate 8StepTemplate OctaveRhythm1 MinorVar1 DrumBeat1

ID 200 as1

Shift Pattern

D-50

PC3 Objects (V 2) Arpeggiator Velocity Patterns

Arpeggiator Velocity Patterns

ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Velocity Pattern PseudoSine LoHi HiLoLo HiLoLoLo HiLoLoHiLoHi 6pattern 12patternA 12patternB X0 0X X00 XX0 X000 XX00 XXX0 X0000X X00X0X XX0X0X XXXXX0 X000000X X0000X0X XXXXXXX0 0X00XX00 X000X0X0 XX00X0X0 XX00XXX0 XX0XXXX0 pat12A pat12B ID 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 50 51 52 53 54 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 Velocity Pattern pat12C pat12D pat24A pat24B pat24C pat24D LoHi2 trip1 1/4notetriplet 16thsPattern1 16NotePattern2 Rhythm1 Rhythm2 Bass1 ARPKIK1 ARPSNR1 ARPHAT1 Syn1 perco1 perco2 rebound1 rebound2 pulser1 pulser2 pulser3 pulser4 pulser5 echo1 echo2 ID 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 200 201 202 203 Velocity Pattern echo3 echo4 echo5 echo6 echo7 echo8 echo9 echo10 echo11 echo12 echo13 echo14 echo15 dubecho1 E.BassArp PercussionArp 8thHiHat1 8thDelay1 8thTripDelay1 Syn2 48StepTemplate 24StepTemplate 16StepTemplate 8StepTemplate SpeedUp Trancer1 Trancer2 ElectroBass1 ElectroGtr1

D-51

PC3 Objects (V 2) Arpeggiator Velocity Patterns

ID 204 205 206 207 208 209 210

Velocity Pattern offbeats01 BalladBass1 OneandTwo OneandTwo2 OneandTwo3 Offbeat8ths Andoneand

D-52

PC3 Legacy File Conversion Object Types and Conversion Details

Appendix E PC3 Legacy File Conversion

ThePC3canloadobjectsfromolderKurzweilK2seriesproducts.Loadedobjectsareconverted toobjecttypesnativetothePC3(seebelowforobjecttypesthatcanbeconverted.)Someobject parameterscannotbeconvertedandmustbeadjustedbytheuserafterconversion(seeobject typesbelowfordetails.)ThePC3doesnotloadsamples,soduringkeymapconversionthePC3 willtrytofindsimilarsamplestouseinthePC3ROM.Thisprocessmayormaynotbe successful.ThePC3isunabletoconvertthesampleskippingparameter(SmpSkp,)soPC3ROM samplesusedforconvertedK2serieskeymapscanonlybetransposedupwardbyoneoctave. Onlylegacyobjectsendingwiththefileextension.P3K,.K26,.K25,or.KRZcanbeloaded andconverted.

Object Types and Conversion Details

Keymap Objects
AllKseriesKeymapobjectscanbeloaded,allparameterswillbeusedorconvertedtoPC3 specificparameters.ThePC3isunabletoconvertthesampleskippingparameter(SmpSkp,)so PC3ROMsamplesusedforconvertedK2serieskeymapscanonlybetransposedupwardby oneoctave.

Program Objects
MostKseriesProgramobjectscanbeloaded,butFXarenotconvertedandmustbesetbythe user.AreverbeffectissetbydefaultforconvertedPrograms.SomeDSPALGSandDSPobjects (somefilters,oscillators,etc.)cannotbeconverted,sousermayhavetoadjustsomeProgram layerstousenewALGsorDSPobjects.ThePC3doesnotloadsamples,soduringkeymap conversionthePC3willtrytofindsimilarsamplestouseinthePC3ROM.Thisprocessmayor maynotbesuccessful.ThePC3isunabletoconvertthesampleskippingparameter(SmpSkp,) soPC3ROMsamplesusedforconvertedK2serieskeymapscanonlybetransposedupwardby oneoctave.KB3programscreatedwithaK2500orK2600cannotbeloadedtothePC3,however thePC3containsavarietyofKB3programswhichcaneasilybemodifiedandedited.Also, TripleModeprogramscreatedwiththeK26seriescannotbeloadedtothePC3,howeverPC3 programscanuseCascadeMode.CascadeModeallowsaprogramsignaltoberoutedthrough upto32layersofDSPalgorithms(seeAltInputforAlgorithms(CascadeMode) on page 627for details.)

Setup Objects
AllKseriesSetupobjectscanbeloaded,butFXarenotconvertedandtheusersetProgram effectsareusedbydefault(ProgramFXarenotconvertedandmustbesetbytheuser.)Also,any controllersettingsforafourthswitchpedalwillnotbeconverted(becausethePC3onlyhas threeswitchpedals.)

E-1

PC3 Legacy File Conversion Object Types and Conversion Details

E-2

Index
Numerics
50% Weight 9-24

Atk Time 9-16 Attack 9-17 Attack parameter (ASR) 6-41 Attack Portamento parameter (Common) 6-36 Attack Time and Level parameters (AmpEnv) 6-43 Audio cables 2-2 AutoPan 9-24

A
A/Dry->B parameter 9-12 A->B cfg parameter 9-12 About 11-17 Adding layers 6-52 additional sounds 1-5 Adjust parameter (EnvCtl) 6-46 Adjusting sample volumes 14-4 Algorithms D-21 Editing 6-28 Aliaser effect 9-19 All Controllers Off 10-6 All Notes Off 10-6 Alpha Wheel 3-9 Alphabetic entry 3-9, 5-3 Alphanumeric pad 3-9 Alt Input for Algorithms 6-27 Alternative Attack parameter (Keymap) Parameters Keymap 6-16 Alternative Start Sample Editor 14-12 AMPENV page (Program Editor) 6-42 Amplitude envelope Decay segment 6-43 Natural 6-42 User 6-42 Amplitude envelope parameters 6-436-44 Amplitude envelopes 6-42 Analog output settings In Setup Mode 7-6 In Song Mode 12-12 Arp Active 7-43 Arp button 3-5 Arpeggiator 7-42 Active 7-43 Beats 7-43 Duration 7-44 Glissando 7-50 Latch 7-49 Limit 7-46 Limit Option 7-46 Low Key (LoKey) and High Key (HiKey) 7-50 Order 7-43 Shift 7-46 shifting notes 7-46 Velocity 7-44 ASCII characters 5-3 ASR page (Program Editor) 6-40 ASR parameters 6-406-41 Assign sample 14-6 Assigning samples to keymaps 14-3 Atk Rate 9-20

B
Bank Buttons 3-2 Bank Select MIDI Receive page 10-9 Banks 3-2 Basic editing 5-1 Basic MIDI channel 10-6 Bass Freq 9-15 Bass Gain 9-15 Battery 1-4 Boot Loader 1-4 Bootloader B-1 Bottom line of display 3-6 Bounce Song Mode TRACK Page 12-25 Brake 9-23 Breath 2-4 breath 1-5 Brightness 2-5 Build 9-13 Building a keymap 14-7 Buttons Panic 6-2 Bypass effects 5-7

C
Cab Bypass 9-21 Cab Preset 9-21 Cabinet HP 9-21 Cabinet LP 9-21 Cabinet simulations 9-21 Carrier ring modulation 9-25 Cascade Mode 1-3, 6-1, 6-27 Category buttons 3-4 CenterGain 9-25 CentrAtten 9-24 Chain Info Export 13-13 Chains effect D-15 Chan/Layer buttons 3-7, 5-7 Change Song Mode TRACK Page 12-30 Changing intonation key 11-8 Channel/Program (CH/PROG) Page 7-4 Setup Mode 7-4 Channels on and off 10-13 Characters 5-3 Chorus 9-18 Clicking during portamento 6-36, 6-37

Index-i

Clock 11-16 setting 2-6 Source 11-10 COMMON Page Song Mode 12-19 Common parameters 6-356-60 Compare 5-7 Compatibility K Series Objects E-1 Complex Echo 9-14 Compressors 9-16 Configuring control sources 6-9 Connecting MIDI 2-3 continuous pedals 1-5 Contour 9-20 Contrast 2-5 Control Setup 6-9 Control sources Configuring 6-9 FUNs 6-41 Key tracking 6-25 Source 1 and Source 2 6-26 Velocity tracking 6-25 Controllers saving settings in Program Mode 6-3 Controlling LFO rate 6-39 conventions for editing objects 5-1 Copy Song Editor TRACK Page 12-24 Copying layers 6-52 Creating layers 6-52 Cross Couple parameter 9-12 Crossfade parameter (Output) 6-33 Crossfade Sense parameter (Output) 6-33 Crossover 9-22 Crossover1 9-17, 9-26 Crossover2 9-17 Cursor buttons 3-7 Curve 9-22

Destination MIDI Transmit Page 10-2 Dialogs Save 5-3 diamond icon 5-4 Diff Amt 9-14 Diff Gain 9-25 Diff Scale 9-13 DiffBassF 9-26 DiffBassG 9-26 Digital audio output 2-3 Digital Output Mode 11-9 Digital Output Volume 11-9 Directories 13-3 Disk Mode 5-6, 13-1 Disk mode 4-3 Display 3-6 Dist Drive 9-21 Distortion 9-21 Dly Coarse 9-19 Dly Fine 9-19 DlyCrs 9-19 DlyFi 9-19 Double button presses 3-10 DRAWBR page (Program Editor) 6-61 Drive 9-16 Drum Remap 6-33, 11-2 Drum Tracks Song mode 12-20 Dry Bal 9-14 Ducking 9-17 Duplicate Layer soft button 6-52 Duplicating layers 6-52 Dynamic VAST 1-3, 6-1, 6-28 DynamRange 9-19

E
EarRef Lvl 9-13 Easy Audition 2-7 EDIT button 3-8 Edit button 5-7 Edit compare 5-7 Edit Song COMMON Page 12-19 EVENT Page 12-31 Editing 5-1 Editing Algorithms 6-28 editing conventions 5-1 Editing KB3 programs 6-59 Editing Samples 14-9 Editing VAST programs 6-12 EditProg Exit page 5-3 EditProg Save page 5-3 Effect Algorithms D-21 Effect Chains D-15 Effect Presets D-21 Effect-box Parameters 9-12 Effects Parameters 9-12

D
Data entry 3-9 DC Offset 9-19 Decay segment 6-43 Decay Time and Level parameters (AmpEnv) 6-43 DegenRegen delay 9-15 Delay 9-26 Delay parameter (ASR) 6-41 Delays 9-14 DelayScale 9-14 Delete on Object Utilities page 11-13 Delete Layer soft button 6-52 Delete soft button 6-52 Deleting layers 6-52 Deleting objects 5-6 Deleting programs 6-52 Demo Songs 15-15 Density 9-13 Depth 9-24

Index-ii

Effects button 5-7 Effects bypass 5-7 Effects mode 4-3 Effects Parameters 9-12 Electrical grounding 2-2 Enable MIDI channels 10-13 Enable parameter (Layer) 6-19 Enable Sense parameter (Layer) 6-19 Enhancers 9-16 Env Rate 9-21 Env Time 9-18 ENV2 and ENV3 pages (Program Editor) 6-44 ENVCTL page (Program Editor) 6-45 Envelope control 6-45 Envelope control parameters 6-46 Envelope Filter 9-20 Envelopes 6-42, 6-44 EQ Morpher 9-16 EQ page (Program Editor) 6-69 EQs 9-15 Equalizers 9-15 Erase Song Mode TRACK Page 12-24 EVENT Page Song Mode 12-31 Everything loading objects as 13-11 EXIT button 3-8 Exit values 7-30 Exp Atk 9-17 Exp Ratio 9-17 Exp Rel 9-17 Exp Threshold 9-17 Expander 9-16 Expanse 9-13 Expansion 9-17 Export MIDI file, Program Info, Chain Info 13-13 Extended sample loop 14-10 External sequencer 12-2 External Tempo Source 7-65

Flanger 9-19 Formatting a xD Card 13-13 Freeze Pedal parameter (Layer) 6-20 FreqScale 9-16 Front panel navigation 3-6 FUN page (Program Editor) 6-41 Function soft buttons 6-51 fuses C-1 FX bypass 5-7 FX Mode on Master Mode MAIN page 11-2

G
Gate Time 9-17 Gated Ducking Delay 9-15 Gates 9-16 General MIDI 11-11 Drum Remap 6-33, 11-2 Globals parameter (Common Page) 6-37 Globals parameter (Common) 6-60 Grab Song Mode TRACK Page 12-29 Graphic equalizer 9-15 Grounding 2-2

H
Half Wts 9-25 Hard reset 11-16 Headroom 9-19 HF Damping parameter 9-12 Hi Beam W 9-22 Hi Fast 9-23 Hi Gain 9-22 Hi Res Delay 9-22 Hi Size 9-22 Hi Slow 9-23 Hi Trem 9-22 HiAccelCrv 9-23 HiFst>Slow 9-23 High Key parameter (Layer) 6-18 High Velocity parameter (Layer) 6-18 Highpass 9-21 HiMic A 9-22 HiMic B 9-22 HiResonate 9-22 HiResXcurs 9-23 HiSlow>Fst 9-23 HiSpinDir 9-23 Hold 9-14 Hold Through Attack parameter (Layer) 6-21 Hold Until Decay parameter (Layer) 6-21

F
favorite programs Category buttons 3-4 FB2/FB1>FB 9-14 Fdbk Dly 9-14 Fdbk Image 9-15 Fdbk Level 9-14, 9-18 FdbkComprs 9-16 Files Everything 13-6 Loading 5-6 Master 13-6 Saving 5-6 Fill Mode 13-10 Filter Type 9-20 Filters 9-20 Finding objects 3-12 Fine adjust 6-25

I
ID Entry Master mode MAIN page 11-2 ID#s 15-6 Ignore release 6-20 ImageWidth 9-24 Impact parameter (EnvCtl) 6-47

Index-iii

Import Layer soft button 6-52 Importing layers 6-52 In Select 9-25 In/Out parameter 9-12 InfinDecay 9-13 Info Export 13-13 INFO Editor 6-51 INFO soft button Program Editor 6-51 Info soft button 2-8, 6-2, 8-2 Insert Song Mode TRACK Page 12-26 Intonation key 11-8 Intonation tables 11-7 Introduction to editing 5-1 Intuitive data entry 3-11

K
K series object conversion E-1 K2600 bank mode 7-7 KB3 1-3, 2-8, 6-4, 6-6, 6-59 Polyphony 6-60 KB3 channel 6-6 KB3 programs 2-8, 6-6 Key range 14-3 Key tracking 6-25 Key tracking parameter (EnvCtl) 6-46 Key Tracking parameter (Keymap) 6-14 Key/Velocity (KEY/VEL) Page 7-9 Keyboard naming 5-5 KEYCLK page (Program Editor) 6-65 Keymap 14-7 Keymap Editor 14-1 Assign sample 14-6 New range 14-5 Keymap Editor Parameters 14-3 KEYMAP page (Program Editor) 6-14 Keymap parameter (Keymap) 6-14 Keymap parameters 6-16 Keymaps 6-4 Keymaps, stereo 6-15 KSP8 effects D-21 KVA Oscillators 6-53

L
L Diff Dly 9-14 L/R Phase 9-18, 9-24 L/R Pre Dly 9-13 LaserVerb 9-19 Late Lvl 9-13 LateRvbTim 9-13 Layer delay control 6-18 LAYER page (Program Editor) 6-17 Layer parameters 6-186-21 Layers Adding 6-52 Deleting 6-52

Duplicating 6-52 Importing 6-52 moving between in multi-layer programs 3-11 Muting 5-7 LCD 3-6 Legacy object conversion E-1 Legato play parameter (Common) 6-36 Leslie effect 9-22 LFO Dpth 9-18 LFO Filter 9-21 LFO LRPhs 9-18 LFO page (Program Editor) 6-38 LFO parameters 6-39 LFO Phase 9-24 LFO PlsWid 9-21, 9-24 LFO Rate 9-18, 9-24 LFO Shape 9-21, 9-24 LFO Smooth 9-21 LFOs 6-38, 6-40 Line cord 2-2 Lo Beam W 9-22 Lo Fast 9-23 Lo Gain 9-22 Lo Mode 9-23 Lo Res Dly 9-22 Lo Size 9-22 Lo Slow 9-23 Lo Trem 9-22 LoAccelCrv 9-23 Loading files 5-6 Loading Individual Objects 13-9 Lock parameters 10-14 LoFst>Slow 9-23 LoMic A 9-22 LoMic B 9-22 Loop Switch Sample Editor 14-11 Loop Type parameter (AmpEnv) 6-44 Looping samples 6-16 Loops 15-15 LoResonate 9-22 LoResXcurs 9-23 LoSlow>Fst 9-23 LoSpinDir 9-23 Low Key parameter (Layer) 6-18 Low Velocity parameter (Layer) 6-18 LP Freq 9-22 Lvl 9-22

M
Main Page Master Mode 11-1 MakeUp Gain 9-17 MakeUpGain 9-17 Master button 5-7 Master files 13-6 Master mode 4-3 Master Table 11-17 Master Transpose 11-2 Max Freq 9-20, 9-21

Index-iv

Maximum delay parameter (Layer) 6-19 Maximum Rate parameter (LFO) 6-39 Memory cards 2-6 Memory objects 5-4 metronome 15-4 count off options 15-5 Mic Angle 9-23 Mid Freq 9-15 Mid Gain 9-15 Mid Width 9-15 MIDI About MIDI 15-1 All Notes Off 10-6 Basic channel 10-6 Channel enable 10-13 Pan 10-14 Parameter locks 10-14 Program change formats 10-15 Receive mode 10-6 Reset channels 10-18 Transmit parameters 10-1 Utilities 11-15 Volume 10-14 MIDI channel 10-2 MIDI channel parameters 10-13 MIDI connections 2-3 MIDI disconnected 13-1 MIDI file export 13-13 Load 13-1 MIDI Implementation Chart A-1 MIDI Machine Control 12-8 MIDI mode 4-3 Soft buttons 10-18 MIDI program changes 10-4 MIDI Receive page 10-9 MIDI Receive parameters 10-5 MIDI sequence Load, Save, Export 12-8 MIDI Thru/Out switch 2-3 MIDI Time Clock 12-2 Min Freq 9-20, 9-21 Minimum delay parameter (Layer) 6-19 Minimum Rate parameter (LFO) 6-39 MISC page (Program Editor) 6-67 Miscellaneous (MISC) 14-9 MMC 12-8 Mod Mode 9-25 Mod Wheel 3-5 Mode buttons 3-2 Mode parameter (ASR) 6-40 Mode selection 3-1, 4-1 Modes 4-1 Program 6-1 Modes, using 4-2 Modulator ring modulation 9-25 Momentary switch type 7-31 Mono sound systems 2-2 Monophonic parameter (Common) 6-35 Monophonic programs 6-35

Monster Truck radio spots 9-15 Morph A>B 9-16 MPressure 7-20 MTC 12-2 Multiband Compression 9-17 Multitap delays 9-14 Multi-velocity keymaps 14-4 Mute Effects Box 5-7 MuteZn 7-24 Muting layers 5-7 Muting Setup zones 5-7

N
Name soft button 6-52 Naming 15-6 Naming objects using the keyboard 5-5 Natural amplitude envelope 6-42 Navigation 3-6 New Layer soft button 6-52 Noise generator 6-16 Non-harmonic overtones creating with ring modulator 9-25 Note triggering 6-18 Number of loops parameter (AmpEnv) 6-44 Numeric Entry Master mode MAIN page 11-2 Numeric entry 3-9

O
Object type and ID 5-2 Objects 5-1 Deleting 5-6 loading individually 13-9 Master Mode Delete 11-13 Master Mode Rename 11-13 Naming 5-3 RAM 5-2, 5-4 Renaming 5-3 ROM 5-2, 5-4 Octav 6-2, 8-2 Odd Wts 9-25 Opaque parameter (Layer) 6-20 Origin 9-24 OS Version 11-17 Osc1 Freq 9-25 Osc1 Lvl 9-25 Osc1 Shape 9-25 Osc1PlsWid 9-25 Osc1Smooth 9-25 Oscillators 6-53 Out Gain parameter 9-12 OUTPUT page (Program Editor: KB3) 6-70 Output settings In Setup Mode 7-6 In Song Mode 12-12 Overview 1-3

Index-v

P
Pages 3-6 AMP (KB3) 6-62 AMPENV (Amplitude envelope) 6-42 ASR (Attack, Sustain, Release) 6-40 DRAWBR 6-61 ENV2 and ENV3 (Envelopes) 6-44 ENVCTL (Envelope control) 6-45 EQ 6-69 FUN (Attack, Sustain, Release) 6-41 KEYCLK 6-65 KEYMAP 6-14 LAYER 6-17 LFO 6-38 MIDI CHANLS 10-13 MIDI RECV 10-5 MIDI XMIT 10-1 MISC 6-67 OUTPUT (KB3) 6-70 PERC 6-63 PERC2 6-64 PITCH (KB3) 6-62 TONEWL 6-59 Pair Wts 9-25 Pan 9-22, 9-26 MIDI 10-14 Pan lock 10-14 Pan Mode parameter (Output) 6-32 Pan parameter (Output) 6-32 Pan Width 9-24 Panic button 2-8, 6-2, 10-18 Parameter locks 10-14 Parameters AmpEnv 6-436-44 ASR 6-406-41 Common 6-356-60 Envelope control 6-46 Layer 6-186-21 LFO 6-39 Parametric equalizer 9-15 Path 13-3 PC3 Features 1-2 PC3 Overview 1-3 PC361 1-1 PC3x 1-1 PCH 10-16 Pedals 2-4 pedals 1-5 PERC page (Program Editor: KB3) 6-62 PERC page (Program Editor) 6-63 PERC2 page (Program Editor) 6-64 Phase parameter (LFO) 6-39 Pitch 9-25 Pitch Bend Mode parameter (Layer) 6-18 Pitch Bend Range parameter (Common) 6-35 PITCH page (Program Editor: KB3) 6-62 Pitch Wheel 3-5 Play/Pause button with Easy Audition 2-7 Playback loops 6-16

Playback Mode parameter (Keymap) 6-16 Plus/Minus buttons 3-9 Polydistort 9-22 Polyphony 6-4, 11-15 KB3 6-60 Portamento click 6-36, 6-37 Portamento parameter (Common) 6-36 Portamento Rate parameter (Common) 6-36 Pos 9-22 Power cable 2-2 Pre Dly 9-13 Pre-Delay 9-13 Pressure (Press) Page Setup Mode 7-35 Pressure Map Master 11-6 MIDI Receive 10-8 MIDI Transmit 10-4 Preview Sample (PRVIEW) 11-17 PrgChgMode 10-6 Program buttons 3-4, 5-7 Program change formats 10-15 Program change mode 10-6 Program changes Extended 10-15 MIDI 10-4 Quick Access mode 8-1 Program Editor AMP page (KB3) 6-62 AMPENV page 6-42 ASR page 6-40 DRAWBR page 6-61 ENV2 and ENV3 pages 6-44 ENVCTL page 6-45 EQ page 6-69 FUN page 6-41 KEYCLK page 6-65 KEYMAP page 6-14 LAYER page 6-17 LFO page 6-38 MISC page 6-67 OUTPUT page (KB3) 6-70 PERC page 6-63 PERC2 page 6-64 PITCH page (KB3) 6-62 Soft buttons 6-12 TONEWL page 6-59 Program Info Export 13-13 Program lock 10-14 Program mode 4-2, 6-1 Soft buttons 6-2 Program mode page 6-1 Program output settings In Setup Mode 7-6 Programs D-1 Adding layers 6-52 Deleting 6-52 Deleting layers 6-52 Duplicating layers 6-52 Editing (KB3) 6-59

Index-vi

Editing (VAST) 6-12 Importing layers 6-52 KB3 2-8, 6-6 Renaming 6-52 Saving 6-52 selecting 2-7 VAST 2-8, 6-4 Ptch Offst 9-25 Pulse Width 9-21, 9-24 punching in 15-9 Punctuation 5-3

Q
Quantize Song Mode TRACK Page 12-27 Quantize + Flange 9-19 Quantizing 15-15 Quartr Wts 9-25 Quick Access bank program changes 10-16 Quick Access button 5-7 Quick Access Editor 8-1 Quick Access mode 2-9, 4-3

Ribbon 2-5 Playing note patterns 7-26 ribbon 1-5 Ribbon Configuration (RIBCFG) Page 7-40 RIBBON Page 7-40 Riffs 7-55 Ring Modulation 9-25 ROM objects 5-4 ROM objects, saving 5-2 Room Type 9-13 Root Key Sample Editor 14-10 Rotating Speakers 9-22 Roto InOut 9-22 Rvrb Time 9-13

S
Sample Automatic Preview in a Program 11-17 Sample Editor 14-7, 14-9 Samples Adjusting volume 14-4 Assigning to keymaps 14-3 Playback mode 6-16 Tuning 14-4 Save dialog 5-3 Save soft button 6-52 Saving Naming 15-6 Rename 15-6 Song Mode 15-5 Saving and namingObjects Saving 5-3 Saving files 5-6 Saving Master and Everything Files 13-6 Saving objects RAM 5-4 ROM 5-4 Saving programs 6-52 Saving RAM objects 5-2 Saving ROM objects 5-2 SC Input 9-17 Search function 3-12 Select soft button 13-12 Selecting modes 3-1, 4-1 Selecting parameters 3-6 Selecting programs and setups 2-7 Sequencer tutorial 12-1 sequencer 15-1 Set drawbars 6-62 Setup Compare Editor 7-3 Setup button 5-7 Setup Editor 7-3 Delete Soft Button 7-68 Delete Zone (DelZn) Soft Button 7-68 Duplicate Zone (DupZn) Soft Button 7-68 Import Zone (ImpZn) Soft Button 7-68 Local Program (LocalPrg) 7-4

R
R Diff Dl 9-14 RAM objects 5-2, 5-4 Rate Control parameter (LFO) 6-39 Rate Scale 9-24 Ratio 9-17 Real-time Control of Arpeggiator Parameters 7-53 Rear panel output settings In Setup Mode 7-6 In Song Mode 12-12 Recording Overview 15-1 Recording songs 3-12 Region/Criteria window Song mode 12-21 Rel Rate 9-20, 9-21 Rel Time 9-16 Release 9-17 Release parameter (ASR) 6-41 Release Time and Level parameters (AmpEnv) 6-43 Releasing ASRs 6-40 Remap Song Mode TRACK Page 12-31 Rename 15-6 Renaming objects 5-3 with Rename utility 11-13 Renaming programs 6-52 Repeating ASRs 6-40 Reset hard 11-16 Reset MIDI channels 10-18 ResH/LPhs 9-23 Resonance 9-20 Resonant Filter 9-20 Retrigger 9-18, 9-21 Reverb types 9-13 Reversing samples 6-16

Index-vii

Name Soft Button 7-68 New Zone (NewZn) Soft Button 7-68 Soft buttons 7-68 Setup Mode ARPEGIATOR Page 7-42 Channel/Program (CH/PROG) Page 7-4 Pressure (Press) Page 7-35 Ribbon Configuration (RIBCFG) Page 7-40 RIBBON Page 7-40 WHEEL Page 7-32 Setup mode 4-2, 7-1 Setup Mode analog output settings 7-6 Setups 2-9 Aux Bend 1 7-19 Aux Bend 2 7-19 BEND Page 7-18 Bend Range 7-18 COMMON Page 7-65 Continuous Control Pedal (CPEDAL) Page 7-34 Continuous Controller Parameters 7-29 Controllers 7-19 Curve (Curv) 7-29 Destination 7-5 Destination (Dest) 7-29 Entry (Ent) and Exit States 7-31 Entry Pan, Exit Pan 7-17 Entry values 7-30 Entry Volume, Exit Volume 7-17 Footswitch (FOOTSW) Page 7-36 Low and high key 7-10 Low Velocity (LoVel), HighVelocity (HiVel) 7-16 MIDI Bank 7-4, 7-5 MIDI Bank Mode 7-7 MIDI channel 7-5 MIDI Controller Destination List 7-21 Muting zones 5-7 Note Maps 7-10 Off Value 7-31 Offset (Add) 7-29 On Value 7-31 Pan/Volume (PAN/VOL) Page 7-17 physical controllers 7-20 RIBBON Page 7-39 Save Soft Button 7-68 Scale 7-29 selecting 2-7 SLIDER and SLID/2 Pages 7-33 Status 7-6 Switch controllers 7-30 SWITCH Page 7-37, 7-38 Switch Type (SwType) 7-31 Transpose 7-10 Transposing 7-1 Velocity Curve 7-14 Velocity Offset 7-12 Velocity Scale (VelScale) 7-11 Zone Arpeggiation 7-8 Setups Object List D-13 Shape parameter parameter (LFO) 6-39 Shift Song Mode TRACK Page 12-28

Shift Key Number, Shift Key (ShKeyNum, ShiftKey) 7-26 Shift Pattern (ShiftPatt) 7-47 Shifting notes in the Arpeggiator 7-46 Signal Delay 9-17 Signal Dly 9-16 Signal-to-noise ratio 2-5 Size Scale 9-13 Sliders 3-3, 7-20 SmartMedia 13-2 Smooth 9-17 Smooth Rate 9-20 SmoothTime 9-16 Smth Rate 9-21 Soft buttons 3-7 Keymap Editor 14-5 MIDI mode 10-18 in Program Editor 6-12 in Program Mode 6-2 Sample Editor 14-11 Setup Editor 7-68 Special functions 6-51 Software Upgrades 2-10 Soloing a zone 7-3 Song Export 13-13 Song button 5-7 Song Editor 12-19 TRACK Page 12-21 Song Mode 12-1, 15-1 Demo Songs 15-15 Loops 15-15 Program Changes 15-16 Song Structure 15-16 The Event List 15-16 Song mode 4-3 Songs Recording 3-12 Sostenuto Pedal parameter (Layer) 6-20 sound ROM expansion option 1-5 Source 1 6-26 Source and Depth parameters (EnvCtl) 6-46 Spacing 9-19 Special button functions 5-7 Special-function soft buttons 6-51 Specifications A-2 Spectral Multitap Delays 9-15 Speed 9-23 Start Point Sample Editor 14-12 Startup 2-1 StatDlyLvl 9-19 Stereo parameter (Keymap) 6-15 Stereo simulation 9-25 Sustain not working 10-6 Sustain Pedal parameter (Layer) 6-20 Sustaining ASRs 6-40 SW button 3-5 Sweep 9-20 switch pedals 1-5 Sync In 2-3

Index-viii

System Exclusive ID 10-8

T
Tap Dly 9-18 Tap Lvl 9-18 Tap Pan 9-18 Tap Pitch 9-15 Tap PtAmt 9-15 Tap Shapr 9-15 Tap Tempo 11-10, 15-3 Tap types in Multitap delays 9-14 Tapn Bal 9-14 Tapn Level 9-14 Tempo 15-3 Master 11-10 Song mode - Tempo Track 12-33 Tap Tempo 11-10 Tap Tempo function 15-3 Threshold 9-17 Thru/Out switch 2-3 Timbre Shift parameter (Keymap) 6-16 time signature 15-3 Time Stamp 11-16 Toggle switch type 7-31 TONEWL page (Program Editor) 6-59 Top line of display 3-6 Track output settings (Song Mode) 12-12 TRACK Page Song Editor 12-21 Transpose Master 11-2 MIDI 10-2 Song Mode TRACK Page 12-28 Transpose parameter (Keymap) 6-14 Transposing setups 7-1 Treb Freq 9-15 Treb Gain 9-15 Tremolo 9-24 Trig Filt 9-20 Trig parameter (Layer) 6-18 Trigger 9-20 Trigger parameter (ASR) 6-40 Triggered Filter 9-20 Triggering notes on startup 6-18 TRIM 14-12 Tuning samples 14-4 Tuning to other instruments 11-2

VAST 1-3 VAST program structure 6-4 VAST programs 2-8, 6-4 Velocity Map MIDI Receive 10-7 MIDI Transmit 10-3 Velocity Range 14-4 Velocity tracking 6-25 Velocity tracking parameter (EnvCtl) 6-46 Velocity tracking parameter (Keymap) 6-15 Vib/Chor 9-23 VibChInOut 9-23 Vibrato/Chorus 9-23 virtual drive USB Storage Mode 2-6 Voice allocation 11-15 Voice channels 6-4 Voltage changing C-1 Voltage levels 2-2 Volume MIDI 10-14 Volume lock 10-14

W
Warmth 9-21 Waveform display 14-12 Wet Bal 9-13 Wet/Dry 9-25 Wet/Dry parameter 9-12 WHEEL Page Setup Mode 7-32 World-Wide Web 2-10

X
XCouple parameter 9-12 Xcrs Fin 9-19 Xcurs Crs 9-19 xD Card formatting 13-13 xD Cards 13-2 xD memory cards 1-4, 2-6 Xfer 9-16 XMIT page 10-1 Xover 9-22 Xpose 2-8, 6-2, 8-2 X-Pro 1-1

U
USB MIDI disconnected 13-1 USB Port 2-6 User amplitude envelope 6-42 Using the modes 4-2

Z
Zero-crossings 14-13 Zone output settings (Setup Mode) 7-6 Zone status LEDs 7-2 Zones Soloing 7-3

V
VA-1 Programs 1-3 Variable Architecture Synthesis 1-3

Index-ix

Index-x